JP7277497B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that executes games.

Patent Literature 1 describes a pachinko machine in which different jackpot probabilities are set according to set values.

JP-A-5-285258

In recent years, only similar gaming machines have been proposed, and novel gaming machines are desired. This point is the same for pachinko machines and slot machines.

Accordingly, an object of the present invention is to provide a novel gaming machine.

The present invention employs the following solutions to solve the above problems. It should be noted that the following solutions and words in parentheses are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited to these. Further, the present invention can be an invention that includes at least one of the invention-specifying matters shown in the following means for solving the problem. Furthermore, each of the matters specifying the invention shown in the following solutions can be converted into a higher-level concept by adding elements that limit the matters specifying the invention, or by deleting elements that limit the matters specifying the invention. .

[Basic configuration of management game machine]
Solution 1: The gaming machine of this solution comprises a main control board, a frame control board capable of communicating with the main control board, and communication control means enabling communication between the frame control board and an external unit. It is a game machine.

The gaming machine of this solving means has the following configuration.
(1) A main control board is provided. A main control CPU is mounted on the main control board.

(2) A frame control board is provided that can communicate with the main control board of (1) above. A frame control CPU is mounted on the frame control board.

(3) Equipped with communication control means (dedicated interface, dedicated cable, and accompanying devices, substrates, circuits, CPU, software, and programs) that enable communication between the frame control board and an external unit (dedicated unit).

According to this solution means, since the frame control board and the external unit are provided with the communication control means for enabling communication, the frame control board can exchange information (signals) with the external unit, resulting in , can provide innovative gaming machines.

[(1) Configuration of Ball Pulling Operation]
Solution Means (1)-1: The game machine of this solution means comprises a main control board, a frame control board capable of communicating with the main control board, and connected to the frame control board, and taking out a game medium from the game machine. a display device capable of displaying the number of game media; a power supply is turned on while pressing the ejection button; In the gaming machine, the game machine comprises a take-out state transition means for enabling a shift to the take-out state in the case of display contents.

The gaming machine of this solving means has the following configuration.
(1) A main control board is provided. A main control CPU is mounted on the main control board.

(2) A frame control board is provided that can communicate with the main control board of (1) above. A frame control CPU is mounted on the frame control board.

(3) It is connected to the frame control board of (2) above, and serves as a trigger for transition to a take-out state (ball removing operation, medal removing operation) in which game media (game balls, game medals) can be removed from the gaming machine. Ejection buttons (ball ejection button, ball ejection switch, medal ejection button, medal ejection button) are provided.

(4) A display device capable of displaying the number of game media (display device for the number of game balls, etc.) is provided.
(5) Turn on the power while pressing the eject button of (3) above, and display content of the display device of (4) above is special display content (for example, the number of game media = 0, the number of game media =predetermined fixed value, numerical value within a predetermined range, etc.), a take-out state transition means (main control board, frame control board) is provided to enable a shift to the take-out state.

According to this solving means, it is possible to shift to the take-out state (ball extraction operation) under appropriate conditions, and as a result, it is possible to provide a novel gaming machine.

[(2) Structure 2 of ball extraction operation]
Solution Means (2)-1: The game machine of this solution means comprises a main control board, a frame control board capable of communicating with the main control board, and connected to the frame control board, and taking out a game medium from the game machine. a take-out button that triggers a transition to a take-out state in which the main control board can be removed; , during the take-out state, when information indicating that the take-out state is in progress is received from the frame control board through communication with the frame control board when the power is turned on, the game is played until the power is turned off. The game machine is characterized by being able to shift to a game stop state in which the game is stopped.

The gaming machine of this solving means has the following configuration.
(1) A main control board is provided. A main control CPU is mounted on the main control board.

(2) A frame control board is provided that can communicate with the main control board of (1) above. A frame control CPU is mounted on the frame control board.

(3) It is connected to the frame control board of (2) above, and serves as a trigger for transition to a take-out state (ball removing operation, medal removing operation) in which game media (game balls, game medals) can be removed from the gaming machine. Ejection buttons (ball ejection button, ball ejection switch, medal ejection button, medal ejection button) are provided.

(4) Ejection state transition means (main control board, frame control board) is provided to enable transition to an ejection state when the power is turned on while pressing the ejection button of (3) above.

(5) The main control board of (1) above is in the state of being removed from the frame control board of above (2) by communication with the frame control board of above (2) when the power is turned on. is received, it is possible to shift to a game stop state in which the game is stopped until the power is turned off.

According to this solving means, the main control board can be controlled in an appropriate state during the taking-out state (during the ball-pulling operation), and as a result, a novel gaming machine can be provided.

[(3) Structure of spare area and reserved area of electronic message]
Solution Means (3)-1: A game machine of this solution means includes a main control board and a frame control board capable of communicating with the main control board using a predetermined electronic message, and the predetermined electronic message is sent to the game machine. The game machine information includes preliminary information for expansion, and regarding the preliminary information, even if a value other than the initial value is stored, it is treated as an error on the receiving side. It is a game machine characterized by not handling.

The gaming machine of this solving means has the following configuration.
(1) A main control board is provided. A main control CPU is mounted on the main control board.

(2) A frame control board is provided that can communicate with the main control board of (1) above using a predetermined message (command, information, notification). A frame control CPU is mounted on the frame control board.

(3) The predetermined message in (2) above includes gaming machine information indicating information about the gaming machine.
(4) The gaming machine information of (3) above includes preliminary information for expansion.
(5) Regarding the preliminary information in (4) above, even if a value other than the initial value is stored, it is not handled as an error on the receiving side (at least one of the main control board and the frame control board).

According to this solving means, it is possible to compose a message that can deal with future specification changes, and to execute not excessive error handling, and as a result, it is possible to provide a novel game machine.

[(4) Composition of the serial number of the electronic message]
Solution Means (4)-1: A game machine of this solution means comprises a main control board and a frame control board capable of communicating with the main control board and an external unit using a predetermined telegram, wherein the frame control board is creating a telegram to be transmitted to the external unit when communicating with the external unit, the telegram includes an independent serial number for each type of telegram, and the frame control board communicates with the external unit; is initialized to 0 when the power is turned on, and if the electronic message is created normally, the serial number of the previously notified message of the same type + 1; This is a game machine characterized in that it is set to 1.

The gaming machine of this solving means has the following configuration.
(1) A main control board is provided. A main control CPU is mounted on the main control board.

(2) A frame control board is provided which can communicate with the main control board and the external unit (dedicated unit) of (1) above using a predetermined telegram. A frame control CPU is mounted on the frame control board.

(3) The frame control board of (2) above creates a message to be sent to the external unit when communicating with the external unit.
(4) The electronic message includes an independent serial number (serial number) for each type of electronic message.

(5) The serial number used when the frame control board communicates with the external unit is initialized to 0 when the power is turned on. If the notified serial number is the maximum value (for example, 255), it is set to 1, which is the serial number +2.

According to this solving means, the serial number is configured to be "0" only when the power is turned on, and can be distinguished from the serial number used at other timings, so as a result, it is possible to provide a novel game machine. can.

Solution (4)-2: The gaming machine of the present solution means, in any one of the above-described solution means, wherein the main control board transmits to the frame control board when communicating with the frame control board A message is created, the message includes an independent serial number for each type of message, the serial number when the main control board communicates with the frame control board is initialized to 0 when power is turned on, and the message is normally created. The game machine is characterized in that the serial number of the telegram of the same type notified last time is set to +1 when it is notified, and the serial number is set to 0 which is the serial number +1 when the serial number notified last time is the maximum value.

In this solution, the following features are added.
(1) The main control board creates a message to be sent to the frame control board when communicating with the frame control board.
(2) The electronic message includes an independent serial number for each type of electronic message.
(3) When the main control board communicates with the frame control board, the serial number is initialized to 0 when the power is turned on, and when the message is normally created, the serial number of the message of the same type notified last time + 1, If the previously notified serial number is the maximum value (for example, 255), it is set to 0, which is the serial number +1.

According to this solving means, since the serial number is "0" even when the power is turned on, more serial numbers can be used, and as a result, a novel gaming machine can be provided.

[(5) Configuration of Display Device for Number of Game Balls, etc.]
Solution Means (5)-1: The gaming machine of the present solution means comprises storage means capable of storing the number of game media in a predetermined number of bytes. The gaming machine is characterized in that an upper limit number is set, and the predetermined upper limit number is a number smaller than the maximum number that can be stored in the predetermined number of bytes.

The gaming machine of this solving means has the following configuration.
(1) Storage means (game ball number display device, game medal number display device) capable of storing the number of game media (game balls, game medals) in a predetermined number of bytes is provided. When treated as data, the game media and the number of game media can be interpreted as the game value or the amount of the game value.
(2) A predetermined upper limit is set for the number of game media that can be stored in the storage means of (1) above.
(3) The predetermined upper limit number in (2) above is a number smaller than the maximum number that can be stored in a predetermined number of bytes.

According to this solution means, even if a goto occurs, the damage caused by the goto can be suppressed because the maximum number of damages is less than the maximum number, and as a result, a novel gaming machine can be provided. can.

[(6) Setting the Priority of Gaming Machine Information Types]
Solution (6)-1: The game machine of this solution comprises a main control board and a frame control board capable of communicating with the main control board and an external unit, and the frame control board communicates with the external unit. This game machine is characterized in that different information is transmitted in different cycles, and information with a higher priority is transmitted when the cycles overlap.

The gaming machine of this solving means has the following configuration.
(1) A main control board is provided. A main control CPU is mounted on the main control board.

(2) A frame control board capable of communicating with the main control board and the external unit (dedicated unit) of (1) above is provided. A frame control CPU is mounted on the frame control board.

(3) The frame control board of (2) above transmits different pieces of information to the external unit in different cycles, and when the cycles overlap, only one piece of information with a high priority is transmitted.

According to this solving means, it is possible to prevent troubles caused when information transmission timings overlap, and as a result, it is possible to provide a novel gaming machine.

[(7) Processing for calculating performance information]
Solution (7)-1: The game machine of this solution includes a main control board and a frame control board capable of communicating with the main control board, and the main control board is specified for the first time after power-on. command, the frame control board transmits to the frame control board performance information state notification necessary for generating performance information, and the frame control board receives the performance information state notification from the main control board. The gaming machine is characterized in that the performance information is generated based on.

The gaming machine of this solving means has the following configuration.
(1) A main control board is provided. A main control CPU is mounted on the main control board.

(2) A frame control board is provided that can communicate with the main control board of (1) above. A frame control CPU is mounted on the frame control board.

(3) The main control board of (1) above is the first specific command (for example, game machine information) after power-on, and the frame control board of (2) above is required to generate the performance information. performance information status notification to the frame control board of (2) above.

(4) The frame control board of (2) above generates performance information based on the performance information status notification received from the main control board of (1) above.

According to this solution means, the performance information can be quickly generated (calculated) by the frame control board immediately after the power is restored, and as a result, a novel gaming machine can be provided.

[(8) Dedicated cable disconnection]
Solution Means (8)-1: The game machine of this solution means has a power supply for connection confirmation input from an external unit, and when the power supply for connection confirmation is switched from ON to OFF during startup of the game machine, the game The game machine is provided with a launch control means for disabling the launch of balls.

The gaming machine of this solving means has the following configuration.
(1) A connection confirmation power supply (VL) is provided which is input from an external unit (dedicated unit).
(2) A shooting control means (main control board, frame control board) is provided to disable the shooting of game balls when the connection confirmation power supply in (1) is switched from ON to OFF while the gaming machine is running. It is

According to this solution means, the connection status with the external unit is confirmed by the power supply for connection confirmation, and if the connection cannot be confirmed, the gaming machine and the external unit are normally connected in order to disable the shooting of the game ball. It is possible to avoid the game from being executed in a state where the player is not playing, and as a result, it is possible to provide a novel gaming machine.

Solution (8)-2: In any of the above-described solution means, the game machine of the present solution means is such that the power supply for connection confirmation is switched from ON to OFF while the game machine is running, and game balls cannot be shot. The game machine is provided with working memory increasing means (main control board, frame control board, performance control board) for increasing the working memory of the symbol when the starting opening winning is performed even in the state of.

According to this solution means, even in a state where the game ball cannot be launched, the working memory of the pattern (holding displayed by the main control control board, holding displayed by the production control board) when the starting opening winning is performed ), protect the start-up winning by the game ball launched before it is disabled, and check whether the game machine is operating normally by the start-up winning by the maintenance of the staff. As a result, it is possible to provide a novel gaming machine.

[(9) Main control state 1]
Solution (9)-1: The gaming machine of this solution stores special main control state information, which is 1-byte information capable of holding up to 8 bits of bit information in which 1 bit is treated as 1 flag. 0 of the bit information can be treated as a flag OFF, 1 of the bit information can be treated as a flag ON, and the special main control state information is First specific bit information that turns on the flag during a predetermined big win, second specific bit information that turns on the flag during all the big wins, and second specific bit information that turns on the flag during the big win to shift to a predetermined state after the big win. 3 specific bit information can be held, and the special main control state information can be handled as a numerical value of 255 or less by combining a plurality of the bit information including the first to third specific bit information, When only the first specific bit information is ON, the numerical value is set to 1, and when only the second specific bit information is ON, the numerical value is set to 2, and the third specific bit When only the information is ON, it can be treated as a numerical value of 4, and has at least 1 or more unused bits, and 0 is held in the unused bits. It is a game machine that

The gaming machine of this solving means has the following configuration.
(1) A gaming machine capable of storing special main control state information (main control state 1), which is 1-byte information capable of holding up to 8 bits of bit information that treats 1 bit as 1 flag.

(2) The bit information 0 in (1) above can be treated as a flag OFF.
(3) 1 in the bit information of (1) above can be treated as a flag ON.

(4) The special main control state information of (1) above includes first specific bit information that turns the flag ON during a predetermined big hit, second specific bit information that turns the flag ON during all the big wins, and big wins. It is possible to hold the third specific bit information that turns on the flag during the big hit that shifts to a predetermined state later.

(5) The special main control state information of (1) above can be treated as a numerical value of 255 or less by combining a plurality of bit information including the first to third specific bit information. The first specific bit information can be Bit0 information, the second specific bit information can be Bit1 information, and the third specific bit information can be Bit2 information ( hereinafter the same).

(6) The special main control state information in (1) above is set to a numerical value of 1 when only the first specific bit information is ON, and when only the second specific bit information is ON. can be treated as a numerical value of 2, and if only the third specific bit information is ON, it can be treated as a numerical value of 4, respectively. holds 0. It should be noted that when a plurality of pieces of specific bit information are ON, it is preferable that numerical values can be added and handled.

According to this solution means, by collectively managing the state of the jackpot, the predetermined state, etc., the manager can easily grasp the internal state of the gaming machine, and by holding it as bit information, the capacity can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to provide a novel gaming machine.

[(10) Main control state 2]
Solution Means (10)-1: The gaming machine of this solution means stores special main control state information, which is 1-byte information capable of holding up to 8 bits of bit information in which 1 bit is treated as 1 flag. 0 of the bit information can be treated as a flag OFF, 1 of the bit information can be treated as a flag ON, and the special main control state information is First specific bit information whose flag is turned ON at least during a big hit, second specific bit information whose flag is turned ON at least while the winning probability of a special symbol lottery is high, and at least a variation time of a normal symbol or a special symbol. and a third specific bit information in which the flag is turned ON during the time shortening state in which the time is shortened, and the special main control state information includes a plurality of the above-mentioned first to third specific bit information. It can be handled as a numerical value of 255 or less depending on the combination of bit information, and when only the first specific bit information is ON, the numerical value is set to 1, and only the second specific bit information is ON. can be treated as a numerical value of 2 when only the third specific bit information is ON, and can be treated as a numerical value of 4 when only the third specific bit information is ON, and has at least one or more unused bits; The gaming machine is characterized in that 0 is held in the unused bits.

The gaming machine of this solving means has the following configuration.
(1) A gaming machine capable of storing special main control state information (main control state 2), which is 1-byte information capable of holding up to 8 bits of bit information that treats 1 bit as 1 flag.

(2) The bit information 0 in (1) above can be treated as a flag OFF.
(3) 1 in the bit information of (1) above can be treated as a flag ON.

(4) The special main control state information of (1) above includes at least the first specific bit information that turns on the flag during the big hit, and at least the second information that turns on the flag during the state where the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is high. and the third specific bit information that turns on the flag during the time shortening state in which at least the fluctuation time of the normal symbol or the special symbol is shortened.

(5) The special main control state information of (1) above can be treated as a numerical value of 255 or less by combining a plurality of bit information including the first to third specific bit information.

(6) The special main control state information in (1) above is set to a numerical value of 1 when only the first specific bit information is ON, and when only the second specific bit information is ON. can be treated as a numerical value of 2, and if only the third specific bit information is ON, it can be treated as a numerical value of 4, respectively. holds 0. It should be noted that when a plurality of pieces of specific bit information are ON, it is preferable that numerical values can be added and handled.

According to this solution, by collectively managing various internal states, it becomes easier for the administrator to grasp the internal state of the game machine, and holding it as bit information reduces the capacity, resulting in novelty. It is possible to provide a game machine that

[(11) Game ball count display device]
Solution Means (11)-1: The game machine of the present solution means is provided with a display device capable of displaying the number of game media, wherein the display device displays the maximum number of game media during one business hour. The game machine is characterized by being able to display a value exceeding the maximum number of possible game media.

The gaming machine of this solving means has the following configuration.
(1) A game machine provided with a display device (display device for game balls, etc.) capable of displaying the number of game media.
(2) The maximum value that can be displayed is the maximum amount of game media that can be obtained during one business hour (about 12 to 15 hours for normal business, about 36 to 40 hours for special business). A value (for example, 500,000 to 999,999, preferably 990,000) that exceeds the number (for example, assuming that there are 10,000 shots per hour on average, maximum 10,000 shots x maximum 40 hours = 400,000) can be displayed. be.

According to this solving means, even if a player obtains a game profit that greatly deviates from the average probability when playing a game for a long time, it is possible to prevent a situation in which display on the display device becomes impossible. As a result, it is possible to provide a novel gaming machine.

[(12) Game ball (number of medals) clear switch]
Solution (12)-1: The gaming machine of this solution includes a main control board, a frame control board capable of communicating with the main control board and capable of storing backup information, and a frame control board connected to the frame control board. The gaming machine comprises a predetermined switch and initialization means for initializing the backup information when the predetermined switch is operated by a predetermined operation.

The gaming machine of this solving means has the following configuration.
(1) A main control board is provided. A main control CPU is mounted on the main control board.

(2) A frame control board is provided which is capable of communicating with the main control board of (1) above and capable of storing backup information relating to game media. A frame control CPU is mounted on the frame control board.

(3) A predetermined switch (game ball clear switch) connected to the frame control board of (2) above is provided. The predetermined switch is a switch other than the RAM clear switch for clearing backup information related to game information.

(4) When a predetermined switch is operated by a predetermined operation (for example, when the power is turned on while pressing the game ball clear switch), initialization processing executing means (frame control substrate) is provided. It should be noted that the frame control board can back up backup information relating to game media.

According to this solution means, by operating a predetermined switch, it is possible to individually initialize the backup information related to the game media (only the backup information related to the game media can be initialized without operating the RAM clear switch). ), and as a result, it is possible to provide a novel gaming machine.

[(13) CM start confirmation]
Solution Means (13)-1: The game machine of this solution means has a power supply for connection confirmation input from an external unit, and when the power supply for connection confirmation is not turned on after the game machine has been started, the game ball is turned on. The gaming machine is provided with a launch control means for disabling the launch.

The gaming machine of this solving means has the following configuration.
(1) A connection confirmation power supply (VL) is provided which is input from an external unit (dedicated unit).
(2) A shooting control means (main control board, frame control board) is provided for disabling the shooting of game balls when the connection confirmation power supply of (1) above is not turned ON after the game machine has been started up. there is

According to this solution means, when the gaming machine is activated while the external unit is not activated, the game ball cannot be shot, so that the game is executed in the state where the external unit is not activated. As a result, it is possible to provide a novel gaming machine.

Solution (13)-2: In any of the above-described solution means, the game machine of the present solution means is such that the power supply for connection confirmation is not turned ON after the completion of the start of the game machine, and the game ball cannot be shot. The game machine is characterized by comprising symbol variation means (main control board, frame control board) for starting variation of symbols when a game ball enters a starting hole even in the above state.

According to this solution means, even in a state where the game ball is disabled, if the game ball enters the starting hole, the pattern is started to change, so that the game ball is launched before the game ball is disabled. It is possible to change the pattern by winning a start-up prize with a game ball, and to check whether the game machine is operating normally or not by winning a start-up prize by a staff member. As a result, a novel game machine is provided. can do.

[(14) Game information]
Solution Means (14)-1: The gaming machine of this solution means comprises a main control board, a frame control board capable of communicating with the main control board using a predetermined telegram, and a connection confirmation power supply input from an external unit. wherein the predetermined electronic message includes game information indicating game information, the game information includes type information and count information corresponding to the type information, and the type information is winning or The count information is information representing the number or number of times corresponding to the type information, and the type information and the count information are information in a one-to-one correspondence. Information is not held more than the other information, and in the game information, when a start-up win occurs, a numerical value corresponding to the start-up win is set in the upper 4 bits of the type information, and the type information A numerical value corresponding to the position of the winning starting opening is set in the lower 4 bits, a numerical value corresponding to the number of prize balls at the time of winning the starting opening is set in the upper 4 bits of the count information, and a numerical value corresponding to the number of winning balls is set in the lower 4 bits of the count information. A value corresponding to the number of winnings is set, and the game information is created in plurality corresponding to the number of occurrences when the starter winning occurs multiple times within a predetermined period, and the connection confirmation power supply is turned on when the game machine is started up. is OFF, a state in which game balls cannot be shot is maintained until the connection confirmation power source is turned ON. When the connection confirmation power supply is switched from ON to OFF, the state in which the game balls cannot be shot is maintained until the connection confirmation power supply is turned ON. The game machine is characterized in that the cycle of the predetermined message transmitted periodically is allowed to deviate from the cycle by a predetermined numerical value or less.

The gaming machine of this solving means has the following configuration.
(1) A main control board is provided. A main control CPU is mounted on the main control board.
(2) A frame control board is provided that can communicate with the main control board of (1) above using a predetermined telegram. A frame control CPU is mounted on the frame control board.
(3) A connection confirmation power supply is provided which is input from an external unit (dedicated unit).

(4) The predetermined electronic message of (2) above includes game information indicating game information.
(5) The game information of (4) above includes type information and count information corresponding to the type information.

(6) The type information of (5) above is information representing the occurrence of a prize (winning a prize in a prize winning opening) or passing (starting gate, passing through a specific area).

(7) The count information of (5) above is information representing the number or number of times corresponding to the type information of (6) above.

(8) The type information and the count information are information in one-to-one correspondence, and one type of information is never held more than the other type of information.

(9) In the game information, if a start-up win has occurred since the previous telegram transmission, a numerical value corresponding to the start-up win is set in the high-order 4 bits of the type information, and the low-order 4 bits of the type information have been won. A numerical value corresponding to the position of the starting point is set, a numerical value corresponding to the number of prize balls at the start point winning is set in the upper 4 bits of the count information, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes is set in the lower 4 bits of the count information. set.

(10) A plurality of pieces of game information are created corresponding to the number of occurrences when the start-up winning occurs multiple times within a predetermined period. Until the power is turned on, the state in which the game ball cannot be shot is maintained, but the message containing the game information is sent periodically, and the power for connection confirmation is switched from ON to OFF after the game machine is started up. In this case, a state in which game balls cannot be shot is maintained until the power supply for connection confirmation is turned on, but a predetermined electronic message including game information is periodically transmitted.

(11) The cycle of a predetermined electronic message that is periodically transmitted is allowed to deviate by a predetermined numerical value or less.

According to this solving means, it is possible to grasp the detailed game information of the game machine, and as a result, it is possible to provide a novel game machine.

Solution Means (14)-2: The game machine of the present solution means, in any of the above-described solution means, even if the power supply for connection confirmation is OFF when the game machine is started, when the start-up winning is performed The working memory of the pattern can be increased at the same time, and even if the power supply for connection confirmation is switched from ON to OFF after the game machine is started, the working memory can be increased when the start winning is performed. A game machine characterized by comprising means (main control board, frame control board, effect control board).

According to this solution means, even if the power supply for connection confirmation is OFF when the game machine is started, the working memory of the pattern (hold displayed by the main control control board, the effect control board is (holding to be displayed) can be increased, and even if the connection confirmation power supply is switched from ON to OFF after the game machine is started, the working memory of the pattern can be increased when the start-up winning is performed. To protect the start-up winning by a game ball even if the power supply for connection confirmation is turned off in some circumstances, and to confirm whether or not the game machine is operating normally by the starting-up winning by the maintenance of the staff. As a result, it is possible to provide a novel gaming machine.

[(15) Fraud Detection State 1]
Solution Means (15)-1: The game machine of this solution means stores special fraud detection state information, which is 1-byte information capable of holding up to 8 bits of bit information that treats 1 bit as 1 flag. 0 of the bit information can be treated as a flag OFF, 1 of the bit information can be treated as a flag ON, and the special fraud detection state information is It is possible to hold first specific bit information whose flag is ON during setting change, second specific bit information whose flag is ON during setting confirmation, and third specific bit information whose flag is ON during RAM clearing. and the special fraud detection state information can be treated as a numerical value of 255 or less by a combination of a plurality of the bit information including the first to third bit information, and only the first specific bit information is ON. When it is ON, the numerical value is set to 1. When only the second specific bit information is ON, the numerical value is set to 2. When only the third specific bit information is ON, the numerical value is set to 2. The gaming machine is characterized in that each can be treated as a numerical value of 4, has at least one unused bit, and 0 is held in the unused bit.

The gaming machine of this solving means has the following configuration.
(1) A gaming machine capable of storing special fraud detection state information (fraud detection state 1), which is 1-byte information capable of holding up to 8 bits of bit information that treats 1 bit as 1 flag.

(2) The bit information 0 in (1) above can be treated as a flag OFF.
(3) 1 in the bit information of (1) above can be treated as a flag ON.

(4) The special fraud detection state information of (1) above includes first specific bit information whose flag is ON during setting change, second specific bit information whose flag is ON during setting confirmation, and when RAM is cleared. It is possible to hold the third specific bit information that turns on the flag.

(5) The special fraud detection status information of (1) above can be treated as a numerical value of 255 or less by combining a plurality of bit information including the first to third specific bit information.

(6) The special fraud detection status information in (1) above is set to a numerical value of 1 when only the first specific bit information is ON, and when only the second specific bit information is ON. can be treated as a numerical value of 2, and if only the third specific bit information is ON, it can be treated as a numerical value of 4, respectively. holds 0. It should be noted that when a plurality of pieces of specific bit information are ON, it is preferable that numerical values can be added and handled.

According to this solution, by collectively managing the states such as setting changes, etc., it becomes easier for the manager to grasp the internal state of the gaming machine, and by holding it as bit information, the capacity can be reduced, and as a result, A novel gaming machine can be provided.

[Basic configuration of a medalless game machine]
Solution S1: The gaming machine of this solution includes a main control unit capable of executing control related to games, a medal number control unit capable of communicating with the main control unit and capable of executing control related to game medals, and the medals. The game machine includes a number control unit and communication control means for enabling communication with an external unit.

The gaming machine of this solving means has the following configuration.
(1) A main control unit (for example, a main control CPU, a main control ROM) capable of executing control related to games is provided.

(2) A medal number control section (e.g., medal number control CPU, medal number control ROM) is provided.

The main control unit and medal count control unit may be mounted on separate boards (main control board, medal count control board), respectively, or may be mounted on the same board (main control board).
The main control unit and the medal count control unit may be mounted in separate CPUs (main control CPU, medal count control CPU), respectively, or may be mounted in the same CPU (main control CPU).

(3) Communication control means (dedicated interface, dedicated cable, and associated devices, substrates, circuits, CPU, software) that enables communication between the medal count control section in (2) above and an external unit (dedicated unit) , program).

According to this solution means, since the communication control means for enabling communication between the medal number control section and the external unit is provided, the medal number control section can exchange information (signals) with the external unit, As a result, it is possible to provide a novel gaming machine.

[(T1) Insertion control by medal count control board]
Solution Means (T1)-1: The gaming machine of this solution means has a main control board capable of executing control processing related to games, and a communication with the main control board and an external unit, and provides a game value (for example, game medals). game value control board (for example, a medal number control board or other board) capable of executing an insertion control process relating to the insertion of .
In addition, the gaming machine of the present solution means includes a main control board capable of executing control processing related to games, and a number of medals capable of executing insertion control processing related to insertion of game medals, capable of communicating with the main control substrate and an external unit. A gaming machine comprising a control board.

The gaming machine of this solving means has the following configuration.
(1) A main control board capable of executing control processing (control processing for progressing the game) relating to the game is provided. A main control CPU is mounted on the main control board.

(2) Communicable with the main control board and the external unit (dedicated unit, sand) of (1) above, and executes input control processing (calculation processing regarding the number of game medals) regarding input of game medals (for example, betting). A possible medal count control board is provided. A medal number control CPU is mounted on the medal number control board.

According to this solution, since the medal number control board can execute the entry control process, the main control board does not need to execute the entry control process. It is possible to reduce the processing load on the main control board, and as a result, it is possible to provide a novel game machine.

Solution Means (T1)-2: The gaming machine of the present solution means has a game value input button (for example, a game medal input button) that enables the input of the game value and a game value input button in any of the above-described solution means. a game value number display device (for example, a game medal number display device) capable of recording a number and displaying the number of recorded game values; When the operation of the game value insertion button is detected, the number of game values recorded in the game value number display device is subtracted, and processing for inserting the subtracted number of game values can be executed. It is a gaming machine that
Further, the gaming machine of the present solution means is capable of recording a game medal insertion button for enabling the insertion of game medals and the number of game medals in any of the above-described solution means. and a game medal number display device capable of displaying the number of recorded game medals, and the medal number control board performs the insertion control process when an operation of the game medal insertion button is detected. The game machine is capable of executing a process of subtracting the number of game medals recorded in the medal number display device and inserting the game medals of the subtracted number.

In this solution, the following features are added.
(1) A game medal insertion button (for example, a button for 1 bet, a button for MAX bet) is provided to enable insertion of game medals (game medium, game value).
(2) A game medal number display device (game ball number display device) capable of recording the number of game medals (amount of game media, amount of game value) and displaying the number of recorded game medals is provided.

(3) The medal count control board displays the number of game medals as input control processing when the operation of the game medal input button is detected (when the pressing of the button for 1 bet or the button for MAX bet is detected). It is possible to execute a process of subtracting the number of game medals recorded in the device (calculating -1 or -3) and inserting the subtracted number of game medals (processing of betting 1 or 3). do.

According to this solution means, the processing of subtracting the number of game medals and the processing of inserting game medals can be executed on the medal number control board side, so the program capacity of the main control board can be reduced accordingly. , the processing load on the main control board can be reduced, and as a result, a novel gaming machine can be provided.

[(T2) Transmitting the number of inserted cards and the number of paid cards without replays or including replays to the dedicated unit]
Solution Means (T2)-1: In the gaming machine of this solution means, when a combination of symbols corresponding to a replay is displayed on a predetermined activated line, a predetermined number of games can be played without requiring the input of new game values. It comprises replay execution means for enabling the next game by setting a value, and communication control means for enabling communication with an external unit, wherein the communication control means is set by the replay execution means. total inserted number information (total inserted number information) which is information excluding the predetermined number of game values and is related to the accumulated number of inserted game values since the power was turned on; and transmitting to the external unit total payout number information (total payout number information) relating to the number of payouts of the game value accumulated since the power is turned on, which is information excluding the game value of the number. .
Further, in the gaming machine of the present solving means, when a combination of symbols corresponding to a replay is displayed on a predetermined effective line, a predetermined number of game medals are inserted without requiring the insertion of new game medals. and communication control means for enabling communication with an external unit, wherein the communication control means controls the predetermined number of games entered by the replay execution means. Information excluding medals, which is total inserted number information relating to the number of inserted game medals accumulated since the power is turned on, and information excluding the predetermined number of game medals inserted by the replay execution means, which is power supply The gaming machine is characterized in that total payout number information relating to the number of payout game medals accumulated from the time of insertion is transmitted to the external unit.

The gaming machine of this solving means has the following configuration.
(1) When a combination of symbols corresponding to a replay is displayed on a predetermined effective line, a predetermined number of game medals are inserted without requiring the insertion of new game medals, so that the next game can be played. (automatically inserts the game value required for the next game) is provided.

(2) A communication control means (dedicated interface, dedicated cable, and associated devices, substrates, circuits, CPU, software, and programs) that enables communication with an external unit (dedicated unit) is provided.

(3) The communication control means of (2) above is information excluding a predetermined number of game medals inserted by the replay execution means, and is information about the total inserted number of game medals accumulated since the power was turned on; Then, it transmits to the external unit total payout number information relating to the number of payout game medals accumulated since power-on, which is information excluding the predetermined number of game medals inserted by the replay execution means.

According to this solution means, since the total input number information and the total payout number information are transmitted to the external unit, the total input number information and the total number information are appropriately sent to the external unit, the hall computer connected to the external unit, and the external center. It becomes possible to monitor the payout number information, and as a result, it is possible to provide a novel gaming machine.

Further, since the information on the total number of inserted coins and the information on the total number of paid out coins are information excluding the predetermined number of game medals inserted by the replay executing means, the external unit or the like does not recognize the actually inserted or actually paid out medals. Information on the game medals obtained can be accurately grasped.

Solution means (T2)-2: In any one of the above-described solution means, the gaming machine of the present solution means is configured such that the communication control means includes information including the predetermined number of game values set by the replay execution means. Information including prescribed number information regarding the number of game values inserted (the number of inserts) in one game, and the predetermined number of game values set by the replay execution means, which is one game to the external unit.
Further, in the gaming machine of the present solution means, in any one of the above-described solution means, the communication control means is information including the predetermined number of game medals inserted by the replay execution means, and is played once. Specified number information relating to the number of inserted game medals in a game, and payout number information relating to the number of paid out game medals in one game, which is information including the predetermined number of game medals inserted by the replay execution means. is transmitted to the external unit, and the specified number information and the payout number information are treated as information for the external unit, and are treated as information for a hall computer connected to the external unit. It is a game machine.

In this solution, the following features are added.
(1) The communication control means provides information including a predetermined number of game medals inserted by the replay execution means, which is specified number information regarding the number of game medals inserted in one game, and Information including a predetermined number of inserted game medals and information on the number of paid-out game medals in one game is transmitted to the external unit.

(2) The specified number information and the payout number information are treated as information for the external unit, and preferably treated as information for the hall computer connected to the external unit.

According to this solution means, since the specified number information and the payout number information are transmitted to the external unit, the specified number information and the payout number information are appropriately transmitted in the external unit, the hall computer connected to the external unit, and the external center. It becomes possible to monitor, and as a result, it is possible to provide a novel gaming machine.

In addition, since the specified number information and the payout number information are information including the predetermined number of game medals inserted by the replay execution means, the external unit or the like does not recognize the actually inserted or actually paid out game medals. Not only medal information but also information including replays can be accurately grasped.

Furthermore, according to this solution means, the specified number information and the payout number information are treated as information for the external unit and are handled as information for the hall computer connected to the external unit, so the specified number information and the payout number information can be treated as the same information both in the external unit and the hall computer, and as a result, a novel game machine can be provided.

Solution Means (T2)-3: The gaming machine of the present solution means is, in any one of the above-described solution means, wherein the communication control means includes input game value number information (inserted medal number information) relating to the number of inserted game values; And, the gaming machine is characterized in that information on the number of paid-out game values (information on the number of paid-out medals) relating to the number of paid-out game values is transmitted to the external unit.
Further, in the gaming machine of the present solution means, in any one of the above-described solution means, the communication control means includes inserted medal number information regarding the number of inserted game medals and payout medal information regarding the number of paid out game medals. number information is transmitted to the external unit, and the inserted medal number information and the payout medal number information are treated as information for the external unit and not treated as information for the hall computer connected to the external unit. It is a gaming machine characterized by

In this solution, the following features are added.
(1) The communication control means transmits inserted medal number information regarding the number of inserted game medals and payout medal number information regarding the number of paid out game medals to the external unit.

(2) It is preferable that the number-of-inserted-medals information and the number-of-paid-out medals information are treated as information for the external unit and not treated as information for the hall computer connected to the external unit.

According to this solution means, since the inserted medal number information and the paid out medal number information are transmitted to the external unit, the external unit can appropriately monitor the inserted medal number information and the paid out medal number information, and as a result, a novel game can be played. machine can be provided.

Further, according to this solution means, the number of inserted medals information and the number of paid out medals information are treated as information for the external unit, and are not treated as information for the hall computer connected to the external unit. It is possible to prevent the hole computer from using the payout number information while using it in the external unit, and as a result, it is possible to provide a novel gaming machine.

[(T3) Game medal display device can display up to 16383 medals]
Solution Means (T3): The gaming machine of this solution means comprises storage means capable of storing the number of game values in a predetermined number of bytes, and the number of game values that can be stored in the storage means is a predetermined upper limit number. is set, and the predetermined upper limit number is a number smaller than the maximum number that can be stored in the predetermined number of bytes, and different processing can be executed according to the number of game values that can be stored in the storage means. It is a game machine characterized by being.

The gaming machine of this solving means has the following configuration.
(1) Equipped with storage means (game medal number display device, game ball number display device) capable of storing the number of game values (game medals, game balls) in a predetermined number of bytes (2 bytes, 3 bytes) .
(2) A predetermined upper limit (16383, 990000) is set for the number of game values that can be stored in the storage means of (1) above.
(3) The predetermined upper limit number in (2) above is a number smaller than the maximum number (65535, 16777215) that can be stored in the predetermined number of bytes in (1) above.
(4) Different processes can be executed according to the number of game values that can be stored (actually stored) in the storage means of (1) above. As different processes, when the number of game values is within the first range, the first process (payout: permitted, lending: permitted) is made executable, and when the number of game values is within the second range, the second process is executed. Processing (payout: allowed, lending: not allowed) is made executable, and when the number of game values is within the third range, third processing (payout: not allowed, lending: not allowed) is made executable.

The predetermined upper limit number is greater than the maximum number of game values that can be obtained in one business hour (15,000 or less for medalless game machines, 75,000 or less for management game machines) assumed in the design of the game machine. A number is preferred.

According to this solving means, it is possible to suppress damage in the unlikely event that a goto occurs, while minimizing the loss of practicality in a medalless game machine or a managed game machine.
In addition, according to this solving means, even if the upper limit number is set in the storage means (game medal display device, game ball number display device), it is possible to appropriately handle (normal game can be executed without problems). .
As a result, it is possible to provide a novel gaming machine.

[(T4) Division of roles between main control CPU and medal number control CPU and communication control]
Solution Means (T4): The game machine of this solution means comprises a main control board and a game value control board capable of communicating with the main control board and an external unit, and the main control board performs , a portion of the control processing is executed, the gaming value control board executes the remaining control processing of the control processing, and the main control board transmits predetermined information based on the execution of the control processing. This game machine is characterized by transmitting to a game value control board.

The gaming machine of this solving means has the following configuration.
(1) A main control board is provided. A main control CPU is mounted on the main control board.

(2) A game value control board (medal number control board) capable of communicating with the main control board of (1) and an external unit (dedicated unit, sand) is provided. A medal number control CPU is mounted on the medal number control board.

(3) The main control board of (1) above executes part of control processing related to games (processing required to operate the gaming machine).
(4) The gaming value control board of (2) above executes the remaining control processes of the control process of (1) above.
(5) The main control board of (1) above transmits predetermined information to the game value control board of (2) above based on the execution of the control process of (1) above. The predetermined information is, for example, information on the prescribed number, a command for paying out game medals by winning (information on the number of game medals to be paid out), game machine information (game machine performance information), game machine information (game machine installation information), game machine information (whole computer/fraud monitoring information) and the like.

According to this solution means, the control processing can be shared between the main control board and the game value control board, so that it is possible to realize a medalless game machine or a management game machine with less changes from the existing game machine. does not increase significantly. As a result, it is possible to provide a novel gaming machine.

[(T5) Setting changing status]
Solution Means (T5): The game machine of this solution means comprises a setting change device capable of changing a set value, and a setting change mode capable of changing the set value by the setting change device when a predetermined start condition is satisfied. setting change mode starting means for starting; setting change mode ending means for ending the setting change mode when a predetermined end condition is satisfied; and setting change mode being executed when the setting change mode is started. is set, and even after the setting change mode ends, the set of the running information is maintained until a predetermined number of games are executed, and the execution is performed after the predetermined number of games are executed. and a running information control means for resetting the middle information.

The gaming machine of this solving means has the following configuration.
(1) A setting change device capable of changing setting values is provided. A setting change device is a device that switches settings, and is operated by operating a button, lever, or other device provided in the gaming machine.

(2) A setting change mode in which, when a predetermined start condition is satisfied (for example, when the setting key switch is ON and the door is open), the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed by the setting change device of (1) above is started. Initiation means are provided.

(3) Setting change mode ending means is provided for ending the setting change mode when a predetermined end condition is satisfied (for example, when the start lever is ON and the setting key switch is OFF).

(4) When the setting change mode starts, the execution information indicating that the setting change mode is being executed is set (the setting change status is set to ON), and even if the setting change mode ends, the predetermined number of times The set of the information during execution is maintained until the game is executed (n times, for example, once), and the information during execution is reset after the predetermined number of games are executed (setting change status is set to OFF). ) running information control means are provided.

According to this solving means, even if the setting change mode is terminated, the set of the running information is maintained until the predetermined number of games are finished, so even if there is an illegal setting change, the fraudulent action is discovered. can be made easier. As a result, it is possible to provide a novel gaming machine.

[(T6) Timing of processing when the count button is pressed]
Solution Means (T6)-1: The gaming machine of this solution means includes a counting button for counting game value, and when the counting button is pressed for a predetermined period of time or longer, it is determined that the pressing is long, and the counting is performed. Determination means for determining that a button is pressed for a short time when the button is pressed for less than the predetermined time, and sending a count notification to an external unit at a count notification timing of a predetermined cycle, and determining that the button is pressed for a long time. If it is determined to be the short press, the short press is sent at the next count notification timing after the determination. The gaming machine is provided with counting notification transmitting means for transmitting the counting notification according to the pressing.

The gaming machine of this solving means has the following configuration.
(1) A counting button for counting the game value (a button or a counting switch that triggers transmission of the game value to the external unit) is provided.
(2) If the count button in (1) above is pressed for a certain period of time (500 ms or more), it is determined to be a long press, and the count button in (1) above is pressed for less than a certain period of time (less than 500 ms). A judgment means is provided for judging that a short push is made when the button is pressed.

(3) When sending a count notification to an external unit (dedicated unit) at a constant period count notification timing (count notification timing at 300 ms intervals), and when it is determined that it is a long press according to the above (2), At the next count notification timing after the determination, a count notification corresponding to the long press (for example, a count notification of 50 sheets) is sent, and if it is determined that the short press is made according to (2) above, the next count notification after the determination A counting notification transmitting means is provided for transmitting a counting notification (for example, one counting notification) corresponding to a short press at the counting notification timing.

The count notification corresponding to the long press may be a count notification of less than 50 sheets, or may be a count notification of 51 or more sheets (for example, 100 sheets or the like). Also, the count notification corresponding to the short press may be two or more count notifications.

According to this solution means, a plurality of pressing modes (long pressing and short pressing) can be realized with one counting button, so that the number of game media can be freely counted according to the intention of the player, As a result, it is possible to provide a novel gaming machine.
Further, according to this solving means, a long press is performed when the button is pressed for a predetermined time or longer, and a short press is performed when the button is pressed for less than the predetermined time.

Solution Means (T6)-2: In any one of the above-described solution means, the game machine of the present solution means is such that the determination means transmits the count notification corresponding to the long press at a specific count notification timing, and If the counting button continues to be pressed from a specific count notification timing to the next count notification timing, it is determined that the count button is continuously pressed for a long time, and the count notification transmission means determines that the continuous long press The game machine is characterized in that, when it is determined that there is, the count notification corresponding to the continuous long press is transmitted at the count notification timing next to the specific count notification timing.

In this solution, the following features are added.
(1) If the determination means transmits a counting notification corresponding to the long press at a specific counting notification timing, and the pressing of the counting button continues from the specific counting notification timing to the next counting notification timing, It is judged that it is a continuous long press.

(2) When it is determined that the count notification transmission means is continuous long presses, the count notification transmission means responds to the continuous long presses at the count notification timing following the specific count notification timing (for example, counting 50 notifications).

According to this solution, when the long press is continuously executed, the count notification corresponding to the continuous long press is transmitted each time the count notification timing arrives, so the count notification is transmitted without interruption. It is possible to keep playing, and the convenience of the player can be improved.

Solution Means (T6)-3: The game machine of this solution means is any one of the above-described solution means, wherein the determination means determines that the count button is pressed between a predetermined count notification timing and the next count notification timing. If the button is pressed multiple times for less than a certain period of time, it is determined that the button has been pressed multiple times, and if it is determined that the button has been pressed multiple times, the count notification transmission means will reach the predetermined count notification timing. The gaming machine is characterized in that the count notification corresponding to the plurality of short presses is transmitted at the next count notification timing.

In this solution, the following features are added.
(1) If the count button is pressed multiple times for less than a certain period of time (pressed three times) between a predetermined count notification timing and the next count notification timing, the determination means selects short presses multiple times. (three short presses have been executed).

(2) If it is determined that there are multiple short presses, the count notification transmission means sends a count notification (for example, three counting notification).

According to this solution, when a plurality of short presses are performed, a count notification corresponding to the plurality of short presses is transmitted at the next count notification timing, so that a plurality of short presses (for example, repeated or intermittent presses) are performed. etc.), and the convenience of the player can be improved.

[(T7) Positional relationship between the switch on the power supply unit and the clear switch on the medal count control board]
Solution (T7): The gaming machine of this solution has a power supply unit having a power switch and a clear switch for clearing predetermined data, and has game value control operated by power supplied from the power supply unit. a board, wherein the power switch and the clear switch are arranged at positions that can be operated with one hand.

The gaming machine of this solving means has the following configuration.
(1) A power supply unit having a power switch is provided.
(2) A game value control board (a medal number control board) is provided.
(3) The power switch of (1) and the clear switch of (2) are arranged at positions where they can be operated with one hand.

According to this solution, since the power switch and the clear switch are arranged in a position where they can be operated with one hand, the operation of pressing the power switch while pressing the clear switch can be easily performed with one hand. As a result, it is possible to provide a novel gaming machine.

[(U1) Setting conditions for enabling and disabling the foul ball sensor]
Solution Means (U1)-1: The game machine of this solution means is an enclosed type game machine in which game balls circulate within the game machine, and includes a shooting means capable of shooting game balls into a game area and a number of game balls. storage means for storing; foul ball detection means for detecting a foul ball which is a game ball that has been shot by the shooting means but returned without reaching the game area; and foul ball detection means for detecting a foul ball is detected and the first condition is satisfied, the number of game balls is added, and when a foul ball is detected by the foul ball detection means and the second condition is satisfied and control means that does not add the number of game balls when there is a game ball.

The gaming machine of this solving means has the following configuration.
(1) It is an enclosed game machine in which game balls circulate within the game machine.
(2) A shooting means capable of shooting game balls into the game area is provided.
(3) It has storage means for storing the number of game balls.
(4) A foul ball detection means (foul ball sensor) for detecting a foul ball (return ball) which is a game ball that has been shot by the shooting means but returned without reaching the game area.
(5) If a foul ball is detected by the foul ball detecting means and the first condition is satisfied, the number of game balls is added, and if a foul ball is detected by the foul ball detecting means; It has control means (frame control board) which does not add the number of game balls when the second condition is satisfied.

According to this solving means, since the number of game balls can be added according to the situation, it is possible to realize flexible control compared to the method of always adding the number of game balls when a foul ball occurs. As a result, it is possible to provide a novel gaming machine.

Solution means (U1)-2: The gaming machine of the present solution means, in any one of the above-described solution means, wherein the first condition is that predetermined information updated by detection of a signal relating to launch of a game ball is a specific value; and the second condition is a condition that is satisfied when the predetermined information is not a specific value.

In this solution, the following features are added.
(1) The first condition is a condition that is met when the predetermined information updated by the detection of the signal related to the shooting of the game ball is a specific value (when the advance notice counter is 1 or more).
(2) The second condition is a condition that is satisfied when the predetermined information is not a specific value (when the notice counter is not equal to or greater than 1, or when the notice counter is 0).

According to this solving means, whether or not to add the number of game balls can be easily determined by confirming the predetermined information, and the control processing can be simplified.

[(U2) Processing during pressing of count switch]
Solution Means (U2): The game machine of this solution means is an enclosed type game machine in which game balls circulate within the game machine, and stores a shooting means capable of shooting game balls into a game area and the number of game balls. It comprises storage means, a counting switch for counting the number of game balls, and control means, wherein the control means makes it possible to subtract the number of game balls by pressing the counting switch, and the number of game balls can be subtracted while the counting switch is being pressed. A game characterized in that it is possible to shoot game balls by shooting means, and when the number of game balls is a predetermined number and a predetermined condition is satisfied, the number of game balls is not subtracted even if the counting switch is pressed. machine.

The gaming machine of this solving means has the following configuration.
(1) It is an enclosed game machine in which game balls circulate within the game machine.
(2) A shooting means capable of shooting game balls into the game area is provided.
(3) It has storage means for storing the number of game balls.
(4) It has a counting switch for counting the number of game balls.
(5) A control means (frame control board) is provided.
(6) The control means enables the number of game balls to be subtracted by pressing the count switch, enables the shooting means to shoot game balls even while the count switch is being pressed, and the number of game balls is a predetermined number and the predetermined condition is satisfied. If so (for example, if the rectifier is operated with one remaining ball), the number of game balls is not subtracted even if the counting switch is pressed.

According to this solving means, it is possible to shoot the game ball by the shooting means even while the counting switch is being pressed, so it is possible to reduce the boredom of the player while the counting switch is being pressed.
In addition, according to this solution means, since the number of game balls can be subtracted according to the situation, it is possible to realize flexible control compared to the method of stopping firing when the count switch is pressed. As a result, it is possible to provide a novel gaming machine.

[(U3) Processing of Switches Mounted on Frame Control Board]
Solution Means (U3)-1: The gaming machine of this solution means comprises a main control board and a frame control board, and the frame control board determines that an error state exists when a predetermined error occurrence condition is satisfied. The gaming machine is characterized by comprising judging means capable of judging and a switch capable of canceling the error state.

The gaming machine of this solving means has the following configuration.
(1) It has a main control board.
(2) It has a frame control board.
(3) The frame control board has a determination means capable of determining an error state when a predetermined error occurrence condition is satisfied, and a switch (error release switch) capable of canceling the error state.

According to this solving means, it is possible to complete the generation and cancellation of the error state only by the frame control board, and to appropriately deal with defects and irregularities that occur in the frame control board. We can provide a game machine that

Solution (U3)-2: In any of the above-described solution means, the game machine of the present solution means is such that the determination means can determine that it is in the error state without being affected by the state of the main control board. It is a game machine characterized by being.

In this means for solving the problem, the determination means can determine that the main control board is in the error state without being affected by the state of the main control board (even if the main control board is in the error state).

According to this solution, even if the main control board is in an error state, it is possible to notify the error state regarding the frame control board.

Solution means (U3)-3: The gaming machine of the present solution means is capable of shooting a game ball even if the error state is determined by the determination means in any of the above-described solution means, This game machine is characterized in that it is possible to execute a variable display effect when a game ball that has been shot wins a starting hole.

In this solving means, the game ball can be shot even if it is determined to be in an error state by the determination means, and when the shot game ball wins the starting hole, the variable display performance can be executed.

According to this solution means, even if the frame control board is in an error state, the variable display effect can be executed by shooting the game ball, so the shooting of the game ball is uniformly prohibited in the error state of the frame control board. Flexible control can be performed compared to the method of

[(U4) Trial test signal of frame control board]
Solution Means (U4)-1: The gaming machine of the present solution means comprises shooting means capable of shooting a game ball into a game area, shooting ball detecting means for detecting the shooting ball which is a game ball shot by the shooting means, A shot ball number counting means for counting the number of shot balls, which is the total number of shot balls, based on the detection by the shot ball detection means; foul ball detection means for detecting a foul ball which is a game ball that has been shot by the shooting means but returned without reaching the game area; and the foul ball detection foul ball counting means for counting the number of foul balls, which is the total number of foul balls, based on the detection by the means; 2 signal generation means.

The gaming machine of this solving means has the following configuration.
(1) A shooting means capable of shooting game balls into the game area is provided.
(2) A shot ball detecting means for detecting a shot ball, which is a game ball shot by the shooting means.
(3) A shot ball number counting means for counting the number of shot balls, which is the total number of shot balls, based on detection by the shot ball detection means.
(4) A first signal generating means for generating a first signal, which is a signal to be transmitted to an external device (testing device) and indicates the number of shot balls.

(5) A foul ball detection means is provided for detecting a foul ball, which is a game ball that has been shot by the shooting means but returned without reaching the game area.
(6) A foul ball number counting means for counting the number of foul balls, which is the total number of foul balls, based on detection by the foul ball detecting means.
(7) A second signal generating means for generating a second signal indicating the number of foul balls, which is a signal to be transmitted to an external device.

According to this solution means, the external device can not only grasp the number of shot balls and the number of foul balls, but also can accurately grasp the number of game balls that have reached the game area. We can provide a game machine that

Solution Means (U4)-2: The game machine of this solution means shifts to a ball extraction state in which a game ball can be extracted from the game machine when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied in any of the above-described solution means. A ball-unloaded state transition means is provided, the fired ball detecting means and the foul-ball detecting means perform detection even in the ball-unloaded state, and the fired-ball number counting means and the foul-ball number counting means The game machine is characterized in that counting is not performed when the ball is in the drawn state, and the first signal generating means and the second signal generating means do not generate signals when the ball is in the drawn state. be.

In this solution, the following features are added.
(1) When a predetermined transition condition is satisfied (when the number of game balls is 0 and the power is turned on while pressing the ball removal button), shift to a ball removal state in which game balls can be removed from the gaming machine. It is equipped with a ball extraction state transition means.
(2) The shot ball number detection means and the foul ball detection means perform detection even when the ball is out.
(3) The shot ball number counting means and the foul ball number counting means do not count when the ball is out.
(4) The first signal generation means and the second signal generation means do not generate a signal when the ball is in a state of being pulled out.

According to this means for solving the problem, it is possible to prevent generation of the first signal and the second signal while continuing to detect the game ball with the shot ball detecting means and the foul ball detecting means being effective in the state of the ball being pulled out. .

[(U5) Illegal ball detection method]
Solution Means (U5)-1: The gaming machine of this solution means comprises a lifting mechanism that enables lifting while polishing a game ball, and an illegal ball that is arranged downstream of the lifting mechanism and that can detect an illegal ball. The gaming machine is characterized by comprising a ball detection mechanism and a straightening mechanism arranged downstream of the illegal ball detection mechanism and capable of straightening game balls before being shot.

The gaming machine of this solving means has the following configuration.
(1) It is equipped with a lifting mechanism that enables lifting while polishing the game ball.
(2) An illegal ball detection mechanism is provided downstream of the lifting mechanism and capable of detecting illegal balls. Illegal balls include iron balls, game balls with a size different from the official size (game ball with a diameter of 11 mm), game balls made of materials different from the official game balls, and game balls with colors different from the official colors. etc. The illegal ball detection mechanism can detect an iron ball using a magnet and a sensor that detects the game ball, and uses a sensor that detects the height (size) of the game ball to determine if the size is different from the normal size. A game ball of a size can be detected, and a game ball made of a material different from the normal material or a game ball of a color different from the normal color can be detected using a photosensor, an imaging device, or the like.
(3) A rectifying mechanism is provided downstream of the illegal ball detection mechanism and capable of rectifying game balls before being shot.

According to this solution means, since the illegal ball detection mechanism is arranged between the lifting mechanism and the straightening mechanism, the illegal ball can be detected at the place just before the launch, and as a result, a novel game machine can be realized. can provide.
In addition, according to this solving means, since the game ball after polishing is detected as a target for the illegal ball, it is possible to improve the accuracy of the detection of the illegal ball by the cleaned game ball.

Solution Means (U5)-2: The gaming machine of the present solution means is provided with a ball clogging detection mechanism capable of detecting clogging of game balls in any of the above-described solution means, and fraud based on the illegal ball detection mechanism The gaming machine is characterized in that a ball detection error has a higher notification priority than a ball jam detection mechanism based on the ball jam detection mechanism.

In this solution, the following features are added.
(1) It has a ball clogging detection mechanism that can detect clogging of game balls.
(2) An illegal ball detection error based on the illegal ball detection mechanism has a higher notification priority than a ball jammed error based on the ball jam detection mechanism.

According to this solution means, since the priority of the illegal ball detection error is set higher than the priority of the ball clogging error, it is possible to quickly discover that illegal balls are mixed in.

Solution Means (U5)-3: The gaming machine of this solution means, in any one of the above-described solution means, the illegal ball detection error based on the illegal ball detection mechanism is an error that can be canceled by pressing a predetermined switch. It is a gaming machine characterized by

In this solution means, an illegal ball detection error based on the illegal ball detection mechanism is an error that can be canceled by pressing a predetermined switch.

According to this solution means, the illegal ball detection error is an error that cannot be canceled unless a predetermined switch is pressed, so it is regarded as an error with a higher degree of importance than errors that are automatically canceled. be able to.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a novel gaming machine.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a front view showing a game board unit alone. It is a front view which expands and shows a part of game board unit. It is a block diagram showing various electronic devices installed in the pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure inside a production|presentation control apparatus. It is a figure which shows the memory map of the memory area which main control CPU72 uses. It is a diagram showing the relationship between the set value and the winning probability of the special symbol lottery. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the state of a setting key, whether the setting can be changed, and whether it can be inserted or removed; 10 is a flowchart showing a first procedure example of CPU initialization processing (1/2); 2 is a flowchart showing a first procedure example of CPU initialization processing (2/2); FIG. 10 is a diagram showing command transmission timings in a first procedure example of CPU initialization processing; It is a figure which shows the list of gaming machine states. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing allocation of processes when power is turned on; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a second procedure example of CPU initialization processing (1/2); FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a second procedure example of CPU initialization processing (2/2); FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing command transmission timings in a second procedure example of CPU initialization processing; 5 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of main loop processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the contents of processing executed when a serial communication reception interrupt occurs; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the details of processing that is executed when a timer interrupt occurs; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the details of processing executed when a power-off notice interrupt occurs; 9 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of serial communication reception interrupt processing; FIG. 11 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of interrupt processing at the time of power-off notice; FIG. 6 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of timer interrupt processing; 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for dynamic port output processing; 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of performance display monitor output processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the relationship between timer interrupt processing and dynamic port output processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modification of timer interrupt processing; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of setting change processing (1/2); FIG. 2 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for setting change processing (2/2); 6 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of switch management processing; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a 1st special design memory|storage update process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a 2nd special design memory|storage update process. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of effect determination processing at the time of acquisition; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a special game management process. It is a flow chart showing a procedure example of special symbol variation pre-processing. It is a figure which shows an example of a fluctuation|variation pattern selection table (low probability / high probability non-time shortening state) at the time of loss. It is a figure which shows an example of a fluctuation|variation pattern selection table (low-probability time reduction state) at the time of loss. It is a figure which shows an example of a fluctuation|variation pattern selection table at the time of loss (high probability time reduction state). It is a figure which shows an example of a fluctuation|variation pattern selection table (special area) at the time of loss. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the stop design selection table at the time of a 1st special design big hit. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the stop design selection table at the time of a 2nd special design big hit. It is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern selection table at the time of jackpot (low probability/high probability non-time reduction state). It is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern selection table at the time of jackpot (low probability time reduction state). It is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern selection table at the time of jackpot (high probability time reduction state). It is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern selection table (special section) at the time of the big hit. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a change pattern determination process at the time of loss; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a big-hit time variation pattern determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of special design storage area shift processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a process during a special design stop display. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for special fluctuation management processing; It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a variable prize-winning apparatus management process at the time of a big hit. It is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of a big winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a big hit. It is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of a big winning opening opening and closing operation process at the time of a big hit. It is a flow chart showing a procedure example of a big winning opening closing process at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of end processing at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a special fluctuation|variation frequency|count setting process. It is a flow chart showing a configuration example of a variable winning device management process at the time of small hit. It is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the big winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a small hit. It is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the big winning opening opening and closing operation process at the time of a small hit. It is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the big winning opening closing process at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of end processing at the time of a small hit. 6 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of LED display setting processing; 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of procedures for external information management processing; 6 is a flow chart showing an example procedure of security signal management processing; 9 is a flowchart showing a first procedure example of addition number calculation processing; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a second procedure example of the addition number calculation process; FIG. It is a figure which shows the relationship between a game state and the number of shot balls. 9 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of performance display monitor control processing; 10 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure for adding the number of balls; FIG. 11 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of performance display monitor aggregate division processing; FIG. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for processing division task 1; 8 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure for processing division tasks 2 to 8; 9 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure for processing a division task 9; FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a display mode of a performance display monitor 200; FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a bass section displayed on a performance display monitor 200; FIG. It is a figure explaining the calculation method of a base. It is a timing chart showing the basic operation of setting-related processing (1/3). It is a timing chart showing the basic operation of setting-related processing (2/3). It is a timing chart showing the basic operation of setting-related processing (3/3). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of processing when power is turned on (first processing example); FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of processing when power is turned on (second processing example); FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of processing when power is turned on (third processing example); 7 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of firing position management processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a game flow in a non-time reduction state; FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a game flow in a time shortened state; It is a continuous diagram showing an example of effect images corresponding to the variable display and the stop display of the special symbol. It is a continuous diagram showing the flow of the ready-to-win effect executed at the time of a big hit (winning). It is a figure which shows the production example of a challenge bonus production|presentation. It is a continuation diagram which partially shows the production example of a treasure challenge production|presentation. FIG. 11 is a continuous diagram showing an example of a fireworks rush effect; FIG. 11 is a continuous diagram partially showing an example of a fireworks bonus effect; FIG. 11 is a continuous diagram partially showing an example of a normal bonus effect; FIG. 11 is a continuous diagram showing an example of a coast mode effect; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of production|presentation control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of operation memory production|presentation management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of production|presentation design management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of production|presentation design change pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a big-hit fluctuation|variation production|presentation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a fluctuation effect pattern selection process at the time of loss. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of mode production|presentation management processing. It is a flow chart showing a configuration example of processing when the variable winning device is activated. 1 is a diagram showing an overall outline of a gaming machine management system; FIG. It is a figure which shows the schematic of a gaming machine management system (flow of machine history management). It is a figure which shows the schematic diagram (flow of security management) of a gaming machine management system. It is a diagram showing a connection image of the management game machine and the dedicated unit. It is a figure which shows a security enhancement item (1/4). It is a figure which shows a security reinforcement|strengthening item (2/4). It is a figure which shows a security enhancement item (3/4). It is a figure which shows a security reinforcement|strengthening item (4/4). It is a figure which shows about the flow of monitoring information. It is a figure which shows the disassembled perspective view of a management game machine. It is a figure which shows the front view of a management game machine. It is a figure which shows the perspective view of a management game machine. It is a figure which shows the back view (state with a back cover) of a managed gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the back view (state without a back cover) of the managed gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the apparatus mounted in a management game machine. It is a figure which shows the block diagram of a main control function. It is a diagram showing a list of fraud detected by the management gaming machine main control board. It is a figure which shows the block diagram of a prize ball control function. It is a figure which shows the error detected by a prize ball control function. It is a figure which shows the block diagram of a ball control function. It is a figure which shows the list of the error detected by a ball lending control function. FIG. 13 shows a block diagram of the counting function; It is a figure which shows the conditions of the number of counting balls. It is a figure which shows the block diagram of display functions, such as the number of game balls. FIG. 3 shows a block diagram of security functions; It is a figure which shows the block diagram of an information output function. It is a figure which shows the content which a dedicated unit outputs to a hall computer. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a block diagram of a power supply function; FIG. FIG. 13 shows a block diagram of the firing function; It is a diagram showing a block diagram of the game ball circulation function. It is a diagram showing an error detected in the game ball circulation function. It is a figure which shows the block diagram of a ball-polishing function. It is a figure which shows the error detected by a ball-polishing function. It is a figure which shows the block diagram of a power saving function. It is a figure which shows the block diagram of a night watch function. It is a figure which shows the block diagram of an iron ball detection function. It is a figure which shows the block diagram of a ball extraction function. FIG. 11 shows a block diagram of a pause function; FIG. It is a figure showing an error detection function (1/6). It is a figure which shows an error detection function (2/6). It is a figure showing an error detection function (3/6). It is a figure showing an error detection function (4/6). It is a figure showing an error detection function (5/6). It is a figure showing an error detection function (6/6). It is a figure which shows the block diagram of a light quantity / sound volume adjustment function. It is a diagram showing the outer shape of the game board and the alignment holes with the management game machine frame. It is a figure which shows the dimension of a game area. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the dimensions of the back surface effective area; It is a figure which shows the structure of a launcher. It is a figure which shows the structure of a launcher (handle). FIG. 3 shows the principle of operation of the launcher; A ball feed solenoid is a figure explaining the principle of operation which pays out a game ball. A ball feed solenoid is a figure explaining the principle of operation which pays out a game ball. A ball feed solenoid is a figure explaining the principle of operation which pays out a game ball. It is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of a power supply device used in a management game machine used in the management game machine. It is a figure which shows the use application of a power supply and a signal. It is a figure which shows a connector and pin arrangement specification. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing specifications of a main system power supply capacity; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing specifications of a sub-system power supply capacity; It is a figure which shows the item which backs up. It is a figure which shows the structure of a ball polishing apparatus. It is a figure which shows the principle of operation of a ball polishing apparatus. It is a figure which shows the principle of operation of a ball polishing apparatus. It is a figure which shows the principle of operation of a ball polishing apparatus. It is a figure which shows the principle of operation of a ball polishing apparatus. It is a figure which shows the structure of a game ball circulation apparatus. It is a figure which shows the principle of operation of a game ball circulation apparatus. It is a figure which shows the principle of operation of a game ball circulation apparatus. It is a figure which shows the principle of operation of a game ball circulation apparatus. It is a figure which shows a touch-panel-type liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows an outer frame crime prevention apparatus. It is a figure which shows an outer frame crime prevention apparatus. It is a figure which shows an iron ball detection apparatus. It is a figure which shows the block diagram of a management game machine. It is a figure which shows the block diagram of a management game machine. It is a figure which shows the block diagram of a management game machine. 1 is a diagram showing an overall circuit diagram of a managed gaming machine main system 1; FIG. 1 is a diagram showing an overall circuit diagram of a managed gaming machine main system 1; FIG. 1 is a diagram showing an overall circuit diagram of a managed gaming machine main system 1; FIG. 1 is a diagram showing an overall circuit diagram of a managed gaming machine main system 1; FIG. 1 is a diagram showing an overall circuit diagram of a managed gaming machine main system 1; FIG. 1 is a diagram showing an overall circuit diagram of a managed gaming machine main system 1; FIG. It is a diagram showing an overall circuit diagram of the management gaming machine main system 2. FIG. It is a diagram showing an overall circuit diagram of the management gaming machine main system 2. FIG. It is a diagram showing an overall circuit diagram of the management gaming machine main system 2. FIG. It is a diagram showing an overall circuit diagram of the management gaming machine main system 2. FIG. It is a diagram showing an overall circuit diagram of the management gaming machine main system 2. FIG. It is a diagram showing an overall circuit diagram of the management gaming machine main system 2. FIG. It is a diagram showing an overall circuit diagram of the management gaming machine main system 2. FIG. It is a diagram showing an overall circuit diagram of the management gaming machine main system 2. FIG. It is a diagram showing an overall circuit diagram of the managed gaming machine subsystem. It is a diagram showing an overall circuit diagram of the managed gaming machine subsystem. It is a diagram showing an overall circuit diagram of the managed gaming machine subsystem. It is a diagram showing an overall circuit diagram of the managed gaming machine subsystem. It is a diagram showing an overall circuit diagram of the managed gaming machine subsystem. It is a figure which shows the whole circuit diagram of the management game machine game board main system. It is a figure which shows the whole circuit diagram of the management game machine game board main system. It is a figure which shows the whole circuit diagram of the management game machine game board main system. It is a figure which shows the whole circuit diagram of the management game machine game board main system. It is a figure which shows the whole circuit diagram of the management game machine game board main system. It is a figure which shows the whole circuit diagram of the management game machine game board main system. It is a figure which shows a connector pin arrangement specification. It is a figure which shows about a reset signal. It is a diagram showing a circuit configuration in the case of connecting the FG of the management game machine game board from the main drawer board without passing through the main control board. It is a diagram showing a circuit configuration when connecting the FG of the management game machine game board from the main drawer board via the main control board. It is a figure which shows a connector pin arrangement specification. It is a diagram showing the circuit configuration of the effect control board - interface between other devices for effect. It is a figure which shows the block diagram containing various switches. It is a figure which shows the outline|summary of the specification of the electrical decoration part of a front decoration, and a dot display part. It is a figure which shows LED arrangement|positioning and a system diagram of a front decoration electric decoration part. It is a figure which shows LED arrangement|positioning of a front decoration dot display part, and a system diagram. It is a figure which shows the block diagram of the electric decoration part and dot display part of a front decoration. It is a figure which shows the block diagram of the electric decoration part and dot display part of a front decoration. It is a figure which shows the schematic specification of main control CPU. It is a figure which shows a main-control CPU terminal connection diagram. It is a figure which shows the terminal function list of main control CPU. It is a figure which shows the terminal function list of main control CPU. It is a figure which shows the schematic specification of frame control CPU. It is a figure which shows a frame control CPU terminal connection diagram. It is a figure which shows the terminal function list of frame control CPU. It is a figure which shows the terminal function list of frame control CPU. It is a figure which shows the structure of a main control program. It is a figure which shows the structure of a frame control program. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing communication conditions of a main control board-frame control board interface; Fig. 3 shows a block diagram of a user program interface; It is a figure which shows the detail of game information. It is a figure which shows the detail of classification information. It is a figure which shows the detail of count information. It is a figure which shows the detail of game state information. It is a diagram showing the details of the managed gaming machine frame information. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of power-on processing; 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of suspension processing; 7 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of recovery processing from a temporary stop; FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a procedure of processing when a communication abnormality is detected; FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a procedure for recovering from a communication failure; It is a diagram showing a game board size. It is a figure which shows a game area. It is a diagram showing the main dimensions of the gaming machine frame. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the dimensions of the discharge passage; It is a figure which shows the structure of return ball detection. It is a figure which shows the structure of a power supply cutoff. It is a figure which shows the mechanism of ball extraction. FIG. 4 shows a speaker; Fig. 2 shows a launcher; FIG. 3 shows a grinder; It is a figure which shows the structure of an iron ball detection. It is a diagram showing a system configuration diagram of the managed gaming machine. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing communication conditions; It is a figure which shows the outline|summary of a data structure. It is a figure which shows the detail of a data structure. It is a diagram showing a list of messages between the main control board and the frame control board. It is a diagram showing the details of the game machine installation information notification. It is a figure which shows the code system (1 byte) of a game machine type. It is a figure which shows an example of a gaming machine type list. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a method of generating a main control chip ID number (for the first chip); FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a method of generating a main control chip ID number (in the case of the second chip); It is a figure which shows the identification code of a main control chip ID number. It is a figure which shows the detail of a gaming machine installation information response. It is a figure which shows the detail of a game machine information notification (1/2). It is a diagram showing the details of the gaming machine information notification (2/2). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a main control state 1; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a main control state 2; It is a figure which shows a fraud detection state. It is a figure which shows the detail of game information. It is a figure which shows the detail of classification information. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing details of data types of type information; It is a figure which shows the data number of classification information (1/2). It is a figure which shows the data number of classification information (2/2). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing data numbers of external terminal block pulse outputs; It is a figure which shows the detail of count information. (Example 1) In 1=starting hole winning, it is a diagram showing an example in which two winning balls are won in the starting hole 1 of three prize balls. (Example 2) 2 = This is a diagram showing an example of a case where 3 15 prize balls win in the big winning hole 2 in the big winning hole winning by the operation of the special electric accessory. (Example 3) This is a diagram showing an example of a case where one prize ball wins the prize hole 2 in 3 = Winning hole prize. (Example 4) This is a diagram showing an example of passing through the passing gate 1 once in 4=gate passing. (Example 5) 4 = It is a diagram showing an example of the case where one prize is won in the normal pattern operation hole 2 of the three prize balls in the normal pattern operation hole winning prize. (Example 6) 5 = It is a diagram showing an example of a case where one prize is won in a winning opening of three prize balls by normal electric accessory operation in the starting opening prize by normal electric accessory operation. (Example 7) 6 = This is a diagram showing an example of a case where 1 of 15 prize balls is won in the big winning hole 1 by activating the accessory continuous actuating device in the big winning opening winning by activating the accessory continuous activating device. (Example 8) 7 = This is a diagram showing an example in which one prize is won in the winning hole 2 of 10 prize balls by normal electric accessory operation in winning by normal electric accessory operation. (Example 9) 8 = This is a diagram showing an example of a case where one ball is won in the winning hole 1 of 10 prize balls by the operation of the other role in the case of winning by the operation of the other role. It is a figure which shows the detail of count information. (Example 1) It is a diagram showing an example when the special symbol 1 is stopped once in the number of times of design determination. (Example 2) It is a diagram showing an example in which the normal symbol 1 stops once in the number of times of design determination. It is a figure which shows the detail of count information. (Example 1) In the operation (jackpot) of the role product continuous actuating device, it is a diagram showing an example in which the role product continuous actuating device is operated once (jackpot). (Example 2) When the accessory continuous operation device is not activated, the special electric accessory is activated (small hit), and when the accessory continuous activation device is not activated, the special electric accessory is activated once (small hit) FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a case where It is a figure which shows the detail of count information. (Example 1) It is a diagram showing an example of a case where a normal symbol hit occurs once in a normal symbol hit. It is a figure which shows the detail of count information. (Example 1) FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a case where the accessory 1 is released once in the accessory count. It is a figure which shows the detail of count information. (Example 1) FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a case where a specific region 1 is passed once in passing through a specific region. It is a figure which shows the detail of count information. (Example 1) In the external terminal board pulse output, it is a figure which shows the example in the case of outputting a pulse once from the external terminal board pulse output signal terminal 1 of a dedicated unit. It is a figure which shows the detail of count information. (Example 1) In the performance information state notification, FIG. It is a figure which shows the detail of a gaming machine information response. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a communication procedure after power-on; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a communication procedure when changing settings or confirming settings; 4 is a diagram showing a procedure of communication line disconnection detection 1; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a procedure of communication line disconnection detection 2; It is a figure which shows the procedure of a ball extraction state. It is a figure which shows an output block diagram. (1/2) shows standard 20 ports; Figure 2 shows a standard 20 port (2/2); FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an expansion port; It is a diagram showing a system configuration diagram of the managed gaming machine. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing communication conditions between frame control and CM; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing details of frame control-CM data configuration; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a frame control-CM message list; It is a figure which shows the detail of a gaming machine information notification. It is a figure which shows the code system (1 byte) of a game machine type. It is a figure which shows an example of a gaming machine type list. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a telegram when "0x00: gaming machine performance information" is set in the gaming machine information type; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a telegram when "0x01: gaming machine installation information" is set in the gaming machine information type; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a method of generating a frame control chip ID number (for the first chip); FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a method of generating a frame control chip ID number (in the case of the second chip); It is a diagram showing a telegram when "0x02: hall control/unauthorized monitoring information" is set in the gaming machine information type (1/3). FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a telegram when "0x02: hall control/unauthorized monitoring information" is set in the gaming machine information type (2/3). FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a telegram when "0x02: hall control/unauthorized monitoring information" is set in the gaming machine information type (3/3). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing fraud detection state 1; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing fraud detection state 2; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing fraud detection state 3; It is a figure which shows the detail of data classification (upper 4Bit). It is a figure which shows the detail of the data number (lower 4bit) set for every data classification. It is a figure which shows the detail of count information. (Example 1) In the starting hole winning, it is a diagram showing an example when two winning balls are won in the starting hole 1 of three prize balls. (Example 2) It is a diagram showing an example of a case where 3 balls of 15 prize balls are won in the big winning hole 2 in the big winning hole winning. (Example 3) In the winning opening prize, it is a diagram showing an example when one winning opening 2 of one winning ball wins. It is a figure which shows the detail of count information. (Example 1) In gate passage, it is a figure which shows the example at the time of passing the passage gate 1 once. It is a figure which shows the detail of count information. (Example 1) It is a diagram showing an example when the special symbol 1 is stopped once in the number of times of design determination. It is a figure which shows the detail of count information. (Example 1) In the operation (jackpot) of the role product continuous actuating device, it is a diagram showing an example in which the role product continuous actuating device is operated once (jackpot). (Example 2) When the accessory continuous operation device is not activated, the special electric accessory is activated (small hit), and when the accessory continuous operation device is not activated, the special electric accessory is activated once (small hit) FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a case where It is a figure which shows the detail of count information. (Example 1) FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a case where the accessory 1 is released once in the accessory count. It is a figure which shows the detail of count information. (Example 1) FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of passing through a specific region 1 once in passing through a specific region. It is a figure which shows the detail of count information. (Example 1) FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example in which a spare 1 occurs once in the spare. It is a figure which shows the detail of a notification of counting. It is a figure which shows the detail of a notice of rental. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing details of a rental notification reception result response; FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a basic communication sequence; FIG. It is a figure which shows the sequence when a game machine starts first. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a sequence when CM is activated first; It is a figure which shows the notification conditions applied in a game machine information notification sequence. It is a figure which shows the basic sequence (there is no game information) of a game machine information notification. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a sequence when hall control/fraud monitoring information (with gaming information) and gaming machine installation information/gaming machine performance information overlap (1/2); FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a sequence when hall control/fraud monitoring information (with gaming information) and gaming machine installation information/gaming machine performance information overlap (2/2); It is a figure which shows a notification sequence of a count (1/2). It is a figure which shows a notification sequence of a count (2/2). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a rental notification sequence; It is a figure which shows the restoration sequence at the time of a dedicated cable disconnection (1/2). It is a figure which shows the recovery sequence at the time of a dedicated cable disconnection (2/2). It is a figure which shows communication abnormality during counting (1/2). It is a figure which shows communication abnormality during counting (2/2). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a communication abnormality at the time of lending; It is a figure which shows a counting condition table. (1) It is a figure which shows a long press basic pattern. (2) It is a figure which shows a long press continuation pattern (the 1). (2) It is a figure which shows a long press continuation pattern (the 2). (3) A diagram showing a long press special pattern. (4) It is a figure which shows a short press basic pattern (the 1). (4) It is a figure which shows a short press basic pattern (the 2). (5) A diagram showing a short-press special pattern (1). (5) A diagram showing a short press special pattern (No. 2). It is a figure which shows the external dimension and weight of a power supply unit. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing input power supply specifications of a power supply unit; FIG. 3 is a diagram showing input signal specifications of a power supply unit; It is a figure which shows the output power supply specification of a power supply unit (1/2). It is a figure which shows the output power supply specification of a power supply unit (1/2). FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a power supply and signal timing chart; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing rising characteristics (when power is turned on); FIG. 10 is a diagram showing falling characteristics (at the time of power shutdown); FIG. 10 is a diagram showing momentary power failure -2 (when DC 36V-1 cannot be lowered for 25 ms or longer and DC 5V-1 is maintained); CN1: It is a figure which shows the specification of the connection component 1. FIG. CN2: A diagram showing the specifications of the connection part 2. FIG. CN3: A diagram showing specifications of the connecting part 3. FIG. CN4: A diagram showing the specifications of the connection part 4. FIG. CN5: A diagram showing the specifications of the connection part 5. FIG. CN6: A diagram showing the specifications of the connection part 6. FIG. CN7: A diagram showing the specifications of the connection part 7. FIG. It is a figure which shows the insulation specification of a power supply unit. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing environmental specifications of a power supply unit; FIG. 2 is a diagram showing standards for power supply units; It is a figure which shows the power supply block diagram of a power supply unit. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a component layout diagram of a connector and a switch of the power supply unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing connector pin layout specifications of a 36-pin drawer connector; 4 is a diagram showing a circuit configuration of an interface between a main control board and a frame control board; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the constants and model names of parts used in the circuit configuration of the interface between the main control board and the frame control board; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing connector pin layout specifications of a 40-pin drawer connector; It is a diagram showing the circuit configuration of the effect control board - interface between other devices for effect. It is a diagram showing the constants and model names of the parts used in the circuit configuration of the effect control board-other effect device interface. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an overview of pull-down processing when not in use and when in use; It is a figure which shows the block diagram containing an adjustment switch etc. It is a figure which shows the block diagram containing a production|presentation switch unit etc. It is a figure which shows the list of LED and control specification. It is a figure which shows the block diagram of LED control of a front frame. It is a figure which shows LED arrangement|positioning and a system diagram. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a system diagram of LEDs and a correspondence between LED drivers; It is a figure which shows the specification of a lower speaker. It is a figure which shows the specification of a left speaker and a right speaker. FIG. 3 shows a block diagram including upper, left and right speakers, etc. FIG. It is a diagram showing the overall circuit diagram of the management game machine (1/25). It is a diagram showing the overall circuit diagram of the managed gaming machine (2/25). It is a diagram showing the overall circuit diagram of the managed gaming machine (3/25). It is a diagram showing the overall circuit diagram of the managed gaming machine (4/25). It is a diagram showing the overall circuit diagram of the management game machine (5/25). It is a diagram showing the overall circuit diagram of the management game machine (6/25). It is a diagram showing the overall circuit diagram of the management game machine (7/25). It is a diagram showing the overall circuit diagram of the management game machine (8/25). It is a diagram showing the overall circuit diagram of the management game machine (9/25). It is a diagram showing the overall circuit diagram of the management game machine (10/25). It is a diagram showing an overall circuit diagram of the management game machine (11/25). It is a diagram showing the overall circuit diagram of the management game machine (12/25). It is a diagram showing the overall circuit diagram of the management game machine (13/25). It is a diagram showing the overall circuit diagram of the management game machine (14/25). It is a diagram showing the overall circuit diagram of the management game machine (15/25). It is a diagram showing an overall circuit diagram of the management game machine (16/25). It is a diagram showing the overall circuit diagram of the management game machine (17/25). It is a diagram showing the overall circuit diagram of the management game machine (18/25). It is a diagram showing the overall circuit diagram of the management game machine (19/25). It is a diagram showing an overall circuit diagram of the management game machine (20/25). It is a diagram showing an overall circuit diagram of the management game machine (21/25). It is a diagram showing an overall circuit diagram of the management game machine (22/25). It is a diagram showing the overall circuit diagram of the management game machine (23/25). It is a diagram showing an overall circuit diagram of the management game machine (24/25). It is a diagram showing an overall circuit diagram of the management game machine (25/25). It is a diagram showing a design unit replacement range of the managed gaming machine. It is a figure which shows a design unit. It is a figure which shows the attachment or detachment method of a design unit. It is a figure which shows the electrical connection method of a design unit (1/2). It is a figure which shows the electrical connection method of a design unit (2/2). It is a figure which shows an extension relay board. 1 is a perspective view showing a slot machine 1, which is an example of a reel-type game machine. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an internal configuration of the slot machine 1; FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing various electronic devices installed in the slot machine 1. FIG. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure inside the production|presentation control apparatus 124. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing the procedure of main processing; It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation of normal production|presentation and special production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation of normal production|presentation. It is a figure which shows the production example of special production|presentation (1/2). It is a figure which shows the production example of special production|presentation (2/2). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the CPU initialization process performed by the production|presentation control apparatus. 6 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of various timer interrupt processing; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of production|presentation control processing. 9 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of upper-level control unit management processing; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of lower-level control unit management processing; FIG. 9 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of drawing completion interrupt processing; It is a diagram showing a system configuration diagram of the medalless gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the basic block diagram (2CPU configuration example) of a medal less gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the basic block diagram (1CPU configuration example) of a medalless gaming machine. It is a diagram showing configuration 1 (first configuration example) of the main control board of the medalless gaming machine, the medal number control board, and the game ball lending device connection terminal board. It is a diagram showing configuration 2 (second configuration example) of the main control board of the medalless game machine, the medal number control board, and the game ball rental device connection terminal board. It is a diagram showing configuration 3 (third configuration example) of the main control board of the medalless gaming machine, the medal count control board, and the game ball lending device connection terminal board. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing [configuration 1-1] of a substrate case configuration example; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing [configuration 1-2] of a substrate case configuration example; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing [configuration 1-3] of a substrate case configuration example; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing [configuration 1-4] of a substrate case configuration example; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing [configuration 2-1] of a substrate case configuration example; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing [configuration 2-2] of a substrate case configuration example; It is a diagram showing the main devices and substrates provided in the medalless gaming machine (1/2). It is a diagram showing the main devices and substrates provided in the medalless gaming machine (2/2). It is a diagram showing a front view of the medalless gaming machine. It is a figure which shows the front view of the medal less game machine of another form. It is a diagram showing the internal configuration of another form of the medalless gaming machine. 470 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the power supply unit (near the circular two-dot chain line in FIG. 470) of the medalless gaming machine of another form. FIG. 470 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the power supply unit (near the circular two-dot chain line in FIG. 470) of the medalless gaming machine of another form. FIG. It is a figure which shows the function list (2 CPU configuration example) of a game machine (1/6). It is a figure which shows the function list (2 CPU configuration example) of a game machine (2/6). It is a figure which shows the function list (2 CPU configuration example) of a game machine (3/6). It is a figure which shows the function list (2 CPU configuration example) of a game machine (4/6). It is a figure which shows the function list (2 CPU configuration example) of a game machine (5/6). FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a function list (2CPU configuration example) of the gaming machine (6/6); 3 is a diagram showing details of a game medal insertion button 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the detail of a settlement button. It is a figure which shows the detail of a game medal number display device. It is a diagram showing the details of the overflow processing of the game medal number display device. It is a figure which shows the detail of a count button. It is a diagram showing the details of the number of game medals clear button. It is a figure which shows the procedure of setting change. It is a figure which shows the procedure of setting confirmation. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing details of information to be initialized; It is a diagram showing a system configuration diagram of the medalless gaming machine. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing connector pin assignments of a dedicated interface input/output connector; It is a figure which shows the connection example of a dedicated cable. It is a figure which shows the connector diagram of a dedicated cable. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the logic of transmission signals and reception signals on a connector of a dedicated cable; It is a figure which shows the example of the input/output circuit of a dedicated unit and a game machine. It is a figure which shows the circuit resistance constant etc. of the game machine side interface. It is a figure which shows the circuit resistance constant etc. of the dedicated unit side interface. It is a diagram showing communication conditions between the game machine and the dedicated unit. It is a diagram showing the data structure between the game machine and the dedicated unit. It is a diagram showing the details of the game machine-dedicated unit data configuration. It is a diagram showing a list of telegrams between gaming machines and dedicated units. It is a figure which shows the detail of a gaming machine information notification. It is a figure which shows the code system (1 byte) of a game machine type. It is a figure which shows an example of a gaming machine type list. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a telegram when "0x00: gaming machine performance information" is set in the gaming machine information type; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a telegram when "0x01: gaming machine installation information" is set in the gaming machine information type; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a method of generating a main control chip ID number (for the first chip); FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a method of generating a main control chip ID number (in the case of the second chip); FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a method of generating a medal number control chip ID number (in the case of the first chip); FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a method of generating a medal count control chip ID number (in the case of the second chip); FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a method of generating a medal count control chip ID number (when medal count control is not installed). It is a diagram showing an identification code of the main control/medal count control chip ID number. It is a diagram showing a telegram when "0x02: hall control/unauthorized monitoring information" is set in the gaming machine information type (1/3). FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a telegram when "0x02: hall control/unauthorized monitoring information" is set in the gaming machine information type (2/3). FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a telegram when "0x02: hall control/unauthorized monitoring information" is set in the gaming machine information type (3/3). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing details of each bit of main control state 1; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing details of each bit of main control state 2; It is a figure which shows the detail of the gaming machine fraud 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the detail of the gaming machine fraud 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows the detail of the gaming machine fraud 3. FIG. It is a figure which shows the detail of game information. It is a figure which shows the detail of classification information. It is a figure which shows the detail of data classification (upper 4Bit). It is a figure which shows the detail of the data number (lower 4bit) set for every data classification. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing details of count information when the data type is the specified number; It is a figure which shows the specific example of the game information in the case of a three-card game of prescribed numbers. It is a diagram showing the details of the count information when the data type is the number of payouts. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a specific example of game information when 10 medals are paid out as a result of winning; It is a figure which shows the detail of a notification of counting. It is a figure which shows the detail of a notice of rental. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing details of a lending acceptance result response; FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a basic communication sequence; FIG. It is a figure which shows the sequence when a game machine starts first. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a sequence when a dedicated unit is activated first; It is a figure which shows the notification conditions applied in a game machine information notification sequence. It is a diagram showing a basic sequence of game machine information notification. It is a figure which shows a notification sequence of a count (1/2). It is a figure which shows a notification sequence of a count (2/2). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a rental notification sequence; It is a figure which shows the restoration sequence at the time of a dedicated cable disconnection (1/2). It is a figure which shows the recovery sequence at the time of a dedicated cable disconnection (2/2). It is a figure which shows communication abnormality during counting (1/2). It is a figure which shows communication abnormality during counting (2/2). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a communication abnormality at the time of lending; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing details of gaming machine information (gaming machine performance information) (1/3); It is a figure which shows the detail of gaming machine information (gaming machine performance information) (2/3). 3 is a diagram showing details of gaming machine information (gaming machine performance information) (3/3); FIG. It is a figure which shows the detail of gaming machine information (gaming machine installation information). FIG. 4 is a diagram showing details of gaming machine information (hall controller/fraud monitoring information) (1/4); It is a figure which shows the detail of gaming machine information (hall control/fraud monitoring information) (2/4). It is a diagram showing the details of gaming machine information (hall controller/fraud monitoring information) (3/4). FIG. 4 is a diagram showing details of gaming machine information (hall controller/fraud monitoring information) (4/4); It is a figure which shows the detail of a notification of counting. It is a figure which shows the detail of a notice of rental. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing details of a lending acceptance result response; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing details of implementation example 1 of gaming machine information (gaming machine performance information) (1/4); FIG. 4 is a diagram showing details of implementation example 1 of gaming machine information (gaming machine performance information) (2/4); FIG. 4 is a diagram showing details of implementation example 1 of gaming machine information (gaming machine performance information) (3/4); 4 is a diagram showing details of implementation example 1 of gaming machine information (gaming machine performance information) (4/4); FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing details of implementation example 2 of gaming machine information (gaming machine performance information) (1/4); FIG. 11 is a diagram showing details of implementation example 2 of gaming machine information (gaming machine performance information) (2/4); FIG. 11 is a diagram showing details of implementation example 2 of gaming machine information (gaming machine performance information) (3/4); FIG. 4 is a diagram showing details of implementation example 2 of gaming machine information (gaming machine performance information) (4/4); It is a figure which shows the detail of gaming machine information (gaming machine installation information) (1/2). It is a figure which shows the detail of gaming machine information (gaming machine installation information) (1/2). FIG. 5 is a diagram showing details of gaming machine information (hall controller/fraud monitoring information) (1/5); It is a figure which shows the detail of gaming machine information (hall control/fraud monitoring information) (2/5). It is a diagram showing the details of gaming machine information (hall controller/fraud monitoring information) (3/5). FIG. 4 is a diagram showing details of gaming machine information (hall controller/fraud monitoring information) (4/5); FIG. 5 is a diagram showing details of gaming machine information (hall controller/fraud monitoring information) (5/5); It is a figure which shows the detail of a notification of counting. It is a figure which shows the detail of a notice of rental. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing details of a lending acceptance result response; It is a figure which shows the detail of game machine installation information (1/2). It is a figure which shows the detail of game machine installation information (2/2). It is a diagram showing details of gaming machine information (gaming machine performance information, hall control information, fraud monitoring information) (1/9). It is a diagram showing details of gaming machine information (gaming machine performance information, hall control information, fraud monitoring information) (2/9). It is a diagram showing details of gaming machine information (gaming machine performance information, hall control information, fraud monitoring information) (3/9). It is a diagram showing details of gaming machine information (gaming machine performance information, hall control information, fraud monitoring information) (4/9). It is a diagram showing details of gaming machine information (gaming machine performance information, hall control information, fraud monitoring information) (5/9). It is a diagram showing details of gaming machine information (gaming machine performance information, hall control information, fraud monitoring information) (6/9). It is a diagram showing details of gaming machine information (gaming machine performance information, hall control information, fraud monitoring information) (7/9). It is a diagram showing details of gaming machine information (gaming machine performance information, hall control information, fraud monitoring information) (8/9). It is a diagram showing details of gaming machine information (gaming machine performance information, hall control information, fraud monitoring information) (9/9). It is a figure which shows the detail of game information. It is a figure which shows the detail of a notification of counting. It is a figure which shows the detail of a notice of rental. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing details of a lending acceptance result response; It is a figure which shows the detail of game machine installation information (1/2). It is a figure which shows the detail of game machine installation information (2/2). It is a figure which shows the modification of a game machine kind. It is a diagram showing details of gaming machine information (gaming machine performance information, hall control information, fraud monitoring information) (1/9). It is a diagram showing details of gaming machine information (gaming machine performance information, hall control information, fraud monitoring information) (2/9). It is a diagram showing details of gaming machine information (gaming machine performance information, hall control information, fraud monitoring information) (3/9). It is a diagram showing details of gaming machine information (gaming machine performance information, hall control information, fraud monitoring information) (4/9). It is a diagram showing details of gaming machine information (gaming machine performance information, hall control information, fraud monitoring information) (5/9). It is a diagram showing details of gaming machine information (gaming machine performance information, hall control information, fraud monitoring information) (6/9). It is a diagram showing details of gaming machine information (gaming machine performance information, hall control information, fraud monitoring information) (7/9). It is a diagram showing details of gaming machine information (gaming machine performance information, hall control information, fraud monitoring information) (8/9). It is a diagram showing details of gaming machine information (gaming machine performance information, hall control information, fraud monitoring information) (9/9). It is a figure which shows the modification of each item (1/4). It is a figure which shows the modification of each item (2/4). It is a figure which shows the modification of each item (3/4). It is a figure which shows the modification of each item (4/4). It is a figure which shows the detail of game information. It is a figure which shows the detail of a notification of counting. It is a figure which shows the detail of a notice of rental. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing details of a lending acceptance result response; (1) It is a figure which shows a long press basic pattern. (2) It is a figure which shows a short press basic pattern. (3) It is a figure which shows a long press continuation pattern (the 1). (3) It is a figure which shows a long press continuation pattern (the 2). (3) It is a figure which shows a long press continuation pattern (the 3). (4) It is a figure which shows a short press continuation pattern (the 1). (4) It is a figure which shows short press continuation pattern (the 2). (4) It is a figure which shows short press continuation pattern (the 3). (5) A diagram showing a long-press + short-press pattern (part 1). (5) It is a figure which shows the long press + short press pattern (part 2). (5) It is a figure which shows the long press + short press pattern (3). (6) A diagram showing a short-press + long-press pattern (part 1). (6) A diagram showing a short press + long press pattern (part 2). 9 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure for counting control processing; It is a figure which shows the detail of gaming machine performance information. It is a diagram showing a simple block diagram of a medalless gaming machine. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a list of processes performed outside the use area of the main control ROM; It is a diagram showing a list of processing performed outside the use area of the medal number control ROM. FIG. 13 shows a block diagram including a count button; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a processing procedure for disabling a counting button; FIG. It is a diagram showing a block diagram of a gaming machine (medalless gaming machine) equipped with a medal number control board. It is a block diagram of a gaming machine (medalless gaming machine) equipped with a medal count control board capable of executing game medal insertion processing. It is a diagram showing a communication timing chart between the medalless gaming machine and the dedicated unit. It is a figure which shows the kind of signal. 3 is a diagram showing the configuration of a communication port; FIG. It is a diagram showing a communication timing chart when the dedicated unit is not connected to the game ball rental device connection terminal board. It is a figure which shows the operation|movement after an error and fraud detection (1/4). It is a figure which shows the operation|movement after an error and fraud detection (2/4). It is a figure which shows the operation|movement after an error and fraud detection (3/4). It is a figure which shows the operation|movement after an error and fraud detection (4/4). 10 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of a gaming machine performance information generating process; It is a diagram showing the principle of operation of the management gaming machine of the improved form. It is a diagram showing the principle of operation of the management gaming machine of the improved form. It is a diagram showing a list of states of management gaming machines in the improved form. It is a diagram showing a list of errors managed by the improved management gaming machine (1/2). It is a diagram showing a list of errors managed by the improved management gaming machine (2/2). FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing an example procedure of timer interrupt processing according to the first improvement; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of circulation mechanism control processing according to the first improvement; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure for counting the number of shots in the first improved form; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure for counting the number of shots in the second improved form; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of circulation mechanism control processing according to the second improvement; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of main loop processing according to the second improvement; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing an example of a counting process procedure according to the second improvement; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of timer interrupt processing according to the fourth improvement; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of test-firing signal management processing of the fourth improved form; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of timer interrupt processing according to the fifth improvement; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing an example procedure of timer update processing according to the fifth improvement; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of state management processing according to the fifth improvement; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of state confirmation processing according to the fifth improvement; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of error determination/cancellation processing according to the fifth improvement; FIG. It is a figure which shows the content of a comparative example, and the content of a 6th improvement form (this form). It is a figure which shows the concrete content of the security measure of a 6th improvement form.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter abbreviated as "pachinko machine") 1. As shown in FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. The pachinko machine 1 uses game balls as game media. In the game in the pachinko machine 1, each game ball is a medium having a game value, and the privilege (profit) that the player enjoys as a result of the game is, for example, the game ball acquired by the player. can be converted into a game value based on the number of Hereinafter, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG.

Here, in this specification, the left side as viewed from the player seated facing the pachinko machine 1 is defined as left, the right side as viewed from the player is defined as right, and the upper side as viewed from the player is defined as up. The lower side viewed from the player is referred to as the bottom, the near side viewed from the player is referred to as the front, and the back side viewed from the player is referred to as the rear.

〔overall structure〕
The pachinko machine 1 mainly includes an outer frame unit 2, an integrated door unit 4 and an inner frame assembly 7 (plastic frame, game machine frame) as its main body. An integrated door unit 4 is located on the frontmost side when viewed from the front facing the player. The inner frame assembly 7 is positioned on the rear side (deep side) of the integrated door unit 4 , and the outer frame unit 2 is arranged so as to surround the outer side of the inner frame assembly 7 .

The outer frame unit 2 is a structure in which wood and metal materials are combined in a vertically long rectangular shape. It is fixed using In the vertically long rectangular outer frame unit 2, wood is used for the upper and lower short sides, and metal is used for the left and right long sides.

The integrated door unit 4 has a structure in which the tray unit 6 is integrated at its lower position. The integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are attached to the island facility via the outer frame unit 2, and each of these operates in an opening/closing manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The opening/closing axis of the hinge mechanism (not shown) extends vertically along the left end of the pachinko machine 1 when viewed from the front.

A unified lock unit 9 is provided inside the right edge of the inner frame assembly 7 (left edge in FIG. 2) as viewed from the front in FIG. Correspondingly, locking devices (not shown) are also provided on the right side edges (rear sides) of the integrated door unit 4 and the outer frame unit 2, respectively. As shown in FIG. 1, when the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are closed with respect to the outer frame unit 2, the unified lock unit 9 on the back side locks the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly together with the lock. It disables the opening of 7.

A cylinder lock 6a with a keyhole is provided on the right edge of the tray unit 6. As shown in FIG. For example, when the manager of the game arcade inserts the special key into the keyhole and twists the cylinder lock 6a clockwise, the unified lock unit 9 is actuated and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened together with the inner frame assembly 7. . When all of these are opened from the outer frame unit 2 to the front side (moved like a door), the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed on the front side.

On the other hand, when the cylinder lock 6a is twisted counterclockwise, only the integrated door unit 4 is unlocked while the inner frame assembly 7 remains locked, so that the integrated door unit 4 can be opened. When the integral door unit 4 is opened to the front side, the game board unit 8 is directly exposed, and in this state, the manager of the game parlor can remove obstacles such as clogged balls in the board surface. Further, when the integrated door unit 4 is opened, the tray unit 6 is also opened to the front side together.

Moreover, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with the game board unit 8 as a game unit. The game board unit 8 is supported by the inner frame assembly 7 behind (inside) the integrated door unit 4 . The game board unit 8 can be attached to and detached from the inner frame assembly 7, for example, with the integrated door unit 4 opened to the front side. The integrated door unit 4 has a vertically long circular window 4a formed in the center thereof, and a glass unit (no reference numeral) is mounted in the window 4a. The glass unit is, for example, a combination of two transparent plates (glass plates) cut to match the shape of the window 4a. The glass unit is attached to the rear side of the integrated door unit 4 via a fixture (not shown). A game area 8a (board surface, game board) is formed on the front surface of the game board unit 8, and the game area 8a can be visually recognized by the player from the front side through the window 4a. When the integral door unit 4 is closed, a space is formed between the inner surface of the glass unit and the board surface to allow the game balls to flow down.

The receiving tray unit 6 has a shape projecting from the integrated door unit 4 to the front side as a whole, and an upper tray 6b is formed on the upper surface thereof. In the upper tray 6b, game balls lent to the player (rental balls) and game balls obtained by winning prizes (prize balls) can be stored. Further, the tray unit 6 is formed with a lower tray 6c below the upper tray 6b. The lower tray 6c stores the game balls that have been put out while the upper tray 6b is full. The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is a so-called CR machine (a model connected to a CR unit), and the game balls borrowed by the player are sent from the payout device unit 172 on the back side to the tray unit 6 (upper side) separately from the prize balls. Dispensed onto the tray 6b or lower tray 6c).

A lending operation unit 14 is provided on the upper surface of the tray unit 6, and a ball lending button 10 and a return button 12 are arranged in the lending operation unit 14. - 特許庁When the player operates the ball lending button 10 with a valuable medium (for example, a magnetic recording medium, a storage IC built-in medium, etc.) inserted into a CR unit (not shown), the number corresponding to a predetermined number of degrees (for example, 5 degrees) (For example, 125) game balls are rented. For this reason, a frequency display (not shown) is arranged on the upper surface of the lending operation unit 14, and the remaining frequency of the valuable medium inserted in the CR unit is displayed on this frequency display. By operating the return button 12, the player can receive the return of the valuable medium with remaining points. Although the CR machine is used as an example in this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 may be a cash machine (a model not connected to the CR unit) other than the CR machine.

On the upper surface of the receiving tray unit 6, an upper tray ball removing button 6d is provided in front of the upper tray 6b, and a lower tray ball removing lever 6e is provided in the center before the lower tray 6c. is installed. The player can cause the game balls stored in the upper tray 6b to flow down to the lower tray 6c by, for example, pressing the upper tray ball removal button 6d. Further, the player can drop and eject the game balls stored in the lower tray 6c by sliding the lower tray ball extraction lever 6e leftward, for example. The ejected game balls are received, for example, in a ball receiving box (not shown).

A grip unit 16 is installed at the lower right portion of the tray unit 6 . The player operates the grip unit 16 to operate the shooting control board set 174 and can shoot (hit) a game ball toward the game area 8a (ball shooting device). The shot game ball rises from the lower edge of the game board unit 8 along the left edge, is guided by an outer band (not shown), and is thrown into the game area 8a. A large number of obstacle nails (game nails), windmills (no reference numerals in the figure), etc. are arranged in the game area 8a. flow down. The configuration of the inside of the game area 8a (board surface, game board) will be described later with reference to another drawing.

[Composition of the front of the frame]
The integrated door unit 4 is provided with a left top lens unit 47 and an upper right illumination unit 49 as components for presentation. Among them, the left top lens unit 47 incorporates a glass frame top lamp 46 and a left glass frame decoration lamp 48 , and the upper right illumination unit 49 incorporates a right glass frame decoration lamp 50 . In addition, left and right glass frame decoration lamps 52 are installed in the integral door unit 4 so as to be continuous below the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49. These glass frame decoration lamps 52 are It extends from the left and right edges of the integrated door unit 4 to the front surface of the receiving tray unit 6 so as to wrap around. In the integrated door unit 4, the glass frame top lamp 46, the left and right glass frame decorative lamps 50, 52, etc. are arranged so as to surround the glass unit.

The various lamps 46, 48, 50, 52 described above perform effects by, for example, light emission from built-in LEDs (lighting, blinking, change in luminance gradation, change in color tone, etc.). Further, on the upper part of the integrated door unit 4, the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49 are provided with glass frame top speakers 54 and 55, respectively. On the other hand, an outer frame speaker 56 is incorporated in the lower left position of the outer frame unit 2 . These speakers 54, 55, and 56 output sound effects, BGM, voices, etc. (general sound) to execute production.

In addition, in the center of the tray unit 6, an effect switching button 45 (operation input receiving means) is installed in front of the upper tray 6b. The effect switching button 45 is capable of a plurality of types of operations (single press, multiple presses, continuous press, long press, etc.), and accepts operation inputs. The player presses (operates) the effect switching button 45 to switch the effect content (for example, the background screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 42), for example, while the pattern is fluctuating or the big win is being confirmed. Alternatively, it is possible to generate some kind of performance (announcement performance, variable probability promotion performance, promotion performance during a big role, etc.) during the jackpot game.

Furthermore, a jog dial 45a is installed around the effect switching button 45 so as to surround the effect switching button 45 (operation input receiving means, rotary selector). By rotating the jog dial 45a, the player can change the effect displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, for example.

[Composition of the back side]
As shown in FIG. 2, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 includes a power control unit 162, a main control board unit 170, a payout device unit 172, a flow path unit 173, a launch control board set 174, and a payout control board unit 176. , back cover unit 178 and the like are installed. In addition, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, various electronic devices (including a control computer not shown) that constitute the power system and control system of the pachinko machine 1, an external terminal board 160, a power cord (power plug) 164, A ground wire (ground terminal) 166, connection wiring (not shown), and the like are installed.

The main control board unit 170 incorporates a main control device, and the performance display monitor 200 is connected to the main control device.
The performance display monitor 200 is arranged in the main controller so as to be visible in the upper left area of the main control board unit 170 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back side, and has four 7-segment LEDs 201 to 204. .

The performance display monitor 200 (base display device) displays the base. In addition, the performance display monitor 200 displays setting values (set values).

The four 7-segment LEDs 201 to 204 are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and each 7-segment LED consists of 7 segments capable of displaying decimal Arabic numerals and a dot segment positioned to the lower right of the 7 segments. It is composed by
Performance display monitor 200 is visible through a transparent case covering main control board unit 170 .

The main controller is also provided with a RAM clear switch 304 and a keyhole 306 for setting keys. The RAM clear switch 304 is a switch used when clearing the RAM (initializing the RAM 76), ie, initializing the RAM (RWM) provided in the main controller. A setting key keyhole 306 is a keyhole for inserting a setting key required for changing or referring to settings.

The RAM clear switch 304 is depressible through a through hole formed in a transparent case covering the main control board unit 170 . Note that the RAM clear switch 304 may be arranged outside the transparent case. The setting key keyhole 306 is provided in a state in which the key cylinder passes through the transparent case (a state in which the transparent case surrounds the key cylinder). Therefore, the setting key can be inserted and rotated while the transparent case remains sealed.

RAM clear switch 304 is a switch for performing RAM clear, when the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 304 is pressed, a RAM clear signal is input to the main control device 70 and the payout control device 92, RAM clear processing is executed. Note that the RAM clear switch 304 may be provided in the power control unit 162 . In addition, when the RAM clear signal is not input to the payout control device 92 and the main control device 70 receives the input of the RAM clear signal, the main control device 70 transmits the RAM clear command to the payout control device 92. good too.

Note that the arrangement positions of the performance display monitor 200, the RAM clear switch 304, and the setting key keyhole 306 shown in FIG. 2 are only examples, and they can be arranged at arbitrary positions. Further, the performance display monitor 200, the RAM clear switch 304, and the setting key keyhole 306 may be arranged outside the main controller and connected to the main controller.

The dispensing device unit 172 has, for example, a prize ball tank 172a and a prize ball case (no reference numerals). In this state, game balls replenished from a replenishment path (not shown) can be stored. The game balls stored in the prize ball tank 172a are led to the prize ball case through an upper prize ball gutter (not shown). The flow path unit 173 guides the game balls delivered from the payout device unit 172 toward the tray unit 6 on the front side.

The external terminal board 160 is for connecting the pachinko machine 1 to an external electronic device (for example, a data display device, a hall computer, etc.). Various external information signals (e.g. prize ball information, door opening information, pattern confirmation number information, jackpot information, start opening information, etc.) representing the progress state, maintenance state, etc. are output to external electronic devices. ing.

The power cord 164 secures the power supply (electric power) necessary for the pachinko machine 1 to operate, for example, by being connected to a power supply (for example, AC 24V) installed in an island facility of the game arcade. The ground wire 166 is also connected to a ground terminal installed in the island equipment to secure the grounding of the pachinko machine 1 .

FIG. 3 is a front view showing the game board unit 8 alone. The game board unit 8 has a game board 8b serving as a base, and a game area 8a is formed on the front side of the game board 8b. The game board 8b is made of, for example, a transparent resin board, and when the game board unit 8 is fixed to the inner frame assembly 7, the front surface of the game board 8b is parallel to the glass unit. On the front surface of the game board 8b, the above-described game area 8a is formed inside a substantially circular firing rail (no reference numeral).

In the game area 8a, a relatively large production unit 40 is arranged at its central position, and the game area 8a is largely divided into a left part, a right part and a lower part centering on the production unit 40. - 特許庁The left part of the game area 8a is the first game area (left-handed area) used in the normal game state (low probability non-time shortening state) or latent probability variable state (high probability non-time shortening state), and the game area 8a The right part of is the second game area (right hitting area, specific area) used in the advantageous game state (jackpot game state, small win game state, low probability time reduction state, high probability time reduction state, etc.) . In addition, in the game area 8a, around the production unit 40, there are a middle starting winning opening 26, a starting gate 20, normal winning openings 22, 24, a variable starting winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, and a second variable winning device. 31 etc. are distributed and installed.

Among them, the middle start winning opening 26 is arranged in the center of the lower part of the game area 8a.
Also, the second variable winning device 31, the starting gate 20, the first variable winning device 30 and the variable starting winning device 28 are arranged in this order from the top on the right side of the game area 8a.

The three normal winning openings 22 on the left side are arranged in the left part of the game area 8a, and the single normal winning opening 24 (predetermined winning opening) on the right side is between the starting gate 20 and the first variable winning device 30. are placed.

The game ball thrown into the game area 8a enters the middle start winning opening 26, the normal winning openings 22 and 24 in the process of flowing down, or enters the second variable winning device 31 at the time of opening operation. , pass through the starting gate 20, enter the first variable winning device 30 during the opening operation, or enter the variable starting winning device 28 during the opening operation.

Here, the game ball flowing down the left side area of the game area 8a may enter mainly the middle start winning opening 26 or the normal winning opening 22.例文帳に追加On the other hand, game balls flowing down the right area of the game area 8a mainly enter the second variable winning device 31 during the opening operation, pass through the starting gate 20, or enter the normal winning opening 24. Alternatively, there is a possibility that the ball will land in the first variable prize winning device 30 during the opening operation, or the ball will land in the variable starting prize winning device 28 during the opening operation.

The game ball that has passed through the starting gate 20 continues to flow down in the game area 8a, but there are a middle starting winning opening 26, normal winning openings 22, 24, a variable starting winning apparatus 28, a first variable winning apparatus 30, and a second variable winning opening. A game ball entered into the device 31 is recovered to the back side of the game board unit 8 through a through hole formed in a game board (a plywood material, a transparent board, etc. that constitute the game board unit 8).

Here, in the present embodiment, due to the configuration of the game area 8a (board surface), when a game ball is entered into the middle start winning opening 26 or the normal winning opening 22, the left side area (left-handed hitting) in the game area 8a It is necessary to hit a game ball (perform a so-called "left hit") in the area).

On the other hand, when the game ball is entered into the variable start-up winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, or the normal winning opening 24, the area of the right side of the game area 8a (right-handed area ) (executing the so-called “right-handed hitting”).

The variable starting prize winning device 28 operates when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied (when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a winning manner), and accordingly, the entry into the right starting prize winning port 28a (start winning prize port). Enables balls (usually motorized accessories). The variable starting winning device 28 has one opening/closing member 28b, and the opening/closing member 28b reciprocates in the horizontal direction along the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. The opening/closing member 28b is in the closed position with the tip facing upward, and at this time the ball cannot be entered into the right start winning opening 28a (there is no gap for the game ball to enter). On the other hand, when the variable starting prize winning device 28 operates, the opening/closing member 28b is displaced from the closed position toward the open position (falls rightward) to open the right starting prize winning port 28a. During this time, the variable starting prize winning device 28 is in a state where the game ball can enter, and can cause the ball to enter the right starting prize opening 28a (variable starting prize winning means). In addition, at this time, the opening/closing member 28b also functions as a member that guides the entry of the game ball into the starting prize winning opening 28a.

The first variable winning device 30, when a specified condition is satisfied (for example, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a big win, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a small win, the second If the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of "5 round normal symbol" or "5 round probability variable symbol"), it will be possible to win the first big winning mouth 30b (upper big winning mouth) (special electric accessory, first special winning event generating means).

The first variable winning device 30 has one opening/closing member 30a, and the opening/closing member 30a reciprocates in the horizontal direction along the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. The opening/closing member 30a is in the closed position with the tip facing upward, and at this time, the ball cannot enter the first big winning hole 30b (there is no gap for the game ball to enter). On the other hand, when the first variable prize winning device 30 operates, the opening/closing member 30a is displaced from the closed position toward the open position (falls leftward) to open the first big prize winning port 30b. During this time, the first variable winning device 30 is in a state in which the game ball can enter, and the ball can enter the first big winning hole 30b. At this time, the opening/closing member 30a also functions as a member that guides the entry of the game ball into the first big winning hole 30b.

The second variable winning device 31, when a special condition is satisfied (for example, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode (the second special symbol is a "5 round normal symbol" or a "5 round probability variable (Except when it is stopped and displayed in the form of "symbol"))) to enable a prize to be awarded to the second large prize winning port 31b (lower large prize winning port) (special electric accessory, second special winning event occurrence means).

The second variable winning device 31 has one opening/closing member 31a, and the opening/closing member 31a reciprocates in the horizontal direction along the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. The opening/closing member 31a is in the closed position with the tip facing upward, and at this time, the ball cannot enter the second big winning hole 31b (there is no gap for the game ball to enter). On the other hand, when the second variable prize winning device 31 operates, the opening/closing member 31a is displaced from the closed position toward the open position (falls leftward) to open the second big prize winning port 31b. During this time, the second variable winning device 31 is in a state in which the game ball can enter, and the ball can enter the second big winning hole 31b. At this time, the opening/closing member 31a also functions as a member that guides the entry of the game ball into the second big winning hole 31b.

The arrangement of the obstructing nails and the shape of the structure installed in the game board unit 8 are basically the variable starting winning device 28 (right starting winning port 28a when opened) and the first variable winning device 30 (right starting winning port 28a when opened). 1 big winning hole 30b), second variable winning device 31 (second big winning hole 31b when open) is in a mode that does not extremely hinder the flow of the game ball, but the variable start while the game ball is open The ball does not always enter the winning device 28 (right starting winning port 28a), the first variable winning device 30 (first major winning port 30b), or the second variable winning device 31 (second major winning port 31b). Ball entry occurs randomly.

The game board unit 8 is provided with the effect unit 40 from its central position to its right side. The effect unit 40 has an upper edge 40a that functions as a guide member for changing the direction of flow of the game ball, and has various decorative parts 40b and 40c inside. The decorative parts 40b and 40c enhance the decorativeness of the game board unit 8 by their three-dimensional shape, and can perform dramatic actions by emitting transmitted light from, for example, built-in light emitters (LEDs, etc.). . In addition, a liquid crystal display 42 (image display) is installed inside the production unit 40, and various production images are displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, including production patterns corresponding to special patterns. . Thus, the game board unit 8 impresses the player with the features of the pachinko machine 1 based on the configuration of the board surface and the decorativeness of the effect unit 40. - 特許庁In addition, when the game board 8b is a transparent resin board (for example, an acrylic board), decorativeness is added by various decorations (including movable bodies and light-emitting bodies) arranged not only on the front side but also behind the game board 8b. can do.

In addition, inside the production unit 40, a drive source (for example, a motor, a solenoid, etc.) is attached together with a movable body 40f for production (for example, an animal character). The rendering movable body 40f can execute rendering involving the action of a tangible object, in addition to the rendering using an image by the liquid crystal display 42 and the rendering by the light emitting device. The effect using these movable bodies 40f can exert appealing power different from the effect using a two-dimensional image.

A ball guide passage 40d is formed on the left edge of the effect unit 40, and a rolling stage 40e is formed on the lower edge thereof. The ball guide passage 40d is opened diagonally upward to the left in the game area 8a, and when a game ball flowing down in the game area 8a randomly flows into the ball guide passage 40d, it passes through the interior and rolls. It is released onto the stage 40e. The upper surface of the rolling stage 40e has a smooth curved surface, on which the game ball can freely roll in the horizontal direction. The game ball rolling on the rolling stage 40e eventually flows down into the lower game area 8a. A ball discharge path 40k is formed at the center position of the rolling stage 40e, and the game ball guided to the ball discharge path 40k from the rolling stage 40e easily flows into the middle starting winning opening 26 directly below it. .

In addition, an out port 32 is formed in the game area 8a, and game balls that do not enter (win a prize) in various winning ports are finally collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through the out port 32.例文帳に追加In addition, including the game ball entering the normal winning openings 22, 24, the middle starting winning opening 26, the right starting winning opening 28a, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31, is driven into the game area 8a. All the game balls that are caught are recovered to the back side of the game board unit 8.例文帳に追加The collected game balls are discharged out of the frame from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 through an out passage assembly (not shown), and join the replenishment route of the island facility (not shown).

FIG. 4 is a front view showing an enlarged part of the game board unit 8 (the right side position within the window 4a). That is, in the game board unit 8, for example, a normal symbol display device 33 and a normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a are provided on the right side of the window 4a, and a first special symbol display device 34 and a second special symbol display device 35 are provided. And a game state display device 38 is provided. Among them, the normal design display device 33 alternately lights two lamps (LEDs), for example, to variably display the normal design, and stops displaying the normal design by lighting or extinguishing the lamp. The normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a displays the number of memories of 0 to 4 by a combination of extinguishing, lighting, and blinking of two lamps (LED), for example. For example, in a display mode in which both lamps are turned off, the stored number is displayed as 0, in a display mode in which one lamp is lit, a stored number is displayed as 1, and in a display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. The number of memories is displayed as 2, the number of memories is 3 in the display mode in which one lamp is blinking and the other lamp is lit, and the number of memories is 4 in the display mode in which both lamps are blinking. For example, to display an individual. Although two lamps (LED) are used here, four lamps (LED) may be used to form the normal symbol working memory lamp 33a. In this case, the number of working memories can be displayed by the number of lamps that are lit.

Each time a game ball passes through the starting gate 20, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a changes to a display mode after incrementing one by one in the sense of memorizing the passage that triggers the operation lottery. (up to 4), and with the passage as a trigger, the display mode changes to the display mode after the decrease by 1 each time the variation of the normal symbol is started. In this embodiment, when the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), the game ball passes through the starting gate 20 in a state where the normal symbol can already start to change (at the time of stop display). However, the display mode does not change. That is, the number of memories (up to 4) represented by the display mode of the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a represents the number of passages in which the normal symbol variation has not yet started at that time.

In addition, the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 display the fluctuation state and the stop state of the corresponding first special symbol or the second special symbol by, for example, 7-segment LEDs (with dots), respectively. (symbol display means). The first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 may have a form in which a plurality of dot LEDs are arranged geometrically (for example, in a circular shape).

In addition, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a and the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a are, for example, two lamps (LED) extinguished or lit, depending on the display mode composed of a combination of blinking, each 0 to 4 (memory number display means). For example, in a display mode in which both lamps are turned off, the stored number is displayed as 0, in a display mode in which one lamp is lit, a stored number is displayed as 1, and in a display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. The number of memories is displayed as 2, the number of memories is 3 in the display mode in which one lamp is blinking and the other lamp is lit, and the number of memories is 4 in the display mode in which both lamps are blinking. For example, to display an individual.

The first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is displayed after increasing by one in the sense of memorizing that the game ball has entered the middle start winning opening 26 each time the game ball enters the middle starting winning opening 26. It changes to a mode (up to 4), and changes to a display mode after decreasing one by one each time the variation of the special symbol is started with the entry ball as a trigger. In addition, the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a increases by one in the sense that each time a game ball enters the variable starting prize winning device 28, the game ball enters the right starting prize opening 28a. (up to 4), and every time the special symbol starts to change with the entry ball as a trigger, it changes to the display mode after decreasing by one. In addition, in this embodiment, when the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), the first special symbol is already in a state where the fluctuation can be started (at the time of stop display). The display mode does not change even if a game ball enters the ball. In addition, when the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), the game ball enters the variable start winning device 28 in a state where the second special symbol can already start to change (at the time of stop display). The display mode does not change even if the ball is thrown. That is, the number of memories (maximum 4) represented by the display mode of each special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, 35a is the number of entering balls whose variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has not yet started at that time. represents the number of times

The gaming state display device 38 includes LEDs corresponding to, for example, jackpot type display lamps 38a, 38b, 38c, probability variation state display lamp 38d, time saving state display lamp 38e, and firing position designation lamp 38f. In addition, in this embodiment, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol display device 34, the second special symbol display device 35, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, the second special The symbol operation memory lamp 35a and the game state display device 38 are mounted on one integrated display board 89 and attached to the game board unit 8. - 特許庁

[Control configuration]
Next, a configuration related to control of the pachinko machine 1 will be described.
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing various electronic devices installed in the pachinko machine 1. As shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 1 is provided with a main control device 70 (main control computer) that serves as the core of control operations. have. Note that the main controller 70 is built in the main control board unit 170 .

In addition, the main control unit 70 is equipped with a circuit board (main control board) on which a main control CPU 72, which is a central processing unit, is mounted. RWM) 76 or the like is integrated as an LSI. The main controller 70 is equipped with a random number circuit (random number generator) 75, an interrupt controller (interrupt CTR) 192, a parallel I/O port 79, a timer circuit (PTC) 194, and a serial communication circuit (SCU) 196. ing. Among them, the random number circuit 75 generates a hardware random number (for example, 0 to 65535 in decimal notation) for judging a big hit in a special symbol lottery or normal symbol lottery. It is input to the main control CPU 72 . The interrupt controller 192 also receives interrupt requests (XINT interrupt, PTC interrupt, SCU interrupt) from the parallel I/O port 79, timer circuit 194, and serial communication circuit 196, and controls these interrupt requests based on their priority. . In addition, the main controller 70 includes a RAM clear switch 71 for initializing the RAM 76 and for changing settings, etc., a parallel I/O port 79, a clock generation circuit (not shown), and monitoring various states. It is equipped with peripheral ICs such as a reset controller that generates a reset as necessary, and these are mounted on the circuit board together with the main control CPU 72 . A signal transmission path, a power supply path, a control bus, and the like are formed as wiring patterns on the circuit board (or an inner layer portion). The I/O port of the main controller 70 may be of serial type.

Further, the main controller 70 is provided with a setting change device 300 , a setting key switch 302 and a RAM clear switch 304 . The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) changes settings by operating the setting change device 300. FIG. The setting change device 300 is a device for switching settings (at least settings relating to the probability of winning a special symbol lottery), and operates by operating the RAM clear switch 304 provided in the pachinko machine 1 (setting change means). Also, the setting means a combination of operation probabilities. Furthermore, the operating probability means the probability of displaying a combination of special symbols that will activate the conditional device (that will result in the execution of the jackpot game). The setting key switch 302 is an input device for inputting a signal (ON/OFF) indicating the rotation state of the setting key, which is essential for switching settings, as the setting key is rotated. Various methods can be adopted for the procedure for changing the setting, and for example, the following procedure can be used.

(1) First, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off.
(2) Next, open the door of the pachinko machine 1 with a special key (door key). Specifically, the dedicated key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 6a and rotated to the right to open the integrated door unit 4 together with the inner frame assembly 7 .
(3) Since the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a setting key keyhole for inserting the setting key and the RAM clear switch 304, the setting key is inserted into the setting key keyhole and the setting key is pressed. Rotate to the right.
(4) Then, the pachinko machine 1 is turned on.

(5) As a result, a signal (ON) indicating that the setting key has been rotated to the change position is input by the setting key switch 302, and the setting can be changed based on this input signal. At this time, a safety lock is applied by a lock mechanism (not shown). Therefore, the setting key cannot be removed unless it is returned to its original position.

When the power is turned on while the setting key is rotated rightward while the RAM clear switch 304 is turned on, the setting value can be changed (setting change state). On the other hand, when the power is turned on without turning on the RAM clear switch 304 while the setting key is rotated to the right, the setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation state, setting reference state).

(6) By pressing the RAM clear switch 304 an arbitrary number of times in a state in which the setting can be changed, the setting can be changed to, for example, one of six steps.
The set value can be displayed on, for example, the performance display monitor 200, a dedicated 7-segment LED, or the gaming state display device 38 (special symbol display device, etc.).

(7) In the case of a slot machine, when the desired setting is reached, lever ON processing is required. A process of rotating in a direction, a process of turning on a setting change confirmation button (not shown), etc.) may be executed, or the lever ON process may be omitted. In this embodiment, once the desired setting is reached, the setting key is rotated counterclockwise to return to its original position. By this operation, a signal (OFF) indicating that the setting key has been returned to its original position is input by the setting key switch 302, and the setting change is confirmed based on this input signal.

(8) Then, when the setting change is confirmed, the setting key can be removed from the setting key keyhole. By this operation, if the set value is displayed on the performance display monitor 200, dedicated 7-segment LED, or game state display device 38, the display disappears.
(9) Finally, the door of the pachinko machine 1 is closed. This completes the setting change. When the setting change is completed, a normal game is started.

When the setting is changed, the main control CPU72 stores the changed setting value in the setting value buffer of the RAM76. The setting value buffer can be a memory area to be backed up.

[Outline of setting change]
The outline of the setting change is as follows.
When the power is turned on with the "setting key ON", the "inner frame open state", and the "RAM clear switch depressed state", the setting is changed (setting change mode) after the RAM is cleared.
When the settings are being changed, there is no display on the main display (various lamps included in the game state display device 38), and no game balls can be shot or game balls can be won.

In this case, the left two 7-segment LEDs (identification segments) of the performance display monitor 200 display "rn." be. Also, when the RAM clear switch is pressed, the set value changes in the range of 1-6.

When the "setting key is turned off", the setting is confirmed, and the "-" segment is extinguished (not displayed), such as "blank (non-display) 1" for the display of the ratio segment.
In this state, if the inner frame is closed (actually, if the closed state continues for 100 ms), the state during setting change is terminated, and once it shifts to the state before the power is turned off, it becomes a playable state. Transition.

In the present embodiment, an example in which the RAM clear switch 304 and the setting change switch are used together has been described, but a setting change switch may be provided separately from the RAM clear switch 304 .

[Overview of setting confirmation]
The outline of setting confirmation (see setting) is as follows.
When the power is turned on with the "setting key ON", the "inner frame open state", and the "RAM clear switch not depressed", the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) is entered.
As in the state of changing settings, in the state of checking settings, there is no display on the main display, and no game balls can be shot or game balls can be won.

In this case, the two 7-segment LEDs (identification segments) on the left side of the performance display monitor show "rn." is displayed. Also, while the settings are being checked, even if the RAM clear switch is pressed, the set values do not change.

In this state, if the "setting key is OFF" and the "inner frame is closed" (actually, if the closed state continues for 100 ms), the state of checking the settings ends, and the After shifting to the state, it shifts to the playable state.
In this embodiment, setting confirmation cannot be performed in the playable state, but setting confirmation may be performed in the playable state.

The starting gate 20 described above is integrally provided with a gate switch 78 for detecting passage of a game ball. In addition, the game board unit 8 includes a middle start winning opening 26, a variable starting winning apparatus 28, a middle starting winning opening switch 80 and a right starting winning opening corresponding to the first variable winning apparatus 30 and the second variable winning apparatus 31, respectively. A switch 82, a first count switch 84 and a second count switch 85 are provided. Each starting winning prize port switch 80, 82 is for detecting entry of a game ball into the middle starting winning prize port 26 and the variable starting prize winning device 28 (right starting prize winning port 28a). Also, the first count switch 84 is for detecting the entry of game balls into the first variable winning device 30 (first big winning hole) and counting the number. Furthermore, the second count switch 85 is for detecting the entry of game balls into the second variable prize winning device 31 (second big prize winning port 31b) and counting the number thereof.

Similarly, the game board unit 8 includes a first winning hole switch 86 for detecting the entry of a game ball into the normal winning hole 22 and a second winning hole switch for detecting the entry of a game ball into the normal winning hole 24. 81 are equipped. In addition, for the three normal winning openings 22 on the left side, the configuration using the common winning opening switch 86 is exemplified, but for example, three winning opening switches are installed, and the game ball for each normal winning opening 22 Incoming balls may be detected individually.

In any case, winning detection signals from these switches are input to the main control CPU 72 via an input/output driver (not shown). Due to the configuration of the game board unit 8, in this embodiment, the winning detection signals from the gate switch 78, the first count switch 84, the second count switch 85, the first winning port switch 86, and the second winning port switch 81 are The signals are transmitted via the panel relay terminal board 87, and the panel relay terminal board 87 is provided with wiring patterns, connection terminals, and the like for relaying the winning detection signals.

Also, the game board unit 8 is provided with an out switch 99 . In the game board unit 8, game balls passing through the normal winning openings 22 and 24, the middle starting winning opening 26, the right starting winning opening 28a, the first big winning opening 30b, the second big winning opening 31b, and the out opening 32 join. A confluence passage is formed to connect the two, and an out switch 99 is provided in this confluence passage. The out switch 99 detects a game ball passing through the merging passage, and a detection signal is input to the main controller 70 each time a game ball is detected. Main controller 70 counts the number of out balls based on the detection signal input from out switch 99 . Here, since the game balls shot into the game area 8a are always discharged outside the pachinko machine 1 through the confluence passage, the out switch 99 determines the number of shot balls shot into the game area 8a, That is, the number of discharges (the number of out balls) discharged from the game area 8a is counted.

The above-described normal symbol display device 33, normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a and game The display operation of the status display device 38 is controlled based on a control signal from the main control CPU 72 . The main control CPU 72 outputs control signals to these display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and lamps 33a, 34a, 35a according to the progress of the game, and controls the lighting state of each LED. Further, these display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and lamps 33a, 34a, 35a are installed in the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89 as described above. A control signal is transmitted to the display substrate 89 from the main control CPU 72 via the panel relay terminal board 87 .

A performance display monitor 200 is connected to the main controller 70 via a panel relay terminal board 87 . The display operation of the performance display monitor 200 is controlled based on a control signal from the main control CPU 72 . The main control CPU 72 outputs a control signal to the performance display monitor 200 according to the calculation state of the base, and controls the lighting state of the 7 segments 201-204.
Although the performance display monitor 200 is connected to the main controller 70 via the panel relay terminal board 87, it may be connected to the main controller 70 without the panel relay terminal board 87. , the performance display monitor 200 may be arranged as an internal configuration of the main controller 70 .

Also, in the game board unit 8, corresponding to the variable starting prize winning device 28, the first variable prize winning device 30 and the second variable prize winning device 31, respectively, a normal electric accessory solenoid 88, a first big prize winning opening solenoid 90 and a second A second prize winning opening solenoid 97 is provided. These solenoids 88, 90, 97 are operated (excited) based on control signals from the main control CPU 72, and open and close (operate) the variable starting prize winning device 28, the first variable prize winning device 30 and the second variable prize winning device 31, respectively. Let Control signals for these solenoids 88 , 90 , 97 are also transmitted from the main control CPU 72 via the panel relay terminal plate 87 .

In addition, a glass frame open switch 91 is installed in the integrated door unit 4 and a plastic frame open switch 93 is installed in the inner frame assembly 7 . When the integrated door unit 4 is opened alone, a contact signal from the glass frame opening switch 91 is input to the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72), and the inner frame assembly 7 is opened from the outer frame unit 2. Then, a contact signal from the plastic frame opening switch 93 is input to the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72). The main control CPU 72 can detect the open state of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 from these contact signals. When detecting the open state of the integrated door unit 4 or the inner frame assembly 7, the main control CPU 72 generates a door open information signal as an external information signal.

A payout control device 92 is equipped on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁This payout control device 92 (payout control computer) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 described above. The payout control device 92 is equipped with a circuit board (payout control board) on which a payout control CPU 94 is mounted, and this payout control CPU 94 also has a CPU core (not shown) and a semiconductor memory such as a ROM 96 and a RAM (RAM) 98. It is configured as an integrated LSI. The payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 based on the prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and executes the payout operation of the requested number of game balls. The main control CPU 72 generates a prize ball information signal as an external information signal together with the prize ball instruction command.

The payout control device 92 can communicate with the main control device 70 and pays out game balls based on payout commands transmitted from the main control device 70 .

A payout motor 102 (for example, a stepping motor) and a payout device board 100 are installed in a prize ball case (not shown) of the payout device unit 172. The payout device board 100 is provided with a drive circuit for the payout motor 102. there is The payout device board 100 specifically controls the rotation angle of the payout motor 102 based on the payout number instruction signal from the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94), and pays out the indicated number of game balls from the prize ball case. let out The paid out game balls are sent to the receiving tray unit 6 through the payout channel in the channel unit 173 .

In addition, for example, a payout road ball disconnect switch 104 is installed at the upstream position of the prize ball case, and a payout counting switch 106 is installed at the downstream position of the payout motor 102 . Each time the payout motor 102 is driven to actually pay out the prize balls, a count signal from the payout count switch 106 is input to the payout device board 100 . Also, when the ball runs out at the upstream position of the prize ball case, a contact signal from the payout path ball break switch 104 is input to the payout device board 100 . The payout device board 100 transmits the input count signal and contact signal to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). The payout control CPU 94 can detect the actual number of payouts and the out-of-ball state based on the signal received from the payout device board 100 .

Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a full tank switch 161, for example, inside the lower tray 6c (at the back when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). The actually paid out prize balls (game balls) are discharged to the upper tray 6b through the channel unit 173, but when the upper tray 6b is filled with game balls, more game balls are paid out as described above. flows into the lower plate 6c. Furthermore, when the lower tray 6c is filled with game balls, the full tank switch 161 is thereby turned on, and a full tank detection signal is input to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). In response to this, the payout control CPU 94 temporarily suspends further prize ball motions even if a prize ball instruction command is received from the main control CPU 72, and stores the remaining number of prize balls that have not been paid out in the RAM 98.例文帳に追加The memory in the RAM 98 can be backed up even when the power is turned off, so even if a power failure (including a momentary power failure) occurs during the game, the remaining number of unpaid prize balls will not be lost. .

Also, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a firing solenoid 110 is installed together with a firing control board 108. - 特許庁Also, a ball feed solenoid 111 is provided in the tray unit 6 . The firing control board 108, the firing solenoid 110 and the ball feed solenoid 111 constitute the aforementioned firing control board set 174. Of these, the firing control board 108 is provided with drive circuits for the firing solenoid 110 and the ball feed solenoid 111. ing. Among them, the ball feed solenoid 111 performs an operation to feed the game balls stored in the receiving tray unit 6 one by one to a predetermined shooting position within the launcher case. Also, the shooting solenoid 110 hits the game ball sent to the shooting position, and continuously (intermittently) launches the game balls one by one toward the game area 8a as described above. In addition, the shooting interval of game balls is, for example, an interval of about 0.6 seconds (within 100 balls per minute).

On the other hand, the grip unit 16 positioned on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a firing lever volume 112, a touch sensor 114 and a firing stop switch 116. - 特許庁Of these, the firing lever volume 112 generates an analog signal proportional to the amount of operation (so-called stroke) of the firing handle by the player. Also, the touch sensor 114 detects that the player's body is touching the grip unit 16 (shooting handle, ball shooting device) from changes in capacitance, and outputs a detection signal. The firing stop switch 116 generates a firing stop signal (contact signal) according to the player's operation.

A firing relay terminal plate 118 is installed in the receiver unit 6, and each signal from the firing lever volume 112, the touch sensor 114, and the firing stop switch 116 is transmitted to the firing control board 108 via the firing relay terminal plate 118. be done. A drive signal from the firing control board 108 is applied to the ball feed solenoid 111 via the firing relay terminal plate 118 . When the player operates the firing handle, the firing lever volume 112 generates an analog signal (which may be an encoded digital signal) according to the amount of operation, and the firing solenoid 110 is driven based on the signal at this time. As a result, the strength of hitting the game ball is adjusted according to the amount of operation by the player. The drive circuit of the firing control board 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110 when the detection signal from the touch sensor 114 is off (low level) or when the firing stop signal is input from the firing stop switch 116. do. In addition, a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 120 is connected to the shooting relay terminal plate 118, and when the CR unit is not connected to this game ball lending device connection terminal plate 120, similarly the shooting control board The drive circuit at 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110 .

Further, the tray unit 6 incorporates a frequency display board 122 and a lending/returning switch board 123 . Of these, the frequency display board 122 is provided with an indicator (3-digit 7-segment LED) for the frequency display section. In addition, the lending and returning switch board 123 is mounted with switch modules connected to the ball lending button 10 and the returning button 12, respectively. And it is transmitted from the return switch board 123 to the CR unit via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 120 . Also, from the CR unit, a frequency signal indicating the remaining frequency of the valuable medium is transmitted to the frequency display board 122 via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 120 . A display circuit (not shown) on the frequency display substrate 122 drives a display based on the frequency signal to numerically display the remaining frequency of the valuable medium. Further, when no valuable medium is inserted into the CR unit or when the remaining points of the inserted valuable medium become 0, the display circuit of the point display board 122 drives the display to display a demonstration (valuable medium ) can also be displayed.

In addition, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a performance control device 124 (computer for controlling performance) as a control configuration. A performance control device 124 is provided at a position covered by a back cover unit 178 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加This performance control device 124 controls the performance accompanying the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1 . The performance control device 124 is also equipped with a performance control CPU 126, which is a central processing unit, on a circuit board (composite sub-control board). The effect control CPU 126 is configured as an LSI incorporating a semiconductor memory such as a RAM (RWM) 130 and eDRAM 131 together with a CPU core (not shown). The performance control device 124 is equipped with various functions necessary for realizing the performance in the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加For example, to control devices such as the VDP 152 for drawing the effect screen reproduced on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, the lamps 46 to 52 that produce visual effects, the board lamp 53, the movable body motor 57, the status LED 58, etc. A driver IC 132, an audio IC 134 for controlling the speakers 54, 55, 56 for outputting audio, and the like are provided. The internal functional configuration of the effect control device 124 will be described later in detail using another drawing.

The production control device 124 and the main control device 70 are connected to each other, for example, via a communication harness (not shown). However, communication between them is performed only in one direction from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and communication in the opposite direction is not performed. It should be noted that the communication harness, depending on the bus width of various production commands (hereinafter referred to as "subcommand" or "production command") transmitted from the main control device 70 to the production control device 124 A parallel format may be employed, or a serial format may be employed in accordance with the hardware configuration of each driver (I/O).

In this embodiment, a sub-connection board 136 is installed on the inner surface of the integrated door unit 4, and driving signals from the driver IC 132 and the audio IC 134 are transmitted via the sub-connection board 136 to various lamps 46 to 52, speakers 54, 55, 56. Also, the effect switching button 45 and a volume control switch (not shown) are connected to the sub-connection board 136 , and when the player operates the effect change-over button 45 and the volume control switch, their contact signals are transmitted through the sub-connection board 136 . It is input to the production control device 124 . Further, a jog dial 45 a is connected to the sub-connection board 136 , and when the player rotates the jog dial 45 a , the rotation signal is input to the effect control device 124 through the sub-connection board 136 . Here, an example in which the effect switching button 45 and the jog dial 45a are connected to the sub-connection board 136 is given. may be

In addition, a driver board 138 is installed in the game board unit 8 , and a movable body motor 57 and a status LED 58 are connected to the driver board 138 in addition to the board surface lamp 53 . The movable body motor 57 drives the movable body 40f via, for example, a link mechanism (not shown). A drive signal from the driver IC 132 is applied to the board surface lamp 53, the movable body motor 57 and the status LED 58 via the driver board 138, respectively.

The liquid crystal display 42 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8 , and its display screen is visible through a substantially rectangular opening formed in the game board unit 8 . In addition, an inverter board 158 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and this inverter board 158 generates AC power applied to the backlight of the liquid crystal display 42 (for example, a cold cathode tube).

In addition, a power control unit 162 is equipped on the back side of the inner frame assembly 7 . This power supply control unit 162 incorporates a switching power supply circuit, and when it takes in external power (for example, AC 24V, etc.) from the island equipment through the power cord 164, it can generate necessary power (for example, DC +34V, +12V, etc.). The power generated by the power control unit 162 is distributed to the main control device 70 , the payout control device 92 , the performance control device 124 and the inverter board 158 . Further, power is supplied to the launch control board 108 via the payout control device 92, and power is supplied to the CR unit via the terminal board 120 for lending equipment such as game balls. Low-voltage power (for example, DC +5 V) for logic is generated by a power supply IC (three-terminal regulator or the like) built in each device. Also, as described above, the power supply control unit 162 is grounded to the island facility through the ground wire 166 .

The external terminal board 160 is connected to the payout control device 92, and various external information signals generated by the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) are sent from the external terminal board 160 to the outside via the payout control device 92. is output to The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72 ) and payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94 ) can output external information signals to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the external terminal board 160 . Signals output from the external terminal board 160 are counted, for example, by a hall computer (not shown) of the game arcade. In addition, although the configuration via the payout control device 92 is taken as an example here, the configuration may be such that the external information signal is directly output from the main control device 70 to the external terminal board 160 .

[Internal configuration of production control device]
FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing the internal functional configuration of the effect control device 124. As shown in FIG.
As described above, the performance control device 124 has a role as a performance control processor that controls the performance as the game progresses. Therefore, the effect control device 124 is equipped with a control ROM 180 and a watchdog timer IC (WDTIC) 188 which are necessary for the effect control device 124 to function as a effect control processor in addition to the effect control CPU 126 . The control ROM 180 stores basic programs related to the control of effects. The effect control CPU 126 accesses the control ROM 180 via a CPU bus (not shown) and controls the effect by executing a program stored in the control ROM 180 . Watch dog timer IC188 is a timer that monitors whether the control executed by the effect control device 124 is normally performed (whether the process is completed within the assumed time), and is connected to the reset terminal of the effect control CPU126. there is When the signal (clear pulse) for clearing the monitoring timer of the watch dog timer IC 188 is not input within a predetermined time, the watch dog timer IC 188 outputs a signal (reset pulse) for resetting the effect control CPU 126. do. As a result, the performance control device 124 is forcibly reset.

In addition to these, the performance control device 124 has functions related to performance, such as an SRAM 182 that is a storage area for backup data, a crystal oscillator 181 that generates a clock signal of a predetermined frequency, and a real time clock (RTC) 184 that manages time. , a lithium battery 186 for supplying backup power to the SRAM 182 and the RTC 184, and peripheral ICs such as an input/output driver and a counter/timer circuit (not shown). The lithium battery 186 stores this power and charges itself while driving power is supplied from the power control unit 162 to the effect control device 124 . The SRAM 182 and the RTC 184 are connected to a lithium battery 186, and can be driven by the lithium battery 186 when the drive power supply from the power control unit 162 to the effect control device 124 is cut off. Therefore, even if the power supply from the power supply control unit 162 is interrupted, the SRAM 182 and the RTC 184 continue to operate until the lithium battery 186 runs out of charge (for example, about a month and a half). , the stored information can be retained for a while even under power-off conditions.

In addition, the effect control program is configured to store in the SRAM 182 information on security, monitoring, trouble, etc., which should not be easily erased. As a result, for example, when some trouble occurs in the performance control device 124, the pachinko machine 1 is recovered (or inspected in the installed state), and the information held in the SRAM 182 is analyzed to proceed with investigation of the cause of the trouble. becomes possible.

The effect control device 124 is a device that controls the content of the effect related to the game.
The RTC 184 is a device that can communicate with the effect control device 124 through serial communication or the like, and holds current time information (predetermined information). Also, the RTC 184 is a device that measures the current time and updates the current time information regardless of whether the gaming machine is in a power failure state.

By the way, the control of the effect executed by the effect control CPU 126 according to the program stored in the control ROM 180 includes the liquid crystal display 42, the various lamps 46 to 53, the speakers 54, 55, 56, the status LED 58, etc., as described above. Control of production using devices is included. Broadly speaking, the flow of this effect control can be divided into two stages of "overall control (reproduction instruction)" and "individual control (reproduction control)". The effect control CPU 126 first receives the effect command transmitted from the main controller 70 and indirectly instructs each device to reproduce the effect corresponding to the content of the effect command (overall control). Next, the production control CPU 126 generates instruction data by converting the instruction content into a more specific expression suitable for each device, and each control device 134, 152, 198, 199 relays between the production control CPU 126 and each device. to (individual control). As a result, each control device 134, 152, 198, 199 controls each device based on the instruction data, and effect reproduction (screen display, sound output, lamp emission, movable body displacement) using each device in the pachinko machine 1 etc.) are realized.

In this way, the effect control CPU 126 has different functions depending on the stages of effect control, and these functions are realized by properly using the resources of the effect control CPU 126 . At the stage of the overall control, the effect control section 210 in the effect control CPU 126 is the subject of operation. In addition, at the stage of individual control, the display control unit 220, the sound control unit 222, the lamp control unit 224, the motor control unit 226, or the sensor control unit 228 in the effect control CPU 126 according to the device to be controlled is the main operating body. becomes. In addition, it is good also as a structure which the production|presentation control part 210 controls each control device 134,152,198,199 directly.

The performance control device 124 functions as a performance control processor in the stage of overall control, and functions as a performance reproduction processor in the stage of individual control. Therefore, the effect control device 124 further includes a circuit board (effect display control board) on which the VDP 152 is mounted, a CGROM (image/audio ROM) 190, an audio IC 134 for controlling various devices used for reproducing the effect, An LED driver 198, an SMC (serial control controller) 199 and a driver IC 132 are provided.

The CGROM 190 stores drawing materials (moving image data) that make up the effect screen and audio materials (audio data) that are output along with the progress of the effect in a state of being compressed by a predetermined compression algorithm. The CGROM 190 is connected to the VDP 152 and the audio IC 134 via a CG bus (not shown).

The VDP 152 is a processor dedicated to drawing effect images, and is integrated with the effect control CPU 126 into one chip. The VDP 152 also incorporates a VRAM 156 mainly used for decompressing drawing materials, and a drawing material decoder 157 for decompressing (decoding) compressed drawing materials. The VDP 152 first analyzes the instruction content sent from the display control unit 220 , reads necessary drawing materials from the CGROM 190 via the CG bus, and transfers them to the VRAM 156 . Then, the read drawing material is decoded by the drawing material decoder 157, the effect image is drawn on the VRAM 156, and the effect image is developed in the frame buffer for each frame (still image per unit time). By individually driving each pixel (full-color pixel) of the liquid crystal display 42 based on the buffered image data, the effect screen is reproduced.

The sound IC 134 is a sound generator that generates sounds such as sound effects and BGM that are reproduced during execution of the production, and is connected to an amplifier, an external DRAM, and a CG bus (not shown). The audio IC 134 also incorporates an audio material decoder 135 that decompresses (decodes) compressed audio materials. The voice IC 134 first analyzes the instruction content sent from the voice control unit 222, and reads necessary voice material from the CGROM 190 via the CG bus. Then, the read voice material is decoded using the voice material decoder 135 on the external DRAM. Stereo 2ch or monaural 2ch audio reproduction (a larger number of channels may be used) is realized by outputting the decoded audio to the glass frame upper speakers 54 and 55 and the outer frame speaker 56 via an amplifier. Also, the audio IC 134 adjusts the output volume of each speaker 54, 55, 56 based on the contact signal input when the volume adjustment switch is operated.

The LED driver 198 controls the various lamps 46 to 53 provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 and the lighting pattern and brightness pattern of the status LED 58 . The LED driver 198 employs an addressing synchronous serial scheme. The LED driver 198 first controls the lighting pattern and the brightness pattern based on the contents of the instruction sent from the lamp control section 224 , and transfers drive data according to this to the driver IC 132 .

The SMC 199 controls the driving pattern of a movable body motor 57 that serves as a drive source for the rendering movable body 40 f provided inside the rendering unit 40 . The SMC 199 employs a clock synchronous serial method. The SMC 199 first generates a drive pattern based on the instruction content sent from the motor control section 226 and transfers it to the driver IC 132 . Here, the SMC 199 is used only for generating motor drive patterns, but since the SMC 199 can generate not only motor driving patterns but also lamp lighting patterns and luminance patterns, the SMC 199 is used instead of the LED driver 198 described above. However, it is also possible for the SMC 199 to generate both lamp and motor data patterns.

The driver IC 132 controls the drive voltage applied to the lamps and motors based on the drive data transferred from the LED driver 198 and SMC 199 . The driver IC 132 includes switching elements such as PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) ICs and MOSFETs (not shown), and switches the driving voltage applied to various lamps 46 to 53, the movable body motor 57, and the status LED 58 (or duty switching). Effect reproduction using lamps and movable bodies is realized by managing the motions. Among the various lamps 46 to 53, the board lamp 53 is an LED built in the production unit 40, or an LED built in the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, etc. It is equivalent. The status LED 58 is composed of one or more LEDs, and is a lamp that indicates the state of the status of the production control device (for example, the state before system initialization, the state after system initialization, the normal state, etc.) by a lighting pattern. Further, although an example in which the glass-frame decorative lamp 52 is connected to the sub-connection board 136 is given here, the saucer decorative board is installed in the saucer unit 6, and the glass-frame decorative lamp 52 is connected to the saucer electric decoration board. It may be configured to be connected to the driver IC 132 via.

In addition, the driver IC 132 transfers a contact signal input when the effect switching button 45 or the jog dial 45a is operated to the effect control unit 210 via the sensor control unit 228 . The effect control unit 210 appropriately changes the content of the effect to be reproduced based on the content of the contact signal transferred.

FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a memory map of a memory area used by the main control CPU 72. As shown in FIG.
The memory area used by the main control CPU 72 includes a memory area allocated to the ROM 74 (0000H to 2FFFH) and a memory area allocated to the RAM 76 (F000H to F3FFH).

An area (first area) of addresses 0000H to 0BFFH is an area in which the program code (program) of the used area can be stored. The program code in the used area is the first information (for controlling the progress of the game) necessary for executing the game.

The area (first area) of addresses 0000H to 0BFFH contains the program code (first information) of the used area and part of the program code (second information) that is not necessary for the execution of the game. A special program code (special information) is stored.

The area of addresses 0C00H to 0FFFH is an unused area.

An area (first area) of addresses 1000H to 1BFFH is an area capable of storing program data (data) of the used area. The program data in the used area is the first information necessary for executing the game.
The area (first area) of addresses 1000H to 1BFFH contains program data (first information) in the used area and part of the program data (second information) that is not necessary for the execution of the game. Special program data (special information) is stored.

The area of addresses 1C00H to 1FFFH is an unused area.

The area of addresses 2000H to 2FFFH (second area) is an area capable of storing program code/program data outside the area. The program code/program data outside the area is the second information that is not necessary for the execution of the game (for example, it is related to the process for performing the test defined by the gaming machine regulations and the process related to the performance display monitor).
In the area of addresses 2000H to 2FFFH (second area), non-special program code and non-special program data (non-special program data), which are the remaining information of the program code and program data (second information) that are not required for execution of the game special information) is stored.

The area from address 3000H to EFFFH is an unused area.

The area of addresses F000H to F1FFH is used as a work area of the used area and as a stack RAM.
The area of addresses F200H to F3FFH is used as a work area outside the area and as a stack RAM.
These areas are used as temporarily used areas and stack areas for temporarily saving data when the programs in the used area are being executed and when the programs outside the area are being executed.

The area from address F400H to FFFFH is an unused area.

In the memory area of the ROM 74, in addition to the used area and outside the area, an area where arbitrary data such as the program title and version are stored, and the program where the information necessary for the main control CPU 72 to execute the program is stored. A management area may be provided.

In this way, the ROM 74 and RAM 76 (storage means) of the present embodiment are a usable area (first area) capable of storing program codes and program data (first information) necessary for executing the game, and It has an outside area (second area) in which program code/program data (second information) not required for execution can be stored.

Here, the usable area is an area in which the usable capacity for controlling the progress of the game is stipulated by gaming machine regulations, and the outside area is an area not included in the calculation of the usable capacity. .

The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) is a pachinko machine based on program code/program data (first information) necessary for game execution and program code/program data (second information) not necessary for game execution. It controls the machine 1 (gaming machine) (control means).

In the use area (first area), program code/program data (first information) required for game execution and program code/program data (second information) not required for game execution are stored. A special program code and special program data (special information), which are part of the information, are stored.

Outside the area (second area), non-special program code/non-special program data (non-special information), which are the remaining information of the program code/program data (second information) that are not required for the execution of the game, are stored. stored.

Special program code/special program data (special information) is information that differs for each model in multiple types of models with different game content. is information common to each model in a plurality of different models.

Therefore, when changing the specifications of the gaming machine, it is necessary to change the special program code/special program data. On the other hand, the non-special program code/non-special program data need not be changed even when the specifications of the gaming machine are changed.

In the special program code/special program data (special information), among the processing for calculating the base, the determination processing for determining whether or not to calculate the base based on the game state, and the value of the number of prize balls are confirmed. It contains information about at least one of the verification processes. Either the determination process or the confirmation process may be non-special program code/non-special program data (non-special information).

In this embodiment, due to the performance of the main control CPU 72, even if the same instruction (program code) is used, the processing speed may differ depending on whether it is used in the usage area or outside the area. be. For example, if the LDQ instruction (special load instruction) is used in the used area, the processing speed is increased, but if the LDQ instruction is used outside the area, the processing speed is not increased. For this reason, the LD instruction (normal load instruction), which has a slow processing speed, must be used outside the area. The reason for this is that if the LDQ instruction is used outside the area, it is necessary to save, reset, and restore the stack pointer and Q register, which slows down the processing speed.
For this reason, in the present embodiment, the processing speed is faster when executing processing related to the used area than when executing processing related to the outside of the area.

The main control CPU 72 uses (by executing) the program code/program data stored in the use area (first area) to process the use area (first process) necessary for executing the game. can be executed (first process executing means).

In addition, the main control CPU 72 uses (by executing) the program code/program data stored outside the area (second area) to process outside the area (second process ) can be executed (second process executing means).
The above is an example of the configuration relating to the control of the pachinko machine 1 .

FIG. 8 is a diagram showing the relationship between the set value and the winning probability of the special symbol lottery.
When the set value is "1", the probability of winning the special symbol lottery (low probability state) is "1/319".
When the set value is "2", the probability of winning the special symbol lottery (low probability state) is "1/299".
When the set value is "3", the probability of winning the special symbol lottery (low probability state) is "1/279".
When the set value is "4", the probability of winning the special symbol lottery (low probability state) is "1/259".
When the set value is "5", the probability of winning the special symbol lottery (low probability state) is "1/239".
When the set value is "6", the probability of winning the special symbol lottery (low probability state) is "1/199".

When the set value is "1" to "6", the probability of winning the special symbol lottery (high probability state) is "1/32".

In this way, the higher the set value, the higher the probability of winning the special symbol lottery (lower probability state), which is advantageous for the player.

In the example shown in the figure, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery has been described as an example in which the setting difference is provided only in the low probability state, but the setting difference may be provided in the high probability state. Moreover, as for the setting, not only the big hit probability but also the small hit probability may be provided with a setting difference. Furthermore, other items (for example, the rate of transition to a high probability state, the rate of transition to a time reduction state, the number of times of probability variation, the number of times of time reduction, the number of special variations, etc.) may be provided with a setting difference.

FIG. 9 is a diagram showing the state of the setting key, whether the setting can be changed, and whether it can be inserted or removed.
When the setting key is ON (when it is rotating to the right, when the input signal from the setting key switch 302 is ON), setting change (including setting confirmation) is possible, and the setting key is pressed. It is impossible to remove. In other words, the setting key cannot be removed while the setting is being changed or the setting is being checked.

On the other hand, if the setting key is in the OFF state (when it is rotated to the left, the input signal from the setting key switch 302 is OFF), it is impossible to change the setting (including setting confirmation). It is possible to remove the key. In other words, the setting key can be removed unless the setting is being changed or the setting is being checked.

Regarding setting change and setting confirmation, if it is possible to move to the setting change state or setting confirmation state only by button operation, for example, without using the "setting key", people without permission to change settings (for example, hall staff or malicious A player with a certain level of security) can change or confirm settings, and there is a risk of setting leaks.
Therefore, the use of a "setting key (key)" is an essential condition for setting change and setting confirmation.

The "setting key" has two states, ON or OFF. The state of the “setting key” can be confirmed by a signal from the setting key switch 302 . It maintains the ON state or OFF state by operating the "setting key".

The "setting key" can be inserted and removed only when the "setting key" state is OFF. The “setting key” can be inserted into the setting key keyhole 306 .
The keyhole 306 for setting keys is present in a transparent case covering the main control board unit 170 and can be operated without opening the transparent case.

For example, the program code of main controller 70 includes the following conditional branches.
The ON state of the setting key is included in the conditions for transitioning to the setting change or setting confirmation.
Turning the setting key from ON to OFF is included in the transition condition to the playable state. Alternatively, simply include "that the setting key is in the OFF state".
The termination condition during setting change or setting confirmation includes that the setting key is OFF.

Without the "setting key", it is not possible to change settings or confirm settings, and it is not possible to confirm setting values. can be prevented.

Next, control processing executed by the main control CPU 72 of the main controller 70 will be described.

[CPU initialization (main) processing in the main controller]
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control CPU 72 in the main controller 70 starts CPU initialization processing. The CPU initialization process restores the game state (so-called power recovery) based on the backup information saved at the time of the previous power shutdown, or conversely clears the backup information, thereby restoring the initial state of the pachinko machine 1. It is a process for arranging. Further, the CPU initialization process is positioned as a main process (main control program) for ensuring stable game operation of the pachinko machine 1 after adjustment of the initial state.

10 and 11 are flowcharts showing a first procedure example of CPU initialization processing. Each procedure of the processing performed by the main control CPU 72 will be described below.

Step S100: The main control CPU 72 first sets the top address of the stack area in the stack pointer.

Step S102: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 sets the interrupt vector table. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the address of the interrupt vector table to the I register (interrupt vector register) used for interrupt control. The interrupt vector table defines the priority required to control interrupt requests generated during the execution of CPU initialization processing, and the main control CPU 72 executes a plurality of Execute interrupt requests in order.

Step S104: The main control CPU 72 outputs a RAM clear signal (input signal from the RAM clear switch 304), a setting key switch signal (input signal from the setting key switch 302) and an inner frame open signal (contact from the plastic frame open switch 93). signal) to evacuate. More specifically, the values of the input ports to which these signals are input are successively acquired twice, and the logical product (logical sum in the case of negative logic signals) of the acquired values is the input port value when the power is turned on. and evacuate as The opening of the inner frame may be confirmed by a contact signal from the glass frame opening switch 91 or another inner frame opening switch (not shown).

Step S106: The main control CPU 72 executes standby processing here. This process is a process of waiting for the power supply to stabilize and a process of waiting for the activation of the effect control device 124 . The main control CPU 72 secures a certain amount of waiting time (for example, about several thousand milliseconds, about 3.1 seconds) after the power is turned on. ) is checked. Specifically, when the main control CPU 72 sets the loop counter for the standby time, it bit-checks the input port of the power-off notice signal while decrementing the value of the loop counter. The power-off warning signal is input by an IC that monitors the voltage level of the drive voltage. When the input of the power-off notice signal is confirmed before the loop counter reaches 0, the main control CPU 72 restarts the processing from the beginning. As a result, it is possible to protect the system even if the main power switch (not shown) is repeatedly turned on and off within a short period of time (about 1 to 2 seconds).

Step S108: Next, the main control CPU72 permits access to the work area of the RAM76. Specifically, the RAM protect setting value of the work area is reset (00H). As a result, access to the work area of the RAM 76 is permitted thereafter.

Step S109: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether the inner frame is open and the setting key is ON by checking the specific bit of the input port value saved in the previous step S104.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the inner frame is open and the setting key is ON (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S110. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the inner frame is open and the setting key is ON (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S113 (intra-page connector 1→1).

Step S110: The main control CPU 72 refers to the RAM clear signal by checking the specific bit of the input port value saved in the previous step S104, and confirms whether or not the RAM clear switch 304 has been pressed.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the RAM clear switch 304 has been pressed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S112. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the RAM clear switch 304 has been pressed (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S111a.

Step S111a: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the gaming machine state flag is "00H (playable state)".

The gaming machine state flag is stored in the set value buffer of the RAM 76, and "00H" indicates that the game is ready to play, "01H" indicates that the setting is being changed, and "02H" indicates that the setting has been confirmed. showing inside.

A set value is also stored in the set value buffer, and the set value buffer is not cleared even when RAM clear is activated. The reason for this is that "Even if the power is turned off during setting change and the RAM is cleared, the state during setting change continues" and "When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied, the game machine state flag is changed. does not affect the value of the checksum”.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the value of the gaming machine state flag is "00H (game ready state)" (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S111b. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the value of the gaming machine state flag is "00H (game ready state)" (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S114 (intra-page connector 2→2).

Step S111b: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting the gaming machine state flag to "02H (setting confirmation)". Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S114 (intra-page connector 2→2).

By executing such processing, the main control CPU 72 can confirm the setting value when a special condition is satisfied (when the setting key switch is ON and the RAM clear switch is OFF and the power is turned on). setting confirmation state (setting confirmation state transition means).

Step S112: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting the gaming machine state flag to "01H (setting changed)". Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S120 (intra-page connector 3→3).

By executing the processing of step S112 as described above and then executing the processing of step S120, which will be described later, the main control CPU 72 can control when a special condition is satisfied (the setting key switch is ON and the RAM clear switch is is ON and the power is turned on), it is possible to execute a RAM clearing process for clearing the specified RAM value and shift to a setting change state in which the setting value can be changed (setting change state transition means) .

Step S113: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the RAM clear switch 304 has been pressed.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the RAM clear switch 304 has been pressed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S120 (intra-page connector 3→3). On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the RAM clear switch 304 has been pressed (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S114.

Step S114: The main control CPU 72 executes processing to confirm whether the backup flag and checksum are normal.

Regarding the backup flag, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the backup flag is set (whether backup information is stored in the RAM 76). If the backup was successfully completed in the process executed at the previous power shutdown and the backup flag is set to a specific value (for example, "01H"), it is determined that the backup flag is normal. Note that the backup flag is set to a specific value when normal backup processing is executed.

Regarding checksums, the main control CPU 72 performs checksums on the backup information in the RAM 76 . Specifically, the main control CPU 72 checksums all areas of the work area of the RAM 76 except for the backup flag and the checksum buffer. If the checksum result is normal, the main control CPU 72 determines that the checksum is normal.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the backup flag and checksum are normal (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S116. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the backup flag and checksum are normal (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S120.

Step S116: The main control CPU 72 executes initialization processing when power is restored. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 clears the contents stored in a partial area of the RAM 76 . The partial area of the RAM 76 is a memory area to be cleared when power is restored.

Step S117: The main control CPU 72 executes backup restoration processing. The main control CPU 72 restores the saved valid backup information. As a result, the main control CPU 72 can restore the state at the time of power shutdown.

Step S118: The main control CPU72 is a command to be sent to the effect control device 124 when the power is restored (for example, a power return designation command indicating that the power has been restored and started) and a payout command (for the payout control device 92 command to send). After completing this process, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S125.

Step S120: The main control CPU 72 executes initialization processing (RAM clearing processing) when clearing the RAM. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 clears the storage contents of the used area of the RAM 76 that is the clear target when clearing the RAM. As a result, the work area and stack area of the RAM 76 are initialized, and even if valid backup information is stored, the contents thereof are erased. The contents stored outside the area of the RAM 76 may or may not be cleared. The value of the gaming machine state flag may be cleared or not cleared. Clearing the value of the gaming machine state flag always results in a negative (No) determination in step S131a, which will be described later. It is preferable not to clear the value of the status flag. The main control CPU 72 also initializes the RAM 76 .

Step S122: The main control CPU 72 executes processing to save the output time (for example, 128 ms) in the security signal output timer (special information transmission processing executing means). By saving the output time in the security signal output timer, the security signal is output to the hall computer in the external information management process (step S217a in FIG. 24).

By executing such processing, even if a situation occurs in which the setting change state ends in less than 128 ms, special transmission processing is executed to continuously transmit the security signal to the hall computer for at least 128 ms. can do.

Step S124: The main control CPU 71 sets a command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 when the RAM is cleared (for example, a RAM clear designation command indicating that the RAM clear has been started) and a payout command (a command for the payout control device 92). .

Step S125: The main control CPU 71 executes a common initialization process when clearing the RAM and when power is restored.

Step S126: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes payout control output processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs the payout command (power recovery designation command) set in step S118 or the payout command (RAM clear designation command) set in step S124 to the payout command buffer.

Step S128: The main control CPU 72 executes subcommand output processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 first outputs the effect command (power return designation command) set in step S118 or the effect command (RAM clear designation command) set in step S124 to the subcommand transmission buffer. In addition, the main control CPU72, other various production commands necessary for production control (for example, model designation command, state designation command, special figure destination judgment production command, production command when the number of working memory increases, production when the number of working memory decreases command, number-of-times counter value command, normal game management phase command, special game management phase command, launch position designation command, etc.) are set, and these are output to the subcommand transmission buffer. At this time, the main control CPU 72 can set different values for these effect commands depending on when the power is restored and when the RAM is cleared.

For example, when the power is restored, the value of each effect command is set based on the backup information. These effect commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the subsequent subcommand transmission process (step S144), so that the effect control device 124 changes the effect state (for example, The internal probability state, the display mode of the effect pattern, the effect display mode of the working memory number, the contents of the sound output, the light emission state of various lamps, etc.) can be restored.

Step S130: The main control CPU 72 executes input port processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 obtains the contents of each input port and stores the result of performing a predetermined operation on the value in the status flag of each input port. After completing this process, the main control CPU 72 next proceeds to step S131 (off-page connector A→A).

Step S131: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for resetting the main command permission signal (communication permission signal). The main command permission signal is a signal that can be independently set by the main control CPU 72 (main controller 70) and the payout control CPU 94 (payout control device 92).
The main controller 70 and the payout controller 92 are connected by two lines, the first line is a signal line and the second line is a command line.

For example, when the main control CPU 72 sets the main command permission signal, the payout control CPU 94 can transmit commands. On the other hand, when the payout control CPU 94 sets the main command permission signal, the main control CPU 72 can transmit commands.

Here, since the main control CPU 72 is executing the process of resetting the main command permission signal, the payout control CPU 94 is in a state where command transmission is disabled.

Incidentally, when the payout command permission signal on the payout control device 92 side is not reset, the main control device 70 can transmit the command. However, since the payout command (prize ball command) is not generated during setting change or setting confirmation, game balls are not paid out by the payout control device 92 . When the main command permission signal can be set in the payout control device 92, the payout command permission signal on the payout control device 92 side may be the main command permission signal on the payout control device 92 side.

Here, if the main command permission signal on the main control device 70 side is reset, the payout control device 92 becomes a communication error. In order to avoid communication errors, a method of communicating with the payout control device 92 and transmitting a command indicating that the setting is being changed may be adopted.

An advantage of adopting a method that does not set the main command permission signal on the main controller 70 side and does not communicate with the payout control device 92 is that the software of the payout control device 92 does not need to be changed.
It is also possible to prevent game balls from being shot by resetting the shooting permission signal.

In this embodiment, the main command permission signal, the main control CPU72 (main controller 70) and the payout control CPU94 (payout control device 92) has been described as a signal that can be independently set respectively, The command permission signal can be a signal that can be set only by the main controller 70 and cannot be set by the payout controller 92 . In this case, the payout control device 92 uses a payout command permission signal (communication permission signal) instead of the main command permission signal. Then, when the payout control device 92 sets the payout command permission signal, the main controller 70 becomes capable of transmitting commands to the payout control device 92, and the payout control device 92 resets the payout command permission signal. As a result, the main control device 70 becomes incapable of transmitting commands to the payout control device 92 .
The setting of the main command permission signal and the firing permission signal may be performed by dynamic port output processing. Dynamic port output processing is called by a timer interrupt once every 4 ms. A command permission signal or the like can be set.

Step S131a: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the game is ready for play. Specifically, it confirms whether or not the value of the gaming machine status flag is "00H".

As a result, when it is confirmed that the game is possible (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S131b. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the game is ready (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S132 without executing step S131b.

Step S131b: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for setting a main command permission signal to a specific bit of the output port. As a result, the payout control device 92 is in a state of being able to transmit commands to the main control device 70 . As a result, if the game is in a playable state, the game ball can be put out.

By executing such processing, the main control CPU 72 sets a predetermined prohibited state during setting change or setting confirmation (during execution of setting related processing, if not in playable state), payout control It is possible to execute prohibition processing that does not allow the device 92 to execute the payout of game balls (prohibition processing executing means).

The payout control device 92 transmits a payout start command (start command) to the main control device 70 and receives a start confirmation command in response to the payout start command to enter a payout possible state. A game ball is put out based on the sent put-out command.

Further, by executing such processing, the main control CPU 72 prohibits the transmission of the payout start command from the payout control device 92 to the main control device 70 by setting a predetermined prohibited state. , it is possible to prohibit the payout control device 92 from entering the payout possible state and prevent the payout control device 92 from executing the payout of game balls (prohibition processing executing means).

Furthermore, by executing such processing, the main control CPU 72 sets the main command permission signal (communication permission signal) of the main control device 70 side to OFF (communication disapproval), so that a predetermined prohibited state ( (state in which the main command permission signal on the main controller 70 side is OFF) (prohibition process executing means).

Step S132: The main control CPU 72 resets (turns OFF) the specific bit of the output port to clear the firing enable signal. The launch enable signal is included in the target of backup when the power is cut off. Therefore, when the power of the main controller 70 (pachinko machine 1) is restored, the launch permission signal is also returned to the state at the time of power shutdown.

The fire enable signal is set to a specific bit (eg bit 0) in a specific output port buffer (eg the buffer for output port 3) stored in RAM 76 .

Step S133: The main control CPU 72 sets the timer interrupt period. More specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a value corresponding to a predetermined timer interrupt period (eg, 4 ms) to the counter setting register of the timer circuit 194 .

Step S134: The main control CPU 72 resets the interrupt daisy chain. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes the RETI instruction after backing up the start address of the main loop processing described later as preparation for the interrupt processing. By performing this processing, it becomes possible to start the interrupt processing that occurs thereafter normally, and to continue the processing from the main loop processing after the execution of the interrupt processing.

After executing the above procedure in the CPU initialization process, the main control CPU 72 starts executing the main loop process in step S135. As long as the power supply from the power control unit 162 is maintained, the main control CPU 72 repeatedly executes the main loop processing from beginning to end.

If a setting function (setting change device 300) is added to the pachinko machine 1, the state at power-on increases. At this time, by performing some operations, the power-on state of "normal return (power recovery)", "RAM clear return (initialization)", "setting confirmation mode (setting confirmation)", "setting change mode (setting change mode)" setting change)” need to be separated.

In this embodiment, two input devices such as the setting key switch 302 and the RAM clear switch 304 are used to determine the transition in order to divide the power-on state into four states.

The transition conditions to the four states are as follows.
(1) Normal recovery RAM clear switch: OFF
Setting key switch: OFF
(2) RAM clear return RAM clear switch: ON
Setting key switch: OFF
(3) Setting confirmation mode RAM clear switch: OFF
Setting key switch: ON
(4) Setting change mode RAM clear switch: ON
Setting key switch: ON

Thus, four states can be divided by operating the setting key switch 302 and the RAM clear switch 304 .

FIG. 12 is a diagram showing command transmission timings in the first procedure example of the CPU initialization process.

[Main controller]
When the power is turned on, the main controller 70 performs [A01] a wait of 3.1 seconds, and [A02] determines the activation method.

Based on the determination of the activation method, the main controller 70 is activated by [A03] initialization (RAM clear), by [A04] power restoration (restore of backup information), or by [A05] setting change. or [A06] Confirm setting.

When the [A03] initialization, [A04] power recovery, [A05] setting change or [A06] setting confirmation processing is completed, the main controller 70 sets the [A07] main command permission signal to ON, [A08] Transition to a playable state. After the main command permission signal is set to ON, a command from the payout control device 92 can be received.

[Dispensing control device]
When the power is turned on, the payout control device 92 [B01] waits for 0.1 seconds, and executes [B02] power-on processing. In the power-on processing, the payout control device 92 can set the main command permission signal on the payout control device 92 side to ON.

Next, the payout control device 92 sets the [B03] payout command permission signal to ON, and shifts to [B04] start command transmission waiting state. The start command transmission waiting state is a state of waiting for the main command permission signal to be set to ON on the main controller 70 side, and is a state in which a command cannot be transmitted to the main controller 70 ( Command transmission to the main controller 70 is disabled).

Then, in the main control device 70, when the main command permission signal is set to ON ([A07]), the payout control device 92 enters a state in which a command can be transmitted to the main control device 70 (main control Command transmittable state to device 70) [C01] The payout control device 92 transmits a payout activation command to the main control device 70.

The main control device 70 having received the payout activation command transmits [C02] activation confirmation command to the payout control device 92 as a command in response thereto.
As a result, the payout control device 92 shifts to the [B05] playable state, and enters a state in which game balls can be paid out.

During setting change or setting confirmation, since the game can be stopped, command transmission from the payout control device 92 should be prohibited.

In order to prohibit command transmission from the payout control device 92 during setting change or setting confirmation, the following method is adopted in the first procedure example of the CPU initialization process. Commands transmitted from the payout control device 92 to the main control device 70 are classified as follows.

(1) Payout start command (confirmation of payout operation permission)
(2) Error-related commands (announced by the production control device for errors related to payout (full tank error, failure error, etc.))

The operation of the main controller 70 when each command is received is as follows.
(3) After receiving the command in (1) above, the main controller 70 returns a payout operation permission command (activation confirmation command) to the payout control device 92 .
(4) After receiving the command of (2) above, an error command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 .

Here, there is no problem even if the above (4) is executed, but there is a possibility that the above (3) will perform the payout operation during setting change or setting confirmation.
Therefore, in order to avoid the above (3), a method is adopted in which the "main command permission signal" is used and the command is not transmitted.

The usage of the main command grant signal is as follows.
The payout control device 92 confirms the "main command permission signal" on the main control device 70 side before sending the command. The “main command permission signal” on the main controller 70 side is a signal indicating the command receivable state of the main controller 70 .
In this embodiment, during setting change or setting confirmation, the main control device 70 side sets the "main command permission signal" to OFF state, and the payout control device 92 creates a state in which command transmission is not performed.

Only by setting the main command permission signal to OFF in the main control device 70, the payout disabled state can be set, and the payout control device 92 side does not require any software modification. Also, the main controller 70 side can be designed without considering that command reception occurs during setting change or setting confirmation.

FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a list of gaming machine states.
The gaming machine states include (1) playable state, (2) setting change state, (3) setting confirmation state, (4) setting error state, (5) RAM error state, and (6) checksum error state. There are 6 states.

These states can be identified by gaming machine state flags.
The gaming machine status flag is stored in the gaming machine status flag storage buffer of the RAM 76, and the gaming machine status flag storage buffer is to be backed up.

Any one of the values “00H” to “05H” is stored in the gaming machine state flag. The states corresponding to each value are as follows.
Gaming machine status flag = 00H: Game ready status Gaming machine status flag = 01H: Setting change status Gaming machine status flag = 02H: Setting confirmation status Gaming machine status flag = 03H: Setting error status Gaming machine status flag = 04H: RAM error status Gaming machine status flag = 05H: Checksum abnormal status

[(1) Playable state]
In the playable state, the game can be played (allowed), but the setting cannot be changed (impossible). The playable state corresponds to a state in which a normal game can be played. Here, the normal game is a state in which a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a jackpot game, etc. can be executed, and the normal game is impossible, a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a jackpot game, etc. It is in a non-executable state.

[(2) Setting change status]
In the setting change state, the game cannot be played, but the setting can be changed. The setting change state is a state in which the setting can be changed.

[(3) Setting confirmation status]
In the setting confirmation state, the game cannot be played and the setting cannot be changed. The setting confirmation state is a state in which setting confirmation is possible.

[(4) Setting error]
In the abnormal setting state, the game cannot be played and the setting cannot be changed. The setting error state is a state in which the setting value is out of range (for example, when the setting value is neither “0 (setting 1)” to “5 (setting 6)”).

[(5) RAM abnormal state]
In the RAM abnormal state, games cannot be played and settings cannot be changed. A RAM failure state is a state in which the RAM is corrupted.

Whether or not there is a RAM abnormality is determined as follows.
After writing 00H to each RAM, it is read as it is to confirm whether or not 00H has been obtained, and after writing FFH, it is read as it is and it is confirmed whether or not FFH has been obtained.
That is, it is confirmed whether there is no problem by writing 0 and 1 to each bit of the RAM. If there is a bit fixed to 0 or 1, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal.

The RAM to be checked may be part of the RAM or may be the entire RAM. If it is part of the RAM, it can be F000H to F1FFH (512 bytes that can be used according to game machine regulations) within the area and F300H to F31AH outside the area (only the portion actually used).

The determination of whether or not the RAM is in an abnormal state can be executed in the initialization process (step S120 in FIG. 10) when clearing the RAM. When the RAM to be checked is part of the RAM, the memory area outside the area may be checked first, and then the memory area inside the area may be checked. A memory region check may be performed and then an out-of-region memory region check may be performed.
When determining whether or not the RAM is in an abnormal state, FFH may be written first and then read as is, and then 00H may be written and then read as is. In this case, if there is no abnormality in the RAM, the checked RAM will all be 00H, so there is no need to clear the RAM separately, and control processing can be simplified.

[(6) Checksum abnormal state]
In the abnormal checksum state, games cannot be played and settings cannot be changed. The checksum failure state is a state in which the checksums before power-off and at power-on do not match.

FIG. 14 is a diagram showing allocation of processes at power-on.
When checking settings on a game machine that has a setting change function, it is necessary to turn on the power while satisfying special conditions. The following is the distribution of the processing when the power is turned on.

When the power is turned on, the RAM clear switch is pressed, the inner frame is open, and if the setting key is ON, the main control CPU 72 clears the RAM and then changes the settings (shifts to the setting change state) .

When the power is turned on, the RAM clear switch is pressed, and if the inner frame is closed or the setting key is OFF, the main control CPU 72 clears the RAM, and then shifts to a game ready state.

When the power is turned on, if the RAM clear switch is not pressed (non-pressed), the inner frame is open, and the setting key is ON, the main control CPU 72 confirms the settings (shifts to the setting confirmation state). It should be noted that the setting confirmation may be performed only when the state before the power is turned off is the game-enabled state.

When the power is turned on, if the RAM clear switch is not pressed (non-pressed), the inner frame is closed, or the setting key is OFF, the main control CPU 72 continues the state before the power was turned off.

15 and 16 are flowcharts showing a second procedure example of the CPU initialization process.
The difference between the first procedure example of the CPU initialization process and the second procedure example of the CPU initialization process is that steps S131 to S131b in FIG. 11 are changed to steps S181 to S181b in FIG. be. Note that the off-page connector is also changed to B.
Therefore, in the following description, steps S181 to S181b in FIG. 16 will be described, and description of other points will be omitted.

Step S181: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for setting a main command permission signal (communication permission signal) to a specific bit of the output port. As a result, the payout control device 92 is in a state of being able to transmit commands to the main control device 70 .

Step S181a: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the game is ready for play. Specifically, it confirms whether or not the value of the gaming machine status flag is "00H".

As a result, when it is confirmed that the game is possible (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S132 without executing step S181b. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that it is in a playable state (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S181b.

Step S181b: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for setting a payout operation stop command. When the payout control device 92 receives the payout operation stop command, the payout control device 92 enters a state where game balls cannot be paid out. In this case, the payout control device 92 may transition to a state in which commands cannot be transmitted to the main control device 70 .

The payout operation stop command is transmitted in the timer interrupt process after shifting to the main loop process.
Timer interrupt processing is executed during setting change or during setting change, but a processing route different from that in the playable state is executed. This point is the same in the first procedure example of the CPU initialization processing.
The payout operation start command can be set in initialization processing (CPU initialization processing) at power restoration or initialization processing (CPU initialization processing) at the time of RAM clearing.
After completing the above process, the main control CPU 72 executes step S132.

By executing such processing, the main control CPU 72 instructs the payout control device 92 to pay out game balls during setting change or setting confirmation (during execution of setting-related processing, when not in a playable state). By transmitting a prohibition payout operation stop command (prohibition command), it is possible to execute a prohibition process that does not allow the payout control device 92 to execute the payout of game balls (prohibition process executing means).

The payout control device 92 transmits a payout activation command (activation command) to the main controller 70, and upon receiving an activation confirmation command in response to the payout activation command, the payout impossible state shifts to the payout possible state, and the payout possible state. , game balls are put out based on the payout command transmitted from the main controller 70 .

In addition, by executing such a process, the main control CPU72 transmits a payout operation stop command (prohibition command) to the payout control device 92, causing the payout control device 92 to shift to a payout impossible state, It is possible to prevent the payout control device 92 from executing the payout of game balls (prohibition process executing means).

FIG. 17 is a diagram showing command transmission timings in the second procedure example of the CPU initialization processing.
Note that the dotted lines in the figure indicate the times when timer interrupts are possible.

[Main controller]
When the power is turned on, the main controller 70 performs [D01] 3.1 second wait, and [D02] determines the activation method.

Based on the determination of the activation method, the main controller 70 is activated by [D03] initialization (RAM clear), by [D04] power restoration (restore of backup information), and [D05] main command permission. Set the signal to ON. After the main command permission signal is set to ON, a command from the payout control device 92 can be received.
Further, depending on the determination of the activation method, the main controller 70 is activated by [D06] setting change or by [D07] setting confirmation.

When the processing of [D03] initialization, [D04] power restoration, [D06] setting change or [D07] setting confirmation is completed, the main controller 70 shifts to [D08] game ready state.

When the main controller 70 becomes ready to execute timer interrupt processing, it executes [D09] setting change, [D10] setting confirmation, or [D11] playable state processing in the timer interrupt processing.

[Dispensing control device]
When the power is turned on, the payout control device 92 waits for [E01] 0.1 seconds, and executes [E02] power-on processing. In the power-on processing, the payout control device 92 can set the main command permission signal on the payout control device 92 side to ON.

Next, the payout control device 92 sets the [E03] payout command permission signal to ON, and shifts to the [E04] startup command transmission waiting state. The start command transmission waiting state is a state of waiting for the main command permission signal to be set to ON on the main controller 70 side, and is a state in which a command cannot be transmitted to the main controller 70 ( Command transmission to the main controller 70 is disabled).

[F01] The main control device 70 confirms the main command permission signal on the payout control device 92 side, and if the main command permission signal on the payout control device 92 side is set to ON, the payout control device 92 to send the boot command.

Then, in the main control device 70, when the main command permission signal is set to ON ([D05]), the payout control device 92 enters a state in which a command can be transmitted to the main control device 70 (main control Command transmittable state to device 70) [F02] The payout control device 92 transmits a payout activation command to the main control device 70. FIG. It should be noted that there is a possibility that the transmission of the activation command of [F01] and the transmission of the payout activation command of [F02] may be reversed.

The main control device 70 that has received the payout activation command transmits [F03] activation confirmation command to the payout control device 92 as a command in response thereto. As a result, the payout control device 92 enters a state in which the game balls can be paid out.

[F04] When the main controller 70 is activated by setting change or setting confirmation ([D06] or [D07]), it transmits a payout operation stop command to the payout control device 92 . As a result, the payout control device 92 is in a state in which the game balls cannot be paid out.

[F05] The main control device 70 transmits a payout operation start command to the payout control device 92 when the processing related to setting change or setting confirmation is completed. As a result, the payout control device 92 enters a state in which the game balls can be paid out.
Then, the payout control device 92 shifts to [E05] playable state.

When the payout control device 92 becomes ready to execute the timer interrupt process, it executes the process related to [E06] payout permission waiting or [E07] playable state in the timer interrupt process.

[G01] In the payout control device 92, the payout operation is disabled for 5 seconds after receiving the activation confirmation command. Therefore, by receiving the payout operation stop command during that time, the payout control device 92 is prohibited from paying out. In other words, the payout permission state is set for a moment, but since there is a waiting period of 5 seconds, game balls are not paid out during this time. Since the payout operation stop command is transmitted before the wait of 5 seconds is completed, the game balls are not put out. Then, in this state, setting change or setting confirmation is executed. Regarding the payout operation start command, a wait of 2 seconds is set after it is received.

In this way, the payout control device 92 shifts from the payout impossible state to the payout possible state after a certain period of time (after 5 seconds have passed, after the time G01 has passed) after receiving the activation confirmation command.
Then, the main controller 70 transmits a payout operation stop command (prohibition command) before a certain period of time has passed (before 5 seconds have passed, before the time of G01 has passed) after transmitting the activation confirmation command, and the payout control device 92 is restricted from moving from the dispensable state to the dispensable state (prohibition processing execution means).

Since the game can be stopped while the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed, the payout operation of the payout control device 92 should be prohibited.

In order to prohibit the payout operation of the payout control device 92 during setting change or setting confirmation, the following method is adopted in the second procedure example of the CPU initialization process. Commands transmitted from the payout control device 92 to the main control device 70 are classified as follows.

(1) Payout start command (confirmation of payout operation permission)
(2) Error-related command (announced by the production control device error related to payout)

The operation of the main controller 70 when each command is received is as follows.
(3) After receiving the command in (1) above, the main controller 70 returns a payout operation permission command (activation confirmation command) to the payout control device 92 .
(4) After receiving the command of (1) above, an error command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 .

Here, there is no problem even if the above (4) is executed, but there is a possibility that the above (3) will perform the payout operation during setting change or setting confirmation.
Therefore, after the activation confirmation command of (3) is transmitted and before the game balls are actually paid out, a "setting change/confirmation start command" is sent to the payout control device 92, and the payout control device 92 puts out the game balls. Adopt a method of not paying out.

The operation of the payout control device 92 after receiving the setting change/confirmation start command is as follows.
The payout control device 92 that has received the setting change/confirmation start command puts the payout stop state. The cancellation of the payout stop state is triggered by the setting change/confirmation end command.

Here, a "setting change/confirmation start command" and a "setting change/confirmation end command" may be prepared as new commands, but a "dispensing operation start command" and "dispensing operation stop command" may also be used. can.
In this case, "setting change/confirmation start command"="payout operation stop command", and "setting change/confirmation end command"="payout operation start command".

As a result, unintended payout can be prevented during setting change or setting confirmation, and software modification of the payout control device 92 becomes unnecessary by using the "payout operation start command" and "payout operation stop command". .

FIG. 18 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of main loop processing. Each procedure will be described below.
The main loop process waits for the occurrence of the following three types of interrupts while updating random numbers (stirring random numbers, etc.).
(1) Serial communication reception interrupt (when receiving a command from the payout control device)
(2) Timer interrupt (when the timer times out once every 4 ms)
(3) Power-off notice interrupt (when input voltage drops due to power-off)
Most of the game-related processing is executed by timer interrupt processing.

Step S141: The main control CPU 72 executes interrupt prohibition processing.
Step S142: The main control CPU 72 executes initial value random number update processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 increments random numbers for updating (changing) the initial values of various software random numbers. In this embodiment, various random numbers (for example, jackpot pattern random numbers for determining the type of winning, reach determination random numbers, fluctuation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) are generated on the program. These software random numbers are updated by a loop counter within a predetermined range in another timer interrupt process (step S205 in FIG. 24). random number does not have to be the target) is changed.

The initial value update random number is used to randomly change this initial value, and in step S142, the initial value update random number is updated. In addition, in this process, the initial value of the jackpot symbol random number is updated. The reason why step S142 is executed after the interrupt is prohibited in step S141 is that similar processing is executed in another timer interrupt processing (step S205 in FIG. 24), so duplication (competition) with this is prevented. It's for. It should be noted that the jackpot determination random number and the hit determination random number are hardware random numbers generated by the random number circuit 75, and the update cycle thereof is faster (eg several microseconds) than the timer interrupt cycle (eg several ms). There is no need to update the initial values of the decision random numbers and the hit decision random numbers.

Step S143: The main control CPU 72 executes main command analysis processing. In this process, if there is a command from the payout control device 92 saved by the serial communication reception interrupt, the data received from the payout control device 92 is analyzed, and the process according to the result is performed. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 outputs a payout start confirmation designation command to the payout command buffer when the received main command is the payout start designation command, and when the received main command is not the payout start designation command, the received main command is After confirming whether the value is within a predetermined range (whether it is an appropriate value for the main command), if it is out of the range, output a payout error designation command to the subcommand transmission buffer, and furthermore payout radio waves depending on the situation Set the error flag.

Step S144: The main control CPU 72 executes subcommand transmission processing. In this process, if unsent subcommands (effect commands) remain in the subcommand transmission buffer, the main control CPU 72 sends the effect control device 124 the subcommands stored in the subcommand transmission buffer to send.

Step S145: The main control CPU 72 executes performance display monitor total division processing. This processing is an out-of-region processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of calculating the base displayed on the performance display monitor 200 . In this process, the main control CPU 72 uses a division task to calculate the number of prize balls paid out when the game balls enter each winning opening (start winning opening, normal winning opening, and large winning opening). The base is calculated by dividing by the out number (the number of game balls detected by the out switch) indicating the number of game balls shot into the area (base calculation means, base-related processing execution means). The performance display monitor aggregate division process is a base-related process.

The base-related processing is processing related to control of the base, and includes at least one of base calculation processing executed when calculating the base and base display processing executed when displaying the base on the performance display monitor 200 .

Here, there is no need to clearly distinguish between base calculation processing and base display processing. The processing that emphasizes base calculation is base calculation processing, and the processing that emphasizes base display is base display processing. Therefore, part of the base calculation process may be regarded as part of the base display process, and part of the base display process may be regarded as part of the base calculation process.
The details of the performance display monitor aggregate division process will be described later.

Steps S146, S147: The main control CPU 72 permits interrupts and executes random number update processing. The random numbers updated in this process are random numbers (reach determination random numbers, fluctuation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) that are not related to determination of winning types (hit types) among software random numbers.

These series of processes are performed in the remaining time when an interrupt request occurs during execution of the main loop process and the main control CPU 72 executes various interrupt processes.

FIG. 19 is a diagram showing the contents of processing executed when a serial communication reception interrupt occurs.
When a serial communication reception interrupt occurs, the main control CPU 72 executes serial communication reception interrupt processing (step S136). A serial communication reception interrupt occurs when a command is received from the payout control device 92 .

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing the contents of processing executed when a timer interrupt occurs.
When a timer interrupt occurs, the main control CPU 72 executes timer interrupt processing (step S137). A timer interrupt occurs once in a timer interrupt period (for example, 4 ms) when the timer times out.

FIG. 21 is a diagram showing the details of the process executed when the power-off notice interrupt occurs.
When the power-off notice interrupt occurs, the main control CPU 72 executes power-off notice interrupt processing (step S138). The power-off notice interrupt occurs when the input voltage drops due to power-off.

The priority of the interrupts is "high" for the "serial communication reception interrupt", "medium" for the "timer interrupt", and "low" for the "power-off notice interrupt".
Therefore, if a "serial communication receive interrupt" occurs while a "timer interrupt" is generated and "timer interrupt processing" is being executed, the "serial communication receive interrupt process" will continue unless interrupts are disabled. to run.
On the other hand, even if a "power-off notice interrupt" occurs while a "timer interrupt" is occurring and "timer interrupt processing" is being executed, the "power-off notice interrupt processing" is executed at that point. Instead, after the "timer interrupt process" ends, execute the "power-off notice interrupt process".

When various interrupt processing such as serial communication reception interrupt processing (main command reception interrupt processing) and timer interrupt processing are completed, the program returns to the interrupt source (the program address indicated by the stack pointer).
Since the power-off notice interrupt process is a special process, in principle, it does not return to the interrupt source. Normally, after saving processing (calculation of checksum, RWM (RAM) access protection, etc.) is performed, the generation of reset due to voltage drop is waited on the spot. If the power supply is restored in the middle, the process returns to the beginning of the program (for example, CPU initialization processing). Note that there are cases where the process returns to the interrupt source at the beginning of the process, but this is an exceptional process.

[Serial communication reception interrupt processing]
FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing an example procedure of serial communication reception interrupt processing.
Serial communication reception interrupt processing is executed when a command is received from the payout control device 92 . The payout control device 92 not only transmits to the main control device 70 a payout activation designation command indicating that the payout has been activated, but also various devices (for example, the payout device board 100 and It relays commands (such as error commands) sent from the full-tank switch 161 and the like to the main controller 70 . These commands transmitted by the payout controller 92 are received by the receive data register of the specific channel of the serial communication circuit 196 of the main controller 70 . Triggered by this command reception (SCU interrupt), the main control CPU 72 executes serial communication reception interrupt processing (SCU interrupt processing). Each procedure of serial communication reception interrupt processing will be described below.

Step S180: First, the main control CPU72 saves the values of the A register (accumulator) and F register (flag register) used during execution of the main loop process to the save area of the RAM76. Another value can be written into each register after saving the value during execution of the data reception interrupt process.

Step S182: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not there is a reception error. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 checks a specific bit of the status register to confirm whether or not there is data in the reception data register (reception FIFO). Check whether When there is no data, or when there is data but it is not normal data, the main control CPU 72 determines that there is a reception error.

If it is determined that there is a reception error (Yes), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S184. On the other hand, when determining that there is no reception error (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S184.

Step S184: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of saving the received command (main command) in a buffer (received command buffer). The saved main command is analyzed by the main command analysis processing of the main loop processing.

This process is a process of rewriting the buffer in the used area of the RAM 76 . Therefore, if a serial communication reception interrupt occurs while processing outside the area is being executed, the buffer in the used area will be rewritten even though the processing outside the area is being executed. There is a possibility of violating game machine rules.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when serial communication reception interrupt processing is to be executed, interrupts are prohibited (after serial communication reception interrupt processing is prohibited), and then serial communication reception interrupt processing is executed.

Steps S186, S188: The main control CPU 72 restores the values of the A and F registers that were saved in step S180 to each register, and after permitting the interrupt, terminates the serial communication reception interrupt processing and performs the main loop processing (see FIG. 18). ) returns to the interrupt source.

[Interrupt processing at power-off notice]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for interrupt processing at the time of power-off notice.
The power-off notice interruption process is executed when a power-off (hereinafter abbreviated as "power-off") occurs.
In main controller 70, occurrence of power failure and occurrence of reset are monitored by the same monitoring IC (for example, an IC mounted in a reset controller (not shown)). This monitor IC monitors the drive voltage supplied from the power control unit 162 and outputs a power-off warning signal to the XINT terminal of the parallel I/O port 79 when the voltage level drops below the reference voltage. The main control CPU 72 executes power-off notice interrupt processing (XINT interrupt processing) in response to input of a power-off notice signal to the XINT terminal (XINT interrupt).

Steps S151, S152: The main control CPU 72 reads the power failure detection switch input port of the parallel I/O port 79 and checks a specific bit to confirm whether or not the power failure warning signal has been detected. If it cannot confirm that the power-off warning signal has been detected (No), the main control CPU 72 terminates the power-off warning interrupt processing and returns to the interrupt source of the main loop processing (FIG. 18). On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the power-off warning signal has been detected (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes the next step S153.

Step S153: The main control CPU 72 executes processing to clear all output ports. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 has output ports corresponding to the normal electric accessory solenoid 88, the first big prize winning solenoid 90, and the second big winning prize solenoid 97, as well as test signal terminals and command control signals. Clear the output port buffer.

The process of step S153 is a process that is executed (by execution of step S330 in FIG. 29) when it is determined affirmative (Yes) in step S152 or when the setting change is completed.

Step S154: The main control CPU 72 calculates and saves the checksum. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 adds the entire contents of the backup target area of the RAM 76, excluding the backup flag and the checksum buffer, in 1-byte units, and repeats the addition for all areas until the addition is completed. Then, when sum calculation is completed for all areas, the main control CPU 72 saves the sum result value in the checksum buffer.

Step S155: The main control CPU 72 stores a valid value (eg "01") in the backup flag area.

Step S156: The main control CPU 72 executes RAM (RWM) access prohibition processing. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 stores "00H" representing access prohibition in the protection value of the RAM 76, and prohibits access to the work area (including the use area and the outside area) of the RAM 76.

Step S157: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a power-off warning signal has been detected. The confirmation method of the power-off warning signal is the same as the method in step S152 described above.
When it is confirmed that the power-off warning signal has been detected (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S157 again. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the power-off warning signal has been detected (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the next step S158.

Step S158: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 10 ms) has passed without detecting the power interruption warning signal (off state). When it is confirmed that the predetermined time has passed without detecting the power-off warning signal (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the beginning of the program. Since a program relating to CPU initialization processing is arranged at the beginning of the program, returning to the beginning of the program means executing the CPU initialization processing. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the predetermined time has passed without detecting the power-off warning signal (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to step S157 and repeats the processing up to this point. By executing such processing, when the power supply is restored (the power-off warning signal is turned off continuously for 10 ms), it is possible to return to the beginning of the power-off warning interrupt processing program.

Further, the processes of steps S157 and S158 are standby processes executed in preparation for interruption of power supply from the power supply control unit 162 . When the power-off warning signal is continuously detected, steps S157 and S158 are repeatedly executed, so the standby state continues as long as the power supply continues. In this way, the main control CPU 72 first calculates the checksum and saves the result before the power supply is completely cut off, enters a standby state, and under the circumstances where the power supply is being cut off, another The standby state is maintained without executing the process, and the coming cutoff of the power supply is approached in a safe state (becomes a state of waiting for reset due to voltage drop).

When the power supply from the power supply control unit 162 is interrupted, the power supply source for the main controller 70 is automatically switched to the backup power supply. Main controller 70 is supplied with backup power from a backup power supply circuit (not shown) (for example, a circuit including a capacitive element mounted on main controller 70) after a power failure occurs. The contents of the memory are retained even after the power is turned off. Note that the backup power supply circuit may be built in the power supply control unit 162 .

Through the above processing, all the information stored in the work area of the RAM 76 to be backed up (to be added to the sum) is retained in the RAM 76 even after the power is turned off. In addition, the retained memory is restored as backup information at the time of power failure after confirming that the checksum is normal in the previous CPU initialization processing.

[Timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 24 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure for timer interrupt processing.
The main control CPU 72 executes timer interrupt processing (PTC interrupt processing) every predetermined time (for example, several ms) based on an interrupt request (PTC interrupt) output by the timer circuit 194 . Each procedure of timer interrupt processing will be described below.

Step S200: First, the main control CPU 72 saves the values of the AF register (a pair of accumulator and flag register) and the BC, DE, HL registers (a pair of general-purpose registers) used during execution of the main loop process to the save area of the RAM 76. evacuate to A different value can be written into each register after saving the value during execution of timer interrupt processing.

Step S201: The main control CPU 72 executes interrupt flag initialization processing. In this process, the process of clearing (=0) the timer interrupt flag is executed. The reason for clearing the timer interrupt flag is that a timer interrupt occurs at a predetermined timer interrupt cycle (eg, 4 ms), and the timer interrupt flag is set (=1) at the predetermined timer interrupt cycle. Note that when the timer interrupt flag is set, the timer interrupt is not allowed to occur.

Step S201a: The main control CPU 72 executes interrupt permission processing. By permitting an interrupt here, it becomes possible for another interrupt to occur while the steps after the next step of the timer interrupt processing are being executed.

Step S202: The main control CPU 72 executes dynamic port output processing. In this processing, in order to control the lighting of each lamp mounted on the integrated display board 89 and the performance display monitor 200 by the dynamic lighting method, port output is performed in common units. Specifically, after clearing the output port, the main control CPU 72 outputs the generated common output data to the common port output buffer corresponding to the selected common. The content to be output is the content set in the previous timer interrupt.

Here, the data output to the port output buffer for each common is sequentially port-outputted one common at a time in this dynamic port output processing each time timer interrupt processing occurs. For example, the data stored for common 1 is output from the port in the next timer interrupt process, and the data stored for common 2 is output from the port in the next timer interrupt process. The data stored in the port output buffer for each common is processed one by one. As a result, each lamp constituting a predetermined display mode (variable display of symbols, stop display, working memory number display, game state display, etc.) and performance display monitor is driven in turn in common units, and a dynamic lighting method is used. Lighting is controlled by

Step S203: The main control CPU 72 executes port input processing. In this process, in order to accurately acquire the latest switch state based on the input port information, the main control CPU 72 inputs the input values of various switch signals from the parallel I/O port 79 and the inverted result value of the previous input value. Store the product in the input port ON detection flag. As a result, the value (ON/OFF) of the input port ON detection flag makes it possible to accurately grasp the input state based on the changes from the previous time of various switch signals. The various switch signals include a passage detection signal from the gate switch 78, a middle start prize opening switch 80, a right start prize opening switch 82, a first count switch 84, a second count switch 85, a first prize opening switch 86, a 2 Includes a winning detection signal from the winning opening switch 81, a detection signal from an unillustrated fraud detection switch (magnetic detection switch, radio wave detection switch, vibration detection switch, etc.).

Step S203a: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the gaming machine state flag is "00H (playable state)".

As a result, when it is confirmed that the gaming machine state flag is "00H (game possible state)" (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S204. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the gaming machine state flag is "00H (game available state)" (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S203b.

The reason why such determination processing is executed is to prevent the execution of the processing relating to the normal game when the setting is being changed, the setting is being checked, or the like. By not executing processing related to a normal game within the timer interrupt processing during setting change or setting confirmation, the load on the program of the main control device 70 can be reduced.

Step S203b: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the gaming machine state flag is "03H or more (fatal error state)".

As a result, when it is confirmed that the gaming machine state flag is "03H or more (fatal error state)" (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S217a without executing step S203c. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the gaming machine state flag is "03H or more (fatal error state)" (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S203c.

The reason why such determination processing is executed is to prevent the transition to the setting change or setting confirmation when a fatal error state occurs.

Step S203c: The main control CPU 72 executes setting change processing (setting related processing). By executing this process, the main control CPU 72 performs setting-related processing including at least one of setting change processing executed when changing the setting value and setting confirmation processing executed when confirming the setting value. can be executed (setting-related processing executing means). Details of the processing will be described later. The setting-related processing includes processing executed during setting change or setting confirmation. After finishing the setting change process, the main control CPU 72 executes step S217a. The reason for moving to step S217a is to output an external signal (security signal) in the external information management process.

By executing such processing, the main control CPU 72 can restrict the execution of at least a part of the other processing while one of the setting-related processing and the base-related processing is being executed. You can (limiting means). That is, when the main control CPU 72 is changing settings or checking settings (step S203; Yes), at least part of the base-related processing (steps S204 to S217, especially step S208) is not executed. can do.

Step S204: The main control CPU 72 executes timer update processing (special information continuous transmission processing execution means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 controls various timers used in the game (timers for managing fluctuation time/stop time of symbols, opening time/closing time of electric accessories, etc.), various timers for external information, and security signals. Execute processing (subtraction processing, etc.) for updating a counter such as an output timer.

Step S205: The main control CPU 72 executes initial value random number update processing. The content of the process is the same as the initial value random number update process (step S142 in FIG. 18) in the main loop process.

Step S206: The main control CPU 72 executes a winning symbol random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 updates the value of the counter for generating various random numbers for lottery of special symbols and normal symbols. The value of each counter is incremented in the counter area of the RAM 76 and looped within a prescribed range. Various random numbers include, for example, jackpot symbol random numbers.

Step S207: The main control CPU 72 executes switch management processing. In this process, among the switch signals input in the previous port input process (step S203), the gate switch 78, the middle start prize opening switch 80, the right start prize opening switch 82, the first count switch 84, and the second count switch 85 Based on the winning detection signals from the first winning port switch 86 and the second winning port switch 81, the event occurring during the game is judged, and the process corresponding to the occurred event is executed. Details of the processing will be described later.

In this embodiment, when the winning detection signal (ON) is input from the middle start winning opening switch 80 or the right starting winning opening switch 82, the main control CPU 72 internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol respectively It is determined that an event that serves as a trigger (lottery trigger) has occurred. Also, when the passage detection signal (ON) is input from the gate switch 78, the main control CPU 72 determines that an event that triggers the lottery corresponding to the normal symbol has occurred.

Step S208: The main control CPU 72 executes addition number calculation processing (base-related processing execution means). The addition number calculation process is a base-related process. This processing is processing of the used area. In this process, the main control CPU 72 controls the game state, each switch (out switch 99, middle start winning opening switch 80, right starting winning opening switch 82, first winning opening switch 86, second winning opening switch 81, first Check the state of the count switch 84, second count switch 85, etc.), and for the base calculation, "the value to be added to the RAM outside the area (the number of winning balls generated during 4 ms, the number of outs, etc.)" Calculate Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes processing for determining the values of the number of shot balls A (normal out addition number), the number of shot balls B (total out addition number), and the number of acquired balls (normal prize ball addition number). do. Details of the processing will be described later.

Step S209, step S210: The main control CPU 72 executes special game management processing and normal game management processing. These processes are for specifically advancing the game in the pachinko machine 1 .

In the special game management process (step S209), the main control CPU72 controls the execution of the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, or the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device. It determines variable display or stop display by 35, and controls the operation of the first variable prize winning device 30 and the second variable prize winning device 31 according to the display result. Details of the processing will be described later.

In addition, in the normal game management process (step S210), the main control CPU 72 determines variable display or stop display by the normal symbol display device 33, or controls the operation of the variable start winning device 28 according to the display result. do. For example, the main control CPU 72 stores the random number (determined random number per normal symbol) acquired with the passage of the starting gate 20 in the previous switch management process (step S207), and in this normal game management process A random value is read out from memory, and it is determined whether or not it falls within a predetermined winning range. When the random number falls within the winning range, the normal symbols are variably displayed by the normal symbol display device 33, and the normal symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined winning manner. Energize to operate the variable starting winning device 28 . On the other hand, if the random number is out of the hit range, the main control CPU 72 performs stop display of normal symbols in a manner of deviation after the variable display.

Step S211: The main control CPU 72 executes state management processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines whether there is an abnormality in the frequency of winning (a state in which the number of balls entering the middle start winning opening 26 and the normal winning openings 22 and 24 is abnormally high) or a base abnormality (the number of balls collected to the back side of the game board unit 8). The total number of winning balls to each winning opening 22, 24, 26, 28a, 30b, 31b is larger than the number of game balls driven into the game area 8a). Check whether or not it has occurred. When an error state is detected, the main control CPU 72 outputs a security signal to the hall computer of the game arcade and sends a predetermined error command to the effect control device 124 to indicate that an abnormality has occurred. to notify you. In this process, the main control CPU 72 may execute error processing related to door opening and fraud detection (magnet, radio wave, vibration, etc.).

Step S212: The main control CPU 72 executes a winning opening switch process. In this process, when each input port ON detection flag stored based on the winning detection signal input from the various switches 80, 81, 82, 84, 85, 86 in the previous port input process (step S203) is ON, Each target prize ball control counter is incremented by 1 and updated.

Step S213: The main control CPU 72 executes payout control management processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 first checks whether the payout command buffer is empty (whether the payout command to be sent is set), and if not empty (the payout command is set), the payout command Various payout commands output to the buffer are transmitted to the payout control device 92 . For example, a payout command indicating an activation mode at power-on is set in the process of CPU initialization processing, output to a payout command buffer, and a payout command indicating this activation mode is transmitted in this processing. On the other hand, when the payout command buffer is empty, the process proceeds to instruct the payout of prize balls. The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the prize ball control counter is not 0, and if the prize ball control counter is not 0, the payout control device 92 issues a prize ball-specified payout command that indicates the number of prize balls corresponding to this counter. Send to More specifically, a payout command specifying a prize ball corresponding to each prize ball control counter is transmitted in this process. The payout command is transmitted when the payout command permission signal is input from the payout control device 92 to the main controller 70 and the number of payout commands set in the transmission data register (transmission FIFO) is a predetermined number. is less than (more specifically, if the payout command set in the transmission FIFO has already been transmitted or is currently being transmitted and there is space in the transmission FIFO), it is executed.

Also, especially when the power is turned on, when the payout command set in the course of the CPU initialization process is normally transmitted, the main control CPU 72 turns on the firing permission signal with this as a trigger. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 clears the payout command buffer output when the power is turned on, and turns on the firing permission signal by setting a specific bit of the output port. As a result, the shooting of the game ball is permitted after confirming the normal operation after the power is turned on, and this shooting permission signal is sent to the shooting control board 108 via the payout control device 92, so that the game ball can be shot. state.

Also, the main control CPU 72 outputs a prize ball content command for transmitting the content of the number of prize balls to the effect control device 124 in the payout control management process. When the winning detection signal is input from the first count switch 84 or the second count switch 85 corresponding to the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31, the first profit (for example, 15 game balls) Generate the corresponding prize content command. Note that generating a command means storing the command in the subcommand transmission buffer (same below). Also, when a winning detection signal is input from the second winning opening switch 81 corresponding to the normal winning opening 24, a prize ball content command corresponding to a second profit (for example, 10 game balls) is generated. The prize contents command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the subcommand transmission process (step S144 in FIG. 18) of the main loop process.

[Regarding the number of prize balls and the number of winning game balls]
The number of prize balls for the start opening of the first special symbol and the number of prize balls for the start opening of the second special symbol are each set to a prescribed number of one or more. Also, the number of winning balls may be different between the starting opening of the first special symbol and the starting opening of the second special symbol. In addition, the minimum number of prize balls is set based on the winning probability of special symbols and the expected value of the total number of game balls acquired (average number of balls obtained in a series of periods from the first hit to the end of the time reduction state). You may Furthermore, the probability of winning a special pattern, the expected value of the total number of game balls acquired, the number of times the large winning opening is opened, the opening time of the large winning opening, the maximum number of winnings of the large winning opening, and the number of winning balls of the large winning opening are specified. When the conditions are satisfied, a big win may be set in which the number of game balls acquired by one big win is less than 1/4 of the maximum number of acquired game balls.

Step S215: The main control CPU 72 executes test signal management processing. This processing can be an out-of-bounds processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 has its own internal state (for example, normal symbol game management state, special symbol game management state, launch position designation state, during big hit, during small hit, probability variation function in operation, time reduction function in operation, etc. ) and stores them in the port output request buffer. With this test signal, the internal state of the main control CPU 72 can be tested outside the main control device 70, for example.

Step S216: The main control CPU 72 executes LED display setting processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 includes the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol working memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol display device 34, the second special symbol display device 35, the first special symbol working memory lamp 34a, the second special A process of generating common output data for lighting control of the LEDs included in the symbol operation memory lamp 35a, the game state display device 38, etc. is executed. Processing related to the performance display monitor 200 is executed in the performance display monitor control processing.

More specifically, the main control CPU 72 is based on the symbol fluctuation display, stop display, working memory number display, game state display, etc. determined in the special game management process (step S209) and the normal game management process (step S210). Then, a drive signal for lighting each lamp in a corresponding manner is generated as common output data.

Step S217: The main control CPU 72 executes solenoid data setting processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 controls the normal electric accessory solenoid 88, the first big winning opening solenoid 90 and the second big winning solenoid generated in the special game management process (step S209) and the normal game management process (step S210). Each drive signal for the solenoid 97, test signal, etc. are combined (combined) and stored in the port output buffer. After that, the main control CPU 72 executes solenoid data port output processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether a value is stored in each output buffer (port output buffer), and if a value is stored, outputs to the port. For example, each drive signal of each solenoid 88, 90, 97 stored in the port output buffer is port-output. In this case, each drive signal is sent to each corresponding solenoid 88, 90, 97, and each solenoid performs an operation according to the drive signal.

Step S217a: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes external information management processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sends an external information signal (for example, winning ball information, door opening information, number of pattern confirmation information, jackpot information, starting door information, security signal, etc.) to the hall computer of the game hall through the external terminal board 160. is stored in the port output request buffer.
In the external information management process, an external signal (security signal) is output when "setting is being changed or setting is being checked" or the like.

In more detail, the main control CPU 72 controls the hall computer (external device) in the setting change state (setting change in progress), setting confirmation state (setting confirmation in progress), setting error state, RAM error state, checksum error state, etc. Security signal transmission processing (special information transmission processing) for transmitting a security signal (special information) is executed (special information transmission processing execution means). The security signal can be sent to the hole computer by storing the data corresponding to the security signal in the port output request buffer.

Here, the security signal is a signal that is output when an abnormal state occurs, or when the state changes to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state.

The main control CPU 72 refers to the value stored in the gaming machine status flag (gaming machine status information) and determines whether or not to transmit the security signal (special information transmission processing executing means). For example, if the gaming machine state flag stores a value (00H) corresponding to a playable state, it is determined not to transmit a security signal, and a value other than the value (00H) corresponding to a playable state (01H to 05H) is stored, it is determined to transmit a security signal.

In this embodiment, among various external information signals, for example, "jackpot 1" to "jackpot 5" are output as jackpot information to the outside, so that an external electronic device (data display (external information signal output means). That is, by dividing the jackpot information into a plurality of "jackpots 1" to "jackpots 5" and outputting them, the types of jackpots (types of winnings) can be tallied and managed by a hall computer (not shown) from these combinations. Occurrence of small hits that are not classified as "big hits" even if they recognize changes in the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) or the shortened state of symbol fluctuation time (hit that does not operate the conditional device) even if it is not winning. can be aggregated and managed. Also, based on the jackpot information, for example, a data display device (not shown) counts and displays the number of jackpot occurrences within the past several business days for each pachinko machine 1, and recognizes whether or not each machine is currently jackpotting. Alternatively, it is possible to recognize whether or not the current symbol variation time is shortened for each machine. In this external information management process, the main control CPU 72 controls in detail the respective output states (set of ON or OFF) of "jackpot 1" to "jackpot 5".

Step S218: The main control CPU 72 executes interrupt prohibition processing.

Step S218a: The main control CPU 72 executes register save processing.

Step S219: The main control CPU 72 executes performance display monitor control processing (base-related processing executing means). Performance display monitor control processing is base-related processing. This process is outside the area. In this processing, the main control CPU 72 executes processing such as switching of the display content of the performance display monitor 200, and the base value calculated in the performance display monitor aggregate division processing (step S145 in FIG. 18) of the main loop processing. is generated as common output data as a drive signal for displaying on the performance display monitor 200 . Details of the processing will be described later.

Step S219a: The main control CPU 72 executes register return processing. As a result, the register values saved in the process of step S218a are restored.

Step S220: The main control CPU 72 executes interrupt permission processing. By permitting an interrupt here, it becomes possible for another interrupt to occur while the steps after the next step of the timer interrupt processing are being executed. In this way, multiple interrupts are permitted for timer interrupt processing.
The interrupt controller 192 executes the reception of interrupt request signals, priority control of multiple interrupts, and the like.

Step S221: The main control CPU 72 executes firing position management processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes the process of determining the shooting position of the game ball according to the progress of the game (shooting position determining means). Incidentally, this process may be executed in the special game management process. Details of the processing will be described later.

Step S222: The main control CPU 72 restores the values of the HL, DE, BC, and AF registers saved in step S200 to each register, terminates the timer interrupt processing, and returns to the main loop processing of the CPU initialization processing.

[Interrupt management by interrupt controller]
In the main control unit 70, during the execution of the CPU initialization process, which is the main control program, an XINT interrupt (an interrupt request output from the parallel I/O port 79 that is the source of the power-off notice interrupt process), an SCU interrupt (an interrupt request output by the serial communication circuit 196 that is the source of serial communication reception interrupt processing) and a PTC interrupt (an interrupt request that is output by the timer circuit 194 that is the source of timer interrupt processing) can occur. These interrupt requests are managed and controlled by an interrupt controller 192 implemented in main controller 70 . The interrupt controller 192 permits acceptance of interrupt requests by an interrupt permission instruction (EI instruction) of the main control CPU 72, and controls (so-called maskable interrupt control) to prohibit acceptance of interrupt requests by an interrupt prohibition instruction (DI instruction). ing.

Since the XINT interrupt, the SCU interrupt, and the PTC interrupt are all generated based on independent factors that do not depend on each other, it is naturally conceivable that multiple interrupt requests may occur at the same time. Therefore, the interrupt controller 192 controls each interrupt request according to the priority of the interrupt request, which is predetermined in consideration of the importance of interrupt processing, processing efficiency, and the like.

More specifically, the priority of interrupt requests (interrupt processing) is defined in the interrupt vector table. The priority is the next highest, and the SCU interrupt (serial communication reception interrupt processing) has the highest priority (see FIGS. 19 to 21).

By setting the interrupt vector table at the beginning of the CPU initialization processing, the interrupt controller 192 can perform priority control of interrupt requests generated at the timing after this. In practice, after the CPU initialization process transitions to the main loop process, if any interrupt request occurs during the period from when the interrupt is enabled until when the interrupt is disabled, the interrupt controller 192 handles the accepted interrupt request. Control based on the priority set in the interrupt vector table. For example, when an XINT interrupt and a PTC interrupt are accepted at the same time, the PTC interrupt (timer interrupt processing) having a higher priority is processed first. While the timer interrupt processing is being executed, the XINT interrupt is in an interrupt waiting state, and after the timer interrupt processing is completed, the XINT interrupt (interrupt processing at the time of notice of power failure) is executed.

By controlling interrupt requests based on priority in this manner, the interrupt controller 192 enables the main controller 70 to execute multiple interrupts.

[Dynamic port output processing]
FIG. 25 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of dynamic port output processing. Each procedure will be described below.

Step S160: The main control CPU 72 executes processing to clear the output port 0. This clears the display on the main display. Output port 0 is a port for outputting data relating to the main display.

Step S161: The main control CPU 72 executes processing to clear the output port 2. As a result, the display on the performance display monitor 200 is cleared. Output port 2 is a port for outputting data relating to performance display monitor 200 .

The reason for executing the processes of steps S160 and S161 is that in the case of the dynamic lighting system, if the display is not erased, the control process may run out of control when referring to the common data.

After the processes of steps S160 and S161, a process of waiting for the end of the blanking time can be executed. Due to this waiting time, the display data can be erased and the data can be output after a certain period of time has passed. This waiting time is also a waiting time for avoiding the control process from running out of control. During this waiting time, the processing of steps S162 and S163 below may be executed.

Step S162: The main control CPU 72 executes processing to update the common counter within the range of 0-3. As a result, the common number to be output is updated.

Step S163: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for acquiring common data corresponding to the common counter. As a result, data corresponding to the common to be output can be acquired.

Step S<b>164 : The main control CPU 72 executes processing for outputting common data to the output port 1 . By outputting the common data to the output port 1, the common data can be output while switching the common. The output port 1 is a port for outputting data designating a common number (common 0 to 3) corresponding to the common counter.

Step S165: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for acquiring display data according to the common counter. The display data is stored in the RAM of the used area.

The display data to be acquired is roughly divided into two types of data. The first data is data for the main display device, and the second data is data for the performance display monitor 200 .

The first main display data is generated as common output data in the LED display setting process (FIG. 63).

The second data for the performance display monitor 200 may be generated as data for displaying the base in the performance display monitor display processing (step S646) of the performance display monitor control processing (FIG. 69). It may be generated as data for displaying the set value in steps S334 to S346 of the process (FIG. 30).

Here, with respect to the second data for the performance display monitor 200, whether the base is displayed or the set value is displayed, the display data is set in the common common 0 to 3 buffers. Data will be overwritten.

The processing of step S169 of FIG. 25 and the processing of step S173 of FIG. 26 are the same processing, but when executing the processing of step S169 of FIG. Since the data related to the set values are stored in the buffer, the performance display monitor 200 displays the contents related to the set values. On the other hand, when the process of step S173 in FIG. 26 is executed, the performance display monitor 200 displays the contents of the bass because the common common 0 to 3 buffers store the data about the bass.

Step S166: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the game is ready for play. Specifically, it confirms whether or not the value of the gaming machine status flag is "00H".

As a result, when it is confirmed that it is in a playable state (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S167a. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the game is ready (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S169.

Step S167a: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of outputting to the output port 0. Specifically, a process of setting the display of the main display is executed. As a result, the data specified by the specified common is output. The data output here is the common output data generated by the LED display setting process. By setting the common output data in the common port output buffer, each lamp mounted on the integrated display board 89 lighting can be controlled by a dynamic lighting method.

Step S167b: The main control CPU 72 executes interrupt prohibition processing.
Step S167c: The main control CPU 72 executes register save processing.

Step S168a: The main control CPU 72 executes performance display monitor output processing (base-related processing executing means). Performance display monitor output processing is base-related processing. This process is outside the area. Therefore, this process is executed after the interrupt prohibition process is executed. By executing this process, the data specified by the specified common is output. Details of the processing will be described later.

By executing such a process, the main control CPU 72 can execute the process of displaying the base on the performance display monitor 200 (base-related process) as a process included in the process outside the area (second process). Yes (second process executing means).

Step S168b: The main control CPU 72 executes register return processing.
Step S168c: The main control CPU 72 executes interrupt permission processing.

Step S169: The main control CPU 72 executes the process of outputting to the output port 2. Specifically, the process of setting the display of the performance display monitor 200 (the process of outputting the display data acquired in the process of step S165 to the output port 2) is executed. This processing is processing of the used area. By executing this process, the setting value is displayed on the performance display monitor 200 while the setting is being changed or the setting is being checked (when the game is not in the playable state). Processing other than the processing of step S168a can be used area processing.

By executing such processing, it is possible to output the buffer contents of the use area to the main display and output the buffer contents outside the area to the performance display monitor 200 in the playable state. On the other hand, during setting change and setting confirmation (when the game is not possible), the contents of the buffer in the used area can be output to the performance display monitor 200, and the main display is cleared so that nothing is displayed. can do.

In the pachinko machine 1, there is a case where the main display does not have a 7-segment LED (a case where a plurality of dot LEDs are arranged geometrically). Under such circumstances, it is necessary to use the 7-segment LED of the performance display monitor 200 in order to display the set values in an easy-to-understand manner. At this time, there is a regular concern about performing processing outside the area (concern that processing is not performed in the use area even though it is a process related to a game).

Since processing related to the performance display monitor 200 is allowed to be executed outside the area, display processing of the performance display monitor 200 is basically executed outside the area.
However, among the display processes of the 7-segment LED of the performance display monitor, the process of displaying the set values may correspond to the process related to the game, so it is executed in the use area.

As a result, the process of displaying the setting values on the performance display monitor 200 can be executed in the used area, and regular concerns can be avoided.

By executing such a process, the main control CPU 72 can execute the process of displaying the setting value on the performance display monitor 200 as a process included in the process of the used area (first process) (first processing execution means).

After completing the above processing, the main control CPU 72 returns to the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 24).

[Performance display monitor output processing]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of performance display monitor output processing. Each procedure will be described below.

Step S170: The main control CPU 72 executes stack pointer save processing. This processing saves the stack pointer of the used area.

Step S171: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting a stack pointer outside the area.

Step S172: The main control CPU 72 executes register save processing. Saving registers uses the stack pointer outside the area.

Step S173: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of outputting data.
Specifically, the process of setting the display of the performance display monitor 200 (the process of outputting the display data acquired in the process of step S165 in FIG. 25 to the output port 2) is executed. By executing this process, the base is displayed on the performance display monitor 200 in the playable state.

This process is similar to step S169 in FIG. 25, but the contents of the data output to the output port 2 (the contents displayed on the performance display monitor 200) are different.
In this process (step S173), since the data about the bass is obtained in step S165 of FIG.
On the other hand, in step S169 of FIG. 25, the data on the setting value is acquired in step S165 of FIG. .

Since the output of common is executed in the process related to the use area (since the common number is used; see step S164 in FIG. 25), the process of outputting only data is executed in this process. As a result, the data specified by the specified common is output. The data output here is the common output data generated by the performance display monitor display process. By setting the common output data (base display data) in the common port output buffer, the performance display monitor The lighting of each lamp mounted in 200 can be controlled in a dynamic lighting manner.

Specifically, the main control CPU 72 switches either the previous base or the current base with the corresponding identifier "bL." or "b6." Execute processing to set common output data for display in the port output buffer. The display contents of the performance display monitor 200 are controlled based on the common output data (driving signal) set here.

Step S166: The main control CPU 72 executes register return processing.

Step S167: The main control CPU 72 executes stack pointer return processing. By executing this processing, after returning to the stack pointer of the used area, it returns to the processing related to the used area.
After completing the above processing, the main control CPU 72 returns to the dynamic port output processing (FIG. 25).

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing the relationship between timer interrupt processing and dynamic port output processing.
The timer interrupt has a lower interrupt priority than the serial communication reception interrupt (see FIGS. 19 to 21).
Here, the bold dotted line arrows in the figure indicate the interrupt prohibited section (dotted line arrows A1 to A3), and the bold solid line arrows in the drawing indicate the interrupt permitted section (solid line arrows B1 to B3).

In the timer interrupt process, first, a register save process (S200) and an interrupt flag initialization process (S201) are executed. This section is an interrupt prohibited section (see dotted arrow A1).

When an interrupt occurs, the main control CPU 72 (program, assembler) of the present embodiment automatically enters the same state as when an interrupt prohibition instruction is used. Therefore, when timer interrupt processing is started, internally (in terms of hardware), interrupts are disabled. Therefore, in order to permit interrupts, it is necessary to execute interrupt permitting processing.

Therefore, in the timer interrupt process, an interrupt permission process (S201a) is executed next. By executing this process, an interrupt-permitted section is started (see solid-line arrow B1).

When the dynamic port output process (S202) is called from the timer interrupt process, in the dynamic port output process, the process of clearing output port 0, the process of clearing output port 2, etc. are executed (S160, S161). This section is an interrupt-permitted section (see solid line arrow B1).

In the dynamic port output process, next, an interrupt prohibition process (S167b) is executed. By executing this process, an interrupt disabled section is started (see dotted arrow A2).

In the dynamic port output process, a register save process (S167c), a performance display monitor output process (S168a), and a register restore process (S168b) are further executed. This section is an interrupt prohibited section (see dotted arrow A2).

In the dynamic port output process, finally, an interrupt permission process (S168c) is executed. By executing this process, an interrupt-permitted section is started (see solid-line arrow B2).

Return from dynamic port output processing to timer interrupt processing and execute various processing. This section is an interrupt-permitted section (see solid line arrow B2).

In the timer interrupt process, next, interrupt prohibition process (S218) is executed. By executing this process, an interrupt disabled section is started (see dotted arrow A3).
In the timer interrupt process, a register save process (S218a), a performance display monitor control process (S219), and a register restore process (S219a) are further executed. This section is an interrupt prohibited section (see dotted arrow A3).

Then, in the timer interrupt process, an interrupt permission process (S220) is executed. By executing this process, an interrupt-permitted section is started (see solid-line arrow B3).

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the "serial communication reception interrupt process" having a higher interrupt priority than the "timer interrupt process" is set, the "performance display monitor control process (S219)" and the "performance display monitor output Processing (S165)” is executed after disabling interrupts.

Therefore, during execution of the "performance display monitor control process (S219)" and the "performance display monitor output process (S165)", even if a "serial communication reception interrupt" with a high interrupt priority occurs, the interrupt is not interrupted. The "performance display monitor control process (S219)" and the "performance display monitor output process (S165)" are continuously executed.
In this case, the "performance display monitor control process" and the "performance display monitor output process" are completed, and the "serial communication reception interrupt process" is executed at the timing when the interrupt is permitted. Since the received data related to the interrupt is stored in the receive buffer, even if the timing of extracting the received data is delayed, no problem will occur because the processing related to the received data will be executed after that.

[Processing content of the main control CPU 72]
The main control CPU 72 executes timer interrupt processing (first processing) (first processing executing means). In addition, when a serial communication reception interrupt (predetermined interrupt) occurs during the execution of timer interrupt processing, the main control CPU 72 interrupts execution of the timer interrupt processing and performs serial communication reception interrupt processing ( second process) (second process executing means).

The timer interrupt processing (first processing) includes an interrupt permission processing for permitting a serial communication reception interrupt, and an interrupt non-permission processing for monitoring the history of pitching and not permitting a serial communication reception interrupt.

The interrupt permission process is a process (special game management process, etc.) excluding the process related to the use area, for example, the "performance display monitor control process (S219)" and the "performance display monitor output process (S165)".
The interrupt disallowing process is a process related to the outside of the area, for example, "performance display monitor control process (S219)" and "performance display monitor output process (S165)".

When executing the interrupt non-permission processing, the main control CPU 72 executes the interrupt non-permission processing in a state where the serial communication reception interrupt is prohibited (first processing executing means).

Further, when executing the interrupt disabling process, the main control CPU 72 executes the process of disabling the serial communication reception interrupt before executing the interrupt disabling process, executes the interrupt disabling process, and executes the interrupt disabling process. After the execution, a process for permitting the serial communication reception interrupt is executed (first process executing means).

The interrupt disabling process is part of the process of calculating the base. Part of the processing for calculating the base is the “performance display monitor control processing (S219)” and the “performance display monitor output processing (S165)”.

FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a modification of timer interrupt processing.
Although the timer interrupt processing has been described in the order of processing shown in FIG. 24, it can be modified as follows.

The processing order of the timer interrupt processing is [1] dynamic port output processing, [2] addition number calculation processing (at least winning detection and calculation of the number of winning balls), and [3] performance display monitor control processing.

[1] The reason why the dynamic port output process is given the highest priority is to keep the common switching timing and the data display time constant. Therefore, [1] dynamic port output processing is performed in the first half (early stage) of timer interrupt processing.

[2] The reason why the addition number calculation process is given the next priority is that in the performance display monitor control process, the number of prize balls to be used and the number of outs are calculated in advance within the use area, so the addition number calculation process is performed according to the performance. This is because it must be performed before the display monitor control process.

[3] The reason why the performance display monitor control process is given the last priority is that the performance display monitor control process must be executed after the addition number calculation process is completed.

The processing to be inserted into [A], [B] or [C] in the figure is not limited to the arrangement example of FIG. Judgment processing, processing related to special symbols, processing related to normal symbols, processing related to errors, processing related to external output, processing related to test signal output, port output processing, etc.) can be inserted.

At this time, the calculated base value is a different value depending on whether the process (special game management process) relating to the special symbol is performed before or after the addition number calculation process. The reason for this is that the number of outs, which is the denominator of the base value, may or may not be counted because it is determined whether or not the game is in the midst of a big win in the addition number calculation process.

Specifically, when the processing related to the special design is before the addition number calculation processing, within one interruption, when the processing related to the special design becomes a big hit and the out switch is detected, the out The number is not counted (out-switch detection is judged to be a jackpot and is excluded from the base calculation).

On the other hand, when the processing relating to the special symbol is after the calculation of the number of additions, the number of outs is counted when the processing relating to the special symbol results in a big hit and the out switch is detected within one interruption. (Since the jackpot has not yet been determined at the time of the addition number calculation processing, the detection of the out switch is valid and is not excluded from the base calculation).

In this way, the value of the base changes depending on whether the processing related to the special symbols is arranged before or after the addition number calculation processing. can be placed anywhere in the timer interrupt process depending on the contents of

29 and 30 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of setting change processing.
Step S300: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for loading the set value buffer. Thereby, the main control CPU 72 can acquire the current set value.

Step S302: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the gaming machine state flag is "01H (setting change state)".

As a result, when it is confirmed that the gaming machine state flag is "01H (setting change state)" (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S304. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the gaming machine state flag is "01H (setting change state)" (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S308.

Step S304: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the RAM clear switch 304 has been pressed. In the present embodiment, since the RAM clear switch 304 is used as the setting change switch, it is confirmed here that the RAM clear switch 304 is pressed. If a setting change switch is separately provided, it is checked in this process whether the setting change switch has been pressed.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the RAM clear switch 304 has been pressed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S306. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the RAM clear switch 304 has been pressed (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S308.

Step S306: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of adding 1 to the set value. For example, if the setting value loaded in step S300 is "0 (setting 1)", the setting value becomes "1 (setting 2)" when this process is executed. If the setting value loaded in step S300 is "1 (setting 2)", the setting value becomes "2 (setting 3)" when this process is executed. If the setting value loaded in step S300 is "5 (setting 6)", the setting value returns to "0 (setting 1)" when this process is executed.

Here, if the setting value loaded in step S300 is "5 (setting 6)", by executing this process, the setting value is set to "6 (out of range)" without returning to the original value, and the next In steps S308 and S310, processing for correcting to "0 (setting 1)" may be performed.

Step S308: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the setting value is in the range of "0 (setting 1)" to "5 (setting 6)". This process is for avoiding setting of unintended setting values.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the setting value is in the range of "0 (setting 1)" to "5 (setting 6)" (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S312. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the setting value is in the range of "0 (setting 1)" to "5 (setting 6)" (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S310.

Step S310: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting "0 (setting 1)". As a result, when an unintended setting value is set, "0 (setting 1)" can be set.

Step S312: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the gaming machine state flag is "01H (setting change state)".

As a result, when it is confirmed that the gaming machine state flag is "01H (setting change state)" (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S314. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the gaming machine state flag is "01H (setting change state)" (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S322 (intra-page connector 1→1).

Step S314: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the setting key has changed from ON to OFF. The main control CPU 72 can determine that the setting key has changed from ON to OFF when the input signal from the setting key switch 302 changes from ON to OFF.
Note that this determination process may be a determination process as to whether the setting key (setting key switch 302) is OFF.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the setting key has changed from ON to OFF (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S316. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the setting key has changed from ON to OFF (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S334 (off-page connector C→C).

Step S316: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for generating a "setting-related termination designation command" as a subcommand. The "setting-related end designation command" can include information indicating that setting-related processing (processing related to setting change or processing related to setting confirmation) has ended, and information of setting values.

Step S317: The main control CPU 72 executes subcommand group set processing. By executing this process, various commands including the "setting-related termination designation command" are set in the subcommand transmission buffer. Various commands can be the same commands as the commands sent when the power is turned on. The command set here is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the subcommand transmission process.

Step S318: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for saving the output time (for example, 128 ms) in the security signal output timer (special information continuous transmission processing executing means). By saving the output time in the security signal output timer, the security signal is output to the hall computer in the external information management process (step S217a in FIG. 24).

This processing is part of the special information continuous transmission processing (processing for setting a timer). The main control CPU 72 executes this processing not only when the setting confirmation state ends, but also when the setting change state ends (special information continuous transmission processing execution means).

In this process, a security signal output timer of 128 ms is set at the end of setting confirmation in order to ensure that the security signal output time at the time of setting confirmation is 128 ms or longer.

When the setting confirmation is finished, the security signal output timer is set, and the gaming machine state flag is cleared. As a result, the setting change process (setting-related process) will not be called from the next timer interrupt. The security signal continues to be transmitted until the security signal output timer times out. In order to reduce the code of the program, the timer for security signal output is also set at the end of the setting change.

It is also possible to arrange a branch process for determining whether the setting confirmation state has ended or not before this process, so that this process can be executed only when the setting confirmation state ends.

Step S319: The main control CPU 72 executes processing to clear the gaming machine state flag. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting the gaming machine state flag to "00H". As a result, the state of the gaming machine shifts to a playable state.
After completing this process, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S332 (intra-page connector 2→2).

Step S322: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether the setting key is ON or the inner frame is open.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the setting key is ON or the inner frame is open (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S332 (intra-page connector 2→2). On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the setting key is ON or the inner frame is open (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S324.

Step S324: The main control CPU72 executes processing to update the inner frame closing timer.
In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an initial value to the inner frame closing timer when the inner frame (for example, the inner frame assembly 7) is closed, and then counts down the timer as time elapses (each time this module is called). do.

Step S324: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the inner frame closing timer has timed out. Specifically, if the value of the inner frame closing timer has not yet become 0, the main control CPU 72 determines that the inner frame closing timer has not timed out (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 executes step S334 (out-of-page connector C→C).

After that, when the value of the inner frame closing timer becomes 0 with the passage of time, the main control CPU 72 determines that the inner frame closing timer has timed up (Yes), and executes step S328.

Step S328: The main control CPU 72 executes processing to clear the gaming machine state flag. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting the gaming machine state flag to "00H". As a result, the state of the gaming machine shifts to a playable state.

Step S330: The main control CPU 72 executes the process of transitioning to the process when the setting change is completed. Specifically, the jump command executes the process of shifting to step S152a (step S153) in FIG.

By executing such processing, when the setting change and setting confirmation are completed, the state is shifted to the reset state. Specifically, it jumps to the saving process when the power is turned off. Then, at the jump destination, after the checksum is calculated, the power supply is confirmed, and the program returns to the beginning of the program (CPU initialization processing). As a result, the program structure of "initialization → setting change or setting confirmation (temporary main loop) → initialization after setting change → original main loop" is replaced with "initialization → main loop (playable state)". , setting change and setting confirmation)”.

Here, when adding a setting function (setting change device 300) to the pachinko machine 1, the processing at power-on is (1) initialization processing, (2) main loop processing during setting change, (3) setting It is necessary to have a configuration of re-initialization processing after change (display clear processing, RAM re-clear processing, transition processing to playable state, etc.), and (4) main loop processing during play.
Adding the setting function in this way requires processing before and after the setting change processing in addition to the setting change processing itself, resulting in a large increase in the amount of program code.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the power-on process (at least part of the CPU initialization process) and the saving process at the power-off notice (at least part of the power-off notice interrupt process) are divided into It is also used as processing after the end of setting change.

Specifically, in the setting change process called during the timer interrupt, if the conditions for ending the setting change or setting confirmation are satisfied, the system does not return to the timer interrupt process. in the middle of).

In the saving process when the power is interrupted, all output ports are cleared, the checksum is calculated and saved, and then the power remains ON. It shifts to a normal game state through initialization processing similar to .

In this way, by using both power-on processing and power-off notice save processing for the processing after the setting change is completed, program code can be suppressed.

Step S332: The main control CPU72 executes processing to clear the inner frame closing timer. After completing this process, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S334 (out-of-page connector C→C).

Step S334: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for setting the display data "rn." in the common 0, 1 buffers.

Step S336: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the gaming machine state flag is "01H (setting change state)".

As a result, when it is confirmed that the gaming machine state flag is "01H (setting change state)" (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S338. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the gaming machine state flag is "01H (setting change state)" (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S340.

Step S338: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting data corresponding to "-" as display data in the common 2 buffer. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S342.

Step S340: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting data corresponding to "blank (non-display)" as display data in the common 2 buffer. The main control CPU 72 then executes step S342.

Step S342: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for loading the set value buffer. As a result, the main control CPU 72 can acquire the setting values after the setting change.

Step S344: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for converting the set values into display data.

Step S346: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting the display data converted by the process of step S344 as display data in the common 3 buffer.

For example, when the setting value is "5 (setting 6)" and the setting is being changed, the four 7-segment LEDs 201 to 204 of the performance display monitor 200 display "r", "n." -" and "6" are displayed. When the setting value is "0 (setting 1)" and the setting is being checked, the four 7-segment LEDs 201 to 204 of the performance display monitor 200 display "r", "n." Blank (hidden)” and “1” are displayed.

That is, the display mode of "r", "n.", "-", and "setting value" of the performance display monitor 200 is the display mode (first display mode) during setting change, and the display mode of the performance display monitor 200, "r", " n.”, “blank (not displayed)”, and “set value” are display modes (second display mode) during setting confirmation.

By executing such processing, the performance display monitor 200 displays the setting values in different display modes during setting change and setting confirmation, and when the setting values are displayed, the base is displayed. You can choose not to display it.

Also, by executing such processing, the performance display monitor 200 can display the set value or the base. When the performance display monitor 200 displays the set value, the base is not displayed, and when the performance display monitor 200 displays the base, the set value can be displayed.
After completing the above processing, the main control CPU 72 returns to the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 24).

[Switch management processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart of a procedure example of switch management processing. Each procedure will be described below.

Step S10: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal has been input (a lottery opportunity has occurred) from the middle start winning opening switch 80 corresponding to the first special symbol. When the input of this winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S12 and executes the first special symbol memory update process. The specific contents of the processing will be further described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, if there is no winning detection signal input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S14.

Step S14: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal has been input (a lottery opportunity has occurred) from the right start winning opening switch 82 corresponding to the second special symbol. When the input of this winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S16 and executes the second special symbol memory update process. Here, similarly, the specific contents of the processing will be further described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, if there is no winning detection signal input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S18.

Step S18: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal has been input from the first count switch 84 corresponding to the first big winning port of the first variable winning device 30 . When the input of this winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S20 and executes the first big winning opening counting process. In the first big winning hole counting process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the first variable winning device 30 for each round during the big winning game. On the other hand, if there is no winning detection signal input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S21a.

Step S21a: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal has been input from the second count switch 85 corresponding to the second big winning port of the second variable winning device 31 . When the input of this winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S21b and executes the second big winning opening counting process. In the second big winning hole counting process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the second variable winning device 31 during the big win game. On the other hand, if the winning detection signal has not been input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S22.

Step S22: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a passage detection signal has been input from the gate switch 78 corresponding to the normal symbol. When the input of this passage detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S24 and executes normal symbol memory update processing. In the normal symbol memory update process, the main control CPU 72 checks whether the current normal symbol working memory number is less than the upper limit number (for example, 4), and if it does not reach the upper limit number, acquires a random number per normal symbol. do. Also, the main control CPU 72 increments the normal symbol working memory number by one. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the obtained random number value per normal symbol in the random number storage area of the RAM 76 . On the other hand, if there is no winning detection signal input (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to timer interrupt processing (FIG. 24).

[First special symbol memory update process]
FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of the first special symbol memory updating process (step S12 in FIG. 31). Hereinafter, the procedure of the first special symbol memory updating process will be described step by step.

Step S30: Here, first, the main control CPU72 refers to the value of the first special symbol working memory number counter, and confirms whether or not the working memory number is less than the maximum value (for example, 4). The working memory number counter represents the number (number of sets) of the jackpot determination random numbers, the jackpot pattern random numbers, etc. stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76 . Here, the random number storage area of the RAM 76 is divided into eight sections (for example, 2 bytes each) commonly used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Random numbers can be stored in sets (groups) one by one. At this time, if the value of the working memory number counter corresponding to the first special symbol has reached the maximum value (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch management process (FIG. 31). On the other hand, if the value of the working memory number counter is less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S31.

Step S31: The main control CPU72 adds one to the first special symbol working memory number. The first special symbol working memory number counter is stored, for example, in the working memory number area of the RAM 76, and the main control CPU 72 increments (+1) the value. Based on the value of the counter added here, the lighting state of the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is controlled.

Step S32: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires the big hit determination random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the random number circuit 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of the first lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). A random number is obtained by designating the pin address of the random number circuit 75 . When the main control CPU 72 performs 8-bit processing, address designation is performed in two batches of 1 byte each for the upper and lower bytes. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot determination random number from the specified address, it saves it as the jackpot determination random number corresponding to the first special symbol at the transfer destination address.

Step S33: Next, the main control CPU72 acquires the jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM76. Acquisition of this random number value is also performed by designating the address of the jackpot symbol random number counter area. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot design random number from the designated address, it saves it as the jackpot design random number corresponding to the first special design at the transfer destination address.

Step S34: In addition, the main control CPU72 sequentially acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number from the variation random number counter area of the RAM76 as the random value related to the variation condition of the first special symbol (variation pattern determination element acquisition means). Acquisition of these random numbers is similarly performed by designating the address of the variable random number counter area. Then, when the main control CPU 72 acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number from the specified address, it saves them to the transfer destination address.

Step S35: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot pattern random number, reach determination random number, and fluctuation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the first special symbol, and stores these random numbers in the empty section of the area. (storage means, lottery element storage means). An order (for example, 1st to 4th) is set for a plurality of sections, and if all the 1st to 4th sections are empty at the present stage, each random number is stored in order from the first section. Alternatively, if the first section is already filled and the other second to fourth sections are empty, each random number is stored in order from the second section. Note that reading from the random number storage area is in FIFO (First In First Out) format.

Step S36: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current special game management status (game state) is in the middle of a big hit. If it is other than during a big hit (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S37 and S38. If it is a big hit (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S37 and S38 and proceeds to step S38a. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that the performance based on the prediction is not performed for the ball entering during the big hit.

Step S37: If it is not during the big hit (step S36: No), the main control CPU72 executes the effect determination process at the time of acquisition with respect to the first special symbol. In this process, the result of the internal lottery is determined in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot pattern random number obtained in the previous steps S32 to S34, respectively, and the content of the effect is determined accordingly. It is for judgment (so-called "look-ahead"). The specific contents of the processing will be further described later with reference to another flowchart.

Step S38: When returning from the effect determination process at the time of acquisition, the main control CPU72 next sets the upper byte portion of the special figure destination determination effect command (for example, "B8H") with respect to the first special symbol. This high-order byte data describes that the command type is "for the special figure destination determination production for the first special symbol". In addition, since the lower byte portion of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous acquisition time effect determination process (step S37), here, by synthesizing the upper byte with the lower byte, for example, a one word length command will be generated.

Step S38a: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets the production command when the number of working memories increases with respect to the first special symbol. Specifically, a one-word-length command is obtained by adding the increased number of working memories (eg, "01H" to "04H") to the lower byte of the preceding value (eg, "BBH") of the upper byte representing the type of command. Generate production commands. At this time, the second digit of the low-order byte is set to "0" by default to indicate that the value is "the result of an increase in the number of working memories (change information)". In other words, if the lower byte is "01H", it indicates that the current working memory number is "01H" as a result of incrementing by one from the previous working memory number "00H". Similarly, if the lower byte is ``02H'' to ``04H'', it means that the number of working memories ``01H'' to ``03H'' up to the previous time has increased by 1, resulting in the number of working memories ``02H'' to ``02H'' to `` 04H”. In addition, the preceding value "BBH" is a value indicating that the current production command is the working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S39: Then, the main control CPU72 executes the effect command output setting process regarding the first special symbol. This process is for transmitting to the effect control device 124 the special figure destination determination effect command generated in the previous step S38, the effect command for increasing the number of working memories generated in step S38a, and the starting entrance winning sound control command. (means for notifying the number of memories).

If the above procedure is completed, or if the number of first special symbol working memories has reached 4 (step S30: No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch management process (FIG. 31).

[Second special symbol memory update process]
FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of the second special symbol memory updating process (step S16 in FIG. 31). Hereinafter, the procedure of the second special symbol memory updating process will be described step by step.

Step S40: The main control CPU72 refers to the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter and checks whether the working memory number is less than the maximum value. Similarly to the above, the second special symbol working memory number counter also indicates the number (number of sets) of the jackpot decision random numbers and jackpot pattern random numbers stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76 . At this time, if the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter reaches the maximum value (for example, 4) (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch management process (FIG. 31). On the other hand, if the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter is still less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S41 and subsequent steps.

Step S41: The main control CPU72 adds one to the second special symbol working memory number (increments the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter). Similar to the previous step S31 (FIG. 32), based on the value of the counter added here, the lighting state of the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is controlled.

Step S42: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires the big hit determination random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the random number circuit 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of the second lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). The method of obtaining the random number is the same as in step S32 (FIG. 32) described above.

Step S43: Next, the main control CPU72 acquires the jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM76. The method of obtaining the random number value is the same as in step S33 (FIG. 32) described above.

Step S44: In addition, the main control CPU72 sequentially acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number regarding the variation condition of the second special symbol from the variation random number counter area of the RAM76 (variation pattern determining element acquisition means). Acquisition of these random numbers is also performed in the same manner as in step S34 (FIG. 32) described above.

Step S45: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot pattern random number, reach determination random number, and variation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the second special symbol, and stores these random numbers in the empty section in the area. stored as a set in (storage means). The method of storage is the same as that of step S35 (FIG. 32) described above.

Step S45a: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current game management status (game state) is in the middle of a big hit. Then, if it is other than during the big hit (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S46 and S47. Conversely, if the jackpot is in progress (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S46 and S47 and proceeds to step S48. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that, likewise, an effect based on prediction is not performed for a ball entering during a big hit.

Step S46: If it is other than during the big hit (step S45a: No), then the main control CPU72 executes the effect determination process at the time of acquisition with respect to the second special symbol. In this process, the result of the internal lottery is determined in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the second special symbol jackpot determination random number and the jackpot pattern random number obtained in the previous steps S42 to S44, respectively, and the effect contents are determined accordingly. It is for judging. Note that the specific contents of the processing will be described later.

Step S47: When returning from the effect determination process at the time of acquisition, the main control CPU72 next sets the upper byte portion of the special figure destination determination effect command (for example, "B9H"). This high-order byte data describes that the command type is "for the special figure destination determination effect regarding the second special symbol". Similarly here, since the lower byte portion of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous acquisition time effect determination process (step S46), here, by synthesizing the upper byte with the lower byte, for example, one word A long command will be generated.

Step S48: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets the production command when the number of working memories increases with respect to the second special symbol. Here, a one-word-length effect command is obtained by adding the increased working memory number (eg, "01H" to "04H") to the lower byte of the preceding value (eg, "BCH") of the upper byte representing the command type. to generate Similarly, for the second special symbol, by setting the second digit of the low-order byte to "0" by default, it is possible to express that the value is "the result of an increase in the number of working memories (change information)". can. It should be noted that the preceding value "BCH" is a value indicating that the current production command is the working memory number command for the second special symbol.

Step S49: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect command output setting process regarding the second special symbol. As a result, preparations are made to transmit a special figure destination determination production command, a production command at the time of increasing the number of working memories, a starting entrance winning sound control command, etc. to the production control device 124 with respect to the second special symbol (means for notifying the number of memories). . Also, after completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch management process (FIG. 31).

[Production determination process when acquired]
FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the effect determination process at the time of acquisition. The main control CPU72 executes this acquisition time effect determination process in the previous first special symbol memory update process and second special symbol memory update process (step S37 in FIG. 32, step S46 in FIG. 33) (first determination execution means, prefetch processing execution means). As described above, this processing is executed for each of the first special symbol (when the ball enters the middle start winning opening 26) and the second special symbol (when the ball enters the variable start winning device 28). Therefore, the following description may correspond to the processing related to the first special symbol or the processing related to the second special symbol. The contents of the processing will be described below along each procedure.

Step S50: The main control CPU 72 sets the lower byte (for example, "00H") of the special figure destination determination effect command (first determination information). Note that the byte data set here represents the standard value of the command (at the time of failure).

Step S52: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the big hit determination random number as the first judgment random number. The random number to be loaded here is stored in the RAM 76 in the previous first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 32) or second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 33). .

Step S54: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the loaded random number is outside the winning value range (here, below the lower limit value) (lottery result destination determining means). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a comparison value (lower limit) in the A register and subtracts the loaded random number from this comparison value. The comparison value (lower limit value) is set according to the winning probability of the internal lottery in the pachinko machine 1 (winning probability according to the set value). Next, the main control CPU 72 determines whether the calculation result is 0 or a positive value, for example, from the value of the flag register. As a result, if the loaded random number is out of the hit value range (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S80.

Step S80: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes fluctuation pattern information pre-determination processing at the time of deviation (fluctuation pattern destination determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a variation pattern destination determination command for the variation time at the time of deviation. The fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here reflects prior judgment information regarding the fluctuation time (or fluctuation pattern number) especially at the time of operation of the "time reduction function". For example, if the current state is the time of operation of the "time reduction function", the main control CPU 72 is based on the loaded reach determination random number, and the fluctuation time corresponds to "loss reach fluctuation (non-shortened fluctuation time)". determine whether there is As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to "missing reach fluctuation (non-shortened fluctuation time)", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to "non-shortened fluctuation time". In addition, in the case of reach fluctuation, it is also possible to determine "reach group (type of reach)" from the reach mode random number and generate a fluctuation pattern destination determination command from the result. On the other hand, if the fluctuation time does not correspond to the "missing reach fluctuation (non-shortened fluctuation time)", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "time reduction medium reduction fluctuation time". Alternatively, if the current state is when the "time reduction function" is not in operation (low probability state), the main control CPU 72 is based on the loaded reach determination random number, and the fluctuation time corresponds to "normal deviation reach fluctuation" Determine whether or not As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to the "normal deviation reach fluctuation", the main control CPU72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "normal deviation reach fluctuation time". On the other hand, if the fluctuation time does not correspond to the "usual deviation reach fluctuation", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "normal deviation fluctuation time". Further, the variation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49) as described above. In this process, the main control CPU 72 may generate a variation pattern destination determination command for the variation pattern at the time of the small hit, similarly to the process at the time of loss described above.

When the above procedure is executed, the main control CPU 72 ends the effect determination process at the time of acquisition, and returns to the caller's first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 31) or second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 32). On the other hand, if the loaded random number is not out of the hit value range but within the hit value range (step S54: No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S56.

Step S56: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is set. The probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is set when there is a winning value in the jackpot determination random numbers stored so far, although fluctuation has not yet started. Specifically, if there is a winning value in the jackpot decision random number stored so far, and if the jackpot pattern random number paired with it corresponds to "any probability variable pattern", the probability state schedule For example, "A0H" is set in the flag. This value represents a flag value for setting a high-probability state in advance determination (prefetch determination) of the jackpot determination random number obtained after the jackpot determination random number. On the other hand, if there is a winning value in the jackpot decision random numbers that have been stored so far, and if the jackpot pattern random numbers paired with it correspond to "any normal pattern", the probability state is scheduled. For example, "01H" is set in the flag. This value represents a flag value for setting a normal (low) probability state at the time of preliminary determination (prefetch determination) of the jackpot determination random number obtained after the jackpot determination random number. If there is no winning value among the jackpot determination random numbers stored so far, the flag value is reset (00H). Further, the value of the probability state schedule flag is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76, for example. In this example, the "probability state schedule flag" is used to strictly perform preliminary hit determination. Steps S58, S60, S62, S76, etc. may be omitted.

If the probability state schedule flag has not yet been set (step S56: No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S66.

Step S66: In this case, the main control CPU 72 next sets the comparison value for the low probability (normal time) to the A register. The comparison value for low probability is also set according to the winning probability at low probability in the pachinko machine 1 (winning probability according to the set value).

Step S68: Next, the main control CPU72 loads the "current probability state flag". This probability state flag indicates whether or not the current internal state is high probability (during probability change), and is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76 . If the current probability state is high probability (during variable probability), the value "01H" is set as the state flag, and if it is low probability (normal medium), the value of the state flag is reset ("00H ”).

Step S70: Then, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the loaded current special symbol probability state flag indicates a high probability (≠01H), and as a result, if it indicates a high probability (No ), and then step S64 is executed.

Step S64: The main control CPU 72 sets a comparison value for high probability. As a result, the low-probability comparative value set in the previous step S66 is rewritten. The high-probability comparison value is set according to the high-probability winning probability in the pachinko machine 1 (the winning probability corresponding to the set value).

In this way, if the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result has not been set yet and the current internal state is high probability, the comparison value is rewritten for high probability and then the next step S72 is performed. will be executed. On the other hand, if it is confirmed in the previous step S70 that the current probability state flag does not represent a high probability (Yes), the main control CPU72 skips step S64 and executes the next step S72.

Step S72: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the random number loaded in the previous step S52 is out of the hit value range (lottery result destination determination means). That is, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the big hit determination random number value from the comparison value set for each state. Then, the main control CPU 72 similarly determines whether or not the operation result is a negative value (<0) from the value of the flag register. ), the main control CPU 72 executes the fluctuation pattern information pre-determination process (step S80) at the time of deviation. On the other hand, if the loaded random number is not outside the hit value range but is within the hit value range (No), the main control CPU 72 next proceeds to step S74.

Step S74: The main control CPU72 executes a jackpot symbol type determination process. This processing is for judging the jackpot type (winning type) at that time based on the jackpot design random number paired with the jackpot determination random number. For example, the main control CPU72 loads the jackpot symbol random number for each symbol stored in the previous first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 32) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 33). Then, similar to the above step S54, the calculation using the comparison value is executed, and from the result, it is determined whether the jackpot type corresponds to "probability variable design" or "normal design". The main control CPU 72 stores the determination result at this time as a special symbol destination determination value, and proceeds to the next step S76.

Step S76: Then, the main control CPU72 sets the value of the probability state schedule flag according to the previous determination result. Specifically, when the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 represents the "normal symbol", the main control CPU72 sets the probability state schedule flag to the value "01H". On the other hand, when the special symbol destination determination value represents "variable probability symbol", the main control CPU 72 sets the probability state schedule flag to the value "A0H". As a result, in the subsequent processing, it is determined that "flag has been set" in step S56.

Step S78: The main control CPU72 sets the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 as the lower byte of the special symbol destination determination effect command. For example, the special symbol destination determination value is set to "01H" when it corresponds to the "normal symbol", and is set to "A0H" when it corresponds to the "variable probability symbol". In any case, by setting the lower byte data here, the standard lower byte data "00H" set in the previous step S50 is rewritten.

Step S79: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a big hit time variation pattern information pre-determination process (variation pattern destination determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a variation pattern destination determination command for the variation time at the time of the big hit. In the variation pattern first determination command generated here, for example, prior determination information regarding the reach variation time (or variation pattern number) at the time of the big hit is reflected. Further, the variation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49) as described above.

The above is the procedure before the probability state schedule flag is set according to the previous determination result (before the internal first hit). On the other hand, when the probability state schedule flag is set through the previous step S76, the following procedure is executed. However, when preliminary hit determination is performed only based on the current probability state as described above, there is no need to execute the following steps S56, S58, S60, S62, and S76.

Step S56: When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the probability state schedule flag has already been set (Yes), it then executes step S58.

Step S58: The main control CPU 72 first sets the low-probability (normal) comparison value in the A register.

Step S60: Next, the main control CPU72 loads the "probability state schedule flag". As described above, the probability state schedule flag is for setting the probability state in the subsequent pre-determination based on the previous pre-determination result, and is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76. . If the probability state based on the previous judgment result immediately before is scheduled to shift to a high probability (variable probability), "A0H" is set as the value of the probability state schedule flag as described above, and conversely, the immediately preceding judgment result is scheduled to return to low probability (normal), "01H" is set as the value of the probability state schedule flag.

Step S62: Then, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the loaded probability state schedule flag indicates a high probability schedule (≠01H), and as a result, if it indicates a high probability schedule ( No), then step S64 is executed to set a high-probability comparison value.

In this way, when the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result has already been set and the value is for a high probability, the comparative value is rewritten for the high probability and then the next step S72 and subsequent steps is performed. will be executed. On the other hand, if it is confirmed in the previous step S62 that the probability state schedule flag does not represent a high-probability schedule but indicates a normal (low) probability schedule (Yes), the main control CPU 72 steps S64 is skipped and the next step S72 and subsequent steps are executed. As a result, in this embodiment, it is possible to determine a big hit in advance by taking into consideration subsequent changes in the internal state based on the previous determination result (normal probability state→high probability state, high probability state→normal probability state). .

After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 returns to the first special symbol memory update process (Fig. 32) or the second special symbol memory update process (Fig. 33).

[Special game management processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of special game management processing.
Special game management processing includes execution selection processing (step S1000), special symbol variation preprocessing (step S2000), special symbol variation during processing (step S3000), special symbol stop display processing (step S4000), variable winning device at the time of big hit It is a configuration including a subroutine (program module) group of management processing (step S5000) and variable winning device management processing (step S6000) at the time of a small hit. Here, first, the basic flow of the special game management process will be explained along with each process.

Step S1000: In the execution selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (one of steps S2000 to S5000) from the "jump table". For example, the main control CPU 72 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the special game management process in the stack pointer as the return destination address.

Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far (special symbol game management status). For example, if the special symbols have not yet started variable display (special symbol game management status: 00H), the main control CPU 72 selects special symbol variation pre-processing (step S2000) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the special symbol variation preprocessing has already been completed (special symbol game management status: 01H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol variation process (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and special symbol variation is in progress. If the process is completed (special symbol game management status: 02H), the special symbol stop display process (step S4000) is selected as the next jump destination. In this embodiment, the jump destination address is specified in the "jump table" to select the process. There are also known programming examples in which the CPU selects which process to execute next. In such a programming example, the CPU calls each process, and at the beginning step, it refers to the flags one by one and performs conditional branching (continuation/return). There is no need for the CPU 72 to call each process one by one.

Step S2000: In the special symbol variation preprocessing, the main control CPU72 performs the work of preparing the conditions for starting the variation display of the special symbols. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S3000: In the special symbol fluctuation process, the main control CPU72 performs drive control of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 while counting the variation timer. Specifically, an ON or OFF drive signal (1-byte data) is generated for each segment and dot (numbers 0 to 7) of the 7-segment LED. The pattern of the drive signal changes with the passage of time, and thereby the variable display of the special symbols is performed.

Step S4000: In the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU72 performs drive control of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Similarly here, an ON or OFF drive signal is generated for each segment and dot of the 7-segment LED, but the pattern of the drive signal is constant, so that the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

Step S5000: The variable winning device management process at the time of the big hit is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of the big win in the previous special symbol stop display process. For example, when the special symbols are stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode, an opportunity is generated to shift from the previous normal state to a jackpot game state (advantageous special game state for the player). During the big hit game, the jump destination is set to the variable winning device management process at the time of the big hit in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the variable display of the special symbols is not performed. In the jackpot time variable winning device management process, the first big winning opening solenoid 90 or the second big winning opening solenoid 97 waits for a certain period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 seconds or until 10 game balls are counted). ), it is excited for a preset number of continuous operations (for example, 15 times), whereby the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern (continuous operation of the special electric accessory). . During this time, the game balls are focused on the first variable prize winning device 30 and the second variable prize winning device 31, thereby giving the player an opportunity to collectively win many prize balls (special game means of execution). The opening and closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 at the time of the big hit is called "round", and if the number of consecutive operations is 15 times in total, these are called "15 rounds". may be collectively referred to.

In addition, when the main control CPU 72 sets the large winning opening opening pattern (the number of rounds, the number of opening and closing operations per round, the opening time, etc.) in the variable winning device management process at the time of the big hit, the first variable winning device 30 for one round Alternatively, the value of the round number counter is incremented by 1 each time the opening/closing operation of the second variable winning device 31 is completed. The value of the round number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76 with an initial value of 0, for example. Also, the main control CPU 72 generates a round number command representing the value of the round number counter. The round number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the subcommand transmission process (step S144 in FIG. 18). When the value of the round number counter reaches the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 ends the big win game (big role) for that round only.

Then, when the big hit game is finished, the main control CPU 72 hits the big hit based on the game state flag (probability variation function operation flag, time reduction function operation flag) related to the internal state different from the game machine state flag used when changing the setting etc. The state (high probability state, time reduction state) after the end of the game is changed (high probability time reduction state transition means, advantageous game state transition means). In the "high-probability state", the probability variation function is activated, and the winning probability in the internal lottery is increased, for example, about 10 times higher than normal (specified game state transition means, high-probability state transition means, high-probability state setting means). In addition, in the "time shortening state", the time shortening function is activated, the probability of the operation lottery of the normal symbols is high as described above, the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is shortened, and the opening time of the variable starting prize winning device 28 is shortened. is extended and the number of times of opening is increased (so-called electric chew support is performed). Regarding the "high-probability state" and the "shortened time state", the control may shift to either one of them, or may shift to both of them.

Step S6000: The variable winning device management process at the time of the small hit is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of the small hit in the previous special symbol stop display process. For example, when the special symbols are stopped and displayed in a small winning mode, an opportunity is generated to shift from the previous normal state to a small winning game state. During the small-hit game, the jump destination is set to the small-hit time variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the variable display of the special symbol is not performed. In the small winning game, although the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes only a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 times) in a predetermined opening time (for example, 0.1 second), winning to the first big winning port hardly occurs. do not.

[Multiple winning types]
In this embodiment, for example, the following winning types are provided as a plurality of winning types.
(1) “11 rounds definite variable jackpot 1 to 11”
(2) “15 rounds of variable hits 1 to 6”
(3) "8 rounds variable jackpot"
(4) "6 rounds variable jackpot"
(5) "11 round normal jackpot"
(6) “3 rounds of variable hits”
(7) “5 rounds of variable hits”
(8) "5 round normal jackpot"

The winning type corresponds to the type of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is stop-displayed at the time of winning. For example, "11 round probability variable jackpot 1-11" corresponds to "11 round probability variable pattern 1-11" jackpot, and "11 round normal jackpot" corresponds to "11 round normal pattern" jackpot. For this reason, hereinafter, the "winning type" is appropriately referred to as "winning design".

[11 round probability variation pattern 1 to 11]
In the special symbol stop display processing, when the special symbols are stopped and displayed in the mode of "11 round probability variable symbols 1 to 11", a big hit game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the opening of the first big prize opening of the first variable prize winning device 30 is performed once, and this continues until the 11th round. When it corresponds to ``11 round probability variable patterns 1 to 11'', the ``probability variation function'' and the ``time reduction function'' are operated after the end of the jackpot game, thereby shifting to a ``high probability time reduction state''.

Here, the first big winning port of the first variable winning device 30 is closed without waiting for the longest opening time to elapse when a specified number of winnings (for example, 10 times = 10 game balls) occur within one round. be done. In addition, the second big winning opening of the second variable winning device 31 similarly, when winning a prescribed number of times (for example, 10 times = 10 game balls) occurs in one round, without waiting for the longest opening time to pass Closed.

[15 round probability variation pattern 1 to 7]
In the special symbol stop display processing, when the special symbols are stopped and displayed in the mode of "15 round probability variable symbols 1 to 7", a big hit game is executed (special game execution means). In this case, the first big winning opening 30b of the first variable winning device 30 or the second big winning opening 31b of the second variable winning device 31 is opened once, and this continues until the fifteenth round. When it corresponds to ``15 round variable probability symbols 1 to 7'', the ``probability variation function'' and the ``time reduction function'' are operated after the end of the jackpot game, thereby shifting to a ``high probability time reduction state''.

[8 round probability variation pattern]
In the above special symbol stop display process, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of "8 round probability variable symbol", a big hit game is executed (special game executing means). In this case, the opening of the first big winning port 30b of the first variable winning device 30 is performed once, and this continues until the eighth round. When the game corresponds to the ``variable probability pattern for 8 rounds'', the ``probability variation function'' and the ``time reduction function'' are operated after the end of the jackpot game to shift to the ``high probability time reduction state''.

[6 round probability variation pattern]
In the above-mentioned special symbol stop display process, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "6 round probability variable symbol", a big hit game is executed (special game executing means). In this case, the first big prize winning opening 30b of the first variable prize winning device 30 is opened once, and this continues until the sixth round. When it corresponds to the ``6-round probability variable pattern'', the ``probability variation function'' and the ``time reduction function'' are operated after the end of the jackpot game, thereby shifting to the ``high probability time reduction state''.

[Normal design for 11 rounds]
In the above special symbol stop display process, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "11 round normal symbol", a big hit game is executed (special game executing means). In this case, the opening of the first big winning port 30b of the first variable winning device 30 is performed once, and this continues until the 11th round. When it corresponds to "11 round normal", it shifts to a "low-probability time reduction state" by activating the "time reduction function" after the end of the jackpot game.

[3 round fixed pattern]
In the above special symbol stop display process, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of "3 round probability variable symbol", a big hit game is executed (special game executing means). In this case, the opening of the second big winning opening 31b of the second variable winning device 31 is performed once, and this continues until the third round. When it corresponds to the ``three-round probability variable pattern'', the ``probability variation function'' and the ``time reduction function'' are operated after the end of the jackpot game, thereby shifting to the ``high probability time reduction state''.

[5 round probability variation pattern]
In the above special symbol stop display process, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of "5 rounds probability variable symbol", a big hit game is executed (special game executing means). In this case, the opening of the second big winning port 31b of the second variable winning device 31 is performed once, and this continues until the fifth round. When it corresponds to the ``variable probability pattern for 5 rounds'', the ``probability variation function'' and the ``time shortening function'' are operated after the end of the jackpot game to shift to the ``high probability time shortening state''.

[Normal design for 5 rounds]
In the special symbol stop display processing, when the special symbols are stopped and displayed in the form of "5 round normal symbols", a big win game is executed (special game executing means). In this case, the opening of the second big winning port 31b of the second variable winning device 31 is performed once, and this continues until the fifth round. When it corresponds to "normal for 5 rounds", it shifts to a "low probability time reduction state" by activating the "time reduction function" after the end of the jackpot game.

In any case, when the winning pattern corresponds to one of the "probability variable patterns", the player is given the privilege of shifting the internal state to the "high probability time reduction state" after the big win game is over. On the other hand, if the winning symbol corresponds to any of the "normal symbols", the internal state shifts to the "low-probability time reduction state" after the jackpot game ends.

The opening time, interval time between rounds, and ending time during the jackpot game are common "5.0 seconds", "1.5 seconds" and "7.0 seconds", respectively. The opening time is the waiting time from the start of the jackpot game to the opening of the big winning opening, and the inter-round interval time is the waiting time set between rounds, and the ending time. The time is the waiting time set after the final round of the jackpot game is finished.

[small hit]
In addition, in this embodiment, a small win is provided as a winning type other than non-winning. When a small win is won, a small win game is performed separately from the big win game, and the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes (special game executing means). That is, in the previous special symbol stop display process, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a small winning mode, a small winning game (the first variable winning device 30 is activated in the normal probability state or the high probability state) game) is executed. In such a small winning game, although the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes only a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), winning to the first big winning opening hardly occurs. In addition, even if the small winning game ends, the ``probability variation function'' does not operate, and the ``time reduction function'' does not operate, so the transition to the ``high probability state'' or the ``time reduction state'' is performed. No benefits are granted (not a prerequisite for that). Also, even if you win a small hit in the "high probability state", the "high probability state" will not end after the small win game is over, and even if you win a small win in the "shortened time state", The "time reduction state" does not end after the winning game ends (except when the upper limit number of times is reached). In addition, in the present embodiment, the game specification is such that a small win is set, but it is also possible to adopt a game specification that does not set a small win.

[Special symbol change preprocessing]
FIG. 36 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of special symbol variation preprocessing. Each procedure will be described below.

Step S2100: First, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the first special symbol working memory number or the second special symbol working memory number remains (greater than 0). This confirmation can be performed by referring to the value of the working memory number counter stored in the RAM 76 . When the working memory numbers of both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the demonstration setting process of step S2500.

Step S2500: In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a demonstration effect command. The demonstration effect command is output to the effect control device 124 in the subcommand transmission process (step S144 in FIG. 18). After executing the demo setting process, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special game management process. When returning, it returns to the end address as described above (same hereafter).

On the other hand, if the value of the working memory number counter of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is greater than 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2200.

Step S2200: The main control CPU 72 executes a special symbol storage area shift process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 preferentially reads out the lottery random numbers (big hit decision random numbers, big hit pattern random numbers) stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76 and those corresponding to the second special design. At this time, if random numbers are stored in two or more sections, the main control CPU 72 reads and erases (consumes) the random numbers in order from the first section, and then shifts (shifts) the remaining random numbers one by one to the previous section. ). The read random number is saved, for example, in another temporary storage area. When the random number corresponding to the second special symbol is not stored, the main control CPU72 reads the random number corresponding to the first special symbol and stores it in the temporary storage area. Each random number stored in the temporary storage area is used for internal lottery in the next big hit determination process. As a result, in this embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially performed over the first special symbol. It should be noted that the program may be a program in which the random numbers are simply read out in the order in which they are stored without providing such a priority order for each special symbol. Also, in this process, the main control CPU72 subtracts one from the value of the working memory number counter (the first special symbol or the second special symbol, whichever shifted the random number) stored in the RAM76, and subtracts The latter value is set as the "number of working memories at the start of fluctuation". As a result, the display mode of the number stored by the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a or the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a changes (decrease by 1). After completing the procedure up to this point, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2300.

Step S2300: The main control CPU 72 executes big hit determination processing (internal lottery). In this process, the main control CPU 72 first sets the range of the jackpot value, and determines whether or not the read random number value is included in this range (lottery execution means). The range of the jackpot value set at this time differs between the normal probability state and the high probability state (when the probability variation function is activated). be. Then, if the random number value read at this time is included in the range of the jackpot value, the main control CPU 72 sets the jackpot flag (01H), and then proceeds to step S2400. Here, the range of jackpot values is set according to the set value. Therefore, the range of jackpot values is wider in the high setting than in the low setting.

If the big hit flag is not set, the main control CPU 72 next sets a range of small hit values in the same big hit determination process, and determines whether or not the read random number value is included in this range (lottery execution means). The "minor win" referred to here is anything other than non-winning (lose), but has a different nature from the "big win". In other words, the "big win" generates an opportunity (game turning point) to shift to the "high probability state" or "time reduction state", but the "minor win" does not generate such an opportunity. However, the "minor win" is positioned as satisfying the condition for operating the first variable winning device 30, like the "big win". It should be noted that the range of the small winning value set at this time may be different or the same between the normal probability state and the high probability state (at the time of operation of the probability variation function). In any case, if the read random number is included in the range of the small hit value, the main control CPU72 sets the small hit flag, and then proceeds to step S2400. Thus, in this embodiment, the range of the big hit value and the small hit value is defined in advance as the hit range other than the non-winning, but the big hit determination table and the small hit determination table for each state are prepared in advance. Each of them may be written in the ROM 74, read out, and compared with the random number to determine the big hit. When a set difference is provided for the winning probability of the small hit, the range of the small hit value is set according to the set value. For this reason, the range of the small hit value is wider in the high setting than in the low setting.

Step S2400: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the big hit flag has been set to the value (01H) in the previous big hit determination process. If the value (01H) is not set to the jackpot flag (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2402.

Step S2402: The main control CPU72 determines whether or not the value (01H) has been set to the small hit flag in the previous big hit determination process. If the small hit flag is not set to the value (01H) (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2404. In addition, the main control CPU 72 may determine a big hit (for example, set 01H) or a small hit (for example, set 0AH) by the value of the common hit flag without separately preparing the big hit flag and the small hit flag.

Step S2404: The main control CPU 72 executes stop symbol determination processing when losing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets stop symbol number data at the time of loss by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 . Also, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (when lost) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 . These commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the subcommand transmission process (step S144 in FIG. 18).

In addition, in this embodiment, since 7-segment LEDs are used for the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35, for example, the display mode of the stop symbol at the time of loss is always one segment (center The stop symbol number data can be fixed to one value (for example, 64H) with only the lighting display of the bar "-"). In this case, the storage capacity used on the program can be reduced, the processing load on the main control CPU 72 can be reduced, and the processing speed can be improved.

Step S2405: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes fluctuation pattern determination processing at the time of deviation. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern number at the time of loss for the special symbol (variation pattern selection means). The variation pattern number distinguishes the type (pattern) of the variation display of the special symbol, or corresponds to the variation time required for the variation display. Since the fluctuation time at the time of loss differs depending on whether it is the above-mentioned "time reduction state" or not, the main control CPU 72 loads the game state flag in this process, and the current state is "time reduction state". Check whether there is If it is a "time reduction state", the fluctuation time at the time of loss is set to a shortened time (for example, about 2.0 seconds) except for the case where reach fluctuation is basically performed (shortened fluctuation time determination means ). Also, even if it is not in the "time shortening state", except when performing reach fluctuation, the fluctuation time at the time of loss is based on the "number of working memories at the start of fluctuation display (0 to 3)" set in step S2200, for example. It may be shortened (for example, the number of working memories at the start of variable display is 0 → about 12.5 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of variable display is 1 → about 8 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of variable display is 2 → 5 Seconds, the number of working memories at the start of the fluctuation display is 3 → about 2.5 seconds). It should be noted that the stop display time of the symbol at the time of loss is constant (for example, about 0.5 seconds) regardless of the variation pattern. The main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined variable time (at the time of loss) to the variable timer, and also sets the value of the stop display time at the time of loss to the stop symbol display timer. In addition, the information about the variation pattern of the selected special design is transmitted to the production control device as a variation pattern command (same when winning).

In this embodiment, as a result of the internal lottery, when it corresponds to non-winning, control is performed such that, for example, a "ready-to-win effect" is generated on the effect to make it a loss, or a loss is made without generating a "ready-to-win effect". and Then, in the "loss change pattern selection table", a plurality of types of effects are defined in advance, such as "non-reach effect" and "reach effect". One of the variation patterns is selected from among them. The reach performance includes various reach performances such as a normal reach performance, a long reach performance, and a super reach performance.

[Example of fluctuation pattern selection table at loss]
FIG. 37 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern selection table at loss (low-probability/high-probability non-shortening state).
This selection table is a table used when losing in a low-probability or high-probability non-time-reduction state (in the case of non-winning) (fluctuation pattern defining means). Also, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, a "comparison value" and a "fluctuation pattern number" are stored in sets of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The "comparison value" includes, for example, eight stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "231", "241", "251", and "255 (FFH)". A "variation pattern number" of "1" to "8" is assigned to each "comparison value".

Variation pattern numbers "1" to "5" correspond to variation patterns that are lost without performing reach production, and variation pattern numbers "6" and "7" correspond to variation patterns that are lost after reach. Correspondingly, the variation pattern number “8” corresponds to a variation pattern that is lost after super reach. Note that the fluctuation pattern selection table may have different table contents according to the number of working memories at the start of fluctuation (the same applies hereinafter).

Here, the length of the set fluctuation time differs greatly between the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern. That is, the "non-reach fluctuation pattern" basically corresponds to a short fluctuation time (for example, about 3.0 seconds to 12.0 seconds depending on the number of working memories), whereas the "reach fluctuation pattern" It corresponds to a long fluctuation time (for example, about 30 seconds to 150 seconds) that is more than double that.

Then, the main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random number value with the "comparison value" in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random number value is less than or equal to the comparison value, the comparison value Select the corresponding variation pattern number (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random number value at that time is "190", when compared with the first comparison value "101", the random number value exceeds the comparison value, so the main control CPU72 determines the next comparison value " 201” and the random number. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects "2" as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 38 is a diagram showing an example of a deviation pattern selection table (low-probability time reduction state).
This selection table is a table used when losing in the low-probability time-shortened state (in the case of non-winning) (fluctuation pattern defining means). Also, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, a "comparison value" and a "fluctuation pattern number" are stored in sets of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The "comparison value" includes, for example, eight stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "231", "241", "251", and "255 (FFH)". A "variation pattern number" of "21" to "28" is assigned to each "comparison value".

Variation pattern numbers "21" to "25" correspond to variation patterns that will be lost without performing reach production, and variation pattern numbers "26" to "28" are variation patterns that will be lost after reach. Yes. However, since the fluctuation pattern numbers "21" to "25" are non-reach fluctuations in time shortened fluctuations, a shortened fluctuation time (for example, about 2.0 seconds) is set as the fluctuation time in the normal state. .

The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the acquired variation pattern determination random number value with the "comparison value" in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random number value is less than or equal to the comparison value, it corresponds to the comparison value. Select a variation pattern number (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random number value at that time is "190", when compared with the first comparison value "101", the random number value exceeds the comparison value, so the main control CPU72 determines the next comparison value " 201” and the random number. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects "22" as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern selection table at loss (high-probability time reduction state).
This selection table is a table used when losing in the high-probability time-shortening state (in the case of non-winning) (fluctuation pattern defining means). Also, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, a "comparison value" and a "fluctuation pattern number" are stored in sets of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The "comparison value" includes, for example, eight stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "231", "241", "251", and "255 (FFH)". A "variation pattern number" of "41" to "48" is assigned to each "comparison value".

Variation pattern numbers "41" to "45" correspond to variation patterns that will be missed without reach production, and variation pattern numbers "46" to "48" are variation patterns that will be lost after reach. Yes. However, the fluctuation pattern numbers "41" to "45" are extremely shortened fluctuation times (for example, about 0.5 seconds) as fluctuation times in the normal state in order to realize high-speed fluctuations in the high-probability time shortening state. is set.

The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the acquired variation pattern determination random number value with the "comparison value" in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random number value is less than or equal to the comparison value, it corresponds to the comparison value. Select a variation pattern number (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random number value at that time is "190", when compared with the first comparison value "101", the random number value exceeds the comparison value, so the main control CPU72 determines the next comparison value " 201” and the random number. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects "42" as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 40 is a diagram showing an example of a deviation pattern selection table (special section).
This selection table is a table used in the case of non-winning in a special section of high probability time reduction state or low probability time reduction state (fluctuation pattern defining means). In addition, the special section is the section that shifts after the end of the jackpot game when it corresponds to "11 round probability variable pattern 1 to 11" or "11 round normal pattern", and when the variation pattern selection counter value is 1 or more This is the section that transitions to

Here, the variation pattern when missing in the special section of the high probability time reduction state or the low probability time reduction state is all the same variation pattern (variation time is about 20 seconds, for example) in order to realize the treasure challenge production described later. is set, and this selection table has a table configuration for selecting one predetermined variation pattern (non-reach special variation pattern 50).

Therefore, the main control CPU 72 selects "50" as the variation pattern number regardless of which value the acquired variation pattern determination random number value is. In addition, the non-reach special fluctuation pattern 50 is a special fluctuation pattern with a fixed fluctuation time, and the fluctuation time is not shortened by the number of memories.

[See Figure 36: Special symbol variation pre-processing]
The above steps S2404 and S2405 are control procedures when the big hit determination result is lost (other than non-winning), but when the determination result is a big hit (step S2400: Yes) or a small hit (step S2402: Yes) , the main control CPU 72 executes the following procedure. First, the case of a big hit will be explained.

Step S2410: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot stop symbol determination process (winning type determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the current winning symbol (stop symbol number at the time of the big hit) for each special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) based on the big hit symbol random number. The relationship between the jackpot symbol random number value and the type of winning symbol is defined in advance in a special symbol determination data table (winning type defining means). Therefore, the main control CPU 72 can refer to the big-hit stop symbol selection table in the big-hit stop symbol determination process, and can determine the type of the winning symbol based on the big-hit symbol random number from the stored contents.

[Winning pattern at the time of the big hit]
In this embodiment, the winning patterns selected at the time of the big hit are "11 round probability variable patterns 1 to 11", "15 round probability variable patterns 1 to 6", "8 round probability variable patterns", "6 round probability variable patterns", and "11 rounds. Normal pattern”, “3 round probability variation pattern”, “5 round probability variation pattern”, and “5 round normal pattern” are prepared. In addition, each winning design may further include a plurality of winning designs. For example, if it is "11 round probability variation pattern 1", it is "11 round probability variation pattern 1a", "11 round probability variation pattern 1b", "11 round probability variation pattern 1c", and so on.

Further, in the present embodiment, the selection ratio of winning symbols selected at the time of a big hit in the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is different. Therefore, the main control CPU 72 distinguishes the winning symbols to be selected depending on whether the result of this big hit corresponds to the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

[Stop symbol selection table at the time of the first special symbol jackpot]
FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. When the result of this big win corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 refers to this first special symbol big win stop symbol selection table (winning kind defining means) and determines the kind of the winning symbol.

In the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the left column shows the allocation values for each winning symbol. 10”, “2”, and “35” correspond to ratios when the denominator is 100. Also, in the second column from the left, "11 round probability variation pattern 1 to 11", "15 round probability variation pattern 1", "8 round probability variation pattern", "6 round probability variation pattern" corresponding to each distribution value, "11 round normal pattern" is shown. That is, at the time of the big hit corresponding to the first special symbol, the ratio of selecting "11 round probability variation patterns 1 to 9" is 2/100 (= 2%) respectively, and "11 round probability variation pattern 10" is selected. The ratio is 3/100 (= 3%), the percentage of "11 round probability variation pattern 11" is selected is 31/100 (= 31%), "15 round probability variation pattern 1" is selected The ratio is 1/100 (= 1%), the ratio of "8 round probability variation pattern" is selected is 10/100 (= 10%), and the ratio of "6 round probability variation pattern" is selected is 2/100 (=2%), and the rate at which the "11 round normal pattern" is selected is 35/100 (=35%). The magnitude of each distribution value corresponds to the selection ratio for each winning symbol using the jackpot symbol random number.

Here, "substantially" in the figure means the number of round games in which the big winning opening is opened for a long time in a big winning game including a round game in which the big winning opening is opened for a short time and a round game in which the big winning opening is opened for a long time. is shown. The round game may be executed using the first big winning hole or may be executed using the second big winning hole. Further, "next time" in the drawing means that "10000 times" is set as the probability variable number of times. It should be noted that a big hit in which the number of rounds and the actual number are the same indicates that there is no round game with short opening (only round games with long opening).

In any case, when the result of this big hit corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, and the selection ratio shown in the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. to selectively determine winning patterns. In the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, as shown in the third column from the left, 2-byte command data, for example, is defined as a winning stop symbol command. The stop symbol command is described, for example, as a combination of MODE value and EVENT value, of which the upper byte MODE value "B1H" indicates that the current winning symbol was selected when the first special symbol was a big hit. represents. Also, the EVENT values "01H" to "0FH" of the low-order bytes respectively represent the types of corresponding winning symbols in the selection table. For this reason, for example, if the result of this big hit corresponds to the first special symbol, and "11 round probability variable symbol 1" is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command at the time of winning is described as "B1H01H". will be

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects a winning symbol from the stop symbol selection table for the first special symbol jackpot, it generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the subcommand transmission process. In addition, the main control CPU 72 determines the jackpot stop symbol number for the first special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

Three columns on the right side of the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table show the values of the number of times of probability variation, the number of times of time reduction, and the number of times of special variation given after the end of the jackpot game.

[Probable number of times]
In this embodiment, when it corresponds to one of the probability variation symbols, the probability variation number of times is given 10000 times (probability variation next time). On the other hand, if it corresponds to one of the normal symbols, the probability variation number is not given.

[Time saving number of times]
In this embodiment, if it corresponds to "11 round probability variation pattern 1 to 10", "15 round probability variation pattern 1", "8 round probability variation pattern", "6 round probability variation pattern", the number of times of time reduction is given 10000 times ( definite change next time). In addition, when it corresponds to "11 round probability variation pattern 11", the number of times of shortening is given 10 times. In this case, when the probability variation (high probability time shortening state) for 10 variations ends, the state shifts to the latent probability variation state (high probability non-time shortening state). In addition, when it corresponds to "11 round probability variation pattern 11" in the latency probability variation state, the number of times of shortening may be given 10000 times (so-called latency continuation no). Furthermore, when it corresponds to "11 round normal pattern", the number of times of time reduction is given 10 times. In this case, when the time reduction (low-probability time-reduction state) for 10 variations ends, the normal state (low-probability non-time-reduction state) is entered.

[Number of special fluctuations]
In this embodiment, when it corresponds to "11 round probability variation symbols 1 to 11" and "11 round normal symbols", the number of special variations is set. Specifically, if it corresponds to "11 round probability variation pattern 1", "1 time" is set as the number of special fluctuations, and if it corresponds to "11 round probability variation pattern 2", "2 times" as the number of special fluctuations ”is set, and such a setting continues to “11 round probability variation pattern 10”, and if it corresponds to “11 round probability variation pattern 11” and “11 round normal pattern”, “10 times” is set as the number of special fluctuations. set. In addition, when corresponding to "15 round probability variation pattern 1", "8 round probability variation pattern", "6 round probability variation pattern", the number of special fluctuations is not set.

[Stop symbol selection table at the time of the second special symbol jackpot]
FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. The main control CPU 72, when the result of this big win corresponds to the second special symbol, determines the kind of the winning symbol by referring to this second special symbol big win stop symbol selection table (winning kind defining means).

In the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the distribution values for each winning symbol are shown in the left column, and distribution values ``33'', ``4'', ``3'' and ``6'' are shown. , "8", "3", "5", and "35" correspond to ratios when the denominator is 100. Similarly, the second column from the left shows "15 round probability variation pattern 2 to 7", "3 round probability variation pattern", "5 round probability variation pattern", and "5 round normal pattern" corresponding to the distribution value. ing. That is, at the time of the big hit corresponding to the second special symbol, the ratio of selecting "15 round probability variation pattern 2" is 33/100 (= 33%), and "15 round probability variation pattern 4, 5" is selected. The percentage to be selected is 3/100 (= 3%), and the percentage of "15 round probability variation pattern 6" is selected is 6/100 (= 6%), "15 round probability variation pattern 7" is The selected percentage is 8/100 (= 8%), the percentage of "3 round probability variation pattern" is selected is 3/100 (= 3%), "5 round probability variation pattern" is selected The ratio of selecting the “5 round normal pattern” is 35/100 (=35%).

When the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the jackpot symbol random number, and selects the winning symbol at the selection ratio shown in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. to decide Similarly, in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, as shown in the third column from the left, 2-byte command data, for example, is defined as a winning stop symbol command. Here too, the stop symbol command is described as a combination of the above MODE value and EVENT value, of which the upper byte MODE value "B2H" is selected when the winning symbol of this time hits the second special symbol. It means that Also, the EVENT values "01H" to "09H" in the lower bytes represent the types of corresponding winning symbols in the selection table. For this reason, for example, if the result of this big hit corresponds to the second special symbol, and "15 round probability variable symbol 2" is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command will be described as "B2H01H". Become.

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects a winning symbol from the second special symbol jackpot time stop symbol selection table, it generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the subcommand transmission process. In addition, the main control CPU 72 determines the jackpot stop symbol number for the second special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

The three columns on the right side of the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table show the values of the number of probability variations, the number of time reductions, and the number of special variations to be given after the end of the big win game.

[Probable number of times]
In this embodiment, when it corresponds to one of the probability variation symbols, the probability variation number of times is given 10000 times (probability variation next time). On the other hand, if it corresponds to one of the normal symbols, the probability variation number is not given.

[Time saving number of times]
In this embodiment, when it corresponds to "15 round probability variation pattern 2 to 7", "3 round probability variation pattern", "5 round probability variation pattern", the number of time reduction is given 10000 times (probability variation next time). On the other hand, when it corresponds to "5 rounds normal pattern", the number of times of time saving is given 100 times (time saving 100 times). In this case, when the time reduction (low-probability time-reduction state) for 100 variations ends, the state shifts to the normal state (low-probability non-time-reduction state).

[Number of special fluctuations]
In this embodiment, in the case of winning in the second special symbol, the number of special variations is not set.

[See Figure 36: Special symbol variation pre-processing]
Step S2412: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a big hit variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined variable time to the variable timer, and also sets the value of the stop display time to the stop symbol display timer. Generally, in the case of jackpot reach variation, a longer variation time than when losing is determined.

In this embodiment, when a big hit is achieved as a result of the internal lottery, for example, a "ready-to-win effect" is generated in the effect to make the game a big win. In the ``variation pattern selection table at the time of big hit'', variation patterns corresponding to a plurality of kinds of ``ready-to-win performances'' are defined, and when a big win occurs, one of the variation patterns is selected. It will be. The reach performance includes various reach performances such as a normal reach performance, a long reach performance, and a super reach performance. Basically, the variation time is longer and the expectation of winning is higher in the super reach production than in the reach production such as the normal reach production and the long reach production. Also, when winning with the time reduction function in operation, even if you select a variation pattern with a short variation time (variation pattern that does not perform reach production) instead of selecting a variation pattern with a long variation time good.

[Example of variation pattern selection table at the time of jackpot]
FIG. 43 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern selection table (low-probability/high-probability non-time reduction state) at the time of a big hit.
This selection table is a table used when winning in a low-probability or high-probability non-time reduction state (fluctuation pattern defining means). In this embodiment, variation patterns are not distinguished by the type of jackpot (winning pattern), but a dedicated variation pattern selection table may be used for each jackpot (the same applies hereinafter). Also, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, a "comparison value" and a "fluctuation pattern number" are stored in sets of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The "comparison value" includes, for example, eight stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "231", "241", "251", and "255 (FFH)". A "variation pattern number" of "61" to "68" is assigned to each "comparison value".

Variation pattern numbers "61" to "66" correspond to variation patterns in which a super reach effect is performed and hits, and variation pattern numbers "67" and "68" correspond to reach effects (other than super reach effects). Reach production) is performed and corresponds to the variation pattern that becomes a hit.

The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the acquired variation pattern determination random number value with the "comparison value" in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random number value is less than or equal to the comparison value, it corresponds to the comparison value. Select a variation pattern number (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random number value at that time is "190", when compared with the first comparison value "101", the random number value exceeds the comparison value, so the main control CPU72 determines the next comparison value " 201” and the random number. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects "62" as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 44 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern selection table at the time of a big hit (low probability time reduction state).
This selection table is a table used when winning in the low-probability time reduction state (fluctuation pattern defining means). Also, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, a "comparison value" and a "fluctuation pattern number" are stored in sets of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The "comparison value" includes, for example, eight stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "231", "241", "251", and "255 (FFH)". 'Variation pattern number''81' to '88' are assigned to each 'comparison value'.

Variation pattern numbers "81" to "88" all correspond to variation patterns in which a ready-to-win effect is performed and hits.

The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the acquired variation pattern determination random number value with the "comparison value" in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random number value is less than or equal to the comparison value, it corresponds to the comparison value. Select a variation pattern number (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random number value at that time is "190", when compared with the first comparison value "101", the random number value exceeds the comparison value, so the main control CPU72 determines the next comparison value " 201” and the random number. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects "82" as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 45 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern selection table at the time of big hit (high probability time reduction state).
This selection table is a table used when winning in the high-probability time reduction state (fluctuation pattern defining means). Also, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, a "comparison value" and a "fluctuation pattern number" are stored in sets of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The "comparison value" includes, for example, eight stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "231", "241", "251", and "255 (FFH)". A "variation pattern number" of "101" to "108" is assigned to each "comparison value".

Variation pattern numbers "101" to "108" all correspond to variation patterns in which a ready-to-win effect is performed and hits. In addition, at the time of winning in the high-probability time-shortened state, a variation pattern may be set in which the ready-to-win effect is not performed and the prize is won.

The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the acquired variation pattern determination random number value with the "comparison value" in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random number value is less than or equal to the comparison value, it corresponds to the comparison value. Select a variation pattern number (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random number value at that time is "190", when compared with the first comparison value "101", the random number value exceeds the comparison value, so the main control CPU72 determines the next comparison value " 201” and the random number. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects "102" as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 46 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern selection table (special section) at the time of a big hit.
This selection table is a table that is used when a big hit occurs in a special section of a high-probability time-reduction state or a low-probability time-reduction state (fluctuation pattern defining means).

Here, the variation pattern at the time of the big hit in the special section of the high probability time shortening state or the low probability time shortening state is all the same variation pattern ( For example, the variation time is set to about 30 seconds), and this selection table has a table configuration for selecting one predetermined variation pattern (non-reach per special variation pattern 170).

Therefore, the main control CPU 72 selects "170" as the variation pattern number regardless of which value the acquired variation pattern determination random number value is. In addition, the special variation pattern 170 per non-reach is a special variation pattern in which the variation time is fixed, and the variation time is not shortened by the number of memories.

[See Figure 36: Special symbol variation pre-processing]
Step S2414: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes other setting processing at the time of the big hit. In this process, the main control CPU72 determines the type of the winning symbol determined in the previous step S2410 (stop symbol number at the time of the jackpot) is "any probability variable symbol", the value of the probability variation function operation flag ( 01H) is set in the flag area of the RAM 76 (high-probability state transition means, probability variation function activation means). In addition, when the type of winning symbol determined in the previous step S2410 is "any normal symbol", the main control CPU72 resets the value of the probability variation function operation flag as the game state flag (low probability state setting means , low-probability state transition means, probability state setting means).

In addition, the main control CPU72, even if the winning symbol type (jackpot stop symbol number) determined in the previous step S2410 is "any winning symbol", the main control CPU72 is the game state flag time reduction function operation flag (01H) is set in the flag area of RAM 76 (time reduction state transition means, time reduction function activation means).

Also, in the process of step S2414, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (jackpot symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the jackpot stop symbol number. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a lottery result command (at the time of the big hit) together with the stop symbol command (at the time of the big hit). These stop symbol commands and lottery result commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the subcommand transmission process.

Next, processing at the time of a small hit will be described.
Step S2407: The main control CPU 72 executes small hit stop symbol determination processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol at the time of the small win (stop symbol number at the time of the small win) based on the big hit symbol random number. Here, similarly, the relationship between the big hit symbol random number and the type of the winning symbol at the time of the small win is defined in advance in the special symbol selection table at the time of the small win (winning type defining means). In the present embodiment, the jackpot symbol random number is used to reduce the load on the main control CPU 72 to determine the winning symbol at the time of the small hit, but a dedicated random number may be used separately.

[Election design at the time of small hit]
In the present embodiment, there is only one type of winning pattern at the time of a small win, ie, "twice open small winning pattern". However, in addition to this, for example, other types such as "one time open small winning pattern" and "three times open small winning pattern" may be prepared. As described above, the "small hit" as a result of the internal lottery does not trigger the subsequent state to change to "high probability state" or "time reduction state", so it is essential for this type of pachinko machine ""Two rounds (twice open) or more" can be provided without being bound by the rule of "one time open small winning pattern".

Step S2408: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a small hit variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200 (variation pattern selection means ). Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined variable time to the variable timer, and sets the value of the stop display time to the stop symbol display timer. In this embodiment, it is possible to select a reach variation pattern in the case of a small hit, or to select a variation pattern equivalent to that in normal variation.

Step S2409: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes other setting processing at the time of a small hit. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop design (small hit design) by the first special design display device 34 or the second special design display device 35 based on the small hit stop design number. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of a small hit) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 . These stop symbol commands and lottery result commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the subcommand transmission process.

Step S2415: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes special symbol variation start processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 selects variation pattern data based on the variation pattern number (when lost/when hit). In addition, the main control CPU 72 sets a special symbol fluctuation start flag in the flag area of the RAM 76 . Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a variation start command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 . This fluctuation start command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the subcommand transmission process. After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol changing process (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and returns to the special game management process.

[Fig. 35: Processing during special symbol fluctuation, processing during special symbol stop display]
In the special symbol fluctuation processing, as described above, the main control CPU72 loads the value of the fluctuation timer from the register to the timer counter, and then the timer counter according to the passage of time (clock pulse count or interrupt counter value) Decrement the value of Then, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the timer counter and controls the variable display of the special symbol as described above until the value becomes zero. Then, when the value of the timer counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol stop display process (step S4000) to the next jump destination.

Also, in the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 controls the stop display of the special symbol based on the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination process (steps S2404, S2407 and S2410 in FIG. 36). Also, the main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 . The symbol stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the subcommand transmission process. When the stop symbol is displayed for a predetermined time during the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 erases the symbol fluctuation flag.

[Processing for determination of variation pattern at time of failure]
FIG. 47 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of a change pattern determination process when losing. Each procedure will be described below.

Step S2600: The main control CPU 72 loads the variation pattern selection counter value from the RAM 76 and checks whether the variation pattern selection counter value is greater than "0". "Variation pattern selection counter value" is a counter value managed by the main control CPU 72, and is a variable that is referred to when performing special variation. Note that the fluctuation pattern selection counter value is set in a special fluctuation frequency setting process (FIG. 57), which will be described later.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the variation pattern selection counter value is greater than "0" (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S2606. On the other hand, if it is confirmed that the variation pattern selection counter value is not greater than "0", that is, if it is confirmed that the variation pattern selection counter value is "0" (No), the main control The CPU 72 executes step S2602.

In addition, if the variation pattern selection counter value is greater than "0", it means that special variation is executed, and if the variation pattern selection counter value is "0", special variation means not to run.

Step S2602: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether the internal state is the high probability time reduction state. The internal state can be confirmed by the probability variation function activation flag and the time reduction function activation flag (the same applies hereinafter).

As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is the high probability time reduction state (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S2608. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is the high probability time reduction state, the main control CPU 72 executes step S2604.

Step S2604: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether the internal state is the low probability time reduction state.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is the low probability time reduction state (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S2610. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is the low probability time reduction state, the main control CPU 72 executes step S2612.

Step S2606: The main control CPU 72 refers to the deviation pattern selection table for the special section (FIG. 40) and executes the process of determining the variation pattern.
Step S2608: The main control CPU 72 refers to the deviation pattern selection table (FIG. 39) for the high-probability time reduction state, and executes the process of determining the variation pattern.

Step S2610: The main control CPU 72 refers to the deviation pattern selection table for the low probability time reduction state (FIG. 38), and executes the process of determining the variation pattern.
Step S2612: The main control CPU 72 refers to the change pattern selection table (FIG. 37) for the non-time reduction state (low-probability/high-probability non-time reduction state) and executes the process of determining the change pattern.
After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol variation pre-processing (FIG. 36).

[Variation pattern determination process at the time of jackpot]
FIG. 48 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure for determining the variation pattern at the time of the big hit. Each procedure will be described below.

Step S2710: The main control CPU 72 loads the variation pattern selection counter value from the RAM 76 and checks whether the variation pattern selection counter value is greater than "0".

As a result, when it is confirmed that the variation pattern selection counter value is greater than "0" (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S2716. On the other hand, if it is confirmed that the variation pattern selection counter value is not greater than "0", that is, if it is confirmed that the variation pattern selection counter value is "0" (No), the main control The CPU 72 executes step S2712.

Step S2712: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether the internal state is the high probability time reduction state.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is the high probability time reduction state (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S2718. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is the high probability time reduction state, the main control CPU 72 executes step S2714.

Step S2714: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether the internal state is the low probability time reduction state.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is the low probability time reduction state (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S2720. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is the low probability time reduction state, the main control CPU 72 executes step S2722.

Step S2716: The main control CPU 72 refers to the big hit variation pattern selection table for the special section (Fig. 46), and executes the process of determining the variation pattern.
Step S2718: The main control CPU 72 executes the process of determining the variation pattern with reference to the high-probability time reduction state variation pattern selection table (FIG. 45).

Step S2720: The main control CPU 72 executes the process of determining the variation pattern with reference to the low-probability time reduction state variation pattern selection table (FIG. 44).
Step S2720: The main control CPU72 executes the process of determining the variation pattern with reference to the non-time-reduction state jackpot time variation pattern selection table (FIG. 43).

After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol variation pre-processing (FIG. 36).

[Special symbol storage area shift processing]
FIG. 49 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of special symbol storage area shift processing. In the preceding special symbol variation preprocessing, if the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is greater than "0" (step S2100 in FIG. 36: Yes), the main control CPU72 executes this special symbol storage area shift process. Each procedure will be described below.

Step S2210: The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the working memory corresponding to the second special symbol remains. This confirmation can be performed by referring to the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter stored in the RAM76. If the value of the working memory number counter corresponding to the second special symbol is 1 or more (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S2212.

Step S2212: The main control CPU 72 designates the second special symbol as the special symbol to shift the storage area. This designation is performed by setting, for example, "02H" as the target symbol designation value.

Step S2214: On the other hand, if the value of the working memory number counter corresponding to the second special symbol is 0 (step S2210: No), the main control CPU72 designates the first special symbol as the special symbol to shift the storage area. do. The designation in this case is performed, for example, by setting "01H" as the target symbol designation value.

Step S2216: The main control CPU72 shifts the random number storage area of the RAM76 for the target special symbol specified in either step S2212 or step S2214. It should be noted that the specific contents of the processing are as already described in the previous special symbol variation preprocessing.

Step S2218: Next, the main control CPU72 subtracts the value of the working memory counter for the target special symbol. For example, if the object to shift the memory area this time is the second special symbol, the main control CPU72 subtracts (-1) the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol.

Step S2220: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the "variation start working memory number" from the value of the working memory counter after the subtraction. In addition, here, for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, after adding the value of the working memory counter, the "number of working memories at the start of fluctuation" may be set.

Step S2222: In addition, the main control CPU72 confirms whether or not the special symbol for which the storage area of this time is to be shifted is the second special symbol.
Step S2224: If the target is the second special symbol (step S2222: Yes), the main control CPU72 sets the effect command when the working memory number is reduced with respect to the second special symbol. The effect command set here is also generated as a command of one word length, but its configuration is in contrast to the above-described "effect command when the number of working memories increases". That is, the working memory number decrease effect command is a value of the lower byte (eg, "00H" to "03H") representing the number of working memories after the decrease with respect to the preceding value (eg, "BCH") of the upper byte representing the command type. ”) is added, and an additional value (for example, “10H”) meaning “decrease in the number of working memories accompanying consumption” is added (logical OR) to the value of the lower byte. Therefore, for the lower byte, the addition value "10H" is logically summed, and the second digit becomes "1". become a thing. In other words, if the lower byte of the command is "13H", it means that the number of working memories up to the previous time "4" (the command notation is "14H") has decreased by one, resulting in the current number of working memories being "3" (command The notation indicates that it has become "13H"). Similarly, if the lower byte is "12H" to "10H", it is the result of the previous working memory number "3" to "1" (command notation is "13H" to "11H") decreasing by one. , indicates that the current number of working memories is "2" to "0" (command notation is "12H" to "10H"). It should be noted that the preceding value "BCH" is a value indicating that the current production command is the working memory number command for the second special symbol.

Step S2226: In addition, when the object of this time is the first special symbol (step S2222: No), the main control CPU 72 sets the production command when the working memory number is reduced with respect to the first special symbol. The command in this case is the same as above except that the preceding value is a value (for example, "BBH") indicating that it is a working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S2228: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes effect command output processing. This processing is for transmitting to the effect control device 124 the effect command set at the previous step S2224 or step S2226 (storage number notifying means).
After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol variation pre-processing (FIG. 36).

[Processing during special symbol stop display]
FIG. 50 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of the special symbol stop display process. Each procedure will be described below.

Step S4100: The main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the stop symbol display timer (decrements by the interrupt period).

Step S4200: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the stop display time has expired, based on the value of the stop symbol display timer subtracted this time. Specifically, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is not 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has not yet expired (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special game management process, jumps from the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 35) and repeats the special symbol stop display process in the next interrupt cycle.

On the other hand, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has expired (Yes). In this case, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4250.

Step S4250: The main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command and a stop display time end command. The symbol stop command and the stop display time end command are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the subcommand transmission process. Also, the main control CPU 72 erases the symbol-fluctuation flag here. The "stop display time end command" is a command indicating that the stop display time of the special symbols has ended (elapsed).

Step S4300: Here, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the jackpot flag value (01H) is set. If the jackpot flag value (01H) is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4350.

[When elected]
Step S4350: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination of the jump table to "variable winning device management process at the time of big hit". Note that the main control CPU 72 executes processing for setting various functions to non-operation in this processing. Specifically, the probability variation function is deactivated, and the time reduction function is deactivated. As a result, before the special game (big role) is started, the state is shifted to the low-probability non-time reduction state.

Step S4400: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets "big win start (during jackpot game)" as an internal state flag for control. In addition, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the continuous operation count status according to the type of the jackpot symbol. For example, if the type of jackpot is "15 rounds jackpot", a value corresponding to "15 rounds" is set in the continuous operation count status. Further, when the type of jackpot is "3 rounds jackpot", a value representing "3 rounds" is set in the continuous operation count status. Also, the main control CPU 72 generates a status command indicating that the jackpot is in progress. A state command indicating that the jackpot is in progress is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the subcommand transmission process.

Step S4500: Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a continuous operation count command. The continuous operation count command can be generated based on the type of the jackpot symbol (stop symbol number) determined in the previous jackpot stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 36). For example, if the type of jackpot is "15 rounds jackpot", the continuous operation count command is generated as a value representing "15 rounds". Also, when the jackpot type is "3 rounds jackpot", the continuous operation count command is generated as a value representing "3 rounds". The generated continuous operation number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the subcommand transmission process.

When the above procedure is completed at the time of the big hit, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special game management process.

[When not elected]
On the other hand, the following procedure is executed in cases other than the time of the big hit.
That is, when the main control CPU 72 determines that the jackpot flag value (01H) is not set in step S4300 (No), then step S4600 is executed.

Step S4600: The main control CPU72 then checks whether or not the small hit flag value (01H) is set. Then, the value of the small hit flag (01H) is not set, and if it is simply a loss (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4602.

Step S4602: The main control CPU 72 sets the address of the special symbol variation pre-processing as the jump destination address of the jump table.

Step S4605: On the other hand, if the small hit flag value (01H) is set (step S4600: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the address of the small hit variable winning device management process as the jump destination address of the jump table. set.

Step S4606: Then, the main control CPU72 sets "small hit start (during small hit)" as an internal state flag for control. In addition, the main control CPU72 generates a state command indicating that the small hit is in progress. A state command indicating that a small hit is in progress is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the subcommand transmission process.

Step S4608: The main control CPU 72 executes special fluctuation management processing. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes processing for managing the special variation that is executed after the end of the big hit game. The contents of the special change management process will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

Step S4610: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the number cutting counter. In the "high-probability state" and the "short-time state", the respective counter values are set in the probability variable count area and the time-saving count area of the RAM 76, respectively. Note that although "number of cuts" is used here, the value of the number of cuts counter in the case of the "high probability state" can be set to an extremely large value (for example, 10000 times or more). By setting such a huge value, it is possible to ensure that the "high-probability state" will continue until the next winning is obtained. It should be noted that the number cutting counter relating to the "time reduction state" is set to a value (for example, 10 times, 100 times, 10000 times, etc.) corresponding to the winning symbol.

Step S4620: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded counter value is zero. At this time, if the number-of-times counter value is already 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special game management process. On the other hand, if the number cut counter value is not 0 (No), after generating a number cut counter value command, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4630.

Step S4630: The main control CPU 72 decrements (subtracts 1) the number-of-times counter value.
Step S4640: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether the subtraction result is not zero. As a result of the subtraction, if the value of the number cutting counter is not 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special game management process. On the other hand, when the value of the number cutting counter becomes 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S4650.

Step S4650: Here, the main control CPU 72 resets the flag when the multiple cut function is activated. It is the probability variation function activation flag or the time reduction function activation flag that is reset, but the value of the number cutting counter that counts the high probability state in the "high probability state" does not substantially become 0 , it is the time reduction function activation flag that is actually reset. As a result, the time shortening state or the high probability state ends after the special symbol is stopped and displayed. After completing the above procedure, the process returns to the special game management process.

[Special Fluctuation Management Processing]
FIG. 51 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of the special fluctuation management process. Each procedure will be described below.

Step S4660: The main control CPU 72 loads the variation pattern selection counter value from the RAM 76 and checks whether the variation pattern selection counter value is greater than "0".

As a result, when it is confirmed that the variation pattern selection counter value is greater than "0" (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S4662. On the other hand, if it is confirmed that the variation pattern selection counter value is not greater than "0", that is, if the variation pattern selection counter value is "0" (No), the main control CPU 72 special symbols It returns to the process during stop display (FIG. 50).

Step S4662: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of decrementing (subtracting 1) the variation pattern selection counter value. As a result, the number of times the special variation is executed (the number of times the special variation can be executed) is reduced by one.
After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol stop display processing (FIG. 50).

[Variable winning device management process at the time of big hit]
FIG. 52 is a flow chart showing a configuration example of variable winning device management processing at the time of a big hit.
The variable winning device management process at the time of the big hit includes the game process selection process at the time of the big win (step S5100), the process of opening the pattern of opening the big winning prize at the time of the big win (step S5200), the operation process of opening and closing the big winning prize at the time of the big win (step S5300), and the big win at the time of the big win. This configuration includes a group of subroutines of winning opening closing processing (step S5400) and jackpot end processing (step S5500).

Step S5100: In the jackpot game process selection process, the main control CPU72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (one of steps S5200 to S5500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the jackpot time variable winning device management process to the stack pointer as the return destination address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening/closing operation) of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 has not yet started, the main control CPU 72 sets the big winning opening pattern setting process at the time of the next jump as the next jump destination. (Step S5200) is selected. On the other hand, if the big winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of the big hit has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the big winning opening opening/closing operation process at the time of the big winning (step S5300) as the next jump destination, and opens and closes the big winning opening at the time of the big hit. If the operation process is completed, the big winning opening closing process (step S5400) at the time of big hit is selected as the next jump destination. In addition, when the big winning opening opening/closing operation process and the big winning opening closing process at the time of the big hit are repeatedly executed for the set number of consecutive operations (the number of rounds), the main control CPU72 selects the next jump destination as the ending process at the time of the big win ( Step S5500) is selected. Each process will be described in more detail below.

[Big winning opening pattern setting process at the time of big hit]
FIG. 53 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the big winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of big winning. This processing is for setting conditions such as the number of opening and closing operations of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 at the time of a big hit and the time for each opening. Each procedure will be described below.

Step S5204: The main control CPU 72 executes symbol-specific open pattern setting processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72, according to the winning pattern of this time, the opening pattern of the big winning opening (the number of times of opening each round and the time of each opening), the interval time between rounds, the number of counts in one round (maximum (number of wins), opening time, ending time, etc. In addition, the number of counts (maximum number of winnings) in one round is basically about 10, but winnings rarely occur during an extremely short time (about 0.1 second). not, but extremely difficult).

Step S5206: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of rounds to be executed in the current jackpot game based on the jackpot winning pattern selected in the jackpot stop pattern determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 36). Specifically, if "15 rounds jackpot" is selected as the type of jackpot, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to 15 times. Also, if "3 rounds big win" is selected as the type of big win, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of rounds to be executed to 3 times. The number of execution rounds set here is stored in the buffer area of the RAM 76, for example.

Step S5208: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an opening timer for the big hit based on the big winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S5204. The value of the timer set here becomes the opening time of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 . If about 29.0 seconds is set as the value of the opening timer at the time of a big hit, the opening time is a sufficient time (for example, launch control 10 or more game balls are shot by the board set 174, preferably 6 seconds or more). On the other hand, if 0.1 second is set as the value of the timer, the opening time is a short time (difficult) that hardly occurs (is difficult) even if it is not impossible to enter the big winning hole during one opening. (For example, a time shorter than 1 second, preferably a time shorter than the game ball shooting interval by the shooting control board set 174).

Step S5210: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets a large winning opening interval timer based on the large winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S5204. The value of the timer set here will be the waiting time between rounds during the jackpot.

Step S5212: When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening opening/closing operation process at the time of the big hit, and returns to the variable winning device management process at the time of the big win (FIG. 52).

[Big winning opening opening and closing operation processing at the time of big hit]
FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the big winning opening opening/closing operation process at the time of a big win. This process is for controlling the opening/closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 at the time of a big hit. The procedure will be described below.

Step S5301: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the big winning opening interval timer is counting down. Specifically, it is possible to confirm whether or not the large winning opening interval timer is counting down by confirming whether or not the large winning opening interval timer set in step S5314 below is already in operation. can.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the big winning opening interval timer is counting down (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5314. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the big winning opening interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5302.

Step S5302: The main control CPU 72 opens the first big winning opening or the second big winning opening. Specifically, a driving signal to be applied to the first big winning opening solenoid 90 or the second big winning opening solenoid 97 is generated based on the operation pattern of the variable winning device during the big win. As a result, the first variable prize winning device 30 or the second variable prize winning device 31 operates and shifts from the closed state to the open state.

When the first big winning hole or the second big winning hole is opened, the main control CPU 72 generates a first big winning hole opening command or a second big winning hole opening command. The first big winning mouth opening command and the second big winning mouth opening command are transmitted to the effect control device 124 .

Step S5303: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes open timer countdown processing. In this process, the countdown of the opening timer set in the big winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5208 in FIG. 53) is executed.

Step S5306: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time for the big winning opening has ended. Specifically, it is confirmed whether the value of the open timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the open timer is not 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 next steps S5308. to run.

Step S5308: The main control CPU 72 executes winning ball count processing. In this process, the number of game balls winning the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 (the first or second big winning port during opening) is counted during the opening time. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the value of the count based on the winning detection signal input from the first count switch 84 or the second count switch 85 within the open time.

Step S5310: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). This predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (upper limit of the number of prize balls) allowed per opening (one round during a big win) as described above. If the count number has not yet reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process at the time of the big hit. Then, when the variable winning device management process at the time of the big hit is executed next, the jump destination is set to the big winning opening opening and closing operation process at the time of the big hit at the present stage, so the main control CPU 72 performs the procedure of the above steps S5301 to S5310. Execute repeatedly.

If it is determined at step S5306 that the large winning opening opening time has ended (Yes), or if it is confirmed that the count number has reached a predetermined number at step S5310 (No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5312. Execute.

Step S5312: The main control CPU 72 closes the first big winning opening or the second big winning opening. Specifically, the generation of the driving signal to be applied to the first big winning opening solenoid 90 or the second big winning opening solenoid 97 ends. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 shifts from the open state to the closed state.

When the first big winning opening or the second big winning opening is closed, the main control CPU 72 generates a first big winning opening closing command or a second big winning opening closing command. The first big winning opening closing command and the second big winning opening closing command are transmitted to the effect control device 124 .

Step S5314: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes interval timer countdown processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 counts down the big winning hole interval timer set in the big winning big winning hole opening pattern setting process (step S5210 in FIG. 53).

Step S5315: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the big winning opening interval time has ended. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the large winning opening interval timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the large winning opening interval timer has not become 0 or less (No), the main control The CPU 72 returns to the end address of the variable winning device management process (FIG. 52) at the time of big hit. Then, when the big winning opening opening/closing operation process at the time of the big hit is executed in the next call, the process jumps from the top step S5301 and immediately executes the step S5314. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the value of the big winning opening interval timer after the countdown process has become 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5318.

Step S5318: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the opening number counter. The value of the open number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76 with an initial value of 0, for example.

Step S5320: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the open number counter after increment has reached the number set in the current round. Here, ``the number of times set in the current round'' is determined by, for example, ``opening the first variable prize winning device 30 or the second variable prize winning device 31 a plurality of times in one round during the jackpot''. This is to correspond to the open pattern.

If the pattern of repeating opening and closing operations multiple times within one round is not adopted, the "number of times set in the current round" in each round is set to once in each round. Therefore, in each round, the counter value reaches the set number of times with one opening/closing operation (Yes), so the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S5322 next.

On the other hand, if a pattern is adopted in which opening and closing operations are repeated multiple times within one round, the counter value has not yet reached the set number of times at the end of one opening operation (No).

In this case, when the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process at the time of the big hit, the jump destination is set to the big winning opening opening and closing operation process at the time of the big hit at the present stage, so the above steps S5301 to S5320 are performed. Execute repeatedly. As a result, the opening counter is incremented in step S5318, and when the counter value reaches the set number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S5322.

Step S5322: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening closing process at the time of the big hit, and returns to the variable winning device management process at the time of the big hit. Then, when the variable winning device management process at the time of the big hit is executed next, the main control CPU 72 next executes the big winning opening closing process at the time of the big hit.

[Big winning opening closing process at the time of big hit]
FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the big winning opening closing process at the time of a big hit. This big winning opening closing process at the time of a big hit is for continuing the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 or ending the operation. The procedure will be described below.

Step S5402: The main control CPU 72 increments the round number counter. As a result, for example, the first round is completed, and the value of the round number counter is "1" at the stage toward the second round.

Step S5404: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the incremented round number counter has reached the set execution round number. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 refers to the incremented round number counter value (1 to 15), and if the value is less than the set execution round number (1 to 15 after subtracting 1) (No) , then step S5405 is executed.

Step S5405: The main control CPU 72 generates a round number command from the current round number counter value. The round number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the subcommand transmission process. The effect control device 124 can confirm the current round number based on the received round number command.

Step S5406: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening opening/closing operation process at the time of the big hit.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process at the time of the big hit.

When the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process at the time of the big hit, in the game process selection process at the time of the big win (step S5100 in FIG. 52), the main control CPU 72 performs the big winning opening opening/closing operation process at the time of the next jump, which is the next jump destination. to run. After executing the big winning opening opening/closing operation process at the time of the big hit, the main control CPU 72 executes the closing process of the big winning opening at the time of the big hit again after executing the big winning opening closing process at the time of the big hit, and the above steps S5402 to S5408 are executed. Execute repeatedly. As a result, the opening/closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is continuously executed until the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of rounds to be executed (15 times, etc.).

When the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (step S5404: Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5410.

Step S5410, step S5412: In this case, when the main control CPU72 resets the round number counter (=0), the next jump destination is set to end processing at the time of the big hit.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process at the time of the big hit. As a result, next time the main control CPU 72 executes the variable winning device management process at the time of the big hit, the end process at the time of the big hit is selected this time.

[End processing at the time of jackpot]
FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure of end processing at the time of a big hit. This end processing at the time of the big win is for preparing the conditions for ending the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 at the time of the big win. An example procedure will be described below.

Step S5501: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot end time timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the initial value to the jackpot end time timer, and then counts down the timer (each time this module is called) with the passage of time.

Step S5502: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the jackpot end time has elapsed. Specifically, if the value of the jackpot end time timer has not yet become 0, the main control CPU 72 determines that the jackpot end time has not passed (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 terminates this module and returns to the variable winning device management process (FIG. 52) at the time of the big hit.

After that, when the value of the jackpot end time timer becomes 0 with the passage of time, the main control CPU 72 determines that the jackpot end time has passed (Yes), and executes step S5503 and subsequent steps.

Step S5503, step S5504: The main control CPU 72 resets the big hit flag (00H). As a result, the big hit game state ends in the control processing of the main control CPU 72 . Also, the main control CPU 72 erases "big hit" from the internal state flag here, and declares the end of the big win as an internal state on the control process. The main control CPU 72 resets the value of the continuous operation count status.

Step S5506: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the probability variation function activation flag value (01H) is set. This flag is set at the time of the big hit and other setting processing (step S2414 in FIG. 36) during the preceding special symbol variation preprocessing.

Step S5508: If the value of the probability variation function activation flag is set (step S5506: Yes), the main control CPU72 sets the number of times of probability variation (eg 10000 times). The value of the set probability variation count is stored, for example, in the probability variation counter area of the RAM 76, and becomes the above-described frequency cut counter value. The number of probability fluctuations set here is the upper limit number of fluctuations (internal lottery) of special symbols in the subsequent game in a high probability state. However, if you set a huge number of times such as 10000 times as described above, there is almost no probability that non-winning will continue that far (the winning probability at high probability is, for example, 1/32 to 1/100 degree), in effect, the high probability state will continue until the next election. Conversely, if a substantial upper limit is set for the high-probability state, the probability variation count is set to a realistic count (for example, about 70 times) (so-called cut-off probability variation). In addition, if the value of the probability variation function operation flag is not set (step S5506: No), the main control CPU72 does not execute step S5508.

Step S5510: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the time reduction function activation flag value (01H) is set. This flag is set at the time of the big hit and other setting processing (step S2414 in FIG. 36) during the preceding special symbol variation preprocessing.

Step S5512: And, if the value of the time reduction function operation flag is set (step S5510: Yes), the main control CPU72 sets the number of times of time reduction (for example, 10 times, 100 times or 10000 times). The set value of the number of times of time saving is stored in the time saving count area of the RAM 76 as described above. The time saving frequency set here becomes the upper limit frequency for shortening the variation time of the special symbol in subsequent games. In addition, if the value of the time reduction function operation flag is not set (step S5510: No), the main control CPU72 does not execute step S5512.

Step S5514: Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a state designation command based on various flags. Specifically, in accordance with the reset of the jackpot flag or the end of the big win, a state designation command representing "normal" as the game state is generated. Also, if the probability variation function operation flag is set, a state designation command representing "high probability" is generated as the internal state, and if the time reduction function operation flag is set, the internal state is "time reduction ” is generated. These state designation commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the subcommand transmission process.

Step S5515: The main control CPU 72 executes special fluctuation number setting processing. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting a variation pattern selection counter value based on the type of winning symbol. The details of the special fluctuation count setting process will be described later with reference to another drawing.

Step S5516: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening pattern setting process at the time of the big hit.

Step S5518: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 35) in the special game management process to the special symbol variation pre-process. After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 returns to the variable winning device management process at the time of the big hit.

[Special fluctuation count setting process]
FIG. 57 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure for setting the number of special fluctuations. Each procedure will be described below.

Step S5600: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the winning this time corresponds to either "11 round probability variable symbols 1 to 11" or "11 round normal symbols".

As a result, when it is confirmed that the winning this time corresponds to either "11 round probability variable symbols 1 to 11" or "11 round normal symbols" (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5602. On the other hand, if it is not possible to confirm that the winning this time corresponds to either "11 round probability variable symbols 1 to 11" or "11 round normal symbols", the main control CPU 72 goes to the end process at the time of the big hit (Fig. 56). return.

Step S5602: The main control CPU 72 sets a value corresponding to the winning symbol to the variation pattern selection counter value. A value corresponding to the winning symbol is set according to the value of the number of times of special variation shown in FIG. As a result, the special variation is executed 1 to 10 times after the end of the big win game. It should be noted that the set variation pattern selection counter value is decremented by one each time the special symbol is stopped and displayed once. Through such processing, the main control CPU 72 can set the selected variation pattern as a normal variation or as a special variation.
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the jackpot ending process (FIG. 56).

[Variable winning device management process at the time of small hit]
FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing a configuration example of the small winning variable winning device management process.
Small-hit time variable winning device management processing includes small-hit time game process selection processing (step S6100), small-hit time big winning opening opening pattern setting processing (step S6200), small-hit time big winning opening opening/closing operation processing (step S6300). , large winning opening closing process at the time of small hit (step S6400), and subroutine group of end process at the time of small hit (step S6500).

Step S6100: In the small hit game process selection process, the main control CPU72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (one of steps S6200 to S6500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the variable winning device management process at the time of the small hit as the return destination address in the stack pointer. . Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening/closing operation) of the first variable winning device 30 has not yet started, the main control CPU 72 selects the small winning big winning opening pattern setting process (step S6200) as the next jump destination. do. On the other hand, if the small-hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the small-hitting large winning opening opening/closing operation process (step S6300) as the next jump destination, If the winning opening opening/closing operation process is completed, the small winning opening closing process (step S6400) is selected as the next jump destination. In addition, when the small-hit large winning opening opening/closing operation process and the small-hitting large winning opening closing process are repeatedly executed over the set number of consecutive operations, the main control CPU 72 selects the next jump destination as the small-hitting end process (step S6500). Each process will be described in more detail below.

[Processing for setting the pattern of opening the big winning opening at the time of the small hit]
FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure for setting a pattern for opening a big winning opening at the time of a small hit. This processing is for setting conditions such as the number of opening and closing operations of the first variable winning device 30 at the time of a small hit and the time for each opening. Each procedure will be described below.

Step S6212: The main control CPU 72 sets the "small hit opening pattern". In the case of this embodiment, as for the "minor hit opening pattern", for example, opening patterns of "open for 0.1 second" are set for the first time and the second time, respectively. Since there is no concept of "round" for the "small hit", the "open pattern" is also written as "first release" and "second release".

Step S6214: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of openings of the large winning opening to, for example, two times, based on the large winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S6212. The release count set here is stored in the buffer area of the RAM 76, for example.

Step S6216: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets a small hit opening timer. The value of the timer set here is the opening time per operation when the first variable winning device 30 is operated. In this embodiment, 0.1 second is set as the value of the small win opening timer as described above. It is not possible (difficult) for a short period of time (for example, less than 1 second, preferably less than the interval between shots of game balls by the launcher unit).

Step S6218: The main control CPU72 sets an interval timer at the time of a small hit. The value of the timer set here is the standby time for each opening and closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 a plurality of times at the time of a small win, and this timer value is set to, for example, about 2 seconds.

Step S6220: When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening opening/closing operation process at the time of a small hit, and returns to the variable winning device management process at the time of a small win (FIG. 58). Then, the main control CPU 72 next executes the small winning big winning opening opening/closing operation process (step S6300).

[Big winning opening opening and closing operation processing at the time of small hit]
FIG. 60 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the small winning big winning opening opening/closing operation process. This processing is for controlling the opening/closing operation of the first variable prize winning device 30 at the time of a small hit. The procedure will be described below.

Step S6301: The main control CPU 72 checks whether the interval timer is counting down. Specifically, by checking whether the interval timer set in step S6314 below is already in operation, it is possible to check whether the interval timer is counting down.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the interval timer is counting down (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6314. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6302.

Step S6302: The main control CPU 72 opens the first big winning hole. Specifically, it generates a drive signal to be applied to the first big winning opening solenoid 90 . As a result, the first variable prize winning device 30 operates and shifts from the closed state to the open state.

Step S6304: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes open timer countdown processing. In this process, the countdown of the opening timer set in the previous small winning opening pattern setting process (step S6216 in FIG. 59) is executed.

Step S6306: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time has ended. Specifically, it is confirmed whether the value of the open timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the open timer is not 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 next steps S6308. to run.

Step S6308: The main control CPU 72 executes winning ball count processing. In this process, the number of game balls that have won the first variable winning device 30 (the first big winning opening during opening) is counted within the opening time. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the value of the count based on the winning detection signal input from the first count switch 84 within the open time.

Step S6310: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). This predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (upper limit of the number of winning balls) allowed per opening (one opening at the time of a small win) as described above. If the count number has not yet reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the small hit variable winning device management process (FIG. 58). Then, when the variable winning device management process at the time of the small hit is executed next, the jump destination is set to the big winning opening opening and closing operation process at the time of the small hit at the present stage, so the main control CPU 72 executes the above steps S6301 to S6310. Repeat the steps.

If it is determined that the opening time has ended in step S6306 (Yes), or if it is confirmed that the count number has reached a predetermined number in step S6310 (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S6312. Here, since the value of the open timer is set to a short time for opening at the time of the small hit, the main control CPU 72 normally performs step S6310 before confirming that the count number has reached a predetermined number. In most cases, it is determined in S6306 that the open time has ended.

Step S6312: The main control CPU 72 closes the first big winning opening. Specifically, the generation of the driving signal to be applied to the first big winning opening solenoid 90 is ended. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 returns from the open state to the closed state.

Step S6314: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes interval timer countdown processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 counts down the interval timer set in the above-described small-hit time big winning opening pattern setting process (step S6218 in FIG. 59).

Step S6315: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the interval time has ended. Specifically, it is confirmed whether the value of the interval timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the interval timer is not 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 is variable during the small hit Return to the end address of the winning device management process (FIG. 58). Then, when the big winning opening opening/closing operation process at the time of a small hit is executed in the next call, the process jumps from the first step S6301 and immediately executes step S6314. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the value of the interval timer after the countdown process has become 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6316.

Step S6316: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening closing process at the time of a small hit, and returns to the variable winning device management process at the time of a small hit. Then, when the small-hit time variable winning device management process is executed next, the main control CPU 72 next executes the small-hit time big winning opening closing process.

[Large winning opening closing process at the time of small hit]
FIG. 61 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure for closing the big winning opening at the time of a small hit. This small-hit big winning opening closing process is for continuing the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or ending the operation. The procedure will be described below.

Step S6412: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the opening number counter.

Step S6414: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the open number counter after incrementing has reached the set open number. The number of openings is set in the previous big winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6214 in FIG. 59). If the value of the opening number counter has not yet reached the set opening number (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6416.

Step S6416: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening opening/closing operation process at the time of a small hit.
Step S6430: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the number-of-winning-balls counter, and returns to the small-hit time variable winning device management process (FIG. 58).

When the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 executes the small winning game process selection process (step S6100 in FIG. 58), which is the next jump destination, the big winning opening opening/closing operation process. to run. Then, after executing the small winning big winning opening opening and closing operation process, the main control CPU 72 executes the small winning big winning opening closing process again, until the actual number of times of opening reaches the set number of openings (twice). , the opening/closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 is repeatedly executed.

When the actual number of times of opening at the time of the small hit reaches the set number of times of opening (step S6414: Yes), the main control CPU72 next executes step S6418.

Step S6418, step S6420: In this case, when the main control CPU72 resets the opening number counter (=0), the next jump destination is set to end processing at the time of a small hit.

Step S6430: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the number-of-winning-balls counter, and returns to the small-hit time variable winning device management process (FIG. 58). As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the end process at the time of the small hit is selected this time.

[End processing at the time of small hit]
FIG. 62 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the end processing at the time of a small hit. This end processing at the time of a small win is for preparing conditions for ending the operation of the first variable winning device 30 at the time of a small win. An example procedure will be described below.

Step S6502: The main control CPU72 executes a small hit end time timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the initial value to the small hit end time timer, and then counts down the timer with the passage of time (each time this module is called).

Step S6504: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the end time of the small hit has elapsed. Specifically, if the value of the small hit end time timer has not yet become 0, the main control CPU 72 determines that the small hit end time has not elapsed (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 ends this module and returns to the small hit variable winning device management process (FIG. 58).

After that, when the value of the small hit end time timer becomes 0 with the passage of time, the main control CPU 72 determines that the small hit end time has passed (Yes), and executes step S6506 and subsequent steps.

Steps S6506, S6508: The main control CPU 72 resets the value of the small hit flag (00H), erases "small hit" from the internal state flag, and terminates the small hit game. In the case of a big hit, the internal condition device operates (for example, the flag corresponding to the condition device turns ON), but in the case of a small hit, the internal condition device does not operate. The procedure is just for clearing flags.

Step S6510: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning opening pattern setting process at the time of the small hit.

Step S6512: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 35) in the special game management process to the special symbol variation pre-process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the small hit variable winning device management process.

[LED display setting process]
FIG. 63 is a flowchart illustrating a configuration example of LED display setting processing.
The LED display setting process includes a special symbol display setting process (step S1200), a normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), a state display setting process (step S1220), an operation memory display setting process (step S1230), and a continuous operation number display setting. This configuration includes a group of subroutines for processing (step S1240).

Of these, the special symbol display setting process (step S1200), the normal symbol display setting process (step S1210) and the working memory display setting process (step S1230) are the first special symbol display device 34, the second special symbol display device 35, the normal Symbol display device 33, normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a and second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a drive signal to be applied to each LED (common output data) in the process of generating be. The generated common output data (display data) is stored in the RAM in the used area and output in the dynamic port output process (the same applies hereinafter).

The state display setting process (step S1220) and the continuous operation count display setting process (step S1240) are processes for generating a driving signal (common output data) to be applied to each LED of the gaming state display device 38. FIG. First, in the state display setting process, the main control CPU72 controls lighting of the probability change state display lamp 38d and the time reduction state display lamp 38e according to the value of the probability change function operation flag or the time reduction function operation flag. For example, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, if the probability variation function operation flag is set to a value (01H), the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal (common output data) to the LED corresponding to the probability variation state display lamp 38d. to generate It should be noted that the probability variation state display lamp 38d continues to light until a jackpot game relating to special symbols is started, or until the probability variation function is turned off after the variation display of the special symbols is performed a specified number of times, and then non- Displayed (turned off). In addition, the probability change state display lamp 38d does not light up when the state shifts to the latent probability change state (high probability non-shortening state), but if a power failure occurs in the latent probability change state, the power is turned off without clearing the RAM. Lights up when recovered. On the other hand, if the value (01H) is set in the time reduction function operation flag, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal (common data for output). Furthermore, the main control CPU 72 controls lighting of the firing position designation lamp 38f according to the firing position designation status. For example, when the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is activated by a big win game or a small win game (when the launch position designation status is set to "1"), the main control CPU 72 launches A lighting signal (common output data) for the LED corresponding to the position designation lamp 38f is generated. On the other hand, when the normal game is in progress in the low-probability non-time reduction state (when the firing position designation status is set to "0"), the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal for the LED corresponding to the firing position designation lamp 38f ( data for common output) is not generated. Also, if the value (01H) is set in the time reduction function operation flag, the main control CPU72 outputs a lighting signal (common output for data). It should be noted that the firing position designation lamp 38f, when transitioning to the "time reduction state" through the jackpot game, lights up from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the "time reduction state", and turns off when the "time reduction state" ends ( OFF).

The probability change state display lamp 38d can employ any of the following lighting methods.
(1) The first lighting method is mainly used for models equipped with a latent probability change function. This is a method of turning on when the For example, when the latent probability variable state exists, when it shifts to the latent probability variable state, the probability variable state display lamp 38d can be made not to light, and it is lit during probability change (high probability time reduction state) you can avoid it.
(2) The second lighting method is a method mainly used for models that do not have a variable latency function.
Either one of these lighting methods can be adopted depending on the specifications of the game machine model.

In addition, the main control CPU 72 controls lighting of the jackpot type display lamps 38a, 38b, and 38c in the continuous operation count display setting process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 generates lighting signals (common output data) for the jackpot type display lamps 38a, 38b, and 38c based on the value of the continuous operation count status. At this time, the target for outputting the lighting signal is the combination of the display lamps 38a, 38b, 38c corresponding to the jackpot symbol specified by the value of the number of continuous operation status. For example, if the value of the continuous operation count status specifies "15 rounds", the main control CPU 72 controls the lamps corresponding to the lighting pattern representing "15 rounds" (for example, all the indicator lamps 38a, 38b, 38c lamp) to generate a lighting signal (common output data). Further, if the value of the continuous operation count status specifies "3 rounds", the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal (common output data). Since the three display lamps 38a, 38b, and 38c can display six lighting patterns, it is possible to correspond to the six types of jackpots of the present embodiment. The details of the lighting pattern corresponding to the number of rounds are preferably displayed around the display lamps 38a, 38b, and 38c in order to clearly inform the player.

FIG. 64 is a flowchart illustrating an example of procedures for external information management processing. An example procedure will be described below.

Step S1250: The main control CPU 72 executes security signal management processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of transmitting a security signal to the hall computer as necessary. Details of the processing will be described later.

Step S1260: The main control CPU 72 executes other signal management processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 transmits external signals other than security signals (e.g. prize ball information, door opening information, number of symbol determination information, jackpot information, starting door information, etc.) to the hall computer as necessary. Execute the processing to be performed.
After completing the above processing, the main control CPU 72 returns to the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 24).

FIG. 65 is a flowchart illustrating an example of procedures for security signal management processing. An example procedure will be described below.

Step S1271: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for confirming whether or not a switch abnormality has occurred. The main control CPU 72 monitors signals from various switches arranged on the board, and determines that a switch abnormality has occurred when the ON state continues for a certain period of time or longer.

As a result, when it is confirmed that a switch abnormality has occurred (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S1278. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the switch abnormality has occurred (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S1272.

Step S1271: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for confirming whether magnetism or radio waves are detected. The main control CPU 72 monitors signals from the magnetism detection switch or the radio wave detection switch, and determines that magnetism or radio waves are detected when the ON state continues for a certain period of time or more.

As a result, when it is confirmed that magnetism or radio waves have been detected (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S1278. On the other hand, if the detection of magnetism or radio waves cannot be confirmed (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S1273.

Step S1273: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for confirming whether or not the security signal output timer is zero. The security signal output timer is set when the RAM clear processing ends (step S122 in FIG. 10) or when the setting-related processing ends (step S318 in FIG. 29). In addition, the security signal output timer is updated with the lapse of time in timer update processing.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the security signal output timer is 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S1274. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the security signal output timer is 0 (No), that is, if the security signal output timer has not timed out, the main control CPU 72 executes step S1278.

Step S1274: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the gaming machine state flag is "00H (playable state)".

As a result, when it is confirmed that the gaming machine state flag is "00H (game possible state)" (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S1275. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the gaming machine state flag is "00H (playable state)" (No), for example, if it is "01H (setting change state)" or "02H (setting confirmation state)", The main control CPU 72 executes step S1278.

Step S1275: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for confirming whether or not an area abnormal passage has occurred. Here, the area is, for example, a probability variable area that shifts to a high probability state by passing a game ball, a specific area where a big hit occurs by passing a game ball, or the like. The main control CPU72, when the game ball passes through the area even though it is not originally passed When a ball passes through a specific area, etc.), it can be determined that an abnormal area passage has occurred.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the area abnormal passage has occurred (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S1278. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the area abnormal passage has occurred (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S1276.

Step S1276: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for confirming whether or not fraudulent winning has occurred. Here, illegal winning means illegal winning. The main control CPU 72, when a predetermined number or more of game balls have won in the large winning opening except during the operation of the special electric role, has won a predetermined number or more of game balls in the right start winning opening other than the winning action of the normal electric role. In some cases, it can be determined that fraudulent winning has occurred.

As a result, when it is confirmed that illegal winning has occurred (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S1278. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that an illegal winning has occurred (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S1277.

Step S1277: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for confirming whether or not an abnormality related to other games has occurred. Here, other game-related abnormalities mean, for example, vibration errors, large winning hole abnormal discharge errors, large winning hole entrance/exit ball mismatch errors, door opening errors, and the like.

As a result, when it is confirmed that an abnormality related to other games has occurred (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S1278. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that an abnormality related to other games has occurred (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the external information management process (FIG. 64).

Step S1278: The main control CPU 72 executes security signal output processing. Specifically, a process of storing data corresponding to the security signal in the port output request buffer is executed. As a result, a security signal is output to the hole computer.

During setting change or setting confirmation, the security signal is output because it corresponds to "not in playable state" (step S1274; No). When the RAM is cleared, a value corresponding to 128 ms is set in the security signal output timer regardless of whether or not the setting is changed. Therefore, even if the setting change is completed in less than 128 ms, at least 128 ms is ensured for the output time of the security signal. On the other hand, if the setting confirmation is completed in less than 128 ms, the security signal is output for less than 128 ms because the RAM is not cleared. In the present embodiment, a security signal output timer is set at the end of setting confirmation in order to prevent the output time of the security signal from becoming less than 128 ms during setting confirmation.

By executing the processes such as steps S1274 and S1278, the main control CPU72 performs special information transmission processing for transmitting a security signal (special information) to the hall computer (external device) in the setting change state or setting confirmation state. can be executed (special information transmission processing executing means).

By executing the processing of step S1273, step S1278, step S204 of FIG. 24, and step S318 of FIG. Even in this case, it is possible to execute special information continuous transmission processing for continuously transmitting the security signal to the hall computer for at least 128 ms (fixed time) (special information continuous transmission processing executing means).

In addition, by executing the processing such as steps S1273, S1278, step S204 in FIG. 24, and step S318 in FIG. Regardless of whether or not the security signal output timer is completed within the time limit, the security signal output timer (predetermined timer) corresponding to a certain period of time will start counting time, and until the security signal output timer expires, the hall computer will (special information continuation transmission processing executing means).

Furthermore, by executing the processes of steps S1273, S1278, step S122 of FIG. 10, step S204 of FIG. 24, and step S318 of FIG. On the other hand, the security signal can be continuously transmitted for at least 128 ms (special information transmission processing executing means).

Furthermore, by executing the processes of steps S1273, S1278, step S122 of FIG. 10, step S204 of FIG. 24, and step S318 of FIG. setting a security signal output timer at the end of the security signal output timer and transmitting the security signal until the security signal output timer times out), and the setting change state ends in less than 128 ms. Special transmission processing for continuously transmitting the security signal to the hall computer for at least 128 ms even when the security signal is output (a security signal output timer is set at the end of the RAM clear processing, and the security signal output timer times out). after that, when the setting change state ends, the special information continuation transmission process (particularly, the process of setting the security signal output timer in step S318 of FIG. 29) is avoided. (special information continuation transmission processing execution means).
After completing the above processing, the main control CPU 72 returns to the external information management processing (FIG. 64).

FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing a first procedure example of the addition number calculation process. An example procedure will be described below.

Step S602: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of clearing the normal prize ball addition number, the normal out addition number and the total out addition number.
The number of normal prize balls to be added is a variable indicating a value to be added to the number of normal prize balls. The normal out addition number is a variable indicating a value to be added to the normal out number. The total number of outs added is a variable indicating a value to be added to the total number of outs.

Step S604: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether a detection signal has been input from the out switch 99 or not.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the detection signal has been input (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S606. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the detection signal has been input (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S608.

Step S606: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of adding 1 to the total number of out additions. For example, when the value of the total number of out additions is "0", the value of the total number of out additions is "1".

Step S608: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for loading the special game management phase. Incidentally, the value of the special game management phase will be described later.

Step S610: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the jackpot is in progress. Whether or not the game is in the middle of a big hit can be confirmed by the value of the special game management phase (during the big hit: special game management phase=“03H” to “07H”).

As a result, when it is confirmed that the jackpot is in progress (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 24). On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that it is in the midst of a big hit (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S612.

Step S612: The main control CPU72 confirms whether or not it is during time saving. Whether or not the time is being reduced can be confirmed by the time reduction function operation flag.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the time is being shortened (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 24). On the other hand, if it is not possible to confirm that the time is being reduced (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S614.

Step S614: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not an instruction to hit to the right is being given. It is possible to check whether or not the right shot is being instructed by the firing position designation status.

As a result, when it is confirmed that it is instructing to hit to the right (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 24). On the other hand, if it is not possible to confirm that the right-handed stroke is being instructed (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S616.

By executing the process of step S614, the main control CPU 72 can determine whether or not to calculate the base based on the content of the firing position designation status (based on the content determined by the firing position determining means). (base calculation executability determination means).

In addition, by executing the processing of steps S610 to S614, the main control CPU72 should shoot the game ball to the second game area when the big hit game is being executed, when the time is shortened. If it is determined that there is, it can be determined not to calculate the base (base calculation executability determining means).

Furthermore, by executing the processing of steps S610 to S614, the main control CPU72 should shoot the game ball to the first game area when the jackpot game is not being executed, when the time is not shortened, or when the game ball is in the first game area. If it is determined that there is, it can be determined to calculate the base (base calculation executability deciding means).

Step S616: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether a detection signal has been input from the out switch 99 or not.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the detection signal has been input (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S618. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the detection signal has been input (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S620.

Step S618: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of adding 1 to the normal out addition number. For example, when the value of the normal out addition number is "0", the value of the normal out addition number is "1".

Step S620: Does the main control CPU 72 receive a detection signal from each winning slot switch (for example, the middle starting winning slot switch 80, the right starting winning slot switch 82, the first winning slot switch 86, and the second winning slot switch 81)? confirm whether or not

As a result, when it is confirmed that the detection signal has been input (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S622. On the other hand, if it is not possible to confirm that the detection signal has been input (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to timer interrupt processing (FIG. 24).

Step S622: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of adding all the number of prize balls generated by this interruption to the normal prize ball addition number.
For example, the value of the normal out addition number is "0", and in this interruption, the middle start winning opening 26 (middle starting winning opening switch 80: number of prize balls = 4), right start winning opening 28a (right starting winning opening When one game ball enters each of the opening switch 82: the number of prize balls = 1) and the normal winning opening 22 (the first winning opening switch 86: the number of prize balls = 3), the value of the normal out addition number becomes "8 (=4+1+3)". The switch for prize balls and the number of prize balls are determined based on the number of prize balls data stored in the use area. Since the switch for prize balls and the number of prize balls may differ depending on the model, this process is a process dependent on the model.

After completing the above processing, the main control CPU 72 returns to the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 24).

FIG. 67 is a flow chart showing a second procedure example of the addition number calculation process. An example procedure will be described below. Either one of the first procedure example and the second procedure example can be adopted.

Step S630: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether a detection signal has been input from the out switch 99 or not.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the detection signal has been input from the out switch 99 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S631. On the other hand, when it cannot confirm that the detection signal has been input from the out switch 99 (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S632.

Step S631: When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the detection signal has been input from the out switch 99, it sets the number of shot balls B (total out addition number) to "1".

Step S632: If the main control CPU 72 cannot confirm that the detection signal has been input from the out switch 99, it sets the number of shot balls B (total out addition number) to "0".

Step S633: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether the game state is a specific game state. The reason for judging whether or not it is a specific game state is that the number A of shot balls and the number of acquired balls, which are the basis of base calculation, are not counted in a specific game state.

Here, the specific game state can include at least one of (1) during a big hit, (2) during a short time, and (3) during an instruction to hit to the right. In addition, the reason for including "(3) right-handed instruction" is that "during a small hit rush state (while adopting simultaneous rotation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the second special symbol" is included in the specific game state). This is because it does not include "during latent probability change (during high probability non-time reduction state)". .

As a result, when it is confirmed that the game state is a specific game state (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S634. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the game state is a specific game state (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S635.

Step S634: The main control CPU 72 sets "0" to the number of shot balls A (normal out addition number) and sets "0" to the number of acquired balls (normal prize ball addition number). After completing this process, the main control CPU 72 returns to the timer interrupt process (FIG. 24).

Step S635: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of copying (substituting) the value of the number of shot balls B (total out addition number) to the number of shot balls A (normal out addition number).

Step S636: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting the total number of winning balls by the game balls that have entered the winning opening to the number of winning balls (normal additional number of winning balls). The switch for prize balls and the number of prize balls are determined based on the number of prize balls data stored in the use area. Since the switch for prize balls and the number of prize balls may differ depending on the model, this process is a process dependent on the model.
Here, regarding the big winning opening, since the number of prize balls during the big win is excluded from the calculation of the base, it is not necessary to calculate the number of prize balls, but if you want to include the number of prize balls during the normal small win in the base. can also calculate the number of prize balls for the big winning hole.

The "number of acquired balls", "number of shot balls A", and "number of shot balls B" are all variables stored in the RAM 76 used area.
After completing this process, the main control CPU 72 returns to the timer interrupt process (FIG. 24).

FIG. 68 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game state and the number of shot balls.
When the "game state" is "big hit", "time saving" or "right hitting instruction", the value of the number of shot balls is the value shown below.

When the "out switch is detected", the "number of shot balls A" is "0" and the "number of shot balls B" is "1".
When the "out switch is not detected", the "number of shot balls A" is "0" and the "number of shot balls B" is "0".

When the "game state" is "normal" or "lurking (latency variable state)", the number of shot balls is the value shown below.

When the "out switch is detected", the "number of shot balls A" is "1" and the "number of shot balls B" is "1".
When the "out switch is not detected", the "number of shot balls A" is "0" and the "number of shot balls B" is "0".

FIG. 69 is a flowchart of a procedure example of performance display monitor control processing. An example procedure will be described below.

Step S640: The main control CPU 72 executes the process of saving the stack pointer and all registers.

Step S642: The main control CPU 72 executes out-of-area RAM clear check processing. This processing is an out-of-region processing. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the RAM to be used outside the area has been initialized, and if not initialized, executes the initialization process.

Step S643: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the game is ready for play. Specifically, it confirms whether or not the value of the gaming machine status flag is "00H".

As a result, when it is confirmed that the game is possible (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S644. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the game is ready (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S648.

By executing such a process, similar to the process outside the area called during the main loop, when the setting is being changed or the setting is being checked (when the game is not in the playable state), the original process related to the performance display monitor 200 can be performed. You can prevent it from running.

During the setting change or setting confirmation, the game can be stopped. In this case, the original processing related to the performance display monitor 200 is not performed. For this reason, it may be possible to say "Do not call processes outside the area during setting change or setting confirmation", but this is not adopted in this embodiment because the amount of code in the used area increases. In other words, the amount of code in the used area can be reduced by executing the process of determining whether "the setting is being changed or the setting is being checked" outside the area. In this way, the load on the main program can be reduced by not executing processing related to the performance display monitor 200 during setting change or setting confirmation.

By executing such processing, the main control CPU 72 can restrict the execution of at least a part of the other processing while one of the setting-related processing and the base-related processing is being executed. You can (limiting means). In other words, when the main control CPU 72 is changing settings or checking settings, that is, when it is not in a playable state (step S643; No), at least part of the base-related processing (steps S644 and S646) is executed. you can avoid it.

In addition, by executing such processing, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the setting is being changed or the setting is being checked (whether one of the processing is being performed), and the determination result is affirmative. , it is determined to restrict the execution of at least part of the base-related process (the other process), and if the determination result is negative, at least part of the base-related process (the other process) can be executed (limiting means) to decide not to limit the execution of (the judgment process of step S643). That is, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the game is possible (whether or not one process is being executed), and if the determination result is negative, the base related process (the other process) Determination processing for determining that execution of at least a portion of the processing is to be restricted, and determining that execution of at least a portion of the base-related processing (the other processing) is not restricted if the determination result is affirmative (step S643). judgment processing) can be executed (limiting means).

Furthermore, by executing such processing, the main control CPU 72 can execute determination processing (determination processing in step S643) as processing included in the processing outside the area (second processing) (second processing execution means).

Step S644: The main control CPU 72 executes a ball number addition process. This processing is an out-of-region processing. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 calculates the number of shot balls A (normal out addition number), the number of shot balls B (total out addition number) and acquisition A process of adding the number of balls (normal prize ball addition number) to various counters arranged outside the area of the RAM 76 is executed.

Specifically, the main control CPU 72 adds the number of shot balls A (normal out addition number) to the number of normal outs (normal out counter), the total number of outs (total out counter) to the number of shot balls B (total out Addition number), processing of adding the number of acquired balls (normal prize ball addition number) to the normal number of prize balls (normal prize ball number counter), etc. are executed. Details of the processing will be described later.

Step S646: The main control CPU 72 executes performance display monitor display processing. This processing is an out-of-region processing. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 blinks the performance display monitor 200, changes display contents, and sets display data. The display content is changed, for example, by repeating "0.3 seconds on, 0.3 seconds on or off (during flashing)" eight times (when a total of 4.8 seconds has elapsed). The contents to be switched are the "currently measured base" and the "previous 60,000 shots section base".

Then, the start of the division task (division processing) is set at the timing of the eighth "lighting or extinguishing" (when 4.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of display). After that, the division task is executed through the performance display monitor tabulation division process called from the main loop process. The calculation in the division task ends at the timing when the display contents change at the latest (4.8 seconds after the start of the display and 0.3 seconds after the start of the division task).

Also, in this process, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of generating common output data for lighting control of the LEDs included in the performance display monitor 200 based on the base value.

For example, when "the base of the current section is 30%", the main control CPU 72 sets data corresponding to "bL." , 3 buffers to set data corresponding to "30" as common output data (display data).

Step S648: The main control CPU 72 executes processing to restore the stack pointer and all registers.
After completing the above processing, the main control CPU 72 returns to the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 24).

FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of the number-of-balls addition process.
The number-of-balls addition process is outside the area. The number-of-balls addition process is called by the performance display monitor control process called by the timer interrupt process. An example procedure will be described below.

Step S650: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of adding the number of won balls (normal prize ball addition number) to the normal prize ball counter (normal prize ball number). For example, if the value of the normal prize ball counter is "100" and the value of the number of winning balls is "8", the value of the normal prize ball counter is "108".

Step S652: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of adding the number of fired balls A (normal out addition number) to the normal out counter (normal out number). For example, when the value of the normal out counter is "299" and the value of the number of shot balls A is "0", the value of the normal out counter is "299".

Step S654: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of adding the number of shot balls B (total out addition number) to the total out counter (total number of outs). For example, if the value of the total out counter is "299" and the value of the number of shot balls B is "1", the value of the total out counter is "300".

Incidentally, the "normal winning balls counter", "normal out counter" and "total out counter" are variables stored in the RAM outside the area.
In addition, the values of the "normal number of prize balls counter" and "normal out counter" are used for base calculation, and the value of "total out counter" is used to update the tally interval.
After completing the above processing, the main control CPU 72 returns to the performance display monitor control processing (FIG. 69).

FIG. 71 is a flowchart of a procedure example of performance display monitor total division processing.
The performance display monitor aggregate division process is outside the area. The performance display monitor aggregate division process is called from the main loop process.

Step S660: The main control CPU 72 executes the process of saving the stack pointer and all registers.

Step S661: The main control CPU 72 executes out-of-area RAM clear check processing. This processing is an out-of-region processing. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the RAM to be used outside the area has been initialized, and if not initialized, executes the initialization process.

Step S662a: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the game is ready for play. Specifically, it confirms whether or not the value of the gaming machine status flag is "00H".

As a result, when it is confirmed that the game is available (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S663. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the game is ready (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S668.

During setting change or setting confirmation (when the game is not in the playable state), the game can be stopped. In this case, the original processing related to the performance display monitor 200 is not performed. For this reason, it may be possible to say "Do not call processes outside the area during setting change or setting confirmation", but this is not adopted in this embodiment because the amount of code in the used area increases. In other words, the amount of code in the used area can be reduced by executing the process of determining whether "the setting is being changed or the setting is being checked" outside the area. In this way, the load on the main program can be reduced by not executing processing related to the performance display monitor 200 during setting change or setting confirmation.

In the game stop state, the "game stop flag" installed in the so-called type 2 model (game machine with a specific area) is also adopted for the type 1 model, and the game is stopped during setting change and setting confirmation. It can be transitioned by setting the stop flag.

By executing such processing, the main control CPU 72 can restrict the execution of at least a part of the other processing while one of the setting-related processing and the base-related processing is being executed. You can (limiting means). In other words, when the main control CPU 72 is changing settings or checking settings, that is, when it is not in a playable state (step S662a; No), at least part of the base-related processing (steps S663 to S667) is executed. you can avoid it.

In addition, by executing such processing, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the setting is being changed or the setting is being checked (whether one of the processing is being performed), and the determination result is affirmative. , it is determined to restrict the execution of at least part of the base-related process (the other process), and if the determination result is negative, at least part of the base-related process (the other process) can be executed (limiting means) to decide not to limit the execution of (the judgment processing of step S662a). That is, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the game is possible (whether or not one process is being executed), and if the determination result is negative, the base related process (the other process) Determination processing for determining that execution of at least part of the processing is to be restricted, and determining not to restrict execution of at least part of the base-related processing (the other processing) if the determination result is affirmative (step S662a). judgment processing) can be executed (limiting means).

Furthermore, by executing such processing, the main control CPU 72 can execute the judgment processing (judgment processing in step S662a) as processing included in the processing outside the area (second processing) (second processing execution means).

Step S663: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the section is changed (whether or not the section for displaying the base has shifted to a new section), that is, the value of the total number of outs (total out counter) is 60000. is multiplied by n (integer) and 300 is added. Note that n is a value indicating the current section, and 1 is set as an initial value.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the section is changed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S664. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the section is changed (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S666.

Step S664: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of saving the value of the number of normal prize balls (normal number counter of prize balls) and the value of the number of normal outs (normal out counter) in a dedicated buffer.
Also, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of adding 1 to the value n indicating the current section and updating it.

Note that in this process, it is preferable not to save the base value. The reason for this is that when the total number of outs reaches a certain value (60,000) and the base display section is switched, "the number of normal prize balls / the number of normal outs x 100 is rounded off" and the result is saved. However, it would take too much time for the main control CPU 72 to perform this calculation. Therefore, in this process, the optimum calculation method is to execute only the process of saving the number of normal winning balls and the number of normal outs, and then perform the calculation at an appropriate timing. This is a calculation method based on the idea of ``shortening the processing time in the worst case,'' and is an important matter for stabilizing the operation of gaming machines, particularly pachinko machines. However, in this process, the main control CPU72 executes a process of storing the base value (for example, a process of storing the base value calculated in step S667 described later as the base value of the previous section). good too.

Step S665: The main control CPU 72 executes a process of clearing the value of the number of normal prize balls and the value of the number of normal outs.
After completing this process, the main control CPU 72 next executes the process of step S668.

Step S666: The main control CPU 72 executes processing for calculating the start address of the division task. By executing this process, the main control CPU 72 can execute an operation (processing such as division, subtraction, etc.) for calculating the base in the division task by a predetermined amount of processing (for example, 1 bit).

As described above, the main control CPU 72 takes a long time to execute the division process. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the division process is executed several times.
Specifically, by preparing a table that stores the starting address shown below, calculating the starting address of the module to be executed this time, and setting that address in the program counter (PC), the division process can be performed a little. It is executed one by one (in pieces, in pieces).

(1) Standby processing before execution of division (starting address)
(2) Division preparation processing (starting address)
(3) Processing to find the 64th place of the quotient (the leading address of)
(4) Processing to find the 32nd place of the quotient (the leading address of)
(5) Processing to obtain the 16th place of the quotient (the leading address of)
(6) Processing to find the 8th place of the quotient (starting address)
(7) Processing to find the 4th place of the quotient (the leading address of)
(8) Processing to find the 2's digit of the quotient (head address of)
(9) Processing to find the 1's digit of the quotient (starting address)
(10) Rounding processing (starting address)
(11) Standby processing after completion of division (starting address)
For example, the above (1) "standby processing before execution of division" is executed when the next task (next task determination status) is set to "0", and the above (2) "division preparation processing" is executed. ” is executed when “1” is set in the next task. With such a control process, the content of the following division task can be executed step by step. Note that the initial value of the next task is 0.

Step S667: The main control CPU 72 executes (calls) the division task. This processing is an out-of-region processing. There are 11 division tasks (division tasks 0 to 10), and division tasks 0 to 10 are called in order. The content of the division task will be described later.

By executing such processing, the main control CPU 72 executes processing (base-related processing) for calculating the base displayed on the performance display monitor 200 as processing included in the processing outside the area (second processing). (second process executing means). Note that the base-related processing includes at least one of the processing required to calculate the base and the processing required to display the base.

Step S668: The main control CPU 72 executes processing to restore the stack pointer and all registers.
After completing the above processing, the main control CPU 72 returns to the main loop processing (FIG. 18).

FIG. 72 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure for processing division task 1 .
FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing an example of a procedure for processing division tasks 2-8.
FIG. 74 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the division task 9 processing.
Division tasks are numbered from 0 to 10, and the value of the next task is referenced in the process of calculating the start address of the division task (S666), and the start address of the division task to be actually executed is specified. An example procedure will be described below.

Here, the content of the division task processing described below is described using an example in which the calculation for calculating the base is performed bit by bit with one call, but the calculation for calculating the base is completed with one call. You may let

Also, after the base calculation is completed, it may be monitored whether the values in the RAM outside the area are abnormal. Note that the start of the division task (the start of the base calculation) may be set in the performance display monitor display process.

If the next task is set to "0", division task 0 is executed. Although the contents of the division task 0 are not particularly shown, standby processing is executed before execution of the division. In the final processing of division task 0, "1" is set to the next task.

If the next task is set to "1", division task 1 shown in FIG. 72 is executed.
The flow of processing of the division task 1 will be described below.

Step S730: The main control CPU 72 initializes the integer (variable) to "128 (2×64)" and executes the process of saving "128" in the integer buffer.

Step S732: The main control CPU 72 loads the value of the number of normal outs, multiplies the loaded value of the number of normal outs by the integer "128", and saves the multiplied value in the divisor buffer as the divisor.

Step S734: The main control CPU72 loads the value of the number of normal prize balls, multiplies the loaded value of the number of normal prize balls by "2" and "100", and saves the multiplied value as the dividend in the dividend buffer. to run.

Step S736: The main control CPU 72 executes processing to initialize the quotient to "0" and save "0" in the quotient buffer.

Step S738: The main control CPU72 sets "2" to the next task.

After completing the above processing, the main control CPU 72 returns to the performance display monitor tabulation division processing (FIG. 71).

When "2" to "8" are set for the next task, division tasks 2 to 8 shown in FIG. 73 are executed.
The processing flow of division tasks 2 to 8 will be described below.

Step S740: The main control CPU 72 checks whether the dividend saved in the dividend buffer is greater than or equal to the divisor saved in the divisor buffer.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the dividend saved in the dividend buffer is greater than or equal to the divisor saved in the divisor buffer (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S742. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the dividend saved in the dividend buffer is greater than or equal to the divisor saved in the divisor buffer (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S746.

Step S742: The main control CPU 72 subtracts the divisor saved in the divisor buffer from the dividend saved in the dividend buffer, and saves the result of subtraction as a new dividend in the dividend buffer.

Step S744: The main control CPU 72 adds the integer stored in the integer buffer to the quotient saved in the quotient buffer, and saves the addition result as a new quotient in the quotient buffer.

Step S746: The main control CPU 72 divides the divisor saved in the divisor buffer by "2" (shifts it one bit to the right) and saves the division result as a new divisor in the divisor buffer.

Step S748: The main control CPU 72 divides the integer saved in the integer buffer by "2" (shifts it one bit to the right) and saves the division result as a new integer in the integer buffer.

Step S750: The main control CPU 72 sets a value obtained by adding 1 to the current task (value of the current next task) as the next task.

After completing the above processing, the main control CPU 72 returns to the performance display monitor tabulation division processing (FIG. 71).

When the next task is set to "9", division task 9 shown in FIG. 74 is executed.
The flow of processing of the division task 9 will be described below.

Step S752: The main control CPU 72 executes processing to confirm whether the value of the least significant bit of the quotient saved in the quotient buffer is "1".

As a result, when it is confirmed that the value of the least significant bit of the quotient saved in the quotient buffer is "1" (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S754. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the value of the least significant bit of the quotient saved in the quotient buffer is "1" (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S756.

Step S754: The main control CPU 72 divides the quotient stored in the quotient buffer by "2" (shifts it by 1 bit to the right), adds "1" to the division result, and executes the process of storing it in the base buffer. .

Step S756: The main control CPU 72 divides the quotient stored in the quotient buffer by "2" (shifts it one bit to the right) and stores the division result in the base buffer.

Step S758: The main control CPU 72 sets "10 (a value corresponding to standby processing)" to the next task.

After completing the above processing, the main control CPU 72 returns to the performance display monitor tabulation division processing (FIG. 71).

If the next task is set to "10", division task 10 is executed. Although the contents of the division task 10 are not particularly illustrated, standby processing is executed after execution of the division. In the final processing of the division task 10, the next task is set to "0".

Next, the display mode of the performance display monitor 200 and the calculation method of the base (base ratio) displayed on the performance display monitor 200 will be described.

FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining the display mode of the performance display monitor 200. As shown in FIG.
The main controller 70 displays the base on the performance display monitor 200 when the game state is the low probability non-time reduction state, the high probability non-time reduction state, and the left-handed instruction. Here, the base is calculated for each preset interval (for example, every 60000 total outs). The base (percentage: %) can be calculated by base = number of normal prize balls / number of normal outs x 100.

As shown in (A) and (B) in FIG. 75, the performance display monitor 200 switches between the base of the current section and the base of the previous section at preset intervals (for example, several seconds). Is displayed.

In performance display monitor 200, 7 segments 201 and 202 display identifiers "bL." Also, on the performance display monitor 200, the base corresponding to the identifier "bL."

For example, if the base of the current section is 30%, when displaying the base of the current section, as shown in FIG. and "30" is displayed in the 7 segments 203,204. Further, if the base of the previous section is 38%, when displaying the base of the previous section, as shown in FIG. 75(B), "b6." and "38" is displayed in the 7 segments 203,204.

FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining the bass section displayed on the performance display monitor 200. FIG.
Here, from the time when the pachinko machine 1 is manufactured until it is installed in a hall (game hall) and a game is played by a player, an inspection at the time of manufacturing, a test run (operation check), etc. are performed in the hall. will be Game balls are shot and ejected during such inspections at the time of manufacturing and test runs in halls. It may not be possible to accurately calculate the base while

Therefore, as shown in (A) in FIG. 76, the first section (non-target section) where the total number of out balls detected by the out switch 99 is 0 to 300 (non-target section) is inspected at the time of manufacture, It is regarded as the number of out balls detected before the game is played by the player, such as a trial run in the hall, and is excluded from the objects for calculating the base.

Similarly, the number of payouts in the range of 0 to 300 out-balls is also excluded from the base calculation. In this non-target section, as shown in FIG. 76B, when displaying the base of the current section, the identifier "bL." Lights up. Also, since the previous section does not exist, when displaying the base of the previous section, the identifier "b6."

Then, the number of out pitches from 301 to 60,300 is defined as the first section, and in the first section, the base is calculated as needed (in real time), and when displaying the base of the current section, the identifier "bL." is displayed, and the calculated base value is illuminated. At this time, when the number of out balls is between 301 and 6299 (while the number of out balls in the section is 5999 or less), the identifier "bL." Signals that the sample is low and the base is not stable. After that, when the number of out balls becomes 6300 or more (the number of out balls in the section becomes 6000 or more), the identifier "bL." , signaling that the base is stable.

Also, since the previous interval does not exist in the first interval, when displaying the base of the previous interval, the identifier "b6." indicate.

In addition, in the second section from 60301 to 120300 out pitches, the base is calculated as needed (in real time) as in the first section, and when displaying the base in the current section, the number of out pitches The identifier "bL." In the second interval, when the bass of the previous interval is displayed, the identifier "b6." is illuminated and the final bass of the first interval is illuminated.

In this way, the base calculated in real time for every 60,000 out-balls excluding the first 300 (every n-th interval) is displayed as the base for the current interval, and the n-1th interval Display the final base of as the base of the previous interval.

As a result, the number of out balls and the number of discharged balls before the game is played by the player, such as inspections at the time of manufacture and test runs (operation checks) in the hall, can be excluded from the base calculation target. It can be calculated (displayed) accurately.

When calculating the base, the base may temporarily exceed 100%. For example, when the first ball in the section enters the middle start winning hole 26, the number of out balls is 1, while the number of payouts is the prize ball obtained by entering the middle start winning hole 26. number (eg 4) and the base is 400%. In such a case, since the performance display monitor 200 can only display the base in two-digit numerical information, it is notified that the base exceeds 100% by displaying "99."

FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining a method of computing the base.
Here, a method of calculating the base will be described assuming that the number of normal winning balls is "3456" and the number of normal outs is "10000".

As described above, the base is a value obtained by finally converting the number of discharged balls to the number of out balls in each section into a percentage. When displaying such a percentage, only two digits after the decimal point are required for the division result.

The process of calculating such a percentage value (the process of "percentage conversion") corresponds to multiplying the multiplicand "100". Therefore, it can be represented by a formula such as base=number of normal balls/number of normal outs×100. However, when the number of normal balls ≤ the number of normal outs, if the calculation is performed in the order of this formula, the value below the decimal point is obtained, and for example, the main controller 70 cannot calculate.

Therefore, the calculation order is changed, and calculations are performed in the order of base = number of normal prize balls x 100 / number of normal outs (first, the number of normal prize balls is multiplied by the multiplicand, and then divided by the number of normal outs). By doing so, it is possible to complete the calculation result using only integers without performing calculations after the decimal point.

In addition, in this embodiment, the value after the decimal point when converted into a percentage is rounded off.
However, since the main controller 70 cannot handle numbers after the decimal point and arithmetic is performed in binary numbers, the number of winning balls x the multiplicand "100" and the number of normal outs are first doubled to obtain the base value of 2. Double the value. Then, if the least significant bit (corresponding to the value below the decimal point) of the double value (binary number) of the calculated base is "1" (if the value below the decimal point is 0.5 or more), the calculated base After adding "1" to the doubled value, halve the value (shift 1 bit to the right) to round up the decimal point, and the least significant bit of the value doubled from the obtained base (equivalent to the value after the decimal point) ) is “0” (if the number after the decimal point is less than 0.5), the value after the decimal point is truncated by halving (shifting to the right) the doubled value of the obtained base. This makes it possible to round off values after the decimal point.

Specifically, in the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72), division is replaced with subtraction, and from the dividend "691200" which is 2 x the number of normal prize balls (3456) x 100, the divisor "10000" which is the number of normal outs is multiplied by a predetermined integer "128 (2 × 2 to the 6th power)" obtained by doubling the power of 2, and thereafter the integer is changed from "64 (2 × 2 to the 5th power)" → "32 (2×2 to the 4th power)”→“16 (2×2 to the 3rd power)”→“8 (2×2 to the 2nd power)”→“4 (2×2 to the 1st power)”→“2 (2 x2 to the 0th power)"→"1 (2x2 to the -1 power)" (shifted 1 bit to the right), multiplied by the divisor, and subtracted from the dividend. Here, the reason why the integer to be multiplied by the divisor starts from 2 x 64 is that the base display is in the range of 0 to 99, and when the base is 100% or more, "99.9" is displayed. Therefore, it is not necessary to subtract a numerical value equal to or greater than "2×128 (2 to the 7th power)".

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 77, since the dividend<the divisor in the first calculation, the process proceeds to the next step. In the second calculation, since the dividend≧the divisor, the divisor "64 (2×32)×10000" is subtracted from the dividend "691200" to update the dividend to "51200", and the quotient "0" is changed to "64 ' to update the quotient to '64 (1000000B in binary)'. In the third to fifth calculations, since the dividend<the divisor, the process proceeds to the next step. In the sixth calculation, since the dividend≧the divisor, the divisor "4(2×2)×10000" is subtracted from the dividend "51200" to update the dividend to "11200" and the quotient "64" is changed to "4". In addition, the quotient is updated to "68 (1000100B in binary)". In the 7th calculation, since the dividend<the divisor, the process proceeds to the next step. In the eighth calculation, since the dividend≧the divisor, the divisor "1 (2×0.5)×10000" is subtracted from the dividend "11200" to update the dividend to "1200", and the quotient "68" is changed to "1". ' to update the quotient to '69 (1000101B in binary)'.

After that, in the ninth calculation, the updated quotient "69 (1000101B in binary)" is divided by 2 (shifted one bit to the right) to obtain the final base. At this time, if the quotient is simply divided by 2, the quotient is "34.5". , the quotient "69" is shifted one bit to the right, and then "1" is added to make the quotient "35 (0100011B in binary)".

Such an operation example makes it possible to realize division using only simple operations such as addition, subtraction, and multiplication, and using only integers. Further, since it is sufficient here to repeat the calculation nine times, the calculation process can be performed quickly. In addition, the base can be rounded off to the nearest whole number.

[Setting-related processing basic operation]
78 to 80 are timing charts showing the basic operation of setting-related processing.

FIG. 78 shows an example of a case in which processing related to setting confirmation (setting confirmation mode) is executed.
FIG. 79 shows an example of a case where processing relating to setting change (setting change mode) is executed.
FIG. 80 shows an example when a RAM abnormality occurs.

Also, (A) in each figure indicates the ON or OFF state of the power supply.
(B) in each figure indicates the ON or OFF state of the setting key.
(C) in each drawing indicates the ON or OFF state of the RAM clear switch 304 .
(D) in each figure indicates the ON or OFF state of the setting switch. If the RAM clear switch 304 is also used as the setting change switch, either (C) or (D) in each figure may be omitted, or (C) and each switch may be omitted. (D) in the figure can be combined.

(E) in each figure shows the contents displayed on the performance display monitor 200 .
(F) in each figure indicates the ON or OFF state of external information (for example, a security signal).
(G) in each figure shows the contents displayed on the error display (for example, the liquid crystal display 42).
(H) in each figure indicates a change in the game state.
(I) in each figure indicates the state of the switch.

[Setting confirmation]
(A) in FIG. 78: The power is OFF at time t1 and turned ON at time t3.

(B) in FIG. 78: The setting key is turned ON at time t2, and turned OFF at time t6. The setting key must be OFF from time t6 to time t7, but after time t7, the setting key may be ON or OFF.

(C) in FIG. 78: The RAM clear switch is OFF from time t1 to time t5. After time t5, the RAM clear switch may be either ON or OFF.

(D) in FIG. 78: The setting switch is OFF from time t1 to time t3. After time t3, the setting switch may be either ON or OFF.

(E) in FIG. 78: The performance display monitor 200 is not displayed from time t1 to time t5. The performance display monitor 200 displays the setting values from time t5 to time t7. After time t7, the performance display monitor 200 displays the base.

(F) in FIG. 78: External information is OFF from time t1 to time t3. The external information is ON from time t3 to time t6. After time t6, the external information is OFF. The ON state of the external information may be extended until time t7. The external information should be output for at least a certain period of time (50 ms) or more.

(G) in FIG. 78: The error display is not displayed from time t1 to time t5. From the time t5 to the time t6, the error display is the setting confirmation display. The setting confirmation display is, for example, displaying text information "Setting confirmation in progress" on the liquid crystal display 42 . After time t6, the error display is not displayed. Note that the setting confirmation display may be extended until time t7. The period of external information and error display is the same as the period of completion of setting confirmation, but it is not necessary to match. The setting confirmation end period is the processing time required to shift from the setting confirmation end to the playable state. The shortest time to end setting confirmation can be 0 ms.

(H) in FIG. 78: The game state is power failure from time t1 to time t3. The game state is activated from time t3 to time t4. From time t4 to time t5, the game state is switch confirmation. From time t5 to time t6, the game state is setting confirmation. From time t6 to time t7, the game state is the end of setting confirmation. After time t7, the game state is the game ready state.

(I) in FIG. 78: All switches are disabled from time t1 to time t4. From time t4 to time t7, the state of the switches is invalid except for the switches related to the setting change device. After time t7, all switches are valid.

〔setting change〕
(A) in FIG. 79: The power is turned off at time t1, and turned on at time t3.

(B) in FIG. 79: The setting key is turned ON at time t2, and turned OFF at time t6. The setting key must be OFF from time t6 to time t7, but after time t7, the setting key may be ON or OFF.

(C) in FIG. 79: The RAM clear switch is OFF from time t1 to time t3. The RAM clear switch is ON from time t3 to time t5. After time t5, the RAM clear switch may be either ON or OFF. Note that the RAM clear switch may be turned ON (or depressed) at time t2 in the same manner as the setting key.

(D) in FIG. 79: The setting switch is OFF from time t1 to time t3. The setting switch may be either ON or OFF from time t3 to time t5. Each time the setting switch is pressed from time t5 to time t6, the setting switch is turned ON. After time t6, the setting switch may be either ON or OFF.

(E) in FIG. 79: The performance display monitor 200 is not displayed from time t1 to time t5. The performance display monitor 200 displays the setting values from time t5 to time t7. After time t7, the performance display monitor 200 displays the base.

(F) in FIG. 79: External information is OFF from time t1 to time t3. The external information is ON from time t3 to time t6. The external information is OFF from time t6 to time t8. Note that the ON state of the external information may be extended until time t7. The external information is ON from time t8 to time t9. After time t9, the external information is OFF. The external information should be output for at least a certain period of time (50 ms) or more. The external information (security/initialization) output from time t8 to time t9 may be output for a certain period of time (50 ms) or more, and depending on the output timing of the external information, there is a possibility that the external information is output continuously. .

(G) in FIG. 79: The error display is not displayed from time t1 to time t5. From the time t5 to the time t6, the error display is the setting changing display. The setting changing display is, for example, displaying text information "setting changing" on the liquid crystal display 42 . The error display is not displayed from time t6 to time t7. Note that the display during setting change may be extended until time t7. The error display is the initialization display from time t7 to time t10. The initialization display is, for example, displaying character information "initialization completed" on the liquid crystal display 42 . The error display is hidden after time t10.
The period of external information and error display is the same as the period of setting change end, but it is not necessary to match. The setting change end period is the processing time required to transition from the setting change end to the playable state. The shortest time to end the setting change can be set to 0 ms.

(H) in FIG. 79: The game state is power failure from time t1 to time t3. The game state is activated from time t3 to time t4. From time t4 to time t5, the game state is switch confirmation. The game state is the setting change from time t5 to time t6. From time t6 to time t7, the game state is the end of setting change. After time t7, the game state is the game ready state.

(I) in FIG. 79: All switches are disabled from time t1 to time t4. From time t4 to time t7, the state of the switches is invalid except for the switches related to the setting change device. After time t7, all switches are valid.
Preferably, the RAM clear is performed from time t5 to time t7.

[When RAM is abnormal]
(A) in FIG. 80: The power is turned off at time t1, and turned on at time t3.

(B) in FIG. 80: The setting key is OFF at time t1. After time t1, the setting key may be either ON or OFF.

(C) in FIG. 80: The RAM clear switch is OFF at time t1. After time t1, the RAM clear switch may be either ON or OFF.
As for the setting key and the RAM clear switch, if the conditions for transitioning to setting change are met, the setting change state may be entered.

(D) in FIG. 80: The setting switch is OFF at time t1. After time t1, the setting switch may be either ON or OFF.

(E) in FIG. 80: The performance display monitor 200 is not displayed from time t1 to time t5. After time t5, the performance display monitor 200 displays the content corresponding to the error.

(F) in FIG. 80: External information is OFF from time t1 to time t5. The external information is ON after time t5.

(G) in FIG. 80: The error display is not displayed from time t1 to time t5. After the time t5, the error display is the game stop display. The game stop display is to display, for example, character information such as "Error Occurred" or "Game Stop" on the liquid crystal display 42. FIG.

(H) in FIG. 80: The game state is power failure from time t1 to time t3. The game state is activated from time t3 to time t4. From time t4 to time t5, the game state is switch confirmation. After time t5, the game state is game stop.

(I) in FIG. 80: All switches are disabled from time t1 to time t4. From time t4 to time t7, the state of the switches is invalid except for the switches related to the setting change device. After time t5, all switches are disabled.

In addition to the basic configuration of the above timing chart, the following modifications are also possible.
(1) As a condition for transitioning to the setting change state (setting change mode) or the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode), the condition that "the inner frame is open" is also set. The setting change state or setting confirmation state ends when the frame is closed for a certain period of time (continued for 100 ms).
(1a) The setting change state or setting confirmation state may be terminated when the setting key OFF state continues for a certain period of time (for example, 100 ms) without considering the state of the inner frame.

(2) When the RAM clear switch is pressed while the setting key is OFF, the setting change state or setting confirmation state is terminated.

(3) Power recovery processing is performed before the start of setting confirmation. If there is an abnormality such as a checksum, the RAM is cleared. Even in this case, the game machine status flag, set value, and outside the area are not cleared.
(3a) When the checksum is abnormal, the game machine status flag, the setting value, and the memory outside the area may be cleared, and the RAM abnormal error state may be established.

(4) When the setting change or setting confirmation condition is satisfied, the gaming machine state flag is set. In this case, the game machine state flag is set in the initial flow (for example, CPU initialization processing), and during execution of the timer interrupt processing after shifting to the main loop, the setting is changed or changed based on the content of the game machine state flag. Execute the setting confirmation process.

(5) When the setting change is completed, jump to the beginning of the program (for example, CPU initialization processing), generate a checksum error, and clear the RAM other than the set values.

(6) Immediately after the setting change process is completed, the game becomes ready to play. In other words, it is not a condition that the RAM is cleared again after the setting change process is completed, or that a predetermined period of time elapses before the transition to the playable state.
(6a) For reasons such as the preparation of the production control device, only the elapse of a predetermined time may be the condition.

(7) Set a game stop flag so as not to perform any processing related to the game while the settings are being changed.
(8) Common main loop processing and common timer interrupt processing are used in the playable state, setting change state, and setting confirmation state.

(9) At least one of dynamic port output processing, port input processing, external information management processing, and port output processing should be the timer interrupt common to the playable state, setting change state, and setting confirmation state.

(10) Separate main loop processing and separate timer interrupt processing are used in the playable state, setting change state, and setting confirmation state.
(11) A timer interrupt by the first timer (timer 0) is used in the game ready state, and a timer interrupt by the second timer (timer 1) is used in the setting change state or setting confirmation state. The period of interrupts may be the same or may vary.

(12) The same switch is used as the RAM clear switch and the setting change switch.
(13) The RAM clear switch and the setting change switch are separate (not shared).

The following are variations on security signals.
(14) A security signal is output only during setting change, and is not output during setting confirmation.
(15) Output a security signal during setting change and setting confirmation, and vary the output time. For example, the security signal is output for 30 seconds during setting change, and the security signal is output for 5 seconds during setting confirmation.

(16) Output both the security signal and the out signal during the setting change.
(17) Add a new "setting change signal", and output the newly added "setting change signal" during the setting change.

(18) One of the existing signals (jackpot signal 4, etc.) is used as a setting change signal and is not used for conventional purposes.
(19) Output a "security signal" and a "setting change signal" during the setting change.

(20) A security signal is output each time the setting change switch (RAM clear switch) is pressed during setting change.
(21) When the setting change is completed and the setting is confirmed, the output of the security signal is started. When the setting change is completed and the setting is confirmed, the output of the security signal is terminated.

(22) When the setting change is completed and the setting is confirmed, the setting change signal is pulsed for the set number of times (for example, the number of times the setting change switch is pressed, or the number of times corresponding to the set value after confirmation). Output.
(23) When the setting key is ON in the playable state (when the setting key is turned), a security signal is output.

[Example of processing at power-on]
81 to 83 are diagrams showing an example of processing when power is turned on.

FIG. 81 shows a first processing example when the game was ready to play when the power was cut off last time, and when the power was restored, the RAM was normal (the backup flag was normal).
FIG. 82 shows a second processing example when the previous power-off was during setting confirmation and the RAM was normal when the power was restored.
FIG. 83 shows a third processing example when the RAM is abnormal (the backup flag is abnormal) when the power is restored, regardless of the state of the previous power interruption.

As shown in FIG. 81, when the setting key is ON and the RAM clear switch is ON, (1) the contents of the memory (RAM 76) are cleared except for data related to setting-related processing and performance display monitor-related processing. (2) after the power is turned on, the setting change state is entered; and (3) the performance display monitor 200 displays the set values.

When the setting key is ON and the RAM clear switch is OFF, (4) the contents of the memory are not changed, (5) after the power is turned on, the setting confirmation state is entered, and (6) the performance is displayed. A monitor 200 displays the setting values.

Furthermore, when the setting key is OFF and the RAM clear switch is ON, (7) the contents of the memory are cleared except for the data related to the setting-related processing and the performance display monitor-related processing, and (8) after the power is turned on, (9) the performance display monitor 200 displays the base.

Furthermore, when the setting key is OFF and the RAM clear switch is OFF, (10) the contents of the memory are not changed, (11) after the power is turned on, the state shifts to a playable state, and (12) the performance A display monitor 200 displays the base.

As shown in FIG. 82, when the setting key is ON and the RAM clear switch is ON, (1) the contents of the memory (RAM 76) are cleared except for data related to setting-related processing and performance display monitor-related processing. (2) after the power is turned on, the setting change state is entered; and (3) the performance display monitor 200 displays the set values.

When the setting key is ON and the RAM clear switch is OFF, (4) the contents of the memory are not changed, (5) after the power is turned on, the setting confirmation state is entered, and (6) the performance is displayed. A monitor 200 displays the setting values.

Furthermore, when the setting key is OFF and the RAM clear switch is ON, (7) the contents of the memory are cleared except for the data related to the setting-related processing and the performance display monitor-related processing, and (8) after the power is turned on, (9) the performance display monitor 200 displays the base.

Furthermore, when the setting key is OFF and the RAM clear switch is OFF, (10) the contents of the memory are not changed, (11) after the power is turned on, the state shifts to the setting confirmation state or the game ready state, (12) The performance display monitor 200 displays set values or bases. In addition, when shifting to the setting confirmation state in the above (11), it is preferable to display the set value in the above (12), and when shifting to the playable state in the above (11), the base is preferably displayed.

As shown in FIG. 83, when the setting key is ON and the RAM clear switch is ON, (1) the contents of the memory (RAM 76) are cleared except for the data related to performance display monitor related processing, and (2) ) After the power is turned on, the setting change state is entered, and (3) the performance display monitor 200 displays the setting values. In (1) above, if the RAM has an abnormal value, the data relating to the performance display monitor related process may be cleared.

Also, when the setting key is ON and the RAM clear switch is OFF, (4) the contents of the memory are not changed, (5) the game is stopped after the power is turned on, and (6) the performance is displayed. The monitor 200 displays an error code (for example, display of "E").

Further, when the setting key is OFF and the RAM clear switch is ON, (7) the contents of the memory are not changed, (8) the game is stopped after the power is turned on, and (9) the performance is displayed. Monitor 200 displays an error code.

Furthermore, when the setting key is OFF and the RAM clear switch is OFF, (10) the contents of the memory are not changed, (11) the game is stopped after the power is turned on, and (12) the performance Display monitor 200 displays an error code.

Then, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment can execute the processing described in FIGS. Note that the contents of the processing described in FIGS. 78 to 83 may not be executed depending on the model.

[Firing position management process]
FIG. 84 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of firing position management processing. Each procedure will be described below.

Step S1100: The main control CPU 72 checks whether the value of the normal game management phase is "03H" to "07H".

[Normal game management phase]
The main control CPU 72 normally sets the value of the game management phase (in brackets) according to the progress of the game corresponding to the normal symbol (1) to (8) as follows.
(1) Normal symbol change waiting state: "00H"
(2) Normal symbol fluctuation display state: "01H"
(3) Normal symbol stop symbol display state: "02H"
(4) Variable starting prize device (ordinary electric accessories) release waiting state: "03H"
(5) Variable starting prize device (ordinary electric accessory) open state: "04H"
(7) Variable starting prize device (ordinary electric accessory) closed state: "05H"
(8) Variable starting prize device (ordinary electric accessory) state during operation end time: "06H"
(9) Variable starting prize device (ordinary electric accessory) valid state after closing: "07H"

Here, when the value of the normal game management phase is set or updated, the main control CPU 72 generates a normal game management phase command reflecting the value. The normal game management phase command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the subcommand transmission process.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the value of the normal game management phase is "03H" to "07H" (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S1140. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the value of the normal game management phase is "03H" to "07H" (No), the main control CPU72 executes step S1110.

Step S1110: The main control CPU72 confirms whether the value of the special game management phase is "03H" to "07H".

[Special game management phase]
The main control CPU 72 sets the value of the special game management phase (in square brackets) according to the progress of the game corresponding to the special symbol (1) to (8), for example, as follows.
(1) Special symbol change waiting state: "00H"
(2) Special symbol fluctuation display state: "01H"
(3) Special symbol stop symbol display state: "02H"
(4) Variable winning device (special electric accessory) waiting state: "03H"
(5) Variable winning device (special electric accessory) open state: "04H"
(6) Variable winning device (special electric accessory) closed state: "05H"
(7) Variable winning device (special electric accessory) state during operation end time: "06H"
(8) Valid state after closing variable winning device (special electric accessory): “07H”

Here, when the value of the special game management phase is set or updated, the main control CPU 72 generates a special game management phase command reflecting the value. The special game management phase command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the subcommand transmission process.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the value of the special game management phase is "03H" to "07H", that is, during the big hit game or the small hit game (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S1140. On the other hand, if it is not possible to confirm that the value of the special game management phase is "03H" to "07H" (No), that is, if it is not possible to confirm that it is during the big hit game or the small hit game, the main control CPU72 steps Execute S1120.

Step S1120: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the internal state is the time reduction state. Whether or not it is in the time shortening state can be confirmed by the time shortening function operation flag.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is the time reduction state (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S1140. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is the time reduction state (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S1130.

Step S1130: The main control CPU 72 sets a value (0) corresponding to left-handed hitting to the firing position designation status.

Here, the "firing position designation status" is a variable that holds whether the current game state is a game state corresponding to left-handed hitting or a game state corresponding to right-handed hitting.
Specifically, if the firing position designation status is set to "0", it indicates that the current game state corresponds to left-handed hitting (left-handed state), and the firing position designation status is set to "1". is set, it indicates that the current game state is a game state corresponding to right-handed hitting (right-handed state).

For this reason, the main control CPU 72 can check whether the current game state is a game state corresponding to left-handed hitting or a game state corresponding to right-handed hitting by referring to the value of the firing position designation status. can.
Also, the value of the firing position designation status is stored in the RAM 76, and the value is backed up in the event of a power failure.

Step S1140: The main control CPU 72 sets the value (1) corresponding to right-handed hitting to the firing position designation status.

Step S1150: After setting the firing position designation status in step S1130 or step S1140, the main control CPU 72 next generates a firing position designation command (fire position designation information notification means). Here, the main control CPU 72 generates a command reflecting the value of the firing position designation status as the firing position designation command. Specifically, when the value of the firing position specifying status is a value (0) indicating left-handed hitting, the main control CPU 72 generates a firing position specifying command indicating left-handed hitting. On the other hand, if the value of the firing position designation status is the value (1) indicating right hitting, the main control CPU 72 generates a firing position designation command indicating right hitting. The firing position designation command generated here is output to the effect control device 124 in the subcommand transmission process.

After completing the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 returns to the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 24).

[Game flow in non-time reduction state]
FIG. 85 is a diagram explaining the game flow in the non-time reduction state.

When a game is started with a pachinko machine, the game is started from [F0] non-time reduction state [F1] normal mode. In the "normal mode", the winning probability of the special symbol lottery is "low probability state", and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is "low probability state". In this way, the [F1] normal mode is a "low-probability non-time-reduction state". proceed.

[F0] Non-time reduction state includes [F2] festival mode in addition to [F1] normal mode. [F2] Festival mode is a low-probability or high-probability non-time reduction state.

In [F2] festival mode, when [F3] regulation condition (for example, the condition that the special symbol fluctuates 10 times in the low-probability non-time-reduction state) is satisfied, the mode shifts to [F1] normal mode.

In [F1] normal mode or [F2] festival mode, if [F4] "11 round normal pattern" or "11 round probability variable pattern 11" applies, [F5] 11 round big hit game (challenge bonus) is executed, [F6] Treasure challenge effect is executed, [F7] failure effect is executed, and [F2] shifts to festival mode.

[F6] The treasure challenge effect is a probability variable promotion judge effect that is executed using the 1st to 10th variations after the end of the jackpot game.

In [F1] normal mode or [F2] festival mode, if [F8] corresponds to "11 round probability variable pattern 1 to 10", [F5] 14 round big hit game (challenge bonus) is executed, [F6] treasure challenge [F9] Success effect is executed in the effect, and [F10] Fireworks Rush is performed. [F10] Fireworks Rush is a high-probability time reduction state.

In [F1] normal mode or [F2] festival mode, if [F11] "15 round probability variable pattern 1" is met, [F12] 15 round big hit game (special bonus) is executed, and [F10] fireworks rush as it is Transition. In this case, the [F6] treasure challenge effect is not executed.

In [F1] normal mode or [F2] festival mode, if it corresponds to [F13] "6 round probability variation pattern" or "8 round probability variation pattern", mode transition effect is executed along with 6 round big hit game or 8 round big hit game , then shifts to [F10] Fireworks Rush.

[Game flow in reduced time]
FIG. 86 is a diagram explaining the game flow in the time reduction state.

The [G0] time reduction state is roughly divided into [G1] fireworks rush (high probability time reduction state) and [G2] coast mode (low probability time reduction state).

In [G1] Fireworks Rush or [G2] Coast Mode, if [G3] "15 round probability variable pattern 2 to 7" or "3 round probability variable pattern" is applicable, [G4] battle reach effect executed during variable display [G5] Victory effect is executed, and after [G6] 15-round big win game (fireworks bonus) is completed, [G1] Fireworks Rush is started.

On the other hand, in [G1] Fireworks rush or [G2] Coast mode, if [G7] "5 rounds normal pattern" is applied, [G8] Defeat effect is executed in the battle reach effect executed during [G4] variable display. After [G9] 5-round jackpot game (normal bonus) is completed, the game shifts to [G2] coast mode.

Also, in [G1] fireworks rush or [G2] coast mode, if [G10] "5 round probability variable pattern" is applicable, [G8] defeat effect is executed in battle reach effect executed during [G4] variable display However, [G9] during the execution of the 5-round big win game (normal bonus), [G11] big role promotion effect (reversal effect, resurrection effect, and variable promotion effect are executed), and after the big win game, [G1] Move to fireworks rush.
It should be noted that the game flow described above is an example of a typical game flow, and does not cover all game flows.

[Example of production image]
Next, several examples of effect images actually displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. As described above, when the jackpot internal lottery is performed in the pachinko machine 1, the variation pattern (variation time) is determined under the control of the main control CPU 72, and the variation display by the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed. (symbol display means). However, as described above, since the first special symbol and the second special symbol themselves are lighting/blinking display by the 7-segment LED, they lack visual appeal. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the variable display effects using the effect symbols are performed as described above.

The production pattern includes, for example, left production pattern, middle production pattern, and right production pattern, and these are displayed side by side on the left, middle, and right on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (see FIG. 1). ). Each of the production patterns is designed as a picture card with characters attached thereto, for example, along with the numbers "1" to "9". Here, the left effect pattern, the middle effect pattern, and the right effect pattern all form a pattern row in which numbers "9" to "1" are arranged in descending order. Such a pattern row is variably displayed so as to flow (scroll) in the vertical direction in the left area, the middle area, and the right area on the screen.

FIG. 87 is a series of diagrams showing examples of effect images corresponding to variable display and stop display of special symbols. It should be noted that here, regarding the variation of the special symbols at the time of non-winning (lost), an example of a variable display effect and a stop display effect (result display effect) performed using the effect symbols is shown. This variable display effect is performed during the period from when the special symbol (here, it is the first special symbol, but may be the second special symbol) starts the variable display until the stop display (including the fixed stop) is performed. It corresponds to a series of productions. In addition, the stop display effect is a effect showing that the special symbol is stopped and displayed and the result of the internal lottery at that time as a combination of effect symbols. Here, before describing the specific contents of the control processing, the basic flow of the variable display effect and the stop display effect for each variation adopted in the present embodiment will be described first.

[Before change display]
(A) in FIG. 87: For example, in the state before the first special symbol starts to fluctuate (the state in which the demonstration effect is not in progress), a row of three effect symbols is largely displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. ing. At this time, along with the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the effect symbol is also stopped and displayed.

[Memory number display effect]
In addition, in the pre-variation display area X1 at the bottom of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, markers representing the number of working memories of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (reference signs M1 and M2 are attached in the figure) are displayed. ing. The numbers of these markers M1 and M2 displayed respectively represent the working memory numbers of the first special design and the second special design (the number of displays of the first special design working memory lamps 34a and the second special design working memory lamps 35a). The displayed number increases or decreases in conjunction with the change in the number of working memories during the game.

In order to facilitate visual discrimination, the marker M1 corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed, for example, as a circle (o), and the marker M2 corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed, for example, as a heart. is displayed in the form of In the illustrated example, all four markers M1 are illuminated to indicate that the working memory number of the first special symbol is four, and all the markers M2 are hidden (indicated by broken lines). indicates that the working memory number of the second special symbol is zero.

Further, during the variable display of the performance symbols, for example, a fourth symbol (reference symbols Z1 and Z2 are attached in the figure) is displayed on the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 . The fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are "fourth effect symbols" following the left, middle and right effect symbols, and are variably displayed in synchronism with the variable display of the effect symbols. The fourth patterns Z1 and Z2 are simply colored marks (for example, a figure of "□"), and by changing the display color, for example, a variable display can be expressed. The fourth design Z1 corresponds to the first special design, and the fourth design Z2 corresponds to the second special design.

Further, the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the failure. This is for objectively clarifying that the stop display effect is performed correctly and that the pachinko machine 1 is operating normally. Therefore, if the result of the internal lottery is, for example, "15th round jackpot" instead of "lose", the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are stop-displayed in a manner corresponding thereto (for example, red display color, etc.). The fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 may be displayed by LEDs arranged on the board instead of being displayed on the liquid crystal screen.

[Variation display effect start]
(B) in FIG. 87: For example, in synchronism with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the three symbol rows scroll and fluctuate on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 to start the variable display effect (execution of effect means). That is, in synchronism with the start of the variation of the first special symbol, the columns of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol are vertically scrolled (flowed) within the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 42 so as to be variably displayed. The performance begins. Also, the markers M1 and M2 are displayed in the pre-change display area X1 of the belt-like portion in the lower portion of the liquid crystal display 42 before the start of the change, but are displayed in the lower left portion of the liquid crystal display 42 after the start of the change. It moves to the display area X2 during fluctuation by the pedestal image being displayed, and continues to be displayed until the fluctuation of the special pattern (effect pattern) is stopped and displayed (memory display effect during the fluctuation). In addition, in the figure, the variable display of the production pattern is simply indicated by a downward arrow. In addition, during the variable display, individual production patterns are displayed in a transparent state (transparent display), so that the background image (background image) of the production pattern is displayed in a state that is easy to see on the display screen. It is

The background image in this case is, for example, a scene in which a female character dressed in a yukata is sitting on a bench and relaxing as if enjoying the cool evening breeze. Such a background image expresses that the stay mode in presentation is, for example, the "normal mode". In this embodiment, the "normal mode" corresponds to a normal state in which the time reduction function is inactive and the probability variation function is also inactive. In addition, various modes are provided for effects, and background images with different landscapes and scenes are prepared for each mode (state display effect execution means). The difference between these modes corresponds to an internal "time reduction state" or to a "high probability state". Although not particularly illustrated here, after that, for example, an image of a character, an item, or the like may be displayed on the display screen to perform the notice effect.

In addition, during the variable display of the production patterns, the fourth pattern Z1 is displayed in a variable manner on the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the fourth pattern Z1 expresses the variable display by changing the display color.

[Left pattern stop]
(C) in FIG. 87: For example, when a certain amount of time (about half of the fluctuation time) has passed, the left effect pattern stops fluctuating first. In this example, it indicates that the effect symbol representing the number "8" has stopped on the left side of the screen. Note that illustration of the background image is omitted here (same hereafter).

[Example of production when the number of working memories decreases]
Here, as shown in FIG. 87(B), the working memory number of the first special symbol decreases by one with the start of fluctuation, and accordingly the number of displayed markers M1 increases. has been reduced by one. For example, assuming that the number of working memories has been four so far, only one of the earliest (oldest) memory number display in the marker M1 is moved to the changing display area X2, and the effects consumed by the internal lottery are combined. done. As a result, it is possible to teach the player that the number of working memories has been consumed with respect to the first special symbol.

Then, in the example of (C) in FIG. 87, since the marker M1 that was at the top in the order of storage moves to the changing display region X2, the remaining three markers are displayed in the pre-change display region X1. An effect is produced in which the three remaining markers M1 on the screen are shifted one by one in one direction (to the left in this case). As a result, the before-and-after relationship of the change in the number of working memories is accurately expressed on the production, and the player is told that "the working memory is consumed and one is reduced" or "the working memory is consumed and the special symbol is used." is fluctuating" can be intuitively and easily understood.

[Right production pattern stop]
(D) in FIG. 87: Following the left performance design, the right performance design stops changing thereafter. In this example, it indicates that the effect symbol representing the number "3" has stopped at the middle position of the screen. At this point, it has already been determined that the reach state will not occur, so it is almost clear visually that this fluctuation is a non-reach (normal) fluctuation. It should be noted that reach fluctuations due to slip patterns and the like are excluded here. The "sliding pattern" is, for example, once the production pattern representing the number "7" stops, then the pattern row slides by one pattern and the production pattern representing the number "8" stops, thereby developing into a reach. It is to do. Alternatively, after the production pattern representing the number "9" stops, the pattern row slides in the opposite direction by one pattern, and the production pattern representing the number "8" stops, thereby developing into a reach. be. In addition, for example, after a performance pattern representing a completely different number such as "5" temporarily stops, a character appears on the screen and the right performance symbol row is changed again, representing the number "8". There is also a pattern that the production pattern stops and develops into reach.

[Stop display effect]
(E) in FIG. 87: Synchronizing with the stop display of the first special symbol, the last medium effect symbol is stopped. If the result of the internal lottery this time is non-winning and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-winning (losing) mode, the effect symbols are similarly stopped and displayed in a non-winning (losing) mode. will be That is, in the example shown in the drawing, it indicates that the effect symbol representing the number "1" has stopped at the middle position of the screen, and in this case, the effect symbol combination is "8"-"1"-"3". Since it is a deviation, it is expressed in the production that this change corresponds to a normal "loss". At this time, the fourth symbol Z1 is stop-displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the loss.

Further, when the stop display effect is performed, the marker M1 that has been moved to the changing display area X2 and continued to be displayed is also hidden. Therefore, it is possible to intuitively and easily teach the player that "variation of the special symbols has ended".

The above is an example of the variable display effect and the stop display effect (at the time of non-winning) performed using the effect symbol for each variation. Through such an effect, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of anticipation for winning, and to clearly teach the result of the internal lottery in the effect.

In addition, the above example is for the non-winning time, but when the big win (winning) is made, after the ready-to-win performance is executed during the variable display performance, the performance pattern is stop-displayed in the stop display performance in the manner of the big win. At this time, the stop display mode of the production pattern is basically made to correspond to the winning pattern selected internally by the main control CPU 72 (the stop display mode of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35). selected by

[Example of production at the time of a big hit]
FIG. 88 is a continuous diagram showing the flow of the ready-to-win effect executed at the time of a big hit (winning). In the case of a big hit, different effects can be executed according to the winning symbols. Here, in addition to the ready-to-win effect, a variable display effect, a stop display effect, and an advance notice effect are included. In addition, an example of the advance notice effect (before reach generation notice effect, after reach reach generation notice effect) executed during the variable display effect will be described.

In the following ready-to-win effect, for example, after the first special symbol display device 34 performs a variation display according to the variation pattern at the time of the big hit, the first special symbol is a big hit mode (for example, 7 segment LED "self", "yo" , “口”, “巳”, “F”, “E”, “L”, “Γ”, etc.) are executed (ready-to-win effect executing means). In addition, in FIG. 88, each production pattern is shown in a simplified form with only numbers. Also, the markers M1 and M2 and the fourth patterns Z1 and Z2 described above are omitted from the illustration here. The flow of production will be described below. Also, although the following ready-to-win effect is a normal ready-to-win effect, depending on the selected variation pattern, a super ready-to-win effect (not shown) different from the following ready-to-win effect may be executed.

[Variation display effect]
(A) in FIG. 88: For example, substantially synchronizing with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the columns of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol are displayed vertically on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (for example, from the top). The variable display effect is started by scrolling downward.

[Advance notice before the occurrence of reach (1st stage)]
(B) in FIG. 88: Next, at a relatively early stage of the variable display effect, the first-stage ready-to-win advance notice effect using the character pattern image (card) is performed. This advance notice effect before the occurrence of ready-to-win is a notice effect in which changes in mode progress in stages from one step to a plurality of steps (for example, two to five steps) in accordance with a predetermined order. The pattern image used in the advance notice effect before the occurrence of the reach is positioned in front of the effect pattern that is displayed in a variable manner on the screen, for example, it is displayed so as to suddenly appear from the left end of the screen (other appearance modes may be fine.). In addition, the "notice before occurrence of reach" means that the possibility of reach or the possibility of big hit is announced before any of the effect symbols are stopped and displayed. By executing such a "pre-notice effect before occurrence of ready-to-win", it is possible to obtain the effect of making the player feel a sense of expectation that "the game may develop into a ready-to-win = the possibility of a big win increases".

[Notice production before reaching (second stage)]
(C) in FIG. 88: After the first stage of the advance notice effect before the occurrence of the ready-to-win situation is executed, the change in the form of the notice effect before the occurrence of the ready-to-win situation progresses to the second stage. Here, as the second-stage pre-notice production before the occurrence of reach, a production using a picture image of a character different from the previous one is performed. Specifically, another pattern image additionally appears from the right end of the screen, and is displayed overlapping the front of the previously displayed pattern image. Moreover, the pattern image displayed at this time is larger in size than the pattern image previously displayed. In addition, the character represented by the pattern image utters a line (for example, "I'm going to be a reach", etc.).

The advance notice effect before the occurrence of reach (second stage) using such a second pattern image is a step further from the notice effect before occurrence of reach (first stage) performed in (B) of FIG. It is an advanced type. The aspect of the "pre-notice effect before the occurrence of reach" that develops in this way is generally referred to as "step-up notice" or the like. Here is an example in which the 2nd stage pattern image appears in the advance notice effect before the occurrence of reach, but in the production mode in which the 3rd, 4th, and 5th stage pattern images appear one after another and are displayed There may be. Further, for example, the size may be increased each time the third, fourth, and fifth stage pattern images appear one after another and are displayed. It should be noted that, even at this stage, the variable display of the production pattern is continued. In any case, it is possible to suggest to the player that there is a high possibility (expectation) of a big win with this change by allowing the change in the state of the advance notice effect before the occurrence of the ready-to-win to proceed to more stages. (For example, progress to level 5 suggests maximum expectations, etc.).

[Stop the left direction pattern]
(D) in FIG. 88: The middle stage of the variable display effect is approaching, and the variable display of the left effect symbol is eventually stopped. At this point, the effect symbol representing the number "5" is stopped on the left side of the screen.

[Occurrence of reach state]
(E) in FIG. 88: Following the left effect symbol, for example, the variable display of the right effect symbol is stopped. At this time point, since the effect symbol representing the number "5" is stopped on the right side of the screen, the ready-to-win state of "5"-"fluctuation"-"5" has occurred. An image that emphasizes one line in the reach state is also displayed on the screen. At the same time, an effect of outputting a voice such as "Reach!" is performed.

After the ready-to-win state occurs, the ready-to-win effect at the time of winning is executed (however, the winning result has not yet been displayed at this time). In the ready-to-win effect, only the effect pattern corresponding to the tened number (here, "5") is displayed on the screen, and the others are not displayed. In addition, at this time, the production patterns may be displayed in a reduced state at the four corners of the screen.

[Notice production after reach occurrence (1st time)]
(F) in FIG. 88: After a while after the reach state has occurred, for example, a group of images representing, for example, a “heart” figure passes diagonally across the screen. . In this case, the images of the "group of hearts" are suddenly displayed on the screen as if they are flowing, thereby enhancing the visual appeal to the player. By executing such a visually lively advance notice effect after occurrence of the advance notice, it is possible to obtain the effect of making the player feel a greater sense of expectation.

[Progress of reach production]
(G) in FIG. 88: Following the advance notice effect after the occurrence of the first reach, for example, images representing the numbers "2" to "6" are displayed in a three-dimensional row on the screen. An effect is performed in which the number images are erased from the screen in the order of '2', '3', '4', and so on from the top (front). Such an effect is also performed for the purpose of suggesting (implicit) or reminding the player that if the number "5" remains without being erased to the end, it is a "jackpot". Also, when the number "4" is erased and "5" remains in front of the screen, it means "big hit", and when the number "5" is also erased, it means "loss". In the case of a miss, for example, the number "6" is displayed on the screen after the number "5" is erased. Therefore, during this period, as the images are erased in order of numbers "2", "3", and "4", the player's sense of tension and expectation increases. When the effect progresses with the number "4" actually erased on the screen and the number "5" remaining on the screen, the possibility of a "big win" increases, and the player's tension is increased. also increases rapidly.

[Notice production after reaching (2nd time)]
(H) in FIG. 88: At the end of the ready-to-win production, a character image is suddenly displayed on the screen in such a way that it cuts into the close-up, and the character utters some kind of dialogue (or silently). After the occurrence of the reach (the content of smiling may be acceptable), the advance notice effect (second time) is performed. At this point, for example, the content of the ready-to-win effect is such that "if the number '5' remains without being erased, the possibility of a '5'-'5'-'5' big hit increases". Therefore, by making a large image of the character appear at this timing, it is possible to obtain the effect of giving the player a sense of anticipation that "it might be a big hit."

As a reach effect different from the above, for example, there is also a development that ``if the numbers ``2'' to ``4'' are erased and the number ``5'' remains without being erased at the end, it will be a big hit''. When the image of the character appears at such timing, it is possible to obtain the effect of giving the player a sense of anticipation that "the big win may finally be coming".

[Mid-stage design stop]
(I) in FIG. 88: The last medium effect symbol is stopped. In this example, an effect symbol representing "5" is stopped and displayed in the center of the screen.

(J) in FIG. 88: And, for example, substantially synchronizing with the stop display of the first special symbol, the stop display effect as the effect symbol is also stopped and displayed. The stop display effect of the production pattern is performed, for example, in a state where the left, middle and right production patterns are restored to their initial sizes. By performing such a stop display effect, it is possible to teach the player that the final winning type has been determined on the effect.

If the result of the internal lottery is non-winning, the first special pattern to be varied this time is stop-displayed as a losing pattern, so that the performance pattern is similarly stop-displayed in a losing mode. In this case, by displaying numbers ``4'' and ``6'' other than ``5'' in the center of the screen, an effect is performed to notify that unfortunately this variation did not result in a big hit. In addition, such an effect is executed as a "missing reach effect".

[Challenge bonus production (during major role)]
FIG. 89 is a diagram showing an example of a challenge bonus effect.
The challenge bonus effect is executed during the jackpot game in the case of "11 round probability variable symbols 1 to 11" or "11 round normal symbols".

[1 round]
(A) in FIG. 89: When the first round of the jackpot game is started, the effect during the jackpot is executed with contents corresponding to the progress of the game, "during jackpot". In the production during the big role, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of "ROUND 1" is displayed on the screen. Also, at the lower right corner position of the screen, a performance symbol (here, the number "1") corresponding to the winning symbol of this time is displayed. In this way, by continuing to display winning symbols (so-called ``remaining eyes'') even during the big winning game, it is possible to continuously inform the player of the information that ``you won with one performance symbol''. In the lower area of the display screen, the characters "Challenge Bonus" are displayed, and images of horse characters are displayed around the screen.

In addition, during the jackpot game (during the special game), the character information "Right shot" is displayed, and an arrow symbol pointing to the right side in the game area 8a is displayed (shooting position designation effect).

[5 rounds]
(B) in FIG. 89: After that, the jackpot game progresses smoothly, and when the game shifts to the 5th round, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of "ROUND 5" is displayed on the screen, and is displayed. Although the actual jackpot game continues up to 11 rounds, the big winning opening is opened for a short time (for example, opened for 0.1 seconds) in each round after the 6th round. Therefore, this fifth round is the substantial final round.

[At the end of the big role]
(C) in FIG. 89: At the timing when the jackpot game ends, a big win ending effect for transmitting the effect contents to be executed after this is executed. In this example, the text information "Treasure Challenge Rush!" is displayed on the screen.

[Production example of treasure challenge production]
FIG. 90 is a continuous diagram partially showing an example of the treasure challenge presentation.
The treasure challenge production is a probability promotion judge production that is executed using the 1st to 10th fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game when it corresponds to "11 round probability variation patterns 1 to 11" or "11 round normal patterns". be. In the treasure challenge production, a horse character searches for treasure, and if the treasure is found, a fireworks rush begins. The flow of production will be explained step by step below.

In FIG. 90 (A): After the jackpot game in the case of "11 round probability variable symbols 1 to 11" or "11 round normal symbols" is completed, the first variable display is performed, resulting in a "treasure challenge effect". is started. The effect pattern is reduced at the upper left corner position of the screen, and the variable display effect is executed ("fluctuation" - "fluctuation" - "fluctuation"). In the upper right corner of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, the fourth pattern Z1 is variably displayed.

[Game explanation production]
When the treasure challenge effect is started, first, the game explanation effect is executed. In the illustrated example, a hermit character is displayed on the left side of the screen, and an effect is being executed in which the hermit character utters the line, "If you can find the treasure, the fireworks rush!"

In addition, during the treasure challenge (during time reduction and probability change), the character information "Right shot" is displayed, and an arrow symbol pointing to the right side in the game area 8a is displayed (shooting position designation effect). In addition, if the treasure challenge is successful, the firing position specification effect will continue to be executed as it is because the right-handed state will continue (see (C) and (E) in the figure), but if the treasure challenge fails. In this case, the game ends (see (F) in the figure) because it is left-handed.

[When winning 11 rounds of random patterns]
(B) in FIG. 90: If the previous big hit corresponds to "11 round probability variation pattern 1", the number of special variations is one, so the success effect is executed in the first treasure challenge effect. Specifically, an effect is executed in which a horse character finds a treasure. Then, the word "success" is displayed on the upper part of the screen, and an effect is executed in which the character of the hermit utters the line "well done!".

[When fluctuation ends]
(C) in FIG. 90: Due to the end of the first variation (when not winning) after the end of the jackpot game, all the effect symbols are stopped and displayed (“1”-“2”-“3”). . Also, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a non-win mode (for example, white display color).

Also, at this timing, an effect is executed to teach the player the internal state to which the game will be shifted after this. In the illustrated example, the text information "Fireworks rush rush!" is displayed on the screen. By executing such an effect, it is possible to teach the player to shift to the "high probability time reduction state" fireworks rush.

[11 round random pattern 2 to 11 or 11 round normal pattern winning]
(D) in FIG. 90: On the other hand, in the case of winning in either “11 round probability variable symbols 2 to 11” or “11 round normal symbols”, a failure effect is executed in the first treasure challenge effect. Then, the word "failure" is displayed on the upper part of the screen, and an effect is executed in which the character of the hermit utters the words "sorry".

[When fluctuation ends]
(E) in FIG. 90: Due to the end of the first variation (at the time of non-winning) after the end of the jackpot game, all the effect symbols are stopped and displayed (“4”-“5”-“6”). . Also, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a non-win mode (for example, white display color).

Also, at this timing, an effect is executed to teach the player that the treasure challenge effect will continue. In the illustrated example, text information "Treasure challenge continues!" is displayed on the screen. And if it corresponds to "11 round probability variable pattern 2 to 10", the treasure challenge effect will continue until the special change set for each winning pattern ends, and finally, in the treasure challenge effect A successful performance is executed.

[When fluctuation ends]
(F) in FIG. 90: On the other hand, if it corresponds to "11 round normal pattern" or "11 round probability variable pattern 11", the failure effect is executed even at the 10th change (when not winning) after the end of the big hit game. be done. Also, at this timing, an effect is executed to teach the player the internal state to which the game will be shifted after this. In the illustrated example, the screen displays the character information "Festival mode entry!". By executing such an effect, it is possible to instruct the player to shift to the festival mode of the "low-probability or high-probability non-time reduction state". In addition, when it corresponds to "11 round probability variable pattern 11" in the high probability non-time reduction state, the number of times of time reduction is set to 10000 times. be able to.

[Example of fireworks rush production]
FIG. 91 is a continuous diagram showing an example of a fireworks rush effect.
Fireworks Rush is a high-probability time shortening state, and continues until special symbols change 10,000 times unless a winning result is obtained after a big win game. The flow of production will be explained step by step below.

In FIG. 91, (A): The variable display of the performance symbols is performed in the state of "Fireworks Rush". The background image of the fireworks rush is a background image expressing "a scene of fireworks being launched into the night sky" in order to deeply impress the player with the motif of fireworks. In the upper right portion of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, the fourth pattern Z2 is variably displayed.

In addition, during the probability change (during the high probability time reduction state), the character information of "Right shot" is displayed, and an arrow symbol pointing to the right part in the game area 8a is displayed (shooting position designation effect).

(B) in FIG. 91: After the end of the jackpot game, the first variation (at the time of non-winning) is completed, and all the effect symbols are stopped and displayed (“3”-“1”-“7”). ”). Also, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a non-win mode (for example, white display color).

(C) in FIG. 91: When the next variation is started, the second variation display is performed after the end of the big win game. In the high-probability time shortening state, the variable starting prize winning device 28 is operated with high frequency, so as long as the player continues to hit to the right, the variable display of the effect symbols accompanying the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. often

[Fireworks bonus production]
FIG. 92 is a continuous diagram partially showing an example of a fireworks bonus effect.
The fireworks bonus effect is a effect executed during the big hit game in the case of "15 round probability variable pattern 2 to 7" or "3 round probability variable pattern" or the like.

[1 round]
(A) in FIG. 92: When the first round of the jackpot game is started, the effect during the jackpot is executed with contents corresponding to the progress of the game, "during jackpot". In the production during the big role, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of "ROUND 1" is displayed on the screen. Also, the characters "fireworks bonus" are displayed in the upper right area of the display screen, and an image of an animal character straddling a horse is displayed in the center of the screen.

In addition, during the jackpot game (during the special game), the character information "Right shot" is displayed, and an arrow symbol pointing to the right side in the game area 8a is displayed (shooting position designation effect).

[Final round]
(B) in FIG. 92: After that, the jackpot game progresses smoothly and shifts to the final round. For example, when a 15-round jackpot is being executed, character information corresponding to the number of rounds "ROUND 15" is displayed on the screen.

[At the end of the big role]
(C) in FIG. 92: At the timing when the jackpot game ends, a big win ending effect is executed to teach the internal state to be shifted after this. In the illustrated example, the text information "Fireworks rush rush!" is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big win ending effect, it is possible to teach the player to shift to the "high probability time shortening state" firework rush as a privilege after the big win game ends.

[Normal bonus production]
FIG. 93 is a continuous diagram partially showing an example of a normal bonus effect.
The normal bonus effect is a effect that is executed during a big hit game in the case of "5 rounds normal pattern" or "5 rounds probability variable pattern" or the like.

[1 round]
(A) in FIG. 93: When the first round of the jackpot game in the normal bonus effect is started, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of "ROUND 1" is displayed on the screen. Also, the characters "Normal Bonus" are displayed on the upper left of the screen, and an image of a dog character is displayed in the center of the screen.

In addition, during the jackpot game (during the special game), the character information "Right shot" is displayed, and an arrow symbol pointing to the right side in the game area 8a is displayed (shooting position designation effect).

[5 rounds]
(B) in FIG. 93: After that, the jackpot game progresses smoothly, and when the final 5 rounds are played, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of "ROUND 5" is displayed on the screen, and the jackpot game is in progress. A unique effect image is displayed.

[At the end of the big role]
(C) in FIG. 93: At the timing (during the ending time) at which the jackpot game ends when the "five rounds of normal symbols" are met, a big win ending effect is executed which teaches the internal state to be shifted after this. In the illustrated example, the screen displays text information "Starting coast mode!". By executing such a big win end effect, it is possible to teach the player to shift to the coast mode of "low probability time reduction state" as a privilege after the end of the big win game. In addition, when it corresponds to the "5 round probability variation pattern", the promotion promotion effect is executed during the execution of the normal bonus effect, and it shifts to the fireworks rush.

[Example of coastal mode]
FIG. 94 is a continuous diagram showing an example of the coast mode effect.
The coast mode is shifted to after the jackpot game is completed in the case of "5 rounds of normal symbols" in the time shortened state. Coast mode is a "low-probability time reduction state". The flow of production will be explained step by step below.

(A) in FIG. 94: The effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the state of "coast mode". The background image of the coast mode is a background image with a motif of images such as "sand beach", "sea", "mountain", etc., in order to express the impression of healing that is the concept of the coast mode. In the upper right corner of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, the fourth pattern Z2 is variably displayed.

In addition, during the time saving (during the low probability time shortening state), the character information of "Right shot" is displayed, and an arrow symbol pointing to the right part in the game area 8a is displayed (shooting position designation effect).

(B) in FIG. 94: By the end of this variation (when not winning), all the effect symbols are stopped and displayed (“1”-“1”-“5”). Also, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a non-win mode (for example, white display color).

(C) in FIG. 94: Then, the next fluctuation is started. This coast mode ends when the special symbols fluctuate 100 times without obtaining a winning result. When the coast mode ends, it shifts to the normal mode of the low-probability non-time reduction state. In addition, when a winning result is obtained in the coast mode, a ready-to-win effect is executed to give a big hit.

Next, an example of a control method for specifically realizing the above effects will be described. The above-described variable display effect, ready-to-win effect, pre-notice effect before the occurrence of ready-to-win, memory number display effect, and during the important role effect are all controlled through the following control processing.

[Production control processing]
FIG. 95 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of the effect control process executed by the effect control CPU 126. As shown in FIG. This effect control process is executed in the timer interrupt process separately from the reset start process of the effect control device not shown, for example. Effect control CPU126 generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined interrupt cycle (for example, a cycle of several tens of μs to several ms) during the execution of the reset start process of the effect control device, and executes the timer interrupt process.

In the reset start process of the effect control device, the initialization process of the effect control device is executed. The initialization process of the effect control device is executed in a predetermined time (for example, a time of about several seconds), and during the execution of the initialization process, commands from the main control device can be rejected.

Effect control processing includes command reception processing (step S400), operation storage effect management processing (step S401), effect pattern management processing (step S402), firing position designation effect management processing (step S403), and display output processing (step S404). , lamp drive processing (step S406), sound drive processing (step S408), effect random number update processing (step S410), and other processing (step S412). The basic flow of the effect control process will be described below along with each process.

Step S400: In the command reception process, the effect control CPU 126 receives a command for effect transmitted from the main control CPU 72. Also, the effect control CPU 126 analyzes the received commands and stores them in the command buffer area of the RAM 130 by type. In addition, the command for the effect transmitted from the main control CPU 72 includes, for example, a special target determination command, (special symbol) effect command when the number of working memories increases, (special symbol) effect command when the number of working memories decreases, starting mouth Winning sound control command, demonstration effect command, lottery result command, variation pattern command, variation start command, stop pattern command, symbol stop command, state designation command, round number command, error notification command, jackpot end effect command, number cutting Counter value command, fluctuation pattern destination judgment command, stop display time end command, prize ball content command, firing position designation command, normal game management phase command, special game management phase command, power recovery designation command, RAM clear designation command, settings related There is an end designation command and the like.

Step S401: In the operation memory effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls execution of a memory number display effect and a pre-reading notice effect using the markers M1 and M2. The contents of the operation memory effect management process will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

Step S402: In the effect symbol management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the variable display effect and the stop display effect using the effect symbols, control the content of the presentation. In addition, in this processing, the effect control CPU 126 selects effect patterns of various advance notice effects (pre-notice effect before occurrence of reach, notice effect after occurrence of reach, etc.). The contents of the effect symbol management process will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

Step S403: In the firing position designation effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the content of the firing position designation effect (fire position designation effect executing means). Specifically, when the content of the firing position designation command is a value indicating hitting to the right, the effect control CPU 126 executes processing for selecting the firing position designation effect.

Step S404: In the display output process, the effect control CPU 126 supplies the VDP 152 with basic control information of the effect content (for example, the number of working memories of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the working memory effect pattern number, the pre-reading notice production pattern number, variable production pattern number, fluctuation time advance notice production number, background pattern number, etc.). As a result, the VDP 152 controls the display operation of the liquid crystal display 42 based on the content of the instructed effect (effect executing means).

Step S<b>406 : In the lamp driving process, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the driver IC 132 . In response to this, the driver IC 132 drives (turns on or off, blinks, changes luminance gradation, etc.) the various lamps 46 to 52, the board lamp 53, and the like based on the control signal.

Step S408: In the next sound driving process, the effect control CPU 126 instructs the sound IC 134 of the effect contents (for example, during the variable display effect, during the ready-to-win effect, during the mode transition effect, and during the jackpot effect, BGM, audio data, etc.). . As a result, the speakers 54, 55, and 56 output sounds corresponding to the content of the presentation.

Step S410: In effect random number update processing, the effect control CPU 126 updates various effect random numbers in the counter area of the RAM 130. FIG. The effect random number includes, for example, a random number used for advance notice selection, a random number used for a normal background change lottery (effect lottery), and the like.

Step S412: In other processes, for example, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the driving IC of the movable body 40f. The movable body 40f operates using the movable body motor 57 as a drive source, and performs effects in synchronism with the image display by the liquid crystal display 42 or independently.

Through the effect control processing described above, the effect control CPU 126 can comprehensively control the effect contents in the pachinko machine 1 . Next, the contents of the operation storage effect management process executed in the effect control process will be described.

[Working memory presentation management process]
FIG. 96 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of the operation storage effect management process. The contents will be described below according to the procedure example.

Step S700: First, the production control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the production command for increasing the number of working memories is received from the main control CPU 72 . Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the effect command at the time of increasing the number of working memories is saved. When it is confirmed that the production command for increasing the number of working memories is saved (step S700: Yes), the production control CPU 126 executes steps S702 and S703. In addition, when it cannot confirm that the production|presentation command at the time of an increase in working memory number is preserve|saved (step S700: No), production|presentation control CPU126 does not perform step S702 and step S703.

Step S702: The effect control CPU 126 executes the effect selection process when the number of working memories is increased. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect of displaying the markers M1 and M2 corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Step S703: The effect control CPU 126 executes a prefetch effect management process (prefetch effect executing means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes determination processing as to whether or not to execute a look-ahead effect (marker change effect, zone effect, continuous effect, etc.). executes a process to determine the specific contents of

By executing such a process, the effect control CPU 126, when the execution condition of the look-ahead effect is satisfied (when the special effect execution condition is satisfied), is executed across a plurality of special symbol fluctuations. It is possible to execute a prefetch effect (prefetch effect execution means).

Step S704: The production control CPU 126 confirms whether or not it has received a production command from the main control CPU 72 when the number of working memories is reduced. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, and confirms whether or not the effect command is stored when the number of working memories is reduced. When it is confirmed that the production command is saved when the number of working memories is reduced (step S704: Yes), the production control CPU 126 executes step S706. In addition, when it cannot be confirmed that the production command is saved when the number of working memories decreases (step S704: No), the production control CPU 126 does not execute step S706.

Step S706: The effect control CPU 126 executes effect selection processing when the number of working memories is reduced. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 performs the effect of sliding the markers M1 and M2 corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the marker corresponding to the lottery element consumed by the internal lottery is being changed from the pre-variation display area X1. Select an effect to be moved to the display area X2. It should be noted that the memory marker moved to the display area X2 during fluctuation selects an effect to be erased at the end of fluctuation.
After completing the above procedure, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 95).

[Production pattern management process]
FIG. 97 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the effect symbol management process. The production design management process (production execution means) includes execution selection processing (step S500), production design change pre-processing (step S502), production design change processing (step S504), production design stop display processing (step S506) and It is a configuration including a subroutine group of processing when the variable winning device is activated (step S508). The basic flow of the effect symbol management process will be described below along with each process.

Step S500: In the execution selection process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (one of steps S502 to S508). For example, the effect control CPU 126 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the effect symbol management process in the "jump table" as the return address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the variable display effect has not yet started, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol change pre-processing (step S502) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the effect symbol change pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol change process (step S504) as the next jump destination, and if the effect symbol change process has been completed, the next As the jump destination of the production symbol stop display processing (step S506) is selected. In addition, the variable winning device operation time processing (step S508) is performed when the main control CPU 72 selects the variable winning device management processing at the time of the big hit (step S5000 in FIG. 35) or the variable winning device management processing at the time of the small hit (step S5000 in FIG. (step S6000) is selected as the jump destination. In this case, steps S502 to S506 are not executed.

Step S502: In the effect symbol variation pre-processing, the effect control CPU 126 performs the work of adjusting the conditions for starting the variable display effect using the effect symbol. In addition, in this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the contents of the reach effect according to various conditions (lottery result, winning type, variation pattern, etc.), and the effect pattern for the notice effect (pre-occurrence notice pattern, after-reach notice pattern, etc.). In addition, the effect control CPU 126 also controls a demonstration effect when the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S504: In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 126 generates control information to instruct the VDP 152 as necessary. For example, when the performance using the performance switching button 45 is performed during execution of the variable display performance using the performance pattern, the performance control CPU 126 monitors whether the player has operated the performance button, and the performance according to the result. The VDP 152 is instructed with the control information of the content (button effect).

Step S506: In the effect symbol stop display process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the stop display effect using effect symbols and moving images in a mode according to the result of the internal lottery. That is, the effect control CPU 126 instructs the VDP 152 to end the variable display effect and execute the stop display effect. In response to this, the VDP 152 actually terminates the variable display effect that has been executed so far in the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and executes the stop display effect. As a result, the stop display effect is executed substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbols, and the result of the internal lottery can be instructed (disclosure, notification, notification, etc.) to the player (effect execution means ). At the time of the small hit, the stop display effect can be executed in a manner similar to or similar to the loss.

Step S508: In the processing when the variable winning device is activated, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the effect during the small hit or the big hit. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the contents of the effect during the big role according to various conditions (for example, winning type). For example, in the case of a 15-round big hit, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect pattern during the 15-round big role as the effect contents to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, and instructs the VDP 152 to select this. As a result, the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 displays the image of the effect during the important role, and the content of the effect changes as the round progresses.

[Production pattern change pre-processing]
FIG. 98 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the effect symbol variation pre-processing. An example procedure will be described below.

Step S600: The production control CPU 126 confirms whether or not it has received a demonstration production command from the main control CPU 72 . Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not a command for demonstration effect is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the demonstration effect command is saved (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S602.

Step S602: The effect control CPU 126 executes demonstration selection processing. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects a demonstration effect pattern. The demonstration effect pattern defines the contents of the effect indicating that the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state.

After completing the above procedure, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the address at the end of the effect symbol management process. Then, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control processing as it is, and controls the content of the demonstration effect based on the demonstration effect pattern in the following display output process (step S404 in FIG. 95) and lamp drive process (step S406 in FIG. 95). do.

On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the demonstration effect command is not saved in step S600 (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S604.

Step S604: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the change this time is a loss (non-winning). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is stored (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S612. Conversely, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is not stored (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S606. It should be noted that it is also possible to confirm whether or not this time's variation is lost based on a variation pattern command or a stop symbol command in addition to the lottery result command. That is, if the current variation pattern command corresponds to the lost normal variation or the lost reach variation, it can be determined that the current variation is a loss. Alternatively, if the current stop symbol command designates a non-winning symbol, it can be determined that the current variation is a loss.

Step S606: If the lottery result command is other than non-winning (lost) (step S604: No), then the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not this change is a big hit. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of the big hit is saved. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of the big hit is stored (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610. Conversely, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command for the big win is not stored (No), since only the lottery result command for the small win remains, the performance control CPU 126 executes step S608 in this case. It should be noted that it is also possible to confirm whether or not the current variation is a big hit based on the variation pattern command or the stop symbol command. That is, if the current variation pattern command corresponds to the big hit variation, it can be determined that the current variation is the big hit. Also, if the current stop symbol command corresponds to a big win symbol, it can be determined that the current variation is a big win.

Step S608: The production control CPU 126 executes a small hit fluctuation production pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command (for example, “C0H00H” to “D0H7FH”) received from the main control CPU 72 . The production pattern number is prepared in advance corresponding to the variation pattern command, and the production control CPU 126 can refer to a production pattern selection table (not shown) to select the production pattern number corresponding to the variation pattern command at that time. can. Incidentally, the effect pattern number may be prepared in pairs with the variation pattern command, or a plurality of numbers may be prepared for one variation pattern command.

In addition, when the production pattern number is selected, the production control CPU 126 refers to the production table (not shown), and the fluctuation schedule of the production pattern corresponding to the fluctuation production pattern number at that time (variation time, reach type and reach generation timing), stop Decide on the mode of display, etc. It should be noted that all the types of performance symbols determined here correspond to the "combination of symbols at the time of a small win".

The above procedure is for the case of a "minor hit", but if it corresponds to a big hit, the effect control CPU 126 confirms that it is a "big hit" in step S606 (Yes). In this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610.

Step S610: The effect control CPU 126 executes a variation effect pattern selection process at the time of a big hit. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command (for example, “E0H00H” to “F0H7FH”) received from the main control CPU 72 . In the big-hit effect pattern selection process, the process may be branched according to the big-hit stop symbol. The specific contents of the processing will be further described later using another flowchart.

In addition, in the case of non-winning, the following procedure is executed. That is, when the effect control CPU 126 confirms that there is a deviation in step S604 (Yes), it then executes step S612.

Step S612: The effect control CPU 126 executes a variation effect pattern selection process when losing. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at the time of loss based on the variation pattern command (for example, "A0H00H" to "A6H7FH") received from the main control CPU 72. The effect pattern number at the time of losing is classified into "normal loss fluctuation", "short time loss fluctuation", "loss reach fluctuation", etc. Further, a detailed reach fluctuation pattern is specified for "loss reach fluctuation". Incidentally, which effect pattern number the effect control CPU 126 selects is determined by the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control CPU 72 .

When the production pattern number at the time of loss is selected, the production control CPU 126 refers to a production table (not shown) and determines the fluctuation schedule of the production pattern corresponding to the fluctuation production pattern number at that time (variation time, presence or absence of reach occurrence, if reach occurrence determines the reach type and reach occurrence timing), and the mode of stop display (for example, "7"-"2"-"4", etc.). The specific contents of the processing will be further described later using another flowchart.

After executing any one of the above steps S608, S610, and S612, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S614 next.

Step S614: The effect control CPU 126 executes a notice selection process (preview effect executing means). In this processing, the effect control CPU 126 selects by lottery the details of the advance notice effect to be executed during the current variable display effect. The content of the notice effect is determined based on, for example, the result of internal lottery (winning or not winning) and the current internal state (normal state, high probability state, time reduction state). As described above, the advance notice effect notifies the player of the possibility of the ready-to-win state occurring during the variable display effect, or of the possibility of a big win in the end. Therefore, the selection ratio of the announcement effect is set low when the game is not won, but the selection ratio of the announcement effect is set relatively high when the game is won in order to raise the player's expectation.

In this way, the effect control CPU 126, when winning the lottery as to whether or not to execute the notice effect (when the specified effect execution condition is satisfied), wins during the execution of the variable display effect (predetermined effect). A notice effect suggesting that the effect pattern is stop-displayed in a mode (indicating success or failure of a predetermined effect, concerning a predetermined effect) is executed (previous effect executing means).

Further, when the effect control CPU 126 determines to execute the notice effect in this notice selection process, it executes the process of determining at which timing during the variable display the notice effect is to be started. In addition, various notice effects that are executed during the variable display (step-up notice effect, conversation notice effect, cut-in notice effect, group notice effect, character drop effect, next notice effect, title color change effect) ), as well as a pseudo-continuous notice effect, a look-ahead notice effect, a memory marker change notice effect, and the like.

Step S616: The production control CPU 126 executes mode production management processing. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image according to the stay mode. For example, when the stay mode is the "normal mode (low-probability non-reduced time state)", the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image of a female character sitting on a couch. Also, when the stay mode is "fireworks rush (high-probability time reduction state)", the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image with fireworks as a motif. Furthermore, when the stay mode is the "coast mode (low-probability time reduction state)", the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image with a coast motif.

After completing the above procedure, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol management process (end address). As a result, in the subsequent production pattern fluctuation process (step S504 in FIG. 97), the variable display production and the stop display production are executed based on the actually selected fluctuation production pattern (production execution means), various A notice performance is executed based on the notice performance pattern.

[Variation effect pattern selection process at the time of jackpot]
FIG. 99 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the process for selecting a variation effect pattern at the time of a big hit. An example procedure will be described below.

Step S800: The effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and loads the variation pattern command. As a result, it is possible to confirm what kind of jackpot variation pattern this time's variation is.

Step S802: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the loaded variation pattern is a special variation pattern.

As a result, if it is confirmed that the current variation pattern is a special variation pattern (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S804, and if it cannot be confirmed that the current variation pattern is a special variation pattern (No) , the effect control CPU 126 executes step S806.

Step S804: The production control CPU 126 executes special variation pattern per production selection processing. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72 . Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern that results in a big hit in the treasure challenge effect.

Step S806: The effect control CPU 126 executes post-reach hit effect selection processing. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72 . Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern such as a normal ready-to-win effect or a super ready-to-win effect according to the type of variation pattern (long or short time of variation).

Then, after completing the processing of step S804 or step S806, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol change pre-processing (FIG. 98).

[Processing for selecting variation effect pattern when losing]
FIG. 100 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the change effect pattern selection process at the time of losing. An example procedure will be described below.

Step S820: The effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and loads the variation pattern command. This makes it possible to confirm what kind of deviation variation pattern the current variation is.

Step S822: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the loaded variation pattern is a special variation pattern.

As a result, if it is confirmed that this variation pattern is a special variation pattern (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S826, and if it cannot be confirmed that this variation pattern is a special variation pattern (No) , the effect control CPU 126 executes step S824.

Step S824: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the loaded variation pattern is an after-reach variation variation pattern.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the current variation pattern is the after-reach variation pattern (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S828 and cannot confirm that the current variation pattern is the after-reach variation variation pattern. If (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S830.

Step S826: The effect control CPU 126 executes a special variation pattern deviation effect selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes the treasure challenge effect while the special symbols are fluctuating, continues the treasure challenge effect based on the type of the previous winning symbol, shifts to the fireworks rush, or shifts to the festival mode. Select an effect pattern to be transferred.

Step S828: The effect control CPU 126 executes a post-reach loss effect selection process. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes the ready-to-win effect based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72 and selects the effect pattern that results in a loss.

Step S830: The effect control CPU 126 executes non-reach out-of-effect selection processing. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern that results in a deviation without executing the ready-to-win effect, based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72 .

Then, after completing any of the processes of step S826, step S828 or step S830, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol change pre-processing (FIG. 98).

[Mode production management processing]
FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of mode effect management processing. An example procedure will be described below.

Step S850: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether the internal state is the time reduction state (low probability time reduction state or high probability time reduction state). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, confirms the state designation command, and confirms whether or not the internal state is the time reduction state.

As a result, when it cannot be confirmed that the internal state is the time shortening state (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S856. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the internal state is the time shortening state (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S852.

Step S852: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current variation is a variation pattern corresponding to the special variation pattern. This confirmation can be performed by confirming the variation pattern command.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the current variation is a variation pattern corresponding to the special variation pattern (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S858. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the current variation is a variation pattern corresponding to the special variation pattern (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S854.

Step S854: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the previous winning symbol is a "5 round normal symbol". In order to confirm which pattern the previous winning pattern corresponds to and which state the previous internal state was, the information about the winning pattern and the information about the internal state are stored in the RAM 130 at the time of the previous winning. It can be realized by

As a result, when it cannot be confirmed that the previous winning symbol is the "5 round normal symbol" (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S860. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the previous winning symbol is the "5 round normal symbol" (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S862.

Step S856: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image corresponding to the non-time reduction state. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting the background image of the “normal mode” or the background image of the “festival mode”. For example, the effect control CPU 126 basically executes a process of selecting a "normal mode" background image in the low-probability non-time reduction state. In addition, the production control CPU 126 selects the background image of the "festival mode" after the treasure challenge production, and when the special symbol fluctuates a specified number of times (for example, 10 times) in the low probability non-time reduction state, the "normal mode ” is executed to select the background image.

Step S858: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image for the treasure challenge effect.

Step S860: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image for fireworks rush.

Step S862: The effect control CPU 126 executes processing for selecting a background image for the coast mode.

Then, when one of the processes of steps S856 to S862 is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol change pre-processing (FIG. 98).

[Processing when variable winning device is activated]
FIG. 102 is a flow chart showing a configuration example of processing when the variable winning device is activated. The variable winning device activation processing is a subroutine of execution selection processing (step S902), variable winning device activation pre-processing (step S904), variable winning device activation processing (step S906), and variable winning device activation post-processing (step S908). It is a configuration including a (program module) group. Here, first, the basic flow of the process when the variable winning device is activated will be described along with each process.

Step S902: In the execution selection process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (one of steps S904 to S908) from the "jump table". For example, the effect control CPU 126 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the variable winning device operation time process in the stack pointer as the return destination address.

Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the variable winning device activation pre-processing has not yet started, the effect control CPU 126 selects the variable winning device activation pre-processing (step S904) as the next jump destination. Also, if the variable winning device activation pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the variable winning device in-operation processing (step S906) as the next jump destination. Furthermore, if the process during operation of the variable winning device is completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the post-operation processing of the variable winning device (step S908) as the next jump destination.

Step S904: In the variable winning device activation preprocessing, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting the content of the effect to be executed during the big hit game or the small hit game.

For example, when it corresponds to "11 round normal pattern" and "11 round probability variation pattern 1 to 11", the process of selecting the challenge bonus effect is executed.
Moreover, when it corresponds to "15 round probability variation pattern 1", the process of selecting a special bonus effect is executed.
Furthermore, when it corresponds to "6 round probability variable pattern" or "8 round probability variable pattern", the process of selecting the production during the big role (mode transition production) that suddenly shifts to fireworks rush is executed.

On the other hand, if it corresponds to "15 round probability variation pattern 2 to 7" or "3 round probability variation pattern", the process of selecting the fireworks bonus effect is executed. In addition, when it corresponds to the "5 round probability variable pattern", the process of selecting the effect for executing the promotion promotion effect is executed during the execution of the normal bonus effect (5 round big hit effect). Furthermore, when it corresponds to the "5 rounds normal pattern", the process of selecting the effect for executing the normal bonus effect (5 rounds jackpot effect) is executed.

Step S906: In the variable winning device operating process, the effect control CPU 126 generates control information to instruct the VDP 152 as necessary. For example, when an effect using the effect switching button 45 is performed during execution of a big hit effect, the effect control CPU 126 monitors whether the player has operated the effect button, and changes the effect content (button effect) according to the result. Indicate control information to the VDP 152 .

Step S908: In the variable winning device activation post-processing, the effect control CPU 126 executes the effect of transmitting the destination mode to the player during the end time of the variable winning device.

The effect control CPU 126 executes a coast mode entry effect or a firework rush rush effect according to the winning symbols. Specifically, if it corresponds to "11 round normal pattern" and "11 round probability variable pattern 1 to 11" at the time of winning, the process of selecting the effect indicating entering the "treasure challenge" is executed. , "15 rounds probability variation pattern 1", "15 rounds probability variation pattern 2 to 7", "3 rounds probability variation pattern", "5 rounds probability variation pattern" If it corresponds to, the fireworks rush will be shown. is executed, and if it corresponds to the "5 round normal pattern", a process of selecting an effect indicating entering the coast mode is executed.

As described above, according to this embodiment, there are the following effects.
(1) According to the present embodiment, even if the setting confirmation state ends in less than 128 ms, the special information continuous transmission process is executed to continuously transmit the security signal to the hall computer for 128 ms. Even if the setting confirmation state ends immediately, the security signal can be continuously transmitted for 128 ms. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the security signal is transmitted (not output) for a period of time shorter than 128 ms, and as a result, it is possible to perform efficient control processing regarding settings.

(2) According to the present embodiment, regardless of whether the setting confirmation state ended in less than 128 ms, the security signal output timer starts counting time. Processing to determine whether or not is unnecessary, and the amount of program can be reduced compared to a method in which time measurement by a security signal output timer is started only when the setting confirmation state ends in less than 128 ms.

(3) According to the present embodiment, the security signal is transmitted to the hall computer until the security signal output timer expires. 128ms can reliably send security signals to hall computers.

(4) In the present embodiment, when the setting change state ends, the process of setting the security signal output timer is intentionally executed in the same way as when the setting confirmation state ends. This eliminates the need for processing to determine whether the setting change state or the setting confirmation state has ended, and the amount of programming can be reduced.

(5) When checking settings, it is necessary to output a security signal for a certain period of time. The certain period of time is preferably 50 ms or longer, more preferably 128 ms or longer. A security signal is output during setting confirmation, but if the setting confirmation process is completed in the shortest time (immediately completed), the output time of the security signal is less than a certain period of time. If the setting key is turned off during setting confirmation, the setting confirmation ends and the game becomes ready for play. At this time, a security signal output timer corresponding to a certain period of time is set. The security signal continues to be output until the security signal output timer times out. As a result, even if the setting confirmation is completed in the shortest possible time, the output time of the security signal is longer than the fixed time.

The present invention can be modified in various ways without being limited to the above-described embodiment. The mode of presentation given in one embodiment is an example, and is not limited to the mode of presentation described above.

In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to a so-called loop type (a type that does not set a substantial upper limit on the number of probability variations) game machine was described, but the ST type (a substantial upper limit is set on the number of probability variations) The present invention may be applied to a game machine of type).

In the embodiment described above, an example in which the present invention is applied to a gaming machine that does not have a probability changing region has been described, but the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine that has a probability changing region.

In the above-described embodiment, the first process is the timer interrupt process and the second process is the serial communication reception interrupt process, but the first process may not be the interrupt process. For example, the first processing may be main loop processing, and the second processing may be timer interrupt processing or serial communication reception interrupt processing.

In the above-described embodiment, when the interrupt disabling process is executed, the interrupt disabling process is executed before the interrupt disabling process is executed. The interrupt disabling process may be executed without executing the interrupt disabling process.
For example, the interrupt permission process (step S201a) and the interrupt prohibition process (step S163) may not be executed.

In the above-described embodiment, as the special information (special program code/special program data) to be placed in the use area, among the processing for calculating the base, the determination processing for determining whether or not to calculate the base based on the game state, And, although the example of including information on at least one of the confirmation processes for confirming the value of the number of prize balls is included, the special information includes processes other than the determination process and the confirmation process among the processes for calculating the base. may be included, and the special information may include only information about the determination process or only information about the confirmation process.

In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to a gaming machine that does not employ "simultaneous spinning of the first special symbol and the second special symbol" has been described. However, the present invention can be applied. In this case, it is possible to add a small hit rush game property (a game property in which a small win is frequently won in the second special symbol lottery).

When adopting simultaneous spinning, for example, the gaming machine may include at least one of the following configurations.
(1) It is possible for the second special symbol to vary during the period in which the first special symbol varies.
(2) Depending on the game state, the average fluctuation time of the first special symbol or the second special symbol can be set to a long time or a short time.
(3) In the latent probability variable state (high probability non-time shortening state), the average fluctuation time of the second special symbol can be set to a shorter time than during other game states (for example, normal state, low probability non-time shortening state, etc.) Moreover, the probability of winning a small win in the second special pattern lottery is set high (when it is not a big win, the probability of winning a small win is approximately 100% or close to it), and the player wins a prize to a big winning port during a small win game. Therefore, it is possible to set the number of balls to be put out to increase even if the jackpot game is not executed in the latent probability variable state.
(4) In the latent probability variable state, the game proceeds in the right-handed state.

In the above-described embodiment, an example of a game machine provided with a performance display monitor and a setting change device has been described, but in this case, the game machine can be provided with at least one of the following configurations.
(1) When a setting is provided, the setting value can be displayed on the performance display monitor.
(2) A plurality of types of special symbol lottery winning probabilities (for example, jackpot lottery winning probabilities) are stored, and any one of the probabilities can be set by operating a predetermined operating member or the like.
(3) Which probability is set (which setting) can be displayed on the performance display monitor 200 . In this case, for example, after the base value is displayed, the display of the set value is periodically switched to, or a portion that is lit according to the set value (a portion of the LED that is lit according to the set value) is provided, or the set value is displayed. It is possible to display identifying information.

The following modifications are possible for the out switch 99 (out sensor).
(1) The example in which one OUT switch 99 is arranged in the confluence passage (general discharge passage) of the game board unit 8 has been described, but it may be arranged in the general discharge passage on the side of the main body frame instead of the game board unit 8. . In this way, even if the game board unit 8 is replaced, the main body frame may be used as it is (because it may be reused). can lead to reductions.

(2) On the game board unit 8 side, out-switches are provided inside or near each winning opening and each out-switch, and the values detected by each out-switch are summed up to calculate the number of out-balls. good.

(3) On the game board unit 8, out-sensors are provided near the exit of the launch rail and near the entrance to the right-handed area to detect a game ball hit into the game area before winning or going out, and detecting an out-ball. You can ask for a number. In addition, the out switch 99 may be provided in a plural number instead of one, and may be provided like a gate on the game board unit 8 (on the game area).

In the above-described embodiment, whether or not the jackpot game is being executed, whether or not the time is shortened, whether or not the value of the launch position designation status is "1" (whether or not the right-handed ), but whether or not the value of the firing position designation status is "1" (whether or not the right-handed shot is being instructed) Whether or not to calculate the base may be determined by only one item such as .

Also, depending on the game specifications, the combination can be set freely, such as judging any two items or only any one item out of the above three items. For example, in the case of a game specification that does not have a time shortening state or a right hitting state, it is possible to determine only one item "whether or not a jackpot game is being executed". Even if the state is provided, it is possible to determine whether or not to calculate the base only by one item of "whether or not the jackpot game is being executed".

In the above-described embodiment, the value obtained by dividing the number of normal prize balls by the number of normal outs is displayed as a base for displaying on the performance display monitor 200. A value obtained by dividing by the number of outs during a game may be displayed.

In the above-described embodiment, as a calculation method for calculating the base, a value (quotient) that is twice the number of normal outs is obtained, and then the quotient is shifted one bit to the right to calculate the base. You may calculate the base by the method of

In the above-described embodiment, when obtaining the final base, if the least significant bit of the quotient is "1B", the quotient is shifted to the right by 1 bit and then "1" is added to calculate the base. However, if the least significant bit of the quotient is "1B", the base may be calculated by adding "1" to the quotient and then shifting it to the right by one bit.

Main controller 70 may cause performance display monitor 200 to perform a power-on operation when power is turned on.
The operation at power-on is to turn on the four 7-segment LEDs 201 to 204 (dot segments may be included) of the performance display monitor 200 in a predetermined pattern for operation confirmation from power-on to start of base display. This is an operation of lighting (all flashing, all lighting, sequential lighting, etc.) for a predetermined time.

Further, the lighting in such a predetermined pattern may be performed before displaying the set value, or may be performed after displaying the set value, as long as it is before the base is displayed.
If the predetermined pattern of lighting is performed before the set value is displayed, the set value cannot be displayed until the predetermined pattern of lighting is completed. , there is an advantage that the setting value can be confirmed at an early stage.

When the performance display monitor 200 displays the base, an example has been described in which the base of the current section and the base of the previous section are switched and displayed, but the display pattern is not limited to this, and the current More than two section bases, such as the section base, the previous section base, and the section base before the previous section, may be stored and displayed by switching between them.

The images given in other production examples are merely examples, and can be appropriately modified. Also, the structure, board configuration, specific numerical values, etc. of the pachinko machine 1, including those shown in the drawings, are preferred examples, and it goes without saying that these can be modified as appropriate.

The following technical ideas can be extracted from the above-described embodiments.
(1) The first technical concept is a configuration in which one of "normal return", "RAM clear return", "setting confirmation mode", and "setting change mode" is performed by operation.
The game machine has a setting change device and two input devices (switches), and when the power is restored, it shifts to one of four states (normal return, RAM clear return, setting confirmation mode, setting change mode). The four states are determined by combining two input devices (four ON/OFF combinations).

One of the input devices is preferably a setting key switch. A setting switch, a RAM clear switch, other switches, or the like can be applied to the other input device.
When one of the input devices is turned off during setting change, the setting is confirmed. In the conventional technique, the setting is confirmed when the lever is turned ON, and therefore there is no technique in which the setting is confirmed when one of the input devices is turned OFF.
The setting during the setting change may be confirmed by another operation (for example, pressing a confirmation switch provided separately or other processing).

The game machine has a first input device (switch for detecting the operating state of the setting key) that can be turned ON/OFF related to setting changes, and a second input device that can be turned ON/OFF (RAM clear switch pressed state) related to setting changes. and means for setting four states (normal return state, RAM clear return state, setting confirmation mode state, setting change mode state) by combining the first input device and the second input device.

(2) The second technical idea is to display the set values on the performance display monitor within the use area.
The gaming machine includes a performance display monitor capable of displaying a base and a setting change device capable of changing set values, and displays set values on the performance display monitor.
Also, the process of displaying the set values on the performance display monitor is executed outside the area.

(3) The third technical concept is a configuration in which the original processing relating to the performance display monitor is not performed during setting change (setting confirmation).
The gaming machine executes a first process related to the performance display monitor and a second process related to the setting change, and restricts at least part of the execution of one process during execution of the other process.
Further, the process of determining whether or not to restrict is executed outside the area.

(4) The fourth technical idea is reset processing of main command permission.
The game machine prohibits the payout of the payout control device 92 by not receiving commands from the payout control device 92 by not setting the main command permission signal on the side of the main controller 70 while changing the settings or confirming the settings. are doing.

(5) The fifth technical idea is a configuration in which a command indicating that the setting is being changed is transmitted from the main control to the payout control.
The game machine transmits a payout operation stop command from the main control device 70 side to prohibit the payout control device 92 from paying out while the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed.

(6) The sixth technical idea is a configuration in which, when the setting change is completed, the process shifts to saving processing at power failure.
The gaming machine executes a first process unrelated to setting change and a second process related to setting change, and executes at least part of the first process after the second process is completed.
In addition, the game machine includes means for executing a process when power is restored, and means for executing setting-related processing related to setting change or setting confirmation, and after execution of the setting-related process, at least one of the processes when power is restored. run the part.

(7) The seventh technical idea is the configuration regarding the setting key as a switch for shifting to the "setting change state" or the "setting confirmation state".
A game machine can change settings using setting keys, has an insertion portion for inserting a setting key, and has an ON/OFF state for the setting key. The setting can be changed without being removed, and when the setting key is OFF, the setting key cannot be removed from the insertion portion and the setting cannot be changed.
Also, in the game machine, when the setting key is turned off during setting change, the setting is confirmed.

The embodiments described above can be modified as follows.
(1) Setting change/setting confirmation may be terminated when the setting key is turned off.
(2) Regardless of the state of the inner frame, when ending the setting change/setting confirmation, the inner frame closing timer may be abolished so that the processing relating to the inner frame closing timer is not executed. That is, regardless of the state of the inner frame, when the setting key is turned off, the setting change/setting confirmation may be terminated immediately, and the game may be started with the settings displayed on the performance display monitor.

(3) "Changing settings" may be divided into different states such as "Changing settings/before confirmation" and "Changing settings/after confirmation".
(4) At the end of the setting change, the game may be started as it is, instead of transitioning (jumping) to the saving process when the power is turned off.

In the above-described embodiment, the security signal output timer is set at the end of the setting confirmation state, but the security signal output timer may be set at the start of the setting confirmation state. In this case, it is also possible to move the execution place of the timer update process to a place where it is executed even during setting change or setting confirmation.

In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the security signal output timer is set when the setting confirmation state ends has been described. Instead of terminating the confirmation state, the setting confirmation state may be ended at that time or after a certain period of time has elapsed since the setting confirmation state was started (end of the setting confirmation state is delayed).

The external device may be a device other than the hall computer (testing device, effect control device, payout control device, etc.).
The special information may be information other than security signals (test signals, subcommands, etc.).

The pachinko machine 1 described above is a normal game machine, but it is also possible to transform the pachinko machine 1 described above into a management game machine described below. The contents of the managed gaming machine will be explained in Chapters 1 to 9 below.

For Chapters 1 to 9 described below, the content described in each chapter can be used alone, or the content described in each chapter can be used in combination. Also, the contents described in each chapter can be used in combination with a normal gaming machine (unmanaged gaming machine). Note that, in the following chapters, parts having the same function may be described with different reference numerals for each chapter. Moreover, regardless of whether or not they have the same functions as those of the above-described normal game machines, they may be described with the same reference numerals as those of the above-described normal game machines. If the content of one chapter is different from the content of another chapter, the content of either chapter can be adopted, and if the content of each chapter lacks the content of the explanation, the content of another chapter Alternatively, it can be supplemented by the description of the normal gaming machine (unmanaged gaming machine) described above.
Chapters 1 to 9 will be described in order below.

[Chapter 1 Management Machines]
[Overview of the first management game system]
[1. Introduction]
[(1) Purpose of management machine]
The purpose of managed gaming machines is to introduce new pachinko machines to the market at low prices in response to market demands such as anti-fraud measures and environmental problems caused by illegal dumping.

[(2) Outline of management machine]
A managed gaming machine consists of a managed gaming machine frame and a managed gaming machine game board, circulates a certain number of game balls within the machine itself, and directly pays out the game balls used in the game and the game balls to the players. It is a game machine that does not require

An IC card unit dedicated to managed gaming machines (hereinafter referred to as "dedicated unit"), in which a fraud monitoring function for managed gaming machines and a function for displaying game ball information in an easy-to-understand manner for players are added to the functions of conventional IC card units. ) and the management game machine, the game becomes possible.

[2. Overall overview of game machine management system]
[(1) Overall overview of gaming machine management system]
This system is configured as shown in FIG. 103 to achieve the purpose described later.
FIG. 103 is a diagram showing an overall outline of the gaming machine management system.

In the hall 400, a management game machine 500 and a dedicated unit 700 are arranged in the game hall.
A management computer 800 is arranged in the office 410 of the hall 400 .

The management game machine 500 and the dedicated unit 700 are connected by a dedicated cable 600. - 特許庁
The dedicated unit 700 and the management computer 800 are connected by LAN.
Management computer 800 is connected to card company management center 420 .

The game machine general management center 430 has a security management system 440 and a machine history management system 450 .
The game machine general control center 430 includes an association 451 of a plurality of game machine manufacturers, a game machine manufacturer 452, a controlled game machine control CPU supplier 453, a communication control IC supplier 454, a CM substrate supplier 455, and a first association. 456 , second association 457 , and card company management center 420 . The first association 456 and the second association 457 authenticate gaming machines and parts, for example.

Here, the solid line (thick line) in the figure means connection by VPN using a closed network, and the dotted line (thin line) in the figure means connection by the network selected by each company.
A connection is a connection between computers (the same applies hereinafter).

[(2) Management game machine]
(i) It belongs to the same category as the pachinko machine 1 described above, and the player plays a game by hitting a game ball onto the game board of the managed game machine.
(ii) Structurally, the upper and lower trays are eliminated, and the player does not directly touch the game ball.
(iii) A minimum number of game balls required for shooting from the managed game machine are circulated in the managed game machine, and a shooting device, a ball polishing device, and a game ball circulation device are provided in the course of the circulation.
(iv) The shooting device has the shooting performance of current game machines.
(v) In the ball polishing device, polishing cloths for removing dirt from game balls are housed in a cassette and are replaced at regular intervals.
(vi) The number of game balls and the number of acquired game balls are managed and displayed as numerical data by the management game machine.
(vii) At the end of the game, by pressing a counting switch (counting button) provided on the managed gaming machine, the number of game balls managed by the managed gaming machine is transferred to a dedicated unit for management.
(viii) For the main control board and the frame control board of the management game machine, a new CPU is adopted as an anti-fraud measure, and communication between the main boards is encrypted.
(ix) External information terminal boards shall be abolished in managed gaming machines.

[(3) Dedicated unit]
(i) The dedicated unit and the managed gaming machine (particularly, the dedicated unit and the frame control board as an external unit) are connected by a dedicated cable, and the frame control board of the new managed gaming machine frame - the dedicated unit interface (hereinafter referred to as "dedicated interface"). ) is used to encrypt and communicate data related to gaming machines. At least a portion of the dedicated interface, dedicated cable, and associated devices, substrates, circuits, CPUs, software, programs, etc., are communication control means.

(ii) In addition, the dedicated unit is a touch panel type for displaying detailed data related to the game balls managed by the managed gaming machine, information for preventing addiction, calling attention to players, and various information managed by the dedicated unit. Equipped with a liquid crystal display.

(iii) The signal output from the external information terminal board is not output from the management game machine, but is received by the dedicated unit via the dedicated interface and output to the hall's external equipment.

(iv) The dedicated unit is provided with a CM (security) board, which receives security information from the main control CPU and the frame control CPU in the managed gaming machine, and transmits it to the gaming machine general control center.

(v) Receiving gaming machine ball information from the managed gaming machine, performing count management, and monitoring game balls.

[(4) Game Machine General Control Center]
The game machine general management center 430 is composed of a machine history management system 450 and a security management system 440 . The game machine general control center installs business terminals in the association 451, the first association 456 and the second association 457 so that the state of the machines can be constantly monitored.

The machine history management system 450 and the security management system 440 register shipping information in connection with the game machine manufacturing company 452, the controlled game machine control CPU supplier 453, the communication control IC supplier 454, and the CM board supplier 455, respectively. ing.

Installation information and the like of the managed gaming machine 500 and the dedicated unit 700 installed in the hall 400 are transmitted to the gaming machine general management center 430 via the card company management center 420 .
A game machine manufacturing company 452, a controlled game machine control CPU supply company 453, a communication control IC supply company 454, a CM board supply company 455, and a union 451 connected to the game machine general control center 430 use a closed network. are connected via a VPN line.

[(i) Aircraft history management system]
FIG. 104 is a diagram showing a schematic diagram (flow of machine history management) of the gaming machine management system.
Here, solid lines in the figure indicate the flow of goods, and dotted lines in the figure indicate the flow of information and the flow of installation information (*1 in the figure).
The machine history management system 450 has a function of managing shipping information of the gaming machine manufacturing company 452 and installation information of the managed gaming machines 500 installed in the hall, and monitoring shipment, installation, movement and disposal. .
(a) Receive and register the shipping information and disposal information of the managed gaming machine 500 from the gaming machine manufacturing company 452 affiliated with the union 451 .
(b) Receives and registers control CPU information from the control CPU supply company 453 for managed gaming machines.
(c) Installation information of the managed gaming machines 500 and dedicated units 700 installed in the hall is temporarily stored in the security management system 440 via the card company management center 420, and then the authentication result information and installation information are received. and managed and monitored by the business terminal of the association 451.

[(ii) security management system]
FIG. 105 is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of the gaming machine management system (flow of security management).
Here, solid lines in the figure indicate the flow of goods, and dotted lines in the figure indicate the flow of information.
The security management system 440 has a function of performing device authentication of the managed gaming machines 500 and dedicated units 700 installed in the hall, receiving status change information of the managed gaming machines 500, performing security monitoring, and transmitting initial setting values. have.

(a) Generates and distributes a key for encrypting/decrypting communication between the management gaming machine 500, the dedicated unit 700, the management computer 800, the card company management center 420 and the security management system 440 installed in the hall. . This distribution is performed periodically.

(b) Information received by the security management system 440, device authentication results, etc. are shared with the device history management system 450 as necessary.

[(5) Management computer]
(i) The management computer 800 is installed in the hall, and is connected to the dedicated unit 700 in the hall via a LAN through encrypted communication.
(ii) The management computer 800 is connected to the card company management center 420 via a network.
(iii) The encrypted management gaming machine 500 and dedicated unit 700 authentication information is received and sent to the card company management center 420 .

FIG. 106 is a diagram showing an image of connection between a management game machine and a dedicated unit.
The management game machine 500 and the dedicated unit 700 are connected by a dedicated cable 600. - 特許庁
The management game machine 500 includes a handle 510, a game ball count display device 520, a counting switch 530, and other devices 540 for performance.

The dedicated unit 700 includes a banknote slot 711, a card slot 720, a touch panel liquid crystal display 730, and the like.
A touch panel type liquid crystal display 730 can display a ball rental/return display 731, a balance display 732, and the like.

[4. About security]
[(1) Security enhancement items]
107 to 110 are diagrams showing security enhancement items.
The following security measures are implemented for managed gaming machines.

[No. 1]
Goto name: Bringing in balls Goto content: The act of bringing a game ball borrowed at a low fee to a managed gaming machine with a high fee and illegally taking in a prize based on the difference in amount Managed gaming machine: (1) Enclosed type exclusive use Unit: N/A

[No. 2]
Goto Name: Magnet Goto Goto Contents: The act of illegally obtaining balls by manipulating game balls with strong magnets Managed game machines: (1) Use game balls made of austinite steel (special stainless steel) that does not stick to magnets. . (2) Equipped with a function to detect game balls that react to magnets.
Dedicated unit: N/A

[No. 3]
Goto name: Sensor deceiving goto (infrared rays, electromagnetic waves, electromagnetic induction, etc.)
Goto content: Using infrared strobes, radios, etc., to malfunction sensors and illegally obtain balls Controlled gaming machines: (1) Monitoring function that compares the number of winning signals from the sensor and the number of actual balls after passing the sensor to be installed. (2) Equipped with a function of monitoring the difference between the ball shot onto the game board surface of the managed game machine and the ball that has passed through the outlet. (3) Measures against electromagnetic waves are provided with electromagnetic wave detection sensors and protected by iron plates. (4) Defend by using sensors of different principles together. (5) Monitor proximity sensors with a dedicated monitoring IC to prevent replacement of sensors with different characteristics.
Dedicated unit: N/A

[No. 4]
Goto name: Sergoto, piano wire goto Goto content: The act of inserting a cell or piano wire from the gap of the management game machine, opening the big prize opening, electric tulip, etc., and illegally obtaining a ball Management game machine: (1 ) Protect by providing a mouse-back structure at the front decoration, the operation part, and the connection part with the back mechanism part. (2) Provide protection by providing a mouse barb structure between the back mechanism and the outer frame. (3) Defend with a structure that fills the gap between the dedicated unit and the outer frame.
Dedicated unit: N/A

[No. 5]
Goto name: string ball goto, large ball goto, small ball goto Contents: The act of attaching a string to a ball and firing it, and illegally obtaining the ball by manipulating the string. The act of shooting a large ball, jamming the ball, and illegally obtaining the ball. The act of shooting a small ball to increase the winning rate and obtain the ball illegally.
Managed game machines: (1) Elimination of entrances and exits for game balls by adopting an enclosed system Dedicated unit: Not applicable

[No. 6]
Goto name: Impersonation board goto Contents: Act of moving the regular main board for authentication, and controlling the game with another board instead of the main board Management game machine: (1) Main control CPU and frame control Equipped with a check function based on CPU authentication. (2) Equipped with an encrypted communication function.
Dedicated unit: N/A

[No. 7]
Goto name: Communication interface deceiving with dedicated unit Goto content: Act of tampering with the communication signal between the dedicated unit and the managed game machine to illegally take in rental balls Managed game machine: (1) Authentication by adopting a mutual monitoring function Additional functions and encrypted communication functions Dedicated unit: Not applicable

[No. 8]
Goto name: Remote control goto Goto content: It is a cheating performed by the hall, and it is a method of controlling the ball output by looking at the player's complexion. Command signals to the management game machine are connected by remodeling the information terminal board.
Management game machine: (1) Eliminate the wiring connected to the game management machine. (2) Game information is output from the dedicated unit side. A commercial power supply (100V) and a dedicated interface (only a communication line with a dedicated unit) are connected to the management game machine.
Dedicated unit: N/A

[No. 9]
Name of goto: Security for game balls (holding balls) Contents of goto: Securing memory when power is cut off Management machine: (1) Adoption of non-volatile memory for frame control CPU Dedicated unit: None

[No. 10]
Goto name: Goto during power cut Goto content: Act of opening the back mechanism part of the controlled game machine at night, etc., and installing illegal parts Controlled game machine: (1) Memorize and monitor the opening and closing of the controlled game machine while the power is cut off Equipped with functions Dedicated unit: N/A

[No. 11]
Goto name: Alarm by the self-diagnostic function in the managed game machine Goto content: Output of error performed by the current machine, although it varies depending on the content of the game Managed game machine: (1) Output of error information Dedicated unit: Not applicable

[No. 12]
Goto name: Hanging board goto Goto content: The act of hanging a fraudulent board on the main control board or frame control board to control the ball output Management machine: (1) Decryption when hanging between the frame control board and the main control board Equipped with a function to notify an abnormality or recognition abnormality to the dedicated unit authentication section. Dedicated unit: (1) When hanging between the frame control board and the main control board, it detects a decoding abnormality or recognition abnormality, stops communication, and notifies the abnormality. Equipped with a function to

[No. 13]
Goto name: Illegal board, Illegal ROM replacement goto Contents: The act of replacing with a legitimate ROM to illegally control the ball output Managed machine: (1) If the CPU is not a genuine product due to the self-recognition function between CPUs , stop communication, and have a function to notify an abnormality. (2) Equipped with a function to detect an authentication error by the frame control CPU, stop communication, and notify the error when the dedicated unit authentication unit is replaced with an illegal product.
Dedicated unit: (1) The dedicated unit has a function of notifying an abnormality when the CPU is not registered in the game machine general management center (machine history management system) by the dedicated unit authentication section. (2) If the dedicated unit authentication section is replaced with an illegal product, the dedicated unit control section becomes an authentication failure, stops communication, and has a function to notify the abnormality. (3) When an unauthorized unit control unit is connected, the dedicated unit authentication unit detects an authentication error and stops communication. (4) When an unauthorized CPU-equipped management game machine is connected, the dedicated unit authentication section detects an abnormality in CPU authentication, stops communication, and has a function of announcing the abnormality.

[No. 14]
Goto name: Decryption of code Goto content: Act of illegally controlling the ball output by decoding the control board of the managed game machine and the encrypted communication between the managed game machine and the dedicated unit Managed game machine: (1) Analysis time of the encryption key Theoretically, it takes more than millions of years to analyze and falsify the message during the hall's business hours. Dedicated unit: (1) Since it theoretically takes more than It is impossible to analyze and tamper with the message during the business hours of

[No. 15]
Goto name: Illegal tampering with the number of game balls (attacks management game machines)
Goto content: Act of illegally obtaining a ball as a result of the above fraudulent act Management machine: (1) Monitor the card insertion state, and if there is a ball lending (addition request) other than the insertion state, the addition will not be made, Notify anomalies. (2) A non-volatile memory is used to store the number of game balls in multiple areas and check consistency.
Dedicated unit: (1) Dedicated unit constantly monitors the number of game balls held and the number of game balls held by the managed game machine, and if there is a difference in the number of game balls, it notifies a game ball abnormality and stops the machine abnormally. Equipped with a function to (2) After recovery, the dedicated unit is equipped with a function of anomaly reporting and anomalous stop if there is a large difference in the number of game balls from before recovery. (3) A function is provided to inform the center of an abnormality from the dedicated unit authentication unit when the dedicated unit continuously issues a request to the managed gaming machine for ball lending that exceeds a threshold (the number of instructions, the number of rented balls).

[No. 16]
Goto name: Illegal tampering with the number of game balls (attacks dedicated units)
Goto contents: The number of balls sent from the game management machine and the act of falsification on the dedicated unit side Managed machine: Not applicable Dedicated unit: (1) The number of game balls held by the dedicated unit Equipped with a function to constantly monitor the number of game balls held and notify an abnormality in the number of balls held when there is a difference in the number of game balls

[No. 17]
Goto name: Card fraud Content: The act of directly writing the number of balls held on a card fraudulently Controlled game machine: Not applicable Dedicated unit: (1) Defends with an IC that ensures strong security. (2) If fraudulent, refer to the host server and detect anomalies by consistency check.

[No. 18]
Goto name: Dedicated cable illegal Goto content: The act of illegally obtaining balls by attaching an illegal board to the cable connecting the managed game machine and the dedicated unit or to the connector part Managed game machine: N/A Dedicated unit: (1) Dedicated cable If it is hung, the dedicated unit authentication section detects a decoding error, stops communication, and has a function to notify the error. (2) When the dedicated cable is hung, the dedicated unit authentication section detects an authentication failure, stops communication, and has a function to notify the failure.

[(2) Flow of monitoring information]
FIG. 111 is a diagram showing the flow of monitoring information.
The gaming machine general control center 430 and the card company control center 420 are arranged outside the hall.
On the other hand, the management computer 800, dedicated unit control board 710, dedicated unit CM board 720, frame control board 550 (management game machine frame control board) and main control board 560 (management game machine main control board) are arranged in the hall. there is

[Authentication phase]
The authentication phase (authentication processing) is performed between the gaming machine general control center 430 and the dedicated unit CM board 720 .
Also, the authentication phase is performed between the dedicated unit CM board 720 and the frame control board 550 .
In addition, an authentication phase takes place between the frame control board 550 and the main control board 560 .

[Recovery phase]
The recovery phase (repair processing) is executed by the dedicated unit control board 710 sending a recovery request to the frame control board 550 .
The main control board 560 transmits recovery notification to the frame control board 550 .

[Status communication phase]
The state communication phase (processing for notifying the state) is as follows.

(1) Regarding the unit status information, the dedicated unit control board 710 transmits a unit status notification to the frame control board 550 .

(2) Regarding ball rental information, the dedicated unit control board 710 transmits the number of rental balls to the dedicated unit CM board 720, and the dedicated unit CM board 720 notifies the frame control board 550 of the number of rental balls. Send.

(3) As for the counting information, the frame control board 550 transmits counted ball number notification to the dedicated unit CM board 720 , and the dedicated unit CM board 720 transmits the counted ball number to the dedicated unit control board 710 .

(4) Regarding the number of game balls, the frame control board 550 transmits the number of game balls to the dedicated unit CM board 720, and the dedicated unit CM board 720 transmits the number of game balls to the dedicated unit control board 710. .

(5) Regarding information on the number of shot balls, the frame control board 550 transmits notification of the number of shot balls to the dedicated unit CM board 720, and the dedicated unit CM board 720 transmits the number of shot balls to the dedicated unit control board 710. do.

(6) Regarding the number of balls passing through the out port, the frame control board 550 transmits notification of the number of balls passing through the out port to the dedicated unit CM board 720 , and the dedicated unit CM board 720 sends out to the dedicated unit control board 710 . Transmit the number of balls passed through the mouth.

(7) Regarding information on the number of winning balls, the main control board 560 transmits notification of the number of winning balls to the frame control board 550, the frame control board 550 transmits the number of winning balls to the dedicated unit CM board 720, The dedicated unit CM board 720 transmits the number of winning balls to the dedicated unit control board 710 .

(8) Regarding the firing intensity information, the frame control board 550 transmits the firing intensity notification to the dedicated unit CM board 720, and the dedicated unit CM board 720 transmits the firing intensity to the dedicated unit control board 710.

(9) Regarding the frame state information, the frame control board 550 transmits a frame state notification to the dedicated unit CM board 720, and the dedicated unit CM board 720 transmits the frame state to the dedicated unit control board 710.

(10) As for the outer end information, the main control board 560 transmits the outer end information to the dedicated unit control board 710 , and the dedicated unit control board 710 transmits the outer end information to the card company management center 420 .

(11) Regarding error information, the main control board 560 transmits a game board error notification to the frame control board 550, and the frame control board 550 transmits a frame error and game board error notification to the dedicated unit CM board 720. Then, the dedicated unit CM board 720 transmits a frame error and a game board error to the dedicated unit control board 710 , and the dedicated unit control board 710 transmits error information to the gaming machine general control center 430 .

(12) Regarding fraud detection information, the main control board 560 transmits fraud detection information notification to the frame control board 550, the frame control board 550 transmits fraud detection information to the dedicated unit CM board 720, and the dedicated The unit CM board 720 transmits fraud detection information to the dedicated unit control board 710, the dedicated unit control board 710 transmits fraud detection information to the management computer 800, and the management computer 800 sends information to the game machine general control center 430. to send fraud detection information.

(13) As for the card insertion information, the dedicated unit control board 710 transmits a card insertion notification to the frame control board 550 .

(14) Regarding the card return information, the dedicated unit control board 710 transmits a card return notification to the frame control board 550, and the frame control board 550 transmits a card forget notification request to the main control board 560. .

[Basic configuration of the second management game machine]
[1. About management game machine]
[(1) Overview of management machines]
A managed gaming machine consists of a managed gaming machine frame and a managed gaming machine game board, circulates a certain number of game balls within the machine itself, and directly pays out the game balls used in the game and the game balls to the players. It is a game machine that does not require
An IC card unit dedicated to managed gaming machines (hereinafter referred to as "dedicated unit"), in which a fraud monitoring function for managed gaming machines and a function for displaying game ball information in an easy-to-understand manner for players are added to the functions of conventional IC card units. ) and the management game machine, the game becomes possible.

[(2) Examples of managed game machine models]
A management game machine model example is realized by connecting a management game machine 500 and a dedicated unit 700 (see FIG. 106).

[(3) Characteristics of management machines]
(i) Equipped with a function to circulate game balls in the management game machine.
(ii) There is no upper tray and lower tray of conventional game machines.
(iii) It has advanced security functions.
(iv) Use non-magnetic game balls.
(v) Equipped with a function for automatically polishing game balls.
(vi) A lock mechanism is mounted on the handle.
(vii) It is equipped with a power saving monitoring/notification function based on the presence or absence of a player.
(viii) The management game machine is not equipped with an external information terminal board, and the information output destination to the outside is only the dedicated unit.
(ix) A commercial power supply (100 V) is used as the power supply for the managed gaming machine.
(x) The managed gaming machine is connected to the dedicated unit with a dedicated cable.
(xi) Possessed balls during a game are managed by a management game machine, and have a function of displaying the number of balls.
(xii) The number of balls possessed has a function of transferring its management to a dedicated unit by pressing a counting switch.

[Structural drawing of managed game machine]
FIG. 112 is an exploded perspective view of the management game machine.
In the management game machine 500, a front ornament 512 is arranged in the upper part of the frontmost side as seen from the player, and an operation part 511 is arranged in the lower part of the frontmost side as seen from the player.

A glass plate 513 is arranged behind the front decoration 512, a management game machine game board 514 is arranged behind the glass plate 513, and a back mechanism part 515 is arranged behind the management game machine game board 514. An outer frame 516 is arranged behind the mechanism portion 515 .

FIG. 113 is a diagram showing a front view of the management game machine.
A speaker 518 is arranged above the front decoration 512 of the management game machine 500 .
In addition, on the lower left side of the front decoration 512 of the management game machine 500, other effect switches 540 (external input switches, push buttons, etc.) are arranged.

On the other hand, on the right side of the operation unit 511 of the management game machine 500, a handle 510 for shooting game balls is arranged.
In addition, in the center of the upper part of the operation unit 511 of the managed gaming machine 500, a display device 520 for the number of game balls, etc., composed of 6-digit 7-segment LEDs is arranged.
Furthermore, a counting switch 530 is arranged on the upper left side of the operation unit 511 of the management game machine 500 .

FIG. 114 is a diagram showing a perspective view of a management game machine.
In the management game machine 500, the front decoration 512 can be opened.
When the front decoration 512 is opened, the front decoration 512 and the glass plate 513 are opened, and the management game machine game board arranged behind the glass plate 513 is exposed.
A shooting device for shooting game balls is arranged on the upper left of the back mechanism portion 515 . Here, the launching device 517 is placed on the upper left side for top firing, but the launching device 517 may be placed behind the operation unit 511 for bottom firing.

FIG. 115 is a diagram showing a back view of the managed gaming machine (with a back cover).
A back mechanism 515 is arranged inside the outer frame 516, and a firing device 517 is arranged on the upper left of the back mechanism 515 (upper right in the figure), and on the left side of the back mechanism 515 (upper right in the figure). A game ball circulation device 551A is arranged on the right side of the inside.

A main control board 560 is arranged in the center of the management game machine 500, and a back cover 552A is arranged in the lower part of the management game machine 500. - 特許庁
A frame control board 550 is arranged in the center of the back cover 552A, and a sub-connection board 553 and a game ball rental device connection terminal board 554 are arranged on the left side of the frame control board 550 (the right side in the figure). ing.

FIG. 116 is a diagram showing a back view of the managed gaming machine (without the back cover).
A power supply device 570 is arranged on the lower right side (lower left side in the drawing) of the management gaming machine 500, and an iron ball detection device 571 for detecting an iron game ball, and , a ball polishing device 572 for polishing game balls is arranged.

[3. Basic specifications of management game machines]
[(1) Devices installed in managed gaming machines]
FIG. 117 is a diagram showing a device installed in a management game machine.
The management game machine 500 includes a management game machine game board 580 and a management game machine frame 590 .
The managed game machine frame 590 is mainly composed of the back mechanism 515, the outer frame 516, and parts and devices associated therewith.

The management game machine game board 580 includes a game board (acrylic board), a symbol display device (special symbol display device, normal symbol display device), a winning detection mechanism (various switches), a windmill, a game nail, and other devices for performance (performance (movable body, liquid crystal display, information display device, performance lamp, speaker), prize display device, device that changes the falling direction (movable member, lid member), etc.

On the other hand, the managed game machine frame 590 includes a game ball, a launching device, a power supply device, a ball polishing device, a game ball circulation device, a display device for the number of game balls, a glass plate, a night monitoring device, other production devices, and an iron ball detection device. etc.

The devices installed in the management game machine 500 are configured as shown in the figure.
The management game machine 500 does not need the function of putting out game balls, and a new device not found in conventional pachinko machines is installed in the management game machine frame.

[Standards for devices installed in managed game machine frames]
The specifications of the device installed in the managed gaming machine frame are as follows.

(i) Game balls: (A) Performance (a) Not significantly affected by magnetic force.
(b) The shape remains unchanged even after being fired a million times.

(B) Structure (a) The diameter of the game ball shall be 11 mm.
(b) The mass of the game ball is 5.4g or more and 5.7g or less.
(c) The material of the game ball must be equivalent to SUS316 (hardened).

(ii) The shooting device (A) Performance (a) Capable of shooting game balls one by one.
(b) Not capable of shooting more than 100 game balls per minute.

(B) Structure (a) The number of launchers shall be one.
(b) The shooting device shall have a structure that cannot shoot game balls other than when the player directly operates it.

(iii) Power supply (A) Performance (a) The input power supply shall be AC100V±10%.

(B) Structure (a) Cover the power supply with a resin case to ensure safety.

(iv) Ball polishing device (A) Performance (a) Ability to automatically polish dirt on game balls.

(B) Structure (a) The automatic wiping part should be rolled up at the same time as the game ball is polished.
(b) Since replacement is required due to life expectancy, etc., the replacement of the device shall be made easy.

(v) Game ball circulation device (A) Performance (a) Having a function to circulate a certain number of game balls.

(B) Structure (a) Having the function of sending game balls to the launcher one by one.
(b) A structure that prevents players from taking out game balls.

(vi) Regarding the display device for the number of game balls, etc. (A) Performance (a) The number of game balls can be displayed in units of one.
(b) The number of digits shall be able to be displayed up to 6 digits.

(B) Structure (a) The player can easily check the display contents.

(vii) Glass plate (A) Performance (a) Colorless and transparent.

(B) Structure (a) It must not prevent the view of the entire structure of the game board of the managed game machine.
(b) It is possible to confirm the position of the game ball on the game board of the managed game machine.

(viii) Nighttime monitoring device (A) Performance (a) Having a function to notify when the power is turned on that the back mechanism has been opened while the power is turned off.
(B) Structure (a) The structure must be capable of detecting the opening of the back mechanism.

(ix) Other devices for performance (A) Performance (a) In addition to performance purposes, the device must have a function of notifying fraud by sound and lamp.

(B) Structure (a) The speaker shall have a structure that is not easily damaged from the outside.

(x) Regarding the iron ball detection device: (A) Performance (a) The iron ball should not be circulated and should have a function of detecting and reporting.

(B) Structure (a) A structure that cannot be operated by a player.

[(3) Functions of managed gaming machines]
[(i) main control function]
[(A) Block diagram]
FIG. 118 is a diagram showing a block diagram of the main control function.
The managed gaming machine frame 590 has a frame control board 550 having a communication control circuit 551 .
The management game machine game board 580 comprises a main control board 560 having a communication control circuit 561 , a sensor detection circuit 562 and a prize display data transmission circuit 563 .
The main control board 560 is connected with each prize winning sensor 564 , a fraud detection sensor 565 and a prize winning display device 566 .

The frame control board 550 and the main control board 560 can communicate via a communication control circuit 551 and a communication control circuit 561 .

Information from each winning opening sensor 564 (winning opening corresponding to normal symbols and special symbols, big winning opening, etc.) and fraud detection sensor 565 (magnetic sensor, radio wave sensor, vibration sensor, etc.) is sent through sensor detection circuit 562 It can be transmitted to the main control board 560 .
Information from the main control board 560 can be transmitted to the winning display device 566 via the winning display data transmission circuit 563 .

[(B) Functional description]
The main control board 560 detects winning balls and transmits command data to the frame control board 550 . Also, when fraud is detected, the command data is similarly transmitted.

[(a) winning ball detection function]
The main control board 560 outputs the number of game balls that have won in each winning hole and the number of winning game balls set for each winning hole to the frame control board 550 as a serial signal (command format) at regular intervals.

[(b) Winning display function]
The main control board 560 displays the winning game ball number set for each winning hole on the winning display device 566 when a game ball enters each winning hole and is detected.

[(c) Fraud detection function]
FIG. 119 is a diagram showing a list of frauds detected by the management gaming machine main control board.
The frauds detected by the main control board 560 are as follows.

Name: Board Incorrect 1
Contents: Detected board irregularity 1.

Name: Board fraud 2
Contents: Detected board irregularity 2.

Name: Board fraud 3
Description: Detected board fraud 3.

Name: Board Incorrect 4
Description: Detected board fraud 4.

Name: Board Incorrect 5
Contents: Detected board irregularity 5.

[(ii) prize ball control function]
[(A) Block diagram]
FIG. 120 shows a block diagram of the prize ball control function.
The dedicated unit 700 includes a gaming machine connection board 701 having a communication control circuit 702 .
The managed gaming machine frame 590 has a frame control board 550 having a communication control circuit 551 .

Information from the frame control board 550 can be transmitted to the gaming machine connection board 701 via the communication control circuit 551 and the communication control circuit 702 .

The management game machine game board 580 includes a main control board 560 having a communication control circuit 561 .
Information from each winning hole sensor 564 can be transmitted to the frame control board 550 via the communication control circuit 561 and the communication control circuit 551 .

The management game machine frame 590 includes an inner frame relay board 552, a launch relay board 553C, and an operation section relay board 554C.
Information from the winning sensor 555 and the non-winning sensor 556 can be transmitted to the frame control board 550 via the inner frame relay board 552 and the communication control circuit 551 .
Information from the subtraction sensor 557 can be transmitted to the frame control board 550 via the launch relay board 553C and the communication control circuit 551 .
Further, information from the counting switch 530 can be transmitted to the frame control board 550 via the operation section relay board 554C and the communication control circuit 551. FIG.
On the other hand, information from the frame control board 550 can be transmitted to the display device 520 such as the number of game balls through the communication control circuit 551 and the operation part relay board 554C.

[(B) Functional description]
The prize ball control function controls the number of game balls by the following functions.
[(a) Acquisition game ball number reception function]
When receiving a request for the number of acquired game balls from the main control board 560 , the frame control board 550 adds the requested number of acquired game balls to the number of game balls and displays it on the display device 520 for the number of game balls.

[(b) Launch ball detection function]
When the subtraction sensor detects the shooting of game balls, the number of game balls is subtracted by 1, and the number of game balls and the like is displayed on the display device.

[(c) Counting ball transmission function]
When the counting switch is pressed, the number of balls to be counted is transmitted to the dedicated unit, and the number of balls to be counted is subtracted from the number of game balls. The game ball number after the subtraction is displayed on the game ball number display device 520 .

[(d) Out ball detection function]
When the winning sensor 555 and the non-winning sensor 556 detect game balls, the number of out balls is added. Ball circulation is managed by the number of out balls and the number of shot balls.

[(e) Error detection function]
FIG. 121 is a diagram showing an error detected by the prize ball control function.
Errors detected by the prize ball control function are as follows.

Name: Game ball number display overflow Description: The number of digits displayed on the game ball number display device has exceeded (more than 990,000 balls).

Name: Subtraction sensor error Description: When the subtraction sensor is detecting clogged balls, or a failure of the subtraction sensor is detected.

Name: Discharged ball passage error Details: Ball clogging was detected between the discharged ball passage and the ball polishing device.

Name: Prize-winning ball passage error Details: A clogged ball was detected between the prize-winning ball passage and the ball polishing device.

[(iii) ball coin control function]
[(A) Block diagram]
FIG. 122 shows a block diagram of the ball control function.
The dedicated unit 700 includes a gaming machine connection board 701 having a communication control circuit 702 and a touch panel liquid crystal display 730 .
In addition, the managed game machine frame 590 includes a game ball lending device connection terminal board 554, a frame control board 550 having a communication control circuit 551, an operation part relay board 554C, a counting switch 530, and a game ball count display device 520. I have.

Information from the counting switch 530 can be transmitted to the game machine connection board 701 via the operation section relay board 554C, the communication control circuit 551, the game ball rental device connection terminal board 554, and the communication control circuit 702.
Information from the game machine connection board 701 can be transmitted to the game ball count display device 520 via the communication control circuit 702, the game ball lending device connection terminal board 554, the communication control circuit 551, and the operation part relay board 554C. .
Information from the touch panel type liquid crystal display 730 (information on ball rental and return) can be transmitted to the game machine connection board 701 via the communication control circuit 702 .

[(B) Functional description]
The ball lending control function manages the number of game balls by the following functions.
(a) Game ball addition reception function When the frame control board 550 receives a request to add the number of rental balls from the dedicated unit 700, it adds the requested number of rental balls to the number of game balls, and displays it on the display device such as the number of game balls. indicate.

(b) Error detection function FIG. 123 is a diagram showing a list of errors detected by the ball lending control function.
Errors detected by the ball rental control function are as follows.

Name: Illegal ball rental detection Description: Received a request to add the number of rental balls while the card was not being inserted.

[(iv) counting function]
[(A) Block diagram]
FIG. 124 shows a block diagram of the counting function.
The dedicated unit 700 includes a gaming machine connection board 701 having a communication control circuit 702 .
In addition, the management game machine frame 590 includes a game ball lending device connection terminal board 554 , a frame control board 550 having a communication control circuit 551 , an operation section relay board 554 C, and a counting switch 530 .

Information from the counting switch 530 can be transmitted to the game machine connection board 701 via the operation section relay board 554C, the communication control circuit 551, the game ball rental device connection terminal board 554, and the communication control circuit 702.

[(B) Functional description]
The counting function transmits game balls managed by the frame control board 550 to the exclusive unit 700 by the following functions.

[(a) Counting ball transmission function]
When the counting switch 530 is pressed, the prescribed (specified) number of balls to be counted is transmitted to the dedicated unit 700 and subtracted from the number of game balls.

FIG. 125 is a diagram showing conditions for the number of counted balls.
The number of balls counted is determined by the following conditions.

[Condition] When the counting switch is pressed [Number of balls to be counted] The number of balls to be counted accelerates according to the length of time the switch is pressed.

[(v) Number of game balls, etc. display function]
[(A) Block diagram]
FIG. 126 is a diagram showing a block diagram of the game ball count display function.
The dedicated unit 700 includes a gaming machine connection board 701 having a communication control circuit 702 .
In addition, the managed game machine frame 590 includes a game ball lending device connection terminal board 554, a frame control board 550 having a communication control circuit 551, an operation part relay board 554C, and a game ball count display device 520.

Information from the game machine connection board 701 can be transmitted to the frame control board 550 via the communication control circuit 702 and the game ball rental device connection terminal board 554 .
Information from the operation section relay board 554</b>C can be transmitted to the frame control board 550 via the communication control circuit 551 .
Information from the operation portion relay board 554C can be transmitted to the display device 520 such as the number of game balls.

[(B) Functional description]
The number of game balls etc. display device 520 displays the number of game balls etc. by the following functions.

(a) Number of game balls display function The number of game balls received from the dedicated unit 700 is displayed.
In addition, the frame control board 550 displays the number of shot balls and the number of game balls obtained by adding or subtracting the number of acquired balls.

(b) Error display function The frame control board 550 displays a prepared error code in response to an abnormality.

[(vi) Security function]
〔Block Diagram〕
FIG. 127 shows a block diagram of security functions.
The dedicated unit 700 includes a gaming machine connection board 701 having an authentication/communication control circuit 702A.
In addition, the management game machine frame 590 includes a game ball lending device connection terminal board 554 and a frame control board 550 having an authentication/communication control circuit 551B.
Furthermore, the management game machine game board 580 comprises a main control board 560 having an authentication/communication control circuit 561A.

Information from the game machine connection board 701 can be transmitted to the frame control board 550 via the authentication/communication control circuit 702A, the game ball lending device connection terminal board 554, and the authentication/communication control circuit 551B.
Information from the main control board 560 can be transmitted to the frame control board 550 via the authentication/communication control circuit 561A and the authentication/communication control circuit 551B.

Information from the frame control board 550 can be transmitted to the main control board 560 via the authentication/communication control circuit 551B and the authentication/communication control circuit 561A.
Information from the frame control board 550 can be transmitted to the game machine connection board 701 via the authentication/communication control circuit 551B, the game machine rental device connection terminal board 554, and the authentication/communication control circuit 702A.

[(B) Functional description]
Monitoring communication is performed between the management game machine and the dedicated unit, and the determination of the legitimate management game machine and the consistency of the communication data are confirmed. As a result, it becomes easy to find a management game machine that has been illegally modified, and it becomes impossible to illegally target an interface with a dedicated unit.

[(a) Authentication function]
The unique ID information stored in the main control CPU and frame control CPU of the management game machine is sent to the security management system 440 (see FIG. 103) via the communication network of the card unit, and the machine history management system 450 (see FIG. 103) reference) to determine whether it is a legitimate managed gaming machine. If the authentication fails, the information is output to the dedicated unit 700 without operating the managed gaming machine. All information at the time of authentication is sent and received in encrypted form.

[(B) Encryption function]
The encryption key used by the main control CPU, the frame control CPU, and the communication IC of the dedicated unit of the managed gaming machine is automatically generated each time it is connected, and the generated key differs for each managed gaming machine. is unique, and data analysis and falsification are impossible. A predetermined method is used for encryption specifications.

[(C) Security data output function]
By performing authentication determination and encrypted communication, the tamper resistance of data security is significantly improved. Since the generated cryptographic key differs for each managed gaming machine, the content of the telegram becomes unique and data cannot be analyzed or falsified.

[(vii) information output function]
[(A) Block diagram]
FIG. 128 is a diagram showing a block diagram of the information output function.
The dedicated unit 700 includes a gaming machine connection board 701 having a communication control circuit 702 and an external terminal 558 .
In addition, the management game machine frame 590 includes a game ball lending device connection terminal board 554 and a frame control board 550 having a communication control circuit 551 .
Furthermore, the management game machine game board 580 has a main control board 560 having a communication control circuit 561 .

Information from the main control board 560 can be transmitted to the hall computer HC via the communication control circuit 561 , the communication control circuit 551 , the game ball lending device connection terminal board 554 , the communication control circuit 702 and the external terminal 558 .

[(B) Functional description]
The management game machine transmits information to the dedicated unit 700 to be output to the hall computer HC.
The dedicated unit 700 outputs the information transmitted from the management game machine to the hall computer HC.

[(a) Contents of information output]
FIG. 129 is a diagram showing contents output from the dedicated unit to the hall computer.
The contents that the dedicated unit outputs to the hall computer according to the information from the management game machine are as follows.

[Order 1]
Name: Number of shots Description: Output the number of shots.

[Order 2]
Name: Prize balls Contents: Output the total number of prize balls.

[Order 3]
Name: Fraud Description: Output when fraud is detected.

[Order 4]
Name: Controlled gaming machine error Contents: Output when an error occurs on a controlled gaming machine.

[Order 5]
Name: Design change number 1
Contents: Output every time the special symbol 1 (first special symbol) stops.

[Order 6]
Name: Starting port 1
Contents: Output every time you win the starting port 1 (starting port corresponding to the first special symbol).

[Order 7]
Name: Jackpot 1
Contents: Output during all jackpots.

[Order 8]
Name: Jackpot 2
Contents: Output during the big hit and small hit. Output when normal electric accessories are activated.

[Order 9]
Name: Big hit + Time saving Content: Output during the big hit and time saving.

[Order 10]
Name: Medium high probability Contents: Output in medium high probability (high probability non-time reduction state or high probability time reduction state).

[Order 11]
Name: During time saving Content: Output during time saving (low probability time reduction state or high probability time reduction state).

[Order 12]
Name: Door open Contents: Output when the front decoration or back mechanism is open.

[Order 13]
Name: Design variation number 2
Contents: Output every time the special symbol 2 (second special symbol) stops.

[Order 14]
Name: Starting port 2
Contents: Output every time you win the starting port 2 (starting port corresponding to the second special symbol).

[Order 15]
Name: Passage Gate 1
Contents: Output every time passing gate 1 (for example, the first starting gate corresponding to normal symbols).

[Order 16]
Name: Jackpot 3
Contents: Output at the time of a big hit that shortens the time (shortens the fluctuation time).

[Order 17]
Name: Passage Gate 2
Contents: Output every time passing gate 2 (for example, the second starting gate corresponding to normal symbols).

[Order 18]
Name: Number of accessories (Number of times the prize mouth is opened)
Contents: Output every time the accessory (special electric accessory) is opened.

[Order 19]
Name: Number of winning prizes (number of winning prizes)
Contents: Output every time you win an accessory (special electric accessory, big winning mouth).

[Order 20]
Name: Specific area passage Contents: Output each time a specific area passage (specific area or probability variable area) is passed.

[(viii) power supply function]
[(A) Block diagram]
FIG. 130 shows a block diagram of the power supply function.
The management game machine frame 590 includes a power supply device 570 , a frame control board 550 , a front decoration 512 , an operation section 511 and a sub-connection board 553 .
The power supply device 570 includes a main switch, a 5V generation circuit 1, a 12V generation circuit 1, a 24V generation circuit 1, a power failure detection circuit A, a power failure detection circuit B, a 12V generation circuit 2, a 12V generation circuit 3, and a 24V generation circuit 2. I have.

The frame control board 550 has a 3.3V generation circuit, a game ball clear switch, and a RAM clear switch.

The management game machine game board 580 includes a main control board 560 having a backup power supply and an effect control board 900 .

AC 100V is supplied to power supply 570 .
The power supply 570 supplies 5V-1 DC, 12V-1 DC and 24V-1 DC to the frame control board 550 using various circuits.
In addition, the power supply device 570 transmits information regarding power failure detection A and power failure detection B to the frame control board 550 .
Furthermore, the power supply device 570 supplies DC12V-2, DC12V-3 and DC24V-2 to the sub-connection board 553 using various circuits.

The frame control board 550 uses various circuits to supply DC5V-1, DC12V-1 and DC24V-1 to the main control board 560 (backup power supply).
In addition, the frame control board 550 transmits to the main control board 560 information about the power failure detection A and the RAM clear switch.

The sub-connection board 553 supplies DC 12V-3 to the front decoration 512 and the operation section 511 .
In addition, the sub-connection board 553 supplies DC12V-2, DC12V-3 and DC24V-2 to the effect control board 900.

[(B) Functional description]
A power supply necessary for the management game machine is generated from AC 100V.

[(a) Main system power generation function]
A rectified and smoothed power supply is generated as a main system power supply (DC24V, DC12V, DC5V) by a switching method. The generated power is supplied to the frame control board 550 , and power is supplied to the main control board 560 via the frame control board 550 . Also, DC 3.3V is generated inside the frame control board 550 .

[(b) Sub system power generation function]
It is configured to be a separate system from the main system power system, and is generated as a sub system power system (DC24V, DC12V). DC 12V is generated in two systems, a large capacity (mainly used in the management game machine game board) and a small capacity (mainly used in the management game machine frame).

The generated power is supplied to the front decoration 512 , the operating section 511 and the effect control board 900 via the sub-connection board 553 .

[(c) Backup function]
The backup function is composed of a backup power supply and a power failure detection circuit, and stores the game state in the RAM of the main control board 560 and the frame control board 550 when the power is shut off.
A backup power supply for main control is configured to be mounted on the management game machine game board 580 .
Since the frame control board 550 uses a non-volatile RAM, it does not use a backup power supply. The power failure detection circuit monitors AC 100V in the power supply. When the power is cut off, two power cutoff signals are generated and output for the main control board and the frame control board.

[(c) Switch function]
The main switch is mounted on the power supply device 570 and switches between supply and cutoff of AC 100V.
A game ball clear switch and a RAM clear switch are mounted on the frame control board.
The game ball clear switch initializes data related to game balls, and the RAM clear switch initializes RAM data excluding data related to game balls.
Only signals relating to the RAM clear switch are output from the frame control board 550 to the main control board 560 .

[(ix) Launch function]
〔Block Diagram〕
FIG. 131 shows a block diagram of the firing function.
The dedicated unit 700 includes a gaming machine connection board 701 having a communication control circuit 702 .
In addition, the management game machine frame 590 includes a game ball lending device connection terminal board 554, a frame control board 550 having a communication control circuit 551 and a launch control circuit 902, an operation part relay board 554C, a polishing relay board 904, and a launch relay board. A substrate 906 is provided.

A handle volume 910, a firing stop switch 912, and a touch sensor 914 are connected to the operation section relay board 554C.
A firing solenoid 916 , a ball feeding solenoid 918 , a subtraction sensor 920 , and a firing inlet sensor 922 are connected to the firing relay board 906 .

Information from the handle volume 910, the firing stop switch 912, and the touch sensor 914 is sent via the operation section relay board 554C, the firing control circuit 902, the communication control circuit 551, the game ball rental device connection terminal board 554, and the communication control circuit 702. It can be transmitted to the gaming machine connection board 701 .
Information from the game machine connection board 701 is emitted via the communication control circuit 702, the game ball lending device connection terminal board 554, the communication control circuit 551, the launch control circuit 902, the polishing relay board 904, and the launch relay board 906. It can be sent to solenoid 916 or ball feed solenoid 918 .

Information from fire control circuit 902 can be sent to fire solenoid 916 or ball feed solenoid 918 via grind relay board 904 , fire relay board 906 .
Information from the subtraction sensor 920 or the launch entrance sensor 922 is transmitted through the launch relay board 906, the polishing relay board 904, the launch control circuit 902, the communication control circuit 551, the game ball rental device connection terminal board 554, and the communication control circuit 702. can be transmitted to the gaming machine connection board 701 via the

[(B) Functional description]
The frame control board 550 shoots game balls by driving the shooting solenoid 916 in the shooting device.

[(a) Touch detection function]
A touch sensor 914 detects whether the player is touching the steering wheel.

[(b) Launch stop function]
If the touch sensor 914 does not detect the touch state, if the firing stop switch 912 is pressed, if the handle is not turned more than a certain angle, firing will be stopped. ), stop firing.

[(c) Launch intensity adjustment function]
By operating the handle, the intensity of the handle volume 910 provided inside the handle is adjusted, and the game ball is shot to an arbitrary position on the game board surface of the managed game machine.

[(d) Ball feeding function]
The ball sending solenoid 918 is operated to send the game ball to the shooting position. At that time, a subtraction sensor 920 provided in the shooting device unit subtracts 1 from the number of game balls that can be shot.

[(x) Game ball circulation function]
[(A) Block diagram]
FIG. 132 is a diagram showing a block diagram of the game ball circulation function.
The dedicated unit 700 includes a gaming machine connection board 701 having a communication control circuit 702 .
In addition, the management game machine frame 590 includes a game ball lending device connection terminal board 554, a communication control circuit 551, a frame control board 550 having a motor control circuit 924 and a sensor circuit 926, a polishing relay board 904, a lift relay board 928, A launch relay board 906 and an inner frame relay board 930 are provided.

A lift motor 932 , a lift entrance sensor 934 , and a lift motor sensor 936 are connected to the lift relay board 928 .
A launch entrance sensor 922 is connected to the launch relay board 906 .
A clogged ball sensor 938 , a winning sensor 555 , and a non-winning sensor 556 are connected to the inner frame relay board 930 .

Information from the frame control board 550 can be transmitted to the game machine connection board 701 via the communication control circuit 551 , the game ball rental device connection terminal board 554 , and the communication control circuit 702 .
Information from the game machine connection board 701 can be transmitted to the frame control board 550 via the communication control circuit 702 , the game ball rental device connection terminal board 554 , and the communication control circuit 551 .

Information from the frame control board 550 can be transmitted to the lifting motor 932 via the communication control circuit 551 , the motor control circuit 924 , the polishing relay board 904 and the lifting relay board 928 .
Information from the lift entrance sensor 934 and the lift motor sensor 936 can be transmitted to the frame control board 550 via the lift relay board 928 , polishing relay board 904 , sensor circuit 926 and communication control circuit 551 .
Further, information from the launch entrance sensor 922 can be transmitted to the frame control board 550 via the launch relay board 906 , the polishing relay board 904 , the sensor circuit 926 and the communication control circuit 551 .
Furthermore, information from the clogged ball sensor 938 , winning sensor 555 and non-winning sensor 556 can be transmitted to the frame control board 550 via the inner frame relay board 930 , the sensor circuit 926 and the communication control circuit 551 .

[(B) Functional description]
The frame control board 550 operates the lifting motor 932 to move the game balls to the shooting position and circulate the game balls.

[(a) Lifting function]
The frame control board 550 uses the lift motor 932 to move the playing ball to the launch unit.
The frame control board 550 detects whether there is a game ball at the entrance and the launch entrance of the lift motor 932 by the lift entrance sensor 934 and the launch entrance sensor 922, and drives and stops the lift motor 932.
Further, a lifting motor sensor 936 detects whether the lifting motor 932 is rotating normally.

[(b) Game ball management function]
The frame control board 550 manages the number of game balls required for circulation by the ball clogging sensor 938, winning sensor 555, and non-winning sensor 556, and notifies when there is an excess or deficiency.

[(c) Error detection function]
FIG. 133 shows an error detected by the game ball circulation function.
Errors detected by the game ball circulation function are as follows. After removing the cause of the error, the frame control board 550 cancels the error by pressing the error cancellation switch.

Name: Game ball circulating device error Details: It was detected that the lifting motor did not rotate.

Name: Game ball circulator passage failure Description: A ball jam was detected in the game ball circulator.

[(xi)]
[(A) Block diagram]
FIG. 134 shows a block diagram of the ball polishing function.
The managed game machine frame 590 comprises a frame control board 550 having a motor control circuit 924 and a sensor circuit 926 and a polishing relay board 904 .

A cassette motor 940 , a polishing motor 942 , a cassette switch 944 , and a polishing motor sensor 946 are connected to the polishing relay board 904 .

Information from the frame control board 550 can be transmitted to the cassette motor 940 and the grinding motor 942 via the motor control circuit 924 and the grinding relay board 904 .
Information from the cassette switch 944 and the grinding motor sensor 946 can be transmitted to the frame control board 550 via the grinding relay board 904 and the sensor circuit 926 .

[(B) Functional description]
The frame control board 550 uses a cassette loaded with polishing cloths to polish game balls. Further, the frame control board 550 detects the cassette loaded with the polishing cloth.

[(a) Ball polishing function]
The game ball is polished by operating the polishing motor 942 to press the game ball against the polishing cloth. The polishing cloth is mounted on a cassette so that it can be replaced, and a cassette motor 940 is used to move the cloth so as to be wound up at regular intervals.

[(b) cassette detection function]
A cassette switch 944 detects the presence or absence of a cassette loaded with a polishing cloth.

[(c) Error detection function]
FIG. 135 is a diagram showing errors detected by the ball polishing function.
Errors detected by the ball polishing function are as follows. After removing the cause of the error, the frame control board 550 cancels the error by pressing the error cancellation switch. Note that the end-of-cassette installation automatically cancels the error when the cassette is installed.

Name: Ball polishing device error Description: Detected that the polishing motor does not rotate.

Name: Ball polishing device passage error Description: A clogged ball was detected in the ball polishing device.

Name: Cassette not installed Description: It was detected that the ball polishing device cassette was not installed.

[(xii)]
[(A) Block diagram]
FIG. 136 is a block diagram of power saving functions.
The dedicated unit 700 includes a gaming machine connection board 701 having a communication control circuit 702 .
The management game machine frame 590 includes a game ball lending device connection terminal board 554, a frame control board 550 having a communication control circuit 702 and a launch control circuit 902, and an operation part relay board 554C.
A touch sensor 914 is connected to the operation unit relay board 554C.

The management game machine game board 580 includes a main control board 560 having a communication control circuit 561 and an effect control board 900 having a communication control circuit 901 .
The effect control board 900 is connected with other devices for effect 540A.

Information from the main control board 560 can be transmitted to the game machine connection board 701 via the communication control circuit 561 , the communication control circuit 551 , the game ball lending device connection terminal board 554 , and the communication control circuit 702 .
Information from the game machine connection board 701 can be transmitted to the main control board 560 via the communication control circuit 702 , the game ball lending device connection terminal board 554 , the communication control circuit 551 and the communication control circuit 556 .
Information from the main control board 560 can be transmitted to the production control board 900 and other production devices 540A via the communication control circuit 561 and the communication control circuit 901.
Information from the touch sensor 914 can be transmitted to the frame control board 550 via the operation section relay board 554C, the firing control circuit 902, and the communication control circuit 551. FIG.

[(B) Functional description]
The frame control board 550 determines the non-gaming state, notifies the main control board 560, and shifts the other production device 540A to the power saving state.

[(a) Power saving function]
This is a function of prompting the main control board 560 to switch to the power saving state by the frame control board 550 .

[(b) Operation request of power saving function]
When the end of the touch is detected, the game ball is "0", the end of the IC card is inserted, or the fluctuation is stopped, the frame control board 550 issues an operation request.

[(xiii) night monitoring function]
[(A) Block diagram]
FIG. 137 is a diagram showing a block diagram of the night watch function.
The dedicated unit 700 includes a gaming machine connection board 701 having a communication control circuit 702 .
The management game machine frame 590 includes a frame control board 550 having a communication control circuit 551 and an inner frame relay board 930 .
A night monitoring device 948 is connected to the inner frame relay board 930 .

The management game machine game board 580 includes a main drawer board 950 and a main control board 560 having a communication control circuit 561 .

Information from the main control board 560 can be transmitted to the dedicated unit 700 via the communication control circuit 561 , the main drawer board 950 , the communication control circuit 551 and the communication control circuit 702 .
Information from the frame control board 550 can be transmitted to the main control board 560 via the communication control circuit 551 , the main drawer board 950 and the communication control circuit 561 .

Information from the frame control board 550 can be transmitted to the night monitoring device 948 via the communication control circuit 551 and the inner frame relay board 930 .
Information from the night monitoring device 948 can be transmitted to the frame control board 550 via the inner frame relay board 930 and the communication control circuit 551 .

[(B) Functional description]
The night monitoring function deters fraud involving door opening at night with the following functions.

[(a) Back mechanism opening monitoring function]
The night-monitoring power supply installed in the night-monitoring device 948 monitors opening of the back mechanisms even when the power is off.

[(b) Opening count memory function]
To store the number of times of opening even if the back mechanism part is opened a plurality of times.

[(c) Disconnection monitoring function]
Between the night monitoring device 948 and the main control board 560, the night monitoring power supply of the night monitoring device 948 is looped back. Detected and notified when sending monitoring information next time.

[(d) Release information output function]
When a transmission request is received from the frame control board 550, the opening information of the back mechanism is output.

[(xiv) iron ball detection function]
[(A) Block diagram]
FIG. 138 is a diagram showing a block diagram of the iron ball detection function.
The management game machine frame 590 comprises a frame control board 550 having a sensor circuit 926 , an inner frame relay board 930 and a polishing relay board 904 .
A clogged ball sensor 938 is connected to the inner frame relay board 930 , and a polishing entrance sensor 952 is connected to the polishing relay board 904 .

Information from ball jam sensor 938 can be transmitted to frame control board 550 via inner frame relay board 930 and sensor circuit 926 .
Information from the grind entrance sensor 952 can be sent to the frame control board 550 via the grind relay board 904 and the sensor circuit 926 .

[(B) Functional description]
The iron ball detection function detects iron balls using the following functions.

[(a) iron ball detection function]
The detection magnet is set in the detection direction by operating the release lever at the entrance of the polishing apparatus.
When an iron ball is mixed in, it is attracted to the magnet and acts as a stopper, stopping the supply of game balls to the polishing device.
The frame control board 550 detects iron balls by monitoring supply stoppage and ball jam sensor 938 .

[(b) Detection cancellation function]
The detection magnet is set in the non-detection direction by operating the release lever at the entrance of the polishing apparatus. As a result, the attraction to the detection magnet is released and the detection is cancelled.

[(xv) ball extraction function]
[(A) Block diagram]
FIG. 139 shows a block diagram of the ball extraction function.
The managed gaming machine slot 590 includes a slot control board 550 having firing control circuitry 902 , motor control circuitry 924 and sensor circuitry 926 .
A launcher 517 is connected to the launch control circuit 902 .
The motor control circuit 924 is connected to the ball polishing device 572 and the game ball circulation device 551A.
A ball removal switch 954 is connected to the sensor circuit 926 .

Information from the frame control board 550 can be sent to the launcher 517 via the launch control circuit 902 .
Information from firing device 517 can be sent to frame control board 550 via firing control circuitry 902 .

Information from the frame control board 550 can be transmitted to the ball polishing device 572 and the game ball circulation device 551A through the motor control circuit 924.
Information from the ball polishing device 572 and the game ball circulation device 551A can be transmitted to the frame control board 550 via the motor control circuit 924.

Information from ball removal switch 954 can be sent to frame control board 550 via sensor circuit 926 .

[(B) Functional description]
The ball removal function discharges the game balls used in the management game machine.

[(a) Transition to ball extraction function]
When the number of game balls is "0", the back mechanism part is opened, and when the power is turned on while pressing the ball removal switch, the function shifts to the ball removal function.
During the operation of this function, communication with the dedicated unit and the management game machine game board is not performed.
Also, when the number of game balls is other than "0", it does not shift to the ball removal function.

[(b) Game ball ejection function]
Set the ball removal lever of the polishing machine in the discharge direction.
By shooting the game balls, the game balls are circulated and all the game balls are discharged from the discharge port.

[(xvi) Pause function]
[(A) Block diagram]
FIG. 140 shows a block diagram of the pause function.
The dedicated unit 700 includes a gaming machine connection board 701 having a communication control circuit 702 .
Also, the managed gaming machine frame 590 has a frame control board 550 having a communication control circuit 551 .
An error release switch 956 is connected to the communication control circuit 551 .

The management game machine game board 580 includes a main control board 560 having a communication control circuit 561 .

Information from the frame control board 550 can be transmitted to the gaming machine connection board 701 via the communication control circuit 551 and the communication control circuit 702 .
Information from the frame control board 550 (information such as a pause request) can be transmitted to the main control board 560 via the communication control circuit 551 and the communication control circuit 561 .
Information from the error clearing switch 956 can be transmitted to the frame control board 550 via the communication control circuit 551 .

[(B) Functional description]
The pause function determines a state in which the frame control board 550 cannot continue the game, and shifts the main control board 560 to the pause state.

[(a) Pause function]
The frame control board 550 stops shooting and outputs a temporary stop request to the main control board 560 when an error that prevents the game from continuing occurs.
The main control board 560 detects a pause request and pauses the game in the case of a big win.
The temporary stop request is notified to the main control board 560 by storing data relating to the temporary stop request in the managed gaming machine frame information register.

[(b) Pause release function]
By pressing the error release switch 956 after removing the cause of the error, the frame control board 550 releases the temporary stop request.

[(xvii) error detection function]
141 to 146 are diagrams showing the error detection function.
Error detection is executed with the contents described in this figure.

[No. 1]
Error code: H01
Error name: Certification inconsistency in managed gaming machine Contents of error detection: Authentication inconsistency between the managed gaming machine frame and the managed gaming machine game board was detected.

[Notification means]
Display device such as the number of game balls in the management machine frame: ○
Game stop of management game machine frame: ○
Sound output of management game machine game board: ×
Illumination lighting of management game machine game board: ×
Dedicated unit and hall computer dedicated unit: ○
Dedicated unit and hall computer information output 1 (management game machine error): ×
Information output 2 of dedicated unit and hall computer (illegal): ×
Error cancellation: Power OFF/ON (Error is canceled by turning off the power and turning it on again.)
In the figure, "○ (circle mark)" means that the item is executed, and "X (cross mark)" means that the item is not executed.

[No. 2]
Error code: H02
Error name: Authentication inconsistency between management game machine and dedicated unit Details of error detection: Authentication inconsistency between management game machine frame and dedicated unit control section was detected.

[Notification means]
Display device such as the number of game balls in the management machine frame: ○
Game stop of management game machine frame: ○
Sound output of management game machine game board: ×
Illumination lighting of management game machine game board: ×
Dedicated unit and hall computer dedicated unit: ○
Dedicated unit and hall computer information output 1 (management game machine error): ×
Information output 2 of dedicated unit and hall computer (illegal): ×
Error release: Power OFF/ON

[No. 3]
Error code: H03
Error name: Authentication inconsistency in dedicated unit Contents of error detection: Authentication inconsistency inside the dedicated unit controller was detected.

[Notification means]
Display device such as the number of game balls in the management machine frame: ○
Game stop of management game machine frame: ○
Sound output of management game machine game board: ×
Illumination lighting of management game machine game board: ×
Dedicated unit and hall computer dedicated unit: ○
Dedicated unit and hall computer information output 1 (management game machine error): ×
Information output 2 of dedicated unit and hall computer (illegal): ×
Error release: Power OFF/ON

[No. 4]
Error code: H04
Error name: Dedicated cable disconnection Contents of error detection: Disconnection of dedicated unit and management game machine frame was detected.

[Notification means]
Display device such as the number of game balls in the management machine frame: ○
Game stop of management game machine frame: ○
Sound output of management game machine game board: ×
Illumination lighting of management game machine game board: ×
Dedicated unit and hall computer dedicated unit: ○
Dedicated unit and hall computer information output 1 (management game machine error): ×
Information output 2 of dedicated unit and hall computer (illegal): ×
Error release: automatic recovery

[No. 5]
Error code: H05
Error name: Management game machine, dedicated unit communication no response Error detection details: No communication response was detected between the dedicated unit and management game machine frame.

[Notification means]
Display device such as the number of game balls in the management machine frame: ○
Game stop of management game machine frame: ○
Sound output of management game machine game board: ×
Illumination lighting of management game machine game board: ×
Dedicated unit and hall computer dedicated unit: ○
Dedicated unit and hall computer information output 1 (management game machine error): ×
Information output 2 of dedicated unit and hall computer (illegal): ×
Error release: automatic recovery

[No. 6]
Error code: H06
Error name: Communication error within management gaming machine Contents of error detection: No communication response or no connection between management gaming machine game board and management gaming machine frame was detected.

[Notification means]
Display device such as the number of game balls in the management machine frame: ○
Game stop of management game machine frame: ○
Sound output of management game machine game board: ×
Illumination lighting of management game machine game board: ×
Dedicated unit and hall computer dedicated unit: ○
Dedicated unit and hall computer information output 1 (management game machine error): ×
Information output 2 of dedicated unit and hall computer (illegal): ×
Error release: automatic recovery

[No. 7]
Error code: H07
Error name: Main control board startup error Contents of error detection: It was detected that the main control board did not start after the specified time had passed.

[Notification means]
Display device such as the number of game balls in the management machine frame: ○
Game stop of management game machine frame: ○
Sound output of management game machine game board: ×
Illumination lighting of management game machine game board: ×
Dedicated unit and hall computer dedicated unit: ○
Dedicated unit and hall computer information output 1 (management game machine error): ×
Information output 2 of dedicated unit and hall computer (illegal): ×
Error release: automatic recovery

[No. 8]
Error code: H08
Error name: Serial number mismatch Error detection details: A command communication serial number mismatch was detected between the dedicated unit and the management machine frame.

[Notification means]
Display device such as the number of game balls in the management machine frame: ○
Game stop of management game machine frame: ○
Sound output of management game machine game board: ×
Illumination lighting of management game machine game board: ×
Dedicated unit and hall computer dedicated unit: ○
Dedicated unit and hall computer information output 1 (management game machine error): ×
Information output 2 of dedicated unit and hall computer (illegal): ×
Error release: Power OFF/ON

[No. 9]
Error code: H09
Error name: Addition serial number mismatch Error detection content: Addition serial number mismatch of the addition request command was detected when the ball was rented from the dedicated unit.

[Notification means]
Display device such as the number of game balls in the management machine frame: ○
Game stop of management game machine frame: ○
Sound output of management game machine game board: ×
Illumination lighting of management game machine game board: ×
Dedicated unit and hall computer dedicated unit: ○
Dedicated unit and hall computer information output 1 (management game machine error): ×
Information output of dedicated unit and hall computer 2 (illegal): ○
Error release: automatic recovery

[No. 10]
Error code: H14
Error name: Subtraction sensor error Contents of error detection: When the subtraction sensor is detecting ball clogging, or a failure of the subtraction sensor is detected.

[Notification means]
Display device such as the number of game balls in the management machine frame: ○
Game stop of management game machine frame: ○
Sound output of management game machine game board: ×
Illumination lighting of management game machine game board: ×
Dedicated unit and hall computer dedicated unit: ○
Information output 1 of dedicated unit and hall computer (management game machine error): ○
Information output 2 of dedicated unit and hall computer (illegal): ×
Error release: Release switch

[No. 11]
Error code: H15
Error name: Display device error such as number of game balls Error detection details: An error was detected in the display unit of the display device such as number of game balls.

[Notification means]
Display device such as the number of game balls in the managed game machine frame: ×
Game stop of management game machine frame: ×
Sound output of management game machine game board: ×
Illumination lighting of management game machine game board: ×
Dedicated unit and hall computer dedicated unit: ○
Dedicated unit and hall computer information output 1 (management game machine error): ×
Information output 2 of dedicated unit and hall computer (illegal): ×
Error release: automatic recovery

[No. 12]
Error code: H16
Error name: Ball polishing device error Contents of error detection: Detected that the polishing motor does not rotate.

[Notification means]
Display device such as the number of game balls in the management machine frame: ○
Game stop of management game machine frame: ○
Sound output of management game machine game board: ×
Illumination lighting of management game machine game board: ×
Dedicated unit and hall computer dedicated unit: ○
Information output 1 of dedicated unit and hall computer (management game machine error): ○
Information output 2 of dedicated unit and hall computer (illegal): ×
Error release: Release switch

[No. 13]
Error code: H17
Error name: Game ball circulation device error Error detection content: It was detected that the lifting motor did not rotate.

[Notification means]
Display device such as the number of game balls in the management machine frame: ○
Game stop of management game machine frame: ○
Sound output of management game machine game board: ×
Illumination lighting of management game machine game board: ×
Dedicated unit and hall computer dedicated unit: ○
Information output 1 of dedicated unit and hall computer (management game machine error): ○
Information output 2 of dedicated unit and hall computer (illegal): ×
Error release: Release switch

[No. 14]
Error code: H18
Error name: Discharge ball passage error Contents of error detection: Ball clogging was detected between the discharge ball passage and the ball polishing device.

[Notification means]
Display device such as the number of game balls in the management machine frame: ○
Game stop of management game machine frame: ○
Sound output of management game machine game board: ×
Illumination lighting of management game machine game board: ×
Dedicated unit and hall computer dedicated unit: ○
Information output 1 of dedicated unit and hall computer (management game machine error): ○
Information output 2 of dedicated unit and hall computer (illegal): ×
Error release: Release switch

[No. 15]
Error code: H19
Error name: Winning ball passage error Error detection content: Ball clogging was detected between the winning ball passage and the ball polishing device.

[Notification means]
Display device such as the number of game balls in the management machine frame: ○
Game stop of management game machine frame: ○
Sound output of management game machine game board: ×
Illumination lighting of management game machine game board: ×
Dedicated unit and hall computer dedicated unit: ○
Information output 1 of dedicated unit and hall computer (management game machine error): ○
Information output 2 of dedicated unit and hall computer (illegal): ×
Error release: Release switch

[No. 16]
Error code: H20
Error name: Passage error in ball polishing device Contents of error detection: A clogged ball was detected in the ball polishing device.

[Notification means]
Display device such as the number of game balls in the management machine frame: ○
Game stop of management game machine frame: ○
Sound output of management game machine game board: ×
Illumination lighting of management game machine game board: ×
Dedicated unit and hall computer dedicated unit: ○
Information output 1 of dedicated unit and hall computer (management game machine error): ○
Information output 2 of dedicated unit and hall computer (illegal): ×
Error release: Release switch

[No. 17]
Error code: H21
Error name: Game ball circulation device Error detection content: A ball jam was detected in the game ball circulation device.

[Notification means]
Display device such as the number of game balls in the management machine frame: ○
Game stop of management game machine frame: ○
Sound output of management game machine game board: ×
Illumination lighting of management game machine game board: ×
Dedicated unit and hall computer dedicated unit: ○
Information output 1 of dedicated unit and hall computer (management game machine error): ○
Information output 2 of dedicated unit and hall computer (illegal): ×
Error release: Release switch

[No. 18]
Error code: H22
Error name: Cassette not installed Contents of error detection: Cassette not installed in the ball polishing device was detected.

[Notification means]
Display device such as the number of game balls in the management machine frame: ○
Game stop of management game machine frame: ×
Sound output of management game machine game board: ×
Illumination lighting of management game machine game board: ×
Dedicated unit and hall computer dedicated unit: ○
Dedicated unit and hall computer information output 1 (management game machine error): ×
Information output 2 of dedicated unit and hall computer (illegal): ×
Error release: automatic recovery

[No. 19]
Error code: H23
Error name: Game ball number display overflow Error detection details: The number of digits on the display device such as the number of game balls has exceeded (more than 990,000 shots)

[Notification means]
Display device such as the number of game balls in the management machine frame: ○
Game stop of management game machine frame: ○
Sound output of management game machine game board: ○
Illumination lighting of management game machine game board: ×
Dedicated unit and hall computer dedicated unit: ○
Information output 1 of dedicated unit and hall computer (management game machine error): ○
Information output 2 of dedicated unit and hall computer (illegal): ×
Error release: automatic recovery

[No. 20]
Error code: H24
Error name: Insufficient number of circulating balls Error detection details: Insufficient number of circulating balls was detected.

[Notification means]
Display device such as the number of game balls in the management machine frame: ○
Game stop of management game machine frame: ×
Sound output of management game machine game board: ×
Illumination lighting of management game machine game board: ×
Dedicated unit and hall computer dedicated unit: ○
Dedicated unit and hall computer information output 1 (management game machine error): ×
Information output 2 of dedicated unit and hall computer (illegal): ×
Error release: automatic recovery

[No. 21]
Error code: H25
Error name: Excessive number of circulating balls Error detection content: Excessive number of circulating balls was detected.

[Notification means]
Display device such as the number of game balls in the management machine frame: ○
Game stop of management game machine frame: ×
Sound output of management game machine game board: ×
Illumination lighting of management game machine game board: ×
Dedicated unit and hall computer dedicated unit: ○
Dedicated unit and hall computer information output 1 (management game machine error): ×
Information output 2 of dedicated unit and hall computer (illegal): ×
Error release: automatic recovery

[No. 22]
Error code: H64
Error name: Front decoration open Error detection content: Front decoration open was detected.

[Notification means]
Display device such as the number of game balls in the management machine frame: ○
Game stop of management game machine frame: ○
Sound output of management game machine game board: ○
Illumination lighting of management game machine game board: ○
Dedicated unit and hall computer dedicated unit: ○
Dedicated unit and hall computer information output 1 (management game machine error): ×
Information output of dedicated unit and hall computer 2 (illegal): ○
Error release: automatic recovery

[No. 23]
Error code: H65
Error name: Back mechanism part open Error detection details: Back mechanism part open was detected.

[Notification means]
Display device such as the number of game balls in the management machine frame: ○
Game stop of management game machine frame: ○
Sound output of management game machine game board: ○
Illumination lighting of management game machine game board: ○
Dedicated unit and hall computer dedicated unit: ○
Dedicated unit and hall computer information output 1 (management game machine error): ×
Information output of dedicated unit and hall computer 2 (illegal): ○
Error release: automatic recovery

[No. 24]
Error code: H66
Error name: Illegal radio wave detection Error detection details: Abnormal radio waves were detected in the managed gaming machine frame.

[Notification means]
Display device such as the number of game balls in the management machine frame: ○
Game stop of management game machine frame: ×
Sound output of management game machine game board: ○
Illumination lighting of management game machine game board: ○
Dedicated unit and hall computer dedicated unit: ○
Dedicated unit and hall computer information output 1 (management game machine error): ×
Information output of dedicated unit and hall computer 2 (illegal): ○
Error release: Power OFF/ON

[No. 25]
Error code: H67
Error name: Proximity sensor error in managed gaming machine frame Error detection content: Proximity sensor error in managed gaming machine frame was detected.

[Notification means]
Display device such as the number of game balls in the management machine frame: ○
Game stop of management game machine frame: ×
Sound output of management game machine game board: ○
Illumination lighting of management game machine game board: ○
Dedicated unit and hall computer dedicated unit: ○
Dedicated unit and hall computer information output 1 (management game machine error): ×
Information output of dedicated unit and hall computer 2 (illegal): ○
Error release: Power OFF/ON

[No. 26]
Error code: H68
Error name: Winning ball number error 1
Details of error detection: The difference between the number of winning balls detected by the main control board and the number of winning balls detected by the frame control board is 100 or more.

[Notification means]
Display device such as the number of game balls in the management machine frame: ○
Game stop of management game machine frame: ×
Sound output of management game machine game board: ○
Illumination lighting of management game machine game board: ○
Dedicated unit and hall computer dedicated unit: ○
Dedicated unit and hall computer information output 1 (management game machine error): ×
Information output of dedicated unit and hall computer 2 (illegal): ○
Error release: Power OFF/ON

[No. 27]
Error code: H69
Error name: Winning ball number error 2
Details of error detection: The difference between the number of shot balls and the total return series (winning series + non-winning balls) is 100 or more.

[Notification means]
Display device such as the number of game balls in the management machine frame: ○
Game stop of management game machine frame: ×
Sound output of management game machine game board: ○
Illumination lighting of management game machine game board: ○
Dedicated unit and hall computer dedicated unit: ○
Dedicated unit and hall computer information output 1 (management game machine error): ×
Information output of dedicated unit and hall computer 2 (illegal): ○
Error release: Power OFF/ON

[No. 28]
Error code: H70
Error name: Illegal ball rental detection Error detection details: A request to add the number of rental balls was received while the card was not being inserted.

[Notification means]
Display device such as the number of game balls in the management machine frame: ○
Game stop of management game machine frame: ○
Sound output of management game machine game board: ○
Illumination lighting of management game machine game board: ○
Dedicated unit and hall computer dedicated unit: ○
Dedicated unit and hall computer information output 1 (management game machine error): ×
Information output of dedicated unit and hall computer 2 (illegal): ○
Error release: Power OFF/ON

[No. 29]
Error code: H71
Error name: Detection of opening of back mechanism at night Contents of error detection: Opening of back mechanism was detected while the power was off.

[Notification means]
Display device such as the number of game balls in the managed game machine frame: ×
Game stop of management game machine frame: ×
Sound output of management game machine game board: ×
Illumination lighting of management game machine game board: ○
Dedicated unit and hall computer dedicated unit: ×
Dedicated unit and hall computer information output 1 (management game machine error): ×
Information output 2 of dedicated unit and hall computer (illegal): ×
Error release: Power OFF/ON

[No. 30]
Error code: H80
Error name: Remaining ball data detection Error detection content: Remaining ball data was detected when the store was moved and installed.

[Notification means]
Display device such as the number of game balls in the management machine frame: ○
Game stop of management game machine frame: ○
Sound output of management game machine game board: ×
Illumination lighting of management game machine game board: ×
Dedicated unit and hall computer dedicated unit: ○
Dedicated unit and hall computer information output 1 (management game machine error): ×
Information output of dedicated unit and hall computer 2 (illegal): ○
Error release: Power OFF/ON

[No. 31]
Error code: H82
Error name: Management game machine game board replacement detection Error detection content: Management game machine game board or night monitoring device replacement was detected while the power was off.

[Notification means]
Display device such as the number of game balls in the managed game machine frame: ×
Game stop of management game machine frame: ×
Sound output of management game machine game board: ×
Illumination lighting of management game machine game board: ○
Dedicated unit and hall computer dedicated unit: ×
Dedicated unit and hall computer information output 1 (management game machine error): ×
Information output 2 of dedicated unit and hall computer (illegal): ×
Error release: Power OFF/ON

[No. 32]
Error code: H83
Error name: Low battery level detection for night monitoring device Error content: Low battery level (10% remaining) of night monitoring device was detected.

[Notification means]
Display device such as the number of game balls in the managed game machine frame: ×
Game stop of management game machine frame: ×
Sound output of management game machine game board: ×
Illumination lighting of management game machine game board: ×
Dedicated unit and hall computer dedicated unit: ×
Dedicated unit and hall computer information output 1 (management game machine error): ×
Information output 2 of dedicated unit and hall computer (illegal): ×
Error release: Power OFF/ON

[No. 33]
Error code: H84
Error name: Night monitoring device disconnection detection Error detection content: Disconnection of the night monitoring device was detected.

[Notification means]
Display device such as the number of game balls in the management machine frame: ○
Game stop of management game machine frame: ×
Sound output of management game machine game board: ×
Illumination lighting of management game machine game board: ○
Dedicated unit and hall computer dedicated unit: ○
Dedicated unit and hall computer information output 1 (management game machine error): ×
Information output of dedicated unit and hall computer 2 (illegal): ○
Error release: Power OFF/ON

[No. 34]
Error code: H85
Error name: Small ball detection Error detection content: A ball of 10.7 mm or less was detected.

[Notification means]
Display device such as the number of game balls in the management machine frame: ○
Game stop of management game machine frame: ○
Sound output of management game machine game board: ×
Illumination lighting of management game machine game board: ×
Dedicated unit and hall computer dedicated unit: ○
Dedicated unit and hall computer information output 1 (management game machine error): ×
Information output of dedicated unit and hall computer 2 (illegal): ○
Error release: Power OFF/ON

[No. 35]
Error code: H86
Error name: Iron ball detected Error detection details: An iron ball was detected.

[Notification means]
Display device such as the number of game balls in the management machine frame: ○
Game stop of management game machine frame: ○
Sound output of management game machine game board: ×
Illumination lighting of management game machine game board: ×
Dedicated unit and hall computer dedicated unit: ○
Dedicated unit and hall computer information output 1 (management game machine error): ×
Information output of dedicated unit and hall computer 2 (illegal): ○
Error release: Power OFF/ON

[No. 36]
Error code: H89
Error name: Inconsistent ball unit price detection Error detection content: Connection of a dedicated unit with a different ball unit price was detected.

[Notification means]
Display device such as the number of game balls in the management machine frame: ○
Game stop of management game machine frame: ○
Sound output of management game machine game board: ×
Illumination lighting of management game machine game board: ×
Dedicated unit and hall computer dedicated unit: ○
Dedicated unit and hall computer information output 1 (management game machine error): ×
Information output of dedicated unit and hall computer 2 (illegal): ○
Error release: automatic recovery

[Regarding notification means]
Game ball display: The error code is displayed on the game ball number display device.
Game stop: The ball feeding function is stopped, and the game becomes impossible.
Information output: In order for the dedicated unit to output information (output to the call computer), the management game machine error and illegal information are notified to the dedicated unit. Information output 1 notifies as a management game machine error. Information output 2 notifies as illegal.

Audio output: Announcing the contents of the abnormality from the speaker, which is another production device.
Illumination lighting: Illumination, which is another production device, is turned on so that an abnormality can be easily detected from the outside.
Dedicated unit: The details of the error are displayed on the touch panel type liquid crystal display of the dedicated unit.

[(xviii) light intensity/volume adjustment function]
[(A) Block diagram]
FIG. 147 is a diagram showing a block diagram of the light amount/sound volume adjustment function.
The management game machine frame 590 includes a sub-connection board 553 and an operating section sub-connection board 553A.
A light amount adjustment switch 958, a volume adjustment switch 960A, an illumination board 962A, and a speaker 964 are connected to the operation section sub-connection board 553A.
The management game machine game board 580 is provided with an effect control board 900 having a sub drawer board 966 and a control circuit 969 .

Information from the sub connection board 553 can be transmitted to the effect control board 900 via the sub drawer board 966 and the control circuit 969 .
Information from the effect control board 900 can be transmitted to the sub connection board 553 via the control circuit 969 and the sub drawer board 966 .

Information from the sub-connection board 553 can be transmitted to the illumination board 962A and the speaker 964 via the operation section sub-connection board 553A.
Information from the light amount adjustment switch 958 and volume adjustment switch 960A can be transmitted to the sub-connection board 553 via the operation section sub-connection board 553A.

[(B) Functional description]
The light intensity/volume adjustment function adjusts the light intensity/volume of the managed gaming machine by the following functions.

[(a) Light quantity adjustment function]
The amount of light of the management game machine is adjusted (up or down) in response to pressing up or down of the light amount adjustment switch mounted on the operation unit.

[(b) Volume adjustment function]
The sound volume of the management game machine is adjusted (up or down) in response to pressing up or down of the sound volume adjustment switch mounted on the operation unit.

[(4) Management game machine game board dimensions]
FIG. 148 is a diagram showing the outer shape of the game board and alignment holes with the management game machine frame.
The vertical length L1 of the game board 8b is, for example, 530 mm.
The horizontal length L2 of the game board 8b is, for example, 479 mm.
The thickness L3 of the game board 8b is, for example, 19.2 mm.

A first alignment hole H1 is formed in the upper right position of the game board 8b, and a second alignment hole H2 is formed in the lower center right position of the game board 8b. Each alignment hole has a diameter R of, for example, 8.1 mm.

A lateral length L4 between the first alignment hole H1 and the second alignment hole H2 is, for example, 110 mm.
A vertical length L5 between the first alignment hole H1 and the second alignment hole H2 is, for example, 505 mm.

A length L6 from the second alignment hole H2 to the left end of the game board 8b is, for example, 286 mm.
A length L7 from the second alignment hole H2 to the lower end of the game board 8b is, for example, 9 mm.

FIG. 149 is a diagram showing the dimensions of the game area.
The maximum length L10 in the vertical direction of the game area 8a is, for example, 499 mm.
The maximum horizontal length L11 of the game area 8a is, for example, 471 mm.

FIG. 150 is a diagram showing the dimensions of the back surface effective area. In addition, (A) in the drawing shows a plan view of the game board 8b, and (B) in the drawing shows a back view of the game board 8b.
As shown in (A) in the drawing, the width L20 of the area in front of the game board 8b where the game ball can flow down is, for example, 18.5 mm.
The length L21 in the front-rear direction of the projecting portion of the right end (the left end in the drawing) behind the game board 8b is, for example, 68.9 mm.

As shown in (B) in the figure, the length L22 from the right end (left end in the figure) of the game board 8b to the left end (right end in the figure) of the game board 8b excluding the protruding part. is, for example, 442 mm.
A length L23 from the first alignment hole H1 to the upper end of the out port 32 of the game board 8b is, for example, 475.5 mm.
A length L24 from the upper end of the out port 32 of the game board 8b to the lower end of the game board 8b is, for example, 37.5 mm.
The lateral length L25 of the projecting portion at the left end (right end in the drawing) of the game board 8b is, for example, 36 mm.

[4. Principle of operation of management game machine]
[(1) Launcher]
FIG. 151 is a diagram showing the configuration of a launcher. In the figure, (A) shows a plan view, (B) shows a front view, (C) shows a right side view, and (D) shows a back view. ing.
Launcher 517 includes launch solenoid 916, punch 960, launch pad 961, ball passage 962, subtraction sensor 920, ball monitoring sensor 963, launch relay board 906, ball feed solenoid 918, link 964, fulcrum 965, launch inlet sensor 922, Includes inlet 966A, ring 967, handle 510, handle volume 910, fire stop switch 912, touch sensor 914 and valve 968.

FIG. 152 is a diagram showing the configuration of the launcher (handle). In the figure, (A) shows a plan view, (B) shows a front view, and (C) shows a right side view.
Handle 510 includes fire stop switch 912 , touch sensor 914 and ring 967 .

FIG. 153 is a diagram showing the principle of operation of the launcher;
The frame control board 550 detects the player's touch sensor 914 detection, firing stop switch 912 detection, and handle volume 910 value. The frame control board 550 having detected the values of the touch sensor 914 and the handle volume 910 drives the ball feed solenoid 918 to send the game ball to the one-ball launch pad 961 .

A game ball sent to the launch pad 961 passes through the subtraction sensor 920 in the ball passage 962 . At this time, the frame control board 550 subtracts the number of balls possessed by the management game machine.
The game ball stops at the launch pad 961, and the frame control board 550 drives the launch solenoid 916, pulls the pestle 960 in the arrow A direction in the figure, and launches the game ball. The fired game ball pushes valve 968 up in the directions of arrows A-1 and A-2. The valve 968 returns to its home position after the playing ball has passed. The strength of firing is controlled by changing the suction force of the firing solenoid 916 by the value of the handle volume 910 .
In addition, when detecting the firing stop switch 912, the frame control board 550 stops (turns OFF) the ball feed solenoid 918 and the firing solenoid 916.

Figures 154 to 156 are diagrams for explaining the operating principle of the ball feeding solenoid to feed out the game ball.

As shown in FIG. 154, playing balls enter through entrance 966B and line up inside ball passage 962. As shown in FIG. The ball feed solenoid 918 driven by the frame control board 550 attracts the link 964, and the link 964 rotates around the fulcrum 965 in the direction of arrow a in FIG. When the link 964 is attracted to the ball feed solenoid 918, the game ball moves in the arrow b direction. The link 964 has a shape in which one ball enters when the part in contact with the game ball is sucked.
The game ball that has entered the inside of the link 964 enters the state shown in FIG. The link 964 rotates in the direction of arrow c around the fulcrum 965, and the game ball moves in the direction of arrow d.

Then, the game ball that has moved in the direction of arrow d moves to the launch pad 961 (see FIG. 151) and is launched by driving the launch solenoid 916 .

[(i) Structure and operating principle of vertical and horizontal swing movement of steering wheel]
A mechanism that enables vertical and horizontal swing movement for the purpose of improving operability can be mounted on the handle body that constitutes the handle.
The swing movement mechanism can be composed of a plurality of rotating plates, latch springs, latch covers, latches, fixed guides, and the like.

As for swing movement in the vertical direction, the handle body moves around the first fulcrum as a rotation axis. Further, regarding swing movement in the left-right direction, the handle body moves around the second fulcrum as a rotation axis.
There are a total of 9 stages of movement points, including the normal state, 1 stage upward, 1 stage downward, 1 stage left, and 1 stage right, as movement intervals. The 9 stages of movement points are (1) normal position, (2) upper position, (3) right position, (4) lower position, (5) left position, (6) upper right position, (7) lower right position, (8) Lower left position, (9) Upper left position.

At each point of movement, the latch engages the stationary guide under the force of the latching spring and the latch latches onto the stationary guide.
When the handle body is swung by the force of the latch coming off, the latch is released from the fixed guide and the handle body moves.
In areas other than each movement point, the latch cover abuts against the fixed guide and cannot be moved. It also stays that way after moving.

[(ii) Structure and operating principle of handle lever position retention in handle lever]
A handle lever that constitutes the handle can be equipped with a function of holding the handle lever for the purpose of improving operability.
The handle lever holding structure consists of a holding lever and a holding link. At the handle, when firing is initiated, the handle lever is rotated clockwise to adjust firing intensity and firing.
When you release the handle lever, the handle lever automatically rotates counterclockwise due to the reaction force of the handle lever spring, the handle returns to the normal position, and firing stops.
When the holding lever is moved in a predetermined direction, the holding lever rotates around the first fulcrum, and the connecting holding link rotates around the second fulcrum in a prescribed direction. By rotating the holding link, the holding link and the handle lever come into contact with each other, and the holding link deforms in the elastic region to apply force to the handle lever. Due to this force, when the handle is rotated, a frictional force is generated at the contact portion between the handle lever and the holding link, and a force that hinders the rotation of the handle acts on the operation of rotating the handle. By making this force equal to or greater than the reaction force of the handle lever spring, the handle lever maintains that state and does not return to the normal position when the hand is released. At this time, in manual rotation, the firing intensity can be adjusted with a force greater than the frictional force.
When the holding lever is rotated in a direction opposite to the predetermined direction, the holding lever rotates about the first fulcrum, the connecting holding link rotates about the second fulcrum in the opposite direction to the predetermined direction, and the handle is rotated. Return to the state where the lever and the gap are vacant.

[(2) Power supply]
〔Schematic〕
FIG. 157 is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of a power supply device used in a managed gaming machine.
Electric power from a commercial power supply (100 VAC) passes through a rectifier circuit 1 and a smoothing circuit 1 to (1) a 24 VDC generator circuit 1, (2) a 12 VDC generator circuit 1, (3) a 5 VDC generator circuit, and (4) power off. It is distributed to the detection circuit (A) and (5) the power failure detection circuit (B), via the rectifier circuit 2 and the smoothing circuit 2, (9) DC24V generation circuit 2, (10) DC12V generation circuit 2, (11) ) is distributed to the DC12V generation circuit 3 .

The power and signals of (1) to (5) above are transmitted to the frame control board 550 . The transmitted power is distributed to (6) RAM clear switch circuit, (7) game ball clear switch circuit, and (8) DC3.3V generation circuit.
The powers (1) to (4) and the signal (6) are sent to the main control board 560 .

The electric powers (9) to (11) are transmitted to the sub-connection board 553 and the operation section sub-connection board 553A. The transmitted power (9) to (11) is transmitted to the effect control board 900, and the power (9) to (11) is transmitted to the front decoration 512 and the operation unit 511.

FIG. 158 is a diagram showing how power sources and signals are used.
The uses of the power sources and signals indicated by numbers (1) to (11) in FIG. 157 are as follows.

Number: (1)
Signal name: DC24V-1
Usage (control game machine frame): Grinding motor, cassette motor Usage (control game machine board): Motor, solenoid

Number: (2)
Signal name: DC12V-1
Usage (management game machine frame): sensor, lifting motor, launch solenoid, ball feed solenoid Usage (management game machine board): sensor, motor, solenoid

Number: (3)
Signal name: DC5V-1
Usage (management game machine frame): IC power supply Usage (management game machine board): IC power supply, CPU power supply

Number: (4)
Signal name: Power failure detection signal A
Purpose of use (management game machine frame): None Purpose of use (management game machine board): Power off detection

Number: (5)
Signal name: Power failure detection signal B
Purpose of use (management game machine frame): Power failure detection Purpose of use (management game machine board): None

Number: (6)
Signal name: RAM clear switch signal Usage (management game machine frame): RAM clear Usage (management game machine board): RAM clear

Number: (7)
Signal name: Game ball clear switch signal Usage (control game machine frame): Game ball clear Usage (control game machine board): None

Number: (8)
Signal name: DC3.3V
Purpose of use (management game machine frame): CPU power supply Purpose of use (management game machine board): None

Number: (9)
Signal name: DC24V-2
Purpose of use (management game machine frame): None Purpose of use (management game machine board): Illumination, motor, other power generation

Number: (10)
Signal name: DC12V-2
Purpose of use (management game machine frame): None Purpose of use (management game machine board): Illumination, motor, other power generation

Number: (11)
Signal name: DC12V-3
Usage (management game machine frame): Illumination, other power generation Usage (management game machine game board): Illumination, motor, other power generation

[(i) Power supply specifications]
[(A) Connector and pin arrangement specifications]
FIG. 159 is a diagram showing connector and pin layout specifications.
(A) The details of the main system output are as follows.
[Pin Nos. 1 and 2]
Signal: GND
Contents: GND

[Pin Nos. 3 and 4]
Signal: DC24V-1
Contents: 24V power supply

[Pin Nos. 5 and 6]
Signal: GND
Contents: GND

[Pin Nos. 7, 8, 9, 10]
Signal: DC12V-1
Contents: 12V power supply

[Pin Nos. 11 and 12]
Signal: GND
Contents: GND

[Pin Nos. 13 and 14]
Signal: DC15V-1
Contents: 5V power supply

[Pin Nos. 15 and 16]
Signal: GND
Contents: GND

[Pin No. 17]
Signal: Power failure detection signal A
Contents: Power-off detection signal for main control board

[Pin No. 18]
Signal: Power failure detection signal B
Contents: Power-off detection signal for frame control board

[Pin Nos. 19 and 20]
Signal: GND
Contents: GND

(B) The details of the sub-system output are as follows.
[Pin Nos. 1 and 2]
Signal: GND
Contents: GND

[Pin Nos. 3, 4, 5, 6]
Signal: DC24V-2
Contents: 24V power supply

[Pin Nos. 7, 8, 9, 10]
Signal: GND
Contents: GND

[Pin Nos. 11 to 16]
Signal: DC12V-2
Contents: 12V power supply (large capacity: for management game machine game board)

[Pin Nos. 17-20]
Signal: GND
Contents: GND

[Pin Nos. 21 to 24]
Signal: DC12V-3
Contents: 12V power supply (small capacity: for management game machine frame)

[Pin Nos. 25 and 26]
Signal: GND
Contents: GND

Details of (C) FG (frame ground) are as follows.
The signal is FG and the content is frame GND.

[(B) Output power supply specifications]
[(a) Main system output]
Three types of three systems (DC5V-1, DC12V-1, DC24V-1) are output as the main system power supply, and the power supply voltage to be output and the number of systems are selected in consideration of the frequently used voltage.

The individual maximum current value of each power supply is 3A for DC5V-1, 6A for DC12V-1, and 3.5A for DC24V-1. However, it is necessary to use the main system total output within 90VA and the power supply unit total output within 180VA.

The maximum current value is the total value of the managed gaming machine game board and the managed gaming machine frame. 1.82A, DC12V-1 has an average current of 0.91A and a maximum current of 3.20A, and DC5V-1 has an average current of 0.50A and a maximum current of 0.90A.

FIG. 160 is a diagram showing specifications of the main system power supply capacity.
[DC24V-1]
Continuous rated load maximum current: 3.5A
Overcurrent operation: 5.5A
Accuracy: ±10%
Ripple noise: 250mV

[DC12V-1]
Continuous rated load maximum current: 6.0A
Overcurrent operation: 8.0A
Accuracy: ±10%
Ripple noise: 200mV

[DC5V-1]
Continuous rated load maximum current: 3.0A
Overcurrent operation: 4.0A
Accuracy: ±5%
Ripple noise: 150mV

[(b) Sub system output]
Two types of three systems (DC12V-2, DC12V-3, DC24V-2) are output as sub-system power supplies, and the output power supply voltage and the number of systems are selected in consideration of the frequently used voltage.
Two systems of DC12V are provided, and DC24V-2 and DC12V-2 are used on the control game machine board, and DC12V-3 is used on the control game machine frame.
However, DC 12V is also supplied to the management game machine game board, and can be used on the management game machine game board side within the capacity range.
In addition, by not providing a DC5V generation circuit in the power supply device, it is possible to increase the output capacity of each power supply.
The maximum current value of each power supply is 8A for DC12V-2, 2A for DC12V-3, and 5A for DC24V-2. It is available.

FIG. 161 is a diagram showing specifications of sub-system power capacity.
[DC24V-2]
Continuous rated load (ambient temperature 50°C): 5.0A
Overcurrent operation: 8.0A
Accuracy: ±10%
Ripple noise: 250mV

[DC12V-2]
Continuous rated load (ambient temperature 50°C): 8.0A
Overcurrent operation: 11.0A
Accuracy: ±10%
Ripple noise: 200mV

[DC12V-3]
Continuous rated load (ambient temperature 50°C): 2.0A
Overcurrent operation: 4.0A
Accuracy: ±10%
Ripple noise: 200mV

[(ii) Backup]
(A) A backup power supply for the main control board is mounted on the main control board. Since the frame control board uses a non-volatile RAM, it does not use a backup power supply.
(B) The power supply monitors the AC power supply, and when detecting a drop in the power supply, transmits a power failure detection signal to the main control board and the frame control board.

(C) Upon receiving the power-off signal, the main control board and the frame control board store the game state in the RAM.
(D) When the power is turned on, a recovery process is performed according to the pressing state of the game ball clear switch and the RAM clear switch mounted on the frame control board. Only the RAM clear switch signal is output from the frame control board to the main control board.

FIG. 162 is a diagram showing items to be backed up.
[Game ball clear switch]
When pressed: Initializes game ball number information and card information.
When not pressed: According to the information stored in the RAM, the game ball number information is returned to the state before the power was cut off.

[RAM clear switch]
When pressed: Initializes the managed gaming machine (excluding gaming machine information and card information).
When not pressed: According to the information stored in the RAM, the game state is returned to the state before the power was turned off.

[Main control board backup items]
(a) Jackpot state (including the number of rounds)
(b) High probability / time saving state (c) Random value of reservation memory (special design, normal design) (d) Error state (e) Unsent command (f) Normal electric accessory, first class special electric accessory

[Backup items for the frame control board]
(a) Number of game balls information (b) Movable information (c) Game information (see interface specifications)
(d) Card information

[(3) Ball polishing device]
FIG. 163 is a diagram showing the structure of the ball polishing device.
The ball polishing device 572 includes a polishing motor 970, a cassette motor 971, a polishing cassette 972, a ball inlet 973, a ball outlet 974, a cassette switch 944, a polishing motor sensor 946, a polishing relay board 904, a movable piece 975, a ball removing lever 976, and an ejection. A passageway 977 and ball outlet 978 are provided.

The frame control board controls the grinding motor 970 and the cassette motor 940 connected to the grinding relay board 904 and detects information from the cassette switch 944 and the grinding motor sensor 946 .
When a game ball enters from the ball entrance 973, the game ball is detected by the grinding entrance sensor 952, and the grinding motor 942 is driven.
Also, when the pressing plate 979 presses the cassette switch 944, it is detected that the polishing cassette 972 is attached.

164 to 167 are diagrams showing the principle of operation of the ball polisher.
As shown in FIG. 164, when the grinding motor 942 is driven by the frame control board 550, the motor gear 980 provided in the grinding motor 942 rotates in the arrow A direction. Gear 1 is a two-stage gear. Gear 1-1 connected to the motor gear rotates in the direction of arrow B, and gear 2 rotates in the direction of arrow C by gear 1-2. A screw 981 is provided on the rotating shaft of the gear 2, and rotates in the direction of arrow C to convey game balls in the direction of arrow D. A rotating plate 982 is provided on the rotating shaft of the gear 2 , and a grinding motor sensor 946 detects driving of the grinding motor 942 .

As shown in FIG. 165, when the cassette motor 940 is driven by the frame control board 550, the motor gear A provided in the cassette motor 940 rotates in the direction of arrow a. Motor gear A and gear B are connected by a worm gear. When the motor gear A rotates in the direction of arrow a, the gear B rotates in the direction of arrow b. When the gear B rotates, the gear C provided on the rotating shaft interlocks with it and rotates in the direction of the arrow b. As the gear C rotates, the coupled cassette gear 983 rotates in the direction of arrow c.

As shown in FIG. 166, the cassette gear 983 rotated in the direction of arrow c by the cassette motor 940 rotates the cloth feed gear G1 fixed on the rotary shaft in the direction of arrow d. The cloth feed gear 1 is connected to the cloth feed gear 2 with the polishing cloth 984 sealed inside the polishing cassette 972 interposed therebetween. As the cloth feed gear 1 rotates in the direction of arrow d, the cloth feed gear 2 rotates in the direction of arrow e, and the polishing cloth moves in the direction of arrow f. The polishing cloth 984 circulates within the cassette because it is connected without any cuts.
By rotating the screw 981 shown in FIG. 164, the game ball is polished by being conveyed while being rubbed with the polishing cloth 984 in the polishing area of the polishing cassette 972 .

As shown in FIG. 167, when the ball extraction lever 976 is rotated in the direction of the arrow α, the game ball is guided to the discharge passage 977 by the movable piece 975 and discharged from the ball discharge port 978 .

[(4) Game ball circulation device]
FIG. 168 is a diagram showing the configuration of a game ball circulation device.
The game ball circulation device 551A includes a ball inlet 985, a lift inlet sensor 934, a lift motor 986A, a screw 981, a lift relay board 928, a lift motor sensor board 929, and a ball outlet 930A.

169 to 171 are diagrams showing the principle of operation of the game ball circulation device.
The frame control board 550 controls the lift motor 932 connected to the lift relay board 928 and detects the lift motor sensor board 929 and the lift entrance sensor 934 . When the game ball enters from the ball entrance, the lift entrance sensor 934 is detected and the lift motor 932 is driven. When the lifting motor 932 rotates, the lifting motor sensor board 929 detects the rotation of the motor through the slit S of the gear G2.

When the lift motor 932 is driven, the motor gear MG provided in the lift motor 932 rotates in the arrow A direction.
When the motor gear MG rotates, the gear G2 rotates in the direction opposite to the arrow A, and the screw gear SG rotates in the arrow A direction. The screw gear SG is provided with a screw 981, and when the screw gear SG rotates, the screw 981 rotates in the arrow A direction. The game ball is conveyed in the direction of arrow B (upper part of the management game machine) by rotating the screw 981 . After being transported in the direction of arrow B, the game ball is ejected from the ejection port and delivered to the launcher.

A game ball entering from the ball entrance 985 rolls and aligns as indicated by an arrow A as shown in FIG. By driving the lift motor 932, the ball feed cam rotates in the arrow B direction.
When the ball feed cam 931 rotates to the position shown in FIG. 171, the game ball is taken into the ball feed cam 931 and transported in the arrow C direction. The conveyed game ball is delivered to the screw 981 shown in FIG.

[(5) Ball rental and return device]
FIG. 172 is a diagram showing a touch panel type liquid crystal display.
A ball lending and returning device (operating unit device) provided in the dedicated unit 700 operates to lend and return the ball of the managed gaming machine.
The operating unit device of the dedicated unit is composed of a touch panel type liquid crystal display 730 .
The touch panel type liquid crystal display device has a ball lending function/returning function in addition to the function of displaying game machine information and the like.

[(i) When touching the ball rental display area]
By touching the ball rental display portion A1, the number information of the number of rental balls is transmitted from the dedicated unit, and the frame control board displays the number of game balls as the number of game balls obtained by adding the number information and the number of game balls. display on the device.
It also receives balance information and displays it in the balance display area A2 in the touch panel type liquid crystal display.
The ball lending display portion A1 is illuminated when the ball is lendable, and is dark when the ball is not lendable.

[(ii) When the return display area is touched]
When the return display portion A3 is touched, the dedicated unit transmits game end information, and the frame control board transmits the game ball number information to the dedicated unit.

[(6) Outer frame security device]
173 and 174 are diagrams showing an outer frame security device.
The outer frame crime prevention device 985A is a structure that prevents a foreign object from being inserted through a gap between a management game machine and a dedicated unit.
The outer frame crime prevention device 985A includes a right plate 986, a left plate 987, a right crime prevention plate 988, a left crime prevention plate 989 and fixing screws N inside the outer frame.
The fixing screw N is loosened, and the right security plate 988 and the left security plate 989 are moved in the direction of the arrow shown in FIG. 174 to an adjustable range. At this time, it collides with the surrounding environment, or can move to the range of movement between the holes in the right security plate 988 and the left security plate 989 . After the movement, the fixing screws N are tightened to fix the right security plate 988 and the left security plate 989 .

[(7) Iron ball detector]
FIG. 175 is a diagram showing an iron ball detection device.
The iron ball detection device 571 has a ball passage 962 , a ball clogging sensor 938 , a release lever 990 and a magnet 991 .
When an iron ball enters the managed game machine, the iron ball is held by a magnet 991 attached to the tip of the release lever 990 .
The game ball and the iron ball in the ball passage remain in the ball passage 962 and the frame control board 550 detects it with the ball clogging sensor 938 .
By moving the release lever 990 in the arrow release direction A, the iron ball is separated from the magnet 991, and the jammed state is released.

[5. Hardware configuration]
[(1) Overall block diagram]
176 to 178 are block diagrams of management gaming machines.
The power supply device 570 has a main switch 310 .
The frame control board 550 (management game machine frame control board) includes a game ball number display 7-segment 311, a ball removal switch 954, an error release switch 956, a game ball clear switch 312, a RAM clear switch 304, a firing strength volume 313, and a handle start. A rotation angle adjustment volume 314 is provided.

The frame control board 550 includes a management game machine frame radio wave sensor 315, a front decoration open switch 316, a night monitoring device 948, a ball jam sensor 938, a winning sensor 555, a non-winning sensor 556, a handle volume 910, a firing stop switch 912, A touch sensor 914, a ball monitoring sensor 963, a launch entrance sensor 922, a subtraction sensor 920, a lifting entrance sensor 934, a lifting motor sensor board 929, a cassette switch 944, a grinding motor sensor 946, and a grinding entrance sensor 952 are connected.
From these members, a SW signal (switch signal) or a VL signal (volume signal, connection confirmation power supply) is transmitted to the frame control board 550 .

In addition, the frame control board 550 is connected to a ball feeding solenoid 918, a firing solenoid 916, a lifting motor 932, a cassette motor 940, a polishing motor 942, and a display device 520 such as the number of game balls.
The frame control board 550 transmits solenoid control signals, motor control signals, and LED control signals to these members.

Furthermore, a counting switch 530 is connected to the frame control board 550 .
A SW signal is transmitted from the counting switch 530 to the frame control board 550 .
Frame control board 550 transmits an LED control signal to counting switch 530 .

Furthermore, the frame control board 550 is connected with a game ball rental device connection terminal board 554 .
The frame control board 550 and the game ball rental device connection terminal board 554 can transmit and receive encrypted control commands.

The frame control board 550 and the main control board 560 (management game machine main control board) can transmit and receive encrypted control commands.
Each winning sensor 555 , the magnet sensor 317 and the radio wave sensor 318 are connected to the main control board 560 .
SW signals are transmitted from these members to the main control board 560 .
The main control board 560 transmits control commands to the effect control board 900 .

The effect control board 900 is connected with a light amount/volume control board 319, other effect switches 320, and a management game machine game board effect sensor 321. FIG.
SW signals are transmitted from these members to the effect control board 900 .
Also, the effect control board 900 is connected with a liquid crystal display 42 for a management game machine game board.
The performance control board 900 transmits an LED control signal to the liquid crystal display 42 for the management game machine game board.

The effect control board 900 is connected with the management game machine frame effect LED board 322 .
The production control board 900 transmits an LED signal to the management game machine frame production LED board 322 .

A speaker 964 is connected to the performance control board 900 .
The effect control board 900 transmits an audio output signal to the speaker 964 .

The effect control board 900 is connected with the managed game machine game board effect LED board 323 .
The effect control board 900 transmits an LED signal to the management game machine game board effect LED board 323 .

A management game machine game board game actuator 324 is connected to the effect control board 900 .
The production control board 900 transmits an actuator control signal to the management game machine game board game actuator 324 .

The main control board 560 is connected to the normal electric accessory solenoid 88 and the big winning opening solenoids 90 and 97 .
The main control board 560 transmits solenoid control signals to these members.

The main display/win display board 325 is connected to the main control board 560 .
The main control board 560 transmits an LED control signal to the main display/win display board 325 .

A dedicated unit 700 is connected to the game ball rental device connection terminal board 554 .
The gaming ball rental device connection terminal board 554 and the dedicated unit 700 can transmit and receive encrypted control commands.

Main power is supplied from the power supply device 570 to the frame control board 550 and the effect control board 900 . Main power is supplied from the frame control board 550 to the main control board 560 .

[(2) Overall circuit diagram]
[Management game machine main system 1]
179 to 184 are diagrams showing the overall circuit diagram of the main system 1 of the managed gaming machine.
[Fig. 179]
The game ball rental device connection terminal plate 554 and the frame control board 550 are connected by a board-to-board connector. The contents of the board-to-board connector are as follows.

[Board-to-board connector]
Pin No. 1: GND
Pin No. 2: GND
Pin No.3: DC5V-1
Pin No.4: DC5V-1
Pin No. 5: Encrypted transmission (+)
Pin No. 6: Encrypted transmission (-)
Pin No. 7: Encryption reception (+)
Pin No. 8: Encryption reception (-)
Pin No. 9: Connection confirmation signal

The game ball lending device connection terminal board 554 also has a 9-pin connector. The contents of the 9-pin connector are as follows.

[9 pin connector]
Pin No. 1: GND
Pin No. 2: Encrypted transmission (-)
Pin No. 3: Encryption reception (-)
Pin No. 4: PSI
Pin No. 5: GND
Pin No. 6: Encrypted transmission (+)
Pin No. 7: Encryption reception (+)
Pin No.8: 5V
Pin No. 9: 5V

The game ball lending device connection terminal plate 554 and the power supply device 570 are connected by a back mechanism ground harness. Also, the power supply device 570 and the polishing relay board 904 are connected by a ground harness of the back mechanism part. The contents of the back mechanism ground harness are as follows. It should be noted that the harness may be other connection parts (connection wires, etc.) (the same applies hereinafter).

[Back mechanism ground harness]
Pin No. 1: FG
Pin No. 2: FG

The power supply device 570 and the management game machine frame 590 are connected by a power ground harness. The contents of the power ground harness are as follows.

[Power ground harness]
Pin No. 1: FG

The power supply device 570 and the commercial power supply are connected by a main power supply harness. The contents of the main power harness are as follows.

[Main power supply harness]
Pin No. 1: AC100VA
Pin No. 2: AC100VB
Pin No. 3: FG

[Fig. 180]
The power supply device 570 and the frame control board 550 are connected by a frame control harness. The contents of the frame control harness are as follows.

[Frame control harness]
Pin No. 1: GND
Pin No. 2: GND
Pin No.3: DC24V-1
Pin No.4: DC24V-1
Pin No. 5: GND
Pin No. 6: GND
Pin No.7: DC12V-1
Pin No.8: DC12V-1
Pin No. 9: DC12V-1
Pin No. 10: DC12V-1
Pin No. 11: GND
Pin No. 12: GND
Pin No. 13: DC5V-1
Pin No. 14: DC5V-1
Pin No. 15: GND
Pin No. 16: GND
Pin No. 17: Power failure detection signal A
Pin No. 18: Power failure detection signal B
Pin No. 19: GND
Pin No. 20: GND

[Fig. 181]
The power supply device 570 and the sub-connection board 553 are connected by a sub-connection harness. The contents of the sub-connection harness are as follows.

[Sub connection harness]
Pin No. 1: GND
Pin No. 2: GND
Pin No.3: DC24V-2
Pin No.4: DC24V-2
Pin No.5: DC24V-2
Pin No. 6: DC24V-2
Pin No.7: GND
Pin No. 8: GND
Pin No. 9: GND
Pin No. 10: GND
Pin No.11: DC12V-2
Pin No.12: DC12V-2
Pin No.13: DC12V-2
Pin No. 14: DC12V-2
Pin No.15: DC12V-2
Pin No. 16: DC12V-2
Pin No. 17: GND
Pin No. 18: GND
Pin No. 19: GND
Pin No. 20: GND
Pin No. 21: DC12V-3
Pin No. 22: DC12V-3
Pin No. 23: DC12V-3
Pin No. 24: DC12V-3
Pin No. 25: GND
Pin No. 26: GND

[Fig. 182]
The frame control board 550 and the operation part relay board 554C are connected by an operation part relay harness. The contents of the operation unit relay harness are as follows.

[Operation part relay harness]
Pin No. 1: GND
Pin No.2: DC5V-1
Pin No.3: DC5V-1
Pin No. 4: UART transmission Pin No. 5: UART reception Pin No. 6: Counting check Pin No. 7: Counting LEDR data Pin No. 8: Counting LEDG data Pin No. 9: Counting LEDB data No.12: Touch sensor Pin No.13: VR1
Pin No. 14: VR2
Pin No. 15: VR3 (GND)
Pin No.16: DC12V-1

[Fig. 183]
The frame control board 550 and the main drawer board 950 are connected by a main drawer connector harness. The contents of the main drawer connector harness are as follows.

[Main Drawer Connector Harness]
Pin No. 1: GND
Pin No. 2: GND
Pin No.3: DC24V-1
Pin No.4: DC24V-1
Pin No.5: DC24V-1
Pin No. 6: DC24V-1
Pin No.7: DC5V-1
Pin No.8: DC5V-1
Pin No. 9: GND
Pin No. 10: GND
Pin No. 11: CEX1 (+)
Pin No. 12: CTX1 (+)
Pin No. 13: CRX1 (-)
Pin No. 14: CTX1 (-)
Pin No. 15: GND
Pin No. 16: RAM clear signal Pin No. 17: Power failure detection signal A
Pin No. 18: Power failure detection signal A
Pin No. 19: Night watch power supply B
Pin No. 20: Night watch power supply B
Pin No. 21: Night watch power supply A
Pin No. 22: Night watch power supply A
Pin No. 23: GND
Pin No. 24: GND

The power supply device 570 and the main drawer board 950 are connected by a predetermined harness. The contents of the predetermined harness are as follows.

[Prescribed harness]
Pin No. 1: FG
Pin No. 2: FG

[Fig. 184]
The operation portion relay board 554C and the pipe management game machine frame radio wave sensor 315 are connected by a radio wave sensor harness. The contents of the radio wave sensor harness are as follows.

[Radio wave sensor harness]
Pin No.1: DC12V-1
Pin No. 2: Radio wave sensor for managed game machine frame Pin No. 3: GND

The operating portion relay board 554C and the game ball count display device 520 are connected by a game ball count display device harness. The contents of the game ball number display device harness are as follows.

[Radio wave sensor harness]
Pin No. 1: GND
Pin No.2: DC5V-1
Pin No.3: DC5V-1
Pin No.4: UART transmission Pin No.5: UART reception Pin No.6: GND

The operation section relay board 554C and the counting switch 530 are connected by a counting switch harness. The contents of the counter switch harness are as follows.

[Counting switch harness]
Pin No. 1: GND
Pin No.2: DC5V-1
Pin No.3: Counting switch Pin No.4: Counting LEDR data Pin No.5: Counting LEDG data Pin No.6: Counting LEDB data Pin No.7: DC12V-1

The operation portion relay board 554C, the firing stop switch 912, the touch sensor 914, and the handle volume 910 are connected by a handle relay harness. The contents of the steering wheel relay harness are as follows.

[Handle relay harness]
Pin No. 1: GND
Pin No.2: Fire stop switch Pin No.3 (Pin No.1): GND
Pin No.4 (Pin No.2): Touch sensor Pin No.5 (Pin No.3): DC12V-1
Pin No. 6 (Pin No. 1): VR1
Pin No.7 (Pin No.2): VR2
Pin No. 8 (Pin No. 3): VR3

[Management game machine main system 2]
185 to 192 are diagrams showing the overall circuit diagram of the main system 2 of the managed gaming machine.
[Fig. 185]
The front decoration open switch 316 and the inner frame relay board 930 are connected by a radio wave sensor harness. The contents of the radio wave sensor harness are as follows.

[Radio wave sensor harness]
Pin No. 1: GND
Pin No. 2: front decoration release switch

The night monitor 948 and the inner frame relay board 930 are connected by a night monitor harness. The contents of the night watch harness are as follows.

[Night watch harness]
Pin No.1: DC5V-1
Pin No. 2: Night watch power supply B
Pin No. 3: Back mechanism release switch Pin No. 4: Night surveillance CS
Pin No. 5: Night Watch CLK
Pin No. 6: Night watch DATA
Pin No. 7: Night watch power supply A
Pin No. 8: GND

The non-winning sensor 556 and the inner frame relay board 930 are connected by a non-winning sensor harness. The contents of the non-winning sensor harness are as follows.

[Non-winning sensor harness]
Pin No. 1: GND
Pin No. 2: Non-winning sensor

The winning sensor 555 and the inner frame relay board 930 are connected by a winning sensor harness. The contents of the winning sensor harness are as follows.

[Winner sensor harness]
Pin No. 1: GND
Pin No. 2: Winning sensor

Ball jam sensor 938 and inner frame relay board 930 are connected by a ball jam sensor harness. The contents of the clogged ball sensor harness are as follows.

[Ball sensor harness]
Pin No. 1: GND
Pin No.2: Clogged ball sensor

[Fig. 186]
The inner frame relay board 930 and the frame control board 550 are connected by an inner frame relay harness. The contents of the inner frame relay harness are as follows.

[Inner frame relay harness]
Pin No. 1: GND
Pin No. 2: Night watch power supply B
Pin No. 3: Night watch power supply A
Pin No.4: DC5V-1
Pin No. 5: Front decoration release switch Pin No. 6: Back mechanism part release switch Pin No. 7: Night surveillance CS
Pin No. 8: Night Watch CLK
Pin No. 9: Night watch DATA
Pin No. 10: Non-winning sensor Pin No. 11: Winning sensor Pin No. 12: Clogged ball sensor

The frame control board 550 also has a 4-pin connector and a 10-pin connector. The contents of the 4-pin connector and the 10-pin connector are as follows.

[4 pin connector]
Pin No. 1: GND
Pin No.2: Inquiry sync signal Pin No.3: Inquiry data signal Pin No.4: GND

[10-pin connector]
Pin No. 1: Test data 1 for test firing test
Pin No. 2: test data 2 of the test firing test
Pin No. 3: test data 3 of the test firing test
Pin No. 4: test data 4 of the test firing test
Pin No. 5: test data 5 of the test firing test
Pin No. 6: test data 6 of the test firing test
Pin No. 7: test data 7 of the test firing test
Pin No. 8: test data 8 of the test firing test
Pin No. 9: GND
Pin No. 10: GND

[Fig. 187]
The inner frame relay board 930 and the polishing relay board 904 are connected by a polishing relay harness. The contents of the polishing relay harness are as follows.

[Grinding relay harness]
Pin No. 1: GND
Pin No. 2: GND
Pin No. 3: GND_B
Pin No.4: DC5V-1
Pin No.5: DC12V-1A
Pin No.6: DC12V-1A
Pin No.7: DC12V-1B
Pin No. 8: Grinding inlet sensor Pin No. 9: Cassette switch Pin No. 10: Grinding motor sensor Pin No. 11: Lifting motor sensor Pin No. 12: Lifting inlet sensor Pin No. 13: Launch inlet sensor Pin No. 14: Subtraction sensor Pin No. 15: Ball monitoring sensor Pin No. 16 : Grinding motor A phase (+)
Pin No. 17: Grinding motor A phase (-)
Pin No. 18: Grinding motor B phase (+)
Pin No. 19: Grinding motor B phase (-)
Pin No. 20: Cassette motor A phase (+)
Pin No. 21: Cassette motor A phase (-)
Pin No. 22: Cassette motor B phase (+)
Pin No. 23: Cassette motor B phase (-)
Pin No.24: Lifting motor A phase Pin No.25: Lifting motor B phase Pin No.26: Lifting motor C phase Pin No.27: Lifting motor D phase Pin No.28: Ball feed solenoid Pin No.29: Launch solenoid (+)
Pin No. 30: Launch solenoid (+)
Pin No. 31: Launch solenoid (-)
Pin No. 32: Launch solenoid (-)

[Fig. 188]
The polishing entrance sensor 952 and the polishing relay substrate 904 are connected by a polishing entrance sensor harness. The contents of the polish inlet sensor harness are as follows.

[Grinding inlet sensor harness]
Pin No. 1: GND
Pin No. 2: Grinding inlet sensor

The cassette switch 944 and the polishing relay board 904 are connected by a cassette switch harness. The contents of the cassette switch harness are as follows.

[Cassette switch harness]
Pin No. 1: GND
Pin No.2: Cassette switch

The grinding motor sensor 946 and the grinding relay board 904 are connected by a grinding motor sensor harness. The contents of the grinding motor sensor harness are as follows.

[Grinding motor sensor harness]
Pin No.1: DC5V-1
Pin No. 2: GND
Pin No. 3: Grinding motor sensor

The power supply device 570 and the polishing relay board 904 are connected by a back mechanism ground harness. The contents of the back mechanism ground harness are as follows.

[Back mechanism ground harness]
Pin No. 1: FG

[Fig. 189]
The polishing relay board 904 and the firing relay board 906 are connected by a firing relay harness. The contents of the launch relay harness are as follows.

[Launch relay harness]
Pin No. 1: GND_B
Pin No.2: Launch sensor Pin No.3: Subtraction sensor Pin No.4: Ball monitoring sensor Pin No.5: DC12V-1A
Pin No. 6: DC12V-1B
Pin No.7: Ball Feed Solenoid Pin No.8: Launch Solenoid (+)
Pin No. 9: Launch solenoid (-)

The polishing relay board 904 and the lifting relay board 928 are connected by a lifting relay harness. The contents of the lifting relay harness are as follows.

[Lifting relay harness]
Pin No. 1: GND
Pin No.2: Lifting inlet sensor Pin No.3: Lifting motor sensor Pin No.4: DC5V-1
Pin No.5: Lifting motor D-phase Pin No.6: Lifting motor C-phase Pin No.7: DC12V-1A
Pin No.8: DC12V-1A
Pin No.9: Lifting motor B phase Pin No.10: Lifting motor A phase

The polishing relay board 904 and the cassette motor 940 are connected by a cassette motor harness. The contents of the cassette motor harness are as follows.

[Cassette motor harness]
Pin No. 1: Cassette motor A phase (+)
Pin No. 2: Cassette motor A phase (-)
Pin No. 3: Cassette motor B phase (+)
Pin No. 4: Cassette motor B phase (-)

The polishing relay board 904 and the polishing motor 942 are connected by a polishing motor harness. The contents of the grinding motor harness are as follows.

[Grinding motor harness]
Pin No. 1: Grinding motor A phase (+)
Pin No. 2: Grinding motor A phase (-)
Pin No. 3: Grinding motor B phase (+)
Pin No. 4: Grinding motor B phase (-)

The polishing relay board 904 and the polishing motor 942 are connected by a polishing ground harness. The contents of the abrasive ground harness are as follows.

[Polished ground harness]
Pin No. 1: FG (connected to the board fixing screw)

[Fig. 191]
The launch relay board 906 and the launch entrance sensor 922 are connected by a launch entrance sensor harness. The contents of the launch entrance sensor harness are as follows.

[Launch entrance sensor harness]
Pin No.1: DC12V-1B
Pin No.2: Emission entrance sensor Pin No.3: GND_B

The launch relay board 906 and the ball monitoring sensor 963 are connected by a ball monitoring sensor harness. The contents of the ball-monitoring sensor harness are as follows.

[Ball monitoring sensor harness]
Pin No.1: DC12V-1B
Pin No.2: ball monitoring sensor Pin No.3: GND_B

The launch relay board 906 and the subtraction sensor 920 are connected by a subtraction sensor harness. The contents of the subtraction sensor harness are as follows.

[Subtraction sensor harness]
Pin No.1: DC12V-1B
Pin No.2: Subtraction sensor Pin No.3: GND_B

The firing relay board 906 and the ball feed solenoid 918 are connected by a ball feed solenoid harness. The contents of the ball feed solenoid harness are as follows.

[Ball feed solenoid harness]
Pin No.1: DC12V-1A
Pin No.2: Ball feed solenoid

The firing relay board 906 and the firing solenoid 916 are connected by a firing solenoid harness. The contents of the launch solenoid harness are as follows:

[Launch solenoid harness]
Pin No. 1: Launch solenoid (+)
Pin No. 2: Launch solenoid (-)

[Fig. 192]
The lifting relay board 928 and the lifting entrance sensor 934 are connected by a lifting entrance sensor harness. The contents of the lifting inlet sensor harness are as follows.

[Lifting entrance sensor harness]
Pin No.1: DC12V-1B
Pin No.2: Lifting inlet sensor

The lifting relay board 928 and the lifting motor sensor board 929 are connected by a lifting motor sensor board harness. The contents of the lifting motor sensor board harness are as follows.

[Lifting motor sensor board harness]
Pin No.1: DC5V-1
Pin No.2: Lifting motor sensor Pin No.3: GND

The lifting relay board 928 and the lifting motor 932 are connected by a lifting motor harness. The contents of the lifting motor harness are as follows.

[Lifting motor harness]
Pin No.1: Lifting motor A phase Pin No.2: Lifting motor B phase Pin No.3: DC12V-1A
Pin No. 4: DC12V-1A
Pin No.5: Lifting motor C-phase Pin No.6: Lifting motor D-phase

The lifting relay board 928 and the lifting motor 932 are connected by a lifting earth harness. The contents of the lifting earth harness are as follows.

[Lifting earth harness]
Pin No. 1: FG (connected to the board fixing screw)

[Sub system]
193 to 197 are diagrams showing overall circuit diagrams of the management game machine subsystem.
[Fig. 193]
The main control board 560 and the effect control board 900 are connected by a predetermined harness. The contents of the predetermined harness are as follows.

[Prescribed harness]
Pin No. 1: GND
Pin No. 2: Production control signal TXB
Pin No. 3: GND

The performance control board 900 and the management game machine game board illumination and speaker 326 (other devices for performance) are connected by a management game machine game board illumination and speaker harness.

The performance control board 900 and the management game machine game board liquid crystal display 42 (other devices for performance) are connected by a management game machine game board liquid crystal display harness (other devices for performance).

The effect control board 900 and the sub drawer board 966 are connected by a sub drawer harness.

[Fig. 194]
The power supply device 570 and the sub-connection board 553 are connected by a sub-connection harness. The contents of the sub-connection harness are as follows.

[Sub connection harness]
Pin No. 1: GND
Pin No. 2: GND
Pin No.3: DC24V-2
Pin No.4: DC24V-2
Pin No.5: DC24V-2
Pin No. 6: DC24V-2
Pin No.7: GND
Pin No. 8: GND
Pin No. 9: GND
Pin No. 10: GND
Pin No.11: DC12V-2
Pin No.12: DC12V-2
Pin No.13: DC12V-2
Pin No. 14: DC12V-2
Pin No.15: DC12V-2
Pin No. 16: DC12V-2
Pin No. 17: GND
Pin No. 18: GND
Pin No. 19: GND
Pin No. 20: GND
Pin No. 21: DC12V-3
Pin No. 22: DC12V-3
Pin No. 23: DC12V-3
Pin No. 24: DC12V-3
Pin No. 25: GND
Pin No. 26: GND

[Fig. 195]
The sub drawer board 966 and the sub connection board 553 are connected by a sub drawer connector harness. The contents of the sub-drawer connector harness are as follows.

[Sub Drawer Connector Harness]
Pin No. 1: GND
Pin No. 2: GND
Pin No.3: DC24V-2
Pin No.4: DC24V-2
Pin No.5: DC24V-2
Pin No. 6: DC24V-2
Pin No.7: GND
Pin No. 8: GND
Pin No. 9: DC12V-2
Pin No. 10: DC12V-2
Pin No.11: DC12V-2
Pin No.12: DC12V-2
Pin No.13: DC12V-2
Pin No. 14: DC12V-2
Pin No. 15: GND
Pin No. 16: GND
Pin No. 17: DC12V-3
Pin No. 18: DC12V-3
Pin No. 19: GND
Pin No. 20: GND
Pin No. 21: GND
Pin No. 22: CS1
Pin No. 23: SCK1
Pin No. 24: SOD1
Pin No. 25: GND
Pin No. 26: CS2
Pin No. 27: SCK2
Pin No. 28: SOD2
Pin No. 29: GND
Pin No. 30: CLK
Pin No. 31: RXD
Pin No. 32: LOAD
Pin No. 33: SP3 (+)
Pin No. 34: SP3 (-)
Pin No. 35: SP2 (+)
Pin No. 36: SP2 (-)
Pin No. 37: SP1 (+)
Pin No. 38: SP1 (-)
Pin No. 39: GND
Pin No. 40: GND

[Fig. 196]
The sub-connection board 553 and the operation section sub-connection board 553A are connected by an operation section sub-connection harness. The contents of the operation unit sub-connection harness are as follows.

[Control sub-connection harness]
Pin No. 1: GND
Pin No. 2: GND
Pin No.3: DC12V-3
Pin No. 4: DC12V-3
Pin No. 5: GND
Pin No. 6: GND
Pin No.7: GND
Pin No. 8: CS1
Pin No. 9: SCK1
Pin No. 10: SOD1
Pin No. 11: GND
Pin No. 12: CS2
Pin No. 13: SCK2
Pin No. 14: SOD2
Pin No. 15: GND
Pin No. 16: CLK
Pin No. 17: RXD
Pin No. 18: LOAD
Pin No. 19: SP3 (+)
Pin No. 20: SP3 (-)
Pin No. 21: SP2 (+)
Pin No. 22: SP2 (-)
Pin No. 23: SP1 (+)
Pin No. 24: SP1 (-)
Pin No. 25: GND
Pin No. 26: GND
Pin No. 27: GND
Pin No. 28: GND

[Fig. 197]
The operating section sub-connection board 553A and the front decoration electric decoration, dots, and speaker 327 (other device for presentation) are connected by front decoration electric decoration harness.

The operation section sub-connection board 553A and the light amount/volume adjustment board 319 are connected by a light amount/volume adjustment harness.

The operating section sub-connection board 553A and the other effect switch 328 (other effect device) are connected by another effect switch harness.

[Management game machine game board main system]
198 to 203 are diagrams showing the overall circuit diagram of the main system of the managed game machine game board.

[Fig. 198]
The count switch 1 and the switch relay board 330 are connected by a count switch 1 harness. The contents of the count switch 1 harness are as follows.

[Count switch 1 harness]
Pin No. 1: GND
Pin No.2: Count switch 1

The count switch 2 and the switch relay board 330 are connected by a count switch 2 harness. The contents of the count switch 2 harness are as follows.

[Count switch 2 harness]
Pin No. 1: GND
Pin No. 2: Count switch 2

The gate switch 1 and the switch relay board 330 are connected by the gate switch 1 harness. The contents of the gate switch 1 harness are as follows.

[Gate switch 1 harness]
Pin No. 1: GND
Pin No.2: Gate switch 1

The normal winning opening switch 1 and the switch relay board 330 are connected by a normal winning opening switch 1 harness. The contents of the normal winning opening switch 1 harness are as follows.

[Normal winning gate switch 1 harness]
Pin No. 1: GND
Pin No. 2: Normal winning slot switch 1
Pin No.3: DC5V-1

The normal winning opening switch 2 and the switch relay board 330 are connected by a normal winning opening switch 2 harness. The contents of the ordinary winning opening switch 2 harness are as follows.

[Normal prize mouth switch 2 harness]
Pin No. 1: GND
Pin No. 2: Normal winning slot switch 2
Pin No.3: DC5V-1

[Fig. 199]
The magnetic sensor and the switch relay board 330 are connected by the magnetic sensor 1 harness. The contents of the magnetic sensor 1 harness are as follows.

[Magnetic sensor 1 harness]
Pin No.1: DC5V-1
Pin No.2: Magnetic sensor signal 1
Pin No. 3: SELECT1
Pin No. 4: SELECT2
Pin No. 5: GND

The radio wave sensor 1 and the switch relay board 330 are connected by a radio wave sensor signal 1 harness. The contents of the radio wave sensor signal 1 harness are as follows.

[Radio wave sensor signal 1 harness]
Pin No. 1: GND
Pin No.2: Radio wave sensor signal 1

The big winning opening solenoid and the switch relay board 330 are connected by a predetermined harness. The contents of the predetermined harness are as follows.

[Prescribed harness]
Pin No.1: Grand Prize Opening Solenoid Pin No.2: DC12V-1

The ordinary electric accessory solenoid and the switch relay board 330 are connected by a prescribed harness. The contents of the prescribed harness are as follows.

[Regulated harness]
Pin No. 1: Ordinary electric accessory solenoid Pin No. 2: DC12V-1

[Fig. 200]
The starter switch 1 and the main control board 560 are connected by the starter switch 1 harness. The contents of the starting port switch 1 harness are as follows.

[Starting port switch 1 harness]
Pin No. 1: Start switch 1
Pin No.2: DC5V-1

The starter switch 2 and the main control board 560 are connected by the starter switch 2 harness. The contents of the starting port switch 2 harness are as follows.

[Starting port switch 2 harness]
Pin No. 1: Start switch 2
Pin No.2: DC5V-1

The switch relay board 330 and the main control board 560 are connected by a switch relay harness. The contents of the switch relay harness are as follows.

[Switch relay harness]
Pin No.1: DC5V-1
Pin No.2: Count switch 1
Pin No.3: Count switch 2
Pin No. 4: Gate switch 1
Pin No. 5: Ordinary winning slot switch 1
Pin No. 6: Normal winning slot switch 2
Pin No.7: DC12V-1
Pin No. 8: Ordinary electric accessories solenoid Pin No. 9: Grand winning opening solenoid Pin No. 10: Magnet sensor signal 1
Pin No. 11: Radio wave sensor signal 1
Pin No. 12: GND

[Fig. 201]
The main control board 560 and the performance control board 900 are connected by a performance command harness. The contents of the production command harness are as follows.

[Direction command harness]
Pin No. 1: GND
Pin No. 2: Production control signal TXB
Pin No. 3: GND

The main control board 560 and the main display/winning display board 325 are connected by a main display/winning display harness. The contents of the main display/winning display harness are as follows.

[Main display/winning display harness]
Pin No. 1: Main display data 0
Pin No. 2: Main display data 1
Pin No. 3: Main display data 2
Pin No. 4: Main display data 3
Pin No. 5: Main display data 4
Pin No. 6: Main display data 5
Pin No.7: Main display data 6
Pin No. 8: Main display data 7
Pin No. 9: Main display common 0
Pin No. 10: Main display common 1
Pin No. 11: Main display common 2
Pin No. 12: Main display common 3
Pin No. 13: Winning display data 1
Pin No. 14: Winning display data 2
Pin No. 15: Winning display data 3
Pin No.16: DC12V-1

[Fig. 202]
The main control board 560 and the main drawer board 950 are connected by a main control harness. The contents of the main control harness are as follows.

[Main control harness]
Pin No. 1: GND
Pin No. 2: GND
Pin No.3: DC24V-1
Pin No.4: DC24V-1
Pin No.5: DC12V-1
Pin No. 6: DC12V-1
Pin No.7: DC5V-1
Pin No.8: DC5V-1
Pin No. 9: GND
Pin No. 10: GND
Pin No. 11: CRX1 (+)
Pin No. 12: CTX1 (+)
Pin No. 13: CRX1 (-)
Pin No. 14: CTX1 (-)
Pin No. 15: GND
Pin No. 16: RAM clear signal Pin No. 17: Power failure detection signal A
Pin No. 18: Power failure detection signal A
Pin No. 19: Night watch power supply B
Pin No. 20: Night watch power supply B
Pin No. 21: Night watch power supply A
Pin No. 22: Night watch power supply A
Pin No. 23: GND
Pin No. 24: GND

[Fig. 203]
The main drawer board 950 and the main drawer connector 326 are connected by a main drawer harness. The contents of the main drawer harness are as follows.

[Main Drawer Harness]
Pin No. 1: GND
Pin No. 2: GND
Pin No.3: DC24V-1
Pin No.4: DC24V-1
Pin No.5: DC12V-1
Pin No. 6: DC12V-1
Pin No.7: DC5V-1
Pin No.8: DC5V-1
Pin No. 9: GND
Pin No. 10: GND
Pin No. 11: CRX1 (+)
Pin No. 12: CTX1 (+)
Pin No. 13: CRX1 (-)
Pin No. 14: CTX1 (-)
Pin No. 15: GND
Pin No. 16: RAM clear signal Pin No. 17: Power failure detection signal A
Pin No. 18: Power failure detection signal A
Pin No. 19: Night watch power supply B
Pin No. 20: Night watch power supply B
Pin No. 21: Night watch power supply A
Pin No. 22: Night watch power supply A
Pin No. 23: GND
Pin No. 24: GND

The management game machine game board 580 and the main drawer connector 326 are connected by a management game machine game board ground harness.

[(3) Interface specifications]
[(i) main control board-frame control board interface]
A 26-pin drawer connector connects between the main control board and the frame control board, which is the main system of the management game machine game board and the management game machine frame. The pin arrangement specifications and configuration of the connector are as follows.

[(A) Connector pin layout specifications]
FIG. 204 is a diagram showing connector pin layout specifications.
[Pin Nos. 1 and 2]
Signal: GND
Contents: GND
Active:-
specification:-

[Pin Nos. 3 and 4]
Signal: DC24V-1
Contents: 24V power supply Active: -
specification:-

[Pin Nos. 5 and 6]
Signal: DC12V-1
Contents: 12V power supply Active: -
specification:-

[Pin Nos. 7 and 8]
Signal: DC5V-1
Contents: 5V power supply Active: -
specification:-

[Pin Nos. 9 and 10]
Signal: GND
Contents: GND
Active:-
specification:-

[Pin No. 11]
Signal: CRX1 (+) (*1)
Description: Positive phase signal sent from the main control board to the frame control board Active: L (*2)
Specifications: Pulled up to 5V with 4.7KΩ

[Pin No. 12]
Signal: CTX1 (+) (*1)
Description: Positive phase signal sent from the frame control board to the main control board Active: L (*2)
Specifications: Open collector output (*5)

[Pin No. 13]
Signal: CRX1 (-) (*1)
Description: Negative phase signal sent from the main control board to the frame control board Active: H (*2)
Specifications: Pulled up to 5V with 4.7KΩ

[Pin No. 14]
Signal: CTX1 (-) (*1)
Description: Negative phase signal sent from the frame control board to the main control board Active: H (*2)
Specifications: Open collector output (*5)

[Pin No. 15]
Signal: GND
Contents: GND
Active:-
specification:-

[Pin No. 16]
Signal: RAM clear signal Contents: RAM clear signal for main control Active: L (*2)
Specifications: Open collector output (*5)

[Pin Nos. 17 and 18]
Signal: Power-off output signal A (*4)
Description: Power failure detection signal for main control board Active: L
Specifications: 5V CMOS output

[Pin Nos. 19 and 20]
Signal: Night monitor power source B (*3)
Contents: Night monitoring device power supply returned from the management game machine board to the management game machine frame Active: -
specification:-

[Pin Nos. 21 and 22]
Signal: Night monitor power source A (*3)
Contents: Night monitoring device power supply sent from the management game machine board to the management game machine frame Active: -
specification:-

[Pin Nos. 23 and 24]
Signal: GND
Contents: GND
Active:-
specification:-

[Pin Nos. 25 and 26]
Signal: FG
Contents: Frame GND
Active:-
specification:-

(*1) The definition of active is the frame control board input section (pull-up resistor).
(*2) The definition of active is the main control board input section.
(*3) The power supply for the night monitoring device is a looped connection on the management game machine game board (main control board side). The power supply for the night monitoring device cannot be used on the management game machine board.

(*4) CRX1(+), CTX1(+), CRX1(1), and CTX1(-) use a differential interface built into the CPU.
At least one side of the differential signal at the CPU output terminal must be pulled down or open.
The deviation of the differential signal at the CPU input terminal must be less than 20% of the communication speed (38461.53 bps).
(*5) When pulling up on the main control board side, the power supply voltage must be 5V and the pull-up resistance must be 1KΩ or more.

FIG. 205 is a diagram showing reset signals.
At time t, when the power-off detection signal B of the frame control board turns ON, the frame control CPU reset signal turns ON after a predetermined time T1 (minimum: 150 ms, maximum: 250 ms) has elapsed.
At time t, when the power-off detection signal A of the main control board turns ON, the main control CPU reset signal turns ON after a predetermined time T2 (minimum: 300 ms, maximum: 600 ms) has elapsed.

(*6) It is necessary to release the reset of the main control CPU within 300ms to 600ms after the power failure detection signal rises. Due to CPU restrictions, the reset release timing of the main control CPU must be less than 500ms from the reset release timing of the frame control CPU. The frame control CPU reset signal is generated 150 ms to 250 ms after the power failure detection signal.

[(B) Circuit configuration]
The configuration of the interface between the main control board and the frame control board is as follows.
FIG. 206 is a diagram showing a circuit configuration when the FG of the management game machine game board is connected from the main drawer board without going through the main control board.
The main control board 560 transmits CRX1(+) and CRX1(-) to the CPU of the frame control board 550 via the main drawer board 950, a predetermined resistance, and a non-inverting buffer using an open collector output.

The CPU of the frame control board 550 transmits CTX1(+) and CTX1(-) to the main control board 560 via a predetermined circuit (amplifier, etc.), a predetermined circuit, and the main drawer board 950 .

A RAM clear signal from the RAM clear switch 304 of the frame control board 550 is transmitted to the main control board 560 via a predetermined resistor, a predetermined circuit, and the main drawer board 950 .

Night monitoring device A and night monitoring device B from the night monitoring device power supply 949 of the night monitoring device 948 are transmitted to the main control board 560 via the main drawer board 950 and transmitted via the main drawer board 950 to the night monitoring device. It is sent to monitoring device 948 .

The power supply device 570 transmits a power failure detection signal to the main control board 560 via the main drawer board 950 using a normal buffer and a predetermined resistance.
The power supply device 570 transmits DC 24V-1 to the main control board 560 via the main drawer board 950 .
The power supply device 570 transmits DC 12V-1 to the main control board 560 via the main drawer board 950 .
The power supply device 570 transmits DC 5V-1 to the main control board 560 via the main drawer board 950 .
The power supply device 570, the main drawer board 950 and the main control board 560 are connected by GND.
The power supply device 570, the main drawer board 950, and the management game machine game board FG connection section 568 are connected by FG.
The management game machine game board FG connection portion 568 and the main drawer board 950 are connected by an FG harness.
The FG connection between the management game machine game board and the management game machine frame may be a harness connection, or may be configured to be connected by a structure other than the harness connection.

FIG. 207 is a diagram showing a circuit configuration when the FG of the management game machine game board is connected from the main drawer board via the main control board.
The main control board 560 transmits CRX1(+) and CRX1(-) to the CPU of the frame control board 550 via the main drawer board 950, a predetermined resistance, and a non-inverting buffer using an open collector output.

The CPU of the frame control board 550 sends CTX1(+) and CTX1(-) to the main control board 560 via a predetermined circuit (amplifier, etc.), a predetermined circuit, a circuit equivalent to HC07, and the main drawer board 950. Send.

A RAM clear signal from the RAM clear switch 304 of the frame control board 550 is sent to the main control board 560 via a predetermined resistor, a circuit equivalent to HC07, and the main drawer board 950 .

Night monitoring device A and night monitoring device B from the night monitoring device power supply 949 of the night monitoring device 948 are transmitted to the main control board 560 via the main drawer board 950 and are transmitted via the main drawer board 950 to the night monitoring device. It is sent to monitoring device 948 .

The power supply device 570 transmits a power failure detection signal to the main control board 560 via the main drawer board 950 using a normal buffer and a predetermined resistance.
The power supply device 570 transmits DC 24V-1 to the main control board 560 via the main drawer board 950 .
The power supply device 570 transmits DC 12V-1 to the main control board 560 via the main drawer board 950 .
The power supply device 570 transmits DC 5V-1 to the main control board 560 via the main drawer board 950 .
The power supply device 570, the main drawer board 950 and the main control board 560 are connected by GND.
The power supply device 570, the main drawer board 950, the main control board 560, and the management game machine game board FG connection section 568 are connected by FG.
The power supply device 570 and the main drawer board 950 are connected to the management game machine game board FG connection section 568 via the main control board 560 .
The FG connection between the management game machine game board and the management game machine frame may be a harness connection, or may be configured to be connected by a structure other than the harness connection.

[(ii) production control board - other device interface for production]
A 40-pin drawer connector connects between the management game machine game board and the production control board which is a sub-system of the management game machine frame and other production devices. The pin arrangement specifications and configuration of the connector on the managed gaming machine frame side are as follows.

[(A) Connector pin layout specifications]
FIG. 208 is a diagram showing connector pin layout specifications.
[Pin Nos. 1 and 2]
Signal: GND
Contents: GND
Active:-
specification:-

[Pin Nos. 3, 4, 5, 6]
Signal: DC24V-2
Contents: 24V power supply Active: -
specification:-

[Pin Nos. 7 and 8]
Signal: GND
Contents: GND
Active:-
specification:-

[Pin Nos. 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14]
Signal: DC12V-2
Contents: 12V power supply (large capacity: for management game machine game board)
Active:-
specification:-

[Pin Nos. 15 and 16]
Signal: GND
Contents: GND
Active:-
specification:-

[Pin Nos. 17 and 18]
Signal: DC12V-3
Contents: 12V power supply (small capacity: for management game machine frame)
Active:-
specification:-

[Pin Nos. 19 and 20]
Signal: GND
Contents: GND
Active:-
specification:-

[Pin No. 21]
Signal: GND
Contents: GND
Active:-
specification:-

[Pin No. 22]
Signal: CS1
Description: Front decoration chip select signal Active: L
Specifications: 5VCMOS

[Pin No. 23]
Signal: SCK1
Description: Front decoration clock signal Active: L
Specifications: 5VCMOS

[Pin No. 24]
Signal: SOD1
Contents: Front decoration data signal Active: L
Specifications: 5VCMOS

[Pin No. 25]
Signal: GND
Contents: GND
Active:-
specification:-

[Pin No. 26]
Signal: CS2
Contents: Front decoration dot chip select signal Active: L
Specifications: 5VCMOS

[Pin No. 27]
Signal: SCK2
Contents: Front decoration dot clock signal Active: L
Specifications: 5VCMOS

[Pin No. 28]
Signal: SOD2
Description: Data signal for front decoration dot Active: L
Specifications: 5VCMOS

[Pin No. 29]
Signal: GND
Contents: GND
Active:-
specification:-

[Pin No. 30]
Signal: CLK
Contents: Clock signal for other production devices Active: H
Specifications: 5VCMOS

[Pin No. 31]
Signal: RXD
Contents: Other production device reception signal Active: H
Specifications: 5VCMOS

[Pin No. 32]
Signal: LOAD
Contents: Load signal for other production devices Active: H
Specifications: 5VCMOS

[Pin No. 33]
Signal: SP3 (+) (*1)
Contents: Spare terminal (voice)
Active:-
specification:-

[Pin No. 34]
Signal: SP3 (-) (*1)
Contents: Spare terminal (voice)
Active:-
specification:-

[Pin No. 35]
Signal: SP2 (+) (*2)
Contents: Other equipment for production Audio signal left (+ side)
Active:-
specification:-

[Pin No. 36]
Signal: SP2 (-) (*2)
Contents: Other equipment for production Audio signal left (- side)
Active:-
specification:-

[Pin No. 37]
Signal: SP1 (+) (*2)
Contents: Other production equipment Sound signal right (+ side)
Active:-
specification:-

[Pin No. 38]
Signal: SP1 (-) (*2)
Contents: Other devices for production Sound signal right (- side)
Active:-
specification:-

[Pin Nos. 39 and 40]
Signal: GND
Contents: GND
Active:-
specification:-

(*1) If it is prepared for expansion, it may be unused. In this case, empty terminal processing is required on the side of the management game machine game board.
(*2) SP1 is the audio right and SP2 is the audio left.

[(B) Circuit configuration]
FIG. 209 is a diagram showing a circuit configuration of an interface between the production control board and other production devices.
The configuration of the effect control board and the interface between other devices for effect is as follows.
The audio amplifier circuit of the production control board 900 transmits SP1+ and SP1- to the front decoration 512 and the speaker 1 of the operation unit 511 via the drawer connector relay board 280 and the management game machine frame sub-system relay board 281. .

The audio amplifier circuit of the production control board 900 transmits SP2+ and SP2- to the front decoration 512 and the speaker 2 of the operation unit 511 via the drawer connector relay board 280 and the management game machine frame sub-system relay board 281. .

A predetermined circuit of the effect control board 900 transmits SOD1, SCK1 and CS1 to the front decoration 512 and the LED driver of the operation unit 511 via the drawer connector relay board 280 and the management game machine frame sub-system relay board 281. .

A predetermined circuit of the effect control board 900 transfers SOD2, SCK2, and CS2 to the front decoration 512 and the dot display section (LED driver).

A predetermined circuit of the effect control board 900 transmits LOAD, RXD, and CLK via the drawer connector relay board 280 and the management game machine frame sub-system relay board 281 to the front decoration 512 and other effect switches and light intensity of the operation unit 511.・Send to the volume control switch.

The power supply device 570 transmits DC 12V-3 to the front decoration 512 and the operation unit 511 via the management game machine frame sub-system relay board 281 .
The power supply device 570 transmits DC12V-3 to the effect control board 900 via the management game machine frame sub system relay board 281 and the drawer connector relay board 280 .
The power supply device 570 transmits DC12V-2 to the effect control board 900 via the management game machine frame sub-system relay board 281 and the drawer connector relay board 280 .
The power supply device 570 transmits DC24V-2 to the effect control board 900 via the management game machine frame sub-system relay board 281 and the drawer connector relay board 280 .
The effect control board 900, the drawer connector relay board 280, the management game machine frame sub-system relay board 281, and the power supply device 570 are connected by GND.

[(C) Overview of light intensity, volume adjustment and other switch functions for production]
(a) Specifications The light intensity, volume control and other production switches correspond to the 30-pin (CLK), 31-pin (RXD) and 32-pin (LOAD) signals of the connector pin layout specifications of the production control board - other production device interface. are doing.

The parallel-to-serial conversion IC in the operation unit sub-connection board converts the four push switches for light intensity up, volume down, light intensity up, and volume down and other production switches into serial signals, and outputs them to the production control board via the sub drawer board. is sending to

The outline of the operation is that when RXD=“L”, the states of light amount up, volume down, light amount up, volume down and other effect switches are stored in the register of the parallel/serial conversion IC. On the other hand, when RXD=“H”, register information is sequentially output from LOAD at the rising edge of CLK. Details such as electrical characteristics and timing depend on the parallel/serial conversion IC (TC74VHC165). The order of the serial data is light amount up, volume down, light amount up, volume down, and other effect switches from the MSB side, and the remaining 3 bits are unused.

(b) Block Diagram FIG. 210 is a diagram showing a block diagram including various switches and the like.
The management game machine frame 590 has a sub-connection board 553 and an operating section sub-connection board 553A having a parallel/serial conversion circuit 553B.
A light amount up switch 291, a volume up switch 292, a light amount down switch 293, a volume down switch 294, and other effect switches 295 are connected to the operation section sub-connection board 553A.

The management game machine game board 580 includes an effect control board 900 having a sub drawer board 966 and a control circuit 969 (CPU).

Signals (switch inputs) from the light amount up switch 291, volume up switch 292, light amount down switch 293, volume down switch 294, and other effects switches 295 pass through the operating section sub-connection board 553A, sub-connection board 553, and sub-drawer board 966. It is transmitted to the effect control board 900 via.

[(D) Overview of front decoration LED control]
(a) Specifications The front decoration of the management game machine is equipped with 58 electric decoration parts, 192 dot display parts, and a total of 240 full-color LEDs. The full-color LED can independently control RGB, and the number of systems is 114 systems for the illumination part and 576 systems for the dot display part.

The LED control is performed by an address-settable LED driver IC, and six LED driver ICs are used for the decorative portion and four LED driver ICs for the dot display portion.

The illumination part has 22 pins (CS1), 23 pins (SCK1), 24 pins (SOD1) of the connector pin specification of the production control board - other production device interface, and the dot display part has 26 pins (CS2), 27 pins ( SCK2) and 28 pin (SOD2) signals.

FIG. 211 is a diagram showing an overview of the specifications of the electric decoration part and the dot display part of the front decoration.
A total of 240 LEDs (full-color LEDs) are mounted.
Of these, 58 (full-color LEDs) are arranged in the electrical decoration portion, and 192 (full-color LEDs: 8 vertical rows and 24 horizontal rows) are arranged in the dot display portion.

The number of LED systems is 114 systems (38 systems×3 systems) for the illumination part and 576 systems (8 systems×72 systems: dynamic control) for the dot display part.

The number of LED drivers used is 6 for the decorative parts and 4 for the dot display parts (1 source, 3 sinks).

As for the communication method, the illumination part and the dot display part use SPI communication (with a frame address setting).

Address values and LED systems are as follows.
[Illumination part]
11H, center left, 1-(1) to (8)
12H, upper left and right, 2-(1) to (4)
13H, upper center, 3-(1) to (8)
14H, center right, 4-(1)-(8)
15H, bottom center, 5-(1)-(2)
16H, lower left, 6-(1)-(8)

[Dot display]
21H, source side, 11-(1) to (8)
22H, sink side left, 12-(1) to (24)
23H, sink side middle, 13-(1) to (24)
24H, sink side right, 14-(1) to (24)
The numbers (Example 1-(1)) shown in the drawing correspond to (b) LED arrangement and system diagram, etc., which will be described later.

(*1) LED driver outputs are assigned in the order of BGR from the lower bits, such as 1-(1)B for LED0, 1-(1)G for LED1, and 1-(1)R for LED2.
(*2) LED driver outputs are assigned in the order of BRG from the lower bits, such as 12-(1)B for LED0, 12-(2)R for LED1, and 12-(3)G for LED2.

[(b) LED arrangement and system diagram]
FIG. 212 is a diagram showing an LED arrangement and a system diagram of the front decoration electrical part.
The LED arrangement and system diagram of the front decorative illumination part are as follows.
The number (example 1-(1)) indicated for each LED corresponds to "address direct and LED system" in the table of (a) specifications.

LEDs 1-(1) to (8) are arranged on the left member 461 of the front decorative electric decoration.

LED2-(1)(2) and LED3-(1) to (8) are arranged on the upper left member 462 of the front decorative electric decoration.
LEDs 2-(3) and (4) are arranged on the upper right member 463 of the front decorative electric decoration.
LEDs 4-(1) to (8) are arranged on the right member 464 of the front decorative electric decoration.

LEDs 5-(1) and 5-(2) are arranged on the lower right member 465 of the front decoration electric part.
LEDs 6-(1) to (8) are arranged on the lower right member 466 of the front decorative electric decoration.
The LED arrangement and system diagram of the front decoration dot display section 467 will be described later.

FIG. 213 is a diagram showing the LED arrangement and system diagram of the front decoration dot display portion.
The LED arrangement and system of the front decoration dot display portion are as follows.
Note that the arrangement of the LEDs is the arrangement seen from the front of the front decoration.
The numbers (example 11-(1)) shown in the system diagram correspond to the "address value and LED system" in the table of (A) specifications.

In front decoration dot display portion 467, LED1 to LED8 are arranged in the leftmost column, and LED9 to LED16 are arranged in the next column. In the rightmost column, LEDs 185 to 192 are arranged (see (A) and (B) in the figure).

As shown in (C) in the figure, for example, when LED1 is to be turned on, LED1 is designated by the combination of the address value and the LED system (11-(1) and 12-(2)). . Also, for example, when the LED 192 is to be lit, the LED 192 is designated by the combination of the address value and the LED system (11-(8) and 14-(24)).

(c) Block Diagram FIGS. 214 and 215 are block diagrams of the electrical decoration portion and the dot display portion of the front decoration.
The numbers shown in the figure (example 1-(1)) correspond to the "address value and LED system" in the table of (A) specifications.

The management game machine game board 580 has an effect control CPU 126 .
The management game machine frame 590 (front decoration 512) includes various LED drivers, an illumination section 468 and a dot display section 467. FIG.

CS1, SCK1 and SOD1 from the effect control CPU 126 are sent to the LED driver 1 (sink driver, CS address (11H)). The LED driver 1 controls the LED systems 1-(1) to (8) to light the LEDs of the illumination section 468. FIG.

CS1, SCK1 and SOD1 from the effect control CPU 126 are sent to the LED driver 2 (sink driver, CS address (12H)). The LED driver 2 controls the LED system 1-(1) to (4) to light the LEDs of the illumination section 468. FIG.

CS1, SCK1 and SOD1 from the effect control CPU 126 are transmitted to the LED driver 3 (sink driver, CS address (13H)). The LED driver 3 controls the LED systems 1-(1) to (4) to light the LEDs of the illumination section 468. FIG.

CS1, SCK1 and SOD1 from the effect control CPU 126 are transmitted to the LED driver 4 (sink driver, CS address (14H)). The LED driver 4 controls the LED systems 1-(1) to (8) to light the LEDs of the illumination section 468. FIG.

CS1, SCK1 and SOD1 from the effect control CPU 126 are transmitted to the LED driver 5 (sink driver, CS address (15H)). The LED driver 5 controls the LED system 1-(1) to (2) to light the LEDs of the electrical decoration part 468 .

CS1, SCK1 and SOD1 from the effect control CPU 126 are transmitted to the LED driver 6 (sink driver, CS address (16H)). The LED driver 6 controls the LED system 1-(1) to (8) to light the LEDs of the electrical decoration part 468 .

CS2, SCK2 and SOD2 from the effect control CPU 126 are sent to the LED driver 1 (predetermined driver + FET buffer, source driver, CS address (21H)). The LED driver 1 controls the LED systems 11-(1) to (8) to light the LEDs of the dot display section 467. FIG.

CS2, SCK2 and SOD2 from the effect control CPU 126 are sent to the LED driver 2 (sink driver, CS address (22H)). The LED driver 2 controls the LED systems 12-(1) to (24) to light the LEDs of the dot display section 467. FIG.

CS2, SCK2 and SOD2 from the effect control CPU 126 are sent to the LED driver 3 (sink driver, CS address (23H)). The LED driver 3 controls the LED systems 13-(1) to (24) to light the LEDs of the dot display section 467. FIG.

CS2, SCK2 and SOD2 from the effect control CPU 126 are sent to the LED driver 4 (sink driver, CS address (24H)). The LED driver 4 controls the LED systems 13-(1) to (24) to light the LEDs of the dot display section 467. FIG.

[(4) CPU specifications]
[(i) main control CPU]
[(A) Main control CPU outline specifications]
FIG. 216 is a diagram showing schematic specifications of the main control CPU.
[No.1]
Topic: Processor Details: Given Processor

[No.2]
Item: Package Details: 71 pins

[No.3]
Item: Power supply voltage Details: 5V (4.0V to 5.5V)

[No.4]
Item: Memory Details: User ROM: 12 Kbytes, User RAM: 1 Kbytes (backup)

[No.5]
Item: Timer Details: 8-bit timer (PTC): 3ch, watchdog timer: 1ch

[No.6]
Item: Communication port Details: Asynchronous serial: 2 channels for transmission, 1 channel for reception, Synchronous serial: 1 channel for transmission, 1 channel for reception, Encryption asynchronous serial: 1 channel for transmission, 1 channel for reception

[No.7]
Item: Input/output port Details: Input port: 6bit, Output port: 8bit

[No.8]
Item: External Chip Select Details: Individual: 12, Expansion: 2

[No.9]
Item: Interrupt Details: Maskable interrupt: 10 (one of which is external XINT), non-maskable interrupt: 1 (external XNMI)

[No.10]
Item: System lock Details: Maximum operating frequency: 16MHz (when external input clock is 32MHz)

[No.11]
Item: External output clock Details: ESCK: 1 line, DCLK: 1 line

[No.12]
Item: Free run counter Details: 8bit: 4ch

[No.13]
Item: Random number circuit Details: 16bit random number: 4ch, 8bit random number: 6ch

[No.14]
Item: Arithmetic circuit Details: Multiplication: 16 bits × 16 bits = 32 bits, Division: 32 bits ÷ 32 bits = 32 bits (quotient), Division: 32 bits ÷ 32 bits = 32 bits (remainder)

[No.15]
Item: Unique information Details: ROM code: 4 bytes x 4, individual chip number: 4 bytes, ID number: 8 bytes

[No.16]
Item: Others Details: Backup power supply terminal: Yes, security mode time can be extended

[(B) Main control CPU terminal connection diagram]
FIG. 217 is a diagram showing a main control CPU terminal connection diagram.
Details of each terminal are as follows.
Terminal 1: Output A8.
Terminal 2: Output TX0/XCS7.
Terminal 3: Output A9.
Terminal 4: Outputs DCLK/XCS6.
Terminal 5: Output A10.
Terminal 6: Output ESCK/XCS5.
Terminal 7: Output A11.
Terminal 8: Corresponds to VDD3.
Terminal 9: Output A12.
Terminal 10: Output CTX_N.
Terminal 11: Output A13.
Terminal 12: Output CTX_P.
Terminal 13: Output A14.
Terminal 14: CRX_N is input.
Terminal 15: Output A15.
Terminal 16: CRX_P is input.
Terminal 17: Corresponds to VSS1.

Terminal 18: EX is input.
Terminal 19: Corresponds to VDD1.
Terminal 20: corresponds to VBB.
Terminal 21: RCK is input.
Terminal 22: Output TX1/XCS4.
Terminal 23: Outputs XM1.
Terminal 24: Output P05/XCS3.
Terminal 25: Output XMREQ.
Terminal 26: Output P04/XCS2.
Terminal 27: Output XIORQ.
Terminal 28: Output P03/XCS1.
Terminal 29: Output XRD.
Terminal 30: Output P02/XCS0.
Terminal 31: Outputs XWR.
Terminal 32: Output P01/XCSE1.
Terminal 33: Output P00/XCSE0.
Terminal 34: XSRST is input.
Terminal 35: Corresponds to VSS2.

Terminal 71: Corresponds to VSS5.
Terminal 70: PI0/RX0 are input.
Terminal 69: Output A0.
Terminal 68: PI1/XNMI are input.
Terminal 67: Output A1.
Terminal 66: PI2/XINT is input.
Terminal 65: Output A2.
Terminal 64: PI3/SDI is input.
Terminal 63: Output A3.
Terminal 62: PI4 is input.
Terminal 61: Output A4.
Terminal 60: PI5 is input.
Terminal 59: Output A5.
Terminal 58: Output P07/XCS11.
Terminal 57: Output A6.
Terminal 56: Output P06/XCS10.
Terminal 55: Output A7.
Terminal 54: Corresponds to VSS4.

Terminal 53: Corresponds to VDD25.
Terminal 52: Corresponds to VDD2.
Terminal 51: BRC is input.
Terminal 50: Output XRST0.
Terminal 49: SC is input.
Terminal 48: Outputs SD0/XCS9.
Terminal 47: PRG is input.
Terminal 46: Output SCK/XCS8.
Terminal 45: Outputs CLK0.
Terminal 44: Corresponds to VSS3.
Terminal 43: Transmits and receives D0.
Terminal 42: Transmits and receives D1.
Terminal 41: Transmits and receives D2.
Terminal 40: Transmits and receives D3.
Terminal 39: Transmits and receives D4.
Terminal 38: Transmits and receives D5.
Terminal 37: Transmits and receives D6.
Terminal 36: Transmits and receives D7.
This figure is a terminal connection diagram in the user mode.
VDD25 is the monitor output of the internal power supply.

[(C) Main control CPU terminal function list]
218 and 219 are diagrams showing a list of terminal functions of the main control CPU.
Terminal name: A0-A15
I/O: Output Description: 16-bit address bus

Terminal name: D0-D7
I/O: I/O Description: 8-bit data I/O bus

Terminal name: XM1
I/O: Output Description: Output terminal indicating machine cycle 1 (M1 cycle)

Terminal name: XMREQ
I/O: Output Description: Request signal output pin for memory space

Terminal name: XIORQ
I/O: Output Description: Request signal output terminal to I/O space

Terminal name: XRD
I/O: Output Description: Output pin that indicates read cycle

Terminal name: XWR
I/O: Output Description: Output pin that indicates write cycle

Terminal name: RCK
I/O: Input Description: External clock input pin for random numbers

Pin name: PI0/RX0, PI1/XNMI, PI2/XINT, PI3/SDI, PI4-PI5
I/O: Input Description: 6-bit parallel input port pin. However, the next 4 bits are function pins. The PI0/RX0 terminal is also used as an input port and an asynchronous serial communication ch0 reception terminal. The PI1/XNMI pin is also used as an input port and non-maskable interrupt request input. The PI2/XINT pin is also used as an input port and an external maskable interrupt request input. The PI3/SDI terminal is also used as an input port and a synchronous serial communication reception terminal.

Pin name: P00/XCSE0, P01/XCSE1, P02/XCS0, P03/XCS1, P04/XCS2, P05/XCS3, P06/XCS10, P07/XCS11
I/O: Output Description: 8-bit parallel output port pin. However, since it is a multi-function pin, it selects the function between the output port and the chip select output to an external device.

Pin name: TX0/XCS7, TX1/XCS4
I/O: Output Description: Transmit terminal for asynchronous serial communication ch0-1. However, since it is a multi-function pin, the function is selected between an asynchronous serial pin and chip select output to an external device.

Terminal name: SCK/XCS8, SD0/XCS9
I/O: Output Description: Synchronous serial communication terminal. However, since it is a multi-function pin, the function is selected between synchronous serial transmission and chip select output of an external device.

Pin name: ESCK/XCS5, DCLK/XCS6
I/O: Output Description: Clock output pin to the outside. However, since it is a multi-function pin, the function is selected between clock output and chip select output to an external device.

Terminal name: CTX_N, CTX_P
I/O: Output Description: Transmit terminal for asynchronous serial encrypted communication

Terminal name: CRX_N, CRX_P
I/O: Input Description: Receiving pin for asynchronous serial encrypted communication

Terminal name: XSRST
I/O: Input Description: System reset input pin

Terminal name: XRST0
I/O: Output Description: Reset output pin

Terminal name: PRG
I/O: Input Description: Input terminal for setting to PROM mode

Terminal name: EX
I/O: Input Description: Clock input pin

Terminal name: CLK0
I/O: Output Description: System clock output pin

Terminal name: VDD1, VDD2, VDD3
Input/output:-
Description: Positive power terminal

Terminal name: VDD25
Input/output:-
Description: Internal power terminal

Terminal name: VBB
Input/output:-
Description: Internal RAM backup power supply pin

Terminal name: VSS1, VSS2, VSS3, VSS4, VSS5
Input/output:-
Description: Ground potential terminal

Terminal name: SC
Input/output: Input/output Description: Verification terminal

Terminal name: BRC
I/O: Input Description: Verification terminal Note that the operations of mass-production CPUs and development CPUs may differ.

[(ii) Frame Control CPU]
[(A) Frame control CPU outline specifications]
FIG. 220 is a diagram showing the schematic specifications of the frame control CPU.
[No.1]
Topic: Processor Details: Given Processor

[No.2]
Item: Package Details: 71 pins

[No.3]
Item: Power supply voltage Details: 2.85V to 3.6V

[No.4]
Item: Memory Details: User ROM: 8 Kbytes, User RAM: 1 Kbytes (non-volatile RAM)

[No.5]
Item: Timer Details: 8-bit timer (PTC): 3ch, watchdog timer: 1ch

[No.6]
Item: Communication port Details: Asynchronous serial: 2 channels for transmission, 2 channels for reception, Synchronous serial: 1 channel for transmission, 1 channel for reception, Encryption asynchronous serial: 1 channel for transmission, 1 channel for reception

[No.7]
Item: Input/output port Details: Input port: 4bit, Output port: 4bit

[No.8]
Item: External Chip Select Details: Individual: 10, Expansion: 2

[No.9]
Item: Interrupt Details: Maskable interrupt: 11 (one of which is external XINT), non-maskable interrupt: 1 (external XNMI)

[No.10]
Item: System lock Details: Maximum operating frequency: 16MHz (when external input clock is 32MHz)

[No.11]
Item: External output clock Details: ESCK: 3, DCLK: 1

[No.12]
Item: Arithmetic circuit Details: Addition: 32 bits + 32 bits = 32 bits, Subtraction: 32 bits - 32 bits = 32 bits, Multiplication: 16 bits x 16 bits = 32 bits, Division: 32 bits ÷ 32 bits = 32 bits (quotient), Division: 32 bits ÷ 32 bits = 32 bits (remainder)

[No.13]
Item: Unique information Details: ROM code: 4 bytes x 4, individual chip number: 4 bytes, ID number: 8 bytes

[No.16]
Item: Others Details: Backup power supply terminal: None

[(B) Frame control CPU terminal connection diagram]
FIG. 221 is a diagram showing a frame control CPU terminal connection diagram.
Details of each terminal are as follows.
Terminal 1: Output A8.
Terminal 2: Output TX0/XCS7.
Terminal 3: Output A9.
Terminal 4: Outputs DCLK/XCS6.
Terminal 5: Output A10.
Terminal 6: Output ESCK/XCS5.
Terminal 7: Output A11.
Terminal 8: Corresponds to VDD3.
Terminal 9: Output A12.
Terminal 10: Output CTX_N.
Terminal 11: Output A13.
Terminal 12: Output CTX_P.
Terminal 13: Output A14.
Terminal 14: CRX_N is input.
Terminal 15: Output A15.
Terminal 16: CRX_P is input.
Terminal 17: Corresponds to VSS1.

Terminal 18: EX is input.
Terminal 19: Corresponds to VDD1.
Terminal 20: Corresponds to NC.
Terminal 21: RX1 is input.
Terminal 22: Output TX1/XCS4.
Terminal 23: Outputs XM1.
Terminal 24: Output P05/XCS3.
Terminal 25: Output XMREQ.
Terminal 26: Output P04/XCS2.
Terminal 27: Output XIORQ.
Terminal 28: Output P03/XCS1.
Terminal 29: Output XRD.
Terminal 30: Output P02/XCS0.
Terminal 31: Outputs XWR.
Terminal 32: Output P01/XCSE1.
Terminal 33: Output P00/XCSE0.
Terminal 34: XSRST is input.
Terminal 35: Corresponds to VSS2.

Terminal 71: Corresponds to VSS5.
Terminal 70: PI0/RX0 are input.
Terminal 69: Output A0.
Terminal 68: PI1/XNMI are input.
Terminal 67: Output A1.
Terminal 66: PI2/XINT is input.
Terminal 65: Output A2.
Terminal 64: PI3/SDI is input.
Terminal 63: Output A3.
Terminal 62: CRX1_P is input.
Terminal 61: Output A4.
Terminal 60: CRX1_N is input.
Terminal 59: Output A5.
Terminal 58: Output CTX1_P.
Terminal 57: Output A6.
Terminal 56: Output CTX1_N.
Terminal 55: Output A7.
Terminal 54: Corresponds to VSS4.

Terminal 53: Corresponds to NC.
Terminal 52: Corresponds to VDD2.
Terminal 51: BRC is input.
Terminal 50: Output XRST0.
Terminal 49: SC is input.
Terminal 48: Outputs SD0/XCS9.
Terminal 47: PRG is input.
Terminal 46: Output SCK/XCS8.
Terminal 45: Outputs CLK0.
Terminal 44: Corresponds to VSS3.
Terminal 43: Transmits and receives D0.
Terminal 42: Transmits and receives D1.
Terminal 41: Transmits and receives D2.
Terminal 40: Transmits and receives D3.
Terminal 39: Transmits and receives D4.
Terminal 38: Transmits and receives D5.
Terminal 37: Transmits and receives D6.
Terminal 36: Transmits and receives D7.
This figure is a terminal connection diagram in the user mode.

[(C) Frame control CPU terminal function list]
222 and 223 are diagrams showing a list of terminal functions of the frame control CPU.
Terminal name: A0-A15
I/O: Output Description: 16-bit address bus

Terminal name: D0-D7
I/O: I/O Description: 8-bit data I/O bus

Terminal name: XM1
I/O: Output Description: Output terminal indicating machine cycle 1 (M1 cycle)

Terminal name: XMREQ
I/O: Output Description: Request signal output pin for memory space

Terminal name: XIORQ
I/O: Output Description: Request signal output terminal to I/O space

Terminal name: XRD
I/O: Output Description: Output pin that indicates read cycle

Terminal name: XWR
I/O: Output Description: Output pin that indicates write cycle

Terminal name: PI0/RX0, PI1/XNMI, PI2/XINT, PI3/SDI
I/O: Input Description: 4-bit parallel input port pin. However, it is also a function pin. The PI0/RX0 terminal is also used as an input port and an asynchronous serial communication ch0 reception terminal. The PI1/XNMI pin is also used as an input port and non-maskable interrupt request input. The PI2/XINT pin is also used as an input port and an external maskable interrupt request input. The PI3/SDI terminal is also used as an input port and a synchronous serial communication reception terminal.

Pin name: P00/XCSE0, P01/XCSE1, P02/XCS0, P03/XCS1
I/O: Output Description: 4-bit parallel output port pin. However, since it is a multi-function pin, it selects the function between the output port and the chip select output to an external device.

Terminal name: RX1
I/O: Input Description: Receiving terminal for asynchronous serial communication ch0-1

Pin name: TX0/XCS7, TX1/XCS4
I/O: Output Description: Transmit terminal for asynchronous serial communication ch0-1. However, since it is a multi-function pin, the function is selected between an asynchronous serial pin and chip select output to an external device.

Terminal name: SCK/XCS8, SD0/XCS9
I/O: Output Description: Synchronous serial communication terminal. However, since it is a multi-function pin, the function is selected between synchronous serial transmission and chip select output of an external device.

Pin name: ESCK0/XCS2, ESCK1/XCS3, ESCK2/XCS5, DCLK/XCS6
I/O: Output Description: Clock output pin to the outside. However, since it is a multi-function pin, the function is selected between clock output and chip select output to an external device.

Pin name: CTX0_N, CTX1_N, CTX0_P, CTX1_P
I/O: Output Description: Transmit terminal for asynchronous serial encrypted communication ch0-1

Pin name: CRX0_N, CRX1_N, CRX0_P, CRX1_P
I/O: Input Description: Receiving terminal for asynchronous serial encrypted communication ch0-1

Terminal name: XSRST
I/O: Input Description: System reset input pin

Terminal name: XRST0
I/O: Output Description: Reset output pin

Terminal name: PRG
I/O: Input Description: Input terminal for setting to PROM mode

Terminal name: EX
I/O: Input Description: Clock input pin

Terminal name: CLK0
I/O: Output Description: System clock output pin

Terminal name: VDD1, VDD2, VDD3
Input/output:-
Description: Positive power terminal

Terminal name: VSS1, VSS2, VSS3, VSS4, VSS5
Input/output:-
Description: Ground potential terminal

Terminal name: SC
Input/output: Input/output Description: Verification terminal

Terminal name: BRC
I/O: Input Description: Verification terminal

Terminal name: NC
Input/output:-
Description: Non-connection terminal There are cases where the operations of mass-production CPUs and development CPUs differ.

[6. Software configuration]
[(1) Main control program]
FIG. 224 is a diagram showing the configuration of the main control program.
The main control programs include a system processing program P10, an I/O processing program P20, a random number update processing program P30, a special symbol/special electric accessory processing program P40, a normal symbol/ordinary electric accessory processing program P50, and a frame control processing program P60. It has The main control program is executed by the main control CPU.

The system processing program P10 can execute system processing program power-off processing and power failure recovery processing initialization processing.

The I/O processing program P20 includes switch input (starting port switch input, gate switch input, count switch input, normal winning port switch input), solenoid output (solenoid control), dynamic lighting LED control (special symbol display control, normal symbol display control, special symbol operation pending ball number display control, normal symbol operation pending ball number display control, prize display control, game state display control, continuous operation number display control), test terminal signal output control, fraudulent game monitoring control (illegal winning) monitoring, radio wave monitoring, magnet monitoring) can be executed.

The random number update processing program P30 can execute processing related to update of judgment random numbers, update of initial value determination random numbers, and update of display pattern random numbers.

The special symbol/special electric auditors processing program P40 can execute processing related to special symbol/special electric auditors control, special symbol control, and special electric auditors control.

The normal symbol/ordinary electric auditors processing program P50 can execute processing relating to normal design/ordinary electric auditors control, normal symbol control, and normal electric auditors control.

The frame control processing program P60 can execute processing related to frame control, transmission command editing, and reception command normality determination.

[(2) Frame control program]
FIG. 225 is a diagram showing the configuration of the frame control program.
The frame control program includes a system processing program P70, an I/O processing program P80, a communication processing program P90, and a device control program P100. The frame control program is executed by the frame control CPU.

The system processing program P70 can execute power-off processing, power failure recovery processing, and initialization processing.

The I/O processing program P80 includes motor control (grinding motor control, cassette motor control, lifting motor control), solenoid output (shooting solenoid control, ball feed solenoid control), switch input (shooting stop switch input, launch entrance sensor input , non-winning sensor input, winning sensor input, subtraction sensor input, clogged ball sensor input, lifting motor sensor input, lifting inlet sensor input, polishing motor sensor input, polishing inlet sensor input, cassette switch input, radio wave sensor input, front decoration/rear mechanism opening switch, counting switch, ball removal switch, error canceling switch, night monitoring device), number of game balls, and other display output processing can be executed.

The communication processing program P90 can execute processing related to main control board command transmission/reception and dedicated unit command transmission/reception.

The device control program P100 can execute processing related to shooting device control, ball polishing device control, game ball circulation device control, game ball count display control, game ball count control, fraud monitoring, and ball removal control.

[(3) Interface specifications]
[(i) main control board-frame control board interface]
[(A) Communication format]
[(a) Communication conditions]
FIG. 226 is a diagram showing communication conditions of the main control board-frame control board interface.
The signal level is open collector.
The communication speed is 38461.53 BPS.
The bit configuration is "start bit: 1, data bit: 8, stop bit: 1, parity: none".
The communication method is mutual monitoring communication.
Communication control is half-duplex communication (command/response method), and the communication cycle is 200 ms.
Encryption control is "yes".

[(B) Communication data]
[(a) Block diagram of user program interface]
Figure 227 shows a block diagram of a user program interface.
In the main control and frame control open communication, data is automatically transmitted and received between the main control CPU and the frame control CPU by the communication function inside the CPU.
The interface with the user program is performed by a CPU dedicated register.
Information handled by the register includes game information, game state information, and management game machine frame information.

The main control CPU user program P200 of the main control CPU72 uses the status register SL to perform authentication with the encrypted communication control unit P210.

The main control CPU user program P200 of the main control CPU 72 transmits game information to the frame control CPU via the main control→frame control transmission data FIFO (128 bytes) and the encrypted communication control section P210.

The main control CPU user program P200 of the main control CPU 72 transmits the game state information to the frame control CPU via the game state information register L100 (registers 0 to 7) and the encryption communication control section P210.

The frame control CPU transmits the managed gaming machine frame information to the main control CPU user program P200 of the main control CPU 72 via the encrypted communication control section P210 and the managed gaming machine frame information register L200 (registers 0 to 7).

The encrypted communication control unit P210 transmits recovery completion information to the main control CPU user program P200 of the main control CPU72 via the recovery status register L300.

[(B) Game information (main control→frame control)]
The game information is operation information such as prize balls and pattern stop transmitted from the main control CPU to the frame control CPU.
The game information is transmitted using the main control→frame control transmission data FIFO.
After the main control user program writes the main control→frame control transmission data FIFO, the data is transmitted to the frame control CPU by the internal communication function.
The game information consists of 1 byte of type information and 1 byte of count information, a total of 2 bytes, and is written every 2 bytes.

FIG. 228 is a diagram showing details of game information.
The game information is 2 bytes, and consists of 1-byte type information and 1-byte count information.

FIG. 229 is a diagram showing details of type information.
Bits 4-7 of the type information indicate the data type.
The details of the data type of game information are as follows.
0 = no information 1 = starting gate 2 = big winning gate 3 = winning gate 4 = number of pattern stoppages 5 = big hit 6 = small win 7 = gate pass 8 = role number 9 = specific area pass

Bits 0-3 of the type information indicate data numbers.
The details of the data number for each game information data type are "1 to 15=data number".

(*1) The data number of the jackpot is "1 = large pitch, 2 = small pitch, 3 = medium pitch, 4-6 = reserve".
(*2) The data number of the small hit is “1 = small hit, 2 to 15 = spare”.
(*3) As for classification, "command" is defined as one-time command transmission. A "state" is defined as a state that transmits switching between ON (1) and OFF (0) (the same applies hereinafter).

FIG. 230 is a diagram showing details of count information.
The count information differs for each data type, and details are shown for each type.

[(A) When the data type is 1 = starting gate, 2 = big winning gate, 3 = winning gate]
[Bits 4 to 7]
Name: Number of prize balls Details: Number of prize balls at the time of winning for each game information / type information, 1 to 15 = Number of prize balls Category: Command

[Bits 0 to 3]
Name: Number of winning prizes Details: Number of winning prizes for each machine information/type information (total), 1 to 15 = Number of winning prizes Category: Command

[(B) When the data type is 4 = number of symbol stops]
[Bits 4 to 7]
Name: Reserved Details: Fixed to 0 Classification: Command

[Bits 0 to 3]
Name: Number of pattern stops Details: 1 (times)
Category: Command

[(C) If the data type is 5 = big hit, 6 = small hit]
[Bits 4 to 7]
Name: Reserved Details: Fixed to 0 Classification: Command

[Bits 0 to 3]
Name: Number of hits Details: 1 (times)
Category: Command

[(D) When the data type is 7 = passing through the gate]
[Bits 4 to 7]
Name: Reserved Details: Fixed to 0 Classification: Command

[Bits 0 to 3]
Name: Gate passing times Details: 1 (times)
Category: Command

[(E) When the data type is 8 = number of roles]
[Bits 4 to 7]
Name: Reserved Details: Fixed to 0 Classification: Command

[Bits 0 to 3]
Name: Number of roles Details: 1 (times)
Category: Command

[(F) When the data type is 9 = passing through a specific area]
[Bits 4 to 7]
Name: Reserved Details: Fixed to 0 Classification: Command

[Bits 0 to 3]
Name: Number of passes through specific area Details: 1 (times)
Category: Command

[(C) Game state information (main control→frame control)]
FIG. 231 is a diagram showing details of the game state information.
The game state information is state information transmitted from the main control CPU to the frame control CPU.
The game state information is transmitted using the game state information registers 0-7.
After the main control user program writes to this register, data is sent to the frame control CPU by the internal communication function.
The bit arrangement of each register is shown below.

[No.1]
Name: Game state information register 0
Details: D0: Jackpot 1 (all jackpots), D1: Jackpot 2 (specific hits, jackpots, small hits), D2: Jackpot 3 (time-saving jackpot), D3 to D7: Preliminary Category: Status

[No.2]
Name: Game state information register 1
Details: D0: Big hit + Time saving, D1: High probability, D2: Time saving, D3: Fluctuation, D4 to D7: Preliminary Category: State

[No.3]
Name: Game state information register 2
Details: D0: Incorrect board 1, D1: Incorrect board 2, D2: Incorrect board 3, D3: Incorrect board 4, D4: Incorrect board 5, D5: Incorrect board 6
Classification: State

[No.4]
Name: Game state information register 3
Details: D0: Game stop, D1 to D7: Reserve Category: Status

[No.5]
Name: Game state information register 4
Details: D0: Game state information acquisition permission flag, D1 to D7: Reserve Classification: State

[No.6]
Name: Game state information register 5
Details: When an error occurs (D0 to D5: error code (1 to 63), D6: Fixed to 1 when an error occurs, D7 = 1 (when hall controller is output)), When an error does not occur (D0 to D5: No error at 0 occur)
Classification: State

[No.7]
Name: Game state information register 6
Details: Spare Division: State

[No.8]
Name: Game state information register 7
Details: Spare Division: State

[(D) Management machine frame information (frame control → main control)]
FIG. 232 is a diagram showing details of managed gaming machine frame information.
The management game machine frame information is state information received by the main control CPU from the frame control CPU.
The managed gaming machine frame information acquires the state using the managed gaming machine frame information registers 0-7.
After the frame control user program writes to this register, data is sent to the main control CPU by the internal communication function.
The bit arrangement of each register is shown below.

[No.1]
Name: Management machine slot information register 0
Details: D0: front decoration / back mechanism open, D1: illegal radio wave detection, D2: proximity sensor error, D3: winning number error, D4: illegal ball lending detection, D5: error detection by night monitoring function, D6 to D7: Spare Division: State

[No.2]
Name: Management machine slot information register 1
Details: D0: Game ball count display overflow, D1 to D7: Reserve Category: State

[No.3]
Name: Managed gaming machine frame information register 2
Details: D0: Power saving transition request, D1 to D7: Reserved Classification: Status

[No.4]
Name: Management machine frame information register 3
Details: D0: Card forgetting notification request, D1 to D7: Reserve Category: Status

[No.5]
Name: Management machine frame information register 4
Details: D0: Pause request, D1 to D7: Reserve Classification: State

[No.6]
Name: Management machine frame information register 5
Details: Spare Division: State

[No.7]
Name: Management machine frame information register 6
Details: Spare Division: State

[No.8]
Name: Management machine frame information register 7
Details: Spare Division: State

[Processing flow]
[(A) Power-on processing]
FIG. 233 is a flowchart of a procedure example of power-on processing.
In power-on processing, RAM clear processing is performed, and after confirming completion of authentication and completion of recovery, game state information is set, and a game is started.
The operation flow is shown below.
The main control CPU confirms whether or not to execute RAM clear (S7000), and when determining to execute RAM clear (S7000; Yes), executes RAM clear (S7001). RAM clear is executed before confirmation of completion of authentication.

When the main control CPU confirms the completion of authentication and the completion of recovery (S7002; Yes, S7003; Yes), the game information is set by setting the game state information registers 0 to 3 (S7004), and the game state information register 4 A game state information acquisition permission flag is set (S7005), and the state shifts to the game start state.

When the flag information from the status register of the CPU indicates authentication OK, it is determined that the authentication is completed.

[Determination of completion of authentication]
The status register of the CPU confirms the authentication between the managed gaming machine board and the managed gaming machine frame, and between the dedicated unit and the managed gaming machine frame. Authentication is completed when communication is permitted.

When the flag information from the recovery status register of the CPU indicates recovery completion, it is determined that recovery is completed.

〔recovery〕
The recovery is a function of automatically retrying the unsent data by the CPU when there is unsent data due to a communication abnormality such as power failure or communication interruption.

[(B) Suspension process]
FIG. 234 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of suspension processing.
The main control CPU detects a pause request (S7010; Yes), and in the case of a big hit state (S7011; Yes), pauses the game.
The temporary stop request is notified by D0 (temporary stop request) of the managed gaming machine frame information register 4. FIG.

[(C) Restoration processing from temporary stop]
FIG. 235 is a flowchart of a procedure example of recovery processing from suspension.
For return detection from a pause, the main control CPU starts the game after confirming that the pause request is OFF (S7020; Yes).

[(D) Communication error detection process]
FIG. 236 is a diagram depicting an example of a procedure for processing when a communication error is detected;
When the main control CPU detects a communication timeout (S7030; Yes), it confirms the progress of the winning protection wait (S7031; Yes), and if it is in a jackpot state (S7032; Yes), the game is temporarily stopped as a communication error, If it is not in a jackpot state (S7032; No), the prize is invalidated as a communication error.

When a timeout is notified from the flag information of the CPU status register, it is determined that communication timeout has occurred. The communication timeout time is an internal function of the CPU and is set to 3 seconds.
In order to protect winning prizes, we are waiting for the specified time. Since the specified time varies depending on the configuration of the game board of the managed game machine, it can be any time depending on the model. If the return is detected during the winning protection wait, the game can be continued.
In the case of the big win state, the game is temporarily stopped, and in the case of other than the big win state, winning is invalidated.

[(E) Recovery process from communication error]
FIG. 237 is a diagram depicting a procedure example of recovery processing from a communication failure;
After confirming the completion of authentication, the completion of recovery, and the OFF of the suspension request (S7040; Yes, S7041; Yes, S7042; Yes), the game is started.

When the flag information from the status register of the CPU indicates authentication OK, it is determined that the authentication is completed.
When the flag information from the recovery status register of the CPU indicates recovery completion, it is determined that recovery is completed.
After confirming that the temporary stop request is OFF, the game is started.

[Chapter 2 Lower Launch Management Game Machine]
[1. Game board specifications]
[1.1 Game board size]
FIG. 238 is a diagram showing game board sizes.
The management game machine has a vertical length L1 (length: 570 mm), a horizontal length L2 (width: 494 mm), a thickness L3 (thickness: 19 mm), and a flow area length L4 ( A game board 8b having a thickness of 18.5 mm can be mounted.

[1.2 Game area]
FIG. 239 is a diagram showing a game area.
In the management game machine, a game area 8a having a vertical length L11 (height 499 mm) and a horizontal length L12 (width: 467.5 mm) can be formed. This is the case for a model with a left inner band width of 2.5 mm. If the left inner band is made of a 0.8 mm SUS plate, the playing area increases by 1.7 mm, and an area of 469.2 mm can be obtained.
In order not to affect the firing performance, it is preferable that the shape indicated by the line X and the band shape are the same.

[2. Game machine frame specifications]
[2.1 Principal dimensions]
FIG. 240 is a diagram showing the main dimensions of the gaming machine frame.
The vertical length L21 of the gaming machine frame 2000 is, for example, 809 mm.
The horizontal length L22 of the gaming machine frame 2000 is, for example, 520 mm.
The length L23 of the thickness of the inner frame of the gaming machine frame 2000 is, for example, 91 mm.
The length L24 of the rear protruding portion of the game machine frame 2000 is, for example, 196 mm.
The length L25 of the front projecting portion of the game machine frame 2000 is, for example, 191.5 mm.

FIG. 241 is a diagram showing the dimensions of the discharge passage;
The discharge passage dimensions of the game balls discharged from the game board are as follows.
The horizontal length L31 of the winning opening passage 2001 and the non-winning opening passage 2002 is, for example, 233 mm.
The length L32 in the front-rear direction of the winning opening passage 2001 and the non-winning opening passage 2002 is, for example, 13 mm.

[2.2 New function]
[(1) Return ball detection]
FIG. 242 is a diagram showing the mechanism of return ball detection.
A ball that is fired from the launching unit 2003 of the launcher 2004 but returns to the launcher 2004 as a foul is recovered to the back side through a recovery hole 2005, detected by a foul ball sensor 2006, and displayed on a display device such as the number of game balls. Added to display value. Arrow A1 is the launch ball route, and arrow A2 is the foul ball route.

[(2) Power cutoff (measures against hot-swapping game boards)]
FIG. 243 is a diagram showing a mechanism of power shutdown.
When the veneer restrainer that restrains the game board 8b is released (F1), the power cutoff switch is activated (F2) and all power is cut off (F3).

[(3) Ball removal]
FIG. 244 is a diagram showing the mechanism of ball extraction.
When there is no game board, the launch cover 2007 closes the launch port 2008. - 特許庁If you shoot in this state, all the balls will flow into the foul ball passage, and the processing time for ball extraction can be shortened. When the ball is removed, the game ball in the game machine flows into the ball receiver 2010 by moving the ball removal lever 2009 to shoot the ball.

[(4) Speaker]
FIG. 245 is a diagram showing a speaker.
The speaker 2011 has a total of three speakers, two on the top and one on the bottom. The impedance of the speaker 2011 is 8Ω.

[2.3 Maintenance]
[(1) Launcher]
FIG. 246 is a diagram showing a launcher.
In the ejector 2004, the cover 2012 is opened, and the tip of the ejection part 2003 (pestle) can be cleaned from the opening hole 2014 near the tip of the ejection part 2003 (pestle).

[(2) Polishing machine]
FIG. 247 shows a grinder.
The abrasive 2016 can be taken out by opening the cover 2012 of the launcher 2004 and pulling up the abrasive lever 2015 . A replacement material 2017 is attached to the abrasive 2016 by one touch. The replacement material 2017 can be used four times in total by refitting up and down and refitting front and back.

[(3) iron ball detection]
FIG. 248 is a diagram showing a mechanism of iron ball detection.
A magnet is mounted inside the ball extracting lever 2009, and has a mechanism for attracting the iron ball. When the iron ball is detected, the ball removing lever 2009 is moved to remove the iron ball. Game balls aligned upstream from the magnet flow into the ball receiver 2010. - 特許庁

[Chapter 3]
[Specifications of the interface between the main control board and the frame control board]
[1. Glossary〕
The terms used in this chapter are explained below.

[No.1]
A managed gaming machine is a gaming machine having a function capable of outputting various types of information about the gaming machine to the gaming machine information center (hereinafter also simply referred to as a gaming machine).

[No.2]
The main control CPU is a CPU mounted on the main control board of the gaming machine (hereinafter also simply referred to as main control).

[No.3]
A frame control CPU is a CPU mounted on a frame control board of a gaming machine (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as frame control).

[No.4]
A dedicated unit is a unit dedicated to a gaming machine.

[No.5]
The dedicated unit main substrate is the main substrate of the dedicated unit (hereinafter also referred to as DM (Dedicated unit Main substrate)).

[No.6]
The control microcomputer is a dedicated unit control CPU (hereinafter also referred to as DC (Dedicated unit control CPU)).

[No.7]
A CM board (Communication Security Monitoring) is a security monitoring board mounted on a DM for communicating with a gaming machine and communicating with a gaming machine information center via the DM.

[No.8]
A CM microcomputer is a security microcomputer mounted on a CM substrate (hereinafter also referred to as CM).

[No.9]
A dedicated interface is an interface for defining communication specifications between a gaming machine and a dedicated unit.

[No.10]
The gaming machine information center is a center that collects various information output from gaming machines.

[No.11]
The card company data center is a card company center connected to the gaming machine information center (hereinafter also referred to as company center).

[No.12]
A management computer is a computer that connects to a dedicated unit.

[No.13]
A hall computer is a computer (hereinafter also referred to as HC) that collects various information output from a hall computer output box.

[No.14]
A hall controller output BOX is a serial/pulse conversion device that is connected to a dedicated unit and outputs various information to the HC (hereinafter also referred to as HC BOX).

[No.15]
The main control chip ID number is the main control chip ID number of the gaming machine. The ID number is called differently depending on the manufacturer. For example, a V5 generation chip may be called a chip individual number or may be called a chip code. The name of the V6 generation chip is the ID number.

[No.16]
The frame control chip ID number is the frame control chip ID number of the gaming machine. The ID number is called differently depending on the manufacturer. For example, a V5 generation chip may be called a chip individual number or may be called a chip code. The name of the V6 generation chip is the ID number.

[No.17]
The number of game balls is the number of balls that can be shot from the gaming machine.

[No.18]
The number of counted balls is the number of counted balls transmitted by the gaming machine.

[No.19]
The number of rental balls is the number of rental balls transmitted by the dedicated unit.

[No.20]
The number of balls in possession is the number of counted balls received by the dedicated unit and the number of balls managed by the card company.

[No.21]
The gaming machine information is a general term for gaming machine installation information, gaming machine performance information, hall controller/fraud monitoring information.

[No.22]
The gaming machine installation information includes gaming machine type, main/frame control manufacturer code, product code, and chip ID number.

[No.23]
The gaming machine performance information includes the number of game balls acquired per minute (base), the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, and the like.

[No.24]
Hall con information includes big hits, probability fluctuations, fluctuation time shortening, the number of winning balls in each winning hole, and the like.

[No.25]
Fraud monitoring information is information indicating fraud detection state 1 .

[No.26]
The error information is information indicating a gaming machine error state.

[2. Scope of application〕
The configuration shown below is applicable to the specifications of the interface between the main control board and the frame control board (see A in FIG. 249).

[3. system configuration diagram〕
FIG. 249 is a diagram showing a system configuration diagram of a managed gaming machine.
A double line in the figure indicates a hard interface, and a solid line indicates a soft interface (communication message).

[Hard interface]
The gaming machine information center 3010, each company's center 3020, the management computer 3030, the dedicated unit 3040, the HCBOX 3090, and the HC 3100 are connected by a hardware interface.
The dedicated unit 3040 and gaming machine 3120 are connected by a hardware interface.

Dedicated unit 3040 includes DM3050.
DM 3050 comprises DC 3060 , CM board 3070 with CM 3072 , dedicated circuitry 3080 .
DC 3060, CM 3072 and dedicated circuit 3080 are connected by a hard interface.

The gaming machine 3120 comprises a counting switch 3130, a dedicated circuit 3140, a frame control 3150 and a main control 3160.
The count switch 3130, dedicated circuit 3140, frame control 3150, and main control 3160 are connected by a hard interface.
The dedicated unit 3040 and the gaming machine 3120 are connected by a hard interface through a dedicated cable 3110 that connects the dedicated circuit 3080 and the dedicated circuit 3140 .

[Soft interface]
The management computer 3030, each company's center 3020, and the game machine information center 3010 are connected by a software interface.
The management computer 3030 and dedicated unit 3040 are connected by a software interface.
DC 3060, HCBOX 3090, CM 3072, dedicated circuit 3080, dedicated circuit 3140, frame control 3150, and main control 3160 are connected by a software interface.

[4. overview〕
The interface between the main control board and the frame control board communicates game machine installation information and game machine information by a telegram method through an asynchronous serial port.
The game machine installation information includes the game machine type, main control chip ID number, manufacturer code, and product code, which are transmitted in one message when the power is turned on.
As the game machine information, hall controller information, fraud monitoring information, and information for calculating the game machine performance are transmitted in one electronic message at regular intervals.

[5. Communication conditions]
FIG. 250 is a diagram showing communication conditions.
The communication speed is 31250 bps.
The bit configuration is "start bit: 1", "data bit: 8", "stop bit: 1", and "parity: none".
The communication method is asynchronous serial communication.
Communication control is full-duplex communication, and the communication cycle is 108 ms.

[6. Data structure]
FIG. 251 is a diagram showing an overview of the data configuration.
"Message length", "command", "serial number", "data part", and "checksum" are arranged in order from the beginning of the data. The message range is from the beginning to the end of the data.
It is preferable that the electronic message is always completed in one frame and not divided and transmitted.
Also, if the "checksum" is not received within 20 ms after the "telegram length" is received, the received data up to that point is canceled and the "telegram length" is received again.

FIG. 252 is a diagram showing the details of the data configuration.
[No.1]
Name: Message length Data length: 1 byte Data format: HEX (hexadecimal)
Meaning: Length of message from message length to checksum (range: 5 to 25)

[No.2]
Name: Command Data length: 1 byte Data format: HEX (hexadecimal)
Meaning: command code of telegram

[No.3]
Name: Serial number Data length: 1 byte Data format: HEX (hexadecimal)
Meaning: Indicates communication serial number. This is the serial number sequence number (range: 0 to 255 (cyclic)).

[No.4]
Name: Data section Data length: 1 to 21 bytes Data format: HEX (hexadecimal)
Meaning: message data

[No.5]
Name: Checksum Data length: 1 byte Data format: HEX (hexadecimal)
Meaning: Result of addition from message length to data part

[6.1. Bite order between main control board and frame control board]
The byte order in this chapter defines B as big endian and L as little endian.

[7. Business message between main control board and frame control board]
[7.1. Message list between main control board and frame control board]
FIG. 253 is a diagram showing a list of messages between the main control board and the frame control board.
[No.1]
Message name: Game machine installation information notification Transmission direction: Main control board → Frame control board Command: 0x01
Overview: Notifies the game machine installation information.

[No.2]
Message name: Game machine installation information response Transmission direction: Frame control board → Main control board Command: 0x11
Overview: Responds with the gaming machine installation information reception result.

[No.3]
Message name: Game machine information notification Transmission direction: Main control board → Frame control board Command: 0x02
Overview: Notifies game machine information.

[No.4]
Message name: Game machine information response Transmission direction: Frame control board → Main control board Command: 0x12
Overview: Responds with gaming machine information reception result and frame control status.

[7.2. Message details between main control board and frame control board]
[7.2.1. Game machine installation information notification]
FIG. 254 is a diagram showing details of gaming machine installation information notification.
Message name: Game machine installation information notification Message direction: Main control board → Frame control board Message summary: The main control board notifies the frame control board of the game machine installation information.

[No.1]
Data name: Message length Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Content: 0x19

[No.2]
Data name: Command Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Content: 0x01

[No.3]
Data name: Communication serial number Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Content: 0 fixed

[No.4]
Data name: Game machine type of machine installation information Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Content: (Note 1)

[No.5]
Data name: Main control chip ID number of gaming machine installation information Data length: 9 bytes Byte order: B
Content: (Note 2)

[No.6]
Data name: Main control chip manufacturer code for gaming machine installation information Data length: 3 bytes Byte order: B
Contents: Manufacturer code written in the management area of the main control chip

[No.7]
Data name: Main control chip product code for gaming machine installation information Data length: 8 bytes Byte order: B
Contents: Product code written in the management area of the main control chip

[No.8]
Data name: Checksum Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: Checksum data

[7.2.1.1. Notification processing at power-on]
The main control board notifies the gaming machine installation information when the power is turned on. In addition, the main control board disables the normal game until it receives the gaming machine installation information response.

[About the behavior when the command from the main control board → frame control board is not a normal value due to noise etc.]
Examples of non-normal values include the following cases.
(1) When the content of the gaming machine type in the “game machine installation information notification” sent from the main control board to the frame control board indicates a spare (bits 4 to 6 are spare values of 2 to 7). If there is, bits 0 to 3 are spare values of 5 to 15)
(2) If there is a value in the unused part (bit 7 of main control state 1, bits 3 to 7 of main control state 2, etc.) of "game machine information notification" transmitted from the main control board to the frame control board ( 3) In the "game machine information notification" transmitted from the main control board to the frame control board, the main control state 1 indicates that the jackpot is in progress, but the main control state 2 does not indicate that the jackpot is in progress + time saving is consistent. When receiving a command that is not

In cases (1) to (3) above, the frame control board behaves in the same manner as in the normal state. The game machine information reception result of the "game machine information response" is also transmitted to the main control board with the value of "0x00=receipt OK".
As a result, it is possible not to check the command contents on the frame control board side, and the processing load on the frame control board can be reduced.

Further, even if the frame control board side receives the above-described erroneous command from the main control board, it transmits a gaming machine state notification from the frame control board to the CM based on the contents thereof.
For example, as shown in (1) above, when the content of the game machine type in the "game machine installation information notification" transmitted from the main control board to the frame control board indicates a spare (bits 4 to 6 are 2 If it is a spare value of ~7, if bits 0-3 are a spare value of 5-15), the contents of the game machine type of "game machine information notification" sent from the frame control board to the CM also has a content indicating a spare (bits 4 to 6 have spare values of 2 to 7, and bits 0 to 3 have spare values of 5 to 15).
As a result, it is possible to entrust the determination of inconsistency of command contents to the CM side, which has no regulation (restriction, upper limit) on the processing capacity.

FIG. 255 is a diagram showing the code system (1 byte) of (Note 1) gaming machine type.
Bit 7: Management medium (0 = game ball, 1 = game medal)
Bit6-Bit4: Group classification (0 = Union A, 1 = Union B, 2-7 = Reserve)
Bit 3 to Bit 0: Game machine type (1 = Pachinko machine, 2 = Revolving machine, 3 = Arrange ball game machine, 4 = Jiyan ball game machine, 5 to 15 = Spare, 0 = Unused)

FIG. 256 is a diagram showing an example of a gaming machine type list.
Code: 0x01
Game machine: Pachinko machine Group: Association A Management medium: Game balls

Code: 0x82
Pachislot and pachislot machine: Spindle-type game machine Group: Association A Management media: Game tokens

Code: 0x83
Game machine: Arrange ball game machine Group: Association A Management media: Game tokens

Code: 0x84
Game machine: Jiyan ball game machine Group: Association A Management media: Game medals

Code: 0x92
Pachislot and Pachinko Machines: Pachislot Machine Group: Association B Management Media: Game Tokens

FIG. 257 shows (Note 2) a method of generating a main control chip ID number (in the case of the first chip).
The individual chip numbers of the CPU are read in ascending order of address.
The upper 4 bytes of this number are filled with 0, and the lower 1 byte is added with an identification code to make it 9 bytes.
For example, when the individual chip number is 0x12345678, zero padding is 4 bytes (0x00000000), the individual chip number is 4 bytes (0x12345678), and the identification code (*) is 1 byte (0x21).

FIG. 258 shows (Note 2) a method of generating a main control chip ID number (in the case of the second chip).
The chip code of the CPU is read in ascending order of address.
The upper 4 bytes of this code are filled with 0, and the lower 1 byte is added with an identification code to make 9 bytes.
For example, if the chip code is 0x34567812, zero padding is 4 bytes (0x00000000), the chip code is 4 bytes (0x34567812), and the identification code (*) is 1 byte (0x41).

FIG. 259 is a diagram showing the identification code of the (*) main control chip ID number.
The identification code is 1 byte.
The CPU manufacturer is identified by Bits 5-7.
The CPU type is identified by Bits 0-4.
If Bits 5-7 are "1", the CPU manufacturer is the "first manufacturer".
If Bits 5-7 are "2", the CPU manufacturer is the "second manufacturer".
If Bits 5-7 are "3-7, 0", they are unused and reserved.

When Bits 5-7 are "1" and Bits 0-4 are "1", the CPU type is "first chip".
When Bits 5-7 are "1" and Bits 0-4 are "2-31, 0", they are unused and reserved.

If Bits 5-7 are "2" and Bits 0-4 are "1", the CPU type is "second chip A".
If Bits 5-7 are "2" and Bits 0-4 are "2", the CPU type is "second chip B".
If Bits 5-7 are "2" and Bits 0-4 are "3", the CPU type is "second chip C".
If Bits 5-7 are "2" and Bits 0-4 are "4-31, 0", they are unused and reserved.

If Bits 5-7 are "3-7" and Bits 0-4 are "1-31, 0", they are unused and reserved.
Bits 5-7=0 and Bits 0-4=0 are unused.

[7.2.2. Game machine installation information response]
FIG. 260 is a diagram showing details of the gaming machine installation information response.
Message name: Game machine installation information response Message direction: Frame control board → Main control board Message overview: The frame control board responds to the main control board with the result of receiving the game machine installation information notification.

[No.1]
Data name: Message length Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Content: 0x05

[No.2]
Data name: Command Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Content: 0x11

[No.3]
Data name: Communication serial number Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Content: 0 fixed. (*Note 1) The frame control board responds with the communication serial number received in the gaming machine installation information notification as it is. If a communication serial number other than 0 is received, no response will be given.

[No.4]
Data name: Game machine installation information reception result Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Content: Receipt result. 0x00=receipt OK, 0x01=ball out state.

[No.5]
Data name: Checksum Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: Result of addition from message length to data part

[7.2.3. Game machine information notification]
261 and 262 are diagrams showing details of gaming machine information notification.
Message name: Game machine information notification Message direction: Main control board→Frame control board Message summary: The main control board notifies the frame control board of game machine information (hall control information, fraud monitoring information). Note that the game machine information notification can be transmitted when the settings are confirmed (while the settings are being confirmed). As a result, the backed-up information about prize balls and the like is transmitted from the main control board to the frame control board at the time of setting confirmation (during setting confirmation).

[No.1]
Data name: Message length Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: 0x09 to 0x13

[No.2]
Data name: Command Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Content: 0x02

[No.3]
Data name: Communication serial number Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: Sequence number (0 to 255) (Note 1)

[No.4]
Data name: Main control status 1 (Note 2)
Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: Bit0: Jackpot 1, Bit1: Jackpot 2, Bit2: Jackpot 3, Bit3: Gaming machine status signal 1, Bit4: Gaming machine status signal 2, Bit5: Gaming machine status signal 3, Bit6: Gaming machine status signal 4, Bit7 :unused.

[No.5]
Data name: Main control status 2 (Note 3)
Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: Bit0: Big hit + time saving (variation time reduction) or advantageous state, Bit1: high probability, Bit2: time saving (variation time reduction) or advantageous state, Bit3: unused, Bit4: unused, Bit5: Unused, Bit6: Unused, Bit7: Unused.

[No.6]
Data name: Game machine error status Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: Error code occurring in the gaming machine. Bit 0-5: Error code (000000 (B) = no error), Bit 6: 0 = frame control, 1 = main control, Bit 7: 0 = alarm only, 1 = alarm + hall control output, Bit 0-7: 0 = No error occurred.

[No.7]
Data name: Fraud detection status 1 (Note 4)
Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: Bit 0: Setting changing signal, Bit 1: Setting checking signal, Bit 2: RWM clear signal, Bit 3: Fraud detection signal 1, Bit 4: Fraud detection signal 2, Bit 5: Fraud detection signal 3, Bit 6: Not used, Bit 7: unused.

[No.8]
Data name: Number of game information in game information (Note 5) Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: Number of type information/count information (n), n = 0 to 5 (variable length)

[No.9]
Data name: Game information type information 1
Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: Type information 1

[No.10]
Data name: Game information count information 1
Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: Count 1

[No.11]
Data name: Game information type information n
Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: Type information n

[No.12]
Data name: Game information count information n
Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: Count information n

[No.13]
Data name: Checksum Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: Result of addition from message length to data part

(Note 1) Communication serial number The main control board adds 1 to the communication serial number when notifying game machine information. Note that the communication serial number is set to 0 after 255.

263 is a diagram showing (Note 2) main control state 1. FIG.
(Note 2) Main control state 1 is as follows.
Bit: 0
Name: Jackpot 1
Details: Set "1" in the jackpot 1 information, the jackpot to be notified (during the jackpot that clearly informs that the jackpot is in progress, during the predetermined jackpot)

Bit: 1
Name: Jackpot 2
Details: Jackpot 2 information, set "1" in all jackpots

Bit: 2
Name: Jackpot 3
Details: Set "1" during the big hit 3 information, time saving (reduction of fluctuation time) or the big hit moving to an advantageous state

Bit: 3
Name: Gaming machine status signal 1 (*1)
Details: "1" is set while the gaming machine status signal, gaming machine status signal 1 is ON

Bit: 4
Name: Game machine status signal 2 (*1)
Details: "1" is set while the gaming machine status signal and gaming machine status signal 2 are ON

Bit: 5
Name: Gaming machine status signal 3 (*1)
Details: "1" is set while the gaming machine status signal and gaming machine status signal 3 are ON

Bit: 6
Name: Gaming machine status signal 4 (*1)
Details: "1" is set while the gaming machine status signal and gaming machine status signal 4 are ON

Bit: 7
Name: Unused Details: 0 fixed

(*1) The gaming machine status signal is used to output the status from the extended external terminal board of the dedicated unit. The game machine state signals 1-4 correspond to the "external terminal board state output signal terminals 1-4" output from the extended external terminal board of the dedicated unit.

FIG. 264 is a diagram showing (Note 3) main control state 2. FIG.
(Note 3) Main control state 2 is as follows.
Bit: 0
Name: Big hit + Time saving (variation time reduction) or advantageous state Details: Set “1” during game state information, big hit, and time saving (variation time reduction) or advantageous state

Bit: 1
Name: High probability medium (* 2)
Details: Game status information, set "1" during high probability

Bit: 2
Name: Time saving (variation time reduction) or advantageous state Details: Set “1” during game state information, time saving (variation time reduction) or advantageous state

Bit: 3-7
Name: Not used Details: Fixed to 0 (*2) Not output for gaming machines that do not notify that the probability variation function is operating.

FIG. 265 is a diagram showing the (Note 4) fraud detection state.
(Note 4) Fraud detection status is as follows.
Bit: 0
Name: Setting change signal (*1)
Details: Indicates that the settings are being changed. 0=normal, 1=setting change in progress.

Bit: 1
Name: Setting confirmation signal (*1)
Details: Indicates that the settings are being checked. 0=Normal, 1=Checking settings.

Bit: 2
Name: RWM (RAM) clear signal Details: Indicates that RWM has been initialized. 0=normal, 1=RWM cleared.

The main control board can hold the information of the RWM clear signal (information of Bit2) until the power is turned off. As a result, the processing load on the main control board and the program capacity can be reduced.

Bit: 3
Name: Fraud detection signal 1 (*2)
Details: In addition to the above, indicates that there is a risk of fraud. (Urgency: Weak) (*3) 0 = normal, 1 = abnormal.

Bit: 4
Name: Fraud detection signal 2 (*2)
Details: In addition to the above, indicates that there is a risk of fraud. (Urgency: Medium) (*3) 0 = normal, 1 = abnormal.

Bit: 5
Name: Fraud detection signal 3 (*2)
Details: In addition to the above, indicates that there is a risk of fraud. (Urgency: Strong) (*3) 0 = normal, 1 = abnormal.

Bit: 6-7
Name: Unused Details: 0 fixed

(*1) The frame control board memorizes and keeps the signal on until firing or counting, and then turns off the signal 30 seconds later.
(*2) Details of fraud to be detected differ depending on the type of gaming machine. Also, it is limited to gaming machines that have a function to detect various types of fraud.
(*3) Since the degree of urgency is the level notified by the history server, it is output as "weak", "medium", and "strong" in descending order of severity as fraud.

[Contents of fraud detection signals 1, 2, and 3]
The fraud detection signals 1, 2, and 3 can correspond to, for example, the following information.
(1) Fraud detection signal 1 (urgency: weak)
Illegal prize winning (prize when normal electric accessory is not open, prize when special electric accessory is not open)
Vibration error (weak as it may occur unintentionally)

(2) Fraud detection signal 2 (urgency: medium)
Radio wave error, probability variable area abnormal passage

(3) Fraud detection signal 3 (urgency: high)
Unable to play (RWM abnormality, set value abnormality (for example, when the set value is 7 or more, etc.))

FIG. 266 is a diagram showing details of (Note 5) game information.
The game information notifies the frame control board of the start-up winning, the big winning opening winning, the number of symbol determinations, and the like generated in the main control board. The details of the game information are shown below.
The game information (2 bytes) consists of (1) type information (upper 1 byte) and (2) count information (lower 1 byte), a total of 2 bytes.

[(1) Type information]
FIG. 267 is a diagram showing details of type information.
The type information (1 byte) consists of a data type (upper 4 bits, Bits 4 to 7) and a data number (lower 4 bits, Bits 0 to 3), and a data number is set for each data type.

FIG. 268 is a diagram showing details of the data type of the type information.
The data types (Bits 4 to 7) of the type information are as follows.
Bits 4-7: 0
Type name: unused Contents: -

Bits 4-7: 1
Type name: Starting entrance prize Contents: Notify that you have won the starting entrance.

Bits 4-7: 2
Type name: Grand winning mouth prize by special electric accessory operation Contents: Notify that you have won the big winning mouth.

Bits 4-7: 3
Type name: Winning entrance prize Contents: Notify that you have won the winning entrance.

Bits 4-7: 4
Type name: Gate passage or normal drawing entry prize Contents: Notify that you have passed the gate or won the normal drawing entry.

Bits 4-7: 5
Type name: Start-up prize by normal electric accessory operation Content: Notify that you have won the start-up by normal electric accessory operation.

Bits 4-7: 6
Type name: Grand prize mouth prize by continuous actuation device operation Contents: Notify that you have won the grand prize mouth by actuation of the continuous actuation device.

Bits 4-7: 7
Type name: Winning by normal electric accessory operation Content: Notify that you have won the prize opening by normal electric accessory operation.

Bits 4-7: 8
Type name: Winning due to operation of other accessories Content: Notify that you have won a prize to the winning entrance by operating non-electric accessories.

Bits 4-7: 9
Type name: Number of design decisions Contents: Notifies the number of fluctuations in special or normal patterns.

Bits 4-7: 10
Type name: Per special design Content: Notifies that the special electric accessory has been activated when the accessory continuous operation device is activated or the accessory continuous activation device is not activated.

Bits 4-7: 11
Type name: per normal design Contents: Notify the normal per design.

Bits 4-7: 12
Type name: Number of uses (Number of times the big prize mouth is opened)
Contents: Notifies the opening of the grand prize opening when the accessory continuous operation device is not in operation.

Bits 4-7: 13
Type name: Specific area passage Contents: Notifies that the game ball has passed a specific area.

Bits 4-7: 14
Type name: External terminal board pulse output Description: Instructs to output pulses from the dedicated unit.

Bits 4-7: 15
Type name: Performance information status notification Contents: Notifies the status necessary for the frame control board to calculate performance information.

[Priority of data type of game machine information notification]
For the data types 0 to 15 of Bits 4 to 7 in FIG. 268, the priority of transmission when information is stored at the same time may be determined in advance.
The priority is, for example, the following order.
"15 (Performance information status notification)">"1 (Starting entrance winning)">"2 (Big winning entrance winning by special electric accessory operation)">"3 (winning entrance winning)">...>"14 (external terminal board pulse output)

Therefore, for example, in the case where information is stored that five start-up wins have occurred, two wins have occurred in the win-win game, and one normal symbol hit has occurred, if power is cut off and the game machine is restored, only one game machine When sending information notifications,
(15) Performance information status notification (1) Start-up winning (1) Starting-up winning (1) Starting-up winning (1) Starting-up winning . In this example, the maximum number of data types that can be included in one transmission of the gaming state notification is five.

In addition, the rest of the information is transmitted in subsequent gaming machine information notifications. If this case
(1) start-up win (3) win-win win (3) win-win win (11) normal symbol winning The gaming machine information notification including the remaining four data types is transmitted in this order.
Therefore, when returning from power failure and switching the game state (for example, when shifting from the normal game state to the jackpot game state, when shifting from the high probability state to the low probability state, the time reduction state to the non-time reduction state case, etc.), the data type of the gaming machine information notification is always (15) performance information status notification at the top.

269 and 270 are diagrams showing data numbers of type information.
The data numbers (Bits 0 to 3) of the type information are as follows.
The type information (1 byte) includes a data type (Bits 4 to 7; type name) and a data number (Bits 0 to 3; content).

Bits 4-7: 1
Type name: Starting entry prize Contents: Shows the starting entry number. 1 = start port 1, 2 = start port 2, 3 = start port 3, 4 = start port 1 by other role product operation, 5 = start port 2 by other role product operation, 6 = start port 3 by other role product operation , 0 and 7-15 are unused.

Bits 4-7: 2
Type name: Grand winning mouth prize by special electric accessory operation Contents: Shows the big winning mouth number. 1 = Grand prize mouth 1, 2 = Grand prize mouth 2, 0 and 3 to 15 are unused.

Bits 4-7: 3
Type name: Winning entry prize Contents: Shows the winning entry number. 1 to 15 = Prize openings 1 to 15, 0 is unused.

Bits 4-7: 4
Type name: Gate passage or normal pattern operation entrance prize Contents: Indicates the passage gate number or normal pattern operation entrance number. 1-15 = Passage gate or normal map operation port 1-15, 0 is unused.

Bits 4-7: 5
Type name: Start-up prize by normal electric accessory operation Contents: Shows the start-up number. 1 = start port 1, 2 = start port 2, 3 = start port 3, 0 and 4 to 15 are unused.

Bits 4-7: 6
Type name: Grand winning mouth prize by operation of accessory continuous operation device Contents: Shows the big winning mouth number. 1 = Grand prize mouth 1, 2 = Grand prize mouth 2, 0 and 3 to 15 are unused.

Bits 4-7: 7
Type name: Winning by normal electric accessory operation Contents: Shows the winning opening number. 1 to 15 = Prize openings 1 to 15, 0 is unused.

Bits 4-7: 8
Type name: Winning by operating other accessories Contents: Shows the winning opening number. 1 to 15 = Prize openings 1 to 15, 0 is unused.

Bits 4-7: 9
Type name: Number of design confirmations Contents: Indicates special number and normal number. 1 = Special map 1, 2 = Special map 2, 3 = General map 1, 4 = General map 2, 5 = General map 3, 6 = General map 4, 0 and 7 to 15 are unused.

Bits 4-7: 10
Type name: Per special design Contents: Indicates the type per special design. 1 = The continuous activation device is activated (big hit), 2 = The special electric activation device is activated when the continuous activation device is not activated (small hit), 0 and 3 to 15 are not used.

Bits 4-7: 11
Type name: Normal per pattern Contents: Indicates the per normal pattern number. 1 = Normal map 1, 2 = Normal map 2, 3 = Normal map 3, 4 = Normal map 4, 0 and 5-15 are unused.

Bits 4-7: 12
Type name: Number of uses (Number of times the big prize mouth is opened)
Contents: Indicates the accessory number. 1 = role 1, 0 and 2 to 15 are unused.

Bits 4-7: 13
Type name: Pass through specific area Description: 1 = Specific area 1, 0 and 2 to 15 are unused.

Bits 4-7: 14
Type name: External terminal block pulse output Description: Indicates the external terminal block pulse output signal terminal of the dedicated unit (*1).

Bits 4-7: 15
Type name: Performance information status notification Contents: 1 fixed, 0 and 2 to 15 are unused.

FIG. 271 is a diagram showing data numbers of (*1) external terminal strip pulse outputs.
The external terminal board pulse output is used to instruct pulse output from the extended external terminal board of the dedicated unit, and specifies the output signal terminal of the dedicated unit by the data number.
The data numbers and output signal terminals are as follows.

The type information includes data types (Bits 4 to 7) and data numbers (Bits 0 to 3).
Data type (Bits 4 to 7): External terminal board pulse output (Bits 4 to 7=14)
Data number (Bit 0 to 3): 0
Dedicated unit external terminal board Pulse output signal terminal: Not used

Data type (Bits 4 to 7): External terminal board pulse output (Bits 4 to 7=14)
Data number (Bit 0 to 3): 1
Dedicated unit external terminal board pulse output signal terminal: External terminal board pulse output signal terminal 1

Data type (Bits 4 to 7): External terminal board pulse output (Bits 4 to 7=14)
Data number (Bit0-3): 2
Dedicated unit external terminal board pulse output signal terminal: External terminal board pulse output signal terminal 2

Data type (Bits 4 to 7): External terminal board pulse output (Bits 4 to 7=14)
Data number (Bit0-3): 3
Dedicated unit external terminal board pulse output signal terminal: External terminal board pulse output signal terminal 3

Data type (Bits 4 to 7): External terminal board pulse output (Bits 4 to 7=14)
Data number (Bit0-3): 4
Dedicated unit external terminal board pulse output signal terminal: External terminal board pulse output signal terminal 4

Data type (Bits 4 to 7): External terminal board pulse output (Bits 4 to 7=14)
Data number (Bit 0-3): 5-15
Dedicated unit external terminal board Pulse output signal terminal: Not used

[(2) Count information]
As the count information, different frequency information is set for each data type.
Details of count information for each data type and an example of data storage are shown below.

(a) The data type is 1 = start-up prize, 2 = large prize-winning prize by special electric accessory operation, 3 = prize-winning prize, 4 = gate passage or normal figure operation prize, 5 = normal electric accessory operation 6=Large winning prize by operation of accessory continuous operation device, 7=Prize by normal electric accessory operation, 8=In the case of winning by operation of other accessory Fig. 272 is a diagram showing details of the count information. be.
The count information consists of the number of winning balls (upper 4 bits, Bits 4 to 7) and the number of prizes (lower 4 bits, Bits 0 to 3).
The number of prize balls (Bits 4 to 7) is 1 to 15 (pieces). 4 = Gate pass counts as 0 balls. In addition, the number of prize balls shall be 1 to 15 (pieces) for the normal figure operation entrance prize.
The winning number (Bits 0 to 3) is 1, and 0 and 2 to 15 are unused.

FIG. 273 is a diagram showing an example of a case where two of three prize balls are won in starting hole 1 in (Example 1) 1=starting hole winning.
Game information: 0x1131
Data type (Bits 4 to 7) of type information (1 byte): 1 = start point Data number (Bits 0 to 3) of type information (1 byte): 1 = start point 1
Number of prize balls in count information (1 byte) (Bits 4 to 7): 3 = 3 prize balls Number of prizes in count information (1 byte) (Bits 0 to 3): 1 = 1 prize

Game information: 0x1131
Data type (Bits 4 to 7) of type information (1 byte): 1 = start point Data number (Bits 0 to 3) of type information (1 byte): 1 = start point 1
Number of prize balls (Bits 4 to 7) of count information (1 byte): 3 = 3 Number of prizes won (Bits 0 to 3) of count information (1 byte): 1 = 1 prize Game information is 0x1131 is 2 data.

FIG. 274 is a diagram showing an example in which 3 balls of 15 prize balls are won in the big winning hole 2 of (Example 2) 2=special electric accessory operation.

Game information: 0x22F1
Type information (1 byte) data type (Bits 4 to 7): 2 = big winning mouth Type information (1 byte) data number (Bits 0 to 3): 2 = big winning mouth 2
Number of prize balls in count information (1 byte) (Bits 4 to 7): 15 = 15 prize balls Number of prizes in count information (1 byte) (Bits 0 to 3): 1 = 1 prize

Game information: 0x22F1
Type information (1 byte) data type (Bits 4 to 7): 2 = big winning mouth Type information (1 byte) data number (Bits 0 to 3): 2 = big winning mouth 2
Number of prize balls in count information (1 byte) (Bits 4 to 7): 15 = 15 prize balls Number of prizes in count information (1 byte) (Bits 0 to 3): 1 = 1 prize

Game information: 0x22F1
Type information (1 byte) data type (Bits 4 to 7): 2 = big winning mouth Type information (1 byte) data number (Bits 0 to 3): 2 = big winning mouth 2
Number of prize balls in count information (1 byte) (Bits 4 to 7): 15 = 15 prize balls Number of prizes in count information (1 byte) (Bits 0 to 3): 1 = 1 prize Game information is 0x22F1 is 3 data.

FIG. 275 is a diagram showing an example of a case where one prize ball wins the prize hole 2 in (Example 3) 3=winning prize.
Game information: 0x3211
Data type (Bits 4 to 7) of type information (1 byte): 3 = Winning gate Data number (Bits 0 to 3) of type information (1 byte): 2 = Winning gate 2
Number of prize balls in count information (1 byte) (Bits 4 to 7): 1 = 1 prize Number of prizes in count information (1 byte) (Bits 0 to 3): 1 = 1 prize In game information, 0x3211 is 1 data.

FIG. 276 is a diagram showing an example of a case where (Example 4) 4=gate passing, passing through the passing gate 1 once.
Game information: 0x4101
Type information (1 byte) data type (Bits 4 to 7): 4 = Gate passage or general drawing operation entrance prize Type information (1 byte) data number (Bits 0 to 3): 1 = Pass gate 1
Number of prize balls (Bits 4 to 7) of count information (1 byte): 0 = 0 Number of winning balls (Bit 0 to 3) of count information (1 byte): 1 = 1 pass Game information, 0x4101 is 1 data.

FIG. 277 is a diagram showing an example of the case of (Example 5) 4 = winning a prize in the normal pattern operation opening, in which one prize is won in the normal pattern operation opening 2 of the three prize balls.
Game information: 0x4231
Data type of type information (1 byte) (Bits 4-7): 4 = Pass through the gate or win a normal figure operation opening Type information (1 byte) data number (Bit 0-3): 2 = Operation opening 2
Number of prize balls in count information (1 byte) (Bits 4 to 7): 3 = 3 prize balls Number of prizes in count information (1 byte) (Bits 0 to 3): 1 = 1 prize Game information, 0x4231 is 1 data.

FIG. 278 is a diagram showing an example of a case where (Example 6) 5 = winning a starting hole by normal electric accessory operation, and winning one in a winning hole of three prize balls by normal electric accessory operation.
Game information: 0x5131
Data type of type information (1 byte) (Bits 4 to 7): 5 = Starting point winning by normal electric accessory operation Data number of type information (1 byte) (Bits 0 to 3): 1 = Starting point 1
Number of prize balls in count information (1 byte) (Bits 4 to 7): 3 = 3 prize balls Number of prizes in count information (1 byte) (Bits 0 to 3): 1 = 1 prize Game information, 0x5131 is 1 data.

Fig. 279 is a diagram showing an example of a case where 15 balls are won in the big prize opening 1 by the operation of the continuous actuating device in (Example 7) 6 = the winning of the large winning by activating the continuous actuating device. is.
Game information: 0x61F1
Type information (1 byte) data type (Bits 4 to 7): 6 = Large winning opening prize by operation of continuous operation device Type information (1 byte) data number (Bits 0 to 3): 1 = Big winning opening 1
Number of prize balls (Bit 4-7) of count information (1 byte): 15 = 15 prize balls Number of prizes (Bit 0-3) of count information (1 byte): 1 = 1 prize Game information is 0x61F1 is 1 data.

Figure 280 is a diagram showing an example in which (Example 8) 7 = winning by normal electric role product operation, and one win in winning hole 2 of 10 prize balls by normal electric role product operation.
Game information: 0x72A1
Type information (1 byte) data type (Bits 4 to 7): 7 = Winning by normal electric accessory operation Type information (1 byte) data number (Bits 0 to 3): 2 = Winning port 2
Number of prize balls (Bits 4 to 7) of count information (1 byte): 10 = 10 Number of prizes (Bit 0 to 3) of count information (1 byte): 1 = 1 prize Game information is 0x72A1 is 1 data.

FIG. 281 is a diagram showing an example of (Example 9) 8=winning by operation of the other role product, in which one ball is won in the winning hole 1 of 10 prize balls by the operation of the other role product.
Game information: 0x81A1
Data type (Bits 4 to 7) of type information (1 byte): 8 = Winning due to operation of other accessories Type information (1 byte) data number (Bits 0 to 3): 1 = Winning port 1
Number of prize balls in count information (1 byte) (Bits 4 to 7): 10 = 10 prize balls Number of prizes in count information (1 byte) (Bits 0 to 3): 1 = 1 prize Game information is 0x81A1 is 1 data.

(b) When the data type is 9=the number of design determinations FIG. 282 is a diagram showing details of the count information.
The count information is composed of unused (upper 4 bits, Bits 4 to 7) and the number of design determinations (lower 4 Bits, Bits 0 to 3).
Unused (Bits 4 to 7) are fixed to 0.
The number of design determinations (Bits 0 to 3) is 1 (times), and 0 and 2 to 15 are unused.

FIG. 283 is a diagram showing an example in which the special symbol 1 stops once in (Example 1) the number of times of design determination.
Game information: 0x9101
Data type of type information (1 byte) (Bits 4 to 7): 9 = Number of design decisions Data number of type information (1 byte) (Bits 0 to 3): 1 = Special design 1
Unused count information (1 byte) (Bits 4 to 7): 0 fixed Number of design determinations (Bits 0 to 3) of count information (1 byte): 1 = 1 stop Game information is 0x9101.

FIG. 284 is a diagram showing an example in which the normal symbol 1 stops once in (Example 2) the number of times of determining the symbol.
Game information: 0x9301
Data type of type information (1 byte) (Bits 4 to 7): 9 = Number of design decisions Data number of type information (1 byte) (Bits 0 to 3): 3 = Normal design 1
Unused count information (1 byte) (Bits 4 to 7): 0 fixed Number of design determinations (Bits 0 to 3) of count information (1 byte): 1 = 1 stop Game information is 0x9301.

(c) When the data type is 10=per special symbol FIG. 285 is a diagram showing details of the count information.
The count information consists of unused (upper 4 bits, Bits 4 to 7) and hit count (lower 4 Bits, Bits 0 to 3).
Unused (Bits 4 to 7) are fixed to 0.
The number of hits (Bits 0 to 3) is 1 (times), and 0 and 2 to 15 are unused.

FIG. 286 is a diagram showing an example in which the role product continuous actuating device operates (jackpot) once (Example 1) in the operation (jackpot).
Game information: 0xA101
Data type of type information (1 byte) (Bit4-7): 10 = per special pattern Data number of type information (1 byte) (Bit0-3): 1 = big hit Unused count information (1 byte) (Bit4- 7): Fixed to 0 Number of hits (Bits 0 to 3) of count information (1 byte): 1 = Occurs once Game information is 0xA101.

Fig. 287 shows (Example 2) when the special electric accessory is activated (small hit) when the accessory continuous operation device is not operated, and the special electric accessory is operated once when the accessory continuous operation device is not operated It is a figure which shows the example at the time of (small hit).
Game information: 0xA201
Data type of type information (1 byte) (Bit4 to 7): 10 = per special pattern Data number of type information (1 byte) (Bit0 to 3): 2 = small hit Unused count information (1 byte) (Bit4 ~7): 0 fixed Number of hits (Bits 0 to 3) of count information (1 byte): 1 = 1 occurrence Game information is 0xA201.

(d) When the data type is 11=per normal symbol FIG. 288 is a diagram showing details of the count information.
The count information consists of unused (upper 4 bits, Bits 4 to 7) and hit count (lower 4 Bits, Bits 0 to 3).
Unused (Bits 4 to 7) are fixed to 0.
The number of hits (Bits 0 to 3) is 1 (times), and 0 and 2 to 15 are unused.

FIG. 289 is a diagram showing an example of a case where one normal symbol hit occurs in (Example 1) normal symbol hit.
Game information: 0xB101
Data type of type information (1 byte) (Bit 4 to 7): 11 = per normal design Data number of type information (1 byte) (Bit 0 to 3): 1 = normal design 1
Unused count information (1 byte) (Bits 4 to 7): 0 fixed Hit count (Bits 0 to 3) of count information (1 byte): 1 = 1 occurrence Game information is 0xB101.

(e) When the data type is 12=the number of times of the prize (the number of openings of the big prize opening) FIG. 290 is a diagram showing the details of the count information.
The count information consists of unused (upper 4 bits, Bits 4 to 7) and the number of times (lower 4 Bits, Bits 0 to 3).
Unused (Bits 4 to 7) are fixed to 0.
The number of times of role (Bits 0 to 3) is 1 (times), and 0 and 2 to 15 are unused.

FIG. 291 is a diagram showing an example of the case where the role product 1 is released once in (Example 1) the number of times of the role product.
Game information: 0xC101
Data type (Bits 4 to 7) of type information (1 byte): 12 = Number of characters Data number (Bits 0 to 3) of type information (1 byte): 1 = Character 1
Unused count information (1 byte) (Bits 4 to 7): fixed to 0 Number of count information (1 byte) (Bits 0 to 3): 1 = 1 open Game information is 0xC101.

(f) When the data type is 13=pass through specific area FIG. 292 is a diagram showing details of the count information.
The count information consists of unused (upper 4 bits, Bits 4 to 7) and specific area passing numbers (lower 4 Bits, Bits 0 to 3).
Unused (Bits 4 to 7) are fixed to 0.
The specific area passing number (Bits 0 to 3) is 1 (times), and 0 and 2 to 15 are unused.

FIG. 293 is a diagram showing an example of passing through the specific region 1 once in (Example 1) passing through the specific region.
Game information: 0xD101
Data type (Bits 4 to 7) of type information (1 byte): 13 = Pass through specific area Data number (Bits 0 to 3) of type information (1 byte): 1 = Specific area 1
Unused count information (1 byte) (Bits 4 to 7): 0 fixed Number of count information (1 byte) (Bits 0 to 3): 1 = 1 pass Game information is 0xD101.

(g) When the data type is 14=external terminal board pulse output FIG. 294 is a diagram showing details of the count information.
The count information consists of unused (upper 4 bits, Bits 4 to 7) and the number of pulse outputs (lower 4 Bits, Bits 0 to 3).
Unused (Bits 4 to 7) are fixed to 0.
The number of pulse outputs (Bits 0 to 3) is 1 (times), and 0 and 2 to 15 are unused.

FIG. 295 is a diagram showing an example in which one pulse is output from the external terminal board pulse output signal terminal 1 of the dedicated unit in (Example 1) external terminal board pulse output.
Game information: 0xE101
Data type (Bits 4 to 7) of type information (1 byte): 14 = External terminal board pulse output Data number (Bits 0 to 3) of type information (1 byte): 1 = External terminal board pulse output signal terminal 1
Unused count information (1 byte) (Bits 4 to 7): 0 fixed Number of count information (1 byte) (Bits 0 to 3): 1 = 1 pulse output Game information is 0xE101.

(h) When the data type is 15=performance information status notification FIG. 296 is a diagram showing details of the count information.
The count information consists of unused (upper 4 bits, Bits 4 to 7) and status flags (lower 4 Bits, Bits 0 to 3).
This notification is sent when the state changes during the game, when the power is turned on, and when the state changes from setting change or setting confirmation to a game ready state.
Unused (Bits 4 to 7) are fixed to 0.
The status flags (Bit0 to 3) are Bit0: base (0 = low base, 1 = high base), Bit1: big hit (0 = normal, 1 = big hit), Bit2: high probability (0 = Low probability, 1=High probability), Bit3: Not used.

FIG. 297 is a diagram illustrating an example of a state change to high base medium in (Example 1) performance information state notification.
Game information: 0xF101
Type information (1 byte) data type (Bits 4 to 7): 15 = Performance information status notification Type information (1 byte) data number (Bits 0 to 3): 1 fixed Unused count information (1 byte) (Bits 4 to 7): 0 fixed State flags (Bit0-3) of count information (1 byte): Bit0: base (1 = high base), Bit1: big hit (0 = normal), Bit2: high probability (0 = Low probability), Bit 3: 0 fixed Game information is 0xF101.

[7.2.4. Game machine information response]
FIG. 298 is a diagram showing details of the gaming machine information response.
Message name: Game machine information response Message direction: Frame control board→Main control board Message overview: The frame control board responds to the main control board with the reception result of the game machine information notification and the frame control status.

[No.1]
Data name: Message length Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Content: 0x05

[No.2]
Data name: Command Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Content: 0x12

[No.3]
Data name: Communication number Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: Communication sequence number (0 to 255). The frame control board directly responds with the communication serial number received in the game machine information notification.

[No.4]
Data name: Game machine information reception result Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: Receipt result (0x00 = Receipt OK)

[No.5]
Data name: Checksum Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: Result of addition from message length to data part.

[8. Communication procedure between main control board and frame control board]
[8.1. Communication procedure]
[8.1.1. Communication procedure from power on]
FIG. 299 is a diagram showing a communication procedure after power-on.
[F100] The main control board 560 and the frame control board 550 are powered on.
[F101] The main control board 560 is activated in 3 minutes (*1).

[F102] The main control board 560 transmits a gaming machine installation information notification (communication number=0) to the frame control board 550. FIG.
[F103] The frame control board 550 transmits a gaming machine installation information response (communication number=0) to the main control board 560. FIG. At this time, the main control board 560 permits firing.

[F104] The main control board 560 transmits a gaming machine information notification (communication number=1) to the frame control board 550. FIG.
[F105] The frame control board 550 transmits a game machine information response (communication number=1) to the main control board 560. FIG.

[F106] The main control board 560 transmits a gaming machine information notification (communication number=2) to the frame control board 550. FIG.
[F107] The frame control board 550 transmits a gaming machine information response (communication number=2) to the main control board 560. FIG.

[F108] The main control board 560 transmits a gaming machine information notification (communication number=3) to the frame control board 550. FIG.
[F109] The frame control board 550 transmits a gaming machine information response (communication number=3) to the main control board 560. FIG.
The interval at which the main control board 560 transmits each piece of information is 108 ms.

(1) The main control board 560 notifies the gaming machine installation information after the power is turned on.
(2) After the main control board 560 normally receives the game machine installation information response, when the game becomes ready to play, the main control board 560 permits shooting and notifies the game machine information at a constant cycle (108 ms).
Since the frame control board 550 calculates (generates) the performance information (gaming machine performance information), the gaming machine information notification (communication serial number=1) notifies the performance information state notification (data type 15) at the top. Notify before the buffered game information at the time of power failure recovery.
(*1) If the frame control board 550 fails to receive the gaming machine installation information notification within 3 minutes after activation, it reports an error as communication line disconnection. After the communication line is disconnected, the error notification is canceled when the game machine installation information notification is normally received.

[8.1.2. Communication procedure when changing settings or checking settings]
FIG. 300 is a diagram showing a communication procedure when changing settings or confirming settings.
[F110] The main control board 560 and the frame control board 550 are powered on.
[F111] The main control board 560 is activated in 3 minutes (*1).

[F112] The main control board 560 transmits a gaming machine installation information notification (communication number=0) to the frame control board 550. FIG.
[F113] The frame control board 550 transmits a gaming machine installation information response (communication number=0) to the main control board 560. FIG.

[F114] The main control board 560 transmits a gaming machine information notification (communication number=1) to the frame control board 550. FIG.
[F115] The frame control board 550 transmits a gaming machine information response (communication number=1) to the main control board 560. FIG.

[F116] The main control board 560 transmits a gaming machine information notification (communication number=n) to the frame control board 550. FIG.
[F117] The frame control board 550 transmits a gaming machine information response (communication number=n) to the main control board 560. FIG. At this time, the main control board 560 permits firing.

[F118] The main control board 560 transmits a gaming machine information notification (communication number=n+1) to the frame control board 550. FIG.
[F119] The frame control board 550 transmits a gaming machine information response (communication number=n+1) to the main control board 560. FIG.
The interval at which the main control board 560 transmits each piece of information is 108 ms.
In the drawing, the portion surrounded by the dotted line is the setting change state or the setting confirmation state.

(1) The main control board 560 notifies the gaming machine installation information after the power is turned on.
(2) After normally receiving the gaming machine installation information response, the main control board 560 shifts to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, and notifies the gaming machine information at regular intervals (108 ms). In the game machine information, the main control state 1, the main control state 2, and the game machine error state are set to 0, and only the fraud detection state 1 is notified by setting a corresponding flag.
(3) After setting change or setting confirmation is completed, when the game becomes ready to be played, shooting is permitted and game machine information is notified.
Since the frame control board 550 calculates the performance information, the gaming machine information notification (communication serial number=n+1) notifies the performance information state notification (data type 15) at the top. Notify before the buffered game information at the time of power failure recovery.
(*1) If the frame control board 550 fails to receive the gaming machine installation information notification within 3 minutes after activation, it reports an error as communication line disconnection.
After the communication line is disconnected, the error notification is canceled when the game machine installation information notification is normally received.

[8.2. Communication line disconnection detection 1]
FIG. 301 is a diagram showing a procedure of communication line disconnection detection 1. FIG.
[F120] The main control board 560 transmits a notification message (communication number=n) to the frame control board 550.
[F121] The frame control board 550 transmits a response message (communication number=n) to the main control board 560. However, it does not reach the main control board 560 .

[F122] The main control board 560 transmits a notification message (communication number=n+1) to the frame control board 550.
[F123] The frame control board 550 transmits a response message (communication number=n+1) to the main control board 560. However, it does not reach the main control board 560 .

[F124] The main control board 560 transmits a notification message (communication number=n+2) to the frame control board 550.
[F125] The frame control board 550 transmits a response message (communication number=n+2) to the main control board 560. However, it does not reach the main control board 560 .

[F126] The main control board 560 determines that the communication line is broken when the response is not received ten times.

In this way, when the main control board 560 fails to receive a response after accumulating 10 times, the main control board 560 reports an error as a disconnection of the communication line. After the communication line is disconnected, the power is turned off/on to recover from the communication line disconnection.

[8.3. Communication line disconnection detection 2]
FIG. 302 is a diagram showing the procedure of communication line disconnection detection 2. As shown in FIG.
[F130] The main control board 560 transmits a notification message (communication number=n) to the frame control board 550.
[F131] The frame control board 550 transmits a response message (communication number=n) to the main control board 560.

[F132] The main control board 560 transmits a notification message (communication number=n+1) to the frame control board 550. However, it does not reach the frame control board 550 .

[F133] The main control board 560 transmits a notification message (communication number=n+2) to the frame control board 550. However, it does not reach the frame control board 550 .

[F134] If the frame control board 550 does not receive a notification message within 100 ms after receiving the first notification message, it determines that the communication line is disconnected.

In this way, if the frame control board 550 fails to receive the next notification within 1000 ms after receiving the notification telegram, the frame control board 550 reports an error as communication line disconnection. After the communication line is disconnected, if the notification telegram is received normally, the error notification is canceled.

[8.4. Ball out state]
FIG. 303 is a diagram showing the procedure of the ball extraction state.
[F140] The main control board 560 and the frame control board 550 are powered on.
[F141] The main control board 560 transmits a gaming machine installation information notification (communication number=0) to the frame control board 550. FIG.
[F103] The frame control board 550 transmits a gaming machine installation information response (communication number = 0) to the main control board 560 (*1 ball drawn state).

The frame control board 550 notifies the ball-out state by responding to the gaming machine installation information when the power is turned on.
(*1) The main control board 560 and the frame control board 550 do not communicate after transmitting and receiving in the state of ball extraction. In addition, the operation continues from the time the power is turned on until the power is turned off.

When the main control board 560 receives the gaming machine installation information response and the frame control board 550 accepts the reception, the main control board 560 permits the launch and shifts to the normal game. If the ball is out, allow firing and shift to infinite loop processing. Infinite loop processing is a game stop state in which fluctuations in normal symbols and special symbols and operation of normal electric accessories and special electric accessories cannot be performed.

[Conditions for launching game balls]
The conditions for allowing game balls to be shot are as follows.
〔setting change〕
Ball out state: Can be fired Not in ball out state: Cannot be fired

[Setting confirmation]
Ball out state: Can be fired Not in ball out state: Cannot be fired

[Normal game (playable state)]
Ball out state: Can be fired Not in ball out state: Can be fired

[RWM (RAM) error]
Ball out state: Can be fired Not in ball out state: Cannot be fired

[9. External terminal board output]
[9.1. Output configuration diagram]
FIG. 304 is a diagram showing an output configuration diagram.
The main control board 560 selects the signal to be output from the game specifications of the game board, and outputs the signal from the external terminal board of the hall controller output BOX according to the game information (command) and the status flag.

The main control board 560 of the game board is capable of pulse output (game information (command)) (number/number of times information). The main control board 560 outputs pulses with game information (commands).
Examples of output are the number of symbol determination times, start opening, external terminal board pulse output signals 1 to 4, and the like.

Also, the main control board 560 of the game board is capable of state output (state flag) (ON/OFF signal). The main control board 560 sets the states in main control state 1 and main control state 2 .
Examples of output are jackpot 1, jackpot 2, external terminal board state output signals 1 to 4, and the like.

Serial communication is possible between the main control board 560 of the game board and the frame control board 550 of the game machine frame.
A pulse output (game information) and a state output (state flag) from the main control board 560 can be transmitted to a dedicated unit 3040, hall controller output BOX 790, hall computer or data lamp 792 or the like.

The frame control board 550 of the game machine frame and the dedicated unit 700 are capable of serial communication.
The dedicated unit 700 and hall controller output BOX 790 are capable of serial communication.

Hall control output BOX 790 includes status outputs (13 ports) such as jackpot 1, jackpot 2, external terminal board state output signals 1 to 4 (expansion port), pattern confirmation number, start port, external terminal board pulse output signal terminal 1 A pulse output (15 ports) such as .about.4 (expansion port) can be sent to a hall computer or data lamp 792 or the like.

[9.2. Hall controller output BOX External terminal board output signal list]
[9.2.1 Standard 20 ports]
Figures 305 and 306 are diagrams showing standard 20 ports.
With the standard 20 port, signals are output from the external terminal board of the hall controller output BOX by transmitting game information (commands) and setting status flags shown below.

Item number: 1
Hall controller output signal name: Number of shots Hall controller output signal content: 1 pulse output for 10 shot ball data Game information (command) from main control for pulse output: (*1)
Status flag from main control for status output: -
Signal type: Pulse

Item number: 2
Hall controller output signal name: Prize ball Hall controller output signal content: 1 pulse output for 10 prize ball data managed by frame control Game information (command) from main control for pulse output: (*1)
Status flag from main control for status output: -
Signal type: Pulse

Item number: 3
Hall controller output signal name: Number of times of pattern confirmation 1
Hall controller output signal content: Special figure 1 (first special symbol) 1 pulse output per stop Game information (command) from the main control that is the target of pulse output: 9101H
Status flag from main control for status output: -
Signal type: Pulse

Item number: 4
Hall controller output signal name: Design confirmation number 2
Hall controller output signal content: Special figure 2 (second special symbol) 1 pulse output per stop Game information (command) from the main control that is the target of pulse output: 9201H
Status flag from main control for status output: -
Signal type: Pulse

Item number: 5
Hall controller output signal name: Start port 1
Hall controller output signal content: 1 pulse output for 1 ball passing through the starting port 1 Game information (command) from the main control for pulse output: 1111H to 11F1H, 1411H to 14F1H, 5111H to 51F1H
Status flag from main control for status output: -
Signal type: Pulse

Item number: 6
Hall controller output signal name: Start port 2
Hall controller output signal content: 1 pulse output for 1 ball passing through starting port 2 Game information (command) from main control for pulse output: 1211H to 12F1H, 1511H to 15F1H, 5211H to 52F1H
Status flag from main control for status output: -
Signal type: Pulse

Item number: 7
Hall controller output signal name: Passing gate 1
Hall controller output signal content: 1 pulse output for 1 ball passing gate 1 Game information (command) from the main control for pulse output: 4101H
Status flag from main control for status output: -
Signal type: Pulse

Item number: 8
Hall controller output signal name: Passing gate 2
Hall controller output signal content: 1 pulse output for 1 ball passing gate 2 Game information (command) from the main control that is the target of pulse output: 4201H
Status flag from main control for status output: -
Signal type: Pulse

Item number: 9
Hall controller output signal name: Number of accessories (Number of times the grand prize opening is opened)
Hall controller output signal content: 1 pulse output per opening of the grand prize opening when the accessory continuous operation device is not activated Game information (command) from the main control that is the target of pulse output: C101H
Status flag from main control for status output: -
Signal type: Pulse

Item number: 10
Hall controller output signal name: Number of winning prizes (number of winning prizes)
Hall controller output signal content: 1 pulse output for 1 ball passing through each count hole in the role (big prize hole) Game information (command) from the main control that is the target of pulse output: 2111H ~ 21F1H, 2211H ~ 22F1H, 6111H ~ 61F1H, 6211H-62F1H
Status flag from main control for status output: -
Signal type: Pulse

Item number: 11
Hall control output signal name: Specific area passage Hall control output signal content: 1 pulse output for 1 ball passing specific area Game information (command) from the main control that is the target of pulse output: D101H
Status flag from main control for status output: -
Signal type: Pulse

Item number: 12
Hall controller output signal name: Jackpot 1
Hall controller output signal content: "ON" output at the time of a big hit to be notified Game information (command) from the main control that is the target of pulse output:-
Status flag from main control for status output: ON when Bit 0 of main control status 1 is "1"
Signal type: State

Item number: 13
Hall controller output signal name: Jackpot 2
Hall controller output signal content: "ON" output at all jackpots Game information (command) from the main control that is the target of pulse output:-
Status flag from main control for status output: ON when Bit 1 of main control status 1 is "1"
Signal type: State

Item number: 14
Hall controller output signal name: Jackpot 3
Hall controller output signal content: "ON" output at the time of a big hit that saves time or is in an advantageous state Game information (command) from the main control that is the target of pulse output:-
Status flag from main control for status output: ON when Bit 2 of main control status 1 is "1"
Signal type: State

Item number: 15
Hall control output signal name: during jackpot + time reduction Hall control output signal content: "ON" output during jackpot, time reduction or advantageous state Game information (command) from the main control that is the target of pulse output: -
Status flag from main control for status output: ON when Bit 0 of main control status 2 is "1"
Signal type: State

Item number: 16
Hall control output signal name: During high probability Hall control output signal content: Output "ON" during high probability Game information (command) from main control for pulse output: -
Status flag from main control for status output: ON when Bit 1 of main control status 2 is "1"
Signal type: State

Item number: 17
Hall controller output signal name: During time saving Hall controller output signal content: "ON" output during time saving or advantageous state Game information (command) from the main control that is the target of pulse output:-
Status flag from main control for status output: ON when Bit 2 of main control status 2 is "1"
Signal type: State

Item number: 18
Hall controller output signal name: Door open Hall controller output signal content: "ON" output when front decoration or back mechanism is open Game information (command) from main control for pulse output: -
Status flag from main control for status output: (*1)
Signal type: State

Item number: 19
Hall controller output signal name: Illegal Hall controller output signal content: "ON" output when fraud is detected in main control and frame control Game information (command) from main control for pulse output: -
Status flag from main control for status output: ON when any of Bit0 to Bit5 of fraud detection status 1 is "1"
Signal type: State

Item number: 20
Hall controller output signal name: Game machine error Hall controller output signal content: "ON" output when error is detected in main control and frame control Game information (command) from main control that is the target of pulse output: -
Status flag from main control for status output: ON when error code is set in game machine error status and Bit 7 is "1"
Signal type: State

(*1) Information sent from the frame control to the dedicated unit. It is not information generated by the main control.

[9.2.2 Expansion port]
FIG. 307 is a diagram showing an expansion port.
When outputting a signal other than the standard 20 ports, use the expansion port and output the signal from the external terminal board of the hall controller output BOX.
A signal is output from the external terminal board of the hall controller output BOX by transmitting the game information (command) and setting the status flag shown below.

Item number: 21
Hall controller output signal name: External terminal board pulse output signal terminal 1
Hall controller output signal content: 1 pulse output at command instruction of external terminal board pulse output signal terminal 1 Game information (command) from main control to be pulse output target: E101H
Status flag from main control for status output: -
Signal type: Pulse

Item number: 22
Hall controller output signal name: External terminal board pulse output signal terminal 2
Hall controller output signal content: 1 pulse output at command instruction of external terminal board pulse output signal terminal 2 Game information (command) from main control to be pulse output target: E201H
Status flag from main control for status output: -
Signal type: Pulse

Item number: 23
Hall controller output signal name: External terminal board pulse output signal terminal 3
Hall controller output signal content: 1 pulse output at command instruction of external terminal board pulse output signal terminal 3 Game information (command) from main control to be pulse output target: E301H
Status flag from main control for status output: -
Signal type: Pulse

Item number: 24
Hall controller output signal name: External terminal board pulse output signal terminal 4
Hall controller output signal content: 1 pulse output at command instruction of external terminal board pulse output signal terminal 4 Game information (command) from main control to be pulse output target: E401H
Status flag from main control for status output: -
Signal type: Pulse

Item number: 25
Hall controller output signal name: External terminal board status output signal terminal 1
Hall controller output signal content: "ON" output when game machine status signal 1 is "1" Game information (command) from the main control to be pulse output: -
Status flag from main control for status output: ON when bit 3 of main control status 1 is "1"
Signal type: State

Item number: 26
Hall controller output signal name: External terminal board status output signal terminal 2
Hall controller output signal content: "ON" output when game machine status signal 2 is "1" Game information (command) from the main control that is the target of pulse output: -
Status flag from main control for status output: ON when bit 4 of main control status 1 is "1"
Signal type: State

Item number: 27
Hall controller output signal name: External terminal board status output signal terminal 3
Hall controller output signal content: "ON" output when gaming machine status signal 3 is "1" Game information (command) from main control for pulse output: -
Status flag from main control for status output: ON when bit 5 of main control status 1 is "1"
Signal type: State

Item number: 28
Hall controller output signal name: External terminal board status output signal terminal 4
Hall controller output signal content: "ON" output when game machine status signal 4 is "1" Game information (command) from main control for pulse output: -
Status flag from main control for status output: ON when bit 6 of main control status 1 is "1"
Signal type: State

[Chapter 4]
[Dedicated interface specifications]
[1. Glossary〕
Basically, it is the same as the content explained in Chapter 3.
However, the following terms may be used with different meanings.
“Gaming machine information” is a general term for gaming machine installation information, gaming machine performance information, hall controller/fraud monitoring information.
"Gaming machine installation information" is the maker code, product code, and chip ID number of main/frame control.
The “fraud monitoring information” indicates the number of game balls, fraud detection status 1, fraud detection status 2, and fraud detection status 3. Regarding the number of game balls, the CM monitors the number of game balls in the game machine and the number of counted balls transmitted by the game machine to detect fraud.

[2. Scope of application〕
The configuration shown below is applicable to the specifications of the dedicated interface of the gaming machine information network system (see B in FIG. 308).

[3. system configuration diagram〕
FIG. 308 is a diagram showing a system configuration diagram of a managed gaming machine.
The contents other than B in the figure are the same as the contents of FIG. 249, so the description is omitted.

[4. overview〕
The dedicated interface communicates information for renting game balls, information for counting game balls, and game machine information through an asynchronous serial port in a message format.
Information for renting game balls is transmitted and received between the CM and the frame control in telegrams in units of the number of balls.
Information for counting game balls is transmitted by frame control in the form of a telegram in units of the number of balls.
There are three types of game machine information: game machine installation information, game machine performance information, hall controller/fraud monitoring information, and frame control notifies any one of them by telegram according to the notification conditions.

[5. Communication conditions between frame control and CM]
FIG. 309 is a diagram showing communication conditions between frame control and CM.
The communication method is asynchronous serial communication.
The communication speed is 62500bps.
The bit configuration is "start bit: 1", "data bit: 8", "stop bit: 1", and "parity: none".
Communication control is full-duplex communication, the primary station is frame control, and the secondary station is CM.

[6. Data configuration between frame control and CM]
The data configuration between frame control and CM is the same as the configuration shown in FIG. Therefore, the description is omitted.

FIG. 310 is a diagram showing the details of the frame control-CM data configuration.
[No.1]
Name: Message length Data length: 1 byte Data format: HEX (hexadecimal)
Contents: Stores the length of the message from the message length to the checksum (range: 0x05 to 0x39 (5 to 57)).

[No.2]
Name: Command Data length: 1 byte Data format: HEX (hexadecimal)
Contents: Stores the command code of the message.

[No.3]
Name: Serial number Data length: 1 byte Data format: HEX (hexadecimal)
Contents: Stores the serial number, counting serial number, and lending serial number. The serial number sequence number ranges from 0x00 to 0xFF (0 to 255).

[No.4]
Name: Data section Data length: 1 to 53 bytes Data format: HEX (hexadecimal)
Contents: Stores message data.

[No.5]
Name: Checksum Data length: 1 byte Data format: HEX (hexadecimal)
Meaning: Add the data from the message length to the data part, and store the lower 1 byte of the total.

[6.1. Byte order between frame control and CM]
The byte order in this chapter defines B as big endian and L as little endian.

[7. Business message between frame control and CM]
[7.1. Message list between frame control and CM]
FIG. 311 is a diagram showing a message list between frame control and CM.
[No.1]
Message name: Game machine information notification Transmission direction: Frame control → CM
Command: 0x01
Overview: Frame control notifies CM of gaming machine information.

[No.2]
Message name: Count notification Transmission direction: Frame control → CM
Command: 0x02
Overview: Frame control notifies CM of counting information.

[No.3]
Message name: Rental notification Sending direction: CM → frame control Command: 0x13
Overview: CM notifies rental information to frame control.

[No.4]
Message name: Lending receipt result response Sending direction: Frame control → CM
Command: 0x03
Overview: Frame control responds to CM with the receipt result of lending information.

[7.2. Message details between frame control and CM]
[7.2.1. Game machine information notification]
FIG. 312 is a diagram showing details of gaming machine information notification.
Message name: Game machine information notification Message length: 18 to 57 bytes (variable length)
Transmission direction: Frame control → CM
Telegram overview: Frame control notifies CM of game machine information by this telegram. There are three types of game machine information: game machine installation information, game machine performance information, hall controller/fraud monitoring information, and any one of them is notified according to the notification conditions of each information.

[No.1]
Data name: Message length Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: 0x12 to 0x39

[No.2]
Data name: Command Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Content: 0x01

[No.3]
Data name: Serial number Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: Sequence number: 0x00 to 0xFF (0 to 255)

[No.4]
Data name: Gaming machine type Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: Indicates the type of game machine

[No.5]
Data name: Gaming machine information type Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: 0x00: Gaming machine performance information, 0x01: Gaming machine installation information, 0x02: Hall controller/fraud monitoring information

[No.6]
Data name: Gaming machine information Gaming machine performance information of gaming machine information (to notify one of the following set by the type code) (details are shown in 7.2.1.4)
Data length: 51 bytes Byte order: -
Contents: Total number of game balls launched, total number of game balls acquired, ball throwing rate, number of game balls acquired per minute (low base), role ratio, continuous role ratio, etc.

Data name: Game machine information Game machine information Game machine installation information (details are shown in 7.2.1.5)
Data length: 40 bytes Byte order: -
Contents: Main/frame control CPU manufacturer code, product code, chip ID number

Data name: Game machine information Game machine information Hall control/fraud monitoring information (details are shown in 7.2.1.6)
Data length: 12 to 42 bytes Byte order: -
Contents: Big hit, probability change, time reduction, number of winning balls in each winning hole, number of game balls, etc.

[No.7]
Data name: Checksum Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: Checksum data

[7.2.1.1. Regarding the serial number (7.2.1.No.3)]
The frame control notifies the CM of the serial number by the following control.
(1) When the power is turned on, the serial number "0x00(0)" is notified.
(2) After the power is turned on, the serial number is updated (+1) each time notification is made.
(3) Update (+2) the value following the serial number "0xFF (255)" to "0x01 (1)".

[7.2.1.2. Regarding game machine type (7.2.1. No. No. 4)]
The code system and the list of game machines are as shown below.
FIG. 313 is a diagram showing a code system (1 byte) for game machine types.
Bit 7: Management medium (0 = game ball, 1 = game medal)
Bit6-Bit4: Group classification (0 = Union A, 1 = Union B, 2-7 = Reserve)
Bit 3 to Bit 0: Game machine type (1 = Pachinko machine, 2 = Revolving machine, 3 = Arrange ball game machine, 4 = Jiyan ball game machine, 5 to 15 = Spare, 0 = Unused)

FIG. 314 is a diagram showing an example of a gaming machine type list.
Code: 0x01
Game machine: Pachinko machine Group: Association A Management medium: Game balls

Code: 0x82
Pachislot and pachislot machine: Spindle-type game machine Group: Association A Management media: Game tokens

Code: 0x83
Game machine: Arrange ball game machine Group: Association A Management media: Game tokens

Code: 0x84
Game machine: Jiyan ball game machine Group: Association A Management media: Game medals

Code: 0x92
Pachislot and Pachinko Machines: Pachislot Machine Group: Association B Management Media: Game Tokens

[7.2.1.3. Regarding game machine information type (7.2.1.No.5)]
Frame control notifies the type of gaming machine information with the code shown below.
(1) Type code 0x00: Gaming machine performance information The total number of game balls launched, the total number of game balls acquired, the ball output rate, the number of game balls acquired per minute (low base), the accessory ratio, the consecutive accessory ratio, etc. are notified.
(2) Type code 0x01: gaming machine installation information Notifies the manufacturer code, product code, and chip ID number of the main/frame control CPU.
(3) Type code 0x02: Hall controller/fraud monitoring information Notifies big hits, probability fluctuations, time reduction, number of winning balls in each winning hole, number of game balls, fraud monitoring information, and the like.

[7.2.1.4. Telegram when “0x00: Gaming machine performance information” is set for gaming machine information type]
FIG. 315 is a diagram showing a message when "0x00: gaming machine performance information" is set for the gaming machine information type.

Data name: Game machine information (game machine performance information) total number of game balls launched Data length: 3 bytes Byte order: L
Contents: 0x000000 to 0xFFFFFF (0 ball to 16777215 ball). A storage example is 0x102700 when the total number of game balls to be launched is 10000 balls.

Data name: Total number of winning game balls in gaming machine information (gaming machine performance information) Data length: 3 bytes Byte order: L
Contents: 0x000000 to 0xFFFFFF (0 ball to 16777215 ball). A storage example is 0x102700 when the total number of acquired game balls is 10,000.

Data name: Pitching machine information (gaming machine performance information) Data length: 2 bytes Byte order: L
Contents: 0x0000 to 0xFFFF (0% to 65535%) (decimal point truncated). A storage example is 0x7D00 when the ball hitting rate is 125%.

Data name: Pachinko machine information (game machine performance information), number of game balls acquired per minute (low base)
Data length: 2 bytes Byte order: L
Contents: 0x00 to 0xFFFF (0 ball to 65535 ball) (decimal point truncated). A storage example is 0x6400 when the number of game balls acquired per minute is 100.

Data name: Accessory ratio of game machine information (game machine performance information) Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: 0x00 to 0x64 (0% to 100%) (decimal point truncated).

Data name: Game machine information (gaming machine performance information) continuous accessory ratio Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: 0x00 to 0x64 (0% to 100%) (decimal point truncated).

Data name: Game machine information (gaming machine performance information) number of operations of accessory continuous operation device Data length: 2 bytes Byte order: L
Contents: 0x0000 to 0xFFFF (0 times to 65535 times). A storage example is 0x6400 when the number of operations of the accessory continuous operation device is 100 times.

Data name: Maximum difference ball of gaming machine information (gaming machine performance information) Data length: 3 bytes Byte order: L
Contents: 0x000000 to 0xFFFFFF (0 ball to 16777215 ball). A storage example is 0x102700 when the maximum difference is 10000 balls.

Data name: Reserve game machine information (gaming machine performance information) Data length: 31 bytes Byte order: -
Contents: Reserved (fixed to 0x00 if not used).

Data name: Reservation of gaming machine information (gaming machine performance information) Data length: 3 bytes Byte order: -
Contents: Used in CM (fixed to 0x00 for gaming machines) (maximum MY calculated in CM).

[7.2.1.5. Telegram when "0x01: gaming machine installation information" is set for gaming machine information type]
FIG. 316 is a diagram showing a telegram when "0x01: gaming machine installation information" is set in the gaming machine information type.
Data name: Main control chip ID number of game machine information (game machine installation information) Data length: 9 bytes Byte order: B
Contents: Main control chip ID number of game machine

Data name: Main control chip manufacturer code of game machine information (game machine installation information) Data length: 3 bytes Byte order: B
Contents: Manufacturer code written in the management area of the main control chip

Data name: Main control chip product code of game machine information (game machine installation information) Data length: 8 bytes Byte order: B
Contents: Product code written in the management area of the main control chip

Data name: Frame control chip ID number of game machine information (game machine installation information) Data length: 9 bytes Byte order: B
Contents: Frame control chip ID number of game machine

Data name: Frame control chip manufacturer code of game machine information (game machine installation information) Data length: 3 bytes Byte order: B
Contents: Manufacturer code written in the management area of the frame control chip

Data name: Frame control chip product code of game machine information (game machine installation information) Data length: 8 bytes Byte order: B
Contents: Product code written in the management area of the frame control chip

[7.2.1.5.1. Main control chip ID number]
The method of generating the main control chip ID number is the same as the contents shown in FIGS. Therefore, the description is omitted.

[7.2.1.5.2. Frame control chip ID number]
FIG. 317 is a diagram showing a method of generating a frame control chip ID number (for the first chip).
The individual chip numbers of the CPU are read in ascending order of address.
The upper 4 bytes of this number are filled with 0, and the lower 1 byte is added with an identification code to make it 9 bytes.
For example, when the individual chip number is 0x87654321, zero padding is 4 bytes (0x00000000), the individual chip number is 4 bytes (0x87654321), and the identification code (*) is 1 byte (0x21).

FIG. 318 is a diagram showing a method of generating a frame control chip ID number (for the second chip).
The chip code of the CPU is read in ascending order of address.
The upper 4 bytes of this code are filled with 0, and the lower 1 byte is added with an identification code to make 9 bytes.
For example, if the chip code is 0x21876543, zero padding is 4 bytes (0x00000000), the chip code is 4 bytes (0x21876543), and the identification code (*) is 1 byte (0x41).
(*) The content of the identification code is the same as in FIG. Therefore, the description is omitted.

[7.2.1.6. Telegram when "0x02: Hall control/unauthorized monitoring information" is set for the gaming machine information type]
319 to 321 are diagrams showing telegrams when "0x02: Hall con/fraud monitoring information" is set as the gaming machine information type.

Data name: Number of game balls in game machine information (hall control/fraud monitoring information) Data length: 3 bytes Byte order: L
Contents: Current number of game balls, 0x000000 to 0x301B0F (0 balls to 990000 balls). A storage example is 0x102700 when the number of game balls is 10,000.

Data name: Number of shot balls in game machine information (hall controller/illegal monitoring information) Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: Number of shot balls: 0x80 to 0x7F (-128 to 127). The upper 1 bit is a sign (+/-) bit. If there are backballs, subtract the number of backballs (if there are multiple balls fired at the time of transmission, add them up).

Data name: Total number of winning balls in gaming machine information (hall control/fraud monitoring information) Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: Game information/count information 1 to n number of prize balls x total number of prizes won: 0x00 to 0xFF (0 to 255).

Data name: Main control status 1 of gaming machine information (hall control/illegal monitoring information)
Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: Bit0: Jackpot 1, Bit1: Jackpot 2, Bit2: Jackpot 3, Bit3: Gaming machine status signal 1, Bit4: Gaming machine status signal 2, Bit5: Gaming machine status signal 3, Bit6: Gaming machine status signal 4, Bit7 :unused.

Data name: Main control status 2 of gaming machine information (hall controller/fraud monitoring information)
Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: Bit0: Big hit + time saving (variation time reduction) or advantageous state, Bit1: high probability, Bit2: time saving (variation time reduction) or advantageous state, Bit3: unused, Bit4: unused, Bit5: Unused, Bit6: Unused, Bit7: Unused.

Data name: Gaming machine error status of gaming machine information (hall control/illegal monitoring information) Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: Error code occurring in the game machine, Bits 0 to 5: error code, 000000 = no error, Bit 6: 0 = frame control, 1 = main control, Bit 7: 0 = notification only, 1 = notification + hall control Output, Bits 0 to 7: 0 = No error occurred.

Data name: Fraud detection status 1 (main control) of gaming machine information (hall controller/fraud monitoring information)
Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: Bit 0: Setting changing signal, Bit 1: Setting checking signal, Bit 2: RWM clear signal, Bit 3: Fraud detection signal 1, Bit 4: Fraud detection signal 2, Bit 5: Fraud detection signal 3, Bit 6: Not used, Bit 7: unused.

Data name: Fraud detection status 2 (frame control) of gaming machine information (hall control/fraud monitoring information)
Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: Bit 0: Front decoration open, Bit 1: Back mechanism open, Bit 2: Unauthorized radio wave detection, Bit 3: Game ball count clear detection, Bit 4: Winning ball count error 1 detected, Bit 5: Winning ball count error 2 detected, Bit 6: Not yet Used, Bit 7: Not used.

Data name: Fraud detection status 3 (frame control) of gaming machine information (hall control/fraud monitoring information)
Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: Bit0: small ball detected, Bit1: iron ball detected, Bit2: unused, Bit3: unused, Bit4: unused, Bit5: unused, Bit6: unused, Bit7: unused.

Data name: Number of game information in game information Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: number (n) of type information/count information, where n=0x00 to 0x0F (0 to 15).

Data name: Game information type information 1
Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: Type information 1

Data name: Game information count information 1
Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: Count information 1

Data name: Game information type information n
Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: Type information n

Data name: Game information count information n
Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: Count information n

[7.2.1.6.1 Main control state 1]
Details of each bit of main control state 1 are the same as those shown in FIG. Therefore, the description is omitted.
Gaming machine state signals 1 to 4 are used to set gaming machine states other than big win 1, big win 2, and big win 3. The gaming machine status signals 1 to 4 are used for different purposes depending on the model of the gaming machine.

[7.2.1.6.2 Main control state 2]
Details of each bit of main control state 2 are the same as those shown in FIG. Therefore, the description is omitted.

[7.2.1.6.3 Fraud Detection State 1]
322 is a diagram showing fraud detection state 1. FIG.
The details of the fraud detection state 1 are as follows.
Bit: 0
Name: Setting changing signal Details: Indicates that the setting is being changed and that the setting has been changed. In addition, the signal is kept ON from the time the setting is changed to the firing or counting after the setting change, and then the signal is turned OFF 30 seconds later. 0=normal, 1=during and after setting change.

Bit: 1
Name: Setting confirming signal Details: Indicates that the setting is being confirmed and that the setting has been confirmed. In addition, the signal is kept on from the setting confirmation to the firing or counting after the setting confirmation, and then turned off after 30 seconds. 0=normal, 1=during and after checking settings.

Bit: 2
Name: RWM clear signal Details: Indicates that RWM has been initialized. 0=normal, 1=RWM cleared

Bit: 3
Name: Fraud detection signal 1 (*)
Details: In addition to the above, indicates that there is a risk of fraud. 0=normal, 1=abnormal occurrence.

Bit: 4
Name: Fraud detection signal 2 (*)
Details: In addition to the above, indicates that there is a risk of fraud. 0=normal, 1=abnormal occurrence.

Bit: 5
Name: Fraud detection signal 3 (*)
Details: In addition to the above, indicates that there is a risk of fraud. 0=normal, 1=abnormal occurrence.

Bit: 6-7
Name: Unused Details: 0 fixed

(*) The content of fraud to be detected differs depending on the type of gaming machine. Also, it is limited to gaming machines that have a function to detect various types of fraud.

[7.2.1.6.4 Fraud Detection State 2]
323 is a diagram showing fraud detection state 2. FIG.
The details of the fraud detection state 2 are as follows.
Bit: 0
Name: Front decoration open Details: Indicates that front decoration open was detected. 0=normal, 1=front decoration open detection.

Bit: 1
Name: Back mechanism part open Details: Indicates that the back mechanism part open was detected. 0=Normal, 1=Detected opening of back mechanism.

Bit: 2
Name: Illegal radio wave detection Details: Indicates that an illegal radio wave was detected in the managed gaming machine frame. 0=normal, 1=unauthorized radio wave detected.

Bit: 3
Name: Game ball count clear detection Details: Indicates that the game ball count clear has been detected. The signal continues to be turned on until the number of game balls is cleared or counted, and the signal is turned off after 30 seconds. 0=normal, 1=game ball count clear detection.

Bit: 4
Name: Winning ball number error 1 detection Details: Indicates that the difference between the winning number detected by the main control and the winning number detected by the frame control is 100 or more. 0=normal, 1=abnormal number of winning balls 1 detected.

Bit: 5
Name: Winning ball number error 2 detection Details: Indicates that the difference between the number of launched balls and the total number of returned balls (number of winning balls + number of non-winning balls) is 100 or more. 0=Normal, 1=Abnormal number of winning balls 2 detected

Bit: 6, 7
Name: Unused Details: 0 fixed

[7.2.1.6.5 Fraud Detection State 3]
324 is a diagram showing fraud detection state 3. FIG.
The details of the fraud detection state 3 are as follows.
Bit: 0
Name: Small ball detection Details: Indicates that a ball of 10.7 mm or less has been detected. 0=normal, 1=ball detected.

Bit: 1
Name: Iron ball detection Details: Indicates that an iron ball has been detected. 0=normal, 1=iron ball detected.

Bit: 2-7
Name: Unused Details: 0 fixed

[7.2.1.6.6 Game information]
The game information consists of a total of 2 bytes: type information (upper 1 byte) and count information (lower 1 byte). The type information is information such as a winning opening generated in the gaming machine. Also, the count information is number information generated in the type information.
Details of the game information are the same as those in FIG. Therefore, the description is omitted.

[(1) Type information]
Details of the type information are the same as those in FIG. Therefore, the description is omitted.

[Details of (a) data type (upper 4 bits)]
FIG. 325 is a diagram showing details of the data type (upper 4 bits).
Bits 4-7: 0
Type name: unused Contents: -

Bits 4-7: 1
Type name: Starting entrance prize Contents: Notify that you have won the starting entrance.

Bits 4-7: 2
Category name: Grand prize winner Contents: Notify that you have won the grand prize winner.

Bits 4-7: 3
Type name: Winning entrance prize Contents: Notify that you have won the winning entrance.

Bits 4-7: 4
Type name: Gate passing Contents: Notifies that the gate has passed.

Bits 4-7: 5-8
Type name: unused Contents: -

Bits 4-7: 9
Type name: Number of design confirmations Contents: Notify the number of times the special design changes.

Bits 4-7: 10
Type name: Per special design Content: Notifies that the special electric accessory has been activated when the accessory continuous operation device is activated or the accessory continuous activation device is not activated.

Bits 4-7: 11
Type name: unused Contents: -

Bits 4-7: 12
Type name: Number of uses (Number of times the big prize mouth is opened)
Contents: Notifies the opening of the grand prize opening when the accessory continuous operation device is not in operation.

Bits 4-7: 13
Type name: Specific area passage Description: Notifies that the specific area has been passed.

Bits 4-7: 14
Type name: Preliminary Content: Used when notifying data other than data type "1 to 4, 9, 10, 12, 13". The spare is used for different purposes depending on the model of the gaming machine.

Bits 4-7: 15
Type name: unused Contents: -

[(b) Details of data number (lower 4 bits) set for each data type]
FIG. 326 is a diagram showing details of data numbers (lower 4 bits) set for each data type.
The type information (1 byte) includes a data type (Bits 4-7) and a data number (Bits 0-3).

Data type (Bits 4 to 7): 0 = Not used Data number (Bits 0 to 3): 0 to 15 = Not used

Data type (Bits 4 to 7): 1 = Starting point win Data number (Bits 0 to 3): Indicates the starting point number. 1 = start port 1, 2 = start port 2, 3 = start port 3, 0 and 4 to 15 are unused.

Data type (Bits 4 to 7): 2 = Grand winning entry data number (Bits 0 to 3): Shows the grand winning entry number. 1 = Grand Prize Opening 1, 2 = Grand Prize Opening 2, 0 and 3 to 15 = Not used.

Data type (Bits 4 to 7): 3 = Winning prize Data number (Bits 0 to 3): Shows the winning prize number. 1 to 15 = Winning port numbers 1 to 15, 0 = unused.

Data type (Bits 4 to 7): 4 = Gate passing Data number (Bits 0 to 3): Indicates the passing gate number. 1=pass gate 1, 2=pass gate 2, 0 and 3-15=unused.

Data type (Bits 4-7): 5-8 = Not used Data number (Bits 0-3): -

Data type (Bits 4 to 7): 9 = number of design decisions Data number (Bits 0 to 3): Shows the special design number (special design number). 1 = special pattern 1 (first special pattern), 2 = special pattern 2 (second special pattern), 0 and 3 to 15 are unused.

Data type (Bits 4 to 7): 10 = per special design data number (Bits 0 to 3): indicates the type per special design. 1 = Continuous action device is activated (big hit), 2 = Special electronic action is activated when the continuous activation device is not activated (small hit), 0 and 3 to 15 are not used.

Data type (Bits 4 to 7): 11 = Not used Data number (Bits 0 to 3): -

Data type (Bit 4 to 7): 12 = number of accessories (number of times the big winning opening is opened)
Data number (Bits 0 to 3): Shows the role item number. 1 = role 1, 0 and 2 to 15 are unused.

Data type (Bits 4 to 7): 13 = specific area passed Data number (Bits 0 to 3): 1 = specific area 1, 0 and 2 to 15 = unused.

Data type (Bits 4 to 7): 14 = reserved Data number (Bits 0 to 3): 1 to 4 = reserved number, 0 and 5 to 15 = unused.

Data type (Bits 4 to 7): 15 = Not used Data number (Bits 0 to 3): 0 to 15 = Not used

[(2) Count information]
The setting contents of the count information differ for each data type.
Detailed contents and data storage examples for each data type are shown below.

(a) When the data type is a starting entry winning prize, a large winning entry winning prize, or a winning entry winning prize FIG. 327 is a diagram showing details of the count information.
The count information consists of the number of winning balls (upper 4 bits, Bits 4 to 7) and the number of prizes (lower 4 bits, Bits 0 to 3).
The number of prize balls (Bits 4 to 7) indicates the number of prize balls at the time of winning for each type information, and 1 to 15 = the number of prize balls (1 (piece) to 15 (piece)).
The number of winning prizes (Bits 0 to 3) indicates the number of winning prizes for each type of information, and is fixed at 1 (piece).

FIG. 328 is a diagram showing an example of a case where two of three prize balls are won in the starting hole 1 of (Example 1) starting hole winning.
Game information: Game information 1
Data type (Bits 4 to 7) of type information (1 byte): 1 = Starting point winning Data number (Bits 0 to 3) of type information (1 byte): 1 = Starting point 1
Number of prize balls in count information (1 byte) (Bits 4 to 7): 3 = 3 prize balls Number of prizes in count information (1 byte) (Bits 0 to 3): 1 = 1 prize

Game information: Game information 2
Data type (Bits 4 to 7) of type information (1 byte): 1 = Starting point winning Data number (Bits 0 to 3) of type information (1 byte): 1 = Starting point 1
Number of prize balls in count information (1 byte) (Bits 4 to 7): 3 = 3 prizes Number of prizes in count information (1 byte) (Bits 0 to 3): 1 = 1 prize The game information is 0x1131 are set as two data (game information 1, game information 2).

FIG. 329 is a diagram showing an example of (Example 2) a case where 3 balls of 15 prize balls are won in the big winning hole 2 in the big winning hole winning.

Game information: Game information 1
Type information (1 byte) data type (Bits 4 to 7): 2 = big winning mouth Type information (1 byte) data number (Bits 0 to 3): 2 = big winning mouth 2
Number of prize balls in count information (1 byte) (Bits 4 to 7): 15 = 15 prize balls Number of prizes in count information (1 byte) (Bits 0 to 3): 1 = 1 prize

Game information: Game information 2
Type information (1 byte) data type (Bits 4 to 7): 2 = big winning mouth Type information (1 byte) data number (Bits 0 to 3): 2 = big winning mouth 2
Number of prize balls in count information (1 byte) (Bits 4 to 7): 15 = 15 prize balls Number of prizes in count information (1 byte) (Bits 0 to 3): 1 = 1 prize

Game information: Game information 3
Type information (1 byte) data type (Bits 4 to 7): 2 = big winning mouth Type information (1 byte) data number (Bits 0 to 3): 2 = big winning mouth 2
Number of prize balls in count information (1 byte) (Bits 4 to 7): 15 = 15 prize balls Number of prizes in count information (1 byte) (Bits 0 to 3): 1 = 1 prize The game information is 0x22F1 are set as three data (game information 1, game information 2, game information 3).

FIG. 330 is a diagram showing an example of a case where one ball wins in the winning hole 2 of (Example 3) in the winning hole.
Game information: Game information 1
Data type (Bits 4 to 7) of type information (1 byte): 3 = Winning gate Data number (Bits 0 to 3) of type information (1 byte): 2 = Winning gate 2
Number of prize balls in count information (1 byte) (Bits 4 to 7): 1 = 1 prize Number of prizes in count information (1 byte) (Bits 0 to 3): 1 = 1 prize In game information, 0x3211 is 1 Data (game information 1) is set.

(b) When the Data Type is Gate Passage FIG. 331 is a diagram showing the details of the count information.
The count information consists of unused (upper 4 bits, Bits 4 to 7) and gate passing (lower 4 Bits, Bits 0 to 3).
The number of prize balls (Bits 4 to 7) is unused and fixed to 0.
The number of winning prizes (Bits 0 to 3) indicates gate passage, and is fixed to 1 (times).

FIG. 332 is a diagram showing an example of passing through the passage gate 1 once in (example 1) gate passage.
Game information: Game information 1
Data type (Bits 4 to 7) of type information (1 byte): 4 = Gate pass Data number (Bits 0 to 3) of type information (1 byte): 1 = Pass gate 1
Unused count information (1 byte) (Bits 4 to 7): 0 fixed Gate passage of count information (1 byte) (Bits 0 to 3): 1 = 1 pass Game information, 0x4101 is 1 data (game information 1) set.

(c) When the data type is the number of design confirmations FIG. 333 is a diagram showing details of the count information.
The count information is composed of unused (upper 4 bits, Bits 4 to 7) and the number of design determinations (lower 4 Bits, Bits 0 to 3).
The number of prize balls (Bits 4 to 7) is unused and fixed to 0.
The winning number (Bits 0 to 3) indicates the number of times the design is determined, and is fixed to 1 (times).

FIG. 334 is a diagram showing an example of a case where the special symbol 1 stops once in (Example 1) the number of times of design determination.
Game information: Game information 1
Data type of type information (1 byte) (Bits 4 to 7): 9 = Number of design decisions Data number of type information (1 byte) (Bits 0 to 3): 1 = Special design 1
Unused count information (1 byte) (Bits 4 to 7): 0 fixed Number of design decisions of count information (1 byte) (Bits 0 to 3): 1 = 1 stop Information 1) is set.

(d) When the data type is per special symbol FIG. 335 is a diagram showing details of the count information.
The count information consists of unused (upper 4 bits, Bits 4 to 7) and hit count (lower 4 Bits, Bits 0 to 3).
The number of prize balls (Bits 4 to 7) is unused and fixed to 0.
The winning number (Bits 0 to 3) indicates the number of hits, and is fixed at 1 (times).

FIG. 336 is a diagram showing an example in which the role product continuous actuating device operates (jackpot) once in (example 1) the role product continuous actuating device operates (jackpot).
Game information: Game information 1
Data type of type information (1 byte) (Bit4-7): 10 = per special pattern Data number of type information (1 byte) (Bit0-3): 1 = big hit Unused count information (1 byte) (Bit4- 7): 0 fixed Number of hits (Bits 0 to 3) of count information (1 byte): 1 = 1 occurrence Note that the game information is set to 0xA101 as 1 data (game information 1).

Fig. 337 shows (Example 2) when the special electric accessory is activated (small hit) when the accessory continuous operation device is not operated, and the special electric accessory is operated once when the accessory continuous operation device is not operated It is a figure which shows the example at the time of (small hit).
Game information: Game information 1
Data type of type information (1 byte) (Bit4 to 7): 10 = per special pattern Data number of type information (1 byte) (Bit0 to 3): 2 = small hit Unused count information (1 byte) (Bit4 ~7): 0 fixed Number of wins (Bits 0 to 3) of count information (1 byte): 1 = 1 occurrence Note that the game information is set to 0xA201 as 1 data (game information 1).

(e) Case where the data type is the number of accessories (the number of openings of the big winning opening) FIG. 338 is a diagram showing the details of the count information.
The count information consists of unused (upper 4 bits, Bits 4 to 7) and the number of times (lower 4 Bits, Bits 0 to 3).
The number of prize balls (Bits 4 to 7) is unused and fixed to 0.
The number of winning prizes (Bits 0 to 3) indicates the number of times the accessory is won, and is fixed to 1 (times).

FIG. 339 is a diagram showing an example of the case where the role product 1 is released once in (Example 1) the number of times of the role product.
Game information: Game information 1
Data type (Bits 4 to 7) of type information (1 byte): 12 = Number of characters Data number (Bits 0 to 3) of type information (1 byte): 1 = Character 1
Unused count information (1 byte) (Bits 4 to 7): 0 fixed Number of accessories (Bits 0 to 3) of count information (1 byte): 1 = 1 open Information 1) is set.

(f) When the data type is specific area passage FIG. 340 is a diagram showing details of the count information.
The count information consists of unused (upper 4 bits, Bits 4 to 7) and specific area passing (lower 4 Bits, Bits 0 to 3).
The number of prize balls (Bits 4 to 7) is unused and fixed to 0.
The number of winning prizes (Bits 0 to 3) indicates passing through a specific area, and is fixed to 1 (times).

FIG. 341 is a diagram showing an example of a case where specific region passage 1 is passed once in (example 1) specific region passage.
Game information: Game information 1
Data type (Bits 4 to 7) of type information (1 byte): 13 = Pass through specific area Data number (Bits 0 to 3) of type information (1 byte): 1 = Specific area 1
Unused count information (1 byte) (Bits 4 to 7): 0 fixed Number of accessories (Bits 0 to 3) of count information (1 byte): 1 = 1 pass Information 1) is set.

(g) When the Data Type is Specific Area Passage FIG. 342 is a diagram showing the details of the count information.
The count information consists of unused (upper 4 bits, Bits 4 to 7) and the number of times (lower 4 Bits, Bits 0 to 3).
The number of prize balls (Bits 4 to 7) is unused and fixed to 0.
The winning number (Bits 0 to 3) indicates the number of times, which is fixed at 1 (times).

FIG. 343 is a diagram showing an example of a case in which preliminary 1 occurs once in (example 1) preliminary.
Game information: Game information 1
Data type (Bits 4 to 7) of type information (1 byte): 14 = Reserved Data number (Bits 0 to 3) of type information (1 byte): 1 = Reserved 1
Unused count information (1 byte) (Bits 4 to 7): Fixed to 0 Number of accessories (Bits 0 to 3) of count information (1 byte): 1 = 1 occurrence Information 1) is set.

[7.2.2. Count notification]
FIG. 344 is a diagram showing details of count notification.
Message name: Count notification Message length: 7 bytes Transmission direction: Frame control → CM
Outline of electronic message: Frame control notifies CM of the count information in this electronic message.

[No.1]
Data name: Message length Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Content: 0x07

[No.2]
Data name: Command Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Content: 0x02

[No.3]
Data name: Count serial number Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: Sequence number (0x00 to 0xFF (0 to 255))

[No.4]
Data name: Number of counting balls Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: Number of counting balls (0x00 to 0xFA (0 to 250 balls))

[No.5]
Data name: Count cumulative number of balls Data length: 2 bytes Byte order: L
Contents: Cumulative number of counted balls (0x00 to 0xFFFF (0 to 65535 balls)). A storage example is 0x1027 in the case of 10,000 cumulative counted balls.

[No.6]
Data name: Checksum Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: Checksum data

[7.2.2.1. Counting serial number (counting serial number 7.2.2.No.3) notification)]]
The frame control notifies the CM of the counting serial number (7.2.2.No3) by the following control.
(1) When the power is turned on, the serial number "0x00(0)" is notified.
(2) After the power is turned on, the serial number is updated (+1) each time notification is made.
(3) Update (+2) the value next to the count sequence number "0xFF (255)" to "0x01 (1)".

[7.2.2.2. Count Cumulative Ball (Count Cumulative Ball (Regarding Count Cumulative Ball (7.2.2.No5) notification)]
The frame control notifies the CM of the counted cumulative number of balls (7.2.2.No5) by the following control.
(1) The value next to the cumulative number of counted balls "0xFFFF (65535 balls)" is updated to "0x0000 (0 balls)".
(2) When the gaming machine is turned on, the counted cumulative number of balls is cleared to "0".

[7.2.3. Rental notice]
FIG. 345 is a diagram showing details of a lending notice.
Message name: Rental notification Length of message: 5 bytes Transmission direction: CM→Frame control Outline of message: CM notifies the frame control of the rental information in this message.

[No.1]
Data name: Message length Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Content: 0x05

[No.2]
Data name: Command Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Content: 0x13

[No.3]
Data name: Loan serial number Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: Sequence number (0x00 to 0xFF (0 to 255))

[No.4]
Data name: Number of rental balls Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: Number of rental game balls (0x00 to 0xFF (0 to 255 balls))

[No.5]
Data name: Checksum Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: Checksum data

[Regarding the behavior of frame control when the command "rental notice" of "CM → frame control" is received]
For example, when the number of game balls is 989,999 and the number of rental balls of 10 is received, the number of game balls is not added up to 990,000 and the information on the remaining number of balls is discarded. It is possible to maintain the information up to and discard the information on the number of 10 rental balls.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to respond to frame control->CM with the result of receiving the number of rented balls "abnormal (0x01)", indicating that all the received information has not been received.
If the process of adding one ball and discarding nine balls is performed, the processing becomes complicated because it is necessary to notify the CM of the information. It becomes unnecessary to provide processing.

[7.2.3.1. Regarding rental notification (7.2.3.)]
When the CM receives the count notification, the CM notifies the frame control of the rental notification.
However, if any of the following apply, the number of rental balls will be notified as "0".
(1) When the game machine information notification is not received (2) When the game machine information type is notified other than "0x02: hall control / fraud monitoring information" (3) The number of balls counted in the count notification is "1" or more When notified Only when the above does not apply, the CM can notify the number of rental balls "1" or more to the frame control.

[7.2.3.2. Regarding the lending serial number (7.2.3.No.3)]
CM notifies the lending serial number to the frame control by the following control.
(1) At the start of frame control and communication, the serial number is notified as "0".
(2) Update (+1) the lending serial number received in the lending acceptance result response and notify it in the next lending notice.
(3) Update (+2) the value following the lending serial number “0xFF (255)” to “0x01 (1)”.

[7.2.4. Lending notice receipt result response]
FIG. 346 is a diagram showing details of the lending notice reception result response.
Message name: Rental notice reception result response Message length: 5 bytes Transmission direction: Frame control → CM
Outline of message: Frame control responds to CM with the receipt result of lending information.

[No.1]
Data name: Message length Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Content: 0x05

[No.2]
Data name: Command Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Content: 0x03

[No.3]
Data name: Loan serial number Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: Sequence number (0x00 to 0xFF (0 to 255))

[No.4]
Data name: Number of borrowed balls received Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: Result of receiving the number of rented balls, 0x00=normal, 0x01=abnormal. If any value other than the above is notified, it is regarded as abnormal.

[No.5]
Data name: Checksum Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: Checksum data

[7.2.4.1. Regarding the lending serial number (7.2.4.No.3)]
The frame control responds to the CM with the lending serial number in the following control.
(1) When the number of rental balls received is normal (0x00), the rental serial number received from the CM is responded.
(2) When the rental ball reception result is abnormal (0x01), it responds with the rental serial number received from the CM when the rental reception result is normal (0x00).
(3) When the gaming machine is turned on, the lending serial number is cleared to "0".

[7.2.4.2. Regarding the number of loaned balls received (7.2.4.No.4)]
In the following cases, the slot control responds with the result of receiving the number of rented balls "abnormal (0x01)".
(1) When the lending serial numbers (7.2.3.No.3) notified by the CM are not consecutive (2) When the game machine is in the process of removing balls (3) The number of playing balls is added to the number of lending balls When the result exceeds 990,000 balls

[8. Frame Control and Inter-CM Communication Sequence]
[8.1. Basic communication sequence]
FIG. 347 is a diagram showing a basic communication sequence.
Frame Control 3150 is the primary station and CM 3072 is the secondary station.
[F200] The frame control 3150 transmits a gaming machine information notification (serial number=n) to the CM 3072.
[F201] The frame control 3150 sends a counting notification (counting serial number=m) to the CM 3072.

[F202] The CM 3072 sends a lending notice (lending serial number=k) to the frame control 3150.
[F203] The frame control 3150 sends a loan receipt result response (lending serial number=k) to the CM 3072.
[F204] The frame control 3150 sends a gaming machine information notification (serial number=n+1) to the CM 3072.

The frame control 3150 notifies the CM 3072 of the game machine information notification (7.2.1.) at a cycle of 300 ms (*1), and 100 ms (*2) from the game machine information notification (7.2.1.). ) notify the count notification (7.2.2.) after the elapse.
The CM 3072 notifies the slot control 3150 of the rental notification (7.2.3.) within 170 ms after receiving the counting notification (7.2.2.).

The frame control 3150 responds with a lending receipt result response (7.2.4.) within 10 ms in response to the lending notification (7.2.3.) from the CM 3072 .

(*1) The frame control 3150 notifies the gaming machine information within a range of 300 ms to 310 ms.
(*2) The frame control 3150 notifies the count notification within the range of 90 ms to 100 ms.

[8.2. Startup sequence]
[8.2.1. Sequence when the game machine starts up first]
FIG. 348 is a diagram showing a sequence when the gaming machine is activated first.
[F210] The power is off, [F211] VL of the frame control 3150 is OFF, and [F212] VL and PSI of the CM 3072 are OFF.

[F213] The power is turned on, and power is supplied to the frame control 3150 and CM 3072 .
[F214] VL of frame control 3150 is OFF, and [F215] VL and PSI of CM 3072 are OFF. The CM 3072 keeps VL=OFF until startup is completed.

[F216] The state of game machine activation is shifted to the state of [F217] game machine activation completion. [F218] The frame control 3150 sends a gaming machine information notification (serial number=0) to the CM 3072. [F219] The frame control 3150 sends a count notification (count serial number=0) to the CM 3072. The gaming machine transmits a message regardless of the completion of activation of the CM 3072, and updates and notifies the serial number. However, CM 3072 cannot receive telegrams from the gaming machine because it is in the [F220] CM running state.

[F221] Startup of the CM 3072 is completed.
As a result, [F222] game balls can be shot (VL=ON), and the count button is enabled (PSI=ON).

[F223] The frame control 3150 sends a gaming machine information notification (serial number=n) to the CM 3072.
[F224] The frame control 3150 sends a count notification (count serial number=m) to the CM 3072.
The CM 3072 that has completed booting can receive these notifications.
After the completion of activation, the CM 3072 starts receiving telegrams notified from the gaming machine. Manage from the notified serial number.

[8.2.2. Sequence when CM starts first]
FIG. 349 is a diagram showing a sequence when CM starts up first.
[F230] While the frame control 3150 is powered off, [F231] the CM 3072 is powered on.
[F232] In CM3072, VL=OFF and PSI=OFF.
When the CM 3072 shifts from the [F233] CM activation state to the [F234] CM activation completion state, [F235] VL=ON and PSI=ON in the CM 3072 . After that, the CM 3072 is in a state of waiting for [F236] gaming machine connection until it receives the gaming machine information notification.

[F237] When the power of the frame control 3150 is turned on, and the state of [F238] game machine activation is shifted to the state of [F239] game machine activation completion, [F240] frame control 3150 and CM3072 set VL=ON, PSI=ON.

[F241] The frame control 3150 sends a gaming machine information notification (serial number=0) to the CM 3072.
[F242] The frame control 3150 sends a count notification (count serial number=0) to the CM 3072.
The gaming machine notifies the CM 3072 of a telegram after the start-up is completed. After the power is turned on, the serial number starts from 0.
The CM 3072 starts receiving messages notified from the gaming machine. Manage from the notified serial number.

[F243] The frame control 3150 sends a gaming machine information notification (serial number=n) to the CM 3072.
[F244] The frame control 3150 sends a count notification (count serial number=m) to the CM 3072.

[8.3. Gaming machine information notification sequence]
FIG. 350 is a diagram showing notification conditions applied in the gaming machine information notification sequence.
The frame control notifies the CM of gaming machine information under the following notification conditions. If the notification conditions overlap, the notification is given according to the order of priority.

Game machine information type: (1) Hall control/fraud monitoring information (with game information)
Notification conditions: Notify at a cycle of 300 ms (*1) after the game machine has started.
Priority: 1

Game machine information type: (2) Game machine installation information Notification condition: Notify after 60 seconds (*2) have passed since the game machine started up. After that, it will be notified every 60s (*2).
Priority: 2

Game machine information type: (3) Game machine performance information Notification condition: Notify after 180 seconds (*3) have passed since the game machine started up. After that, it will be notified at a cycle of 180s (*3).
Priority: 3

Game machine information type: (4) Hall control/fraud monitoring information (no game information)
Notification conditions: Notify at a 300ms (*1) cycle from the completion of game machine activation. After that, it will be notified in 300 ms (*1) cycle.
Priority: 4

[8.3.1. Basic sequence of game machine information notification (no game information)]
FIG. 351 is a diagram showing a basic sequence (without game information) of game machine information notification.
[F250] When the gaming machine has been activated, [F251] The frame control 3150 transmits gaming machine information notification (hall controller/fraud monitoring information (no gaming information)) to the CM 3072 .
Until this information is received, the CM 3072 is in the state of waiting for [F252] gaming machine connection.

[F253] The frame control 3150 sends a count notification to the CM 3072.
[F254] The CM 3072 sends a rental notification to the slot control 3150.
[F255] The frame control 3150 sends a lending acceptance result response to the CM 3072.
[F256] The frame control 3150 transmits gaming machine information notification (hall controller/fraud monitoring information (no game information)) to the CM 3072.

[F257] The frame control 3150 transmits gaming machine information notification (hall controller/fraud monitoring information (no game information)) to the CM 3072.
[F258] The frame control 3150 sends a count notification to the CM 3072.
[F259] The CM 3072 sends a rental notification to the slot control 3150.
[F260] The frame control 3150 sends a lending acceptance result response to the CM 3072.
[F261] The frame control 3150 transmits gaming machine information notification (gaming machine installation information) to the CM 3072 .

[F262] The frame control 3150 transmits gaming machine information notification (gaming machine installation information) to the CM 3072 . Here, since the notification timings of the gaming machine installation information and the gaming machine performance information overlap, the gaming machine installation information having a higher priority is notified first.
[F263] The frame control 3150 sends a count notification to the CM 3072.
[F264] The CM 3072 sends a rental notice to the slot control 3150.
[F265] The frame control 3150 sends a lending acceptance result response to the CM 3072.
[F266] The frame control 3150 transmits gaming machine information notification (gaming machine performance information) to the CM 3072. Here, after notifying the gaming machine installation information, the gaming machine performance information is notified.

(*1) The frame control 3150 notifies the hole control/fraud monitoring information within a range of 300 ms to 310 ms.
(*2) The frame control 3150 notifies the gaming machine installation information within the range of 60 seconds to 62 seconds.
(*3) The frame control 3150 notifies the gaming machine performance information within the range of 180 seconds to 186 seconds.

[8.3.2. When hall control/fraud monitoring information (with game information) overlaps with game machine installation information/game machine performance information]
FIGS. 352 and 353 are diagrams showing a sequence when hall controller/fraud monitoring information (with game information) and gaming machine installation information/gaming machine performance information overlap.
[F270] When the gaming machine has been activated, [F271] The frame control 3150 transmits gaming machine information notification (hall control/fraud monitoring information (no game information)) to the CM 3072 .
Until this information is received, the CM 3072 is in the state of waiting for [F272] gaming machine connection.

[F273] The frame control 3150 sends a count notification to the CM 3072.
[F274] The CM 3072 sends a rental notification to the slot control 3150.
[F275] The frame control 3150 sends a lending acceptance result response to the CM 3072.
[F276] The frame control 3150 sends the gaming machine information notification (hall controller/fraud monitoring information (no game information)) to the CM 3072.

[F277] The frame control 3150 sends the gaming machine information notification (hall controller/fraud monitoring information (with game information)) to the CM 3072. If the gaming information is held at the timing of notifying the gaming machine installation information, the hole control/fraud monitoring information is first notified.
[F278] The frame control 3150 sends a count notification to the CM 3072.
[F279] The CM 3072 sends a rental notification to the slot control 3150.
[F280] The frame control 3150 sends a lending acceptance result response to the CM 3072.
[F281] The frame control 3150 transmits gaming machine information notification (gaming machine installation information) to the CM 3072 . The game machine installation information is notified at the timing when the held game information is lost.

[F282] The frame control 3150 transmits gaming machine information notification (hall controller/fraud monitoring information (no game information)) to the CM 3072.
[F283] The frame control 3150 sends a count notification to the CM 3072.
[F284] The CM 3072 sends a rental notice to the slot control 3150.
[F285] The frame control 3150 sends a lending acceptance result response to the CM 3072.
[F286] The frame control 3150 transmits gaming machine information notification (hall controller/fraud monitoring information (with game information)) to the CM 3072. FIG. If the game information is held at the timing of notifying the gaming machine performance information, the hole control/fraud monitoring information is notified.

[F287] The frame control 3150 sends a count notification to the CM 3072.
[F288] The CM 3072 sends a rental notification to the slot control 3150.
[F289] The frame control 3150 sends a lending acceptance result response to the CM 3072.
[F290] The frame control 3150 transmits gaming machine information notification (gaming machine performance information) to the CM 3072 . The game machine performance information is notified at the timing when the held game information is lost.

(*1) The frame control 3150 notifies the hole control/fraud monitoring information within a range of 300 ms to 310 ms.
(*2) The frame control 3150 notifies the gaming machine installation information within the range of 60 seconds to 62 seconds.
(*3) The frame control 3150 notifies the gaming machine performance information within the range of 180 seconds to 186 seconds.

[8.4. Count notification sequence]
354 and 355 are diagrams showing the counting notification sequence.
[F300] In frame control 3150, it is assumed that pressing of the count button is detected.
At this point, [F301] number of game balls=1000 and [F302] number of balls in possession=100.

[F303] The frame control 3150 sends the gaming machine information notification (serial number=n, number of game balls=1000) to the CM3072.
[F304] The frame control 3150 sends a counting notification (counting serial number=m, number of balls counted=250, cumulative number of balls counted=250) to CM3072. The frame control 3150 notifies counting (counting number=m, number of balls counted=250, cumulative number of balls counted=250). The CM3072 adds the number of counted balls to the number of balls in possession (number of balls in possession=100+250).
At this point, [F305] number of game balls=750, and [F306] number of balls in possession=350.

[F307] The CM 3072 sends a rental notice (rental serial number=k, number of balls to be rented=0) to the frame control 3150.
[F308] The frame control 3150 sends a loan reception result response (lending serial number=k, loan ball number reception result=normal) to the CM 3072.

[F309] The frame control 3150 sends the gaming machine information notification (serial number=n+1, number of game balls=750) to the CM3072.
[F310] The frame control 3150 sends a counting notification (counting number=m+1, number of balls counted=250, cumulative number of balls counted=500) to the CM 3072. The frame control 3150 notifies counting (counting number=m+1, number of balls counted=250, cumulative number of balls counted=500). The CM 3072 adds the number of counting balls to the number of balls in possession (number of balls in possession=350+250).
At this point, [F311] number of game balls=500 and [F312] number of balls in possession=600.

[F313] The CM 3072 sends a rental notification (rental serial number=k+1, number of rental balls=0) to the slot control 3150.
[F314] The frame control 3150 sends a loan reception result response (lending serial number=k+1, loan ball number reception result=normal) to the CM 3072.

[F315] In the frame control 3150, it is assumed that release (non-pressing) of the counting button is detected.
[F316] The frame control 3150 sends the gaming machine information notification (serial number=n+2, number of game balls=500) to the CM3072.
[F317] The frame control 3150 sends a counting notification (counting serial number=m+2, number of balls counted=0, cumulative number of balls counted=500) to the CM 3072.
At this point, [F318] number of game balls=500 and [F319] number of balls in possession=600.

[F320] The CM 3072 sends a rental notification (rental serial number=k+2, number of rental balls=0) to the slot control 3150.
[F321] The slot control 3150 sends a loan receipt result response (lending serial number=k+2, number of loan balls received=normal) to the CM 3072.
[F322] The frame control 3150 sends the gaming machine information notification (serial number=n+3, number of game balls=500) to the CM 3072.
(*1) The frame control 3150 notifies the count notification within the range of 90 ms to 100 ms.

[8.5. Lending notification sequence]
FIG. 356 is a diagram showing a lending notification sequence.
[F330] It is assumed that CM3072 has detected that the lending button has been pressed.
At this point, [F331] number of game balls=50. The lending button can be a ball lending button in the case of a managed gaming machine, and can be a medal lending button in the case of a medalless gaming machine.

[F332] The frame control 3150 sends the gaming machine information notification (serial number=n, number of game balls=50) to the CM3072.
[F333] The frame control 3150 sends a counting notification (counting serial number=m, number of balls counted=0, cumulative number of balls counted=0) to CM3072.

[F334] The CM 3072 sends a rental notification (rental serial number=k, number of rental balls=125) to the slot control 3150. The CM 3072 notifies the lending (rental serial number=k, number of lending pitches=125). DC reports in the range of 1 ball to 125 balls.
[F335] The slot control 3150 sends a loan reception result response (lending serial number=k, number of loaned balls reception result=normal) to the CM 3072 . The frame control 3150 adds the number of lent balls to the number of game balls (number of game balls = 50 + 125) and responds with the reception result of the number of lent balls (lending serial number = k, the number of lent balls reception result = normal). The CM 3072 confirms the receipt result of the number of loaned balls.

[F336] The frame control 3150 sends the gaming machine information notification (serial number=n+1, number of game balls=175) to the CM3072.
At this point, [F337] number of game balls=175.
(*1) The frame control 3150 notifies the gaming machine information within a range of 300 ms to 310 ms.

[8.6. Recovery sequence when dedicated cable is disconnected]
357 and 358 are diagrams showing the restoration sequence when the dedicated cable is broken.
At the first time, [F340] number of game balls=175.
[F341] The frame control 3150 sends a gaming machine information notification (serial number=n, number of game balls=1000) to the CM 3072.
[F342] The frame control 3150 sends a counting notification (counting serial number=m, number of balls counted=0, cumulative number of balls counted=0) to the CM 3072.

[F343] The CM 3072 sends a rental notification (rental serial number=k, number of rental balls=0) to the slot control 3150.
[F344] The slot control 3150 sends a loan receipt result response (lending serial number=k, number of loaned pitches received=normal) to the CM 3072.
[F345] The frame control 3150 sends the gaming machine information notification (serial number=n+1, number of game balls=1000) to the CM3072.

[F346] Here, it is assumed that the dedicated cable 3110 is disconnected. The CM 3072 notifies the DC of the disconnection of the dedicated cable and sets VL to OFF.

As a result, [F347] VL=OFF (fire disabled state) in frame control 3150, and [F348] CM3072 set VL=OFF (fire disabled state) and PSI=OFF (count button disabled state).

[F349] The frame control 3150 sends a counting notification (counting serial number=m+1, number of balls counted=0, accumulated number of balls counted=0) to CM3072. Since the counting button is disabled, the number of balls counted is 0 (counting serial number = m+1, number of balls counted = 0, accumulated number of balls counted = 0). However, this notification does not reach CM3072.

[F350] The frame control 3150 sends the gaming machine information notification (serial number=n+2, number of game balls=1000) to the CM3072. However, this notification does not reach CM3072.
At this point, [F351] number of game balls=1000.

[F351] The frame control 3150 sends a counting notification (counting serial number=m+2, number of balls counted=0, cumulative number of balls counted=0) to CM3072. However, this notification does not reach CM3072.

[F353] Here, it is assumed that the dedicated cable 3110 has been restored. In the frame control 3150 and CM 3072, VL=ON (game ball shooting permitted state) and PSI=ON (count button enabled state). The number of game balls is confirmed by store clerk processing, and the error is recovered. The CM 3072 checks the dedicated cable connection status after VL=ON.

[F354] The frame control 3150 sends the gaming machine information notification (serial number=n+3, number of game balls=1000) to the CM3072.
[F355] The frame control 3150 sends a counting notification (counting serial number=m+3, number of balls counted=0, cumulative number of balls counted=0) to CM3072.

[F356] The CM 3072 sends a rental notification (rental serial number=0, number of balls to be rented=0) to the slot control 3150. Notify the lending serial number 0 at the start of connection with the game machine.
At this point, [F357] number of game balls=1000.
[F358] The frame control 3150 sends a loan receipt result response (lending serial number=k, loan ball number reception result=abnormal) to the CM 3072.

[F359] The frame control 3150 sends the gaming machine information notification (serial number=n+4, number of game balls=1000) to the CM3072.
[F360] The frame control 3150 sends a counting notification (counting serial number=m+4, number of balls counted=0, cumulative number of balls counted=0) to CM3072.

[F361] The CM 3072 sends a rental notice (rental serial number=k+1 (=1), number of balls to be rented=0) to the slot control 3150. It is a lending of lending acceptance result response. Update serial number and notify.
[F362] The slot control 3150 sends a loan receipt result response (lending serial number=k+1, number of loaned balls received result=normal) to the CM 3072.

[8.7. Communication error during counting]
359 and 360 are diagrams showing communication anomalies during counting.
[F370] In the frame control 3150, it is assumed that pressing of the count button is detected.
At this point, [F371] number of game balls=1000 and [F372] number of balls in possession=100.

[F373] The frame control 3150 sends a gaming machine information notification (serial number=n, number of game balls=1000) to the CM 3072.
[F374] The frame control 3150 sends a counting notification (counting serial number = m, number of balls counted = 250, accumulated number of balls counted = 250) to the CM 3072 . The frame control 3150 notifies the counting (counting number=m, number of balls to be counted=250). The CM3072 adds the number of counted balls to the number of balls in possession (number of balls in possession=100+250).
At this point, [F375] number of game balls=750 and [F376] number of balls in possession=350.

[F377] The CM 3072 sends a rental notice (rental serial number=k, number of balls to be rented=0) to the slot control 3150.
[F378] The slot control 3150 sends a loan receipt result response (lending serial number=k, number of loaned pitches received=normal) to the CM 3072.

[F379] The frame control 3150 sends the gaming machine information notification (serial number=n+1, number of game balls=750) to the CM3072.
[F380] The frame control 3150 sends a counting notification (counting number=m+1, number of balls counted=250, cumulative number of balls counted=500) to the CM 3072. The frame control 3150 notifies the counting (counting number=m+1, number of balls to be counted=250). However, this notification does not reach CM3072.
At this point, [F381] number of game balls=500 and [F382] number of balls in possession=350.

[F383] The frame control 3150 sends the gaming machine information notification (serial number=n+2, number of game balls=500) to the CM3072. However, this notification does not reach CM3072. The CM 3072 detects the communication abnormality of the game machine information notification, and sets VL to OFF after a maximum of 300 ms.

[F384] In the frame control 3150, VL=OFF (disabled state of firing), and [F385] In CM3072, VL=OFF (disabled state of firing) and PSI=OFF (disabled state of the counting button).

At this point, [F386] number of game balls=500.
[F387] The frame control 3150 sends a counting notification (counting serial number=m+2, number of balls counted=0, cumulative number of balls counted=500) to the CM 3072. Since the counting button is disabled, the number of balls counted is 0 (counting number=m+2, number of balls counted=0, accumulated number of balls counted=500). However, this notification does not reach CM3072.

[F388] The CM 3072 waits for DC error recovery. The number of game balls and the number of balls in possession are confirmed by store clerk processing, and the error is recovered. CM sets VL to ON after DC recovers from the error.

(*1) The frame control 3150 notifies the gaming machine information within a range of 300 ms to 310 ms.
(*2) The frame control 3150 notifies the count notification within the range of 90 ms to 100 ms.

[8.8. Communication error at the time of rental]
FIG. 361 is a diagram showing a communication abnormality at the time of lending.
[F400] It is assumed that CM3072 has detected that the lending button has been pressed.
At this point, [F401] number of game balls=50.

[F402] The frame control 3150 sends the gaming machine information notification (serial number=n, number of game balls=50) to the CM3072.
[F403] The frame control 3150 sends a counting notification (counting serial number=m, number of balls counted=0, cumulative number of balls counted=0) to the CM 3072.

[F404] The CM 3072 sends a rental notification (rental serial number=k, number of rental balls=125) to the frame control 3150. The CM 3072 notifies the lending (rental serial number=k, number of lending pitches=125). DC will notify you within the range of 1 ball to 125 balls depending on the rental unit price and rental amount. The lending notification is preferably sent within 170ms after receiving the counting notification.
At this point, [F405] number of game balls=175.

[F406] The slot control 3150 sends a loan receipt result response (lending serial number=k, number of loaned balls received result=normal) to the CM 3072. However, this response does not reach CM3072. The CM 3072 determines that the lending is incomplete because the lending acceptance result response has not been received within a predetermined time (for example, within 10 ms).

[F407] The frame control 3150 sends the gaming machine information notification (serial number=n+1, number of game balls=175) to the CM3072.
[F408] The frame control 3150 sends a counting notification (counting serial number=m+1, number of balls counted=0, accumulated number of balls counted=0) to CM3072.

[F409] The CM 3072 sends a rental notification (rental serial number=k, number of rental balls=125) to the slot control 3150. Since it is not known whether the lending notice sent last time has reached the quota control, it will be resent. The lending notification is preferably sent within 170ms after receiving the counting notification.
At this point, [F410] number of game balls=175.

[F411] The frame control 3150 sends a loan reception result response (lending serial number=k, loan ball number reception result=abnormal) to the CM 3072 . The frame control 3150 checks the continuity of the lending serial number of the lending notification, and returns an error if it is not continuous. If the serial number matches the previous lending notification, the CM 3072 determines that the lending notification has reached the limit control, and completes lending.

At this point, [F412] number of game balls=175.
[F413] The frame control 3150 sends the gaming machine information notification (serial number=n+2, number of game balls=175) to the CM3072.
(*1) The frame control 3150 notifies the gaming machine information within a range of 300 ms to 310 ms.

[Counting timing in managed game machines]
[Basic specifications for counting]
Counting in a managed gaming machine means transmitting the number of game balls recorded in the gaming machine to a device (dedicated unit) outside the gaming machine.
The number of game balls is counted when either "short press" or "long press" is detected.
One game ball is counted for each "short press".
When "long press" is detected, 250 game balls are counted. If the number of game balls is less than 250, the total number of game balls is counted.
The number of game balls is counted at count notification timings at intervals of 300 ms.

The button detection flag turns ON when the count button is continuously pressed for 50 ms while the button detection flag is OFF.
The button detection flag turns OFF when the count button is continuously released for 50 ms while the button detection flag is ON.
The button press timer counts up every 2 ms when the button detection flag is ON and the count button is pressed.
The button pressing timer is cleared (after counting) when the button detection flag is changed from OFF to ON, or when the button detection flag is OFF at the count notification timing.
The button press timer will not increment (reset) any more once it counts up to a maximum (255).

The frame control CPU (frame control board) determines that a short press is made when the button detection flag is OFF and the button press timer is 1 or more and less than 250 at the count notification timing.
If the button detection flag is ON and the button pressing timer is equal to or greater than 250 at the count notification timing, the frame control CPU determines that the button has been pressed for a long time.

FIG. 362 is a diagram showing a counting condition table.
The frame control CPU determines whether it is a short press or a long press based on this table (table, etc.).
When the button detection flag is OFF and the button pressing timer is 1 or more and less than 250 (249 or less), the frame control CPU determines that the button is pressed for a short time.
When the button detection flag is ON and the button pressing timer is 250 or more, the frame control CPU determines that the button has been pressed for a long time.

FIG. 363 is a diagram showing (1) long press basic pattern.
The vertical lines (T1, T2, T3, T4, T5, etc.) illustrated every 300 ms are count notification timings (same hereafter).
Here, an example in which the count button is pressed for 700 ms and then released will be described.
The count button is turned on between the first count notification timing T1 and the second count notification timing T2, and the count button is turned on between the fourth count notification timing T4 and the fifth count notification timing T5. is OFF.

The button detection flag turns ON 50 ms after the count button is turned ON, and turns OFF 50 ms after the count button is turned OFF.
The value of the button press timer gradually increases after the button detection flag is turned on (for example, +1 every 2 ms, +1 every 1 ms, +2 every 2 ms, etc.), reaching a maximum of 255. The button press timer is reset at the fifth count notification timing T5.

At the counting notification timing T3, the button detection flag is ON and the button pressing timer is less than 250, so counting is not performed. However, even if the counting is not performed, the frame control CPU can send a count notification (0 balls) indicating that the counting is not performed to the dedicated unit (same below).

At the count notification timing T4, since the button detection flag is ON and the button pressing timer is 250 or more, 250 balls are counted. In this case, the frame control CPU determines that the long-press count condition is met, and transmits a count notification (250 balls) corresponding to the long-press to the dedicated unit.
At the count notification timing T5, since the button detection flag is OFF and the button pressing timer is 250 or more, the count is not performed.
According to this pattern, it is possible to correspond to the basic action of long press.

FIG. 364 is a diagram showing (2) continuous long press pattern (part 1).
Here, an example in which the count button is pressed for 930 ms and then released will be described.
The count button is turned on between the first count notification timing T1 and the second count notification timing T2, and the count button is turned on between the fourth count notification timing T4 and the fifth count notification timing T5. is OFF.

The button detection flag turns ON 50 ms after the count button is turned ON, and turns OFF 50 ms after the count button is turned OFF.
The value of the button press timer gradually increases after the button detection flag is turned ON, and reaches 255 at maximum. The button press timer is reset at the sixth counting notification timing T6.

At count notification timings T4 and T5, since the button detection flag is ON and the button pressing timer is 250 or more, 250 balls are counted. In this case, the frame control CPU determines that the long-press counting condition is met, and at count notification timings T4 and T5, transmits a count notification (250 balls) corresponding to the long-press to the dedicated unit.
At the counting notification timing T6, the button detection flag is OFF and the button pressing timer is 250 or more, so counting is not performed.
According to this pattern, continuous long presses can be handled.

FIG. 365 is a diagram showing (2) continuous long-press pattern (part 2).
Here, an example will be described in which the counting button is released after being pressed for 800 ms, and released after being pressed for 250 ms after 30 ms.
The count button is turned on between the first count notification timing T1 and the second count notification timing T2, and the count button is turned on between the fourth count notification timing T4 and the fifth count notification timing T5. is OFF.
Also, between the fourth count notification timing T4 and the fifth count notification timing T5, the count button is turned on, and between the fifth count notification timing T5 and the sixth count notification timing T6, The counting button is OFF.

The button detection flag turns ON 50 ms after the first count button is turned ON, and turns OFF 50 ms after the last count button is turned OFF. The value of the button detection flag does not change when the counting button is turned on, off, and on.
The value of the button press timer gradually increases after the button detection flag is turned ON, and reaches 255 at maximum. The button press timer is reset at the sixth counting notification timing T6.

In order for the button detection flag to be cleared, the button must be released for a cumulative total of 50 ms. Even if the count button is released at such a short interval (30 ms in the example shown), the long press continues to count. is executed as
At count notification timings T4 and T5, since the button detection flag is ON and the button pressing timer is 250 or more, 250 balls are counted. In this case, the frame control CPU determines that the long-press counting condition is met, and at count notification timings T4 and T5, transmits a count notification (250 balls) corresponding to the long-press to the dedicated unit.
At the counting notification timing T6, the button detection flag is OFF and the button pressing timer is 250 or more, so counting is not performed.
According to this pattern, even if there is a slight release of the button during the long press, it can be assumed that the long press continues.

FIG. 366 is a diagram showing (3) long press special pattern.
Here, an example in which the count button is pressed for 600 ms and then released will be described.
The count button is turned on between the first count notification timing T1 and the second count notification timing T2, and the count button is turned on between the third count notification timing T3 and the fourth count notification timing T4. is OFF.

The button detection flag turns ON 50 ms after the count button is turned ON, and turns OFF 50 ms after the count button is turned OFF.
The value of the button press timer gradually increases after the button detection flag is turned ON, and reaches 255 at maximum. The button press timer is reset at the fourth count notification timing T4.

If the button detection flag is OFF at the count notification timing, only a short press is determined and a long press is not determined.
At the counting notification timing T4, the button detection flag is OFF and the button pressing timer is 250 or more, so no counting is performed.
According to this pattern, it is possible to prevent a long press from being determined when a certain condition is satisfied, even if the pressing mode is such that the pressing time alone indicates a long press.

FIG. 367 is a diagram showing (4) short press basic pattern (Part 1).
Here, an example in which the count button is pressed for 100 ms and then released will be described.
The count button is turned on between the first count notification timing T1 and the second count notification timing T2, and the count button is turned on between the second count notification timing T2 and the third count notification timing T3. is OFF.

The button detection flag turns ON 50 ms after the count button is turned ON, and turns OFF 50 ms after the count button is turned OFF.
The value of the button pressing timer gradually increases after the button detection flag is turned ON, but does not reach 250. The button press timer is reset at the third count notification timing T3.

In order to determine that it is a short press, the button detection flag must be OFF at the count notification timing. In addition, since the button press timer must be 1 or more and less than 250, the shortest press time of 52 ms is required to determine whether the button is pressed for a short time.
At the count notification timing T3, since the button detection flag is OFF and the button pressing timer is 1 or more and less than 250, one ball is counted. In this case, the frame control CPU determines that the short-press count condition is met, and transmits a count notification (250 balls) corresponding to the short-press to the dedicated unit.
According to this pattern, it is possible to correspond to the basic action of short pressing.

FIG. 368 is a diagram showing (4) short press basic pattern (Part 2).
Here, an example in which the count button is pressed for 100 ms and then released will be described.
The count button is turned on between the first count notification timing T1 and the second count notification timing T2, and the count button is turned on between the first count notification timing T1 and the second count notification timing T2. is OFF.

The button detection flag turns ON 50 ms after the count button is turned ON, and turns OFF 50 ms after the count button is turned OFF.
The value of the button pressing timer gradually increases after the button detection flag is turned ON, but does not reach 250. The button press timer is reset at the third count notification timing T3.

To determine whether the button has been pressed for a short time, the button detection flag must be OFF at the count notification timing. Further, in the management game machine, unlike the medalless game machine, the button detection flag does not turn OFF until 50 ms have elapsed after the count button is released.
Therefore, at the counting notification timing T2, since the button detection flag is ON and the button pressing timer is 1 or more and less than 250, counting is not performed.
At the count notification timing T3, since the button detection flag is OFF and the button pressing timer is 1 or more and less than 250, one ball is counted. In this case, the frame control CPU determines that the short-press count condition is met, and transmits a count notification (250 balls) corresponding to the short-press to the dedicated unit.
According to this pattern, when the count notification timing arrives immediately after the end of the short press, the count can be postponed to the next count notification timing.

FIG. 369 is a diagram showing (5) short press special pattern (Part 1).
Here, an example will be described in which the counting button is released after being pressed for 100 ms, and released after being pressed for 100 ms after 60 ms.
The count button is turned on between the first count notification timing T1 and the second count notification timing T2, and the count button is turned on between the second count notification timing T2 and the third count notification timing T3. is OFF.
In addition, the counting button is turned ON between the second counting notification timing T2 and the third counting notification timing T3, and between the second counting notification timing T2 and the third counting notification timing T3, The counting button is OFF.

The button detection flag turns ON 50 ms after the count button is turned ON, and turns OFF 50 ms after the count button is turned OFF.
The value of the button pressing timer gradually increases after the button detection flag is turned ON, but does not reach 250. The button pressing timer is reset when the button detection flag changes from OFF to ON or at the third count notification timing T3.

In this way, when the button is pressed such that the short press is counted twice at the same count notification timing, only one ball may be counted.
At the count notification timing T3, since the button detection flag is OFF and the button pressing timer is 1 or more and less than 250, one ball is counted. In this case, the frame control CPU determines that the short-press count condition is met, and transmits a count notification (250 balls) corresponding to the short-press to the dedicated unit.
According to this pattern, only one short press can be accepted at the same count notification timing.

FIG. 370 is a diagram showing (5) short press special pattern (part 2).
Here, an example in which the count button is pressed for 100 ms at intervals of 200 ms and then released will be described.
The count button is turned on between the first count notification timing T1 and the second count notification timing T2, and the count button is turned on between the first count notification timing T1 and the second count notification timing T2. is OFF.
In addition, the counting button is turned ON between the second counting notification timing T2 and the third counting notification timing T3, and between the second counting notification timing T2 and the third counting notification timing T3, The counting button is OFF.
Furthermore, between the third count notification timing T3 and the fourth count notification timing T4, the count button is turned on, and between the third count notification timing T3 and the fourth count notification timing T4, The counting button is OFF.
Furthermore, between the fourth count notification timing T4 and the fifth count notification timing T5, the count button is turned on, and between the fourth count notification timing T4 and the fifth count notification timing T5, , the counting button is OFF.

The button detection flag turns ON 50 ms after the count button is turned ON, and turns OFF 50 ms after the count button is turned OFF.
The value of the button pressing timer gradually increases after the button detection flag is turned ON, but does not reach 250. The button pressing timer is reset when the button detection flag changes from OFF to ON or at the sixth count notification timing T6.

To determine whether the button has been pressed for a short time, the button detection flag must be OFF at the count notification timing. If the button detection flag is ON at the count notification timing, it is not determined that the button is pressed for a short time.
Therefore, if the button is pressed such that the button detection flag is turned ON at each count notification timing as shown in the figure, the short press is not detected and counting is not performed.
At the count notification timings T2 to T5, since the button detection flag is ON and the button pressing timer is 1 or more and less than 250, counting is not performed.
At the count notification timing T6, since the button detection flag is OFF and the button pressing timer is 1 or more and less than 250, one ball is counted. In this case, the frame control CPU determines that the short-press count condition is met, and transmits a count notification (250 balls) corresponding to the short-press to the dedicated unit.
According to this pattern, when the count notification timing arrives immediately after the end of the short press continues, at the next count notification timing T6 when the button detection flag based on the last short press is turned OFF. A count can be made.

Each pattern described above, the frame control CPU (frame control board), or if the frame control CPU is not mounted, the main control CPU (main control board), every predetermined cycle (for example, every 1 ms interrupt cycle ) can be controlled by executing the counting control process. The count control process is called and executed when a trigger for execution of the count control process occurs during execution of the main loop process by the frame control CPU or the like.

[Chapter 5]
[Power supply unit for lower launch control game machine]
[1 Overview and scope of application]
This chapter describes the performance and functions of the power supply unit of the lower launch management game machine.
The power supply unit uses a colored resin case with heat dissipation holes.

[2 External dimensions and weight]
371 is a diagram showing external dimensions and weight of a power supply unit; FIG.
The outer dimensions of the power supply unit product (entire including the case) are Y mm long, X mm wide, and Z mm high, and the board of the power supply unit is 162 mm long and 179 mm wide. XYZ is at least a value that can be accommodated by the substrate. (Note 1) Variable depending on the case design.
Weights are in Ag (agrams). A is the weight of the product including the case.

[3 Input specifications]
[3.1 Input power supply specifications]
372 is a diagram showing input power supply specifications of a power supply unit. FIG.
The input voltage is 85V to 115V AC.
The frequency is from 47Hz to 63Hz.
The inrush current is 28A.
Efficiency is over 86%.

(Note 1) With AC200V input protection function.
When the protection function is activated, due to concerns about the deterioration of the protective parts, it is not automatically reset, but is reset by replacing the parts.
(Note 2) AC100V input, duty 100% rated load (200VA at DC36V generator output), and cold start values.
Re-turning on the power (OFF/ON) is defined as ON time of 3 seconds and OFF time of 1 second.
(Note 3) Value for AC100V input, rated load of 100% duty (200VA at output of DC36V generator). Efficiency (%) = total output power / active power x 100.

[3.2 Input signal specifications]
373 is a diagram showing input signal specifications of a power supply unit. FIG.
A power cutoff switch stops all power output when a cutoff is detected. After that, even if the disconnection release is detected, the power is not output and the power OFF state is maintained. Valid only when the power switch is ON. The power OFF state is released by turning the power switch ON/OFF.

[4 Output specifications]
[4.1 Output power supply specifications]
374 and 375 are diagrams showing the output power supply specifications of the power supply unit.
The output voltages are DC5V-1, DC12V-1, DC36V-1, DC12V-2, DC36V-2.
Output fluctuation (Note 1) is ±5%, ±5%, ±5%, ±5%, ±7%.
The ripple voltage (Note 1) is 1% or less of the output voltage and 2% or less of the output voltage.
The minimum output current is 0A.
The rated output current (Note 2) is 2.0A, 4.0A, 2.5A, 10.0A and 6.0A.
The maximum output current (Note 3) is 2.5A, 5.0A, 4.0A, 10.0A and 6.0A.
The rated output power (Note 4) is 200VA.
The maximum output power (Note 5) is 300VA.

The circuit types are DC-DC converter, DC-DC converter, AC-DC converter, DC-DC converter, DC36V-1 and separate.
Overcurrent protection (including short circuit protection) is provided (Note 6) over 2.6 A, provided (Note 6) exceeded 5.1 A, provided (Note 6) 8 A, provided (Note 6) exceeded 10.1 A, provided ( Note 6) 8A.
Overvoltage protection is provided (Note 7).
Overheat protection is provided (Note 8).
The instantaneous power failure holding time (AC interruption detection time) is 25 ms.
See [4.2 Timing Chart] for details of the output hold time, rise time, and fall time.

(Note 1) This is the value when the rated output of each power supply system is 100% duty. Abrupt load changes should be in the range of 50-100%.
(Note 2) This is the value when the rated output of each power supply system is 100% duty.
(Note 3) Figures for each power system alone.
(Note 4) This is the numerical value for the output of the DC36V generator with 100V AC input and 100% DUTY.
(Note 5) This is the numerical value at the output of the DC36V generator with the input of AC100V. However, when a certain condition is exceeded, the DC12V-2/DC36V-2 is stopped by the overload protection function. The operation of the output power (input of AC 100V and output of DC 36V generator) is as follows.
(1) At 200VA or less, output is possible with a duty of 100% and the protection function does not operate (point A in the graph).
(2) When 300VA is continuously output for X seconds or longer, the DC12V-2/DC36V-2 is stopped by the protection function.
(3) In the range of 201VA-300VA, it is necessary to adjust the duty so that the amount of heat generation (detected is the current value of the DC36V generator) equivalent to point A in the graph shown in FIG. If (ii) the same amount of heat is generated without duty adjustment, DC12V-2/DC36V-2 is stopped by the protection function.
(Note 6) Equipped with an IC, protection element or protection circuit. Set the overcurrent values of DC5V-1/DC12V-1/DC12V-2 to values that are definitely larger than the maximum output current value (overcurrent protection does not operate at the maximum output current value). Even if an overcurrent protection IC/circuit is provided, a short circuit protection function is installed.
(Note 7) Equipped with protective element or protective circuit.
(Note 8) Equipped with a protection function that stops the AC-DC converter with a thermal switch, etc.

[4.2 Power supply and signal timing chart]
FIG. 376 is a power supply and signal timing chart.
DC5V-1/DC12V-1/DC36V-1, DC12V-2/DC36V-2, power failure detection signal (Note 1), and reset signal (Note 1) are shown in the timing charts (1) to (4) below. See The numerical values are AC100V input, rated load of 100% duty (200VA at output of DC36V generator).
(Note 1) The power failure detection signal and reset signal are generated by the frame control board, but they are listed for reference because they are related to the retention time of DC5V-1. The detection voltage value and specified time are design values.

[(1) Start-up characteristics (at power on)]
FIG. 377 is a diagram showing rising characteristics (when power is turned on).
AC-IN (100V) (50Hz/60Hz) rises in a sinusoidal waveform and rises from power-on.
DC36V-1 and DC36V-2 rise in a parabolic manner, and within 200 ms of rising, 10%→90%.
DC12V-1 and DC12V-2 rise linearly, and within 200 ms of rising, 10%→90%.
DC5V-1 rises linearly, and the rate changes from 10% to 90% within 35 ms of rising.
The power-off detection signal rises vertically after a predetermined time (typ: 130 ms, 100 to 200 ms) has passed after DC36V-1 and DC36V-2 exceed 28.6V.
The reset signal rises vertically after a predetermined time (typ: 380 ms, 300 to 500 ms) has passed after the power-off detection signal has become "H (ON)".

In this way, when the voltage value of DC36V-1 or the like exceeds 28.6V, the power failure detection signal and the reset signal become release "H" after the lapse of the specified time.

[(2) Falling characteristics (at power shutdown)]
FIG. 378 is a diagram showing falling characteristics (when power is cut off).
AC-IN (100V) (50Hz/60Hz) falls when power is cut off.
DC36V-1 falls linearly 25 to 35 ms after the power is turned off.
DC12V-1 falls linearly after DC36V-1 begins to fall.
DC5V-1 falls linearly 10 ms or more after DC36V-1 drops to 28V.
DC36V-2 falls linearly like DC36V-1.
DC12V-2 falls linearly like DC12V-1.
The power failure detection signal falls vertically when DC36V-1 drops to 28V.
The reset signal falls vertically after a specified time (typ: 170 ms, 120 to 250 ms) has elapsed after the power failure detection signal has fallen or after DC 5V-1 has fallen.

After the momentary power failure holding time (25ms to 35ms) has passed, the voltage of DC36V-1 drops.
When the voltage value of DC36V-1 drops to 28V, the power failure detection signal for determining the power failure state becomes active (GND).
DC5V-1 maintains the voltage for 10 ms or longer after detection (active) of the power-off detection signal.
DC12V-1 and DC12V-2 do not hold voltage unlike DC5V-1.
The reset signal becomes GND after the lapse of a specified time or when the 5V power supply drops after the detection of the power failure detection signal.

[(3) Momentary power failure -1 (less than 25 ms)]
Holds all power outputs (DC5V-1, DC12V-1, DC36V-1, DC12V-2, DC36V-2).

[(4) Momentary power failure -2 (when DC36V-1 cannot be lowered for 25ms or more and DC5V-1 is maintained)]
FIG. 379 is a diagram showing momentary power failure -2 (when DC 36V-1 cannot be lowered for 25 ms or more and DC 5V-1 is maintained).
AC-IN (100V) (50Hz/60Hz) falls during momentary power failure. When the instantaneous power failure is canceled, it rises like a cosine wave.
DC36V-1 falls linearly 25 to 35 ms after the momentary power failure. When the momentary power failure is canceled, it rises linearly.
DC12V-1 falls linearly and slightly after DC36V-1 begins to fall. When the momentary power failure is canceled, it rises linearly.
DC5V-1 does not fall.
DC36V-2 falls linearly like DC36V-1. When the instantaneous power failure is canceled, it rises like a cosine wave. When the instantaneous power failure is canceled, it rises like a cosine wave.
Like DC12V-1, DC12V-2 falls linearly and slightly. When the momentary power failure is canceled, it rises linearly.
The power failure detection signal falls vertically when DC36V-1 drops to 28V. After the momentary power failure is canceled and DC36V-1 exceeds 28.6V, it rises vertically after a predetermined time (typ: 130ms, 100-200ms).
The reset signal falls vertically after a specified time (typ: 170 ms, 120 to 250 ms) has elapsed after the power failure detection signal has fallen or after DC 5V-1 has fallen. It rises vertically after a predetermined time (typ: 380 ms, 300 to 500 ms) has passed after the momentary power failure is canceled and the power failure detection signal becomes "H (ON)".

After the momentary power failure holding time (25ms to 35ms) has passed, the voltage of DC36V-1 drops.
When the voltage value of DC36V-1 drops to 28V, the power failure detection signal becomes active (GND).
The reset signal becomes GND after a specified time has elapsed after the detection of the power-off detection signal.
After the AC input is restored, when the voltage value of DC36V-1, which has dropped, exceeds 28.6V, the power failure detection signal and the reset signal become release "H" after a lapse of a specified time.

[(5) Momentary power failure -2 (when DC36V-1 drops for 25ms or more and DC5V-1 is not maintained)]
After the falling characteristic (2), the rising characteristic (1) is obtained.

[5 Connector specifications]
[5.1 CN1: Connection part 1]
380 is a diagram showing specifications of CN1: connection part 1. FIG.
Pin number: 1
Signal name: AC100V-N
Signal content: AC100V input (ground side)
remarks:-

Pin number: 2
Signal name: AC100V-L
Signal content: AC100V input (ungrounded side)
remarks:-

Pin number: 3
Signal name: FG
Signal content: Frame GND
remarks:-

[5.2 CN2: Connection part 2]
381 is a diagram showing specifications of CN2: connection part 2. FIG.
Pin No: 1, 2
Signal name: GND
Signal content: GND
remarks:-

Pin No.: 3, 4
Signal name: DC36V-1
Signal content: Main system 36V power Remarks: -

Pin No.: 5, 6
Signal name: GND
Signal content: GND
remarks:-

Pin No: 7, 8, 9, 10
Signal name: DC12V-1
Signal content: Main system 12V power supply Remarks: -

Pin No: 11, 12
Signal name: GND
Signal content: GND
remarks:-

Pin No: 13, 14
Signal name: DC5V-1
Signal content: Main system 5V power supply Remarks: -

Pin No: 15, 16
Signal name: GND
Signal content: GND
remarks:-

[5.3 CN3: Connection part 3]
382 is a diagram showing specifications of CN3: connection part 3. FIG.
Pin No: 1, 2
Signal name: GND
Signal content: GND
Remarks: Supplied to the game board

Pin No: 3, 4, 5, 6
Signal name: DC36V-2
Signal content: Sub-system 36V power supply Remarks: Supplied to the game board

Pin No: 7, 8, 9, 10
Signal name: GND
Signal content: GND
Remarks: Supplied to the game board

Pin No: 11, 12, 13, 14
Signal name: DC12V-2
Signal content: Sub-system 12V power supply (Note 1)
Remarks: Supplied to the game board

Pin No: 15, 16
Signal name: GND
Signal content: GND
Remarks: Supplied to the game board

Pin No: 17, 18
Signal name: GND
Signal content: GND
Remarks: Supplied to the gaming machine frame

Pin No: 19, 20, 21, 22
Signal name: DC12V-2
Signal content: Sub-system 12V power supply (Note 1)
Remarks: Supplied to the gaming machine frame

Pin No: 23, 24
Signal name: GND
Signal content: GND
Remarks: Supplied to the game machine frame (Note 1) The same power supply is supplied to both the game board and the game machine frame.

[5.4 CN4: Connection part 4]
383 is a diagram showing specifications of CN4: connection component 4. FIG.
Pin No: 1, 2
Signal name: FG2
Signal content: Frame GND
Remarks: Connected with the main drawer connector

[5.5 CN5: Connection part 5]
384 is a diagram showing specifications of CN5: connection part 5. FIG.
Pin number: 1
Signal name: FG3
Signal content: Frame GND
Remarks: Connected to the metal part of the game machine frame

[5.6 CN6: Connection part 6]
385 is a diagram showing specifications of CN6: connecting part 6. FIG.
Pin number: 1
Signal name: FG1
Signal content: Frame GND
Remarks: Connected to the metal part of the game machine frame

[5.7 CN7: Connection part 7]
386 is a diagram showing specifications of CN7: connection part 7. FIG.
Pin number: 1
Signal name: GND
Signal content: GND
Remarks: Connected to the power cutoff switch

Pin number: 2
Signal name: Power cut-off switch Signal content: Power cut-off switch (“L”: power output, “H”: power OFF)
Remarks: Connected to the power cutoff switch

[6 Insulation specifications]
FIG. 387 is a diagram showing insulation specifications of a power supply unit.
The dielectric strength (between input and FG) is "no abnormality when 1000 VAC is applied for 1 minute".
The dielectric strength (between input and output) is "no abnormality when 1000 VAC is applied for 1 minute".
The notes for the withstand voltage are 50/60 Hz and a cut-off current of 20 mA.
The insulation resistance is 1 MΩ or more when DC 500 V is applied.
Leakage current is less than 1 mA at 100V AC input. Leakage current reference is 50/60 Hz.

[7 Environmental specifications]
FIG. 388 is a diagram showing the environmental specifications of the power supply unit.
The operating environment temperature is 0 to 50°C.
The operating environment humidity is 20 to 90%. The remarks on the operating environment humidity are "no condensation" and "50% at high temperature".
The storage environment temperature is -10 to 60°C.
Storage environment humidity is 20 to 90%. The remarks on the storage environment humidity are "no condensation" and "50% at high temperature".

[8 Standards]
FIG. 389 is a diagram showing standards for power supply units.
The safety standard is "compliant with the Electrical Appliance and Material Safety Law".
The noise terminal voltage complies with the Electrical Appliance and Material Safety Law.
Unwanted radiation is "VCCI Class A compliant".
Static electricity is "standalone: compliant with IEC61000-4-2" and "built-in: compliant with static electricity test for game machines". The notes for static electricity are "single unit: contact 8 kV, air 15 kV, indirect 15 kV" and "assembly: contact 20 kV, air 20 kV, indirect 20 kV".

[9 Power supply configuration diagram]
FIG. 390 is a diagram showing a power supply configuration diagram of a power supply unit.
The power supply unit 5000 includes an AC100V and signal input/ground processing output unit 5100, a DC36V generation unit 5200, a main control board power generation unit 5300, a performance board power generation unit 5400, and other output units 5500.

AC 100V and signal input section/ground processing section output section 5100 includes a power switch 5101, a fuse 5102, a filter 5103, an inrush power protection 5104, a surge/overvoltage protection 5105, a noise filter 5106, a noise filter 5107, and a power cutoff switch 5108. there is

The DC36V generator 5200 includes an input rectifier/smoother 5201 , an AC/DC current protection overvoltage protection DC output stop 5202 , an isolation transformer 5203 , an output rectifier/smoother 5204 , and a feedback circuit 5205 .
An overvoltage protection 5206 , an overheating protection thermal switch 5207 , and an overload protection power output cutoff 5208 are connected to the DC36V generation unit 5200 .

The main control board power generation unit 5300 includes a short circuit protection 5301 , a short circuit protection 5302 , a 12 V generation 1 DC/DC current protection 5306 , and a surge/overvoltage protection 5307 .

The performance board power generation unit 5400 includes a short circuit protection 5401 , a 36V generation 2 isolation circuit 5402 , a short circuit protection 5403 , a 12V generation 2 DC/DC overcurrent protection 5404 and a surge/overvoltage protection 5405 .

Other output unit 5500 includes DC36V-1 (2.5A) LED5501, DC12V-1 (4A) LED5502, DC5V-1 (2A) LED5503, DC36V-2 (6A) LED5504, and DC12V-2 (10A) LED5505. I have it.

Power from AC 100V-L and AC 100V-N is sent to input rectifier smoothing 5201 and overvoltage protection 5206 via power switch 5101, fuse 5102, filter 5103, and inrush power protection 5104.
A surge/overvoltage protection 5105, a noise filter 5106, a noise filter 5107, FG (100 V AC), FG1, FG2, and FG3 are connected between the fuse 5102 and the filter 5103. FIG.

Power sent to input rectifier smoothing 5201 and overvoltage protection 5206 passes through AC/DC current protection overvoltage protection DC output stop 5202, isolation transformer 5203, output rectification smoothing 5204, feedback circuit 5205, overcurrent protection overvoltage protection 5206, overload protection power output cutoff 5208, short circuit protection 5301, short circuit protection 5302, short circuit protection 5305, short circuit protection 5401, short circuit protection 5403.

Power or signals from feedback circuit 5205 , overcurrent protection overvoltage protection 5206 , overheating protection thermal switch 5207 , power cutoff switch 5108 are sent to AC/DC current protection overvoltage protection DC output stop 5202 .

Power sent to short circuit protection 5301 is sent to DC 36V-1 (2.5A) LED 5501 .
Power sent to short circuit protection 5302 is sent to DC 12V-1 (4A) LED 5502 via 12V generation 1DC/DC overcurrent protection 5303, surge/overvoltage protection 5304 .
Power sent to short circuit protection 5305 is sent to DC 5V-1 (2A) LED 5503 via SV generation 1 DC/DC overcurrent protection 5306, surge/overvoltage protection 5307 .

The power sent to short circuit protection 5401 and the power sent to overload protection power output cutoff 5209 are sent to DC 36V-2 (6A) LED 5504 via 36V generation 2 isolation circuit 5402 .
The power sent to the short circuit protection 5403 and the power sent to the overload protection power supply output shutoff 5209 are routed through the 12V generation 2DC/DC overcurrent protection 5604 and the surge/overvoltage protection 5405 to DC12V-2 (10A) sent to LED 5505;

[10 Parts Layout of Connectors and Switches]
FIG. 391 is a diagram showing a component layout diagram of connectors and switches of a power supply unit.
The upper side in the figure is the upper back side of the gaming machine, the right side in the figure is the hinge side on the back side of the gaming machine, the lower side in the figure is the lower back side of the gaming machine, and the left side in the figure is the back side of the gaming machine. It is on the opening/closing side.
The vertical length A of the board of the power supply unit is, for example, 162 mm.
The horizontal length B of the board of the power supply unit is, for example, 179 mm.

Seven connectors are arranged on the upper part of the board of the power supply unit.
CN6, CN1, CN4, CN5, CN7, CN2, and CN3 are arranged in order from the left side of the drawing.
Details of the seven connectors are as follows.
CN1: Connector 5601 for AC100V power plug
CN2: Main system power supply output connector 5602
CN3: connector 5603 for sub-system power output
CN4: FG connector 5604 that connects with the main drawer connector
CN5: Connector 5605 for FG to connect with lifting unit metal part
CN6: Connector 5606 for FG connected to the metal part of the game machine frame
CN7: Connector 5607 connected to the power cutoff switch

[Chapter 6]
[Hard interface specifications]
[(1) Main control board - frame control board interface]
The game board of the lower launch management game machine and the main control board, which is the main system of the game machine frame, and the frame control board are connected by a 36-pin drawer connector.
The pin layout specifications and circuit configuration of the connector are as follows.

[(A) Connector pin layout specifications]
FIG. 392 is a diagram showing connector pin arrangement specifications of a 36-pin drawer connector.
Pin No: 1, 2
Signal: GND
Contents: GND
direction:-
Active:-
remarks:-

Pin No: 3, 4, 5
Signal: DC36V-1
Contents: Main system 36V power supply Direction: Frame → Panel (Frame control board → Main control board)
Active:-
remarks:-

Pin No: 6, 7, 8
Signal: GND
Contents: GND
direction:-
Active:-
remarks:-

Pin No.: 9,10
Signal: BU power supply Contents: Backup power supply (5V) used by the main control board
Direction: Frame → Board Active: -
remarks:-

Pin No: 11, 12
Signal: GND
Contents: GND
direction:-
Active:-
remarks:-

Pin No: 13, 14, 15, 16
Signal: DC12V-1
Contents: Main system 12V power supply Direction: Frame → Board Active: -
remarks:-

Pin No: 17, 18
Signal: GND
Contents: GND
direction:-
Active:-
remarks:-

Pin number: 19
Signal: Upper frame open switch signal Contents: Signal to detect opening of upper frame (front frame) Direction: Frame → Panel Active: H: open, L: closed Remarks: (*1)

Pin number: 20
Signal: Frame bottom open switch signal Contents: Signal to detect the opening of the frame bottom (front frame or back mechanism) Direction: Frame → Panel Active: H: Open, L: Close Remarks: (*1)

Pin No: 21, 22
Signal: Power failure detection signal (*4)
Contents: Signal to detect power failure Direction: Frame → Board Active: H: Release, L: Detect Remarks: (*1)

Pin number: 23
Signal: CTX1
Contents: Asynchronous serial signal sent by the main control board Direction: Panel → Frame (Main control board → Frame control board)
Active: (*2)
Remarks: (*3)

Pin number: 24
Signal: CRX1
Contents: Asynchronous serial signal received by the main control board Direction: Frame → Panel Active: (*2)
Remarks: (*1)

Pin number: 25
Signal: RAM clear signal Contents: Main control RAM clear signal Direction: Frame → Board Active: H: Not pressed, L: Pressed Remarks: (*1)

Pin number: 26
Signal: Fire stop signal Contents: Signal to stop firing on the main control board Direction: Board → Frame Active: H: Fire enabled, L: Stop Remarks: (*3)

Pin No.: 27, 28
Signal: GND
Contents: GND
direction:-
Active:-
remarks:-

Pin No.: 29, 30
Signal: DC5V-1
Contents: Main system 5V power supply Direction: Frame → Board Active: -
remarks:-

Pin No.: 31, 32
Signal: GND
Contents: GND
direction:-
Active:-
remarks:-

Pin No.: 33, 34
Signal: FG
Contents: Frame GND
direction:-
Active:-
remarks:-

Pin No.: 35, 36
Signal: GND
Contents: GND
direction:-
Active:-
remarks:-

(*1) The definition of active is the main control board input section that is pulled up with a resistor. Signals are output from the frame control board through a transistor array or the like.
(*2) Conforms to the command of the software interface specification.
(*3) The definition of active is the frame control board input section that is pulled up with a resistor. Signals are output from the main control board through an open collector (drain).
(*4) Reset of the frame control CPU is canceled within 300 to 500 ms after the cancellation (rising edge) of the power failure detection signal.

[(B) Circuit configuration]
FIG. 393 is a diagram showing the circuit configuration of the main control board-frame control board interface.
The circuit configuration of the interface between the main control board and the frame control board is as follows.
The CPU 6201 (frame control board CPU) of the frame control board 6200 transmits CRX1 to the main control board 6400 via IC2 (reversing buffer), IC3, and main drawer connector/harness/board 6300 .

The transistor 6401 of the main control board 6400 transmits CTX1 to the CPU 6201 via the main drawer connector/harness/board 6300, R1, TC4/R2/C1 (CR filter forward rotation buffer), and IC1 (UART expansion IC). do.

Transistor 6402 on main control board 6400 sends a stop fire signal to main drawer connector harness board 6300, R1, IC2/R3/C2 (CR filter inverting buffer).

A RAM clear signal from the RAM clear switch 6207 of the frame control board 6200 is transmitted to the frame control board CPU via R1, IC2/R3/C2 (CR filter inversion buffer), and further to IC3, main drawer connector/harness. • It is transmitted to the main control board 6400 via the board 6300 .

A frame top open switch signal from the frame top open switch 6210 is transmitted to the frame control board CPU via the relay board 6212, R1, and IC2/R3/C2 (CR filter inversion buffer), and further to IC3 and the main drawer connector. • It is transmitted to the main control board 6400 via the harness/board 6300 .

A frame bottom open switch signal from the frame bottom open switch 6211 is transmitted to the frame control board CPU via the relay board 6212, R1, and IC2/R3/C2 (CR filter inversion buffer), and further to IC3 and the main drawer connector. • It is transmitted to the main control board 6400 via the harness/board 6300 .

A power-off detection signal from the power-off detection unit 6203 of the frame control board 6200 is transmitted to the main control board 6400 via IC2 (reversing buffer), IC3, and the main drawer connector/harness/board 6300 .

DC 36V-1 from the power supply unit 6100 is transmitted to the main control board 6400 via the main drawer connector/harness/board 6300 .
DC 12V-1 from the power supply unit 6100 is transmitted to the main control board 6400 via the main drawer connector/harness/board 6300 .
DC 5V-1 from the power supply unit 6100 is transmitted to the main control board 6400 via the main drawer connector/harness/board 6300 . In addition, the DC 5V-1 from the power supply unit 6100 is transmitted to the frame control board CPU via D1, C3 (backup power supply generation), and D1 of the frame control board 6200, and is further transmitted to the main drawer connector/harness/board 6300. is sent to the main control board 6400 via.
The GND of the power supply unit 6100 is connected to the main control board 6400 via the main drawer connector/harness/board 6300 .
The FG of the power supply unit 6100 is connected to the game board FG connection portion 6500 via the main drawer connector/harness/board 6300 and the FG harness of the main control board 6400 .

FIG. 394 is a diagram showing constants and model names of parts used in the circuit configuration of the main control board-frame control board interface.
Part number: IC1
Constant or part name: Predetermined part 1

Part number: IC2
Constant or part name: prescribed part 2

Part number: IC3
Constant or part name: prescribed part 3

Part number: IC4
Constant or Part Name: Predetermined Part 4 (The same part as Predetermined Part 2 may be used.)

Part number: R1
Constant or part name: 4.7kΩ

Part number: R2
Constant or part name: 100Ω

Part number: R3
Constant or part name: 1kΩ

Part number: C1
Constant or part name: 100pF

Part number: C2
Constant or part name: 0.1 μF

Part number: C3
Constant or part name: 0.47F

Part number: D1
Constant or part name: Predetermined part 5

(*1) The frame control board side is pulled up to 5V with a resistor R1. Also, a CR filter is configured with a resistor R2 and a capacitor C1, and a non-inverting buffer or the like (IC4) is inserted.

(*2) The frame control board side is pulled up to 5V with a resistor R1. Also, a CR filter is configured with a resistor R3 and a capacitor C2, and an inverting buffer (IC2) is inserted.

(*3) Electric double layer capacitor C3 is used for backup power generation. The frame control CPU and the main control CPU share a backup power source, but the backup power source is separated by inserting a diode D1 into the frame control CPU side.

(*4) Since output is made from the frame control board through the transistor array IC3, the resistance value on the main control board side is preferably 4.7 k to 10 kΩ in the case of 5V. When using another power supply, it is preferable that the resistance value is such that the current value is 0.5 to 1 mA.

(*5) An open collector (drain) output transistor or FET (including network products) is preferable.

(*6) The FG connection of the game board may be configured such that the main drawer connector board is directly connected to the metal part of the game board.

[Chapter 7]
[(2) Production Control Board - Interface for Other Production Devices]
A 40-pin drawer connector connects between the game board of the management game machine and the effect control board of the sub-system of the game machine frame and other devices for effect.
The pin layout specifications and circuit configuration of the connector are as follows.

[(A) Connector pin layout specifications]
FIG. 395 is a diagram showing connector pin layout specifications of a 40-pin drawer connector.
Pin No: 1, 2
Signal: GND
Contents: GND
direction:-
Active:-
remarks:-

Pin No: 3, 4, 5, 6
Signal: DC36V-2
Contents: Sub system 36V power supply (for game board)
Direction: Frame → Panel (Frame control board → Main control board)
Active:-
remarks:-

Pin No: 7, 8, 9, 10
Signal: GND
Contents: GND
direction:-
Active:-
remarks:-

Pin No: 11, 12, 13, 14
Signal: DC12V-2
Contents: Sub system 12V power supply (for game board)
Direction: Frame → Board Active: -
remarks:-

Pin No: 15, 16, 17, 18
Signal: GND
Contents: GND
direction:-
Active:-
remarks:-

Pin number: 19
Signal: CS1
Contents: Chip select signal Direction: Board → Frame (Main control board → Frame control board)
Active: H.
Remarks: *1

Pin number: 20
Signal: CLK1
Contents: Clock signal Direction: Board → Frame Active: Rise Remarks: *1

Pin number: 21
Signal: SOD1
Contents: Serial output data signal Direction: Panel→Frame Active: H
Remarks: *1

Pin number: 22
Signal: SID1
Contents: Serial input data signal Direction: Frame → Board Active: H
Remarks: *3

Pin number: 23
Signal: GND
Contents: GND
direction:-
Active:-
remarks:-

Pin number: 24
Signal: CS2
Description: Chip select signal Direction: Board → Frame Active: L
Remarks: *2

Pin number: 25
Signal: CLK2
Contents: Clock signal Direction: Board → Frame Active: Rise Remarks: *2

Pin number: 26
Signal: SOD2
Contents: Serial output data signal Direction: Panel→Frame Active: H
Remarks: *2

Pin number: 27
Signal: SID2
Contents: Serial input data signal Direction: Frame → Board Active: H
Remarks: *3

Pin number: 28
Signal: GND
Contents: GND
direction:-
Active:-
remarks:-

Pin number: 29
Signal: PIO1
Contents: Parallel input/output data signal Direction: Frame → Panel, Panel → Frame Active: -
Remarks: *4

Pin number: 30
Signal: PIO2
Contents: Parallel input/output data signal Direction: Frame → Panel, Panel → Frame Active: -
Remarks: *4

Pin No.: 31, 32
Signal: GND
Contents: GND
direction:-
Active:-
remarks:-

Pin number: 33
Signal: SP3+
Description: Lower speaker audio signal + side Direction: Board → Frame Active: -
Remarks: *5

Pin number: 34
Signal: SP3-
Contents: Audio signal for lower speaker - side Direction: Board → Frame Active: -
Remarks: *5

Pin number: 35
Signal: SP2+
Contents: Audio signal + side for left speaker Direction: Board → Frame Active: -
Remarks: *5

Pin number: 36
Signal: SP2-
Contents: Audio signal for left speaker - side Direction: Board → Frame Active: -
Remarks: *5

Pin number: 37
Signal: SP1+
Contents: Audio signal for right speaker + side Direction: Board → Frame Active: -
Remarks: *5

Pin number: 38
Signal: SP1-
Contents: Audio signal for right speaker - side Direction: Board → Frame Active: -
Remarks: *5

Pin No.: 39, 40
Signal: GND
Contents: GND
direction:-
Active:-
remarks:-

(*1) The definition of active is the input part of the lower unit board that is pulled up with a resistor. The signal is output from the game board with CMOS 5V.
(*2) The definition of active is the input part of the lower unit board that is pulled down with a resistor. The signal is output from the game board with CMOS 5V.
(*3) The regulation of active is taken from the effect control board input part of the game board. Signals are output from the lower unit substrate with CMOS 5V.
(*4) Parallel I/O signals that are not controlled by serial I/O.
(*5) This is the arrangement when the game machine is viewed from the front.

[(B) Circuit configuration]
FIG. 396 is a diagram showing the circuit configuration of the interface between the production control board and other production devices.
The circuit configuration of the performance control board-other devices for performance interface is as follows.
Production control board 7100 (production control board CPU) passes CS1/CLK1/SOD1 stored in buffer 7901 through R1 of sub drawer connector/harness/board 7200, front frame sub relay board 7300, and production control board 7100 Then, it is transmitted to IC3/D1 (ESD protection polarity switching) of the lower unit board 7401 of the effect control board 7100.

Information from IC3/D1 (ESD protection polarity switching) of the lower unit substrate 7401 is sent via R1 of the upper unit substrate 7402 and IC3/D1 (ESD protection buffer) of the upper unit substrate 7402 to IC2 of the upper unit substrate 7402. (LED driver).
Information from IC3/D1 (ESD protection buffer) of the upper unit board 7402 is transmitted to IC3/D1 (ESD protection polarity switching) of the effect control board 7100 .
Similar control is executed for the left unit board 7403 and right unit board 7404 .

Information (CS1, CLK1, SOL1) from IC3/D1 (ESD protection polarity switching) of the lower unit board 7401 is transmitted to the production switch unit 7405 via IC2 (LED driver).

Information (negative CS1, CLK1, SOL1) from IC3/D1 (ESD protection polarity switching) of the lower unit substrate 7401 is transmitted via IC1 (I/O expander) and IC4/IC5 (oscillation circuit) to the production switch sent to unit 7405.

Information (SID1) from the cross key switch unit 7406 is sent to IC3/D1 (ESD protection polarity switching) on the lower unit substrate 7401 via IC1 (I/O expander).

Information (SOD1) from IC3/D1 (ESD protection polarity switching) of the lower unit substrate 7401 is transmitted to the buffer 7902 via the sub drawer connector/harness/substrate 7200 .

CS2/CLK2/SOD2 from the sub drawer connector/harness/board 7200 is transmitted to the upper unit board 7402 via the lower unit board 7401 .
SID2 from the upper unit board 7402 is transmitted to the sub-drawer connector/harness/board 7200 via the lower unit board 7401 .

PI01/PI02 from the sub-drawer connector/harness/board 7200 is transmitted to the upper unit board 7402 via the lower unit board 7401 .
PI01/PI02 from the sub-drawer connector/harness/board 7200 is transmitted to the buffer 7903 of the performance control board 7100. FIG.

SP1+/SP1- from the audio amplifier 7104 of the effect control board 7100 is transmitted to the right speaker 7407 via the sub drawer connector/harness/board 7200, the lower unit board 7401, and the upper unit board 7402.

SP2+/SP2- from the audio amplifier 7104 of the production control board 7100 is transmitted to the left speaker 7408 via the sub drawer connector/harness/board 7200, the lower unit board 7401, and the upper unit board 7402.

SP3+/SP3- from the audio amplifier 7104 of the production control board 7100 is transmitted to the lower speaker 7409 via the sub drawer connector/harness/board 7200.

DC38V-2 from the power supply unit 7500 is transmitted to the production control board 7100 via the sub-drawer connector/harness/board 7200.
DC12V-2 from the power supply unit 7500 is transmitted to the production control board 7100 via the sub-drawer connector/harness/board 7200.
The power supply unit 7500 and the effect control board 7100 are connected by GND.

FIG. 397 is a diagram showing the constants and type names of parts used in the circuit configuration of the effect control board-other effect device interface.
Part number: IC1
Constant or part name: prescribed part A

Part number: IC2
Constant or part name: Prescribed part B

Part number: IC3
Constant or part name: Schmidt buffer

Part number: IC4
Constant or part name: Any

Part number: IC5
Constant or part name: Any

Part number: D1
Constant or part name: ESD element

Part number: R1
Constant or part name: 4.7kΩ

(*1) CMOS5V output from the game board, and the lower unit board side is pulled down to GND with 4.7kΩ. In addition, an ESD element and a buffer for noise countermeasures are inserted.
(*2) IC3 matches the input logic of the LED driver and I/O expander in the latter stage.
(*3) Serial output from the lower unit board and expansion board. The effect control board side of the game board is preferably pulled up.

(*4) Parallel input/output signals for expansion do not have parts connected.
(*5) There is no component connection for speaker signals.
(*6) SPI signals for input/output expansion and parallel input/output signals are wired to each unit board.

(*7) 5V is generated from DC12V-2 on each unit board in consideration of expandability.
(*8) Since the left unit and the right unit have the same configuration as the upper unit, descriptions are omitted.

[(B) Terminal treatment when not in use]
The SPI signals (CS2, CLK2, SOD2, SID2) and the parallel input/output signals (PIO1, PIO2) are connected to the power supply and GND by diodes at the end of the decorative substrate of the front frame.
When not in use and when in use, the pull-down process is executed at the end portion on the game board side.

FIG. 398 is a diagram showing an overview of pull-down processing when not in use and when in use.
As shown in FIG. 7A, when the sub-drawer board 7202 is not used, the sub-drawer board 7202 is set to GND, and pull-down processing (processing to install pull-down resistors) is performed on the upper unit board 7402 and the left unit board 7403 .
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 7B, when the sub-drawer board 7202 is used and the right unit board 7404 serves as the transmitting end and the receiving end, pull-down processing is performed in the upper unit board 7402 and the left unit board 7403. In addition, the right unit substrate 7404 serving as a transmitting end and a receiving end is set to GND.

[(C) Overview of input functions of adjustment switches and production switches]
(a) Specifications The adjustment switch and effect switch correspond to the 19-pin "CS1", 20-pin "CLK1", and 22-pin "SID1" SPI signals of the connector pin layout specifications of the effect control board - other device interface for effect. there is
The I/O expander with a built-in addressable serial interface in the lower unit board converts the four adjustment switches on the top, bottom, left, and right, and the production switches into serial signals and sends them to the production control board via the sub drawer connector. there is
Details such as electrical characteristics, timing and alignment of serial data are dependent on the I/O expander.

(b) Block Diagram FIG. 399 is a diagram showing a block diagram including adjustment switches and the like.
The management game machine 500 includes a performance control board 7100 having a control circuit 7101 (performance control CPU, etc.), a front frame sub relay board 7300 of a sub drawer connector board, and a lower unit board 7401 having an I/O expander 7430. .
An upper adjustment switch 7421, a lower adjustment switch 7422, a left adjustment switch 7423, a right adjustment switch 7424, and an effect switch 7425 are connected to the lower unit board 7401. FIG.

Signals from the upper adjustment switch 7421, the lower adjustment switch 7422, the left adjustment switch 7423, the right adjustment switch 7424, and the effect switch 7425 (GPA0, GPA1, GPA2, GPA3, GPA4) are sent to the I/O expander 7430, and the lower It is transmitted to the control circuit 7101 via the unit board 7401 , the front frame sub relay board 7300 of the sub drawer connector board, and the performance control board 7100 .

[Overview of vibration function of (D) production switch unit]
(a) Specifications The effect switch unit corresponds to the SPI signals of the 19-pin "CS1", 20-pin "CLK1", and 21-pin "SOD1" connector pin layout specifications of the effect control board-other device interface for effect.
An I/O expander with a built-in addressable serial interface in the lower unit board controls the ON/OFF of the vibration motor and the strength of the vibration based on the SPI signal from the performance control board of the game board.
Details such as electrical characteristics, timing and alignment of serial data are dependent on the I/O expander.
A fixed value is set on the game machine frame side for the duty ratio of strength and weakness and the operation time per day.

(b) Block Diagram FIG. 400 is a diagram showing a block diagram including an effect switch unit and the like.
The management game machine 500 includes an effect control board 7100 having a control circuit 7101 (effect control CPU, etc.), a front frame sub relay board 7300 of the sub drawer connector board, an I/O expander 7430 and a control circuit 7431 of the vibration motor. A unit substrate 7401 is provided.
A production switch unit 7440 having a production switch board 7441 and a vibration motor 7442 is connected to the lower unit board 7401 .

Signals (GPB0 (motor ON/OFF), GPB1 (strength of vibration)) from the control circuit 7101 of the production control board 7100 are the front frame sub-relay board 7300 of the sub-drawer connector board, the I/O expander 7430, the vibration It is transmitted to the vibration motor 7442 via the motor control circuit 7431 and the production switch board 7441 .

[(E) Overview of LED control of front frame and production switch unit]
(a) Specifications In the management game machine, 161 full-color LEDs and 17 white LEDs are mounted on the front frame. The full-color LEDs can independently control RGB, and the number of systems is 171 for full-color LEDs, 6 for white LEDs, and 177 in total.

LED control is performed by addressable LED driver ICs, and eight LED driver ICs are used in the front frame.
The control signal of the LED corresponds to the signal of the 19th pin "CS1", the 20th pin "CLK1", and the 21st pin "SOD1" of the connector pin specification of the effect control board - other device interface for effect.

Regarding the adjustment of the white color mixing ratio (R = 26mA, G = 22mA, B = 12mA) of the full-color LED, the approximate color mixing ratio is set to R:G:B = 2:2:1 with an external current limiting resistor. are doing. Output duty control is possible because the LED driver used is a constant current drive system.

FIG. 401 is a diagram showing a list of LEDs and control specifications.
A list of LED and control specifications follows.
There are 178 mounted LEDs in total.
Of these, 161 are full-color LEDs and 17 are white LEDs.

The number of LED systems is 171 systems of full-color LEDs (57 systems×3: RGB) and 6 systems of white LEDs (6 systems×1: W).

The number of LED drivers used is eight in total.
As a communication method, SPI communication (with address setting) is used as a whole.

FIG. 402 shows a block diagram of the front frame LED control.
(b) Block diagram The block diagram of the LED control in the previous frame is as follows.
The front frame has a lower unit board 7401, a left unit board 7403, a right unit board 7404, an upper unit board 7402 and an effect switch board 7441, and LEDs are mounted on each board.
The numbers (Example 1-(1)) shown in the figure correspond to (c) LED arrangement and system diagram, which will be described later.

CS1, CLK1, and SOD1 from the effect control board 7100 are transmitted to the LED driver 1 of the lower unit board 7401. FIG. The LED driver 1 of the lower unit board 7401 controls the 8 LEDs (1-(1) to (3)) of the production switch board 7441 and the 13 LEDs of the lower unit board 7401 (1-(4) to (8)). .

CS1, CLK1, and SOD1 from the effect control board 7100 are transmitted to the LED driver 2 of the lower unit board 7401. FIG. The LED driver 2 of the lower unit board 7401 controls 22 LEDs (2-(1) to (8)) of the lower unit board 7401 .

CS1, CLK1 and SOD1 from the effect control board 7100 are transmitted to the LED driver 3 of the left unit board 7403. The LED driver 3 on the left unit board 7403 controls 22 LEDs (3-(1) to (8)) on the left unit board 7403 .

CS1, CLK1, and SOD1 from the effect control board 7100 are transmitted to the LED driver 4 of the left unit board 7403. The LED driver 4 on the left unit board 7403 controls 18 LEDs (4-(1) to (6)) on the left unit board 7403 .

CS1, CLK1, and SOD1 from the effect control board 7100 are transmitted to the LED driver 5 of the right unit board 7404. FIG. The LED driver 5 on the right unit board 7404 controls 22 LEDs (5-(1) to (8)) on the right unit board 7404 .

CS1, CLK1, and SOD1 from the effect control board 7100 are transmitted to the LED driver 6 of the right unit board 7404. FIG. The LED driver 6 of the right unit board 7404 drives 18 LEDs (6-(1) to (6)) of the right unit board 7404 and 17 LEDs (6-(7) to (12)) of the right unit board 7404. Control.

CS1, CLK1 and SOD1 from the effect control board 7100 are transmitted to the LED driver 7 of the lower unit board 7401. FIG. The LED driver 7 on the lower unit board 7401 controls 20 LEDs (7-(1) to (7)) on the lower unit board 7401 .

CS1, CLK1, and SOD1 from the effect control board 7100 are transmitted to the LED driver 8 of the lower unit board 7401. FIG. The LED driver 8 of the lower unit substrate 7401 controls 18 LEDs (8-(1) to (6)) of the lower unit substrate 7401. FIG.

(*1) LED0 to LED23 are output signal names of the LED driver.
(*2) Only the LED driver 6 has a mixture of constant current control (full color LED) and constant voltage control (white LED).

[(c) LED arrangement and system diagram]
FIG. 403 is a diagram showing an LED arrangement and system diagram.
The LED arrangement and system diagram of the front frame are as follows.
The numbers (example 1-(1)) indicated for each LED are assigned to the LED driver outputs of (d) described later.

On the central member 7600 of the front frame, LED1-(1), LED1-(2), and LED1-(3) are arranged in order from the left side.

On the lower member 7601 of the front frame, LED1-(4) to LED1-(8) are arranged on the left side, and LED2-(1) to LED2-(8) are arranged on the center and right sides.

On the left member 7602 of the front frame, LED3-(1) to LED3-(7) are arranged on the lower side, and LED4-(1) to LED4-(6) are arranged on the upper side.

On the right member 7603 of the front frame, LED5-(1) to LED5-(8) are arranged on the lower side, and LED6-(1) to LED6-(12) are arranged on the upper side. Some of the LEDs 6 are arranged on the lower side.

On the upper member 7604 of the front frame, LED8-(1) to LED1-(6) are arranged on the left side, and LED7-(1) to LED7-(7) are arranged on the right side.

[(d) Correspondence between LED system diagram and LED driver]
FIG. 404 is a diagram showing the correspondence between the LED system diagram and the LED drivers.
The assignment of driver address values and outputs to the LED system diagram is as follows.
The lower unit board and effect switch board are provided with a driver 1 and a driver 2. - 特許庁
The LED addresses are 11H and 12H, respectively.

The left unit board has drivers 3 and 4 .
The LED addresses are 13H and 14H, respectively.

The right unit board has a driver 5 and a driver 6 .
The LED addresses are 15H and 16H, respectively.

The upper unit board has a driver 7 and a driver 8 .
The LED addresses are 17H and 18H, respectively.

[LED driver output]
When LED0 is sent to driver 1, 1-(1)B lights up.
When LED0 is sent to driver 2, 2-(1)B lights up.
When LED0 is sent to driver 3, 3-(1)B lights up.
When LED0 is sent to driver 4, 4-(1)B lights up.
When LED0 is sent to driver 5, 5-(1)B lights up.
When LED0 is sent to driver 6, 6-(1)B lights up.
When LED0 is sent to the driver 7, 7-(1)B lights up.
When LED0 is sent to driver 8, 8-(1)B lights up.

When LED1 is sent to driver 1, 1-(1)G lights up.
When LED1 is sent to driver 2, 2-(1)G lights up.
When LED1 is sent to driver 3, 3-(1)G lights up.
When LED1 is sent to driver 4, 4-(1)G lights up.
When the LED1 is sent to the driver 5, 5-(1)G lights up.
When the LED1 is sent to the driver 6, 6-(1)G lights up.
When the LED1 is sent to the driver 7, 7-(1)G lights up.
When LED1 is sent to driver 8, 8-(1)G lights up.

When LED2 is sent to driver 1, 1-(1)R lights up.
When LED2 is sent to driver 2, 2-(1)R lights up.
When LED2 is sent to driver 3, 3-(1)R lights up.
When LED2 is sent to driver 4, 4-(1)R lights up.
When LED2 is sent to driver 5, 5-(1)R lights up.
When LED2 is sent to driver 6, 6-(1)R lights up.
When LED2 is sent to driver 7, 7-(1)R lights up.
When LED2 is sent to driver 8, 8-(1)R lights up.

When LED3 is sent to driver 1, 1-(2)B lights up.
When LED3 is sent to driver 2, 2-(2)B lights up.
When LED3 is sent to driver 3, 3-(2)B lights up.
When the LED3 is sent to the driver 4, 4-(2)B lights up.
When the LED3 is sent to the driver 5, 5-(2)B lights up.
When the LED3 is sent to the driver 6, 6-(2)B lights up.
When the LED3 is sent to the driver 7, 7-(2)B lights up.
When the LED3 is sent to the driver 8, 8-(2)B lights up.

When LED4 is sent to driver 1, 1-(2)G lights up.
When LED4 is sent to driver 2, 2-(2)G lights up.
When LED4 is sent to driver 3, 3-(2)G lights up.
When the LED4 is sent to the driver 4, 4-(2)G lights up.
When LED4 is sent to driver 5, 5-(2)G lights up.
When the LED4 is sent to the driver 6, 6-(2)G lights up.
When the LED4 is sent to the driver 7, 7-(2)G lights up.
When LED4 is sent to driver 8, 8-(2)G lights up.

When LED5 is sent to driver 1, 1-(2)R lights up.
When LED5 is sent to driver 2, 2-(2)R lights up.
When LED5 is sent to driver 3, 3-(2)R lights up.
When LED5 is sent to driver 4, 4-(2)R lights up.
When the LED 5 is sent to the driver 5, 5-(2)R lights up.
When LED5 is sent to driver 6, 6-(2)R lights up.
When LED5 is sent to driver 7, 7-(2)R lights up.
When LED5 is sent to driver 8, 8-(2)R lights up.

Similarly, when the output signal of the LED is sent to the driver, the LED lights up as shown in the drawing. LED0 to 23 are output signal names of the LED driver. Depending on the LEDs 0-23 and the driver, some combinations are unused.

[(F) Audio output function overview]
(a) Specifications In the management game machine, one magnetic shield type speaker is mounted on the lower part of the front frame, and one speaker is mounted on each of the left and right sides of the front frame (two in total). Audio (speaker) signals are 33-pin "SP3+", 34-pin "SP3-", 35-pin "SP2+", 36-pin "SP2-", 37-pin of the connector pin layout specifications of the production control board - other production device interface It corresponds to "SP1+" and 38-pin "SP7-", and when the gaming machine is viewed from the front, SP3 is the lower speaker, SP2 is the left speaker, and SP1 is the right speaker. Also, on the board on the side of the game machine frame, the sound signal is connected to the speaker without adding parts or circuits.
Specifications of the speaker are as follows.

FIG. 405 is a diagram showing the specifications of the lower speaker.
The impedance is 8±1.2Ω.
The allowable input has a rating of 15W and a maximum of 20W.
The resonance frequency is 110±22 Hz.
The sound pressure is 82.5±2 dB (measurement distance: 1 m).
The shape is 77φ.

FIG. 406 is a diagram showing the specifications of the left speaker and the right speaker.
The impedance is 8±1.2Ω.
The allowable input has a rating of 10W and a maximum of 15W.
The resonance frequency is 145±29 Hz.
The sound pressure is 82.5±2 dB (measurement distance: 0.5 m).
The shape is 66φ.

(b) Block Diagram FIG. 407 is a diagram showing a block diagram including an upper speaker, a left speaker, a right speaker, and the like.
The management game machine 500 includes an effect control board 7100 having an audio amplifier control circuit 7110, a sub drawer connector board 7200, a front frame sub relay board 7300, a lower unit board 7401, a right unit board 7404, an upper unit board 7402, a lower speaker 7409, A left speaker 7408 and a right speaker 7407 are provided.

A signal from the audio amplifier control circuit 7110 of the performance control board 7100 is transmitted to the lower speaker 7409 via the sub-drawer connector board 7200 and the front frame sub-relay board 7300, and furthermore, the lower unit board 7401 and the right unit board 7404. , to the left speaker 7408 and the right speaker 7407 via the upper unit board 7402 .

[Chapter 8]
This chapter describes the configuration of the entire circuit of the management game machine.
Figures 408 to 432 are diagrams showing the overall circuit diagram of the management game machine.

[Fig. 408]
The game ball rental device connection terminal plate 554 and the frame control board 550 are connected by a predetermined harness. The contents of the predetermined harness are as follows.

[Prescribed harness]
Pin No.1: DC5V-1
Pin No. 2: GND
Pin No. 3: Count 5V
Pin No. 4: GND
Pin No. 5: Frame Control TX
Pin No. 6: Frame Control RX
Pin No.7: Connection signal

Reference current values for the above harnesses are as follows.
DC5V-1: 0.1A or less Counting 5V: 0.1A or less Other signals: 0.1A or less

The frame control board 550 also has a 7-pin connector. The contents of the 7-pin connector are as follows.

[7-pin connector]
Pin No. 1: Trial test data 1
Pin No. 2: Trial test data 2
Pin No. 3: Trial test data 3
Pin No. 4: GND
Pin No. 5: GND
Pin No. 6: GND
Pin No.7: GND

The above reference current values are as follows.
Other signals: 0.1A or less

The frame control board 550 also has a 4-pin connector. The contents of the 4-pin connector (L01) are as follows.

[4 pin connector]
Pin No. 1: GND
Pin No.2: Verification synchronization confirmation Pin No.3: Verification data signal Pin No.4: GND

The above reference current values are as follows.
Other signals: 0.1A or less

[Fig. 409]
The main drawer connector board 591 (game board) and the frame control board 550 are connected by a predetermined harness capable of transmitting game board supply power and signals. The contents of the predetermined harness are as follows.

[Prescribed harness]
Pin Nos. 1 and 2: GND
Pin No.3-5: DC36V-2
Pin No.6-8: GND
Pin No. 9, 10: BU power supply Pin No. 11, 12: GND
Pin No.13-16: DC12V-1
Pin Nos. 17 and 18: GND
Pin Nos. 19 and 20: Upper frame open switch signal Pins No. 21 and 22: Power failure detection signal Pin No. 23: CTX1 (MW)
Pin No. 24: CRX1 (WM)
Pin No. 25: RAM clear signal Pin No. 26: Fire stop signal Pin Nos. 27 and 28: GND
Pin No.29, 30: DC5V-1
Pin Nos. 31 and 32: GND
Pin Nos. 33 and 34 of the main drawer connector board 591, Pin Nos. 1 and 2 of the power supply unit 6100: FG
Pin Nos. 35 and 36 of the main drawer connector board 591, pin Nos. 33 and 34 of the frame control board 550: GND

Reference current values for the above harnesses are as follows.
2 A per pole.

[Fig. 410]
The power supply unit 6100 and the power cutoff switch are connected by a predetermined harness. The contents of the predetermined harness are as follows.

[Prescribed harness]
Pin No. 1: GND
Pin No.2: Power cut off switch

FG of the power supply unit 6100 is connected to the main body of the gaming machine.
FG of the power supply unit 6100 is connected to the lifting unit.

[Fig. 411]
The power supply unit 6100 and the frame control board 550 are connected by a predetermined harness. The contents of the predetermined harness are as follows.

[Prescribed harness]
Pin Nos. 1 and 2: GND
Pin No.3, 4: DC36V-2
Pin Nos. 5 and 6: GND
Pin No.7-10: DC12V-1
Pin Nos. 11 and 12: GND
Pin No.13, 14: DC5V-1
Pin Nos. 15 and 16: GND

Reference current values for the above harnesses are as follows.
3 A per pole.

[Fig. 412]
The power supply unit 6100 and the sub-drawer connector board 7206 are connected by a predetermined harness capable of transmitting a frame sub-power supply and the like. The contents of the predetermined harness are as follows.

[Prescribed harness]
Pin Nos. 1 and 2: GND
Pin No.3-6: DC36V-2
Pin Nos. 7-10: GND
Pin No.11-14: DC12V-2
Pin Nos. 15 and 16: GND

The power supply unit 6100 and the front frame sub-relay board 7300 are connected by a predetermined harness. The contents of the predetermined harness are as follows.
Pin Nos. 17 and 18 (Pin Nos. 1 and 2 in the front frame sub relay board 7300): GND
Pin Nos. 18 to 22 (Pin Nos. 3 to 6 on the front frame sub-relay board 7300): DC12V-2
Pin Nos. 23 and 24 (Pin Nos. 7 and 8 in the front frame sub-relay board 7300): GND

[Fig. 413]
The sub drawer connector board 7206 and the game board are connected by a game board side sub connector.
The sub-drawer connector board 7206, the power supply unit 5000 and the front frame sub-relay board 7300 are connected by a predetermined harness (sub-drawer connector) or the like. The contents of the predetermined harness are as follows.

[Prescribed harness]
Pin Nos. 1 and 2: GND
Pin No.3-6: DC36V-2
Pin Nos. 7-10: GND
Pin No.11-14: DC12V-2
Pin Nos. 15 and 16: GND
Pin Nos. 17 and 18 (Pin Nos. 9 and 10 in the front frame sub-relay board 7300): GND
Pin No. 19 (Pin No. 11 in the front frame sub relay board 7300): CS1
Pin No. 20 (Pin No. 12 in the front frame sub relay board 7300): CLK1
Pin No. 21 (Pin No. 13 in the front frame sub relay board 7300): SOD1
Pin No. 22 (Pin No. 14 in the front frame sub-relay board 7300): SID1
Pin No. 23 (Pin No. 15 in the front frame sub relay board 7300): GND
Pin No. 24 (Pin No. 16 in the front frame sub relay board 7300): CS2
Pin No. 25 (Pin No. 17 in the front frame sub-relay board 7300): CLK2
Pin No. 26 (Pin No. 18 in the front frame sub relay board 7300): SOD2
Pin No. 27 (Pin No. 19 in the front frame sub relay board 7300): SID2
Pin No. 28 (Pin No. 20 in the front frame sub relay board 7300): GND
Pin No. 29 (Pin No. 21 in the front frame sub relay board 7300): PIO1
Pin No. 30 (Pin No. 22 in the front frame sub relay board 7300): PIO2
Pin Nos. 31 and 32 (Pin Nos. 23 and 24 in the front frame sub relay board 7300): GND
Pin No. 33 (Pin No. 25 in the front frame sub relay board 7300): SP3 (+)
Pin No. 34 (Pin No. 26 in the front frame sub relay board 7300): SP3 (-)
Pin No. 35 (Pin No. 27 in the front frame sub relay board 7300): SP2 (+)
Pin No. 36 (Pin No. 28 in the front frame sub relay board 7300): SP2 (-)
Pin No. 37 (Pin No. 29 in the front frame sub relay board 7300): SP1 (+)
Pin No. 38 (Pin No. 30 in the front frame sub relay board 7300): SP1 (-)
Pin Nos. 39 and 40 (Pin Nos. 31 and 32 in the front frame sub relay board 7300): GND

[Fig. 414]
The power supply unit 6100, the sub-drawer connector board 7206, the frame control board 550, and the front frame sub-relay board 7300 are connected by a predetermined harness. The contents of the predetermined harness are as follows.

[Prescribed harness]
Pin Nos. 1 and 2 (Pin Nos. 17 and 18 in the power supply unit 6100): GND
Pin Nos. 3 to 6 (Pin Nos. 19 to 22 in the power supply unit 6100): DC12V-2
Pin Nos. 7 and 8 (Pin Nos. 23 and 24 in the power supply unit 6100): GND
Pin Nos. 9 and 10 (pin Nos. 17 and 18 on the sub drawer connector board 7206): GND
Pin No. 11 (pin No. 19 on the sub drawer connector board 7206): CS1
Pin No. 12 (pin No. 20 on the sub drawer connector board 7206): CLK1
Pin No. 13 (pin No. 21 on the sub-drawer connector board 7206): SOD1
Pin No. 14 (pin No. 22 on the sub drawer connector board 7206): SID1
Pin No. 15 (pin No. 23 on the sub drawer connector board 7206): GND
Pin No. 16 (pin No. 24 on the sub-drawer connector board 7206): CS2
Pin No. 17 (pin No. 25 on the sub drawer connector board 7206): CLK2
Pin No. 18 (pin No. 26 on the sub-drawer connector board 7206): SOD2
Pin No. 19 (pin No. 27 on the sub drawer connector board 7206): SID2
Pin No. 20 (pin No. 28 on the sub drawer connector board 7206): GND
Pin No. 21 (pin No. 29 on the sub-drawer connector board 7206): PIO1
Pin No. 22 (pin No. 30 on the sub-drawer connector board 7206): PIO2
Pin Nos. 23 and 24 (pin Nos. 31 and 32 on the sub drawer connector board 7206): GND
Pin No. 25 (pin No. 33 on the sub drawer connector board 7206): SP3 (+)
Pin No. 26 (pin No. 34 on the sub-drawer connector board 7206): SP3 (-)
Pin No. 27 (pin No. 35 on the sub-drawer connector board 7206): SP2 (+)
Pin No. 28 (pin No. 36 on the sub drawer connector board 7206): SP2 (-)
Pin No. 29 (pin No. 37 on the sub drawer connector board 7206): SP1 (+)
Pin No. 30 (pin No. 38 on the sub-drawer connector board 7206): SP1 (-)
Pin Nos. 31 and 32 (pin Nos. 39 and 40 on the sub drawer connector board 7206): GND

Pin Nos. 33 and 34 (pin Nos. 1 and 2 on the frame control board 550): GND
Pin Nos. 35 and 36 (Pin Nos. 3 and 4 on the frame control board 550): DC12V-1
Pin No. 37 (Pin No. 5 on the frame control board 550): Voice annunciator command 1 for frame
Pin No. 38 (Pin No. 6 on the frame control board 550): Voice annunciator command 2 for frame
Pin No. 39 (Pin No. 7 on the frame control board 550): Voice annunciator command 3 for frame
Pin No. 40 (pin No. 8 on the frame control board 550): DC5V-1

[Fig. 415]
The frame control board 550 and the main relay board 8000 are connected by a predetermined harness. The contents of the predetermined harness are as follows.

[Prescribed harness]
Pin No.1, 2: DC12V-1S
Pin No.3, 4: GND
Pin No.5, 6: DC5V-1
Pin No.7: GND
Pin No. 8: Upper frame release switch Pin No. 9: Lower frame release switch Pin No. 10: Radio wave sensor A for frame
Pin No. 11: Winning Passage Count Sensor Pin No. 12: Non-winning Passage Count Sensor Pin No. 13: Ball Passage Clogging Monitoring Sensor Pin No. 14: Lifting Entrance Sensor Pin No. 15: Lifting Exit Sensor Pin No. 16: Lifting Motor Sensor Pin No. 17: Lifting Motor A1 phase (OUT1)
Pin No. 18: Lifting motor B 3-phase (OUT2)
Pin No. 19: Lifting motor A3 phase (OUT3)
Pin No. 20: Lifting motor B1 phase (OUT4)

Reference current values for the above harnesses are as follows.
DC12V-1S: 1.0A or less DC5V-1: 0.1A or less Lifting motor phase: 0.5A or less Other signals: 0.1A or less

[Fig. 416]
The frame control board 550 and the firing control board 8010 are connected by a predetermined harness. The contents of the predetermined harness are as follows.

[Prescribed harness]
Pin No.1: DC12V-1
Pin No.2: DC12V-1S
Pin No.3, 4: GND
Pin No.5, 6: DC36V-1
Pin Nos. 7 and 8: GND
Pin No. 9: DC5V-1
Pin Nos. 10 and 11: GND
Pin No. 12: Subtraction Mechanism Entrance Sensor Pin No. 13: Subtraction Mechanism Exit Sensor Pin No. 14: Foul Ball Sensor Pin No. 15: Subtraction Solenoid Pin No. 16: Fire Enable Signal Pin No. 17: Subtraction Reference Signal Pin No. 18: Fire Stop Switch Pin No. 19: Touch Sensor Pin No. 20 : VR1
Pin No. 21: VR2
Pin No. 22: VR3

Reference current values for the above harnesses are as follows.
DC12V-1: 0.3A or less DC12V-1S: 1.0A or less DC36V-1: 4.0A or less (30/600ms DUTY)
Subtraction solenoid: 1.0A or less Other signals: 0.1A or less

[Fig. 417]
The frame control board 550 and the front frame main relay board 8020 are connected by a predetermined harness. The contents of the predetermined harness are as follows.

[Prescribed harness]
Pin No.1: DC12V-1
Pin No.2: DC12V-1S
Pin No.3, 4: GND
Pin No.5: Fire stop switch Pin No.6: Touch sensor Pin No.7: VR1
Pin No. 8: VR2
Pin No. 9: VR3
Pin No. 10: Radio wave sensor B for frame
Pin No. 11: Count 5V
Pin No. 12: Counting switch Pin No. 13: Counting LEDR data Pin No. 14: Counting LEDG data Pin No. 15: Counting LEDB data Pins No. 16-22: Game ball number display segments 1-6
Pin No. 23-28: Game ball number display digits R1-R6
Pin No. 29-34: Game ball number display digits G1-G6

Reference current values for the above harnesses are as follows.
DC12V-1: 0.2A or less Counting 5V: 0.1A or less Other signals: 0.1A or less

[Fig. 418]
The frame control board 550 and the front frame sub-relay board 7300 are connected by a predetermined harness capable of transmitting a frame audio notification power source and a signal. The contents of the predetermined harness are as follows.

[Prescribed harness]
Pin Nos. 1 and 2 (Pin Nos. 33 and 34 in the front frame sub relay board 7300): GND
Pin Nos. 3 and 4 (Pin Nos. 35 and 36 on the front frame sub relay board 7300): DC12V-1
Pin No. 5 (Pin No. 37 in the front frame sub-relay board 7300): Voice annunciator command 1 for frame
Pin No. 6 (Pin No. 38 in the front frame sub-relay board 7300): Voice annunciator command 2 for frame
Pin No. 7 (Pin No. 39 in the front frame sub-relay board 7300): Frame audio annunciator command 3
Pin No. 8 (Pin No. 40 on the front frame sub relay board 7300): DC5V-1

Reference current values for the above harnesses are as follows.
Other signals: 0.1A or less

[Fig. 419]
The main relay board 8000 and the frame top opening switch 8001 are connected by a predetermined harness. The contents of the predetermined harness are as follows.

[Prescribed harness]
Pin No. 1: GND
Pin No. 2: Upper frame open switch

The main relay board 8000 and the frame lower opening switch 8002 are connected by a predetermined harness. The contents of the predetermined harness are as follows.

[Prescribed harness]
Pin No. 1: GND
Pin No. 2: Frame lower opening switch

The main relay board 8000 and the management game machine frame radio wave sensor 8003 are connected by a predetermined harness. The contents of the predetermined harness are as follows.

[Prescribed harness]
Pin No.1: DC12V-1S
Pin No. 2: Radio wave sensor A for frame
Pin No. 2: GND

The main relay board 8000 and the winning path count sensor 8004 (penetration type proximity sensor or the like) are connected by a predetermined harness. The contents of the predetermined harness are as follows.

[Prescribed harness]
Pin No. 1: GND
Pin No. 2: Winning Passage Count Sensor

The main relay board 8000 and the non-winning path count sensor 8005 (penetration type proximity sensor or the like) are connected by a predetermined harness. The contents of the predetermined harness are as follows.

[Prescribed harness]
Pin No. 1: GND
Pin No. 2: Non-winning passage count sensor

The main relay board 8000 and ball passage clogging monitoring sensor 8006 are connected by a predetermined harness. The contents of the predetermined harness are as follows.

[Prescribed harness]
Pin No. 1: GND
Pin No. 2: Ball passage ball clogging monitoring sensor

[Fig. 420]
The main relay board 8000 and the lifting relay board 8030 are connected by a predetermined harness. The contents of the predetermined harness are as follows.

[Prescribed harness]
Pin No.1, 2: DC12V-1S
Pin No.3: Lifting motor B1 phase Pin No.4: Lifting motor A3 phase Pin No.5: Lifting motor A1 phase Pin No.6: Lifting motor B3 phase Pin No.7: Lifting inlet sensor Pin No.8: Lifting outlet sensor Pin No.9: Lifting Upper motor sensor pin No.10: DC5V-1
Pin Nos. 11 and 12: GND

Reference current values for the above harnesses are as follows.
DC12V-1S: 1.0A or less DC5V-1: 0.1A or less Lifting motor phase: 0.5A or less Other signals: 0.1A or less

[Fig. 421]
The launch control board 8010 and the launch relay board 8040 are connected by a predetermined harness. The contents of the predetermined harness are as follows.

[Prescribed harness]
Pin No. 1: GND
Pin No.2: Subtraction mechanism entrance sensor Pin No.3: Subtraction mechanism exit sensor Pin No.4: Foul ball sensor Pin No.5: GND
Pin No.6: DC12V-1S
Pin No.7: Subtraction solenoid Pin No.8: Fire solenoid +
Pin No. 9: Launch solenoid -

Reference current values for the above harnesses are as follows.
DC12V-1S: 1.0A or less Subtraction solenoid: 1.0A or less Launch solenoid ±: 4.0A or less (30/600msDUTY)
Other signals: 0.1A or less

[Fig. 422]
The front frame main relay board 8020 and the handle relay board 8050 are connected by a predetermined harness. The contents of the predetermined harness are as follows.

[Prescribed harness]
Pin No. 1: GND
Pin No.2: Fire stop switch Pin No.3: Touch sensor Pin No.4: GND
Pin No.5: DC12V-1
Pin No. 6: VR1
Pin No. 7: VR2
Pin No. 8: VR3

The handle relay board 8050, the firing stop switch 8051, the touch sensor 8052 and the handle volume 8053 are connected by a predetermined harness. The contents of the predetermined harness are as follows.

[Prescribed harness]
Pin No. 1: GND
Pin No. 2: Fire stop switch Pin No. 3 (Pin No. 1): Touch sensor Pin No. 4 (Pin No. 2): GND
Pin No.5 (Pin No.3): DC12V-1
Pin No. 6 (Pin No. 1): VR1
Pin No.7 (Pin No.2): VR2
Pin No. 8 (Pin No. 3): VR3

The front frame main relay board 8020 and the management game machine frame radio wave sensor 8060 are connected by a predetermined harness. The contents of the predetermined harness are as follows.

[Prescribed harness]
Pin No.1: DC12V-1S
Pin No. 2: Radio wave sensor B for frame
Pin No. 3: GND

[Fig. 423]
The front frame main relay board 8020 and the game ball number display 8070 are connected by a predetermined harness. The contents of the predetermined harness are as follows.

[Prescribed harness]
Pin No. 1: GND
Pin No. 2-8: Game ball number display segment 1-7
Pin No. 9-14: Game ball number display digits R1-R6
Pin No. 15-20: Game ball number display digits G1-G6

The front frame main relay board 8020 and the count switch 530 are connected by a predetermined harness. The contents of the predetermined harness are as follows.

[Prescribed harness]
Pin No. 1: GND
Pin No. 2: Count 5V
Pin No.3: Counting switch Pin No.4: Counting LEDR data Pin No.5: Counting LEDG data Pin No.6: Counting LEDB data Pin No.7: DC12V-1

[Fig. 424]
The lifting relay board 8030 and the lifting inlet sensor 8031 are connected by a predetermined harness. The contents of the predetermined harness are as follows.

[Prescribed harness]
Pin No. 1: GND
Pin No.2: Lifting inlet sensor

The lifting relay board 8030 and the lifting outlet sensor 8032 are connected by a predetermined harness. The contents of the predetermined harness are as follows.

[Prescribed harness]
Pin No.1: DC12V-1S
Pin No.2: Lifting outlet sensor Pin No.2: GND

The lifting relay board 8030 and the lifting motor sensor 8033 are connected by a predetermined harness. The contents of the predetermined harness are as follows.

[Prescribed harness]
Pin No.1: DC5V-1
Pin No.2: Lifting motor sensor Pin No.3: GND

The lifting relay board 8030 and the lifting motor sensor 8034 are connected by a predetermined harness. The contents of the predetermined harness are as follows.

[Prescribed harness]
Pin No. 1: Lifting motor B 3-phase Pin No. 2: Lifting motor A 3-phase Pin No. 3, 4: DC12V-1S
Pin No.5: Lifting motor B1 phase Pin No.6: Lifting motor A1 phase

[Fig. 425]
The launch relay board 8040 and the subtraction mechanism entrance sensor 8041 are connected by a predetermined harness. The contents of the predetermined harness are as follows.

[Prescribed harness]
Pin No.1: DC12V-1S
Pin No.2: Subtraction mechanism inlet sensor Pin No.3: GND

The firing relay board 8040 and the subtraction mechanism exit sensor 8042 are connected by a predetermined harness. The contents of the predetermined harness are as follows.

[Prescribed harness]
Pin No.1: DC12V-1S
Pin No.2: Subtraction mechanism outlet sensor Pin No.3: GND

The launch relay board 8040 and the foul ball sensor 8043 are connected by a predetermined harness. The contents of the predetermined harness are as follows.

[Prescribed harness]
Pin No.1: DC12V-1S
Pin No.2: Foul ball sensor Pin No.3: GND

The firing relay board 8040 and the subtraction solenoid 8044 are connected by a predetermined harness. The contents of the predetermined harness are as follows.

[Prescribed harness]
Pin No.1: DC12V-1S
Pin No.2: subtraction solenoid

The firing relay board 8040 and the firing solenoid 8045 are connected by a predetermined harness. The contents of the predetermined harness are as follows.

[Prescribed harness]
Pin No. 1: Launch solenoid +
Pin No. 2: Launch solenoid -

[Fig. 426]
The cross key board 8080 and the lower unit board 7401 are connected by a predetermined harness. The contents of the predetermined harness are as follows.

[Prescribed harness]
Pin No. 1: GND
Pin No. 2: Adjustment switch 1
Pin No. 3: adjustment switch 2
Pin No. 4: adjustment switch 3
Pin No. 5: adjustment switch 4

The front frame sub relay board 7300 and the lower unit board 7401 are connected by a predetermined harness. The contents of the predetermined harness are as follows.

[Prescribed harness]
Pin Nos. 1 and 2: GND
Pin No.3, 4: DC12V-2
Pin Nos. 5 and 6: GND
Pin No. 7: CS1
Pin No.8: CLK1
Pin No. 9: SOD1
Pin No. 10: SID1
Pin No. 11: CS2
Pin No. 12: CLK2
Pin No. 13: SOD2
Pin No. 14: SID2
Pin No. 15: PIO1
Pin No. 16: PIO2
Pin Nos. 17 and 18: GND
Pin No. 19: SP2+
Pin No. 20: SP2-
Pin No. 21: SP1+
Pin No. 22: SP1-

[Fig. 427]
The front frame sub relay board 7300 and the lower speaker 7409 are connected by a predetermined harness. The contents of the predetermined harness are as follows.

[Prescribed harness]
Pin No. 1: SP3+
Pin No.2: SP3-

The front frame sub-relay board 7300 and the frame sound notification board 7301 are connected by a predetermined harness. The contents of the predetermined harness are as follows.

[Prescribed harness]
Pin Nos. 1 and 2: GND
Pin No.3, 4: DC12V-1
Pin No. 5: Audio annunciator command 1 for frame
Pin No. 6: Audio annunciator command 2 for frame
Pin No. 7: Audio annunciator command 3 for frame
Pin No.8: DC5V-1

The frame sound notification board 7301 and the frame speaker 7302 are connected by a predetermined harness. The contents of the predetermined harness are as follows.

[Prescribed harness]
Pin No. 1: Frame SP+
Pin No. 2: Frame SP-

[Fig. 428]
The lower unit board 7401 and the right unit board 7404 are connected by a predetermined harness. The contents of the predetermined harness are as follows.

[Prescribed harness]
Pin Nos. 1 and 2: GND
Pin No.3, 4: DC12V-2
Pin Nos. 5 and 6: GND
Pin No. 7: CS1
Pin No.8: CLK1
Pin No. 9: SOD1
Pin No. 10: SID1
Pin No. 11: CS2
Pin No. 12: CLK2
Pin No. 13: SOD2
Pin No. 14: SID2
Pin No. 15: PIO1
Pin No. 16: PIO2
Pin Nos. 17 and 18: GND
Pin No. 19: SP2+
Pin No. 20: SP2-
Pin No. 21: SP1+
Pin No. 22: SP1-

[Fig. 429]
The lower unit board 7401 and the left unit board 7403 are connected by a predetermined harness. The contents of the predetermined harness are as follows.

[Prescribed harness]
Pin Nos. 1 and 2: GND
Pin No.3, 4: DC12V-2
Pin Nos. 5 and 6: GND
Pin No. 7: CS1
Pin No.8: CLK1
Pin No. 9: SOD1
Pin No. 10: SID1
Pin No. 11: CS2
Pin No. 12: CLK2
Pin No. 13: SOD2
Pin No. 14: SID2
Pin No. 15: PIO1
Pin No. 16: PIO2
Pin Nos. 17 and 18: GND
Pin No. 19: SP2+
Pin No. 20: SP2-
Pin No. 21: SP1+
Pin No. 22: SP1-

[Fig. 430]
The lower unit board 7401 and the production switch board 7441 are connected by a predetermined harness. The contents of the predetermined harness are as follows.

[Prescribed harness]
Pin No.1, 2: DC12V-2
Pin No.3: LED1-B
Pin No. 4: LED1-G
Pin No.5: LED1-R
Pin No. 6: LED2-B
Pin No.7: LED2-G
Pin No. 8: LED2-R
Pin No. 9: LED3-B
Pin No. 10: LED3-G
Pin No. 11: LED3-R
Pin No. 12: PWM
Pin Nos. 13 and 14: GND
Pin No. 15: VCL
Pin No. 16: Production switch

The production switch board 7441 and the vibration motor 7442 are connected by a predetermined harness. The contents of the predetermined harness are as follows.

[Prescribed harness]
Pin No. 1: GND
Pin No.2: DC12V-2
Pin No. 3: PG
Pin No. 4: PWM
Pin No. 5: FR

[Fig. 431]
The right unit board 7404 and the upper unit board 7402 are connected by a predetermined harness. The contents of the predetermined harness are as follows.

[Prescribed harness]
Pin Nos. 1 and 2: GND
Pin No.3, 4: DC12V-2
Pin Nos. 5 and 6: GND
Pin No. 7: CS1
Pin No.8: CLK1
Pin No. 9: SOD1
Pin No. 10: SID1
Pin No. 11: CS2
Pin No. 12: CLK2
Pin No. 13: SOD2
Pin No. 14: SID2
Pin No. 15: PIO1
Pin No. 16: PIO2
Pin Nos. 17 and 18: GND
Pin No. 19: SP2+
Pin No. 20: SP2-
Pin No. 21: SP1+
Pin No. 22: SP1-

[Fig. 432]
The upper unit board 7402 and left speaker 7408 are connected by a predetermined harness. The contents of the predetermined harness are as follows.

[Prescribed harness]
Pin No.1: SP2+
Pin No.2: SP2-

The upper unit board 7402 and the right speaker 7407 are connected by a predetermined harness. The contents of the predetermined harness are as follows.

[Prescribed harness]
Pin No.1: SP1+
Pin No.2: SP1-

The lower unit includes a cross key board 8080, a lower unit board 7401, a performance switch board 7441, a vibration motor 7442, and the like.
The right unit includes a right unit board 7404 .
The left unit includes a left unit board 7403 .
The upper unit includes an upper unit board 7402 , a left speaker 7408 and a right speaker 7407 .

(Note 1) The BU power supply is a power supply charged with DC5V-1 by an electric double layer capacitor in the frame control board. CTX and CRX are serial communication signals between the frame control board and the game board.
(Note 2) Parts are optional.
(Note 3) Frame audio announcements 1 to 8 are integrated as sub-system signals. For example, a design that uses eight for power and signal.

(Note 4) The sub-12V power supply for the frame is supplied directly from the power supply unit, and the number of signals and connectors are arbitrary depending on the power supply capacity used.
(Note 5) Pins 1 to 16 of the sub drawer connector are fixed, and pins 19 to 40 can be changed depending on the front decoration used. Although the IF specification describes two systems of two-way SPI communication (four-wire system) as an example, it can be changed, including the communication method. However, it is preferable to observe the maximum rated current of 2.0 A (when using AWG24) for the contacts of the sub-drawer connector.
(Note 6) The sub-connector on the game board side can be freely selected according to the configuration of the game board side and the connectors used.

(Note 7) As an example, the signals of each unit board on the top, bottom, left, and right of the JOICO general-purpose frame are described (5V is generated by each unit board).
(Note 8) The effect switch may be passed through the lower unit board or directly connected to the front frame sub-relay board.
(Note 9) The frame control board, launch control board, and game ball lending connection terminal board are manufactured by the manufacturer.

[Chapter 9]
[Regarding design unit replacement structure]
FIG. 433 is a diagram showing the design unit exchange range of the management game machine.
In the management game machine 500, an operation unit 9000 is arranged in the lower part, and a design unit 9100 is arranged in the upper part of the operation unit 9000. - 特許庁The design unit replacement range is the range indicated by A in the figure.

FIG. 434 is a diagram showing a design unit.
The design unit 9100 includes a right unit 9101 , an upper unit 9102 , a left unit 9103 and a lower unit 9104 .
The right unit 9101 can be attached to the right side of the front frame base 9200 .
The upper unit 9102 can be attached to the upper side of the table frame base 9200 .
The left unit 9103 can be attached to the left side of the front frame base 9200 .
The lower unit 9104 can be attached to the underside of the table frame base 9200 .

For example, the reference weight of each design unit is as follows.
Right unit 9101: 5 kg
Upper unit 9102: 5 kg
Left unit 9103: 5 kg
Lower unit 9104: 5 kg
The total weight is preferably 15 kg or less.

The design unit 9100 above the operation unit 9000 has a replaceable structure.
It is preferable to set the weight of each design unit to 5 kg or less and not exceed 15 kg in total.
The division of the design unit can be arbitrarily set within a range that can be attached using the fixing portion of the table frame base 9200 .

FIG. 435 is a diagram showing a method of attaching and detaching the design unit.
The design unit is attached and detached after opening the front frame (door).
By loosening the knob screw on the back of the front frame (door) and operating the lock lever corresponding to each design unit, the design unit can be replaced.
The design unit is fixed to the table frame base with thumb screws and hooks.

[Arrangement of hooks]
As shown in (A) in the figure, the front frame base 9200 has three hooks on the left side, seven hooks on the upper side, and three hooks on the right side. , and five hooks are provided on the lower side.

[Release operation]
As shown in (B) in the figure, when the lock levers (A lock lever 9300A, B lock lever 9300B, C lock lever 9300C, and D lock lever 9300D) are operated, the corresponding lock bar is operated. 9400 (any of the four) is activated and unlocked.

[Arrangement of thumb screws]
As shown in (C) in the figure, thumb screws are arranged at four locations (9500B) on the top, one location on the left (9500A), three locations on the center (9500D), and one location on the right (9500C).

[Regarding the electrical connection of the design unit]
436 and 437 are diagrams showing the electrical connection method of the design unit.
The design unit 9100 mounted on the front frame (door) and the board (panel) are electrically connected to each design unit via the front frame sub-relay board 7300 via the drawer connector.
As a standard specification, the harness from the lower unit 9104 is connected to the front frame sub-relay board 7300 through the front frame sub-relay board through hole 7300H, and then the adjacent design units are directly harness-connected from the front side.

[Extension relay board]
FIG. 438 is a diagram showing an extension relay board.
It is possible to mount extension relay boards 9710 (extension front frame sub-relay board 9710A, extension central relay board 9710B, and extension upper relay board 9710C) on the back surface of the front frame base 9200 .
By passing the harness from each design unit through the harness openings 9720 (seven places) through the back surface of the front frame base 9200 , it is possible to connect to the extension relay board 9710 . It is also possible to directly connect to the board surface (panel) by mounting the upper left relay board for extension.

The embodiments described above include at least the following 15 technical features.
(1) Configuration of ball extraction operation (2) Configuration 2 of ball extraction operation
(3) Configuration of spare area and reserved area for telegram (4) Configuration of serial number of telegram (5) Configuration of display device such as number of game balls (6) Setting of priority order of gaming machine information type (7) Calculation of performance information (8) Dedicated cable disconnection (9) Main control state 1
(10) Main control state 2
(11) Display device for number of game balls, etc. (12) Clear switch for game balls (number of medals) (13) CM start confirmation (14) Game information (15) Fraud detection state 1
Each technical feature will be described below. It should be noted that the problems and effects described in the following technical features are only secondary, and the main problems and effects are "providing an innovative gaming machine". Moreover, the following technical features can be applied not only to pachinko machines but also to slot machines. In this case, game balls can be changed to game medals.

[(1) Configuration of Ball Pulling Operation]
The technical features of the present invention are as follows.
The control for the ball extraction operation is performed by turning on the power while pressing the "ball extraction button (ball extraction switch)" mounted on the frame control board, and the number of game balls on the display device such as the number of game balls is "0". Only in the case of moving to the ball pulling operation.
The task of this technical feature is to propose appropriate conditions when transitioning to the ball extraction operation.

[Regarding the game stop of the main control board during the ball extraction operation]
For maintenance of the main body of the managed gaming machine, it is necessary to perform an operation of taking out the game balls in the managed gaming machine (ball extraction operation). At that time, the game ball is launched onto the game board surface, but since it is still under maintenance, it can be designed so that no prize ball is awarded even if the game ball enters the prize winning opening.

At this time, when the main control board receives information from the frame control board that the main control board is in the process of removing the ball through communication between the main control board and the frame control board when the power is turned on, the main control board will , the game can be stopped.
During the ball removal operation, it is preferable to set a state in which shooting can be performed in order to remove all the game balls remaining in the management game machine.

According to this technical feature, it is possible to shift to the ball extraction operation under appropriate conditions.
As a conventional technique, there is no technique that indicates the conditions under which the ball extraction operation is possible.

[(2) Structure 2 of ball extraction operation]
The technical features of the present invention are as follows.
During the ball extraction operation, when the main control board receives information from the frame control board that "ball extraction is in progress" through communication between the main control board and the frame control board when the power is turned on, the main control board turns off the power. Until then, the game is stopped.
An object of this technical feature is to propose a configuration for controlling the main control so as not to cause any trouble during the ball extraction operation.

According to this technical feature, it is possible to control the main control to an appropriate state during the ball extraction operation.
It should be noted that, as a conventional technique, there is absolutely no technology that indicates the conditions under which the ball extraction operation is possible, the state of the main control during the ball extraction operation, and the launch control during the ball extraction operation.

[(3) Structure of spare area and reserved area of electronic message]
The technical features of the present invention are as follows.
A spare area for future expansion and a reserved area that is not used by the gaming machine are provided for the data portion of the telegram. As for the spare area, even if a value other than the initial value is entered, the receiving side does not issue an error notification.
The task of this technical feature is to propose an appropriate command configuration in a management gaming machine.

In the management game, between frame control and CM, each piece of information is notified by a telegram composed of "telegram length/command/serial number/data capital/checksum".
This "data section" is provided with a spare area for future expansion and a reserved area that is not used by the gaming machine (see Fig. 315).

As for the reserved area, even if a value other than the initial value is stored, the receiving side (CM side) can prevent error notification. If a value other than the initial value is stored, the receiving side (CM side) may issue an error notification.

According to this technical feature, it is possible to compose a message that can cope with future changes in specifications. In addition, according to this technical feature, it is possible to realize an error configuration that is not too excessive.
As conventional techniques, there are techniques that specifically indicate what the reserve area is, what specific values are set, and what actions are taken when non-default values are stored. There is absolutely no technology that indicates whether or not to perform control.

In addition to a configuration in which error processing is not performed on the CM side for frame control → CM, a configuration in which frame control does not perform error processing for commands (telegrams) of main control → frame control even if the command spare area is other than the initial value may be

[(4) Composition of the serial number of the electronic message]
The technical features of the present invention are as follows.
(i) Create a telegram to be sent when communicating with the outside (dedicated unit). A message includes an independent serial number for each message type. When the telegram is normally created, the numerical value is the serial number of the notified same type of telegram +1, and when the previously notified serial number is the maximum value of 255, 1 which is the serial number +2 is held. The serial number is initialized to 0 when the power is turned on.
(ii) In the above (i), messages exchanged within the game machine (main control→frame control) also include serial numbers. Telegrams exchanged inside the game machine (main control → frame control), if the previous serial number was 255, which is the maximum value, may be changed to serial number +2 to 1, or serial number +1 to 0. You may do so.
The task of this technical feature is to propose an appropriate command configuration in a management gaming machine.

In the management game machine, each piece of information is notified by a telegram composed of "telegram length/command/serial number/data part/checksum" between frame control and CM.
This "serial number" is a value in the range of 0 to 255 that is updated each time a message is sent. When the message is normally created, the value is the serial number of the previously notified message of the same type plus 1. The serial number is initialized to 0 when the power is turned on. The serial number is basically the previous value +1, but if the previous notified serial number was 255, which is the maximum value, 1, which is the serial number +2, is retained. The serial number is set to "0" only when the power is turned on, and can be distinguished from serial numbers at other timings (see FIGS. 309 to 312).

According to this technical feature, the serial number is configured to be "0" only when the power is turned on, and can be distinguished from the serial number at other timings.
In addition, as a conventional technology, there is no technology showing at least a configuration such that "when the previously notified serial number is 255, which is the maximum value, 1, which is the serial number +2, is retained".

[(5) Configuration of Display Device for Number of Game Balls, etc.]
The technical features of the present invention are as follows.
The number of game media (medals/game balls) is stored in a predetermined number of bytes.
An upper limit is provided for the number of game media that can be stored, and the upper limit is a number smaller than the number that can be stored in a predetermined number of bytes.
A problem of this technical feature is to set the upper limit of the number of game media (game balls, game medals) to an appropriate numerical value.

In a slot machine (which may be a medalless game machine) that uses game medals as game media, the number of game medals is stored in 2 bytes, but the upper limit is set to 16383 (instead of 65535). As a result, it is possible to reduce the damage that can occur when a goto occurs (no damage to 65535 sheets).
In addition, managed gaming machines that use gaming machines as game media also store the number of game balls in 3 bytes, but the range of 0 to 990000, which is less than 0 to 16777215, is set to a storable range. (See Figure 315).
The number of game medals and the number of game balls are data. The number of game medals and the number of game balls do not indicate the actual number of game medals and the number of game balls, but indicate the number of game medals and the number of game balls on conceptually used data.

According to this technical feature, it is possible to suppress damage when a thrush occurs.
It should be noted that there is no conventional technology that indicates the point of setting the upper limit of the storable number to a value less than 65,535 in spite of the fact that the data is stored in a 2-byte configuration.

[Regarding the term medium]
In management gaming machines and medalless gaming machines, there are cases in which the word “medium” is unfamiliar. This is because the numerical values displayed on the game ball count display device (game ball count display device or game medal count display device) are data. In such a case, the term "game value" can replace the term "game medium" in the stored data.

On top of that, in managed gaming machines, there are cases in which actual game balls are indicated and cases in which data are indicated. Game balls are collectively referred to as “game balls,” and game medals in medal-less machines are treated only as data because the actual medals are never used in the game. game machine), and may be called game medals for convenience.

Similarly, “○○ medals (acquired medals, etc.)” and “△△ number (number of payouts, etc.)” may be inappropriate words to indicate data, but even if they are actually data, In some cases, they are represented by likening to medals in conventional medal-using gaming machines.

[(6) Setting the Priority of Gaming Machine Information Types]
The technical features of the present invention are as follows.
Commands sent from the frame control to the CM board (dedicated unit) include different information sent at different cycles (for example, a command of fraud monitoring information and a command of gaming machine installation information). If the cycles overlap, the command of fraud monitoring information is prioritized.

The task of this technical feature is to propose an appropriate command configuration in a management gaming machine.
[Premise]
The frame control notifies the CM of gaming machine information.
There are three types of gaming machine information: gaming machine installation information, gaming machine performance information, hall controller/fraud monitoring information, and any one of them is notified according to the notification conditions of each information.

[Feature]
The following priority order is set for game machine information notification, and when the notification conditions overlap, notification is made according to the priority order (see FIG. 350).
[Priority: 1] Hall control / fraud monitoring information (with game information)
(notified every 300 ms after the completion of game machine startup)
[Priority: 2] Game machine installation information
(Notified after 60 seconds have passed since the completion of game machine startup. Notified at intervals of 60 seconds after that.)
[Priority: 3] Gaming machine performance information
(Notified after 180 seconds have passed since the game machine started up. After that, notified every 180 seconds.)
[Priority: 4] Hall control/fraud monitoring information (no game information)
(Notified every 300 ms when the gaming machine has started. After that, every 300 ms.)

According to this technical feature, it is possible to prevent problems caused by duplication of command (telegram) transmission timings. In addition, according to this technical feature, it is possible to avoid problems caused by timing duplication when each piece of information transmitted in different cycles is provided.
As a conventional technique, there is no technique that indicates a configuration in which priority is determined when timing overlaps on the premise that a plurality of pieces of information are transmitted in different cycles.
In addition, even if there is a conventional technology that indicates a configuration in which when there are multiple commands to be transmitted, the one with the highest priority is transmitted, the content of the command is included, and the priority of the technical features of the present invention is It is a configuration that cannot be derived from the prior art until the configuration for setting the order.

[(7) Processing for calculating performance information]
The technical features of the present invention are as follows.
The frame control board calculates (generates) performance information. The frame control board performs calculations based on the "performance information status notification" transmitted from the main control. "Performance information state notification" is included in "game machine information" transmitted from the main control, and "performance information state notification" is included in "game machine information" transmitted at least at the first time of power failure recovery. It is transmitted at the head (first in a set of a series of messages) (see FIGS. 299 and 300).
The task of this technical feature is to propose an appropriate method for calculating performance information in a managed gaming machine.

According to this technical feature, performance information can be quickly calculated by frame control immediately after power failure recovery.
It should be noted that, as a conventional technology, there is absolutely no technology that shows how the information necessary for calculation by the frame control board is transmitted from the main control and how that information is transmitted from the main control. not exist.

The "performance information state notification" may be always sent at the top of the "gaming machine information", not limited to when power is restored. In such a configuration, for example, a game ball that has won a prize immediately before shifting to the big win state is notified of the big win state at the beginning, and is treated as a game ball that has won a prize during the big win, but within a margin of error. No problem because there is. In this way, by always transmitting the "performance information state notification" at the beginning, it is not necessary to switch the transmission order depending on the state, thereby simplifying the processing and design.

[(8) Dedicated cable disconnection]
The technical features of the present invention are as follows.
(i) A connection confirmation power supply (VL) input from a dedicated unit is provided. If the connection confirmation power supply (VL) is switched from ON to OFF while the game machine is running, the game ball cannot be shot (see FIG. 348).
(ii) In the above (i), even if the connection confirmation power supply (VL) is switched from ON to OFF while the game machine is running, and the shooting of the game ball is stopped, the start-up winning is performed. Suspension (suspension displayed by the main controller, or suspension displayed by the effect control device) increases when it is held.

The subject of this technical feature is to implement appropriate control when the dedicated cable is disconnected.
[Specific configuration]
When the dedicated cable is disconnected during play, CM notifies the gaming machine of the dedicated cable disconnection, turns off the power supply for connection confirmation (VL), and turns on the power supply for connection confirmation (VL) when the dedicated cable is restored. do. When the connection confirmation power supply (VL) is OFF, the game balls cannot be fired and the counting button is disabled. conduct.

According to this technical feature, the connection confirmation power supply (VL) checks the connection status with the dedicated unit, and if the connection cannot be confirmed, the gaming machine and the dedicated unit cannot be fired. It is possible to avoid the game from being executed in a state of not being properly connected.
In addition, according to this technical feature, when the dedicated cable is restored from disconnection, it is possible to reduce the occurrence rate of information loss and contradiction during communication between the gaming machine and the dedicated unit.
It should be noted that, as a conventional technique, there is no technique for continuing the periodic transmission of telegrams when the connection confirmation power supply (VL) is turned off, or any technique for indicating the content of the presentation.

〔Concrete example〕
In the state where the power supply for connection confirmation (VL) is OFF, hold increase/decrease, pattern fluctuation start (production pattern fluctuation start), production execution, pattern stop (production pattern stop), big role game, error notification, operation of various operation means, model customization At least one of the change/power saving mode may be enabled, or at least one may be disabled.

[(9) Main control state 1]
The technical features of the present invention are as follows.
A main control state 1, which is a 1-byte area (information) capable of holding up to 8 bits of bit information in which 1 bit is treated as 1 flag, is provided.
0 of bit information can be treated as flag OFF, and 1 can be treated as flag ON.
The main control state 1 includes first specific bit information whose flag is ON during a predetermined big win, second specific bit information whose flag is ON during all the big wins, and transition to a predetermined state after the big win during the big win. holds the third specific bit information for which the flag is ON.
The main control state 1 can be handled as a numerical value of 255 or less by combining a plurality of bit information including the first to third specific bit information.
When only the first specific bit information is ON, the numerical value is set to 1, and when only the second specific bit information is ON, the numerical value is set to 2, and only the third specific bit information is displayed. When it is ON, it can be treated as a numerical value of 4. When a plurality of specific bit information are ON, it is preferable to handle them by adding numerical values.
It has at least one or more unused bits, and 0 is held in the unused bits (see FIG. 263).

An object of this technical feature is to improve the ease of managing the internal state of the gaming machine.
[Specific composition]
Information related to the internal state during the jackpot and the output state of the signal related to the internal state are held as bit information, and a maximum of 256 types of information are treated as a 1-byte main control state 1 that can be identified by combining bit information.

According to this technical feature, by collectively managing the internal state and signal output state related to the special symbols, the manager can easily grasp the internal state of the gaming machine, and by holding it as bit information, the capacity can be reduced. reduction.
Incidentally, there is no conventional technology that indicates that the contents of Bit0 and Bit1 of this technical feature are the same, and that bit8 is left unused (fixed to 0) as an area for future expansion.
By holding unused bits, it is possible to leave room for expansion due to the addition of specifications in the future.

[(10) Main control state 2]
The technical features of the present invention are as follows.
A main control state 2, which is a 1-byte area (information) capable of holding up to 8 bits of bit information in which 1 bit is treated as 1 flag, is provided.
0 of bit information can be treated as flag OFF, and 1 can be treated as flag ON.
The main control state 2 is during a big hit, during a state where the probability of winning a normal symbol lottery is high, or during a small winning rush state (while the probability of winning a normal symbol lottery is low and the probability of winning a special symbol lottery is high). 1st specific bit information that turns the flag ON during the state), 2nd specific bit information that turns the flag ON during the high probability state of winning probability of special symbol lottery, and high probability state of winning probability of normal symbol lottery Medium (during a time shortening state in which the variation time of normal symbols or special symbols is shortened), or holds the third specific bit information that turns the flag ON during the small hit rush state.
The main control state 2 can be handled as a numerical value of 255 or less by combining a plurality of bit information including the first to third specific bit information.
When only the first specific bit information is ON, the numerical value is set to 1, and when only the second specific bit information is ON, the numerical value is set to 2, and only the third specific bit information is displayed. When it is ON, it can be treated as a numerical value of 4. When a plurality of specific bit information are ON, it is preferable to handle them by adding numerical values.
It has at least 1 or more unused bits, and 0 is held in the unused bits (see FIG. 264).

An object of this technical feature is to improve the ease of managing the internal state of the gaming machine.
[Specific configuration]
Information related to the internal state in the time-saving/high-precision state is held as bit information, and a maximum of 256 types of information can be identified as 1-byte main control state 2 by combining bit information.

According to this technical feature, by collectively managing various internal states, the manager can easily grasp the internal states of the gaming machine, and by holding it as bit information, the capacity can be reduced.
In addition, as a conventional technology, Bit3 and later are unused areas like this technical feature, and there is no technology that indicates that bit2 is in a time saving or advantageous state in this technical feature. In this technical feature, it is possible to identify 3 types of short time, high accuracy, and SKR (small hit rush) by the combination of bits 0 to 3 (3 types if there is no difference in the settings of bits 0 to 3 between high accuracy and SKR) cannot be identified).

〔Concrete example〕
"In high probability" is probability variation (special symbol lottery is high probability state).
"Time saving" is with electric sapo (normal pattern lottery is high probability state) + non-probability fluctuation (special pattern lottery is low probability state).
"Advantageous state" is with electric sapo (normal pattern lottery is a high probability state).

Therefore, since the bit information is as follows, it is possible to identify time saving, high accuracy, and SKR.
Time saving high accuracy SKR
First bit information: 1 1 1
Second bit information: 0 1 1
Third bit information: 1 1 0
Binary notation: 101 111 011
When treated as a decimal number: 4 6 3

[(11) Game ball count display device]
The present technical feature is that the maximum numerical value that can be displayed on the display device (display device for the number of game balls, etc.) is set to a predetermined numerical value of 999999 or less.

The subject of this technical feature is to use the maximum number of displayable balls that can withstand long hours of play.

[Specific composition]
The maximum number that can be displayed on the display device is set to 990000 as the upper limit as a number that can withstand the continuous game for a long time.

According to this technical feature, it is possible to prevent a situation in which display on the display device becomes impossible when a player obtains a game profit greatly deviating from the average probability during a long game play. can.
It should be noted that, as a conventional technique, there is absolutely no technique that indicates the content regarding the display upper limit of the display device such as the number of game balls.

〔Concrete example〕
The maximum number that can be displayed on the display device is 990000 as the upper limit, which is a number that can withstand 10 hours of continuous game play (see FIG. 319).
When the number of game media stored in the display device exceeds 40000, an error notification is provided to notify the player of counting the stored game media, and an error is sent to machines and devices outside the game machine. A signal is output, but the game can be continued.

[(12) Game ball (number of medals) clear switch]
This technical feature has a switch (game ball clear switch) for initializing backup information (for example, information about the number of game balls) stored in the RAM of the frame control board, and by a predetermined operation (for example , by turning on the power while pressing the game ball clear switch), the backup information can be initialized (see FIG. 130).
The task of this technical feature is to clear the backup information stored in the RAM of the frame control board.

[Specific configuration]
It has a switch for clearing the backup information stored in the RAM of the frame control board.

According to this technical feature, the backup information stored in the RAM of the frame control board and the backup information stored in the RAM of the main control board can be initialized separately.
It should be noted that there is no conventional technique for initializing the backup information stored in the RAM of the frame control board.

[(13) CM start confirmation]
The technical features of the present invention are as follows.
(1) A connection confirmation power supply (VL) input from a dedicated unit is provided. If the power supply for connection confirmation (VL) is not turned on after the completion of starting the game machine, the game ball cannot be shot.
(2) In the above (1), even if the connection confirmation power supply (VL) is not turned on after the game machine has been started and the shooting of the game ball is stopped, the start-up winning is performed. It is possible to perform a variable start when

A problem of this technical feature is to check the activation state of the CM by the connection confirmation power supply (VL) and to perform appropriate processing when the CM is not activated.

[Specific composition]
If the CM has not started completely when the gaming machine is completely started, the power supply for connection confirmation (VL) is turned off, and after the completion of the CM startup, the connection confirmation power supply (VL) is turned on. In the case of OFF, game balls cannot be shot and the count button is disabled. Telegrams for periodic transmission are transmitted in the same manner as in the case of ON (see FIG. 348).

According to this technical feature, when the gaming machine is activated while the dedicated unit is not activated, the game ball cannot be shot, so the game is executed while the dedicated unit is not activated. can be avoided.
In addition, according to this technical feature, when the dedicated unit is activated from a state where the dedicated unit is not activated, the occurrence rate of information loss and contradiction during communication between the gaming machine and the dedicated unit can be reduced.

It should be noted that, as a conventional technique, there is absolutely no technique that indicates the behavior when the VL is already OFF when the game machine is started.

〔Concrete example〕
In the state where the power supply for connection confirmation (VL) is OFF, hold increase/decrease, pattern fluctuation start (production pattern fluctuation start), production execution, pattern stop (production pattern stop), big role game, error notification, operation of various operation means, model customization At least one of the change/power saving mode may be enabled, or at least one may be disabled.

[(14) Game information]
The technical features of the present invention are as follows.
(i) Provide game information including at least one of a plurality of type information, a plurality of count information corresponding to the type information, and the number of game information that is the number of the type information and the count information (FIGS. 266 to 298, FIG. 319 to 321).
The type information is information representing the occurrence of a winning opening, passage through a specific area, or the like.
The count information is information representing the number or number of times corresponding to the type information.
There is a one-to-one correspondence between the type information and the count information, and one type of information is never held more than the other type of information.
The number of pieces of game information is the number of pieces of type information and count information, and is 15 at maximum.
In the game information, if a start-up win has occurred since the previous telegram transmission, a numerical value corresponding to the start-up win is set in the upper 4 bits of the type information, and the start-up win that won the lower 4 bits of the type information is set. A numerical value corresponding to the position is set, a numerical value corresponding to the number of winning balls at the time of starting winning is set to the upper 4 bits of the count information, and 1 is set to the lower 4 bits of the count information.

When two or more start-up wins occur within a predetermined period, a plurality of type information and count information are created, and up to 15 of each can be created.
A connection confirmation power supply (VL) is provided.
If the VL is in the OFF state when the game machine is completely activated, it is determined that there is a possibility that the dedicated unit is not activated, and the state in which the game ball cannot be shot is maintained until the VL is turned ON, but the game is played. Telegrams containing information are sent periodically.
When the VL is switched from the ON state to the OFF state after the game machine has been activated, it is determined that the dedicated unit is not connected, and the game ball cannot be shot until the VL is turned ON. However, telegrams containing game information are periodically transmitted.
The period of the telegrams that are periodically transmitted is allowed to deviate by a predetermined value or less. For example, the frame control 3150 notifies the CM 3072 of hall con/fraud monitoring information within the range of 300 ms to 310 ms, notifies gaming machine installation information within the range of 60 seconds to 62 seconds, and notifies the gaming machine performance information to the CM 3072 within 180 seconds. Notification is made within the range of 186 seconds or less (see FIGS. 351 and 352).

(ii) In the above (i), even if the VL is in the OFF state at the time of start-up, a hold increase due to the start-up win can occur. Even if the VL is switched from ON to OFF after starting, it is possible to generate a hold increase due to the start winning prize.

An object of this technical feature is to improve the ease of managing the internal state of the gaming machine.
[Specific composition]
Game information such as start-up prizes and big wins occurring in a predetermined period is periodically transmitted to a dedicated unit.
According to this technical feature, it is possible for the manager to grasp the detailed game information of the gaming machine.

[(15) Fraud Detection State 1]
The technical features of the present invention are as follows.
A fraud detection state 1, which is a 1-byte area (information) capable of holding a maximum of 8 bits of bit information that treats 1 bit as 1 flag, is provided.
0 of bit information can be treated as flag OFF, and 1 can be treated as flag ON.
The fraud detection state 1 includes first specific bit information whose flag is ON during setting change, second specific bit information whose flag is ON during setting confirmation, and third specific bit information whose flag is ON when RWM is cleared. Hold.
Fraud detection state 1 can be handled as a numerical value of 255 or less by combining a plurality of bit information including the first to third bit information.
When only the first specific bit information is ON, the numerical value is set to 1, and when only the second specific bit information is ON, the numerical value is set to 2, and only the third specific bit information is displayed. When it is ON, it can be treated as a numerical value of 4. When a plurality of specific bit information are ON, it is preferable to handle them by adding numerical values.
It has at least one or more unused bits, and 0 is held in the unused bits.

An object of this technical feature is to improve the ease of managing the internal state of the gaming machine.
[Specific composition]
The signal output information related to fraud detected by the main control is held as bit information, and a maximum of 256 types of information can be identified as 1-byte fraud detection status 1 by combining bit information (see FIG. 322).

According to this technical feature, by collectively managing the signal output information related to fraud detected by the main control, the manager can easily grasp the fraud detection state of the gaming machine, and by holding it as bit information This results in a reduction in capacity.
It should be noted that, as a conventional technique, there is absolutely no technique showing a configuration for holding signal output information relating to fraudulent main control detection.

FIG. 439 is a perspective view showing a slot machine 1 which is an example of a reel-type gaming machine.
440 is a diagram showing the internal configuration of the slot machine 1. As shown in FIG.
Although the same reference numerals as those of the pachinko machine described above are used for explanation, there are cases where the same reference numerals have different functions.
The slot machine 1 is of a type in which games are played using, for example, game medals, and is a so-called "pachi-slot machine."

The slot machine 1 is provided with a box-shaped housing 2, and the slot machine 1 is installed on an island facility of a game hall (hall) via the housing 2 by nailing or the like. In FIG. 439, the lower left corner corresponds to the front of the slot machine 1, and the player usually sits facing the slot machine 1 from the front in the hall.

Here, in this specification, the left side as viewed from the player seated facing the slot machine 1 is defined as left, the right side as viewed from the player is defined as right, and the upper side as viewed from the player is defined as up. The lower side viewed from the player is referred to as the bottom, the near side viewed from the player is referred to as the front, and the back side viewed from the player is referred to as the rear.

The housing 2 has an opening on the front side, and this opening can be opened and closed by a front door 4. - 特許庁FIG. 439 shows the slot machine 1 with the front door 4 closed, and FIG. 440 shows the slot machine 1 with the front door 4 open.

The left end of the front door 4 is connected to the housing 2 via a hinge mechanism (not shown).
A locking device is provided on the inner side (rear side) of the right end of the front door 4, and a locking device is provided on the inner wall surface on the right side of the housing 2 correspondingly. As shown in FIG. 439, when the front door 4 is closed, the locking device and the locking device of the housing 2 disable the front door 4 from being opened. On the other hand, a cylinder lock 4a is provided on the right side edge of the front door 4, and when a store clerk at the amusement center twists the cylinder lock 4a clockwise using a special key, the locking device is activated and the front door 4 is closed. It will be openable. Thus, the front door 4 can be opened and closed by using a dedicated key.

A display window 14 is formed in the upper right portion of the front door 4, and three reels 6, 8, 10 are installed inside the display window 14. - 特許庁
Each of the three reels 6, 8, 10 is formed in an annular shape, and a reel belt having a plurality of patterns (not shown) arranged in a row at intervals is wound around the reel. Specifically, the three reels 6, 8, and 10 are each divided into a plurality of areas (each area is also called a "frame") at regular intervals on the outer peripheral surface, and each frame has a plurality of types of symbols. are arranged. The three reels 6, 8 and 10 are connected to stepping motors corresponding to the three reels 6, 8 and 10, respectively. etc., it is possible to stop in frame units (predetermined rotation angle units, predetermined rotation amount units).

On the reels 6, 8, 10, for example, a combination of symbols associated with a big bonus combination, a combination of symbols associated with a regular bonus combination, a combination of symbols associated with a bell combination (small combination), A combination of symbols associated with a cherry role (small role), a combination of symbols associated with a watermelon role (small role), a combination of symbols associated with a "replay role" which is one of the winning roles, etc. may be displayed. The combination of symbols is made up of symbols displayed on each reel. However, in the present embodiment, some of the various symbols that make up the combination of symbols are displayed as symbols or figures that make it relatively difficult for the player to recognize the difference between the symbols.

For the three reels 6, 8 and 10, for example, horizontal effective lines and oblique effective lines are set. The horizontal effective lines are lines set at the upper, middle and lower positions of the three reels 6, 8 and 10 when viewed by the player through the display window 14. FIG. Also, the effective line in the diagonal direction is the upper position of the left reel 6, the middle position of the middle reel 8, and the lower position of the right reel 10 for the three reels 6, 8, 10 when the player looks through the display window 14. or a line set at the lower position of the left reel 6, the middle position of the middle reel 8, or the upper position of the right reel 10. Note that the effective line can also be an irregular line in a direction combining the horizontal direction and the oblique direction. The irregular lines include, for example, lines set at the lower position of the left reel 6, the middle position of the middle reel 8, the middle position of the right reel 10, and the like. In this embodiment, effective lines are set at the upper, middle and lower positions of the display window 14 .

A medal slot 16 is provided on the right end side of the front door 4 . The medals thrown in by the player are accepted one by one through the medal slot 16 and counted as the number thrown in the game. When the maximum number of medals (for example, 3) that can be thrown in one game is exceeded, the amount is accumulated as credits.

A credit display portion 12a is provided on the right side of the medal slot 16, and the number of medals accumulated as credits is numerically displayed on the credit display portion 12a. Note that, for example, up to 50 credits can be stored.

A medal receiving tray 28 is formed at the lower end of the front door 4, and the medals inserted from the medal insertion port 16 are returned to the medal receiving tray 28 when the medal insertion is not accepted.

A start lever 18 is installed on the left end side of the front door 4 . The start lever 18 is operated (depressed) by the player to start (activate) the rotation of the reels 6, 8 and 10. As shown in FIG. When the start lever 18 is operated with the medals required for one game thrown, the reels 6, 8 and 10 start rotating all at once. Also, when the start lever 18 is operated, a lottery process, which will be described later, is executed.

Behind the medal slot 16, a guide path (not shown) extending from the medal slot 16 to the inside of the housing 2 is arranged. be guided. If it is possible to accept the insertion of medals, the inserted medals pass through the guide path and are received by the hopper of the payout control device 94 (see FIG. 440) inside the housing 2 . If the insertion of medals cannot be accepted (for example, if the number of credits has reached the upper limit), the insertion of medals cannot be accepted even if the medals are inserted. Specifically, a switching mechanism (not shown) is provided at a position upstream of the guide path, and this switching mechanism uses, for example, a solenoid to switch the guide destination of medals to either the guide path or the medal receiving tray 28. I do. When the number of credits has not reached the upper limit, the switching mechanism does not operate, and the guide destination of medals is the direction of the payout control device 94 (see FIG. 440). On the other hand, when the number of credits reaches the upper limit, the switching mechanism operates to switch the guide destination of the medals to the direction of the medal receiving tray 28, and no further insertion of medals is accepted. Further, when the start lever 18 is operated in one game, the switching mechanism operates until the reels 6, 8 and 10 are stopped, making it impossible to receive any more medals.

Three stop buttons 20 , 22 , 24 are arranged side by side on the right side of the start lever 18 on the front door 4 . These stop buttons 20, 22 and 24 correspond to the left, middle and right reels 6, 8 and 10, respectively. When the player operates (presses) the stop buttons 20, 22 and 24 one by one while the reels 6, 8 and 10 are rotating at a constant speed, the rotation of the corresponding reels 6, 8 and 10 is individually stopped. do.

When the player operates the stop buttons 20, 22, 24 to stop the rotation of all the reels 6, 8, 10, the result of the game is determined based on the combination of symbols displayed on the active line (described later). result determination processing is executed).

A payout number display section 12b is provided on the right side of the credit display section 12a, and the number of medals paid out for each win is displayed here.

Further, above the credit display section 12a and the payout number display section 12b, there is provided another display section 12c, in which various lamps indicating the game status of the slot machine 1 are arranged.

A MAX bet button 32 is installed on the top of the start lever 18, and the player operates the MAX bet button 32 to use the remaining number of credits to obtain the maximum number (for example, 3 ) can be bet. If there is a sufficient number of remaining credits (for example, 3 or more), the player operates the MAX bet button 32 once to set the maximum number of credits (for example, 3) that can be put into the game for that turn. can be deducted from the amount and used as the number of medals thrown into the game. Although not particularly illustrated, a normal bet button (1 bet button) that allows one bet may be arranged. When a normal bet button is pressed once, the number of credits is reduced by one, and the amount is used as the number of medals thrown in the game. When the bet button is repeatedly pressed until the maximum number is reached, the credit amount is reduced by the number of times each button is pressed, and the bet number is added instead.

When ending the game using the slot machine 1, the player does not need to decide the number of medals to be thrown in the next game. A settlement button 34 is provided above the start lever 18, and when there is a balance of credits, the player operates the settlement button 34 to settle the balance and receive the medals. can. When the settlement button 34 is pressed, the medals are returned to the medal tray 28. - 特許庁When the settlement button 34 is pressed for a long time, it functions as a settlement button, and when the settlement button 34 is briefly pressed only once, it functions as a normal bet button. ) may also be used.

A decorative panel 36 is installed above the medal tray 28 at the lower part of the front door 4. - 特許庁The decoration panel 36 displays the model name of the slot machine 1 and is decorated based on the game concept. Note that the decoration panel 36 may be a liquid crystal display device, and may function as the effect switching button 45 described below.

At the center of the front door 4, a performance switching button 45 is installed. The player can switch the content of the presentation or change the volume and brightness by pressing the presentation switching button 45 (operation input).

A top lamp 38 and side lamps 40 are installed on the front door 4 at the upper end and the left and right ends. The top lamp 38 and the side lamp 40 emit light by diffusing the light emitted from the built-in LEDs, and can perform effects associated with the game. The side lamp 40 can also be a movable body that moves left and right (opens and closes like a wing).

A large liquid crystal display 42 (display device) is installed in the central portion of the front door 4 . The liquid crystal display 42 can display an effect associated with the game by displaying images, characters, and the like.
The liquid crystal display 42 can display images at a low refresh rate (30 FPS) or a high refresh rate (60 FPS).

A speaker 54 is installed at the lower end on the back side of the front door 4 (see FIG. 440), and the speaker 54 outputs effects, voices, BGM, and the like, thereby executing effects associated with the game.
A payout control device 94 (see FIG. 440) for paying out medals to the medal receiving tray 28 is provided on the back side of the front door 4 .

FIG. 441 is a block diagram showing various electronic devices installed in the slot machine 1. FIG.
The slot machine 1 has a main controller 70 , and the main controller 70 mainly controls the progress of games in the slot machine 1 . The main control unit 70 is equipped with a circuit board on which a main control CPU 72, which is a central processing unit, is mounted. is configured as

In addition to the main control CPU 72, the main control device 70 is equipped with an input/output driver (interface), a random number generation counter, various ICs, etc., which are not shown in the figure. implemented above. Signal transmission paths, power supply paths, control buses, and the like are formed as wiring patterns on the circuit board.

The start lever 18 and the stop buttons 20, 22, 24 described above are equipped with a start operation sensor 80 and a stop operation sensor 82 for detecting respective operations. An operation (start operation) of the start lever 18 and an operation (stop operation) of the stop buttons 20, 22, 24 performed by the player are detected using a start operation sensor 80 and a stop operation sensor 82, respectively. A stop operation sensor 82 is provided for each of the three stop buttons 20 , 22 , 24 . The detection signals of the starting operation sensor 80 and the stopping operation sensor 82 are input to the main control CPU 72, and the main control CPU 72 accepts the player's starting operation or stopping operation based on the input detection signals.

Similarly, the MAX bet button 32 is also equipped with a bet button sensor 86, and the bet button sensor 86 is used when the player throws medals into the game using the MAX bet button 32 (insertion operation). detected by Further, an inserted medal sensor 88 is also provided in the medal guide path arranged behind the medal slot 16, and the operation (insertion operation) of the player throwing medals into the game through the medal slot 16 is Detected using sensor 88 . Detection signals from the bet button sensor 86 and the inserted medal sensor 88 are input to the main control CPU 72 . Based on the input detection signal, the main control CPU 72 performs processing such as accepting the input operation by the player and adding/subtracting the accumulated number of credits.

The credit display unit 12a, the payout number display unit 12b, the other display unit 12c, etc. are collectively controlled as the game information display device 90. FIG. The game information display device 90 is composed of LEDs, 7-segment LEDs, and their drive circuits, and the main control CPU 72 controls the game information display device 90 according to the progress of the game to operate various display units.

The reels 6 , 8 , 10 are rotated and stopped by a reel driving device 92 . The reel driving device 92 includes three stepping motors corresponding to the reels 6, 8 and 10 and an index sensor for detecting the rotational positions of the reels 6, 8 and 10, respectively. The main control CPU 72 outputs driving pulses to each stepping motor through an output driver to rotate the reels 6, 8 and 10 and stop them at a predetermined position.

A detection signal of the index sensor is output from the reel driving device 92 to the main control CPU 72 . The main control CPU 72 can detect the rotational position (for example, the number of steps from the reference position) of each reel 6, 8, 10 based on the detection signal of the index sensor.

The payout control device 94 has a mechanism (motor and drive circuit) for actually paying out medals, a payout sensor for detecting the actually paid out medals, and also has a function as a hopper for storing the thrown-in medals. . The payout control device 94 is installed inside the housing 2 (see FIG. 440). is dropped into the hopper portion of the payout control device 94 behind.

In addition, the payout control device 94 can continuously eject medals one by one by rotating the motor. The ejected medals are paid out to the medal receiving tray 28 from the back side of the front door 4. - 特許庁The main control CPU 72 outputs a drive signal to the motor of the payout control device 94 to execute payout of medals, settlement of credits, and the like.

The main control CPU 72 can also output signals (medal-in signal, medal-out signal, game status signal, etc.) to the outside of the slot machine 1 (for example, a data lamp or hall computer) through an external terminal plate (not shown).

Apart from the main controller 70, the slot machine 1 has an effect control device 124 as a control configuration. The effect control device 124 controls effects accompanying the progress of games in the slot machine 1 . The performance control device 124 is also equipped with a circuit board on which a performance control CPU 126, which is a central processing unit, is mounted. The effect control CPU 126 is also configured as an LSI package in which semiconductor memories such as the control ROM 180 and RAM 130 are integrated. The effect control CPU 126 controls the effect based on the command for effect transmitted from the main control CPU 72 .

The effect control CPU 126 is configured as an LSI incorporating a semiconductor memory such as a RAM (RWM) 130 and an eDRAM 131 (see FIG. 442) together with a CPU core (not shown). The effect control device 124 is equipped with various functions necessary for realizing the effect in the slot machine 1. - 特許庁For example, a VDP 152 for drawing a performance screen reproduced on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, a driver IC 132 for controlling devices such as various lamps 38 and 40 that produce visual effects, and a speaker 54 for outputting sound. A voice IC 134 and the like are provided for control. The internal functional configuration of the effect control device 124 will be described later in detail using another drawing.

The production control device 124 and the main control device 70 are connected to each other, for example, via a communication harness (not shown). However, communication between them is performed only in one direction from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and communication in the opposite direction is not performed. The communication harness adopts a parallel format according to the bus width of commands for various effects (hereinafter referred to as "effect commands") transmitted from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124. Alternatively, a serial format may be adopted in accordance with the hardware configuration of each driver (I/O).

A sub-connection board 136 is connected to the effect control device 124 , and driving signals from the driver IC 132 and the sound IC 134 are transmitted to various lamps 38 and 40 and the speaker 54 via the sub-connection board 136 . In addition, the effect switching button 45 is connected to the sub connection board 136, and when the player operates the effect switching button 45, the contact signal of the effect switching button 45 is input to the effect control device 124 through the sub connection board 136. be.

In addition, a driver board 138 is installed in the effect control device 124 , and a movable body motor 57 is connected to the driver board 138 . In this embodiment, when the side lamp 40 is a movable body, the movable body motor 57 drives the movable body via a link mechanism (not shown), for example. Drive signals from the driver IC 132 are transmitted to the movable body motors 57 via the driver substrate 138 .

A liquid crystal display 42 is connected to the performance control device 124 , and the display screen can be viewed through a substantially rectangular opening formed in the front door 4 . In addition, an inverter board 158 is connected to the effect control device 124, and this inverter board 158 generates AC power to be applied to the backlight of the liquid crystal display 42 (for example, a cold cathode tube).

In addition, the inside of the slot machine 1 is equipped with a power supply control unit (not shown). This power supply control unit incorporates a switching power supply circuit, and when external power (for example, AC 100V, etc.) is taken in from an island facility through a power cord, etc., necessary power (for example, DC +12V, +5V, etc.) can be generated. The power generated by the power control unit is supplied to devices that require power, such as the main control device 70 and the production control device 124 . The power supply unit is also used when changing the settings of the slot machine 1 and resetting the RAM 76 of the main control CPU 72 . The "setting" is for changing the predetermined machine allocation of the slot machine 1 into a plurality of stages, and the "setting" has stages from 1 to 6, for example. "Setting" and its change, reset, etc. can be executed by a setting change device (setting change means).

[Internal configuration of production control device]
FIG. 442 is a block diagram showing the internal functional configuration of the effect control device 124. As shown in FIG.
As described above, the performance control device 124 has a role as a performance control processor that controls the performance as the game progresses. Therefore, the effect control device 124 is equipped with a control ROM 180 and a watch dog timer IC (WDTIC) 188 which are necessary for the effect control device 124 to function as a effect control processor in addition to the effect control CPU 126 . The control ROM 180 stores basic programs related to the control of effects. The effect control CPU 126 accesses the control ROM 180 via a CPU bus (not shown) and controls the effect by executing a program stored in the control ROM 180 . Watch dog timer IC188 is a timer that monitors whether the control executed by the effect control device 124 is normally performed (whether the process is completed within the assumed time), and is connected to the reset terminal of the effect control CPU126. there is When the signal (clear pulse) for clearing the monitoring timer of the watch dog timer IC 188 is not input within a predetermined time, the watch dog timer IC 188 outputs a signal (reset pulse) for resetting the effect control CPU 126. do. As a result, the production control device 124 is forcibly reset and activated.

In addition to these, the performance control device 124 has functions related to performance, such as an SRAM 182 that is a storage area for backup data, a crystal oscillator 181 that generates a clock signal of a predetermined frequency, and a real time clock (RTC) 184 that manages time. , a lithium battery 186 for supplying backup power to the SRAM 182 and the real-time clock 184, and peripheral ICs such as an input/output driver and a counter/timer circuit (not shown). The lithium battery 186 stores this power and charges itself while driving power is supplied from the power control unit 162 to the effect control device 124 . The SRAM 182 and the real-time clock 184 are connected to a lithium battery 186, and can be driven by the lithium battery 186 when the drive power supply from the power control unit 162 to the effect control device 124 is cut off. Therefore, even if the power supply from the power control unit 162 is cut off, the SRAM 182 and the real-time clock 184 continue to operate until the lithium battery 186 runs out of charge (for example, about one and a half months). The SRAM 182 can retain the stored information for a while even under power-off conditions.

In addition, the effect control program is configured to store in the SRAM 182 information on security, monitoring, trouble, etc., which should not be easily erased. As a result, for example, when some trouble occurs in the performance control device 124, the slot machine 1 is recovered (or inspected in the installed state), and the information held in the SRAM 182 is analyzed to proceed with investigation of the cause of the trouble. becomes possible.

By the way, the control of the effect executed by the effect control CPU 126 according to the program stored in the control ROM 180 includes control of the effect using devices such as the liquid crystal display 42, the various lamps 38 and 40 and the speaker 54 as described above. is included. Broadly speaking, the flow of this effect control can be divided into two stages of "overall control (reproduction instruction)" and "individual control (reproduction control)". The effect control CPU 126 first receives the effect command transmitted from the main controller 70 and indirectly instructs each device to reproduce the effect corresponding to the content of the effect command (overall control). Next, the production control CPU 126 generates instruction data by converting the instruction content into a more specific expression suitable for each device, and each control device 134, 152, 198, 199 relays between the production control CPU 126 and each device. to (individual control). As a result, each control device 134, 152, 198, 199 controls each device based on the instruction data, and effect reproduction (screen display, sound output, lamp emission, movable body displacement) using each device in the slot machine 1 is performed. etc.) are realized.

In this way, the effect control CPU 126 has different functions depending on the stages of effect control, and these functions are realized by properly using the resources of the effect control CPU 126 . At the stage of the overall control, the effect control section 210 in the effect control CPU 126 is the subject of operation. In addition, at the stage of individual control, the display control unit 220, the sound control unit 222, the lamp control unit 224, the motor control unit 226, or the sensor control unit 228 in the effect control CPU 126 according to the device to be controlled is the main operating body. becomes. In addition, it is good also as a structure which the production|presentation control part 210 controls each control device 134,152,198,199 directly.

The performance control device 124 functions as a performance control processor in the stage of overall control, and functions as a performance reproduction processor in the stage of individual control. Therefore, the effect control device 124 further includes a circuit board (effect display control board) on which the VDP 152 is mounted, a CGROM (image/audio ROM) 190, an audio IC 134 for controlling various devices used for reproducing the effect, An LED driver 198, an SMC (serial control controller) 199 and a driver IC 132 are provided.

The CGROM 190 stores drawing materials (moving image data) that make up the effect screen and audio materials (audio data) that are output along with the progress of the effect in a state of being compressed by a predetermined compression algorithm. The CGROM 190 is connected to the VDP 152 and the audio IC 134 via a CG bus (not shown).

The VDP 152 is a processor dedicated to drawing effect images, and is integrated with the effect control CPU 126 into one chip. The VDP 152 also incorporates a VRAM 156 (video memory) mainly used for decompressing drawing materials, and a drawing material decoder 157 for decompressing (decoding) compressed drawing materials. The VDP 152 first analyzes the instruction content sent from the display control unit 220 , reads necessary drawing materials from the CGROM 190 via the CG bus, and transfers them to the VRAM 156 . Then, the read drawing material is decoded by the drawing material decoder 157, the effect image is drawn on the VRAM 156, and the effect image is developed in a frame buffer (video memory) for each frame (still image per unit time). By individually driving each pixel (full-color pixel) of the liquid crystal display 42 based on the buffered image data, the effect screen is reproduced.

A VRAM 156 (frame buffer) is a memory commonly used for displaying an image at a low update rate (30 FPS) and for displaying an image at a high update rate (60 FPS). A video memory that stores image data for display.

The sound IC 134 is a sound generator that generates sounds such as sound effects and BGM that are reproduced during execution of the production, and is connected to an amplifier, an external DRAM, and a CG bus (not shown). The audio IC 134 also incorporates an audio material decoder 135 that decompresses (decodes) compressed audio materials. The voice IC 134 first analyzes the instruction content sent from the voice control unit 222, and reads necessary voice material from the CGROM 190 via the CG bus. Then, the read voice material is decoded using the voice material decoder 135 on the external DRAM. By outputting the decoded sound to the speaker 54 via the amplifier, stereo 2ch or monaural 2ch sound reproduction (a larger number of channels may be used) is realized.

The LED driver 198 controls the lighting pattern and brightness pattern associated with the performance of various lamps 38 and 40 provided on the front side of the slot machine 1 . The LED driver 198 employs an addressing synchronous serial scheme. The LED driver 198 first controls the lighting pattern and the brightness pattern based on the contents of the instruction sent from the lamp control section 224 , and transfers drive data according to this to the driver IC 132 .

The SMC 199 controls the drive pattern of the movable body motor 57, which is the driving source of the movable body, when the movable body for presentation is arranged. The SMC 199 employs a clock synchronous serial method. The SMC 199 first generates a drive pattern based on the instruction content sent from the motor control section 226 and transfers it to the driver IC 132 . Here, the SMC 199 is used only for generating motor drive patterns, but since the SMC 199 can generate not only motor driving patterns but also lamp lighting patterns and luminance patterns, the SMC 199 is used instead of the LED driver 198 described above. However, it is also possible for the SMC 199 to generate both lamp and motor data patterns.

The driver IC 132 controls the drive voltage applied to the lamps and motors based on the drive data transferred from the LED driver 198 and SMC 199 . The driver IC 132 includes switching elements such as PWM (Pulse Width Modulation) IC and MOSFET (not shown), and controls the operation by switching (or duty switching) the drive voltage applied to the various lamps 38 and 40. By doing so, it is possible to realize performance reproduction using lamps and movable bodies.

In addition, the driver IC 132 transfers a contact signal input when the effect switching button 45 is operated to the effect control unit 210 via the sensor control unit 228 . The effect control unit 210 appropriately changes the content of the effect to be reproduced based on the content of the contact signal transferred.

The above is an example of the configuration relating to the control of the slot machine 1 . Next, control processing executed by the main control CPU 72 of the main controller 70 will be described.

[Main processing]
FIG. 443 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the main processing executed by the main control CPU72. Each procedure will be described below.

Step S10: In the medal insertion process, the main control CPU 72 confirms a detection signal from the inserted medal sensor 88 or the bet button sensor 86. FIG. Upon receiving any detection signal, the main control CPU 72 increments a bet number counter on the RAM 76, for example. When the bet number counter reaches the upper limit (for example, 3), the main control CPU 72 disables the operation of the MAX bet button 32 .

Further, the main control CPU 72 confirms the detection signal from the inserted medal sensor 88, and when it receives the detection signal while the bet number counter has reached the upper limit (for example, 3), it increments the credit number counter on the RAM 76, for example. . As a result, a numerical value corresponding to the credit number counter is displayed on the credit display section 12a.

Each time the main control CPU 72 receives a detection signal from the inserted medal sensor 88 or the bet button sensor 86, it transmits an insert processing command to the effect control CPU 126. The input processing command includes information to the effect that the input operation by the player or the operation to add credits has been accepted, and also includes information such as the value of the bet number counter and the value of the credit number counter at that time. ing.

Step S12: In the start lever process, when the value of the bet number counter reaches the required number (for example, 3), the main control CPU 72 enables the operation of the start lever 18 to be accepted.

Step S14: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the required number of medals for the current game has been inserted and the start lever 18 has been operated. These conditions can be determined based on the value of the bet number counter and the detection signal from the starting operation sensor 80 . While referring to the value of the bet number counter, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a detection signal has been input from the starting operation sensor 80, and if it determines that any condition is not satisfied (No), step The processing from S10 to step S14 is repeated.

On the other hand, when the required number of medals for the current game has been inserted and the detection signal from the starting operation sensor 80 is received (Yes), the main control CPU 72 disables the operation of the start lever 18. do. The main control CPU 72 operates the switching mechanism described above to switch the guide direction of the medals inserted into the medal slot 16 to the direction of the medal receiving tray 28 .

In addition, when receiving the detection signal from the starting operation sensor 80, the main control CPU 72 transmits a starting operation command to the effect control CPU 126. The starting operation command includes information indicating that the player's operation of the start lever 18 has been accepted. At the same time, the main control CPU 102 outputs medal-in signals corresponding to the number of coins through an external terminal plate (not shown).

Step S16: The main control CPU 72 executes lottery processing. In the lottery process, the main control CPU 72 acquires a random number (for example, one of 0 to 65535 in decimal notation) from a random number generation counter (random number generator, etc.). Then, the main control CPU 72 refers to the lottery table read from the ROM 74 and determines whether or not the obtained random number value matches any winning value. The lottery table defines a winning range (winning area) and a non-winning range (non-winning area) for all random numbers (0 to 65535). At least one winning combination or losing combination is assigned to the winning range.

In any case, the winning probability (N/65536) is determined by the number of winning values (N) in the total number of random numbers (65536). The lottery table is prepared for each of "setting 1" to "setting 6". In general, "setting 1" has the lowest winning probability and "setting 6" has the highest winning probability.

The main control CPU 72 sets a lottery result flag on the RAM 76 based on the lottery result. The lottery result flag is internal information used to determine the result of the lottery in the current game, and if it is not won, it remains as default, and if it is won, the winning flag corresponding to the winning combination is set. .

More specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the winning flag corresponding to the winning combination determined to be won from the non-winning state (OFF state) to the winning state (ON state) based on the result of the lottery. When two or more types of winning combinations are won in duplicate, winning flags corresponding to each of the two or more types of winning combinations in duplicate are set to the winning state.

When the lottery process is executed, the main control CPU 72 transmits a winning number command to the effect control CPU 126 . The winning number command includes information as to whether the result of the lottery is non-winning or, if winning, to which winning combination.

Step S17: The main control CPU 72 executes state transition determination processing. In the state transition determination process, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not to shift to the chance zone (fireworks zone) based on the result of the lottery when staying in the normal game state (normal mode) that transitions after reset. judge.

Also, when staying in the chance zone, it is determined whether or not to shift to AT (assist time) state based on the result of the lottery, or whether to end the chance zone and shift to normal game state or not. . It should be noted that the game state transition processing based on the determination result is executed in the result determination processing to be described later.

When staying in the normal game state (normal mode), the main control CPU 72 shifts to the chance zone at 0.1% of winning the replay combination, and shifts to the chance zone at 20% of winning the cherry combination, for example. judge.
When staying in the chance zone, the main control CPU 72 determines, for example, to shift to the AT state at 10% of winning replay combinations and to shift to the AT state at 45% of winning cherry combinations.
It should be noted that the main control CPU 72 determines that the chance zone is to end when the prescribed number of games is completed.

The main control CPU72, when executing the state transition determination process, transmits an internal state command to the effect control CPU126. The internal state commands include normal mode indicating that you are staying in the normal game state, chance zone indicating that you are staying in the chance zone, and ART state indicating that you are in the ART (assist replay time) state. , normal mode transition indicating transition to normal game state, chance zone transition indicating transition to chance zone, AT state transition indicating transition to AT state, ART state transition indicating transition to ART state, etc. information is included.

Step S18: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes drum rotation processing. If a predetermined rotation start condition is satisfied, the main control CPU 72 outputs a drive pulse to the reel drive device 92 . As a result, the three reels 6, 8, 10 start rotating. When the main control CPU 72 executes the drum rotation process, it transmits a drum rotation command to the effect control CPU 126 .

Further, when the main control CPU 72 confirms that the rotation speeds of the reels 6, 8, 10 have become constant, it enables the function of the stop operation sensor 82 for each of the stop buttons 20, 22, 24.

Furthermore, the main control CPU 72 reads the reel control table corresponding to the lottery result flag from the ROM 74 and stores it on the RAM 76 . Information for individually controlling the stop positions of the reels 6, 8 and 10 is recorded in advance in the reel control table. Specifically, the number of steps (the number of drive pulses output) from when the main control CPU 72 receives a detection signal from the stop operation sensor 82 to when the stepping motors of the reels 6, 8, and 10 are stopped is recorded. ing. As a result, symbol combinations that should not be displayed on the effective line are pushed out, and symbol combinations that are allowed to be displayed on the effective line are drawn in (so-called "slipping" occurs).

Step S20: When the reels 6, 8, 10 are rotated, the main control CPU 72 next executes reel stop processing. This process corresponds to so-called "reel control". When the main control CPU 72 receives a detection signal from the stop operation sensor 106 for any one of the stop buttons 20, 22, 24, it controls the operation of the reel driving device 92 based on the reel control table. In addition, the main control CPU 72 sets a first stop flag, a second stop flag, and a third stop flag on the RAM 76 in the order in which the detection signals are received from the stop operation sensor 82, and also sets the stopped reels 6, 8, 10, set the stopped flag for each.

When the main control CPU 72 executes the spinning drum stop processing, it transmits an operation spinning drum command, a pressed position command, a stop position command, and a command after stopping the spinning drum to the effect control CPU 126 . Among these, the operation reel command includes information indicating which of the left reel 6, the middle reel 8, and the right reel 10 has been stopped. Further, the pressed position command includes information indicating which combination of symbols is positioned in the display window 14 for each of the reels 6, 8, 10 when the stop buttons 20, 22, 24 are pressed. The stop position command includes information representing the stop position of each reel 6, 8, 10, that is, the combination of symbols displayed at the upper, middle, and lower positions in the display window 14 (so-called "lots"). is included. The command after stopping the reel is a command indicating that all the reels 6, 8 and 10 have stopped.

In the spinning drum stop process, the main control CPU 72 individually controls the stop positions of the reels 6, 8, and 10 based on the reel control table, and as a result, the combination of symbols associated with the winning combination is displayed on the effective line as much as possible. to stop. For example, if the winning combination is "Watermelon", even if the stop buttons 20, 22, 24 are operated at a timing when the combination of symbols associated with "Watermelon" is not positioned on the activated line, the winning combination is valid. The main control CPU 72 causes the reels 6, 8 and 10 to stop at a position after rotating the reels 6, 8 and 10 by a predetermined number of extra frames in order to display the combination of symbols associated with the "watermelon combination" on the line. In addition, since the range of extra rotation (sliding) is predetermined by the reel control table (for example, a maximum of 4 frames), depending on the timing when the stop buttons 20, 22, 24 are operated, "Watermelon In some cases, the combination of the symbols associated with the winning combination does not stop.

Step S22: The main control CPU 72 determines whether all three reels 6, 8 and 10 have stopped. If any of the reels 6, 8, 10 are still rotating (No), the main control CPU 102 executes the reel stop processing in step S20. When determining that all three reels 6, 8 and 10 have stopped (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S24.

Step S24: When all three reels 6, 8 and 10 have stopped, the main control CPU 72 performs result determination processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 judges the result of the game based on the combination of symbols stopped on the active line within the display window 14 . For example, when a combination of symbols associated with a "watermelon combination" is displayed on the activated line, the main control CPU 72 determines that a minor combination of "watermelon combination" has been won. In addition to this, when a combination of symbols associated with the "bell combination" is displayed, or a combination of symbols associated with the "cherry combination" is displayed, the main control CPU 72 It is determined that the player has won the small roles of "role of cherry" and "role of cherry".

For example, when a combination of symbols associated with "Cherry", "Bell", "Watermelon", etc. is displayed on the active line, "Cherry", "Bell", or "Watermelon" are displayed. It is judged that he has won a small role. The combinations of symbols associated with minor wins include combinations of symbols of the same kind displayed on the active line (for example, "watermelon symbol" - "watermelon symbol" - "watermelon symbol"), as well as, for example, on the active line. In some cases, different types of patterns are combined and displayed (for example, "cherry pattern" - "ANY pattern" - "ANY pattern").

In addition, if a combination of symbols associated with the "replay combination" is displayed on the activated line, the result of the game is determined to be a replay. If the result of the game is a replay, the next game can be executed without throwing new medals.
In this way, the main control CPU 72 (re-game executing means) enables the next game without inserting game medals when a combination of symbols corresponding to a re-game is displayed on a predetermined effective line. .

On the other hand, when a combination of symbols associated with a "big bonus combination" (for example, "7 symbols"-"7 symbols"-"7 symbols" etc.) is displayed on the activated line, a so-called "big bonus game" is played. It shifts to a special game state (process during special game state) such as. Also, when a combination of symbols associated with a "regular bonus combination" (for example, "BAR symbol" - "BAR symbol" - "BAR symbol" etc.) is displayed on the active line, a so-called "regular bonus game" is played. It shifts to a special game state (process during special game state) such as.

When transitioning to the special game state, the game progresses under favorable conditions for the player, and for example, an opportunity to win a small role such as "Bell role" or "Watermelon role" is obtained more frequently than in the normal game state. , it is possible to increase the number of coins to be paid out for a winning prize, or to win a small winning combination that is not awarded in a normal game state.

On the other hand, if the combination of symbols displayed on the activated line does not correspond to a predetermined winning combination or replay, the main control CPU 72 determines the result of the game as "other". "Others" is determined when the lottery is not won, or even when the lottery is won, the combination of symbols associated with the winning combination cannot be displayed in the reel stopping process of step S20. In case you couldn't. In the case of non-winning, it corresponds to "lost", but if the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination cannot be displayed in the reel stop processing, the player operates the stop buttons 20, 22, 24. Since the timing to play did not meet the conditions of the reel control table, it corresponds to "missing" or intentional "missing" of the winning combination.

Incidentally, when it is determined in the result determination process that a small winning combination has been won, the main control CPU72 writes the value of the corresponding planned payout number (for example, 10, 15, etc.) onto the RAM76. Otherwise, the main control CPU 72 leaves the expected payout number at 0 (default).

Although not shown, when the process shifts to the special game state processing, the main control CPU 72 controls the progress of the game in a special game state called, for example, "big bonus game" or "regular bonus game". In addition, the main control CPU 72 outputs a game status signal through an external terminal board (not shown). In this case, the main control CPU 72 erases the winning flag on the RAM 130 and rewrites the basic game information (required number of coins, lottery table, etc.) to that during the special game. As a result, the game progresses under conditions different from those in the normal game state before shifting to the special game state. In particular, since the lottery table is set with a higher probability of winning a small combination than in the normal game state, it is possible to win a small combination with a high probability in each game, and as a result, an opportunity to receive medals due to winning at a high frequency. is given to the player. In addition, the special game state ends when the number of payouts reaches a specified number during that period, or ends when a specified number of games have been played.

In addition, when the player is staying in the chance zone, if the conditions for shifting to the AT state are satisfied, the game state shifts to the AT state (processing during AT state). The AT state is a state in which the winning probability of a small winning combination or replay does not change, but a navigation effect is executed to assist the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination to be displayed on the effective line. The condition for shifting to the AT state can be, for example, the condition that the player wins an AT lottery that is executed when winning a small win or replay. Also, the AT state is an RT preparation state for shifting to an RT (replay time) state. The RT state is a state in which the winning probability of the replay combination is changed (set higher) than the winning probability of the replay combination in the normal game state (non-RT state) (about 1/7.3). The RT preparation state is a gaming state in which the winning probability of the replay combination is the same as that of the normal state, but the "RT state entering replay combination", which will be described later, can be won. Then, by correcting the pressing order by navigation in the AT state, the combination of symbols associated with the "RT state entry replay role", which is one of the conditions for shifting to the RT state, is likely to be displayed on the activated line. state. Note that the AT state may be a state in which the AT state is entered via the AT preparation state.

Then, when the combination of symbols associated with the "replay combination entering the RT state" is displayed on the activated line, the game shifts to the RT state (processing during the RT state) different from the normal game state and the special game state. The RT state is a state in which the "replay combination" is won with a higher probability than in the normal game state. One condition may be defined as the transition condition to the RT state, or a plurality of conditions may be defined. When a plurality of conditions are defined, it is possible to shift to the RT state based on the satisfaction of at least one of the plurality of predetermined conditions. Note that a plurality of RT states can be set as the RT state.

Then, when the RT state and the AT state are generated simultaneously, a transition is made to the ART (assist replay time) state (processing during the ART state). Note that the AT state, RT state, and ART state are terminated when a predetermined termination condition is satisfied.

Step S26: After judging the result of the game, the main control CPU 72 next performs payout processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 controls the operation of the payout control device 94 by referring to the value of the expected payout number recorded in the RAM 102 . In the case of the credit mode in which the payout is stored, if a value other than 0 is recorded in the planned payout quantity, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the credit counter. is added to the value of the credit number counter, and that amount is subtracted from the expected payout amount. When the value of the credit number counter reaches the maximum number, the main control CPU 72 outputs a drive signal to the motor of the payout control device 94 to actually execute the medal payout operation. When the main control CPU 72 receives a detection signal from the payout sensor of the payout control device 94, it subtracts that amount from the expected payout amount, and stops the motor of the payout control device 94 when the value becomes zero.

In addition, when the main control CPU 72 executes the payout process, it transmits a command after stopping the reel to the effect control CPU 126 . The after-stop command includes information indicating that all the reels 6, 8 and 10 have stopped. When medals are to be paid out, the main control CPU 72 outputs medal-out signals corresponding to the number of medals through an external terminal plate (not shown).

In addition, when it is determined to be a replay in the result determination process, the main control CPU 72 retains (or restores) the value of the bet number counter stored in the current game, or changes the bet number counter required in the next game. A value is set and the process proceeds to step S10. Also, in the case of transitioning to the special game state in the result determination process, the main control CPU72 sets a special game state flag on the RAM76, for example, shifts to a special game state process different from the main process, and during the special game state process. Furthermore, when shifting to the AT state, RT state, ART state, etc. in the result determination process, the main control CPU 72 sets the AT state flag, RT state flag, ART state flag, etc. on the RAM 76, for example, separate from the main process AT state processing, RT state processing, and ART state processing, and the processing in each state is executed.
Otherwise, the main control CPU 72 erases the winning flag, ends the payout process, and returns to step S10. However, if the winning flag corresponding to the transition to the special game state (for example, one corresponding to the big bonus combination or regular bonus combination) is set, and the result determination process corresponds to the big bonus combination or regular bonus combination. When determining that the attached symbol combination is not displayed, the main control CPU 72 ends the payout process without erasing the winning flag, and returns to step S10.

[Example of production image]
Next, several examples of effect images actually displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 in the slot machine 1 will be described.

FIG. 444 is a diagram showing an example of normal effects and special effects.

[Normal mode]
As shown in FIG. 444(A), in the normal mode (normal effect), a background image of a female character walking is displayed.
In the normal mode, a normal image display area R1 of 1 row and 3 columns is displayed in the lower portion of the screen for variably displaying performance symbols imitating the symbols displayed on the main reels of a general pachislot machine. ing. When the player looks at the display window 14, he/she can confirm the area of 3 rows and 3 columns on the three reels 6, 8 and 10. In this normal mode, the area of 1 row and 3 columns ( For example, it is possible to perform an effect as if you were looking at the area of the middle position of the display window 14), that is, as if you were looking at the area of 1 row and 3 columns of the main reel of a general pachislot machine. can.

In the normal image display area R1, a combination of performance symbols corresponding to the combination of symbols displayed on the three reels 6, 8, 10 that can be visually recognized through the display window 14 may be displayed. A combination of performance symbols corresponding to the combination of symbols displayed on the three reels 6, 8 and 10 visible through the window 14 may not be displayed.
Specifically, when a combination of symbols corresponding to the "replay combination" is displayed on the effective lines of the three reels 6, 8, 10 that can be viewed through the display window 14, the normal image display area R1 A combination of performance symbols corresponding to the "replay role" may be displayed, and a combination of performance symbols corresponding to the "bell role" may be displayed in the normal image display area R1.

In this normal mode, the player plays the game with the aim of winning the "big bonus game" or the "regular bonus game".
Also, in this normal mode, when a specific small win is established, the player may enter the "fireworks zone" described below. For example, at 20% of the time when a cherry role is won, the player enters a "fireworks zone" as a chance zone.

[Fireworks Zone]
As shown in (B) in FIG. 444, in the fireworks zone (special effect), a background image representing a scene of fireworks being launched into the night sky is displayed.
Also, in the fireworks zone, a special image display area R2 of 3 rows and 3 columns is displayed in the central portion of the screen for variably displaying the above-described performance symbols. When the player looks at the display window 14, he can see the area of 3 rows and 3 columns on the three reels 6, 8 and 10. In this firework zone, the area corresponds to the area of 3 rows and 3 columns. It is possible to perform an effect as if one were looking at an area, that is, an effect as if one were looking at an area of 3 rows and 3 columns of the main reel of a general pachislot machine.

In the special image display area R2, as in the normal mode, a combination of performance symbols corresponding to the combination of symbols displayed on the three reels 6, 8, 10 that can be viewed through the display window 14 is displayed. In some cases, the combination of performance symbols corresponding to the combination of symbols displayed on the three reels 6, 8 and 10 that can be visually recognized through the display window 14 may not be displayed.

Thus, during execution of the fireworks zone (special effect), a pseudo-reel effect (effect that reproduces the movement of the reels) using the special image display area R2 is executed, and this pseudo-reel effect is performed by displaying patterns for effect. This is an effect of variable display, and is an effect of displaying more patterns for performance than in the normal mode (normal effect).

Then, the player plays the game in the firework zone aiming to satisfy the conditions for transitioning to the "AT state" leading to the "ART state". The fireworks zone is, for example, a chance zone limited to 10 games.
In this fireworks zone, when a specific small winning combination is established, it may enter an "AT state" (not shown). For example, the "AT state" is entered at 45% of the time when a cherry combination is won. When the "AT state" is entered, the navigation effect is executed, and when the game is played according to the navigation effect, the "RT state" is entered. ” are occurring at the same time.

The content of the "ART state" may be a game property based on game number management in which the ART state ends after a predetermined number of games from the start of the ART state. The number of games in one set is predetermined, and a continuous lottery is executed at the start or end of one set, and if the continuous lottery is won, the next set is moved to. It may be a game property by managing the number of sets of continuation lotteries. Also, the content of the final game state entered from the fireworks zone is not limited to the "ART state", but may be an "AT state" or an "RT state".

Here, an image is displayed at 30 FPS during execution of the normal effect (normal mode), and an image is displayed at 60 FPS during execution of the special effect (fireworks zone).

FIG. 445 is a diagram showing an effect example of the normal effect.
In FIG. 445 (A): The effect is being executed in the state of the normal mode, which is an example of the normal effect.
The reels 6, 8, and 10 are not rotating, and the performance symbols displayed in the normal image display area R1 are not rotating (not variably displayed).

(B) in FIG. 445: Here, it is assumed that the player presses the start lever 18 and does not win any of the winning combinations. In this case, as the reels 6, 8 and 10 rotate, the performance symbols displayed in the normal image display area R1 rotate (variably display).

(C) in FIG. 445: Here, it is assumed that the player presses the stop buttons 20, 22, and 24 in order from the left. In this case, in the normal image display area R1, the design for effect is displayed in a misplaced manner (“watermelon design”-“bell design”-“replay design”).

446 and 447 are diagrams showing examples of special effects.

In FIG. 446 (A): An effect is being executed in the state of a firework zone, which is an example of a special effect.
The reels 6, 8 and 10 are not rotating, and the performance symbols displayed in the special image display area R2 are not rotating.

(B) in FIG. 446: Here, it is assumed that the player presses the start lever 18 and does not win any of the winning combinations. In this case, as the reels 6, 8 and 10 rotate, the performance symbols displayed in the special image display area R2 rotate.

(C) in FIG. 446: Here, it is assumed that the player presses the stop buttons 20, 22, and 24 in order from the left. In this case, in the special image display area R2, the design for effect is displayed in a different manner (for example, "bell design" - "cherry design" - "watermelon design" is displayed in the upper position, and , "replay pattern" - "bell pattern" - "bell pattern" is displayed, and "bar pattern" - "replay pattern" - "replay pattern" is displayed at the lower position).

(D) in FIG. 446: Here, it is assumed that the player presses the start lever 18, wins the replay combination, and the conditions for clearing the chance zone are satisfied (the conditions for shifting to the AT state are satisfied). shall be assumed). In this case, as the reels 6, 8 and 10 rotate, the performance symbols displayed in the special image display area R2 rotate.

(E) in FIG. 447: In this case, the special image display area R2 displays the information “Aim for the cherry!”.

(F) in FIG. 447: Here, as the reels 6, 8, and 10 rotate, the performance symbols displayed in the special image display area R2 continue to rotate. During the special effect (fireworks zone), the image is displayed at 60 FPS, so the display of the effect symbols is smoother than in the normal game state, making it easier to perform so-called “eye-pushing” (timing to press the stop button). is easy to remove). The performance symbols displayed in the special image display area R2 can be slid by a predetermined number of frames (for example, four frames at maximum) in the same manner as the reels 6, 8, and 10.

(G) in FIG. 447: Then, it is assumed that the player presses the stop buttons 20 , 22 , 24 aiming at the cherry symbol as the performance symbol displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 . In the display area of the special image display area R2, a cherry symbol is displayed as an effect symbol at a position corresponding to the lower position of the left reel.

(H) in FIG. 447: Then, in the display area of the special image display area R2, the information "Good job!" is displayed. After that, it shifts to the "AT state" and finally enters the "ART state".

Next, an example of a control method for specifically realizing the above effects will be described. All of the above-described normal effects, special effects, and the like are controlled through control processing executed by the effect control device 124 .

[CPU initialization processing (main) processing in the production control device]
FIG. 448 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of CPU initialization processing executed in the effect control device 124. FIG. (A) in FIG. 448 shows the entire CPU initialization process, and (B) in FIG. 448 shows the process executed in the main loop of the CPU initialization process.

The CPU initialization process is a process of clearing various information in the effect control device 124 and adjusting the initial state of the slot machine 1. When the effect control device 124 is activated (more specifically, the slot machine 1 When the power is turned on, or when the effect control device 124 is restarted due to some factor, etc.), it is executed by the effect control CPU 126. By executing the CPU initialization process, realization of a stable effect in the slot machine 1 is guaranteed.

(A) in FIG. 448 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of the CPU initialization process executed in the effect control device 124 . Hereinafter, the processing executed by the effect control CPU 126 will be described step by step.

Step S300: The effect control CPU 126 cancels the reset of the CPU. In order to guarantee normal operation in the performance control device 124, the performance control CPU 126 resets the CPU after the power is turned on to the performance control device 124, and until the output voltage rises normally to the operation guarantee level and the peripheral circuits are stabilized. The reset state continues during By doing so, it is possible to avoid the program from operating in a state where the effect control device 124 is not stable. When the reset of the CPU is released, execution of the control program in the effect control device 124 is started with this as a trigger.

Step S310: The effect control CPU 126 executes system initialization processing. In the system initialization process, hardware-related initial settings, system operation settings, etc. are performed as initial settings necessary before various interrupt processes corresponding to the substance of effect control are started. In the system initialization process, for example, each register and I / O port of the effect control CPU 126, in addition to setting related to access to each device connected to the effect control CPU 126, clearing of the RAM 130 (main memory) and command buffer etc. will be

It should be noted that the area of the RAM 130 cleared in the system initialization process is not constant, and varies depending on the situation when the effect control device 124 is activated. For example, when the power is restored after a temporary power failure during execution of a game, the normality of the checksum is checked using the checksum value stored in the SRAM 182 and calculated at the time of the power failure. If confirmed and the checksum is normal (backup is successful), the checksum target area is not cleared. Since information about the game is stored in the target area of the checksum, the effect is restarted in the same state as when the power is turned off by excluding this area from the clear target of the RAM 130 . In addition, when the production control device 124 is restarted (reset startup) by detecting a runaway of the control program or the like and activating the watchdog timer, there is a possibility that an incomplete part is generated in the data. , the RAM 130 is cleared including the target area of the checksum. As a result, the effect reproduced before the restart is temporarily cleared, and the effect is constructed from scratch based on the effect command transmitted from the main control device 70 after the restart. Furthermore, if it is confirmed that the checksum is not normal (backup has failed), or if corruption of data in the RAM 130 is detected, there is a possibility that a serious problem has occurred. A wider area will be cleared than in either case.

Step S320: The effect control CPU 126 executes task pre-execution processing. Here, "task" refers to individual processing that is executed due to the occurrence of an interrupt. In the task pre-execution processing, advance preparations are made for executing the task. For example, the production control device 124 is provided with a plurality of LED lamps (hereinafter referred to as "status LEDs") visible from the back side of the slot machine 1, and the production control device 124 uses these LED lamps. The internal state is notified by a plurality of lighting patterns, and the initial state of the status LED is set in the task pre-execution process. In addition, the setting of the frequency for the command input/output port necessary for receiving the effect command transmitted from the main control device 70, the setup of the RTC 184, the permission of interruption, etc. are performed. When the task pre-execution process ends, the status LED lights up in a manner indicating the completion of the initialization process, and various effect commands can be received, and various interrupts can occur.

It should be noted that, in the effect control device 124, different types such as timer interrupts that are periodically executed at regular intervals and event interrupts that occur due to the occurrence of a predetermined event on the effect control device 124 Various interrupts can occur. Priorities are set in advance for individual interrupts, and when an interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 126 executes the corresponding interrupt processing while controlling it according to the priority.

Step S330: The production control CPU 126 executes production control main processing. In the effect control main process, among the controls executed as the game progresses, other processes that are not executed in various tasks are executed. In addition, the content of the production|presentation control main process is further mentioned later.

As shown in (A) in FIG. 448, the effect control main process is incorporated in an infinite loop, and the effect control CPU 126, after executing the effect control main process once, leaves a predetermined execution interval. , the execution of the next effect control main process is started again. Therefore, as long as the power supply to the slot machine 1 is maintained and the effect control device 124 is not restarted, the effect control CPU 126 continues to repeatedly execute the effect control main process. In addition, during the execution of the effect control main process, various interrupts occur triggered by various factors, and the effect control CPU 126 executes processes corresponding to the individual interrupts that have occurred. In these processes, image display control to the liquid crystal display 42, audio output control to the speaker 54, driving control of various lamps 38 and 40, etc. are performed, and the effect control device 124 is connected directly or indirectly. By controlling each device, the production content is constructed and the production is embodied.

Thus, the infinite loop of (A) in FIG. 448 corresponds to the main loop in the production control device 124, and the production control main process is literally positioned as the main process executed in the production control device 124.

(B) in FIG. 448 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of the production control main process executed in the production control device 124 . Hereinafter, the processing executed by the effect control CPU 126 will be described step by step.

Step S340: The effect control CPU 126 executes voltage control monitoring processing. In the voltage control monitoring process, the effect control CPU 126 performs a monitoring process for canceling the interruption of the 5V signal supplied to the external driver in a certain period of time. If a voltage is applied to the lamp and the movable body at the same time, there is a risk that the lamp and the movable body will overheat due to the inrush current, leading to malfunction or failure. Therefore, the timing of applying the voltage (the timing of releasing the signal) is shifted to disperse the rush current, thereby protecting the lamp, the movable body, and the like from heat generation.

Step S350: The effect control CPU 126 executes watchdog clear processing. The production control device 124 is equipped with a watch dog timer IC 188 connected to the production control CPU 126 and a watch dog timer using the built-in function of the production control CPU 126. In addition, the watch dog timer is implemented by the control program. there is In other words, in the production control device 124, a total of three watchdog timers, two watchdog timers on hardware and one watchdog timer on software, are operating, and each watchdog timer has a different monitoring time. , whether the timer interrupt is normally generated (whether the timer interrupt process executed with the timer interrupt as a trigger is normally executed) or not.

After completing the above procedure, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the main loop of the CPU initialization process ((A) in FIG. 448) and executes the effect control main process again. In addition, the production control main process is executed at substantially constant intervals when the production control device 124 is in a normal state. For example, when normal, the effect control main process is called every 33.3 ms (while returning from the timer interrupt process that is performed separately), and the process of each step is completed during that time. Therefore, when each step S340, S350 of the effect control main process has been completed without delay, the effect control CPU 126 waits for the remaining time until the next effect control main process is called, and waits for the start process during that time. (sleep) state. As the remaining time expires, the effect control CPU 126 ends the standby process, returns to the main loop, and calls the next effect control main process.

[Timer interrupt processing in production control device]
FIG. 449 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of various timer interrupt processes (VSYNC interrupt process, frame interrupt process, phase interrupt process) periodically executed at regular intervals in the effect control device 124 . Effect control unit 210, during the execution of the main loop in FIG. 448 (A), a predetermined interrupt cycle (for example, 512μs ~ 33.3ms cycle) to generate various timer interrupts, corresponding timer interrupt Load processing is executed at regular intervals.
Hereinafter, the processing executed by the effect control CPU 126 will be described step by step.

(A) in FIG. 449 is a flowchart showing an example of VSYNC interrupt processing procedure. The VSYNC interrupt is an image signal interrupt that occurs at the timing of switching the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, and occurs once at an interval of 16.6 ms (60 times per second). The effect control CPU 126 executes VSYNC interrupt processing with the occurrence of the VSYNC interrupt as a trigger.
The VSYNC interrupt is an interrupt notified from the VDP of the effect control device 124 to the effect control CPU 126 .

Step S1300: The effect control CPU 126 sets the VSYNC interrupt monitoring flag (sets the flag value to "1"). The VSYNC interrupt monitoring flag is a flag used to confirm whether or not the VSYNC interrupt is normally generated, and is stored in RAM 130 .
Step S1302: The effect control CPU 126 executes VSYNC interrupt control processing. In the VSYNC interrupt control processing, various tasks executed due to the VSYNC interrupt are controlled.

Step S1304: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of waking up the upper controller (a process of calling the upper controller management process). By executing this process, the operation of the host controller starts (execution of the host controller management process program begins). Since the VSYNC interrupt occurs every 16.6 ms, the host controller is awakened every 16.6 ms. The details of the upper control unit management process will be described later.
After completing the above procedure, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the main loop ((A) in FIG. 448).

(B) in FIG. 449 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of frame interrupt processing. The frame interrupt is an interrupt that occurs twice as frequently as the VSYNC interrupt described above, that is, once every 16.6 ms (60 times per minute). The effect control CPU 126 executes frame interrupt processing when the frame interrupt occurs.

Step S1310: The effect control CPU 126 sets a frame interrupt monitor flag (sets the flag value to "1"). The frame interrupt monitoring flag is a flag used to check whether frame interrupts are occurring normally, and is stored in RAM 130 .
Step S1312: The effect control CPU 126 executes frame interrupt control processing. In frame interrupt control processing, various tasks executed due to frame interrupt processing are controlled.
After completing the above procedure, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the main loop ((A) in FIG. 448).

(C) in FIG. 449: A flow chart showing an example of a phase interrupt process procedure. The phase interrupt process is an interrupt for controlling the internal device of the effect control device 124, and occurs once at intervals of 512 μs (1920 times per minute). The effect control CPU 126 executes the phase interruption process with the occurrence of the phase interruption as a trigger.

Step S1320: The effect control CPU 126 sets a phase interrupt monitoring flag (sets the flag value to "1"). The phase interrupt monitor flag is a flag used to confirm whether or not the phase interrupt is normally generated, and is stored in RAM 130 .
Step S1322: The effect control CPU 126 executes phase interrupt control processing. In the phase interrupt control processing, various tasks that are executed due to phase interrupts are controlled.
After completing the above procedure, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the main loop ((A) in FIG. 448).

As described above, in any timer interrupt process, the interrupt monitor flag for each timer interrupt is set first, and then various tasks executed due to the interrupt are controlled.

[Production control processing]
The effect control device 124 has a function as a effect control processor and a function as a effect display processor as described above, and realizes these two functions by allocating different resources of the effect control CPU 126 to each. . The effect control CPU 126 as the effect control processor receives the effect command transmitted from the main control device 70, and transmits an effect reproduction command for instructing reproduction of the effect according to the content of the effect command. In addition, the effect control CPU 126 as the effect reproduction processor operates each device (by the liquid crystal display 42) by giving more specific instructions to each device based on the content of the effect reproduction command transmitted from the effect control processor. screen display, audio output by the speaker 54, light emission by the various lamps 38 and 40, etc.), and effect reproduction in the slot machine 1 is realized.

Therefore, for convenience of explanation, in the following description, the subject of action when the effect control CPU 126 functions as the effect control processor is expressed as the "effect control unit 210", and the effect control CPU 126 functions as the effect display processor. Depending on the content, the main body of operation in each case is appropriately expressed as the “display control unit 220,” the “audio control unit 222,” the “lamp control unit 224,” or the “motor control unit 226.”

FIG. 450 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of effect control processing. This effect control process is executed as part of the VSYNC interrupt control process (step S1302) in (A) of FIG. 449, for example.

The production control process includes command reception processing (step S400), display production management processing (step S402), lamp production management processing (step S404), sound production management processing (step S406), production random number update processing (step S408), and others. This configuration includes a group of subroutines for effect management processing (step S410). The basic flow of the effect control process will be described below along with each process.

Step S400: In the command reception process, the effect control unit 210 receives the effect command transmitted from the main control CPU72. In addition, the effect control section 210 analyzes the received effect commands and stores them in the command buffer area of the RAM 130 by type. The effect commands transmitted from the main control CPU 72 include, for example, an input processing command, a start operation command, a winning number command, a reel rotation command, an operation reel command, a pressed position command, a stop position command, and a command after reel stop. , internal state commands, etc.

Step S<b>402 : In the display effect management process, the effect control unit 210 (effect execution means) controls the content of the image displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 based on the effect command transmitted from the main control CPU 72 . Specifically, the effect control unit 210 transmits to the display control unit 220 an effect reproduction command (for example, effect pattern number, background pattern number, etc.) that instructs the content of effect. In response to this, the display control unit 220 gives a specific drawing instruction to the VDP 152 based on the contents of the received rendering reproduction command, and controls the display operation of the liquid crystal display 42 .

For example, when receiving an internal state command indicating "in normal mode", the effect control unit 210 executes a process of selecting a display effect corresponding to the normal mode (for example, the effect shown in (A) in FIG. 444). .
In addition, when receiving an internal state command indicating "in the chance zone", the effect control unit 210 executes a process of selecting a display effect corresponding to the fireworks zone (for example, the effect shown in (B) in FIG. 444). .
Furthermore, when receiving an internal state command indicating "in ART state", the effect control unit 210 executes a process of selecting a display effect corresponding to the ART state.

Further, when receiving an internal state command indicating "shift to normal mode", the effect control unit 210 executes a process of selecting a display effect to shift from "fireworks zone" to "normal mode".
Further, when receiving an internal state command indicating "transition to chance zone", the effect control unit 210 executes a process of selecting a display effect to shift from "normal mode" to "fireworks zone".
Then, when receiving an internal state command indicating "transition to AT state", the effect control unit 210 displays a display effect (for example, (D) in FIG. 446, FIG. The effect shown in ) is executed.
In addition, when receiving an internal state command indicating "ART state transition", the effect control unit 210 performs processing for selecting a display effect (for example, ART state entry effect) for shifting from "AT state" to "ART state". Execute.

By executing such a process, the effect control unit 210 (effect executing means) uses the liquid crystal display 42 to perform the normal mode when the effect execution condition (special effect execution condition) of the fireworks zone is not satisfied. (normal performance) is executed, and when the performance execution conditions (special performance execution conditions) of the fireworks zone are satisfied, the liquid crystal display 42 is used to perform a performance in the fireworks zone different from the performance in the normal mode. (special effect) can be executed.

Step S404: In the lamp effect management process, the effect control unit 210 first transmits to the lamp control unit 224 an effect reproduction command instructing the content of the effect. In response to this, the lamp control unit 224 outputs a specific drive signal to the driver IC 132 by relaying the LED driver 198 based on the contents of the received effect reproduction command, and drives (turns on) the various lamps 38, 40, etc. or extinguish, blink, change luminance gradation, etc.).

Step S406: In the sound effect management process, the effect control section 210 first transmits to the sound control section 222 an effect reproduction command instructing the content of the effect. In response to this, the audio control unit 222 instructs the audio IC 134 to output specific content based on the content of the received effect reproduction command, and outputs a sound (sound effect, BGM, etc.) corresponding to the effect content from the speaker 54. output.

Step S408: In effect random number update processing, the effect control unit 210 updates various effect random numbers in the counter area of the RAM130. The effect random numbers include, for example, random numbers used for effect selection and advance notice selection, random numbers used for normal background change lottery (effect lottery), and the like.

Step S412: In other processing, for example, the effect control unit 210 first transmits an effect reproduction command for instructing the content of effect to the motor control unit 226, for example. In response to this, the motor control unit 226 instructs the SMC 199 on specific control contents based on the contents of the received effect reproduction command. Further, the SMC 199 creates an operation pattern for the performance movable body based on instructions from the motor control unit 226, outputs a control signal corresponding to this pattern to the driver IC, and drives the performance movable body. The movable body for presentation operates with the movable body motor 57 as a drive source, and performs presentation in synchronism with the display of the image by the liquid crystal display 42 or independently.

Through the above-described effect control processing, the effect control section 210 can control the effect contents in the slot machine 1 in an integrated manner.

[Upper side control unit management processing]
FIG. 451 is a flowchart of an example of the procedure of management processing for a higher-level control unit. Each procedure will be described below.

Here, the upper controller and the lower controller will be described.
The host side control section is a portion in charge of the processing of the host side in the effect control CPU 126 (the effect control section 210), and is started with a predetermined interrupt (VSYNC interrupt) as a trigger.
On the other hand, the lower side control section is a portion in charge of lower side processing in the effect control CPU 126 (the effect control section 210), and is activated by the higher side control section.

The details of the upper controller and the lower controller are as follows.
The host controller executes processing for setting the VDP 152 to display the effect image/moving image on the liquid crystal display.
The lower-order control unit determines what effect image/moving image is to be displayed on the liquid crystal display, and executes processing for setting information (drawing command/moving image information) regarding the determined effect image/moving image.

Step S910: The upper controller of the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not it is the liquid crystal display update cycle. In this process, determination contents differ when the process of switching the frame rate (FPS) is employed. For example, if the frame rate value set in the frame rate switching process (FPS switching process) is 30 FPS, 16.6 ms × 2 (33.3 ms) is determined to be affirmative (Yes), and the frame rate value is 60 FPS. If there is, it is determined to be affirmative (Yes) at 16.6 ms×1. In addition, when adopting a process that does not switch the frame rate (FPS), if the initial value of the frame rate is 30 FPS, for example, 16.6 ms × 2 (33.3 ms) is determined as affirmative (Yes) .

As a result, when it is confirmed that it is the liquid crystal display update period (Yes), the upper control section of the effect control CPU 126 executes step S912. On the other hand, if it is not possible to confirm that it is the liquid crystal display update period (No), the host side control section of the effect control CPU 126 returns to VSYNC interrupt processing ((A) in FIG. 449).

Step S912: The upper side control section of the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not command construction is completed. Specifically, in this process, it is determined whether or not a command is saved in a command buffer for transmission (notification) to the lower control unit among the command buffers. When changing the frame rate, if the selected frame rate is 60 FPS, the command is constructed in 16.6 ms, so the previous command constructed in 16.6 ms is referred to. On the other hand, if the selected frame rate is 30 FPS, since the command is constructed in 33.3 ms, the command constructed in 16.6 ms two times before is referenced.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the command construction is completed (Yes), the upper side control section of the effect control CPU 126 executes step S914. On the other hand, if it is not possible to confirm that the command construction is completed (No), the host side control unit of the effect control CPU 126 returns to VSYNC interrupt processing ((A) in FIG. 449).

Step S914: The upper controller of the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not drawing is completed. Specifically, the upper control unit of the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not drawing by VDP has been completed (whether or not drawing is in progress).

As a result, when it is confirmed that the drawing has been completed, that is, when it is confirmed that drawing is not in progress (Yes), the higher-order control section of the effect control CPU 126 executes step S916. On the other hand, if it is not possible to confirm that the drawing is completed, that is, if it is confirmed that the drawing is in progress (No), the upper control unit of the effect control CPU 126 returns to VSYNC interrupt processing ((A) in FIG. 449). do.

Step S916: The upper control section of the effect control CPU 126 executes display switching processing. The specific contents of the display switching process are as follows.

The VDP has a register that determines from which address the VRAM starts to be output to the liquid crystal display 42 (liquid crystal panel), and the display switching process here is a process of rewriting the register.

A frame buffer for storing an image to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 has two areas in the VRAM for "drawing" and "display", and an image that has not been drawn is displayed. It prevents it from getting lost.

Specifically, the display switching process is a process of switching between "for drawing" and "for display".
For example, if the area starting from "address 0" of the VRAM is reserved as the "number 1" frame buffer and the area starting from "address 100" is reserved as the "number 2" frame buffer in the VRAM, first, "number 1 ” is set in a register for display, and drawing is performed at “100” of “2”. When the drawing of "No. 2" is completed, "100 address" of "No. 2" is set in the register for display, and "0 address" of "No. 1" is drawn.

Step S922: The upper control section of the effect control CPU 126 executes processing for transferring the drawing command to the VDP. The drawing command to be transferred is the drawing command generated in the drawing command construction processing (step S932) of the lower control unit management processing (FIG. 452).

Step S924: The higher-order control section of the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of transmitting a drawing start instruction. In response to this instruction, the VDP starts drawing, and the liquid crystal display 42 reproduces moving images.

Step S926: The upper controller of the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of waking up the lower controller (a process of calling the lower controller management process). By executing this processing, the operation of the lower control unit starts (execution of the lower control unit management processing program begins). The details of the lower control unit management processing will be described later.
When the above procedure is completed, the upper control section of the effect control CPU 126 transitions to a standby (sleep) state and returns to VSYNC interrupt processing ((A) in FIG. 449).

[Lower side control unit management processing]
FIG. 452 is a flowchart of a procedure example of lower-level control unit management processing. Each procedure will be described below.

Step S<b>930 : The lower control section of the effect control CPU 126 executes processing for determining the content of effect to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 . Since the effect content has already been determined by the effect control process (Fig. 450), the lower side control unit of the effect control CPU 126 displays the contents on the liquid crystal display 42 based on the contents determined by the effect control process (Fig. 450). Determines the contents of the presentation to be displayed.

Here, when the lower-order control unit of the effect control CPU 126 determines the content to shift from the normal mode to the fireworks zone as the effect content, or determines the content to shift from the fireworks zone to the normal mode or AT state, It decides to issue an FPS switching request.

Step S932: The lower control section of the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of constructing drawing commands. As a drawing command, a drawing command corresponding to the content of the effect determined in step S930 is stored in advance in the control ROM 180 or the like, and the lower control unit of the effect control CPU 126 reads out the corresponding drawing command from the control ROM 180 and performs drawing. Build commands.

Step S934: The lower control section of the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not there is an FPS switching request. Specifically, it is checked whether or not it is decided to issue an FPS switching request in the effect determination of step S930.

As a result, when it is confirmed that there is an FPS switching request (Yes), the lower side control section of the effect control CPU 126 executes step S936. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that there is an FPS switching request (No), the lower control section of the effect control CPU 126 transitions to a standby (sleep) state.

Step S936: The lower control section of the effect control CPU 126 executes processing for issuing an FPS switching request to the upper control section. For example, the lower side control unit of the effect control CPU 126 executes processing to turn on the FPS switching request flag of the RAM 130 .

After completing the above procedure, the lower side control section of the effect control CPU 126 transitions to a standby (sleep) state.

[Drawing completion interrupt processing]
FIG. 453 is a flowchart of a procedure example of rendering completion interrupt processing. The drawing completion interrupt process is an interrupt process that is executed when the drawing process by the VDP is completed, and is executed by the upper controller of the effect control CPU 126 . Each procedure will be described below.

Step S940: The upper controller of the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not there is an FPS switching request. For example, when the FPS switching request flag of the RAM 130 is ON, the upper controller of the effect control CPU 126 can determine that there is an FPS switching request.

As a result, when it is confirmed that there is an FPS switching request (Yes), the upper side control section of the effect control CPU 126 executes step S942. On the other hand, if it is not possible to confirm that there is an FPS switching request (No), the upper control section of the effect control CPU 126 returns to the caller.

Step S942: The upper control section of the effect control CPU 126 executes FPS switching processing. Specifically, when the current frame rate is 30 FPS, the upper control unit of the effect control CPU 126 sets the frame rate to 60 FPS, and when the current frame rate is 60 FPS, the frame rate is set to 30 FPS. Execute the processing to be set. In addition, in this process, the higher-order control unit of the effect control CPU 126 executes the process of turning off the FPS switching request flag of the RAM 130 .

When the above procedure is completed, the higher side control section of the effect control CPU 126 returns to the caller.

By executing such processing, the production control CPU 126 (upper-order control unit, update rate setting processing execution means) sets 30 FPS (low update rate) during execution of normal production (during normal mode, etc.), An update rate setting process for setting 60 FPS (high update rate) can be executed during the execution of the special effect (during the fireworks zone). By executing the update rate setting process, the effect image is displayed at 60 FPS in the fireworks zone, and the effect image is displayed at 30 FPS outside the fireworks zone.

In addition, when the effect control CPU 126 (upper-order control unit, update rate setting process execution means) switches the update rate from 30 FPS to 60 FPS or from 60 FPS to 30 FPS, the drawing process of the image displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 ends. After that (after drawing processing for one frame is completed), the update rate is switched.

Furthermore, by executing such processing, the effect control CPU 126 (lower side control unit) determines what kind of image to display on the liquid crystal display 42, and draws commands based on the determined content. Execution of processing (drawing command construction processing) to generate (drawing information), the effect control CPU 126 (upper side control unit) executes update rate setting processing, and the drawing command generated by the lower side control unit, A transfer process for transferring to the VDP (device that controls the liquid crystal display 42) is executed.

[Medal-less machine]
The above-described slot machine 1 is a medal-use gaming machine that uses game medals, but it is also possible to transform the above-described slot machine 1 into a medal-less gaming machine (a gaming machine that does not use game medals) described below. . Below, the contents of the medalless gaming machine will be explained in Chapters S1 to S6.

For the basic chapters and chapters S1 to S6 described below, the contents described in each chapter can be used alone, or the contents described in each chapter can be used in combination. Also, the contents of the medal-less gaming machine described in each chapter can be used in combination with the contents of the medal-using gaming machine. Note that, in the following chapters, parts having the same function may be described with different reference numerals for each chapter. Moreover, regardless of whether or not they have the same functions as the above-described medal use gaming machine, the same reference numerals as those of the above-described medal use gaming machine may be used for explanation. If the content of one chapter is different from the content of another chapter, the content of either chapter can be adopted, and if the content of each chapter lacks the content of the explanation, the content of another chapter , the content of the above-described medal-using gaming machine, and the content of the above-described pachinko machine (regular game machine, management game machine).
Hereinafter, the basic chapter and chapters S1 to S6 will be described in order.

[Basic Chapter]
[1. Glossary〕
Terms used in the basic chapter are the same as those described in chapter S1, which will be described later. Therefore, the description is omitted.

[2. Scope of application〕
The configuration shown below can be applied to specifications of a medalless gaming machine (see C in FIG. 454).
In this chapter, the basic specifications of the medalless game machine are described separately as [required], [recommended], and [reference].

For the specifications described as [mandatory], it is preferable that the design content conforms to this chapter for the following reasons.
(1) Unify operability and functions in order to prevent confusion among game machine users (hall clerks, game customers, etc.).
(2) Consistency with the specifications of dedicated units is maintained.
(3) Realize standardized specifications through discussions with administrative organizations and testing institutions.

The specification described as [recommended] should be the recommended design content for the following reasons.
(1) Recommended specifications to prevent confusion among game machine users (parlor staff, game customers, etc.).
(2) Other specifications are recommended but not essential.

For the following reasons, it is preferable that the specifications described as [Reference] be the design contents used as a reference.
(1) Although it is not a basic specification unique to the medalless gaming machine, but an arbitrary specification, it is a specification described as an example of the configuration of the entire medalless gaming machine.
(2) It is a specification in which a plurality of options can be considered as a design example.

[3. system configuration diagram〕
FIG. 454 is a diagram showing a system configuration diagram of a medalless gaming machine.
A game machine 9800 (medalless game machine), a dedicated unit 9802, an HC 9804 (hall computer), and a management computer 9805 are arranged in the game hall.
Various centers 9806 and a game machine information center 9807 are arranged outside the game arcade.

The gaming machine 9800 and the dedicated unit 9802 are connected (can communicate) using dedicated interface circuits 9801 and 9803 .
The dedicated unit 9802 and HC 9804 are connected (communicable) by a predetermined communication means. The dedicated unit 9802 and the management computer 9805 are connected (communicable) by a predetermined communication means.
The management computer 9805, the various centers 9806, and the game machine information center 9807 are connected (communicable) using a predetermined network.

[4. Hardware Overview]
[4.1. Basic block diagram (2 CPU configuration example) [reference]]
FIG. 455 is a diagram showing a basic block diagram (2CPU configuration example) of a medalless gaming machine.
The gaming machine 9800 (medalless gaming machine) includes a main control CPU 9850 (main control board) and a medal number control CPU 9851 (medal number control board).

A game medal insertion button 9844, a start lever 9842, a stop button 9843, a checkout button 9841, a reel unit 9847, a door sensor 9848, a setting key switch 9849, and a setting/reset button 9852 are connected to the main control CPU 9850. Receives various signals (various types of information) from components.
Also, the main control CPU 9850 is connected to a display such as an instruction monitor 9845, an effect unit 9846, and a drum unit 9847, and transmits various signals (control signals, various information) to these parts.

A counting button 9836, a game medal number clear button 9853, and a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 9843 are connected to the medal number control CPU 9851, and various signals (various information) are received from these parts.
In addition, a game medal number display device 9840 and a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 9843 are connected to the medal number control CPU 9851, and various signals (control signals, various information) are transmitted to these parts.
The medal number control CPU 9851 can communicate with a dedicated unit 9802 (external unit) via a game ball lending device connection terminal board 9843 .

[4.2. Basic block diagram (1 CPU configuration example) [reference]]
FIG. 456 is a diagram showing a basic block diagram (one CPU configuration example) of a medalless gaming machine.
The gaming machine 9800 (medalless gaming machine) includes a main control CPU 9850 (main control board).

The main control CPU 9850 includes a game medal insertion button 9844, a start lever 9842, a stop button 9843, a checkout button 9841, a reel unit 9847, a door sensor 9848, a setting key switch 9849, a setting/reset button 9852, a counting button 9836, and the number of game medals. A clear button 9853 and a game ball rental device connection terminal board 9843 are connected, and various signals (various information) are received from these parts.

In addition, the main control CPU 9850 is connected to a display such as an instruction monitor 9845, a performance unit 9846, a reel unit 9847, a game medal number display device 9840, and a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 9843. Various signals (control signals, various information) are transmitted to the device.

The main control CPU 9850 can communicate with the dedicated unit 9802 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 9843 .

[4.3. Main board configuration example [reference]]
FIG. 457 is a diagram showing configuration 1 (first configuration example) of the main control board, the medal number control board, and the game ball lending device connection terminal board of the medalless game machine.
[Configuration 1] is a configuration in which a main control board 9830 on which a main control CPU 9850 is mounted and a medal count control board 9832 on which a medal count control CPU 9851 is mounted are separated, and two main boards on which CPUs are mounted are provided.
In this case, the medal count control board 9832 (medal count control CPU 9851) communicates with the dedicated unit via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 9843.

FIG. 458 is a diagram showing configuration 2 (second configuration example) of the main control board, the medal count control board, and the game ball lending device connection terminal board of the medalless game machine.
[Configuration 2] is a configuration in which the main control CPU 9850 and medal number control CPU 9851 are mounted on one main board (main control board 9830), and the CPU is mounted on one main board.
In this case, the main control board 9830 (main control CPU 9850 or medal number control CPU 9851) communicates with the dedicated unit via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 9843 .

FIG. 459 is a diagram showing configuration 3 (third configuration example) of the main control board, the medal count control board, and the game ball lending device connection terminal board of the medalless game machine.
[Configuration 3] is a configuration in which all controls are performed only by the main control CPU 9850 and the medal number control CPU is not used.
In this case, the main control board 9830 (main control CPU 9850) communicates with the dedicated unit via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 9843.

[4.4. Main circuit board case configuration example [reference]]
The main control board and medal number control board are preferably sealed in a "main board case".
In addition, it is desirable to seal the connection terminal plate of the game ball lending device in a transparent case from the viewpoint of preventing unauthorized modification. A configuration example of the substrate case is shown below.

FIG. 460 is a diagram showing [Configuration 1-1] of a circuit board case configuration example.
[Configuration 1-1] is a configuration example in which the substrates in [Configuration 1] are individually housed in a case.
In [Configuration 1-1], the main board (main control board 9830) is housed in the main control board case 9860, the medal number control board 9832 is housed in the medal number control board case 9861, and the game ball rental device connection terminal board 9834 is housed in the connection terminal plate case 9862 .

FIG. 461 is a diagram showing [Configuration 1-2] of the substrate case configuration example.
[Configuration 1-2] is a configuration example in which the main control board and the medal count control board are housed in one main board case, and the connection terminal board is housed in another case in the above [Configuration 1].
In [Configuration 1-2], the main board (main control board 9830) and medal number control board 9832 are housed in the main control board case 9860, and the game ball lending device connection terminal board 9834 is housed in the connection terminal board case 9862. .

FIG. 462 is a diagram showing [Configuration 1-3] of the circuit board case configuration example.
[Configuration 1-3] is a configuration in which, in [Configuration 1] above, the medal count control board and the game ball lending device connection terminal board are housed in one medal count control board case, and the main control board is housed in another case. be.
In [Configuration 1-3], the main board (main control board 9830) is housed in the main control board case 9860, and the medal number control board 9832 and the game ball lending device connection terminal board 9834 are housed in the medal number control board case 9861. do.

FIG. 463 is a diagram showing [Configuration 1-4] of the substrate case configuration example.
[Configuration 1-4] is a configuration in which the main control board, medal count control board, and game ball rental device connection terminal plate are housed in one main board case in [Configuration 1].
In [Configuration 1-4], the main board (main control board 9830), medal number control board 9832, and game ball rental device connection terminal board 9834 are housed in the main control board case 9860.

FIG. 464 is a diagram showing [Configuration 2-1] of a circuit board case configuration example.
[Construction 2-1] is a construction in which the substrates in the above [Construction 2] are individually housed in a case.
In [Configuration 2-1], the main board (the main control board 9830 on which the main control CPU and the medal count control CPU are mounted) is housed in the main control board case 9860, and the game ball lending device connection terminal board 9834 is connected to the terminal board. Housed in case 9862 .

FIG. 465 is a diagram showing [configuration 2-2] of the substrate case configuration example.
[Configuration 2-2] is a configuration in which the main substrate and the connection terminal plate are housed in one main substrate case in the above [Configuration 2].
In [Configuration 2-2], the main board (the main control board 9830 on which the main control CPU and the medal count control CPU are mounted) and the game ball lending device connection terminal board 9834 are housed in the main control board case 9860 .

[Construction 3] is similar to [Construction 2-1] and [Construction 2-2], so description thereof will be omitted.
In order to make the structure easy to check the back surface of the board, it is preferable to eliminate the crimping of the main board case.
Since the game ball rental device connection terminal plate can be easily removed from the game machine, it is preferable to strengthen measures to prevent replacement of the main board when it is housed in the same case as the main board.

[4.4. List of main devices [reference]]
Figures 466 and 467 are diagrams showing main devices and substrates provided in the medalless gaming machine.
In the figure, the devices with "○" in the "common" are devices that are [essential] as common specifications.

[Symbol A]
common:-
Device name: Power supply Contents: AC100V is recommended.

[Symbol B]
common:-
Device name: Door key (cylinder lock)
Contents: Variable lock.

[Symbol C]
common:-
Device name: Setting change device Contents: For 6-step setting.

[Symbol D]
common:-
Device name: Setting key Description: Setting key switch (90°/2 states).

[Symbol E]
common:-
Device name: Setting button Description: Button for changing set values. It can be used in combination with the reset button and RWM clear button.

[Symbol F]
common:-
Device name: Setting door Contents: Setting is optional. If provided, it has the following functions. Door dedicated to the operation of the sales person, such as the power switch, setting key, setting button, setting value display, etc.

[Symbol G]
common:-
Device name: Setting door key Description: Installation is optional. If provided, it shall be a variable lock.

[Symbol H]
common:-
Device name: Spinning unit Description: A unit that controls the reel.

[Symbol I]
Common: ○
Device name: Game medal insertion button 1
Contents: 1 BET button (switch signal for inputting test signal).

[Symbol J]
common:-
Device name: Game medal insertion button MAX
Contents: MAXBET button.

[Symbol K]
common:-
Device name: Start lever Description: A lever that activates the spinning drum rotation device.

[Symbol L]
common:-
Device name: Stop button Description: A button that activates the rotation stop device corresponding to each reel.

[Symbol M]
Common: ○
Device name: Settlement button Description: A button that returns the inserted game medals to the game medal count display device.

[Symbol N]
Common: ○
Device name: Game medal number display device Description: A device (conceptual receiver) that displays the number of game medals electromagnetically recorded.

[Symbol O]
Common: ○
Device name: Counting button Description: A button that transmits the number of game medals electromagnetically recorded to a dedicated unit.

[Symbol P]
Common: ○
Device name: Number of game medals clear button Description: A button for clearing the number of game medals placed in a position where the player cannot operate.

[Symbol Q]
common:-
Device name: Main control board Contents: A board on which the main control CPU is mounted.

[Symbol R]
common:-
Device name: Medal count control board Contents: A board equipped with a medal count control CPU.

[Symbol S]
common:-
Device name: Game panel board Contents: A board equipped with switch inputs such as a start lever and stop button, an instruction monitor, and displays such as game information LEDs.

[Symbol T]
common:-
Device name: Spindle driving board Contents: A board equipped with a spinning drum driver, etc.

[Symbol U]
common:-
Device name: Peripheral board Description: Other boards.

[Symbol V]
common:-
Device name: Game ball rental device connection terminal board Contents: Board for connecting to a dedicated unit.

[4.5. Front structural drawing [reference]]
FIG. 468 is a diagram showing a front view of a medalless gaming machine.
The external dimensions of the medalless gaming machine 9800 and the positions of the main devices can be set arbitrarily. The symbols in parentheses in the figure correspond to the symbols in FIGS. 466 and 467. FIG.
The horizontal length X of the medalless gaming machine 9800 is preferably 457 mm.
The vertical length Y of the medalless gaming machine 9800 is preferably 810 mm.

A stop button 9843 (L) is arranged in the center of the medalless gaming machine 9800 .
A start lever 9842 (K) is arranged on the left side of the stop button 9843 (L). A checkout button 9841 (M) is arranged on the left side of the start lever 9842 (K). A door key 9854 (B) is arranged on the right side of the stop button 9843 (L).

A game medal insertion button 9844 (J) serving as a MAXBET button is arranged on the upper left side of the stop button 9843 (L). A game medal insertion button 9844 (I) serving as a 1 BET button is arranged on the left side of the game medal insertion button 9844 (J).

A counting button 9836 (O) is arranged on the upper right side of the stop button 9843 (L). A game medal number display device 9838 (N) is arranged above (back side) the count button 9836 (O).

FIG. 469 is a diagram showing a front view of another form of medalless gaming machine. The symbols in parentheses in the figure correspond to the symbols in FIGS. 466 and 467. FIG.
A stop button 9843 (L) is arranged in the center of the medalless gaming machine 9800 .
Three stop buttons 9843 (L) are arranged corresponding to three reels, but four can be arranged when four reels are arranged.

A start lever 9842 (K) is arranged on the left side of the stop button 9843 (L), and a checkout button 9841 (M) is arranged on the left side of the start lever 9842 (K).
On the right side of the stop button 9843 (L), an effect switching button 45 serving as a cross button is arranged, and on the right side of this effect switching button 45, a door key 9854 (B) is arranged. Below the door key 9854 (B), an effect switching button 45 serving as a push button is arranged.

Above the stop button 9843 (L), an effect switching button 45 serving as a push button is arranged.
A game medal insertion button 9844 (J) serving as a MAXBET button is arranged on the upper left side of the stop button 9843 (L), and a game medal insertion button 9844 (J) serving as a 1BET button is arranged on the left side of the game medal insertion button 9844 (J). A button 9844 (I) is provided.

A game medal number display device 9838 (N) is arranged on the upper right side of the stop button 9843 (L), and a counting button 9836 (O) is arranged on the right side (inside) of the game medal number display device 9838 (N). are placed.

FIG. 470 is a diagram showing the internal configuration of another form of medalless gaming machine.
This figure shows another form of the medalless gaming machine 9800 in which the front door 4 is open.
The left end of the front door 4 is connected to the housing 2 via a hinge mechanism (not shown), and can be opened and closed by the hinge mechanism.
A display window 14 is formed in the central portion of the front door 4, and three reels 6, 8, 10 are installed inside the display window 14. - 特許庁

A power supply unit 9870 (power supply device) is arranged below the three reels 6 , 8 , 10 . The power supply unit 9870 serves as a power supply for the medalless gaming machine 9800, and power from the power supply unit 9870 is supplied to the main control board, the medal count control board, the effect control board, and the like.
The power supply unit 9870 has a flat cubic shape and is arranged sideways so that the length in the left-right direction is longer than the length in the front-rear direction. Also, the power supply unit 9870 is arranged on the back side (rear side) of the housing 2 .

By arranging the power supply unit 9870 horizontally instead of vertically and by arranging it on the back side instead of the front side of the housing 2, a large space can be secured in front of the power supply unit 9870, and the front door 4 can be opened. A large unit can be placed on the lower back side (see A in the figure).

A medal number control board 9832 is arranged on the right side of the power supply unit 9870 .

Figures 471 and 472 are enlarged views showing the vicinity of the power supply unit (near the circular two-dot chain line in Figure 470) of another form of the medalless gaming machine.
Here, FIG. 471 shows a state in which the cover member of the power supply unit is closed, and FIG. 472 shows a state in which the cover member of the power supply unit is open.

As shown in FIG. 471, a plate-like lid member 9871 is arranged on the right side of the power supply unit 9870 . The lid member 9871 is a member for protecting the power switch 9875 (see FIG. 472). By protecting the power switch 9875 with the cover member 9871, the power switch 9875 can be prevented from being turned on/off carelessly.

The lid member 9871 is rotatable around a rotating shaft 9872 such as a pin arranged near the upper end of the lid member 9871 .
A plurality of protrusions 9873 are formed on the right side surface of the power supply unit 9870 to restrict the movement of the lid member 9871 (see FIGS. 471 and 472). The lid member 9871 can be rotated about 90 degrees clockwise from the initial position toward the movable position within the range of the plurality of protrusions 9873 .

Further, when the lid member 9871 is moved from the initial position to the movable position (from the closed state to the open state), it is lightly fixed by a projection or the like (not shown). Therefore, the staff of the game hall can work while the cover member 9871 is kept open.

As shown in FIG. 472, a recessed portion 9874 recessed toward the inside of the power supply unit 9870 is formed on the right side surface of the power supply unit 9870 (inside where the cover member 9871 in the initial position is arranged).
A power switch 9875 is arranged on the bottom surface of the recessed portion 9874 (the surface facing the opening surface).

By alternately pressing both ends of the power switch 9875 like a seesaw, the power of the power supply unit 9870 can be turned on/off.
When the upper end of the power switch 9875 protrudes rightward, the power supply unit 9870 is turned off, and when the lower end of the power switch 9875 protrudes rightward, the power supply unit 9870 is turned on.

On the other hand, on the medal number control board 9832, a connection part 9835 for harness and wiring is arranged, and below the connection part 9835, a game medal number clear button 9853 is arranged.
The medal number control board 9832 (game value control board) has a game medal number clear button 9853 (clear switch) for clearing predetermined data (backed up medal number), and is supplied from the power supply unit 9870. Operates on electricity.

When the power switch 9875 is turned on while pressing the game medal count clear button 9853 to turn on the power, the medal count stored (backed up) in the medal count control board 9832 is cleared.

In this embodiment, the power switch 9875 and the number-of-game-medals clear button 9853 are arranged at positions where they can be operated with one hand.
For example, a game arcade attendant can turn on the power switch 9875 with his right thumb while pressing the number of game medals clear button 9853 with his right index finger.

The distance L between the power switch 9875 and the number-of-game-medals clear button 9853 (for example, the distance between the centers of the two operation members) is preferably 1 cm to 21 cm.
The reason why the shortest distance is set to 1 cm is that it is the minimum distance at which a human finger can be inserted between the two operation members.
The reason why the longest distance is set to 21 cm is that the distance from the thumb to the little finger of the human hand is set to be the reachable distance. For example, if you are a pianist or an experienced player of a keyboard instrument, you can expand your skills to that extent.

Also, it is preferable to arrange the number of game medals clear button 9853 above the power switch 9875 . The reason for this is that when the power switch 9875 is operated with the thumb of the right hand and the number of game medals clear button 9853 is pressed with the index finger of the right hand, the tip of the index finger of the right hand reaches higher than the tip of the thumb of the right hand. Therefore, it is easier to operate with such an arrangement relationship. Another reason is that the hinge of the front door 4 (door) is on the left side, so it is possible to operate the switches with the right hand while supporting the front door 4 with the left hand so that the opened front door 4 does not close. Because it is possible.

[5. Overview of Basic Functions [Reference]]
[5.1. Game machine function list_2 CPU configuration example]
473 to 478 are diagrams showing a function list of the gaming machine (example of 2 CPU configuration).
In the figure, "◎" indicates a mounting area in a 2-CPU configuration, "○" indicates a mountable area, "X" indicates an unmountable area, and "-" indicates a mountable or mountable area. This is a non-permissible area. Here, the usable area (usable area) is an area in which the usable capacity for controlling the progress of the game is stipulated by gaming machine regulations. This is the area that is not included in the

[No. 1]
Function: Function to control game execution Mountable CPU and main control CPU usage area in mounting area: ◎
Outside the use area of the main control CPU in the mountable CPU and mounting area: ×
Mountable CPU and medal count control CPU usage area in mounting area: ×
Outside the usage area of the mountable CPU and medal count control CPU in the mounting area: ×

[No. 2]
Function: Among the functions that control game execution, the function that controls the game state Mountable CPU and main control CPU usage area in the mounting area: ◎
Outside the use area of the main control CPU in the mountable CPU and mounting area: ×
Mountable CPU and medal count control CPU usage area in mounting area: ×
Outside the usage area of the mountable CPU and medal count control CPU in the mounting area: ×

[No. 3]
Function: Of the functions that control the execution of games, the function of inserting game medals and adjusting the amount of CPUs that can be implemented and the usage area of the main control CPU in the implementation area: ◎
Outside the use area of the main control CPU in the mountable CPU and mounting area: ×
Mountable CPU and medal count control CPU usage area in mounting area: ×
Outside the usage area of the mountable CPU and medal count control CPU in the mounting area: ×

[No. 4]
Function: Among the functions that control the execution of games, the function that operates the reel rotating device Mountable CPU and main control CPU usage area in the mounting area: ◎
Outside the use area of the main control CPU in the mountable CPU and mounting area: ×
Mountable CPU and medal count control CPU usage area in mounting area: ×
Outside the usage area of the mountable CPU and medal count control CPU in the mounting area: ×

[No. 5]
Function: Random number generation function for internal lottery among the functions that control the execution of games Mountable CPU and main control CPU usage area in the mounting area: ◎
Outside the use area of the main control CPU in the mountable CPU and mounting area: ×
Mountable CPU and medal count control CPU usage area in mounting area: ×
Outside the usage area of the mountable CPU and medal count control CPU in the mounting area: ×

[No. 6]
Function: Of the functions that control the execution of games, the function that performs an internal lottery and activates the conditional device Mountable CPU and main control CPU usage area in the mounting area: ◎
Outside the use area of the main control CPU in the mountable CPU and mounting area: ×
Mountable CPU and medal count control CPU usage area in mounting area: ×
Outside the usage area of the mountable CPU and medal count control CPU in the mounting area: ×

[No. 7]
Function: Of the functions that control the execution of games, the function that operates the rotation stop device Mountable CPU and main control CPU usage area in the mounting area: ◎
Outside the use area of the main control CPU in the mountable CPU and mounting area: ×
Mountable CPU and medal count control CPU usage area in mounting area: ×
Outside the usage area of the mountable CPU and medal count control CPU in the mounting area: ×

[No. 8]
Function: Among the functions that control the execution of the game, the function to determine the combination of displayed symbols Mountable CPU and main control CPU usage area in the mounting area: ◎
Outside the use area of the main control CPU in the mountable CPU and mounting area: ×
Mountable CPU and medal count control CPU usage area in mounting area: ×
Outside the usage area of the mountable CPU and medal count control CPU in the mounting area: ×

[No. 9]
Function: Among the functions that control the execution of games, the function to pay out game medals by winning. CPU that can be implemented and the usage area of the main control CPU in the implementation area: ◎
Outside the use area of the main control CPU in the mountable CPU and mounting area: ×
Mountable CPU and medal count control CPU usage area in mounting area: ×
Outside the usage area of the mountable CPU and medal count control CPU in the mounting area: ×

[No. 10]
Function: Of the functions that control the execution of games, the function that activates the replay, accessories, and accessories continuous operation device Mountable CPU and main control CPU usage area in the mounting area: ◎
Outside the use area of the main control CPU in the mountable CPU and mounting area: ×
Mountable CPU and medal count control CPU usage area in mounting area: ×
Outside the usage area of the mountable CPU and medal count control CPU in the mounting area: ×

[No. 11]
Function: Of the functions that control game execution, other functions that control game execution Mountable CPU and main control CPU usage area in mounting area: ◎
Outside the use area of the main control CPU in the mountable CPU and mounting area: ×
Mountable CPU and medal count control CPU usage area in mounting area: ×
Outside the usage area of the mountable CPU and medal count control CPU in the mounting area: ×

[No. 12]
Function: Function to control game medal number display Device that can be mounted and main control CPU usage area in mounting area: ○
Outside the use area of the main control CPU in the mountable CPU and mounting area: ×
Mountable CPU and medal count control CPU usage area in mounting area: ◎
Outside the usage area of the mountable CPU and medal count control CPU in the mounting area: ×

[No. 13]
Function: A function to electromagnetically record the number of game medals among the functions that control the number of game medals display.
Outside the use area of the main control CPU in the mountable CPU and mounting area: ×
Mountable CPU and medal count control CPU usage area in mounting area: ◎
Outside the usage area of the mountable CPU and medal count control CPU in the mounting area: ×

[No. 14]
Function: A function that displays the number of game medals among the functions that control the number of game medals display. Mountable CPU and main control CPU usage area in the mounting area: ○
Outside the use area of the main control CPU in the mountable CPU and mounting area: ×
Mountable CPU and medal count control CPU usage area in mounting area: ◎
Outside the usage area of the mountable CPU and medal count control CPU in the mounting area: ×

[No. 15]
Function: A function that adds the number of game medals that have been lent out of the functions that control the number of game medals display.
Outside the use area of the main control CPU in the mountable CPU and mounting area: ×
Mountable CPU and medal count control CPU usage area in mounting area: ◎
Outside the usage area of the mountable CPU and medal count control CPU in the mounting area: ×

[No. 16]
Function: Among the functions to control the number of game medals display device, the function to subtract the number of game medals counted. Mountable CPU and main control CPU usage area in the mounting area: ○
Outside the use area of the main control CPU in the mountable CPU and mounting area: ×
Mountable CPU and medal count control CPU usage area in mounting area: ◎
Outside the usage area of the mountable CPU and medal count control CPU in the mounting area: ×

[No. 17]
Function: Among the functions to control the number of game medals display device, the function to subtract the number of inserted game medals Mountable CPU and usage area of the main control CPU in the mounting area: ○
Outside the use area of the main control CPU in the mountable CPU and mounting area: ×
Mountable CPU and medal count control CPU usage area in mounting area: ◎
Outside the usage area of the mountable CPU and medal count control CPU in the mounting area: ×

[No. 18]
Function: Of the functions that control the number of game medals display device, a function that adds the number of game medals that have been settled. Mountable CPU and main control CPU usage area in the mounting area: ○
Outside the use area of the main control CPU in the mountable CPU and mounting area: ×
Mountable CPU and medal count control CPU usage area in mounting area: ◎
Outside the usage area of the mountable CPU and medal count control CPU in the mounting area: ×

[No. 19]
Function: A function that adds the number of game medals that have been paid out, among the functions that control the number of game medals display.
Outside the use area of the main control CPU in the mountable CPU and mounting area: ×
Mountable CPU and medal count control CPU usage area in mounting area: ◎
Outside the usage area of the mountable CPU and medal count control CPU in the mounting area: ×

[No. 20]
Function: Of the functions that control the number of game medals display device, the function to initialize the number of game medals with the number of game medals clear button Mountable CPU and main control CPU usage area in the mounting area: ○
Outside the use area of the main control CPU in the mountable CPU and mounting area: ×
Mountable CPU and medal count control CPU usage area in mounting area: ◎
Outside the usage area of the mountable CPU and medal count control CPU in the mounting area: ×

[No. 21]
Function: Function to control communication with equipment for renting game balls, etc. Mountable CPU and usage area of main control CPU in mounting area: ○
Outside the use area of the main control CPU in the mountable CPU and mounting area: ×
Mountable CPU and medal count control CPU usage area in mounting area: ◎
Outside the usage area of the mountable CPU and medal count control CPU in the mounting area: ×

[No. 22]
Function: A function to monitor VL power supply (connection confirmation power supply input from dedicated unit) among functions to control communication with game ball rental equipment. ○
Outside the use area of the main control CPU in the mountable CPU and mounting area: ×
Mountable CPU and medal count control CPU usage area in mounting area: ◎
Outside the usage area of the mountable CPU and medal count control CPU in the mounting area: ×

[No. 23]
Function: Among the functions to control communication with the game ball rental device, the function to manage communication control and communication timer Mountable CPU and main control CPU usage area in the mounting area: ○
Outside the use area of the main control CPU in the mountable CPU and mounting area: ×
Mountable CPU and medal count control CPU usage area in mounting area: ◎
Outside the usage area of the mountable CPU and medal count control CPU in the mounting area: ×

[No. 24]
Function: Among the functions that control communication with the game ball rental device, the function to generate and transmit gaming machine information notifications (gaming machine performance information). ○
Outside the use area of the main control CPU in the mountable CPU and mounting area: ×
Mountable CPU and medal count control CPU usage area in mounting area: ◎
Outside the usage area of the mountable CPU and medal count control CPU in the mounting area: ×

[No. 25]
Function: Of the functions that control communication with the game ball lending device, the function to generate and transmit gaming machine information notification (gaming machine installation information). ○
Outside the use area of the main control CPU in the mountable CPU and mounting area :-
Mountable CPU and medal count control CPU usage area in mounting area: ◎
Outside the usage area of the mountable CPU and medal count control CPU in the mounting area: ×

[No. 26]
Function: Among the functions that control communication with the game ball rental device, the function to generate and transmit game machine information notifications (hall control/fraud monitoring information) Use of the CPU that can be implemented and the main control CPU in the implementation area Area: ○
Outside the use area of the main control CPU in the mountable CPU and mounting area :-
Mountable CPU and medal count control CPU usage area in mounting area: ◎
Outside the usage area of the mountable CPU and medal count control CPU in the mounting area: ×

[No. 27]
Function: Among the functions that control communication with the game ball lending device, the function to generate and send a message for notifying the counting Mountable CPU and main control CPU usage area in the mounting area: ○
Outside the use area of the main control CPU in the mountable CPU and mounting area :-
Mountable CPU and medal count control CPU usage area in mounting area: ◎
Outside the usage area of the mountable CPU and medal count control CPU in the mounting area: ×

[No. 28]
Function: Among the functions that control communication with the game ball rental device, the function to receive rental notifications Mountable CPU and main control CPU usage area in the mounting area: ○
Outside the use area of the main control CPU in the mountable CPU and mounting area :-
Mountable CPU and medal count control CPU usage area in mounting area: ◎
Outside the usage area of the mountable CPU and medal count control CPU in the mounting area: ×

[No. 29]
Function: A function that controls communication between the main control CPU and the medal number control CPU Mountable CPU and main control CPU usage area in the mounting area: ○
Outside the use area of the main control CPU in the mountable CPU and mounting area :-
Mountable CPU and medal count control CPU usage area in mounting area: ◎
Outside the usage area of the mountable CPU and medal count control CPU in the mounting area: ×

[No. 30]
Function: Function to aggregate game machine performance information Mountable CPU and main control CPU usage area in mounting area: ○
Outside the use area of the main control CPU in the mountable CPU and mounting area: ○
Mountable CPU and medal count control CPU usage area in mounting area: ○
Outside the usage area of the mountable CPU and medal count control CPU in the mounting area: ○

[No. 31]
Function: A function that manages (calculates, calculates, and generates) the total number of inserts among the functions that tally game machine performance information Use area of main control CPU in mountable CPU and mounting area: ○
Outside the use area of the main control CPU in the mountable CPU and mounting area: ○
Mountable CPU and medal count control CPU usage area in mounting area: ○
Outside the usage area of the mountable CPU and medal count control CPU in the mounting area: ○

[No. 32]
Function: A function that manages the total number of payouts among the functions that tally game machine performance information Mountable CPU and main control CPU usage area in the mounting area: ○
Outside the use area of the main control CPU in the mountable CPU and mounting area: ○
Mountable CPU and medal count control CPU usage area in mounting area: ○
Outside the usage area of the mountable CPU and medal count control CPU in the mounting area: ○

[No. 33]
Function: A function that manages MY among the functions that aggregate gaming machine performance information Mountable CPU and main control CPU usage area in the mounting area: ○
Outside the use area of the main control CPU in the mountable CPU and mounting area: ○
Mountable CPU and medal count control CPU usage area in mounting area: ○
Outside the usage area of the mountable CPU and medal count control CPU in the mounting area: ○

[No. 34]
Function: A function that manages the total number of handouts paid out among the functions that aggregate gaming machine performance information Mountable CPU and main control CPU usage area in the mounting area: ○
Outside the use area of the main control CPU in the mountable CPU and mounting area: ○
Mountable CPU and medal count control CPU usage area in mounting area: ○
Outside the usage area of the mountable CPU and medal count control CPU in the mounting area: ○

[No. 35]
Function: A function that manages the total number of continuous bonuses paid out among the functions that tally game machine performance information Mountable CPU and main control CPU usage area in mounting area: ○
Outside the use area of the main control CPU in the mountable CPU and mounting area: ○
Mountable CPU and medal count control CPU usage area in mounting area: ○
Outside the usage area of the mountable CPU and medal count control CPU in the mounting area: ○

[No. 36]
Function: Among the functions for aggregating game machine performance information, the function to manage the ratio of characters Implementable CPU and main control CPU usage area in the implementation area: ○
Outside the use area of the main control CPU in the mountable CPU and mounting area: ○
Mountable CPU and medal count control CPU usage area in mounting area: ○
Outside the usage area of the mountable CPU and medal count control CPU in the mounting area: ○

[No. 37]
Function: A function that manages the ratio of continuous accessories among the functions that aggregate game machine performance information Mountable CPU and main control CPU usage area in the mounting area: ○
Outside the use area of the main control CPU in the mountable CPU and mounting area: ○
Mountable CPU and medal count control CPU usage area in mounting area: ○
Outside the usage area of the mountable CPU and medal count control CPU in the mounting area: ○

[No. 38]
Function: A function that manages the ratio of advantageous sections among the functions that aggregate game machine performance information Mountable CPU and main control CPU usage area in the mounting area: ○
Outside the use area of the main control CPU in the mountable CPU and mounting area: ○
Mountable CPU and medal count control CPU usage area in mounting area: ○
Outside the usage area of the mountable CPU and medal count control CPU in the mounting area: ○

[No. 39]
Function: A function that manages the ratio of instructed accessories among the functions that aggregate game machine performance information Mountable CPU and main control CPU usage area in the mounting area: ○
Outside the use area of the main control CPU in the mountable CPU and mounting area: ○
Mountable CPU and medal count control CPU usage area in mounting area: ○
Outside the usage area of the mountable CPU and medal count control CPU in the mounting area: ○

[No. 40]
Function: A function that manages the state ratio of accessories, etc., among the functions that aggregate game machine performance information Implementable CPU and main control CPU usage area in the implementation area: ○
Outside the use area of the main control CPU in the mountable CPU and mounting area: ○
Mountable CPU and medal count control CPU usage area in mounting area: ○
Outside the usage area of the mountable CPU and medal count control CPU in the mounting area: ○

[No. 41]
Function: A function that manages the number of games played among the functions that tally game machine performance information Mountable CPU and usage area of the main control CPU in the mounting area: ○
Outside the use area of the main control CPU in the mountable CPU and mounting area: ○
Mountable CPU and medal count control CPU usage area in mounting area: ○
Outside the usage area of the mountable CPU and medal count control CPU in the mounting area: ○

[No. 42]
Function: Function to generate game machine installation information Mountable CPU and main control CPU usage area in mounting area: ○
Outside the use area of the main control CPU in the mountable CPU and mounting area: ○
Mountable CPU and medal count control CPU usage area in mounting area: ○
Outside the usage area of the mountable CPU and medal count control CPU in the mounting area: ○

[No. 43]
Function: A function that manages the ID number of the main control chip among the functions for generating game machine installation information Mountable CPU and usage area of the main control CPU in the mounting area: ○
Outside the use area of the main control CPU in the mountable CPU and mounting area: ○
Mountable CPU and medal count control CPU usage area in mounting area: ○
Outside the usage area of the mountable CPU and medal count control CPU in the mounting area: ○

[No. 44]
Function: A function to manage the main control chip maker code among the functions for generating game machine installation information Mountable CPU and usage area of the main control CPU in the mounting area: ○
Outside the use area of the main control CPU in the mountable CPU and mounting area: ○
Mountable CPU and medal count control CPU usage area in mounting area: ○
Outside the usage area of the mountable CPU and medal count control CPU in the mounting area: ○

[No. 45]
Function: A function to manage the main control chip product code among the functions for generating game machine installation information Mountable CPU and main control CPU usage area in the mounting area: ○
Outside the use area of the main control CPU in the mountable CPU and mounting area: ○
Mountable CPU and medal count control CPU usage area in mounting area: ○
Outside the usage area of the mountable CPU and medal count control CPU in the mounting area: ○

[No. 46]
Function: A function to manage the medal number control chip ID number among the functions for generating game machine installation information Mountable CPU and main control CPU usage area in the mounting area: ○
Outside the use area of the main control CPU in the mountable CPU and mounting area: ○
Mountable CPU and medal count control CPU usage area in mounting area: ○
Outside the usage area of the mountable CPU and medal count control CPU in the mounting area: ○

[No. 47]
Function: A function to manage the medal number control chip maker code among the functions for generating game machine installation information Mountable CPU and main control CPU usage area in the mounting area: ○
Outside the use area of the main control CPU in the mountable CPU and mounting area: ○
Mountable CPU and medal count control CPU usage area in mounting area: ○
Outside the usage area of the mountable CPU and medal count control CPU in the mounting area: ○

[No. 48]
Function: A function to manage the medal count control chip product code among the functions for generating game machine installation information Mountable CPU and main control CPU usage area in the mounting area: ○
Outside the use area of the main control CPU in the mountable CPU and mounting area: ○
Mountable CPU and medal count control CPU usage area in mounting area: ○
Outside the usage area of the mountable CPU and medal count control CPU in the mounting area: ○

[No. 49]
Function: Function to generate hall control and fraud monitoring information Mountable CPU and main control CPU usage area in mounting area: ○
Outside the use area of the main control CPU in the mountable CPU and mounting area: ×
Mountable CPU and medal count control CPU usage area in mounting area: ○
Outside the usage area of the mountable CPU and medal count control CPU in the mounting area: ×

[No. 50]
Function: A function to manage the number of game medals among the functions for generating hole control and fraud monitoring information Mountable CPU and main control CPU usage area in the mounting area: ○
Outside the use area of the main control CPU in the mountable CPU and mounting area: ×
Mountable CPU and medal count control CPU usage area in mounting area: ○
Outside the usage area of the mountable CPU and medal count control CPU in the mounting area: ×

[No. 51]
Function: A function that manages the number of inserted medals among the functions for generating hall control and fraud monitoring information Mountable CPU and main control CPU usage area in the mounting area: ○
Outside the use area of the main control CPU in the mountable CPU and mounting area: ×
Mountable CPU and medal count control CPU usage area in mounting area: ○
Outside the usage area of the mountable CPU and medal count control CPU in the mounting area: ×

[No. 52]
Function: A function that manages the number of payout medals among the functions for generating hall control and fraud monitoring information. Mountable CPU and main control CPU usage area in the mounting area: ○
Outside the use area of the main control CPU in the mountable CPU and mounting area: ×
Mountable CPU and medal count control CPU usage area in mounting area: ○
Outside the usage area of the mountable CPU and medal count control CPU in the mounting area: ×

[No. 53]
Function: A function that manages main control state 1 among the functions for generating hall control and fraud monitoring information Implementable CPU and usage area of main control CPU in implementation area: ○
Outside the use area of the main control CPU in the mountable CPU and mounting area: ×
Mountable CPU and medal count control CPU usage area in mounting area: ○
Outside the usage area of the mountable CPU and medal count control CPU in the mounting area: ×

[No. 54]
Function: A function that manages main control state 2 among the functions for generating hall control and fraud monitoring information Mountable CPU and usage area of main control CPU in mounting area: ○
Outside the use area of the main control CPU in the mountable CPU and mounting area: ×
Mountable CPU and medal count control CPU usage area in mounting area: ○
Outside the usage area of the mountable CPU and medal count control CPU in the mounting area: ×

[No. 55]
Function: A function that manages game machine error states among the functions for generating hall controller/fraud monitoring information Mountable CPU and main control CPU usage area in mounting area: ○
Outside the use area of the main control CPU in the mountable CPU and mounting area: ×
Mountable CPU and medal count control CPU usage area in mounting area: ○
Outside the usage area of the mountable CPU and medal count control CPU in the mounting area: ×

[No. 56]
Function: A function to manage game machine fraud 1 among the functions for generating hall control and fraud monitoring information Implementation possible CPU and main control CPU usage area in implementation area : ○
Outside the use area of the main control CPU in the mountable CPU and mounting area: ×
Mountable CPU and medal count control CPU usage area in mounting area: ○
Outside the usage area of the mountable CPU and medal count control CPU in the mounting area: ×

[No. 57]
Function: A function to manage game machine fraud 2 among the functions for generating hall control and fraud monitoring information Implementation possible CPU and main control CPU usage area in implementation area : ○
Outside the use area of the main control CPU in the mountable CPU and mounting area: ×
Mountable CPU and medal count control CPU usage area in mounting area: ○
Outside the usage area of the mountable CPU and medal count control CPU in the mounting area: ×

[No. 58]
Function: A function that manages the specified number (IN) among the functions for generating hall control and fraud monitoring information Mountable CPU and main control CPU usage area in the mounting area: ○
Outside the use area of the main control CPU in the mountable CPU and mounting area: ×
Mountable CPU and medal count control CPU usage area in mounting area: ○
Outside the usage area of the mountable CPU and medal count control CPU in the mounting area: ×

[No. 59]
Function: A function to manage the number of payouts (OUT) among the functions for generating hall control and fraud monitoring information Mountable CPU and main control CPU usage area in the mounting area: ○
Outside the use area of the main control CPU in the mountable CPU and mounting area: ×
Mountable CPU and medal count control CPU usage area in mounting area: ○
Outside the usage area of the mountable CPU and medal count control CPU in the mounting area: ×

[No. 60]
Function: Function to control the setting change device Mountable CPU and usage area of the main control CPU in the mounting area: ○
Outside the use area of the main control CPU in the mountable CPU and mounting area: ×
Mountable CPU and medal count control CPU usage area in mounting area: ×
Outside the usage area of the mountable CPU and medal count control CPU in the mounting area: ×

[No. 61]
Function: Function to send information related to production to peripheral boards (production control board, etc.) Mountable CPU and main control CPU usage area in mounting area: ○
Outside the use area of the main control CPU in the mountable CPU and mounting area: ×
Mountable CPU and medal count control CPU usage area in mounting area: ○ or ×
Outside the usage area of the mountable CPU and medal count control CPU in the mounting area: ×

[No. 62]
Function: Function to send game machine information to peripheral boards Mountable CPU and main control CPU usage area in mounting area: ○
Outside the use area of the main control CPU in the mountable CPU and mounting area: ×
Mountable CPU and medal count control CPU usage area in mounting area: ○ or ×
Outside the usage area of the mountable CPU and medal count control CPU in the mounting area: ×

[No. 63]
Function: Fraud monitoring function Mountable CPU and main control CPU usage area in mounting area: ○
Outside the use area of the main control CPU in the mountable CPU and mounting area: ○
Mountable CPU and medal count control CPU usage area in mounting area: ○
Outside the usage area of the mountable CPU and medal count control CPU in the mounting area: ○

[No. 64]
Function: Function to perform error processing (game stop) Mountable CPU and main control CPU usage area in the mounting area: ○
Outside the use area of the main control CPU in the mountable CPU and mounting area: ×
Mountable CPU and medal count control CPU usage area in mounting area: ×
Outside the usage area of the mountable CPU and medal count control CPU in the mounting area: ×

[No. 65]
Function: Function to perform error processing (error notification) Mountable CPU and main control CPU usage area in mounting area: ○
Outside the use area of the main control CPU in the mountable CPU and mounting area: ○
Mountable CPU and medal count control CPU usage area in mounting area: ○
Outside the usage area of the mountable CPU and medal count control CPU in the mounting area: ○

[No. 66]
Function: Function to control the display of the role ratio monitor Mountable CPU and main control CPU usage area in the mounting area: ○
Outside the use area of the main control CPU in the mountable CPU and mounting area: ○
Mountable CPU and medal count control CPU usage area in mounting area: ○
Outside the usage area of the mountable CPU and medal count control CPU in the mounting area: ○

[No. 67]
Function: Function to generate signals necessary for testing game machines Mountable CPU and main control CPU usage area in mounting area: ○
Outside the use area of the main control CPU in the mountable CPU and mounting area: ○
Mountable CPU and medal count control CPU usage area in mounting area: ○ or ×
Outside the usage area of the mountable CPU and medal number control CPU in the mounting area: ○ or ×

Direct command transmission from the medal count control CPU to the peripheral board is preferably prohibited. The information of the medal count control CPU is preferably transmitted as a command to the peripheral board via the main control CPU. It is preferable that the medal number control CPU should not be provided with test terminals. Signals required for testing are preferably generated by the main control CPU.

[6. Basic function specifications]
[6.1. Common specifications [required]]
[6.1.1. Game medal insertion button 1]
FIG. 479 is a diagram showing the details of the game medal insertion button 1. FIG.
Device name: Game medal insertion button 1.
Reason for common specifications: This is because it is necessary as an input device for the "input switch signal" stipulated in the connection specifications of the testing machine for the reel-type game machine in the model test.
Sharing other functions of the device: Impossible.
Device function: A device for inserting game medals, and one game medal is inserted by pressing the button once. Since the ON time and OFF time of the "on-switch signal" of the testing machine are stipulated to be Typ 50 ms, it is preferable to design the tester corresponding to this signal.

[6.1.2. Settlement button]
FIG. 480 is a diagram showing details of the settlement button.
Device name: It is a settlement button.
Reason for common specifications: To ensure the performance described in the technical standards. It is also for unifying the operability of the player.
Sharing other functions of the device: Impossible.
Device function: A device for returning game medals inserted from the game medal number display device, and returns all the game medals inserted by pressing once to the game medal number display device. The function of the device becomes effective from the time when game medals are inserted (1 to 3) until the game is started by the start lever.

[6.1.3. Game medal count display device]
FIG. 481 is a diagram showing the details of the game medal number display device.
Device name: Game medal number display device.
Reason for common specifications: Because it is a basic device for medalless gaming machines. It is also for unifying the operability of the player.
Shared with other functions of the device: Can be shared with the error code display of the game machine.
Device function: A device that records and displays the total number of game medals that can be used for games (not including the number of game medals inserted) by an electromagnetic method. Specifically, it preferably includes at least one of the following items.
(1) 5-digit number display (7-segment display, etc., no display color specification).
(2) It is installed in a position where the player can always see it.
(3) The number of game medals that can be recorded and displayed shall be 0 to 16383.
(4) Upper digit processing shall be "□□□□0" (□ is blank).
(5) The number of game medals recorded is reflected on the display within approximately 300 ms.
(6) Overflow processing enables execution of the processing defined in [6.1.4] below.
(7) When shared with the error code display, the display is switched every 600 ms.
(8) The error code display should be "Pxx□□" and "Hxx□□" (□ is blank).

[6.1.4. Overflow processing of game medal number display device]
FIG. 482 is a diagram showing details of overflow processing of the game medal number display device.
Considering the performance of the medalless gaming machine, the maximum difference in the number of coins per business day is considered to be around 15,000. Therefore, the maximum number of game medals that can be recorded on the game medal number display device is set to 16383.
Therefore, the control device (various types of CPU) that controls the game medal number display device can execute the processing as shown in the figure so that the number of game medals recorded in the game medal number display device does not exceed the maximum number. do.

[When the number of game medals is 0 to 15999]
Withdrawal: Possible Borrowing: Possible Game processing: －

[When the number of game medals is 16000 to 16383]
Payout: Allowed Borrowing: Not allowed Game machine processing: The peripheral board notifies the player to count (notification only, game can be continued). Makes the game medal lending processing impossible (notifies the lending reception result response as abnormal). The test count signal is output for about 3500 ms (equivalent to 500 sheets) (*).

[When the number of game medals exceeds 16383]
Withdrawal: Impossible Borrowing: －
Game machine processing: Standby during payout processing (automatically returns as soon as payout becomes possible due to counting).
(*) For smooth implementation of the model test, it is preferable to generate and output the test count signal at the medalless game machine. If it is difficult to generate the test count signal in the medalless game machine due to problems such as program capacity, an equivalent signal may be generated in the test interface board. The test interface board can be placed between the medal count control board (main board) and the sub board (panel board, etc.).

The above-described overflow processing can also be applied to managed gaming machines.
Considering the performance of the managed gaming machine, it is considered that the maximum number of balls put out in one business day will generally not exceed 75,000. Therefore, the maximum number of game balls that can be recorded in the game ball number display device is 990,000.
Therefore, the control device (various CPUs) that controls the number-of-game-balls display device can execute control processing so that the number of game-balls recorded in the number-of-game-balls display device does not exceed the maximum number.

[When the number of game balls is 0 to 98000]
Withdrawal: Possible Borrowing: Possible Game processing: －
Note that the 98,000 may be 980,000.

[When the number of game balls is 98001 to 990000]
Payout: Allowed Borrowing: Not allowed Game machine processing: The peripheral board notifies the player to count (notification only, game can be continued). The game ball cannot be rented (the lending reception result response is notified as abnormal). The test count signal is output for about 3500 ms (equivalent to 500 sheets) (*).
In addition, 98001 pieces may be 980001 pieces.

[When the number of game balls exceeds 990,000]
Withdrawal: Impossible Borrowing: －
Game machine processing: Standby during payout processing (automatically returns as soon as payout becomes possible due to counting).
(*) For smooth implementation of the type test, it is preferable to generate and output the test count signal at the controlled game machine. If it is difficult to generate the test count signal in the management game machine due to problems such as program capacity, an equivalent signal may be generated in the test interface board. Note that the test interface board can be arranged between the frame control board (main board) and the sub board (effect control board, etc.).

[6.1.5. Count button]
FIG. 483 is a diagram showing details of the count button.
Device name: Count button.
Reason for common specifications: Because it is a basic device for medalless gaming machines. It is also for unifying the operability of the player.
Sharing other functions of the device: Impossible.
Device function: A device for transmitting a part of the number of game medals recorded in the game medal number display device to a dedicated unit. It is preferable that the count button is clearly indicated to the player and placed near the game medal number display device. It is preferable to provide "short press" and "long press" functions according to the pressing time of the counting button. For example, a “short press” is determined by a pressing time of less than 500 ms, and a “long press” is determined by a pressing time of 500 ms or longer. When "short press" is detected, one game medal is counted. When the "long press" is detected, 50 game medals are counted at each 300 ms counting notification timing during the long press. However, if the number of game medals is less than 50, all medals can be counted.

[6.1.5. Game medal count clear button]
FIG. 484 is a diagram showing details of the number of game medals clear button.
Device name: game medal number clear button.
Reason for common specifications: Because it is a basic device for medalless gaming machines. It is also intended to unify the operability of hall attendants.
Sharing other functions of the device: Impossible.
Device function: Clear the number of game medals recorded in the game medal number display device. In the case of a 2-CPU configuration, this device can be mounted on the medal count control CPU side. The operation procedure of the number-of-game-medals clear button is as follows.

[No.1]
Procedure: Power off the game machine
Processing for clearing the number of game medals:-

[No.2]
Procedure: Turn on the power while the number of game medals clear button is on. (*) In order to prevent unauthorized clearing of the number of game medals, a condition such as door sensor opening may be added to the processing conditions for clearing the number of game medals.
Process for clearing the number of game medals: Clear the number of game medals. Set the number of game medals clear status to ON.

[No.3]
procedure:-
Processing for clearing the number of game medals: Shift to normal mode.

[No.4]
Procedure: 1 game end Process for clearing the number of game medals: Set the number of game medals clear status to OFF.

[6.2. Individual specifications [reference]]
[6.2.1. Setting change device (setting change mode)]
FIG. 485 is a diagram showing a procedure for changing settings.
The procedure for installing the setting change device and changing the setting values is as follows.
[No.1]
Procedure: Power off the game machine
Setting change mode processing:-

[No.2]
Procedure: Turn on the power while the setting key is ON. (*) In order to prevent unauthorized setting changes, a condition such as door sensor opening may be added to the conditions for starting the setting change mode.
Setting change mode processing: Setting change mode start

[No.3]
procedure:-
Processing in setting change mode: In case of RWM abnormality, execute all RWM clear. If RWM is normal, RWM clear is executed when setting is changed.

[No.4]
procedure:-
Setting change mode processing: Set value display ON (set value is displayed). Set the setting changing status to ON.

[No.5]
Procedure: Update the setting value by pressing the setting button.
Processing in setting change mode: For example, if there are six settings, the setting values are changed in ascending order (1→2→3→4→5→6→1).

[No.6]
Procedure: Confirm the set value with the start lever ON.
Setting change mode processing:-

[No.7]
Procedure: Setting key OFF
Setting change mode processing: setting value display OFF (setting value is hidden). Exit the setting change mode and switch to the normal mode.

[No.8]
Procedure: 1 End of game Setting change mode processing: Setting changing status is set to OFF.

[6.2.2. Setting change device (setting confirmation mode)]
FIG. 486 is a diagram depicting a procedure for confirming settings;
The procedure for installing the setting change device and checking the setting values is as follows.
[No.1]
Procedure: Set key ON. (*) A condition such as a state in which game medals can be inserted may be added to the conditions for starting the setting confirmation mode. Also, when shifting to the setting confirmation mode, insertion of game medals, settlement, and reception of the start lever may be disabled.
Configuration confirmation mode processing: configuration confirmation mode start

[No.2]
procedure:-
Setting confirmation mode processing: Set value display ON (set value is displayed). The setting checking status is set to ON, and the status timer starts counting.

[No.3]
Procedure: Setting key OFF
Processing in setting confirmation mode: setting value display OFF (setting value is hidden). Ends the setting confirmation mode and shifts to the normal mode.

[No.4]
Procedure: Turn off the setting key and wait 5 seconds or more on the status timer.
Setting confirmation mode processing: Set the setting confirmation in progress status to OFF.

[6.3. Initialization of Specific Information]
FIG. 487 is a diagram showing details of information to be initialized.
"O" in the figure means to initialize, and "X" means not to initialize. The information described in the memory type in the figure is initialized as shown in the figure according to the processing state when the power is turned on.
[No.1]
Memory type: Setting value If the processing state at power-on is main control RWM error: ○
If the processing status at the time of power-on is Medal number control RWM abnormal: ×
If the processing state at power-on is setting change: ×
If the processing state when the power is turned on is the number of game medals cleared: ×
When the processing state at power-on is normal return: ×

[No.2]
Memory type: Number of game medals If the processing state when the power is turned on is main control RWM error: ×
If the processing status when the power is turned on is Medal number control RWM error: ○
If the processing state at power-on is setting change: ×
If the processing state when the power is turned on is clearing the number of game medals: ○
When the processing state at power-on is normal return: ×

[No.3]
Memory type: Input medal If the processing state at power-on is main control RWM error: ○
If the processing status at the time of power-on is Medal number control RWM abnormal: ×
If the processing status at power-on is setting change: ○
If the processing state when the power is turned on is the number of game medals cleared: ×
When the processing state at power-on is normal return: ×

[No.4]
Memory type: Role ratio monitor related If the processing state at power-on is main control RWM error: *
If the processing status at power on is Medal number control RWM error: *
If the processing state at power-on is setting change: ×
If the processing state when the power is turned on is the number of game medals cleared: ×
When the processing state at power-on is normal return: ×
(*) Initialize only when the RWM of the CPU that implements the role ratio monitor is abnormal.

[6.4.1. Loan processing]
When a rental notification (the number of loaned medals is other than 0) is received from the game ball rental device, the following processing is performed.
(1) If the lending process is not possible, a lending reception result response is sent as an error.
“Unable to process lending” means that at least one of the following items is included.
(a) If the lending serial number is abnormal (when it is not the lending serial number that follows the previously received lending serial number)
(b) When the number of borrowed sheets is abnormal (outside the range of 0 to 50 sheets)
(c) When the result of adding the number of loaned medals to the number of game medals exceeds 16383 (d) When the gaming machine information type is other than "0x02: Hall control/illegal monitoring information" (e) The number of counted medals in the counting notification is When notified with "1" or more (f) When the message length value is abnormal (g) When the command value is abnormal (h) When the checksum value is abnormal

(2) If the lending process is possible, the lending reception result response is sent as normal. When the VL power supply is ON, the number of loaned medals is added to the number of game medals.

[Chapter S1 Medal-less game machine - dedicated unit connection specifications]
[1. Glossary〕
The terms used in this chapter are explained below.

[No.1]
The gaming machine information center is a center that collects information such as the number of balls output from gaming machines.

[No.2]
A medal-less gaming machine is a gaming machine that has a game medal number display device (a display device for the number of game balls, etc.) and has a function that can output various information about the gaming machine to the gaming machine information center (hereinafter simply referred to as a gaming machine). In some cases). A medal-less gaming machine is a gaming machine that does not use game medals, and can execute a game based on information transmitted from a dedicated unit. Therefore, the player does not need to insert game medals. Also, in the medalless gaming machine, since the concept of credits disappears, the "credits display section" is not provided.

[No.3]
The main control CPU is a CPU mounted on the main board (main control board) of the game machine related to ROM and read/write memory (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as main control).

[No.4]
The medal number control CPU is a CPU mounted on the main board of the game machine or the medal number control board related to the ROM and the read/write memory (hereinafter also simply referred to as medal number control).

[No.5]
A dedicated unit is a unit dedicated to a gaming machine (external unit, game ball lending device).

[No.6]
A dedicated interface is an interface for defining communication specifications between a gaming machine and a dedicated unit. At least a part of the dedicated interface, dedicated cable, and associated devices, boards (main control board, medal count control board), circuits, CPU, software, programs, etc., are communication control means.

[No.7]
A hall computer is a computer that collects hall computer/fraud monitoring information (hereinafter also referred to as HC).

[No.8]
The card company data center is a center of a card unit organization or a card company connected to the gaming machine information center (hereinafter also referred to as company center).

[No.9]
A management computer is a computer that connects to a dedicated unit.

[No.10]
The main control chip ID number is the ID number of the main control of the gaming machine. The ID number of the main control is called differently depending on the manufacturer. For example, if it is made by a first maker, it may be called a chip individual number, and if it is made by a second maker, it may be called a chip code.

[No.11]
The medal number control chip ID number is an ID number for medal number control of the gaming machine. The ID number for medal count control is called differently depending on the manufacturer. For example, if it is made by a first maker, it may be called a chip individual number, and if it is made by a second maker, it may be called a chip code.

[No.12]
The number of game medals is the number of medals that can be inserted into the game machine (the number of medals recorded in the game medal number display device).

[No.13]
The number of counted medals is the number of counted medals transmitted by the gaming machine to, for example, a dedicated unit.

[No.14]
The number of lent medals is the number of lent medals that the dedicated unit has sent to, for example, a gaming machine.

[No.15]
The number of medals possessed is the number of counted medals received by the dedicated unit from, for example, a gaming machine, and the number of medals managed by the card company.

[No.16]
The gaming machine information is a general term for gaming machine installation information, gaming machine performance information, hall controller/fraud monitoring information.

[No.17]
The gaming machine installation information is information such as a maker code, a product code, a chip ID number, etc. for main control and medal number control, and is information transmitted to the gaming machine information center.

[No.18]
The gaming machine performance information includes MY (maximum number of difference), role ratio (percentage of payouts by role out of the total number of gaming machine medals paid out), continuous role ratio (out of game medals paid out payout ratio of continuous accessories), etc., and is information transmitted to the gaming machine information center.

[No.19]
Hall control/fraud monitoring information includes game results such as IN, OUT, and jackpot information, and information such as various errors.

[2. Scope of application〕
The configuration shown below can be applied to the software/hardware interface between the medalless game machine and the dedicated unit shown in the system configuration diagram below (see D in FIG. 488).

[3. system configuration diagram〕
FIG. 488 is a diagram showing a system configuration diagram of a medalless gaming machine.
The game machine 9800 (medalless game machine) transmits "hall control/fraud monitoring information" to the dedicated unit 9802 according to the specifications described in this chapter, and the dedicated unit 9802 has a function of outputting the information to the HC9804. .

[4. Hardware Overview]
The dedicated interface hardware is composed of dedicated interface circuits 9801 and 9803 between the gaming machine 9800 and the dedicated unit 9802 .

[4.1. Overview of dedicated interface circuit between game machine and dedicated unit]
Dedicated interface circuits 9801 and 9803 use an asynchronous serial port and perform communication by an isolation method using a photocoupler.
Dedicated interface circuits 9801 and 9803 transmit hall control/fraud monitoring information and counting notification from the gaming machine 9800 to the dedicated unit 9802 by telegram method, and receive the rental notification from the dedicated unit 9802 to the gaming machine 9800. conduct.

[4.2. Dedicated unit overview]
The dedicated unit 9802 has a communication function with the gaming machine information center 9807 .
The dedicated unit 9802 notifies the gaming machine information center 9807 of various information related to the gaming machine.

[5. Dedicated interface hardware specifications]
[5.1. Dedicated interface input/output connector]
FIG. 489 is a diagram showing assignment of connector pins of dedicated interface input/output connectors.
[Pin number 1]
Signal name: LG
Direction: Dedicated unit → Game machine Signal content: Insulated GND

[Pin number 2]
Signal name: LG
Direction: Dedicated unit → game machine Signal content: Connected to LG on the dedicated unit side and used as GND for transmission signals.

[Pin number 3]
Signal name: LG
Direction: Dedicated unit → game machine Signal content: Connected to LG on the dedicated unit side and used as GND for received signals.

[Pin number 4]
Signal name: PSI
Direction: Game machine → Dedicated unit Signal content: Connection confirmation signal (signal to confirm that the dedicated unit is connected to the medalless game machine)

[Pin number 5]
Signal name: LG
Direction: Dedicated unit → Game machine Signal content: Insulated GND

[Pin number 6]
Signal name: Transmission signal Direction: Game machine → Dedicated unit Signal content: Signal sent from game machine to dedicated unit

[Pin number 7]
Signal name: Received signal Direction: Dedicated unit → game machine Signal content: Signal received by the game machine from the dedicated unit

[Pin numbers 8 and 9]
Signal name: VL
Direction: Dedicated unit → Game machine Signal content: Insulation 5V

[Pin number -]
Signal name: FG_U
Direction: - (*1)
Signal content: Dedicated unit side frame GND
(*1) It is preferable not to connect to the FG inside the medalless game machine.

FIG. 490 is a diagram showing a connection example of a dedicated cable.
The game machine 9800 and the dedicated unit 9802 are connected by a dedicated cable 9810 . The length of dedicated cable 9810 is preferably between 1.5m and 2.0m.
The dedicated cable 9810 has DSUB 9-pin (pin type) connectors 9811 at both ends.

On the game machine 9800 side, a DSUB 9-pin (socket type, with a spring unit) connector 9813 is installed on a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 9812 of the game machine 9800, and a DSUB 9-pin (pin type ) is connected to the connector 9811 of .
A predetermined connector (not shown) is installed on the dedicated unit 9802 side, and is connected to a DSUB 9-pin (pin type) connector 9811 of the dedicated cable 9810 .

FIG. 491 is a diagram showing a connector diagram of a dedicated cable.
The type of connector 9811 of dedicated cable 9810 is DSUB 9-pin (pin type, with lock plate).
The maximum lateral length X1 of the connector 9811 is, for example, 39.99 mm.
The length X2 of the lateral pin arrangement area of the connector 9811 is, for example, 16.89 mm.
The maximum longitudinal length Y1 of the connector 9811 is, for example, 14.15 mm.
The length Y2 of the connector 9811 excluding the projecting portions at the upper and lower ends in the vertical direction is, for example, 12.4 mm.
The length Y3 of the vertical pin arrangement area of the connector 9811 is, for example, 8.35 mm.

[5.2. Dedicated cable〕
The dedicated cable 9810 preferably twists the 6th pin and the 2nd pin, and the 7th pin and the 3rd pin.
The cable used for the dedicated cable 9810 is preferably shielded and connected to the metal parts of the DSUB connectors on both sides.

[5.3. Dedicated interface signal specifications]
[5.3.1. Input/output method]
The input/output method is an insulation method using a photocoupler.

[5.3.2. Interface signal shared power supply (VL)]
The interface signal shared power supply uses VL (isolated 5V) supplied from a dedicated unit. The power supply is insulated DC 5V. The maximum current consumption is 150mA.

[5.3.3. Interface signal logic]
FIG. 492 is a diagram showing the logic of transmission and reception signals on the connector of the dedicated cable.
First, when the start bit is transmitted (or received), the signal changes from H level to L level, then 8 signals for 1 byte are transmitted, and finally when the stop bit is transmitted, the signal changes to L level. to H level.

[5.4. input/output circuit]
FIG. 493 is a diagram showing an example of an input/output circuit of a dedicated unit and a game machine.
The dedicated unit 9802 has a unit substrate 9820 having a unit control section 9821 .
The game machine 9800 includes a terminal board 9812 for connecting a game ball lending device.
The unit board 9820 and the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 9812 are connected by a dedicated cable 9810 of FG and 9 pins.

[Pin numbers 8 and 9 on the dedicated unit 9802 side]
Pin numbers 8 and 9 on the dedicated unit 9802 side are connected to ICa (+VOUT) via VL and VL (isolated 5V).
[Pin numbers 1 and 5 on the dedicated unit 9802 side]
Pin numbers 1 and 5 on the dedicated unit 9802 side are connected to ICa (-VOUT) via LG and LG (isolated GND).
Cb is arranged between VL (insulated 5V) and LG (insulated GND).

ICa(+VIN) is connected to unit 5V.
ICa(-VIN) is connected to unit GND.
Ca is arranged between the unit 5V and the unit GND.
ICa (ON/OFF) is connected to the unit control section 9821 .

[Pin numbers 8 and 9 on the gaming machine 9800 side]
Pin numbers 8 and 9 on the gaming machine 9800 side are connected to VL.
[Pin numbers 1 and 5 on the gaming machine 9800 side]
Pin numbers 1 and 5 on the gaming machine 9800 side are connected to LG.
C1 and Z1 are arranged between VL and LG.

[Pin number 4 on the dedicated unit 9802 side]
Pin number 4 on the dedicated unit 9802 side is connected to ICb via VL, Ra, LG, and Rc.
Da and Db are arranged between VL and LG.
Rb and Dc are arranged between Ra and Rc.

ICb is connected to unit controller 9821 via unit 5V having Rd.
ICb is connected to unit GND.

[Pin number 4 on the gaming machine 9800 side]
Pin number 4 on the gaming machine 9800 side is connected to LG.

[Pin number 6 on the dedicated unit 9802 side]
Pin number 6 on the dedicated unit 9802 side is connected to ICc via VL, Re, LG, and Rg.
Dd and De are arranged between VL and LG.
Rf and Df are arranged between Re and Rg.

ICc is connected to unit 5V, unit control section 9821 and unit GND.
Cc is arranged between unit 5V and unit GND.

[Pin number 6 on the gaming machine 9800 side]
Pin number 6 on the gaming machine 9800 side is connected to IC2 via R2, LG, VL, and VL.
D1, D2, and R3 are arranged between VL (left side in the figure) and LG.

[Pin number 2 on the dedicated unit 9802 side]
Pin number 2 on the dedicated unit 9802 side is connected to LG.
[Pin number 2 on the gaming machine 9800 side]
Pin number 2 on the gaming machine 9800 side is connected to IC2.
C2 is arranged between VL (right side in the drawing) and pin number 2 on the gaming machine 9800 side.
The IC2 is connected to the gaming machine 5V and transmission signals.

[Pin number 7 on the dedicated unit 9802 side]
Pin number 7 on the dedicated unit 9802 side is connected to ICd via Rh, VL, and LG.
Dg and Dh are arranged between VL and LG.
Ri, Di, and Cd are arranged between VL and ICd.

ICd is connected to unit 5V and unit control section 9821 .
Dj and Rj are arranged between the unit 5V and the unit control section 9821 .

[Pin number 7 on the gaming machine 9800 side]
Pin number 7 on the gaming machine 9800 side is connected to IC3 via LG, VL, R5 and R4.
D3 and D4 are arranged between VL and LG.
The IC3 is connected to the game machine 5V, the reception signal and the game machine GND.

[Pin number 3 on the dedicated unit 9802 side]
Pin number 3 on the dedicated unit 9802 side is connected to LG.
[Pin number 3 on the gaming machine 9800 side]
Pin number 3 on the gaming machine 9800 side is connected to IC3 via R6.
R5 is arranged between VL and pin number 3 on the gaming machine 9800 side.

IC1 is connected to VL and LG with R1. Also, the IC1 is connected to the VL connection and the gaming machine GND.
The IC2 is connected to the game machine 5V and receives a transmission signal (a signal transmitted from the game machine to the dedicated unit).
The IC3 is connected to the game machine 5V and the game machine GND, and receives a reception signal (a signal received by the game machine from the dedicated unit).

[5.5. Interface circuit resistance constant]
[5.5.1. Amusement machine side interface circuit resistance constant]
FIG. 494 is a diagram showing circuit resistance constants and the like of the gaming machine side interface.
Part number: IC1
Constant or part name: Specified part 1 (for example, photocoupler)

Part number: IC2, IC3
Constant or part name: Specified part 2 (for example, photocoupler)

Part number: R1
Constant or part name: 330Ω

Part number: R2
Constant or part name: 100Ω

Part number: R3, R5
Constant or part name: 1kΩ

Part number: R4, R6
Constant or part name: 330Ω

Part number: C1
Constant or part name: 1μF

Part number: C2
Constant or part name: 0.1 μF

Part number: D1, D2, D3, D4
Constant or part name: Defined part 3 (eg diode)

Part number: Z1
Constant or part name: Standard part 4 (for example, surge absorber)

[5.5.1. Dedicated unit side interface circuit resistance constant]
FIG. 495 is a diagram showing circuit resistance constants and the like of the dedicated unit side interface.
Part number: ICa
Constant or part name: Specified part 5 (e.g. circuit or converter) (*1)

Part number: ICb
Constant or part name: Specified part 6 (for example, photocoupler) (*2)

Part number: ICc, ICd
Constant or part name: Specified part 7 (e.g. photocoupler) (*2)

Part number: Ra, Rc
Constant or part name: 300Ω

Part number: Rb
Constant or part name: 10kΩ

Part number: Rd
Constant or part name: 1kΩ

Part number: Re, Rg
Constant or part name: 270Ω

Part number: Rf, Ri
Constant or part name: 820Ω

Part number: Rh
Constant or part name: 100Ω

Part number: Rj
Constant or part name: 150Ω

Part number: Ca
Constant or part name: 10 to 100 μF

Part number: Cb
Constant or part name: 1 to 100 μF

Part number: Cc, Cd
Constant or part name: 0.1 μF

Part number: Da-Dj
Constant or part name: Specified part 8 (for example, diode) (*3)

(*1) [5.3.2. A regulator circuit or a DC-DC converter that satisfies the specifications of the interface signal shared power supply (VL)] and can be turned on and off is preferable. Further, it is preferable to arrange so that when the regulator circuit or the DC-DC converter is turned off, the common interface signal power supply for ICb, ICc, and ICd is also turned off.
(*2) Any parts can be used.
(*3) It is preferable to use a component that can take measures against static electricity and other measures (measures against noise, etc.). If the parts used are discontinued, equivalent parts can be selected as appropriate.

[6. Software overview]
(1) The software interface of the dedicated interface communicates information for lending out game medals, information for counting game medals, and game machine information through an asynchronous serial port in a message format.
(2) Information for lending out game medals is transmitted/received between the dedicated unit and the gaming machine in the form of telegrams in units of the number of game medals.
(3) Information for counting game medals is transmitted by the gaming machine as a telegram in units of the number of game medals.
(4) There are three types of game machine information: game machine installation information, game machine performance information, hall controller/fraud monitoring information, and the game machine notifies any one of them by telegram according to the notification conditions.

[7. Communication conditions between gaming machines and dedicated units]
FIG. 496 is a diagram showing communication conditions between gaming machines and dedicated units.
The communication method is asynchronous serial communication.
The communication speed is 62500bps.
The bit configuration is "start bit: 1, data bit: 8, stop bit: 1: parity: none".
Communication control is full-duplex communication, the primary station is a gaming machine, and the secondary station is a dedicated unit.

[8. Data structure between gaming machines and dedicated units]
FIG. 497 is a diagram showing the configuration of data between gaming machines and dedicated units.
The data structure consists of "telegram length", "command", "serial number", "data part", and "checksum" in order from the beginning of the data. The message range is from the beginning to the end of the data.
It is preferable that the telegram should always be transmitted in one frame and should not be divided and transmitted.

FIG. 498 is a diagram showing the details of the data configuration between gaming machine and dedicated unit.
[No.1]
Name: Message length Data length: 1 byte Data format: HEX (hexadecimal)
Contents: Stores the message length from message length to checksum. The range is 0x05-0x39 (5-57).

[No.2]
Name: Command Data length: 1 byte Data format: HEX (hexadecimal)
Contents: Stores the command code of the message.

[No.3]
Name: Serial number Data length: 1 byte Data format: HEX (hexadecimal)
Contents: Stores the serial number, counting serial number, and lending serial number. This is the serial number sequence number. The range is 0x00-0xFF (0-255).

[No.4]
Name: Data section Data length: 1 to 53 bytes Data format: HEX (hexadecimal)
Contents: Stores message data.

[No.5]
Name: Checksum Data length: 1 byte Data format: HEX (hexadecimal)
Contents: Add the data from message length to data part, and store the lower 1 byte of the total.

[8.1. Byte order between gaming machines and dedicated units]
The byte order in this chapter defines B as big endian and L as little endian.

[9. Business message between game machine and dedicated unit]
[9.1. List of telegrams between game machines and dedicated units]
FIG. 499 is a diagram showing a list of telegrams between gaming machines and dedicated units.
[No.1]
Message name: Game machine information notification Transmission direction: Game machine → Dedicated unit Command: 0x01
Overview: The game machine notifies the dedicated unit of the game machine information.

[No.2]
Message name: Count notification Transmission direction: Game machine → Dedicated unit Command: 0x02
Overview: The gaming machine notifies the dedicated unit of counting information.

[No.3]
Message name: Rental notice Transmission direction: Dedicated unit → Game machine Command: 0x13
Overview: The dedicated unit notifies the gaming machine of lending information.

[No.4]
Message name: Rental receipt result response Transmission direction: Game machine → Dedicated unit Command: 0x03
Overview: The gaming machine responds to the exclusive unit with the receipt result of lending information.

[9.2. Game machine - Dedicated unit message details]
[9.2.1. Game machine information notification]
FIG. 500 is a diagram showing details of gaming machine information notification.
Message name: Game machine information notification Message length: 18 to 57 bytes (variable length)
Direction of transmission: Game machine → Dedicated unit Telegram summary: The game machine notifies the dedicated unit of gaming machine information in this message. There are three types of game machine information: game machine installation information, game machine performance information, hall controller/fraud monitoring information, and any one of them is notified according to the notification conditions of each information.

[No.1]
Data name: Message length Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: 0x12 to 0x39

[No.2]
Data name: Command Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Content: 0x01

[No.3]
Data name: Serial number Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: Sequence number (0x00 to 0xFF (0 to 255))

[No.4]
Data name: Gaming machine type Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: Indicates the type of gaming machine.

[No.5]
Data name: Gaming machine information type Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: 0x00: Gaming machine performance information, 0x01: Gaming machine installation information, 0x02: Hall controller/fraud monitoring information

The game machine information notifies one of the following set by the type code.
[No.6]
Data name: Gaming machine performance information of gaming machine information (details are shown in 9.2.1.4)
Data length: 51 bytes Byte order: -
Contents: total number of input, total number of payout, MY, etc.

[No.6]
Data name: Game machine installation information of game machine information (details are shown in 9.2.1.5)
Data length: 40 bytes Byte order: -
Contents: Manufacturer code, product code, chip ID number for main control/medal number control

[No.6]
Data name: Hall control/fraud monitoring information of game machine information (details are shown in 9.2.1.6)
Data length: 12 to 16 bytes Byte order: -
Contents: IN (number of input medals), OUT (number of output medals), BB (big bonus), RB (regular bonus), AT (assist time), door open signal, security signal, etc.

[No.7]
Data name: Checksum Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: Checksum data

[9.2.1.1. Regarding the serial number (9.2.1.No.3)]
The game machine notifies the dedicated unit of the serial number by the following control.
(1) When the power is turned on, the serial number "0x00(0)" is notified.
(2) After the power is turned on, the serial number (9.2.1. No. 3) is updated (+1) each time notification is made.
(3) Update (+2) the value following the serial number "0xFF (255)" to "0x01 (1)".

[9.2.1.2. About game machine type (9.2.1.No.4)]
FIG. 501 is a diagram showing the code system (1 byte) of the game machine type.
Bit 7: Management medium (0 = game ball, 1 = game medal)
Bit6-Bit4: Group classification (0 = Union A, 1 = Union B, 2-7 = Reserve)
Bit 3 to Bit 0: Game machine type (1 = Pachinko machine, 2 = Revolving machine, 3 = Arrange ball game machine, 4 = Jiyan ball game machine, 5 to 15 = Spare, 0 = Unused)

FIG. 502 is a diagram showing an example of a gaming machine type list.
Code: 0x01
Game machine: Pachinko machine Group: Association A Management medium: Game balls

Code: 0x82
Pachislot and pachislot machine: Spindle-type game machine Group: Association A Management media: Game tokens

Code: 0x83
Game machine: Arrange ball game machine Group: Association A Management media: Game tokens

Code: 0x84
Game machine: Jiyan ball game machine Group: Association A Management media: Game medals

Code: 0x92
Pachislot and Pachinko Machines: Pachislot Machine Group: Association B Management Media: Game Tokens

[9.2.1.3. Regarding game machine information type (9.2.1. No. 5)]
The gaming machine notifies the type of gaming machine information with the following code.
(1) Type code 0x00: Gaming machine performance information Notifies the total number of inserted cards, total number of paid cards, MY, and the like.
(2) Type code 0x01: gaming machine installation information Notifies the manufacturer code, product code, and chip ID number for main control/medal count control.
(3) Type code 0x02: Hall controller/fraud monitoring information Notifies IN, OUT, BB, RB, AT, door open signal, security signal, and the like.

[9.2.1.4. Telegram when “0x00: Gaming machine performance information” is set for gaming machine information type]
FIG. 503 is a diagram showing a telegram when "0x00: gaming machine performance information" is set in the gaming machine information type.
Data name: Total number of inserted game machine information (gaming machine performance information) Data length: 3 bytes Byte order: L
Contents: The number of inserted cards accumulated since the power was turned on (replays are not included).
It should be noted that the value of the information stored after the power is turned on, such as the total number of loaded sheets, is cleared (reset) when the power is turned off or turned on. For example, as for information such as the total number of payouts, MY, and the total number of payouts of accessories shown below, the information stored after the power is turned on is the same.

Data name: Total number of payouts of gaming machine information (gaming machine performance information) Data length: 3 bytes Byte order: L
Contents: Cumulative number of payouts from power ON (replay is not included)
Here, the total number of payouts indicates only the number of game values paid out to the player by winning a "small win" such as a "bell win", a "watermelon win", and a "cherry win".

In this way, the medal-less gaming machine (medal count control board, communication control means) is the information excluding the predetermined number of game medals inserted by the replay execution means, and the accumulated number of inserted game medals since the power is turned on. and the total number of payouts (total payout number information) to the dedicated unit.

Data name: MY of gaming machine information (gaming machine performance information)
Data length: 3 bytes Byte order: L
Contents: Maximum MY calculated after power ON

Data name: Game machine information (gaming machine performance information) total payout number Data length: 3 bytes Byte order: L
Contents: The number of payouts due to the operation of the accumulated role since the power was turned on

Data name: Game machine information (gaming machine performance information) total payout number of consecutive accessories Data length: 3 bytes Byte order: L
Contents: The number of payouts due to the operation of the first class special accessories accumulated from power ON

Data name: Accessory ratio of game machine information (game machine performance information) Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: Role ratio monitor information (FFh when the specified number of games is not reached). The role ratio monitor includes the role ratio, the continuous role ratio, the advantageous section ratio, the instructed role ratio (the role ratio including the game medals acquired when the instruction occurred), the role ratio, etc. (all It is a display device that displays the ratio of the number of games played when the accessory is activated and the number of games played when the accessory is not activated when the accessory is activated and the number of games played when the accessory is not activated. The advantageous section is a section in which an instruction effect for instructing the winning of a small winning combination can be executed. These values can be calculated by the main control board (main control CPU) and medal count control board (medal count control CPU) based on predetermined calculation formulas and the like.

Data name: Game machine information (gaming machine performance information) continuous accessory ratio Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: Role ratio monitor information (FFh when the specified number of games is not reached)

Data name: Advantageous section ratio of gaming machine information (gaming machine performance information) Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: Role ratio monitor information (non-applicable / FFh when the specified number of games is not reached)

Data name: Game machine information (gaming machine performance information) instruction-inclusive accessory ratio Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: Role ratio monitor information (non-applicable / FFh when the specified number of games is not reached)

Data name: Accessory status ratio of gaming machine information (gaming machine performance information) Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: Role ratio monitor information (FFh when the specified number of games is not reached)

Data name: Number of games played in gaming machine information (gaming machine performance information) Data length: 2 bytes Byte order: L
Contents: The number of games accumulated since the power was turned on

Data name: Reserve game machine information (gaming machine performance information) Data length: 24 bytes Byte order: -
Contents: Reserved (1 byte x 24, fixed to 00h if not used)

Data name: Reservation 1 of gaming machine information (gaming machine performance information)
Data length: 3 bytes Byte order: -
Content: Used by dedicated unit (fixed to 00h) (maximum MY calculated by dedicated unit).

Data name: Reservation 2 of gaming machine information (gaming machine performance information)
Data length: 2 bytes Byte order: -
Contents: Used by dedicated unit (fixed to 00h) (number of games calculated by dedicated unit).
The gaming machine performance information is information transmitted from the dedicated unit to the gaming machine information center.

[9.2.1.5. Telegram when "0x01: gaming machine installation information" is set for gaming machine information type]
FIG. 504 is a diagram showing a telegram when "0x01: gaming machine installation information" is set in the gaming machine information type.
Data name: Main control chip ID number of game machine information (game machine installation information) Data length: 9 bytes Byte order: B
Contents: Main control chip ID number of game machine

Data name: Main control chip manufacturer code of game machine information (game machine installation information) Data length: 3 bytes Byte order: B
Contents: Manufacturer code written in the main control management area

Data name: Main control chip product code of game machine information (game machine installation information) Data length: 8 bytes Byte order: B
Contents: Product code written in the main control management area

Data name: Medal count control chip ID number Data length: 9 bytes Byte order: B
Contents: Game machine medal count control chip ID number (0 when not installed)

Data name: Medal count control chip manufacturer code Data length: 3 bytes Byte order: B
Contents: Manufacturer code written in the management area for medal count control (0 when not installed)

Data name: Medal count control chip product code Data length: 8 bytes Byte order: B
Contents: Product code written in the medal number control management area (0 when not installed)
The gaming machine installation information is information transmitted from the dedicated unit to the gaming machine information center.

[9.2.1.5.1. Main control chip ID number]
FIG. 505 is a diagram showing a method of generating a main control chip ID number (for the first chip).
The individual chip numbers of the CPU are read in ascending order of address.
The upper 4 bytes of this number are filled with 0, and the lower 1 byte is added with an identification code to make it 9 bytes.
For example, when the individual chip number is 0x12345678, zero padding is 4 bytes (0x00000000), the individual chip number is 4 bytes (0x12345678), and the identification code (*) is 1 byte (0x21).

FIG. 506 is a diagram showing a method of generating a main control chip ID number (for the second chip).
The chip code of the CPU is read in ascending order of address.
The upper 4 bytes of this code are filled with 0, and the lower 1 byte is added with an identification code to make 9 bytes.
For example, if the chip code is 0x34567812, zero padding is 4 bytes (0x00000000), the chip code is 4 bytes (0x34567812), and the identification code (*) is 1 byte (0x41).

[9.2.1.5.2. Medal number control chip ID number]
FIG. 507 is a diagram showing a method of generating medal number control chip ID numbers (for the first chip).
The individual chip numbers of the CPU are read in ascending order of address.
The upper 4 bytes of this number are filled with 0, and the lower 1 byte is added with an identification code to make it 9 bytes.
For example, when the individual chip number is 0x87654321, zero padding is 4 bytes (0x00000000), the individual chip number is 4 bytes (0x87654321), and the identification code (*) is 1 byte (0x21).

FIG. 508 is a diagram showing a method of generating a medal number control chip ID number (in the case of the second chip).
The chip code of the CPU is read in ascending order of address.
The upper 4 bytes of this code are filled with 0, and the lower 1 byte is added with an identification code to make 9 bytes.
For example, if the chip code is 0x21876543, zero padding is 4 bytes (0x00000000), the chip code is 4 bytes (0x21876543), and the identification code (*) is 1 byte (0x41).

FIG. 509 is a diagram showing a method of generating a medal count control chip ID number (when medal count control is not installed).
The upper 8 bytes are filled with 0, and the lower 1 byte is added with an identification code (non-installed) to make 9 bytes.
In this case, zero-filling is 8 bytes (0x0000000000000000), and the identification code (*) is 1 byte (0x00).

FIG. 510 is a diagram showing the identification code of the main control/medal number control chip ID number.
The identification code is 1 byte.
The CPU manufacturer is identified by Bits 5-7.
The CPU type is identified by Bits 0-4.

When Bits 5 to 7 are "0", the CPU maker is "non-mounted or unused medal number control chip".
If Bits 5-7 are "1", the CPU manufacturer is the "first manufacturer".
If Bits 5-7 are "2", the CPU manufacturer is the "second manufacturer".
If Bits 5-7 are "3-7", they are reserved.

When Bits 5-7 are "0" and Bits 0-4 are "0", the CPU type is "non-equipped with medal number control".
If Bits 5-7 are "0" and Bits 0-4 are "1-31", the CPU type is "unused".

If Bits 5-7 are "1" and Bits 0-4 are "0", they are unused.
When Bits 5-7 are "1" and Bits 0-4 are "1", the CPU type is "first chip A".
When Bits 5-7 are "1" and Bits 0-4 are "2", the CPU type is "first chip B".
If Bits 5-7 are "1" and Bits 0-4 are "3-31", they are reserved.

If Bits 5-7 are "2" and Bits 0-4 are "0", they are unused.
If Bits 5-7 are "2" and Bits 0-4 are "1", the CPU type is "second chip A".
If Bits 5-7 are "2" and Bits 0-4 are "2", the CPU type is "second chip B".
If Bits 5-7 are "2" and Bits 0-4 are "3", the CPU type is "second chip C".
If Bits 5-7 are "2" and Bits 0-4 are "4-31", they are reserved.

If Bits 5-7 are "3-7" and Bits 0-4 are "0", they are unused.
If Bits 5-7 are "3-7" and Bits 0-4 are "1-31", they are reserved.

[9.2.1.6. Telegram when "0x02: Hall control/unauthorized monitoring information" is set for the gaming machine information type]
511 to 513 are diagrams showing telegrams when "0x02: hall console/unauthorized monitoring information" is set as the gaming machine information type.

[Fig. 511]
Data name: Number of game medals in game machine information (hall control/fraud monitoring information) (*1)
Data length: 3 bytes Byte order: L
Contents: The current number of game medals (0x000000 to 0xFF3F00 (0 to 16383)) recorded (displayed) in the game medal number display device (game ball number display device). A storage example is 0xD00700 when the number of game medals is 2000.

Data name: Number of medals inserted in gaming machine information (hall controller/fraud monitoring information) Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: Number of inserted medals (0xFD to 0x03 (-3 to 3)). The upper 1 bit is a sign (+/-) bit. If there are medals returned by the checkout button, subtract them. It is not treated as an HC signal (external signal CN2-1).

Data name: Number of payout medals in game machine information (hall control/fraud monitoring information) Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: Number of paid out medals (0x00 to 0x0F (0 to 15)). It is not treated as an HC signal (external signal CN2-2).

In this way, the medal-less gaming machine (medal count control board, communication control means) provides the number of inserted medals (inserted medal count information) related to the number of inserted game medals and the number of payout medals related to the number of paid out game medals. (Information on the number of medals to be paid out) is transmitted to the dedicated unit.
The number of inserted medals and the number of paid-out medals are treated as information for the dedicated unit, and are not treated as information for the hall computer connected to the dedicated unit.

Data name: Main control status 1 of gaming machine information (hall control/illegal monitoring information)
Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: Bit0: RB (external signals CN2-3), Bit1: BB (external signals CN2-4), Bit2: AT (external signals CN2-5), Bit3: gaming machine status signal 1, Bit4: gaming machine status signal 2 , Bit5: gaming machine status signal 3, Bit6: gaming machine status signal 4, Bit7: unused

Data name: Main control status 2 of gaming machine information (hall controller/fraud monitoring information)
Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: Bit 0: Gaming machine status signal 5, Bit 1: Gaming machine status signal 6, Bit 2: Gaming machine status signal 7, Bit 3: Not used, Bit 4: Not used, Bit 5: Not used, Bit 6: Not used, Bit 7: Not used

[Fig. 512]
Data name: Gaming machine error status of gaming machine information (hall control/illegal monitoring information) Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: Error code occurring in the gaming machine. Bits 0 to 5: Error code (000000 = no error), Bit 6: 0 = Medal count control, 1 = Main control, Bit 7: 0 = Notification only, 1 = Notification + HC (hall control) output. Bit 0 to 7: 0 = No error occurred. "Reporting" refers to reporting by a dedicated unit (for example, error display or warning sound output). The presence or absence of HC output for each error is arbitrarily determined by the gaming machine.

Data name: Gaming machine fraud 1 (main control) in gaming machine information (hall control/fraud monitoring information)
Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: Bit 0: Setting change signal, Bit 1: Setting confirmation signal, Bit 2: Fraud detection signal 1, Bit 3: Fraud detection signal 2, Bit 4: Fraud detection signal 3, Bit 5: Security signal (external signal CN2-7), Bit 6 : Not used, Bit7: Not used

Data name: Gaming machine fraud 2 (main control or medal count control) in gaming machine information (hall controller/fraud monitoring information)
Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: Bit 0: set door open signal, Bit 1: door open signal (external signal CN2-8), Bit 2: unused, Bit 3: game medal clear detection, Bit 4: unused, Bit 5: unused, Bit 6: unused, Bit7: Not used

Data name: Game machine information (hall controller/fraud monitoring information) game machine fraud 3 (main control or medal count control)
Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: Bit0-7: Not used

Data name: Number of game information in game information (external signal CN2-1, 2) Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: The number (n) of type information/count information. n=0x00 to 0x02 (0 to 2). When the number of game information is 0, the following type information and count information are not transmitted.

Data name: Type information 1 of game information (external signal CN2-1, 2)
Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: Type information 1

Data name: Count information 1 of game information (external signal CN2-1, 2)
Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: Count information 1

Data name: Type information 2 of game information (external signal CN2-1, 2)
Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: Type information 2

Data name: Count information 2 of game information (external signal CN2-1, 2)
Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: Count information 2

(*1) The “number of game medals”, “number of inserted medals”, and “number of paid out medals” to be transmitted in this telegram have the following relationships.
As a result, the dedicated unit detects an abnormality in the "number of game medals".
"Number of game medals" = "Number of game medals sent last time" - "Number of inserted medals" + "Number of paid out medals"
+ "Number of loaned medals" received after "Number of game medals" sent last time
- "Number of counted medals (*2)" sent after "Number of game medals" sent last time
(*2) “Counting medals” are sent even in cases other than gaming machine information (hall control/fraud monitoring information).

[9.2.1.6.1. Main control state 1]
FIG. 514 is a diagram showing details of each bit of main control state 1. FIG.
Each signal in main control state 1 is treated as a signal for HC. Each signal output from the game machine is directly output from the dedicated unit to the HC side.
[Bit 0]
Name: RB (external signal CN2-3)
Details: RB active information. Set "1" during bonus operation equivalent to RB.

[Bit 1]
Name: BB (external signal CN2-4)
Details: BB active information. Set "1" while a bonus equivalent to BB is in operation.

[Bit 2]
Name: AT (external signal CN2-5)
Details: AT operation information. Set "1" during AT equivalent bonus operation.

[Bit 3]
Name: Gaming machine status signal 1 (*1)
Details: Game machine status signal. "1" is set while the gaming machine status signal 1 is ON.

[Bit 4]
Name: Game machine status signal 2 (*1)
Details: Game machine status signal. Set "1" while the gaming machine status signal 2 is ON.

[Bit 5]
Name: Gaming machine status signal 3 (*1)
Details: Game machine status signal. "1" is set while the gaming machine status signal 3 is ON.

[Bit 6]
Name: Gaming machine status signal 4 (*1)
Details: Game machine status signal. "1" is set while the gaming machine status signal 4 is ON.

[Bit 7]
Name: Unused Details: 0 fixed

(*1) Gaming machine status signals 1 to 4 are used to set gaming machine statuses other than RB, BB, and AT. The gaming machine status signals 1 to 4 are used for different purposes depending on the model of the gaming machine.

[9.2.1.6.2. Main control state 2]
FIG. 515 is a diagram showing details of each bit of main control state 2. FIG.
Each signal in main control state 2 is treated as a signal for HC. Each signal output from the game machine is directly output from the dedicated unit to the HC side.
[Bit 0]
Name: Gaming machine status signal 5 (*2)
Details: Game machine status signal. "1" is set while the gaming machine status signal 5 is ON.

[Bit 1]
Name: Gaming machine status signal 6 (*2)
Details: Game machine status signal. "1" is set while the gaming machine status signal 6 is ON.

[Bit 2]
Name: Gaming machine status signal 7 (*2)
Details: Game machine status signal. "1" is set while the gaming machine status signal 7 is ON.

[Bits 3 to 7]
Name: Unused Details: 0 fixed

(*2) Gaming machine status signals 5 to 7 are used to set gaming machine statuses other than RB, BB, and AT. The gaming machine status signals 5 to 7 are used for different purposes depending on the model of the gaming machine.

[9.2.1.6.3. Gaming machine fraud 1]
FIG. 516 is a diagram showing details of gaming machine fraud 1. FIG.
Each signal of gaming machine fraud 1 is treated as a signal for HC. Each signal output from the game machine is directly output from the dedicated unit to the HC side.
[Bit 0]
Name: Setting changing signal Details: Indicates that the setting is being changed and that the setting has been changed. This signal is continuously output from the time the setting is being changed to the end of one game after the setting is changed. 0=normal, 1=during and after setting change.

[Bit 1]
Name: Setting confirmation signal Details: Indicates that the setting is being confirmed. 0=Normal, 1=Checking settings.

[Bit 2]
Name: Fraud detection signal 1 (*3)
Details: In addition to the above, indicates that there is a risk of fraud. 0=normal, 1=abnormal occurrence.

[Bit 3]
Name: Fraud Detection Signal 2 (*3)
Details: In addition to the above, indicates that there is a risk of fraud. 0=normal, 1=abnormal occurrence.

[Bit 4]
Name: Fraud detection signal 3 (*3)
Details: In addition to the above, indicates that there is a risk of fraud. 0=normal, 1=abnormal occurrence.

[Bit 5]
Name: Security signal (external signal CN2-7)
Details: Indicates that one of the fraud detection signals 1 to 3 is ON, setting is being changed, or setting is being checked (logical OR output). It should be noted that the signal during setting change in this signal is continuously output from the time the setting is being changed to the end of one game after the setting change. 0=normal, 1=detecting fraud.

[Bits 6, 7]
Name: Unused Details: 0 fixed

(*3) Fraud detection signals 1 to 3 differ in fraud content to be detected depending on the model and specifications of the game machine. Also, it is limited to gaming machines that have a function to detect various types of fraud.

[9.2.1.6.4. Gaming machine fraud 2]
FIG. 517 is a diagram showing details of gaming machine fraud 2. FIG.
Each signal of gaming machine fraud 2 is treated as a signal for HC. Each signal output from the game machine is directly output from the dedicated unit to the HC side.
[Bit 0]
Name: Setting door open signal (*4)
Details: Indicates that opening of the door of the setting change device was detected. 0=normal, 1=setting change device door open.

[Bit 1]
Name: Door open signal (external signal CN2-8)
Details: Indicates that the opening of the game machine door has been detected. 0=normal, 1=game machine door is open.

[Bit 2]
Name: Unused Details: 0 fixed

[Bit 3]
Name: Game medal clear detection (*5)
Details: Indicates that the number of game medals has been cleared. This signal is continuously output until the end of one game after the number of game medals is cleared. 0=normal, 1=game medal clear detection.

[Bits 4 to 7]
Name: Unused Details: 0 fixed

(*4) The setting door open signal is limited to gaming machines that have a function to detect opening of the door of the setting change device.
(*5) The function to clear the number of game medals is activated when the button or the like related to the function is operated when the power is turned on.

[9.2.1.6.5. Gaming machine fraud 3]
FIG. 518 is a diagram showing the details of gaming machine fraud 3. FIG.
[Bits 0 to 7]
Name: Unused Details: 0 fixed

[9.2.1.6.6. Game information]
FIG. 519 is a diagram showing details of game information.
The game information consists of a total of 2 bytes: type information (upper 1 byte) and count information (lower 1 byte).
The type information is information indicating whether the specified number or the number of payouts occurred in the gaming machine. The specified number indicates the number of game medals required to play one game.
Also, the count information is information indicating the number of sheets generated in the type information.
When the number of game information is 0, the type information and count information are not transmitted.
Game information is treated as a signal for HC. The game information output from the game machine is directly output from the exclusive unit to the HC side.

[(1) Type information]
FIG. 520 is a diagram showing details of type information.
The type information (1 byte) consists of a data type (upper 4 bits, Bits 4 to 7) and a data number (lower 4 bits, Bits 0 to 3).

[Details of (a) data type (upper 4 bits)]
FIG. 521 is a diagram showing details of (a) data type (upper 4 bits).
Bits 4-7: 0
Type name: unused Contents: -

Bits 4-7: 1
Type name: Specified number (IN, input number)
Contents: Notify the prescribed number of games. Notify the specified number of the game when the start lever is accepted. For example, it corresponds to the IN signal of the external signal CN2-1. It should be noted that "at the time of reception of the start lever" is when the start lever is operated in a state in which the specified number of medals required for the game has been inserted.

Bits 4-7: 2
Type name: Payout number (OUT, output number)
Contents: Notify the number of payouts at the end of the game. Notify the number of medals obtained by winning (winning a small winning combination) and the specified number at the time of replay operation. For example, it corresponds to the OUT signal of the external signal CN2-2.
The payout number here indicates the game value obtained by the player as a result of the game. More specifically, the number of payouts here refers not only to the number of game values paid out to the player by winning a "small win" such as "bell role", "watermelon role", "cherry role", etc. , In addition to this, the game value acquired at the time of replay operation is also included.
Further, "at the time of replay operation" means winning of "replay" such as "replay combination" as a result of the game (display of symbol combination corresponding to replay combination on the activated line), When the replay is activated, the game value required for the next game is automatically inserted.

In this way, the medal-less gaming machine (medal number control board, communication control means) provides information including a predetermined number of game medals inserted by the replay execution means, and relates to the number of inserted game medals in one game. The specified number (specified number information) and the number of payouts related to the number of game medals to be paid out in one game, which is information including the specified number of game medals inserted by the replay execution means (payout number information), Send to dedicated unit.
The prescribed number and the number of payouts are treated as information for the dedicated unit, and treated as information for the hall computer connected to the dedicated unit.

Bits 4-7: 3-15
Type name: unused Contents: -

[(b) Details of data number (lower 4 bits) set for each data type]
FIG. 522 shows (b) details of the data number (lower 4 bits) set for each data type.
The type information (1 byte) includes a data type (Bits 4-7) and a data number (Bits 0-3).

Data type (Bits 4 to 7): 0 = Not used Data number (Bits 0 to 3): 0 to 15 = Not used

Data type (Bits 4 to 7): 1 = specified number (IN)
Data number (Bit 0 to 3): 1 fixed. 0 and 2-15 = unused.

Data type (Bit 4 to 7): 2 = Number of payouts (OUT)
Data number (Bit 0 to 3): 1 fixed. 0 and 2-15 = unused.

Data type (Bits 4-7): 3-15 = Not used Data number (Bits 0-3): 0-15 = Not used

[(2) Count information]
The setting contents of the count information differ for each data type.
Detailed contents and data storage examples for each data type are shown below.
(a) When data type is specified number FIG. 523 is a diagram showing details of the count information when the data type is specified number.
The count information consists of unused (upper 4 bits, Bits 4 to 7) and a prescribed number (lower 4 Bits, Bits 0 to 3).

[Bits 4 to 7]
Name: Unused Details: 0 fixed

[Bits 0 to 3]
Name: Stipulated number Details: Stipulated number of the game. 1 to 3 = specified number (1 (sheet) to 3 (sheet)).

FIG. 524 is a diagram showing a specific example of game information in the case of a specified number of 3-card games.
Data type (Bits 4 to 7) of type information (1 byte): 1 = specified number (IN)
Type information (1 byte) data number (Bits 0 to 3): 1 fixed Unused count information (1 byte) (Bits 4 to 7): Fixed to 0 Count information (1 byte) specified number (Bits 0 to 3): 3 = 3 specified number 0x1103 is set for the game information.

(b) When the data type is the number of payouts FIG. 525 is a diagram showing the details of the count information when the data type is the number of payouts.
The count information consists of unused (upper 4 bits, Bits 4 to 7) and the number of payouts (lower 4 Bits, Bits 0 to 3).

[Bits 4 to 7]
Name: Unused Details: 0 fixed

[Bits 0 to 3]
Name: Number of payouts Details: Number of payouts for the game (regular number for the game when replaying). 1 to 15 = number of payouts (1 (pieces) to 15 (pieces)).

FIG. 526 is a diagram showing a specific example of game information when 10 medals are paid out as a result of winning.
Data type (Bits 4 to 7) of type information (1 byte): 2 = number of payouts (OUT)
Type information (1 byte) data number (Bit0-3): 1 fixed Unused count information (1 byte) (Bit4-7): 0 fixed Count information (1 byte) payout number (Bit0-3): 10 = 10 payouts 0x210A is set as the game information.

[9.2.2. Count notification]
FIG. 527 is a diagram showing details of the count notification.
Message name: Counting notification Message length: 7 bytes Sending direction: Game machine → Dedicated unit Outline of message: The game machine notifies the count information to the dedicated unit.

[No.1]
Data name: Message length Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Content: 0x07

[No.2]
Data name: Command Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Content: 0x02

[No.3]
Data name: Count serial number Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: Sequence number (0x00 to 0xFF (0 to 255))

[No.4]
Data name: Number of medals Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: Number of counting medals (0x00 to 0x32 (0 to 50))

[No.5]
Data name: Cumulative medal count Data length: 2 bytes Byte order: L
Contents: Cumulative medal count (0x0000 to 0xFFFF (0 to 65535)). A storage example is 0xD007 when the number of accumulated medals counted is 2000.

[No.6]
Data name: Checksum Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: Checksum data

[9.2.2.1. Regarding the counting serial number (9.2.2.No.3)]
The game machine notifies the dedicated unit of the counting serial number (9.2.2.No3) by the following control.
(1) When the power is turned on, the serial number "0x00(0)" is notified.
(2) After the power is turned on, the serial number is updated (+1) each time notification is made.
(3) Update (+2) the value next to the count sequence number "0xFF (255)" to "0x01 (1)".

[9.2.2.2. Regarding Cumulative Medals (9.2.2.No.5)]
The gaming machine notifies the dedicated unit of the number of counted accumulated medals (9.2.2.No5) by the following control.
(1) The value next to the accumulated number of counted medals "0xFFFF (65535)" is updated to "0x0000 (0)".
(2) When the gaming machine is turned on, the accumulated number of medals counted is cleared to "0".

[9.2.3. Rental notice]
FIG. 528 is a diagram showing details of the rental notice.
Message name: Rental notification Message length: 5 bytes Sending direction: Dedicated unit → game machine Outline of message: The dedicated unit notifies the rental information to the game machine with this message.

[No.1]
Data name: Message length Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Content: 0x05

[No.2]
Data name: Command Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Content: 0x13

[No.3]
Data name: Loan serial number Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: Sequence number (0x00 to 0xFF (0 to 255))

[No.4]
Data name: Number of loaned medals Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: Number of loaned game medals (0x00 to 0x32 (0 to 50))

[No.5]
Data name: Checksum Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: Checksum data

[9.2.3.1. About rental notification (9.2.3.)]
The dedicated unit notifies the gaming machine of the rental notification when receiving the counting notification. However, if any of the following apply, the number of loaned medals will be notified as "0".
(1) When the game machine information notification is not received (2) When the game machine information type is notified other than "0x02: hall control / fraud monitoring information" (3) The number of medals counted in the count notification is "1" or more When notified Only when the above does not apply, the dedicated unit can notify the gaming machine that the number of loaned medals is "1" or more.

[9.2.3.2. Regarding the lending serial number (9.2.3.No.3)]
The dedicated unit notifies the gaming machine of the rental serial number by the following control.
(1) At the start of communication with the game machine, the serial number is notified as "0".
(2) Update (+1) the lending serial number received in the lending acceptance result response and notify it in the next lending notice.
(3) Update (+2) the value following the lending serial number “0xFF (255)” to “0x01 (1)”.

[9.2.4. Lending receipt result response]
FIG. 529 is a diagram showing details of the loan receipt result response.
Message name: Lending reception result response Message length: 5 bytes Transmission direction: Gaming machine → Dedicated unit Outline of message: The gaming machine responds to the dedicated unit with the lending information receipt result.

[No.1]
Data name: Message length Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Content: 0x05

[No.2]
Data name: Command Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Content: 0x03

[No.3]
Data name: Loan serial number Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: Sequence number (0x00 to 0xFF (0 to 255))

[No.4]
Data name: Result of receiving the number of loaned medals Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: Result of receiving the number of loaned medals. 0x00=normal, 0x01=abnormal. If a value other than the above is notified, it is regarded as abnormal.

[No.5]
Data name: Checksum Data length: 1 byte Byte order: -
Contents: Checksum data

[9.2.4.1. Regarding the lending serial number (9.2.4.No.3)]
The gaming machine responds with the rental serial number to the dedicated unit by the following control.
(1) When the number of loaned medals reception result is normal (0x00), the loaned serial number received from the dedicated unit is responded.
(2) When the loan receipt result is abnormal (0x01), it responds with the loan serial number received from the dedicated unit when the loan receipt result is normal (0x00).
(3) When the gaming machine is turned on, the lending serial number is cleared to "0".

[9.2.4.2. Regarding the number of borrowed medals received (9.2.4.No.4)]
The gaming machine responds with a loaned medal number reception result “abnormal (0x01)” in the following cases.
(1) If the lending serial numbers (9.2.3.No.3) notified from the dedicated unit are not consecutive (2) If the number of lending medals in the lending notification is outside the specified range 3) When the result of adding the number of loaned medals to the number of game medals exceeds 16383 After transmitting the normality of the reception result of the number of loaned medals, the gaming machine adds the number of loaned medals to the number of game medals display device.

[10. Game Machine - Dedicated Unit Communication Sequence]
[10.1. Basic communication sequence]
FIG. 530 is a diagram showing a basic communication sequence.
A game machine 9800 is a primary station, and a dedicated unit 9802 is a secondary station.
[G200] The gaming machine 9800 transmits gaming machine information notification (serial number=n) to the dedicated unit 9802.
[G201] The gaming machine 9800 transmits a counting notification (counting serial number=m) to the dedicated unit 9802.

[G202] The dedicated unit 9802 transmits a rental notice (rental serial number=k) to the gaming machine 9800.
[G203] The gaming machine 9800 transmits a lending receipt result response (lending serial number=k) to the dedicated unit 9802 .
[G204] The gaming machine 9800 transmits gaming machine information notification (serial number=n+1) to the dedicated unit 9802.

The gaming machine 9800 notifies the dedicated unit 9802 of the gaming machine information notification (9.2.1.) at a cycle of 300 ms (*1), and 100 ms (9.2.1.) from the gaming machine information notification (9.2.1.) *2) Notify the counting notification (9.2.2.) after the elapse.
The dedicated unit 9802 notifies the gaming machine 9800 of the rental notification (9.2.3.) within 170 ms after receiving the counting notification (9.2.2.). The gaming machine 9800 responds to the lending notification (9.2.3.) from the dedicated unit 9802 with a lending receipt result response (9.2.4.) within 10 ms.

(*1) The gaming machine 9800 notifies the next gaming machine information notification within a range of 300 ms or more and 310 ms or less from the start of the gaming machine information notification.
(*2) The game machine 9800 notifies the count notification within a range of 90 ms or more and 100 ms or less from the start of the game machine information notification.
(*3) The dedicated unit 9802 notifies the gaming machine 9800 of the rental notification within 170 ms from the start of reception of the counting notification. However, lending notices received outside the scope of this provision will be discarded, and lending acceptance result responses will not be sent.
(*4) The gaming machine 9800 notifies a lending reception result response within 10 ms after completion of receiving the lending notification.

[10.2. Startup sequence]
[10.2.1. Sequence when the game machine starts up first]
FIG. 531 is a diagram showing a sequence when the gaming machine is activated first.
[G210] In the power-off state, [G211] the VL of the gaming machine 9800 is OFF, and [G212] the VL and PSI of the dedicated unit 9802 are OFF.

[G213] The power is turned on, and power is supplied to the gaming machine 9800 and the dedicated unit 9802 .
[G214] VL of gaming machine 9800 is OFF, and [G215] VL and PSI of dedicated unit 9802 are OFF. The dedicated unit 9802 keeps VL=OFF until booting is completed.

[G216] The state of game machine activation is shifted to the state of [G217] game machine activation completion. [G218] The gaming machine 9800 transmits gaming machine information notification (serial number=0) to the dedicated unit 9802. [G219] The gaming machine 9800 transmits a counting notification (counting serial number=0) to the dedicated unit 9802. The gaming machine 9800 transmits a message regardless of the activation completion of the dedicated unit 9802, updates the serial number, and notifies it. However, the dedicated unit 9802 cannot receive the message from the game machine 9800 because it is in the [G220] dedicated unit activation state.

[G221] Activation of the dedicated unit 9802 is completed.
As a result, [F222] game medals can be inserted (VL=ON), and the counting button (counting switch) becomes effective (PSI=ON).

[G223] The gaming machine 9800 transmits gaming machine information notification (serial number=n) to the dedicated unit 9802.
[G224] The gaming machine 9800 transmits a counting notification (counting serial number=m) to the dedicated unit 9802.
Dedicated units 9802 that have completed booting can receive these notifications.
After completion of activation, the dedicated unit 9802 starts receiving telegrams notified from the game machine 9800 . The dedicated unit 9802 manages from the notified serial number.

[10.2.2. Sequence when the dedicated unit starts first]
FIG. 532 is a diagram showing a sequence when the dedicated unit is activated first.
[G230] While the game machine 9800 is powered off, [G231] the dedicated unit 9802 is powered on.
[G232] In the dedicated unit 9802, VL=OFF and PSI=OFF.
When the dedicated unit 9802 shifts from [G233] Dedicated unit activation state to [G234] Dedicated unit activation completion state, [G235] In the dedicated unit 9802, VL=ON and PSI=ON. After that, the dedicated unit 9802 is in a [G236] gaming machine connection waiting state until receiving the gaming machine information notification.

[G237] The gaming machine 9800 is powered on, and when the state of [G238] gaming machine activation is shifted to the state of [G239] gaming machine activation completion, [G240] the gaming machine 9800 and dedicated unit 9802 set VL= ON, PSI=ON.

[G241] The gaming machine 9800 transmits gaming machine information notification (serial number=0) to the dedicated unit 9802.
[G242] The gaming machine 9800 transmits a counting notification (counting serial number=0) to the dedicated unit 9802.
The gaming machine 9800 notifies the dedicated unit 9802 of the telegram after completion of activation. After the power is turned on, the serial number starts from 0.
The dedicated unit 9802 starts receiving telegrams notified from the gaming machine 9800 . The dedicated unit 9802 manages from the notified serial number.

[G243] The gaming machine 9800 transmits gaming machine information notification (serial number=n) to the dedicated unit 9802.
[G244] The gaming machine 9800 transmits a counting notification (counting serial number=m) to the dedicated unit 9802.

[10.3. Gaming machine information notification sequence]
FIG. 533 is a diagram showing notification conditions applied in the gaming machine information notification sequence.
The game machine notifies the dedicated unit of the game machine information under the following notification conditions. If the notification conditions overlap, the notification is given according to the order of priority.

Game machine information type: (1) Game machine installation information Notification condition: Notify after 60 seconds (*1) have passed since the game machine started up. After that, it will be notified every 60s (*1).
Priority: 1

Game machine information type: (2) Game machine performance information Notification condition: Notify after 180 seconds (*2) have passed since the game machine started up. After that, it will be notified at a cycle of 180s (*2).
Priority: 2

Game machine information type: (3) Hall controller/fraud monitoring information Notification condition: Notify after 300 ms (*3) has passed since the game machine started up. After that, it will be notified at a cycle of 300ms (*3).
Priority: 3

[10.3.1. Basic sequence of gaming machine information notification]
FIG. 534 is a diagram showing the basic sequence of game machine information notification.
[G250] When the game machine 9800 is completely activated, [G251] The game machine 9800 transmits game machine information notification (hall controller/fraud monitoring information) to the dedicated unit 9802 .
Until this information is received, the dedicated unit 9802 is in a state of waiting for [G252] gaming machine connection.

[G253] The gaming machine 9800 transmits a count notification to the dedicated unit 9802.
[G254] The dedicated unit 9802 transmits a rental notification to the gaming machine 9800.
[G255] The gaming machine 9800 transmits a loan receipt result response to the dedicated unit 9802.
[G256] The gaming machine 9800 transmits gaming machine information notification (hall control/fraud monitoring information) to the dedicated unit 9802.

[G257] The gaming machine 9800 transmits gaming machine information notification (hall control/fraud monitoring information) to the dedicated unit 9802.
[G258] The gaming machine 9800 transmits a count notification to the dedicated unit 9802.
[G259] The dedicated unit 9802 transmits a rental notification to the gaming machine 9800.
[G260] The gaming machine 9800 transmits a loan receipt result response to the dedicated unit 9802.
[G261] The gaming machine 9800 transmits gaming machine information notification (gaming machine installation information) to the dedicated unit 9802 .

[G262] The gaming machine 9800 transmits gaming machine information notification (gaming machine installation information) to the dedicated unit 9802 . Here, since the notification timings of the gaming machine installation information and the gaming machine performance information overlap, the gaming machine installation information having a higher priority is notified first.
[G263] The gaming machine 9800 transmits a count notification to the dedicated unit 9802.
[G264] The dedicated unit 9802 transmits a rental notice to the gaming machine 9800.
[G265] The gaming machine 9800 transmits a loan receipt result response to the dedicated unit 9802.
[G266] The gaming machine 9800 transmits gaming machine information notification (gaming machine performance information) to the dedicated unit 9802 . Here, after notifying the gaming machine installation information, the gaming machine performance information is notified.

(*1) The gaming machine 9800 notifies the gaming machine installation information within the range of 60 seconds to 62 seconds.
(*2) The gaming machine 9800 notifies the gaming machine performance information within the range of 180 seconds to 186 seconds.
(*3) The gaming machine 9800 notifies the hole controller/fraud monitoring information within a range of 300 ms to 310 ms.

[10.4. Count notification sequence]
535 and 536 are diagrams showing the count notification sequence.
[G300] Assume that the gaming machine 9800 has detected that the counting button has been pressed.
At this point, [G301] the number of game medals=200, and [G302] the number of possessed medals=20.

[G303] The gaming machine 9800 transmits gaming machine information notification (serial number=n, number of game medals=200) to the dedicated unit 9802.
[G304] The gaming machine 9800 transmits a counting notification (counting serial number = m, number of medals to be counted = 50, number of accumulated medals to be counted = 50) to the dedicated unit 9802 . The gaming machine 9800 notifies the counting (counting serial number=m, number of medals to be counted=50, number of accumulated medals to be counted=50). The dedicated unit 9802 adds the counted number of medals to the number of possessed medals (the number of possessed medals=20+50).
At this point, [G305] the number of game medals=150 and [G306] the number of owned medals=70.

[G307] The dedicated unit 9802 transmits a lending notice (lending serial number=k, number of lending medals=0) to the gaming machine 9800.
[G308] The gaming machine 9800 transmits a lending receipt result response (lending serial number=k, receipt result of the number of borrowed medals=normal) to the dedicated unit 9802.

[G309] The gaming machine 9800 transmits gaming machine information notification (serial number=n+1, number of game medals=150) to the dedicated unit 9802.
[G310] The gaming machine 9800 transmits a counting notification (counting serial number=m+1, number of medals to be counted=50, number of accumulated medals to be counted=100) to the dedicated unit 9802. The gaming machine 9800 notifies the counting (counting serial number=m+1, number of medals to be counted=50, number of accumulated medals to be counted=100). The dedicated unit 9802 adds the counted number of medals to the number of possessed medals (the number of possessed medals=70+50).
At this point, [G311] number of game medals=100 and [G312] number of owned medals=120.

[G313] The dedicated unit 9802 transmits a lending notice (lending serial number=k+1, number of lending medals=0) to the gaming machine 9800.
[G314] The gaming machine 9800 transmits a lending receipt result response (lending serial number=k+1, receipt result of the number of borrowed medals=normal) to the dedicated unit 9802.

[Fig. 536]
[G315] Assume that the gaming machine 9800 has detected that the counting button has been released (not pressed).
[G316] The gaming machine 9800 transmits gaming machine information notification (serial number=n+2, number of game medals=100) to the dedicated unit 9802.
[G317] The gaming machine 9800 transmits a counting notification (counting serial number=m+2, number of medals to be counted=0, number of accumulated medals to be counted=100) to the dedicated unit 9802.
At this point, [G318] number of game medals=100 and [G319] number of owned medals=120.

[G320] The dedicated unit 9802 transmits a lending notification (renting serial number=k+2, number of lending medals=0) to the gaming machine 9800.
[G321] The gaming machine 9800 transmits a lending receipt result response (lending serial number=k+2, lending token number receipt result=normal) to the dedicated unit 9802.
[G322] The gaming machine 9800 transmits gaming machine information notification (serial number=n+3, number of game medals=100) to the dedicated unit 9802.
(*1) The game machine 9800 notifies the count notification within a range of 90 ms or more and 100 ms or less from the start of the game machine information notification.

[10.5. Lending notification sequence]
FIG. 537 is a diagram showing a lending notification sequence.
[G330] Assume that the dedicated unit 9802 has detected that the lending button has been pressed.
At this point, [G331] number of game medals=10.

[G332] The gaming machine 9800 transmits gaming machine information notification (serial number=n, number of game medals=10) to the dedicated unit 9802.
[G333] The gaming machine 9800 transmits a counting notification (counting serial number = m, number of medals to be counted = 0, number of accumulated medals to be counted = 0) to the dedicated unit 9802 .

[G334] The dedicated unit 9802 transmits a lending notice (lending serial number = k, number of lending medals = 47) to the gaming machine 9800 . The dedicated unit 9802 notifies the lending (lending serial number=k, number of lending medals=47). The dedicated unit 9802 notifies in the range of 1 to 50 sheets.
[G335] The gaming machine 9800 transmits a lending receipt result response (lending serial number=k, lending token number receipt result=normal) to the dedicated unit 9802. The gaming machine 9800 adds the number of loaned medals to the number of game medals (number of game medals=10+47), and responds with the reception result of the number of loaned medals (lending serial number=k, reception result of the number of loaned medals=normal). The dedicated unit 9802 confirms the reception result of the number of borrowed medals.

[G336] The gaming machine 9800 transmits gaming machine information notification (serial number=n+1, number of game medals=57) to the dedicated unit 9802.
At this point, [G337] number of game medals=57.
(*1) The gaming machine 9800 notifies the next gaming machine information notification within a range of 300 ms or more and 310 ms or less from the start of the gaming machine information notification.
(*2) The dedicated unit 9802 notifies the gaming machine 9800 of the rental notification within 170 ms from the start of reception of the counting notification. However, lending notices received outside the scope of this provision will be discarded, and lending acceptance result responses will not be sent.
(*3) The gaming machine 9800 notifies a lending receipt result response within 10 ms after completing the receipt of the lending notification.

[10.6. Recovery sequence when dedicated cable is disconnected]
538 and 539 are diagrams showing the restoration sequence when the dedicated cable is broken.
At the first time, [G340] number of game medals=200.
[G341] The gaming machine 9800 transmits gaming machine information notification (serial number=n, number of game medals=200) to the dedicated unit 9802.
[G342] The gaming machine 9800 transmits a counting notification (counting serial number = m, number of medals to be counted = 0, number of accumulated medals to be counted = 0) to the dedicated unit 9802 .

[G343] The dedicated unit 9802 transmits a lending notification (lending serial number=k, number of lending medals=0) to the gaming machine 9800.
[G344] The gaming machine 9800 transmits a lending receipt result response (lending serial number=k, receipt result of the number of borrowed medals=normal) to the dedicated unit 9802.
[G345] The gaming machine 9800 transmits gaming machine information notification (serial number=n+1, number of game medals=200) to the dedicated unit 9802.

[G346] Here, it is assumed that the dedicated cable 9810 is broken. In this case, the dedicated unit 9802 is set to VL=OFF.

As a result, [G347] the game machine 9800 becomes VL=OFF (game medal insertion unacceptable state, count button invalid state), and [G348] the dedicated unit 9802 becomes VL=OFF and PSI=OFF.

[G349] The gaming machine 9800 transmits a counting notification (counting serial number=m+1, number of medals to be counted=0, number of accumulated medals to be counted=0) to the dedicated unit 9802. Since the counting button is disabled, the number of medals to be counted is 0 (counting serial number=m+1, number of medals to be counted=0, cumulative number of medals to be counted=0). However, this notification does not reach dedicated unit 9802 .

[G350] The gaming machine 9800 transmits gaming machine information notification (serial number=n+2, number of game medals=200) to the dedicated unit 9802. However, this notification does not reach dedicated unit 9802 .
At this point, [G351] number of game medals=200.

[G351] The gaming machine 9800 transmits a counting notification (counting serial number=m+2, number of medals to be counted=0, number of accumulated medals to be counted=0) to the dedicated unit 9802. However, this notification does not reach dedicated unit 9802 .

[Fig. 539]
[G353] Here, it is assumed that the disconnection of the dedicated cable 3110 has been restored. In the game machine 9800 and the dedicated unit 9802, VL=ON and PSI=ON (game medal insertion acceptable state, count button enabled state). Check the number of game medals in store clerk processing and return the error. The dedicated unit 9802 checks the dedicated cable connection status after VL=ON.

[G354] The gaming machine 9800 transmits gaming machine information notification (serial number=n+3, number of game medals=200) to the dedicated unit 9802.
[G355] The gaming machine 9800 transmits a counting notification (counting serial number=m+3, number of medals to be counted=0, number of accumulated medals to be counted=0) to the dedicated unit 9802.

[G356] The dedicated unit 9802 transmits a loan notification (rental serial number=0, number of loaned medals=0) to the gaming machine 9800. When the connection with the game machine is started, the lending serial number 0 is notified.
At this point, [G357] number of game medals=200.
[G358] The gaming machine 9800 transmits a lending receipt result response (lending serial number=k, lending token number receipt result=abnormal) to the dedicated unit 9802.

[G359] The gaming machine 9800 transmits gaming machine information notification (serial number=n+4, number of game medals=200) to the dedicated unit 9802.
[G360] The gaming machine 9800 transmits a counting notification (counting serial number=m+4, number of medals to be counted=0, number of accumulated medals to be counted=0) to the dedicated unit 9802.

[G361] The dedicated unit 9802 transmits a lending notification (renting serial number=k+1 (=1), number of lending medals=0) to the gaming machine 9800. Update and notify the loan serial number in the loan receipt result response.
[G362] The gaming machine 9800 transmits a lending receipt result response (lending serial number=k+1, receipt result of the number of borrowed medals=normal) to the dedicated unit 9802.

[10.7. Communication error during counting]
540 and 541 are diagrams showing communication anomalies during counting.
[G370] Assume that the gaming machine 9800 has detected that the counting button has been pressed.
At this point, [G371] the number of game medals=200, and [G372] the number of owned medals=20.

[G373] The gaming machine 9800 transmits gaming machine information notification (serial number=n, number of game medals=200) to the dedicated unit 9802.
[G374] The gaming machine 9800 transmits a counting notification (counting serial number = m, number of medals to be counted = 50, number of accumulated medals to be counted = 50) to the dedicated unit 9802 . The gaming machine 9800 notifies the counting (counting serial number=m, number of counting medals=50). The dedicated unit 9802 adds the counted number of medals to the number of possessed medals (the number of possessed medals=20+50).
At this point, [G375] the number of game medals=150, and [G376] the number of owned medals=70.

[G377] The dedicated unit 9802 transmits a lending notice (lending serial number = k, number of lending medals = 0) to the gaming machine 9800 .
[G378] The gaming machine 9800 transmits a lending receipt result response (lending serial number=k, lending token number receipt result=normal) to the dedicated unit 9802.

[G379] The gaming machine 9800 transmits gaming machine information notification (serial number=n+1, number of game medals=150) to the dedicated unit 9802.
[G380] The gaming machine 9800 transmits a counting notification (counting serial number=m+1, number of medals to be counted=50, number of accumulated medals to be counted=100) to the dedicated unit 9802. The gaming machine 9800 notifies counting (counting serial number=m+1, number of counting medals=50). However, this notification does not reach dedicated unit 9802 .
At this point, [G381] the number of game medals=100 and [G382] the number of owned medals=70.

[G383] The gaming machine 9800 transmits gaming machine information notification (serial number=n+2, number of game medals=100) to the dedicated unit 9802. However, this notification does not reach dedicated unit 9802 . The dedicated unit 9802 detects the communication abnormality of the game machine information notification, and sets VL to OFF after a maximum of 300 ms.

[G384] In the gaming machine 9800, VL=OFF (game medal insertion unacceptable state, counting button ineffective state), [G385] In the dedicated unit 9802, VL=OFF and PSI=OFF.

[Fig. 541]
At this point, [G386] number of game medals=100.
[G387] The gaming machine 9800 transmits a counting notification (counting serial number=m+2, number of medals to be counted=0, number of accumulated medals to be counted=100) to the dedicated unit 9802. Since the counting button is disabled, the number of medals to be counted is 0 (counting serial number=m+2, number of medals to be counted=0, cumulative number of medals to be counted=100). However, this notification does not reach dedicated unit 9802 .

[G388] The dedicated unit 9802 enters a state of waiting for error recovery of the dedicated unit 9802 . Confirm the number of game medals and the number of owned medals in store clerk processing, and recover the error. The dedicated unit 9802 sets VL=ON after recovering from the error.

(*1) The gaming machine 9800 notifies the next gaming machine information notification within a range of 300 ms or more and 310 ms or less from the start of the gaming machine information notification.
(*2) The game machine 9800 notifies the count notification within a range of 90 ms or more and 100 ms or less from the start of the game machine information notification.

[10.8. Communication error at the time of rental]
FIG. 542 is a diagram showing a communication abnormality at the time of lending.
[G400] Assume that the dedicated unit 9802 has detected that the lending button has been pressed.
At this point, [G401] number of game medals=10.

[G402] The gaming machine 9800 transmits gaming machine information notification (serial number=n, number of game medals=10) to the dedicated unit 9802.
[G403] The gaming machine 9800 transmits a counting notification (counting serial number = m, number of medals to be counted = 0, number of accumulated medals to be counted = 0) to the dedicated unit 9802 .

[G404] The dedicated unit 9802 transmits a lending notice (lending serial number = k, number of lending medals = 47) to the gaming machine 9800 . The dedicated unit 9802 notifies the lending (lending serial number=k, number of lending medals=47). The dedicated unit 9802 notifies 1 to 50 tokens depending on the unit price and the loan amount.
At this point, [G405] number of game medals=57.

[G406] The gaming machine 9800 transmits a lending receipt result response (lending serial number=k, receipt result of the number of borrowed medals=normal) to the dedicated unit 9802. However, this response does not reach dedicated unit 9802 . Since the dedicated unit 9802 has not received a loan acceptance result response, it determines that the loan has not been completed.

[G407] The gaming machine 9800 transmits gaming machine information notification (serial number=n+1, number of game medals=57) to the dedicated unit 9802.
[G408] The gaming machine 9800 transmits a counting notification (counting serial number=m+1, number of medals to be counted=0, number of accumulated medals to be counted=0) to the dedicated unit 9802.

[G409] The dedicated unit 9802 transmits a lending notice (lending serial number = k, number of lending medals = 47) to the gaming machine 9800 . Since it is not known whether the lending notice sent last time has reached the quota control, it will be resent.
At this point, [G410] number of game medals=57.

[G411] The gaming machine 9800 transmits a lending receipt result response (lending serial number=k, lending token number receipt result=abnormal) to the dedicated unit 9802. The gaming machine 9800 checks the continuity of the lending serial number of the lending notification, and responds with an abnormality when it is not continuous. The dedicated unit 9802 determines that the rental notification has reached the gaming machine and completes the rental when the serial number matches the previous rental notification.

At this point, [G412] number of game medals=57.
[G413] The gaming machine 9800 transmits gaming machine information notification (serial number=n+2, number of game medals=57) to the dedicated unit 9802.

(*1) The gaming machine 9800 notifies the next gaming machine information notification within a range of 300 ms or more and 310 ms or less from the start of the gaming machine information notification.
(*2) The dedicated unit 9802 notifies the gaming machine 9800 of the rental notification within 170 ms from the start of reception of the counting notification. However, lending notices received outside the scope of this provision will be discarded, and lending acceptance result responses will not be sent.
(*3) The gaming machine 9800 notifies a lending receipt result response within 10 ms after completing the receipt of the lending notification.

[Regarding the signal between the "main control board" and the "dedicated unit" of the medalless game machine]
Signals between the main control board and dedicated unit are shown below.
Incidentally, the example shown below is described as a specific example of a gaming machine equipped with only the main control board and not equipped with the medal count control board. Also, in the examples shown below, the CPU mounted on the main control board is referred to as the "main control CPU", and the CPU mounted on the medal count control board is referred to as the "medal number control CPU".

543 to 545 are diagrams showing details of gaming machine information (gaming machine performance information).
Game machine information (game machine performance information) is notified in the order of main control board → dedicated unit.
[No.1]
Data type: Total number of inserted sheets Contents: Accumulated number of inserted sheets after power-on. 0x000000 to 0xFFFFFF (0 sheets to 16777215 sheets). A storage example is 0xD00700 for 2000 sheets.
Processing within the use area of the main control CPU processing: Notify the dedicated unit of the total number of input sheets.
Out-of-use area processing of main control CPU processing: Accumulate the total number of input sheets.

[No.2]
Data type: Total number of payouts Contents: Cumulative number of payouts since the power was turned on. 0x000000 to 0xFFFFFF (0 sheets to 16777215 sheets).
Processing within the use area of the main control CPU processing: Notify the dedicated unit of the total payout number.
Out-of-use area processing of main control CPU processing: Accumulate the total number of payouts.

[No.3]
Data type: MY
Contents: Maximum MY calculated after power ON. 0x000000 to 0xFFFFFF (0 sheets to 16777215 sheets).
Processing within the use area of the main control CPU processing: Notify the maximum MY to the dedicated unit.
Processing outside the use area of the main control CPU processing: Calculate the maximum MY.

[No.4]
Data type: total payout number of accessories Contents: number of payouts due to operation of accessories accumulated since the power was turned on. 0x000000 to 0xFFFFFF (0 sheets to 16777215 sheets).
Processing within the use area of the main control CPU processing: Notifying the dedicated unit of the total payout number of accessories.
Processing outside the use area of the main control CPU processing: Accumulate the total payout number of accessories.

[No.5]
Data type: Total payout number of continuous accessories Content: Number of payouts due to the operation of the first class special accessories accumulated from power ON. 0x000000 to 0xFFFFFF (0 sheets to 16777215 sheets).
Processing within the use area of the main control CPU processing: Notify the dedicated unit of the total payout number of continuous accessories.
Processing outside the use area of the main control CPU processing: Accumulate the total payout number of continuous accessories.

[No.6]
Data type: Role ratio Content: Information on the role ratio monitor. 0x00 to 0x64 (0% to 100%) (rounded down). 0xFF when the specified number of games has not been reached.
Processing within the use area of the main control CPU processing: Notifying the role ratio of the role ratio monitor to the dedicated unit.
Processing outside the use area of the main control CPU processing: Calculate the role ratio of the role ratio monitor.

[No.7]
Data type: Continuous character ratio Contents: Information on role ratio monitor. 0x00 to 0x64 (0% to 100%) (rounded down). 0xFF when the specified number of games has not been reached.
Processing within the use area of the main control CPU processing: Notify the dedicated unit of the continuous role ratio of the role ratio monitor.
Processing outside the use area of the main control CPU processing: Calculate the continuous role ratio of the role ratio monitor.

[No.8]
Data type: Advantageous section ratio Contents: Information on role ratio monitor. 0x00 to 0x64 (0% to 100%) (rounded down). 0xFF when non-applicable/regular number of games is not reached.
Processing within the use area of the main control CPU processing: Notify the advantageous section ratio of the role ratio monitor to the dedicated unit.
Processing outside the use area of the main control CPU processing: Calculate the advantageous section ratio of the role ratio monitor.

[No.9]
Data type: Role ratio with instructions Contents: Information on the role ratio monitor. 0x00 to 0x64 (0% to 100%) (rounded down). 0xFF when non-applicable/regular number of games is not reached.
Processing within the use area of the main control CPU processing: Notify the dedicated unit of the instructed role ratio of the role ratio monitor.
Processing outside the use area of the main control CPU processing: Calculate the instructed role ratio of the role ratio monitor.

[No.10]
Data type: Role ratio, etc. state ratio Content: Role ratio monitor information. 0x00 to 0x64 (0% to 100%) (rounded down). 0xFF when the specified number of games has not been reached.
Processing within the use area of the main control CPU processing: Notifying the special unit of the role ratio monitor's state ratio.
Processing outside the use area of the main control CPU processing: Calculates the state ratio of the role ratio monitor.

[No.11]
Data type: Number of games played Contents: Number of games accumulated since the power was turned on. 0x0000 to 0xFFFF (0 to 65535).
Processing within the use area of the main control CPU processing: Notify the number of games played to the dedicated unit.
Out-of-use area processing of main control CPU processing: Accumulate the number of games played.

[No.12]
Data type: Reserved Contents: Reserved (fixed to 0x00 when not used)
Processing within the area used by the main control CPU processing: 0x00 is notified to the dedicated unit.
Out-of-area processing for main control CPU processing:-

[No.13]
Data type: Reservation Contents: Used by dedicated unit (maximum MY and number of games calculated by dedicated unit)
Processing within the area used by the main control CPU processing: 0x00 is notified to the dedicated unit.
Out-of-area processing for main control CPU processing:-

FIG. 546 is a diagram showing details of gaming machine information (gaming machine installation information).
Notify game machine information (game machine installation information) in the order of main control board → dedicated unit.
[No.1]
Data type: Main control chip ID number Contents: Indicates the ID number of the main control CPU.
Processing within the area used by the main control CPU processing: Notifies the ID number of the main control CPU to the dedicated unit.
Out-of-area processing for main control CPU processing:-

[No.2]
Data type: Main control chip manufacturer code Contents: Manufacturer code written in the management area of the main control CPU.
Processing within the use area of the main control CPU processing: Notify the dedicated unit of the manufacturer code described in the management area of the main control CPU.
Out-of-use area processing for main control CPU processing:-

[No.3]
Data type: Main control chip product code Contents: Product code written in the management area of the main control CPU.
Processing within the use area of the main control CPU processing: Notifies the dedicated unit of the product code described in the management area of the main control CPU.
Out-of-area processing for main control CPU processing:-

[No.4]
Data type: Medal number control chip ID number Contents: Indicates the ID number of the medal number control CPU.
Processing within the use area of the main control CPU processing: 0 is notified to the dedicated unit because the medal count control chip is not installed.
Out-of-area processing for main control CPU processing:-

[No.5]
Data type: Medal number control chip manufacturer code Contents: Manufacturer code written in the management area of the medal number control CPU.
Processing within the use area of the main control CPU processing: 0 is notified to the dedicated unit because the medal count control chip is not installed.
Out-of-area processing for main control CPU processing:-

[No.6]
Data type: Medal number control chip product code Contents: Product code described in the management area of the medal number control CPU.
Processing within the use area of the main control CPU processing: 0 is notified to the dedicated unit because the medal count control chip is not installed.
Out-of-area processing for main control CPU processing:-

547 to 550 are diagrams showing the details of the gaming machine information (hall controller/fraud monitoring information).
Notifies game machine information (hall control/fraud monitoring information) in the order of main control board → dedicated unit.
[No.1]
Data type: Number of game medals Contents: Current number of game medals recorded in the game medal number display device. 0x000000 to 0xFF3F00 (0 to 16383 sheets). A storage example is 0xD00700 when the number of game medals is 2000.
Processing within the usage area of the main control CPU processing: Notifying the number of game medals recorded in the game medal number display device to the dedicated unit Processing outside the usage area of the main control CPU processing:-

[No.2]
Data type: Number of inserted medals Contents: Number of inserted medals. 0xFD to 0x03 (-3 to 3). Note that the upper 1 bit is a sign (+/-) bit. If there are medals returned by the checkout button, subtract them.
Processing within the use area of the main control CPU processing: Notify the dedicated unit of the number of game medals inserted between the previous notification and the current notification.
Out-of-area processing for main control CPU processing:-

[No.3]
Data type: Number of medals paid out Contents: Number of medals paid out. 0x00 to 0x0F (0 to 15 sheets).
Processing within the use area of the main control CPU processing: Notify the dedicated unit of the number of game medals paid out between the previous notification and the current notification.
Out-of-area processing for main control CPU processing:-

[No.4]
Data type: Main control state 1
Contents: Bit0: RB (external signals CN2-3), Bit1: BB (external signals CN2-4), Bit2: AT (external signals CN2-5), Bit3: gaming machine status signal 1, Bit4: gaming machine status signal 2 , Bit 5: game machine state signal 3, Bit 6: game machine state signal 4, Bit 7: unused.
Processing within the use area of the main control CPU processing: Notify the main control state 1 to the dedicated unit.
Out-of-area processing for main control CPU processing:-

[No.5]
Data type: Main control state 2
Contents: Bit 0: Gaming machine status signal 5, Bit 1: Gaming machine status signal 6, Bit 2: Gaming machine status signal 7, Bits 3 to 7: Not used.
Processing within the use area of the main control CPU processing: Notify the main control state 2 to the dedicated unit.
Out-of-area processing for main control CPU processing:-

[No.6]
Data type: Game machine error status Contents: Error code occurring in the game machine. Bit 0-5: Error code, 000000 (B) = No error, Bit 6: 0 = Medal number control, 1 = Main control, Bit 7: 0 = Notification only, 1 = Notification + Hall control output, Bit 0-7: 0 = No error occurred.
Processing within the use area of the main control CPU processing: Notifies the dedicated unit of the gaming machine error state detected by the main control CPU.
Out-of-area processing for main control CPU processing:-

[No.7]
Data type: Gaming machine fraud 1 (main control)
Contents: Bit 0: Setting change signal (*1), Bit 1: Setting confirmation signal, Bit 2: Fraud detection signal 1, Bit 3: Fraud detection signal 2, Bit 4: Fraud detection signal 3, Bit 5: Security signal (external signal CN2- 7), Bits 6-7: Not used.
Processing within the use area of the main control CPU processing: Notifies the dedicated unit of gaming machine fraud 1 detected by the main control CPU.
Out-of-area processing for main control CPU processing:-

[No.8]
Data type: Game machine fraud 2 (main control or medal count control)
Contents: Bit 0: set door open signal, Bit 1: door open signal, (external signal CN2-8), Bit 2: unused, Bit 3: game medal clear detection (*2), Bit 4-7: unused.
Processing within the use area of the main control CPU processing: Notifies the dedicated unit of gaming machine fraud 2 detected by the main control CPU.
Out-of-use area processing for main control CPU processing:-

[No.9]
Data type: Game machine fraud 3 (main control or medal count control)
Contents: Bits 0 to 7: Not used.
Processing within the area used by the main control CPU processing: 0x00 is notified to the dedicated unit.
Out-of-use area processing for main control CPU processing:-

[No.10]
Data type: game information, specified number (IN)
Contents: 0x1101 to 0x1103: Specified number (1 to 3) (external signal CN2-1).
Processing within the use area of the main control CPU processing: Notifies the dedicated unit of the specified number (IN) of the game when accepting the start lever.
Out-of-area processing for main control CPU processing:-

[No.11]
Data type: game information, number of payouts (OUT) (*3)
Contents: 0x2100 to 0x210F: number of payouts (0 to 15) (external signal CN2-2).
Processing within the use area of the main control CPU processing: Notifies the dedicated unit of the payout number (OUT) of the game when all reels are stopped.
Out-of-area processing for main control CPU processing:-

(*1) The setting change signal is continuously output from the time the setting is being changed to the end of one game after the setting is changed.
(*2) The detection of the number of game medals clear continues to output ON until the end of one game after the number of game medals clear processing.
(*3) The number of medals to be paid out due to winning and the prescribed number at the time of replay operation will be notified as the number of payouts (OUT).

FIG. 551 is a diagram showing details of the count notification.
Notification of counting is sent in the order of main control board → dedicated unit.
[No.1]
Data type: Number of counted medals Contents: Number of counted medals. 0x00 to 0x32 (0 to 50 sheets).
Processing within the use area of the main control CPU processing: Notifies the number of counted medals to the dedicated unit, and subtracts the number of counted medals from the game medal number display device.
Out-of-area processing for main control CPU processing:-

[No.2]
Data type: Cumulative number of medals Contents: Cumulative number of medals. 0x00 to 0xFFFF (0 to 65535 sheets). A storage example is 0xD007 when the number of accumulated medals counted is 2000.
Processing within the use area of the main control CPU processing: Add the number of medals counted to the number of accumulated medals counted and notify the dedicated unit.
Out-of-area processing for main control CPU processing:-

FIG. 552 is a diagram showing details of a rental notice.
The rental notification is sent in the order of dedicated unit → main control board.
[No.1]
Data type: Number of loaned medals Contents: Number of loaned medals. 0x00 to 0x32 (0 to 50 sheets).
Processing within the use area of the main control CPU processing: When the lending notification received from the dedicated unit is received normally, the number of lending medals is added to the game medal number display device.
Out-of-area processing for main control CPU processing:-

FIG. 553 is a diagram showing details of the loan receipt result response.
Notify the lending reception result response in the order of main control board → dedicated unit.
[No.1]
Data type: Result of receiving the number of loaned medals Contents: Result of receiving the number of loaned medals. 0x00: Normal, 0x01: Abnormal. If a value other than 0x00 or 0x01 is notified, it is assumed to be abnormal.
Processing within the use area of the main control CPU processing: 0x00 is responded with normal reception. Abnormal (0x01) responds when: When the serial numbers are not continuous, when the gaming machine is in a lending disabled state, or when the result of adding the number of game medals and the number of loaned medals exceeds 16383.
Out-of-use area processing for main control CPU processing:-

[Regarding the signals between the "main control board", "medal number control board" and "dedicated unit" of the medalless game machine]
The signals between the main control board, medal count control board and dedicated unit are shown below.
Incidentally, the example shown below is described as a specific example of a gaming machine equipped with a main control board and a medal count control board. Also, in the examples shown below, the CPU mounted on the main control board is referred to as the "main control CPU", and the CPU mounted on the medal count control board is referred to as the "medal number control CPU".

554 to 557 are diagrams showing details of implementation example 1 of gaming machine information (gaming machine performance information).
The gaming machine information (gaming machine performance information) is notified in the order of the main control board → medal count control board → dedicated unit.
[No.1]
Data type: total number of input (* 1)
Contents: The number of inserted sheets accumulated since the power was turned on. 0x000000 to 0xFFFFFF (0 sheets to 16777215 sheets). A storage example is 0xD00700 for 2000 sheets.
Processing within the area used by the main control CPU processing:-
Out-of-use area processing for main control CPU processing:-
Processing within the use area of the medal count control CPU processing: Accumulate the total number of inserted coins and notify the dedicated unit.
Processing outside the area used for medal count control CPU processing:-

[No.2]
Data type: Total number of payouts (*1)
Contents: The number of payouts accumulated since the power was turned on. 0x000000 to 0xFFFFFF (0 sheets to 16777215 sheets).
Processing within the area used by the main control CPU processing:-
Out-of-area processing for main control CPU processing:-
Processing within the use area of the medal count control CPU processing: Accumulate the total number of payouts and notify the dedicated unit.
Processing outside the area used for medal count control CPU processing:-

[No.3]
Data type: MY (*1)
Contents: Maximum MY calculated after power ON. 0x000000 to 0xFFFFFF (0 sheets to 16777215 sheets).
Processing within the area used by the main control CPU processing:-
Out-of-area processing for main control CPU processing:-
Processing within the use area of the medal count control CPU processing: Calculates the maximum MY and notifies it to the dedicated unit.
Processing outside the area used for medal count control CPU processing:-

[No.4]
Data type: Total number of accessories paid out (* 1)
Contents: The number of payouts due to the operation of the accessory accumulated since the power was turned on. 0x000000 to 0xFFFFFF (0 sheets to 16777215 sheets).
Processing within the area used by the main control CPU processing:-
Out-of-area processing for main control CPU processing:-
Processing within the use area of the medal count control CPU processing: Accumulate the total payout number of accessories and notify the dedicated unit.
Processing outside the area used for medal count control CPU processing:-

[No.5]
Data type: Total number of consecutive accessories paid out (* 1)
Contents: The number of payouts due to the operation of the first-class special accessories accumulated since the power was turned on. 0x000000 to 0xFFFFFF (0 sheets to 16777215 sheets).
Processing within the area used by the main control CPU processing:-
Out-of-area processing for main control CPU processing:-
Processing within the use area of the medal number control CPU processing: Accumulate the total number of continuous accessory payouts and notify the dedicated unit.
Processing outside the area used for medal count control CPU processing:-

[No.6]
Data type: Accessory ratio (*1)
Contents: Information on the role ratio monitor. 0x00 to 0x64 (0% to 100%) (rounded down). 0xFF when the specified number of games has not been reached.
Processing within the area used by the main control CPU processing:-
Out-of-area processing for main control CPU processing:-
Processing within the use area of medal number control CPU processing: Calculates the role product ratio and notifies it to the dedicated unit.
Processing outside the area used for medal count control CPU processing:-

[No.7]
Data type: Continuous accessory ratio (* 1)
Contents: Information on the role ratio monitor. 0x00 to 0x64 (0% to 100%) (rounded down). 0xFF when the specified number of games has not been reached.
Processing within the area used by the main control CPU processing:-
Out-of-area processing for main control CPU processing:-
Processing within the use area of the medal number control CPU processing: Calculates the continuous accessory ratio and notifies it to the dedicated unit.
Processing outside the area used for medal count control CPU processing:-

[No.8]
Data type: Advantageous section ratio (*1)
Contents: Information on the role ratio monitor. 0x00 to 0x64 (0% to 100%) (rounded down). 0xFF when non-applicable/regular number of games is not reached.
Processing within the area used by the main control CPU processing:-
Out-of-area processing for main control CPU processing:-
Use area processing of medal number control CPU processing: Calculates the advantageous section ratio and notifies it to the dedicated unit.
Processing outside the area used for medal count control CPU processing:-

[No.9]
Data type: Ratio of instructed accessories (* 1)
Contents: Information on the role ratio monitor. 0x00 to 0x64 (0% to 100%) (rounded down). 0xFF when non-applicable/regular number of games is not reached.
Processing within the area used by the main control CPU processing:-
Out-of-area processing for main control CPU processing:-
Processing within the use area of the medal number control CPU processing: Calculates the instructed accessory ratio and notifies it to the dedicated unit.
Processing outside the area used for medal count control CPU processing:-

[No.10]
Data type: Accessory, etc. condition ratio (* 1)
Contents: Information on the role ratio monitor. 0x00 to 0x64 (0% to 100%) (rounded down). 0xFF when the specified number of games has not been reached.
Processing within the area used by the main control CPU processing:-
Out-of-area processing for main control CPU processing:-
Processing within the use area of the medal number control CPU processing: Calculates the state ratio of accessories, etc., and notifies it to the dedicated unit.
Processing outside the area used for medal count control CPU processing:-

[No.11]
Data type: Number of games played Contents: Number of games accumulated since the power was turned on. 0x0000 to 0xFFFF (0 to 65535).
Processing within the area used by the main control CPU processing:-
Out-of-use area processing for main control CPU processing:-
Processing within the use area of the medal count control CPU processing: Accumulate the number of games played and notify the dedicated unit.
Processing outside the area used for medal count control CPU processing:-

[No.12]
Data type: reserved Contents: reserved (fixed to 0x00 when not used).
Processing within the area used by the main control CPU processing:-
Out-of-area processing for main control CPU processing:-
Processing within the area used for medal count control CPU processing: 0x00 is notified to the dedicated unit.
Processing outside the area used for medal count control CPU processing:-

[No.13]
Data type: Reservation Contents: Used by dedicated unit (maximum MY and number of games calculated by dedicated unit).
Processing within the area used by the main control CPU processing:-
Out-of-use area processing for main control CPU processing:-
Processing within the area used for medal count control CPU processing: 0x00 is notified to the dedicated unit.
Processing outside the area used for medal count control CPU processing:-
(*1) Each item calculated by the medal number control CPU is calculated based on signals received from the main control CPU, such as input, payout, and game status.

558 to 561 are diagrams showing details of implementation example 2 of gaming machine information (gaming machine performance information).
The gaming machine information (gaming machine performance information) is notified in the order of the main control board → medal count control board → dedicated unit.
[No.1]
Data type: Total number of inserted sheets Contents: Accumulated number of inserted sheets after power-on. 0x000000 to 0xFFFFFF (0 sheets to 16777215 sheets). A storage example is 0xD00700 for 2000 sheets.
Processing within the use area of the main control CPU processing: Send the total number of inserted medals to the medal number control board.
Out-of-use area processing of main control CPU processing: Accumulate the total number of input sheets.
Processing within the use area of the medal count control CPU processing: Notifies the dedicated unit of the total number of inserted coins received from the main control board.
Processing outside the area used for medal count control CPU processing:-

[No.2]
Data type: Total number of payouts Contents: Cumulative number of payouts since the power was turned on. 0x000000 to 0xFFFFFF (0 sheets to 16777215 sheets).
Processing within the use area of the main control CPU processing: Transmitting the total number of payouts to the medal count control board.
Out-of-use area processing of main control CPU processing: Accumulate the total number of payouts.
Processing within the use area of the medal number control CPU processing: Notifies the dedicated unit of the total number of payouts received from the main control board.
Processing outside the area used for medal count control CPU processing:-

[No.3]
Data type: MY
Contents: Maximum MY calculated after power ON. 0x000000 to 0xFFFFFF (0 sheets to 16777215 sheets).
Processing within the use area of the main control CPU processing: Send the maximum MY to the medal count control board.
Processing outside the use area of the main control CPU processing: Calculate the maximum MY.
Processing within the use area of the medal count control CPU processing: Notifies the dedicated unit of the maximum MY received from the main control board.
Processing outside the area used for medal count control CPU processing:-

[No.4]
Data type: total payout number of accessories Contents: number of payouts due to operation of accessories accumulated since the power was turned on. 0x000000 to 0xFFFFFF (0 sheets to 16777215 sheets).
Processing within the use area of the main control CPU processing: Transmitting the total payout number of accessories to the medal number control board.
Processing outside the use area of the main control CPU processing: Accumulate the total payout number of accessories.
Processing within the use area of medal number control CPU processing: Notifies the dedicated unit of the total payout number of accessories received from the main control board.
Processing outside the area used for medal count control CPU processing:-

[No.5]
Data type: Total payout number of continuous accessories Content: Number of payouts due to the operation of the first class special accessories accumulated from power ON. 0x000000 to 0xFFFFFF (0 sheets to 16777215 sheets).
Processing within the use area of the main control CPU processing: Transmit the total number of continuous accessory payouts to the medal number control board.
Processing outside the use area of the main control CPU processing: Accumulate the total payout number of continuous accessories.
Processing within the use area of the medal number control CPU processing: Notify the dedicated unit of the total number of continuous accessory payouts received from the main control board.
Processing outside the area used for medal count control CPU processing:-

[No.6]
Data type: Role ratio Content: Information on the role ratio monitor. 0x00 to 0x64 (0% to 100%) (rounded down). 0xFF when the specified number of games has not been reached.
Processing within the use area of the main control CPU processing: Transmits the role ratio of the role ratio monitor to the medal number control board.
Processing outside the use area of the main control CPU processing: Calculate the role ratio of the role ratio monitor.
Processing within the use area of the medal number control CPU processing: Notify the special unit of the character ratio received from the main control board.
Processing outside the area used for medal count control CPU processing:-

[No.7]
Data type: Continuous character ratio Contents: Information on role ratio monitor. 0x00 to 0x64 (0% to 100%) (rounded down). 0xFF when the specified number of games has not been reached.
Processing within the use area of the main control CPU processing: Transmits the continuous role ratio of the role ratio monitor to the medal number control board.
Processing outside the use area of the main control CPU processing: Calculate the continuous role ratio of the role ratio monitor.
Processing within the use area of the medal number control CPU processing: Notify the dedicated unit of the continuous accessory ratio received from the main control board.
Processing outside the area used for medal count control CPU processing:-

[No.8]
Data type: Advantageous section ratio Contents: Information on role ratio monitor. 0x00 to 0x64 (0% to 100%) (rounded down). 0xFF when non-applicable/regular number of games is not reached.
Processing within the use area of the main control CPU processing: Send the advantageous section ratio of the role ratio monitor to the medal number control board.
Processing outside the use area of the main control CPU processing: Calculate the advantageous section ratio of the role ratio monitor.
Processing within the use area of the medal number control CPU processing: Notifies the dedicated unit of the advantageous section ratio received from the main control board.
Processing outside the area used for medal count control CPU processing:-

[No.9]
Data type: Role ratio with instructions Contents: Information on the role ratio monitor. 0x00 to 0x64 (0% to 100%) (rounded down). 0xFF when non-applicable/regular number of games is not reached.
Processing within the use area of the main control CPU processing: Sends the instructed role ratio of the role ratio monitor to the medal number control board.
Processing outside the use area of the main control CPU processing: Calculate the instructed role ratio of the role ratio monitor.
Processing within the use area of the medal number control CPU processing: Notifies the dedicated unit of the instructed accessory ratio received from the main control board.
Processing outside the area used for medal count control CPU processing:-

[No.10]
Data type: Role ratio, etc. state ratio Content: Role ratio monitor information. 0x00 to 0x64 (0% to 100%) (rounded down). 0xFF when the specified number of games has not been reached.
Processing within the use area of the main control CPU processing: Transmits the state ratio of the role ratio monitor to the medal number control board.
Processing outside the use area of the main control CPU processing: Calculates the state ratio of the role ratio monitor.
Processing within the use area of the medal number control CPU processing: Notifies the dedicated unit of the state ratio of the accessory, etc. received from the main control board.
Processing outside the area used for medal count control CPU processing:-

[No.11]
Data type: Number of games played Contents: Number of games accumulated since the power was turned on. 0x0000 to 0xFFFF (0 to 65535).
Processing within the use area of the main control CPU processing: Transmitting the number of games to the medal number control board.
Out-of-use area processing of main control CPU processing: Accumulate the number of games played.
Processing within the use area of the medal count control CPU processing: Notifies the dedicated unit of the number of games received from the main control board.
Processing outside the area used for medal count control CPU processing:-

[No.12]
Data type: Reserved Content: Reserved. Fixed to 0x00 when not used.
Processing within the area used by the main control CPU processing:-
Out-of-area processing for main control CPU processing:-
Processing within the area used for medal count control CPU processing: 0x00 is notified to the dedicated unit.
Processing outside the area used for medal count control CPU processing:-

[No.13]
Data type: Reserved Contents: Used by dedicated unit. Maximum MY and number of games calculated by dedicated unit.
Processing within the area used by the main control CPU processing:-
Out-of-area processing for main control CPU processing:-
Processing within the area used for medal count control CPU processing: 0x00 is notified to the dedicated unit.
Processing outside the area used for medal count control CPU processing:-

562 and 563 are diagrams showing details of gaming machine information (gaming machine installation information).
Notify game machine information (game machine installation information) in the order of main control board → medal count control board → dedicated unit.
[No.1]
Data type: Main control chip ID number Contents: Indicates the ID number of the main control CPU.
Processing within the use area of the main control CPU processing: Send the ID number of the main control CPU to the medal number control board.
Out-of-area processing for main control CPU processing:-
Processing within the use area of the medal number control CPU processing: Notifies the main control chip ID number received from the main control board to the dedicated unit.
Processing outside the area used for medal count control CPU processing:-

[No.2]
Data type: Main control chip manufacturer code Contents: Manufacturer code written in the management area of the main control CPU.
Processing within the use area of the main control CPU processing: Send the manufacturer code written in the management area of the main control CPU to the medal number control board.
Out-of-area processing for main control CPU processing:-
Processing within the use area of medal number control CPU processing: Notifies the main control chip maker code received from the main control board to the dedicated unit.
Processing outside the area used for medal count control CPU processing:-

[No.3]
Data type: Main control chip product code Contents: Product code written in the management area of the main control CPU.
Processing within the use area of the main control CPU processing: Send the product code written in the management area of the main control CPU to the medal number control board.
Out-of-area processing for main control CPU processing:-
Processing within the use area of medal number control CPU processing: Notifies the main control chip product code received from the main control board to the dedicated unit.
Processing outside the area used for medal count control CPU processing:-

[No.4]
Data type: Medal number control chip ID number Contents: Indicates the ID number of the medal number control CPU.
Processing within the area used by the main control CPU processing:-
Out-of-use area processing for main control CPU processing:-
Processing within the area used for medal count control CPU processing: Notifies the ID number of the medal count control CPU to the dedicated unit.
Processing outside the area used for medal count control CPU processing:-

[No.5]
Data type: Medal number control chip manufacturer code Contents: Manufacturer code written in the management area of the medal number control CPU.
Processing within the area used by the main control CPU processing:-
Out-of-area processing for main control CPU processing:-
Processing within the area used for medal count control CPU processing: Notifies the dedicated unit of the manufacturer code described in the management area of the medal count control CPU.
Processing outside the area used for medal count control CPU processing:-

[No.6]
Data type: Medal number control chip product code Contents: Product code described in the management area of the medal number control CPU.
Processing within the area used by the main control CPU processing:-
Out-of-use area processing for main control CPU processing:-
Processing within the area used for the medal count control CPU processing: Notifies the dedicated unit of the product code described in the management area of the medal count control CPU.
Processing outside the area used for medal count control CPU processing:-

564 to 568 are diagrams showing the details of the gaming machine information (hall controller/fraud monitoring information).
Notifies game machine information (hall control/illegal monitoring information) in the order of main control board → medal count control board → dedicated unit.
[No.1]
Data type: Number of game medals Contents: Current number of game medals recorded in the game medal number display device. 0x000000 to 0xFF3F00 (0 to 16383 sheets). A storage example is 0xD00700 when the number of game medals is 2000.
Processing within the area used by the main control CPU processing:-
Out-of-area processing for main control CPU processing:-
Processing within the use area of the medal count control CPU processing: Notifies the dedicated unit of the number of game medals recorded in the game medal count display device.
Processing outside the area used for medal count control CPU processing:-

[No.2]
Data type: Number of inserted medals Contents: Number of inserted medals. 0xFD to 0x03 (-3 to 3). The upper 1 bit is a sign (+/-) bit. If there are medals returned by the checkout button, subtract them.
Processing within the area used by the main control CPU processing:-
Out-of-area processing for main control CPU processing:-
Processing within the use area of medal count control CPU processing: Notifies the dedicated unit of the number of game medals inserted (*2) between the previous notification and the current notification.
Processing outside the area used for medal count control CPU processing:-

[No.3]
Data type: Number of medals paid out Contents: Number of medals paid out. 0x00 to 0x0F (0 to 15 sheets).
Processing within the area used by the main control CPU processing:-
Out-of-area processing for main control CPU processing:-
Processing within the use area of medal count control CPU processing: Notifies the dedicated unit of the number of game medals paid out (*2) between the previous notification and the current notification.
Processing outside the area used for medal count control CPU processing:-

[No.4]
Data type: Main control state 1
Contents: Bit0: RB (external signals CN2-3), Bit1: BB (external signals CN2-4), Bit2: AT (external signals CN2-5), Bit3: gaming machine status signal 1, Bit4: gaming machine status signal 2 , Bit 5: game machine state signal 3, Bit 6: game machine state signal 4, Bit 7: unused.
Processing within the use area of the main control CPU processing: Transmit the main control state 1 to the medal number control board.
Out-of-area processing for main control CPU processing:-
Processing within the use area of the medal count control CPU processing: Notifies the dedicated unit of the main control state 1 received from the main control board.
Processing outside the area used for medal count control CPU processing:-

[No.5]
Data type: Main control state 2
Contents: Bit 0: Gaming machine status signal 5, Bit 1: Gaming machine status signal 6, Bit 2: Gaming machine status signal 7, Bits 3 to 7: Not used.
Processing within the use area of the main control CPU processing: Transmit the main control state 2 to the medal number control board.
Out-of-use area processing for main control CPU processing:-
Processing within the use area of the medal count control CPU processing: Notifies the dedicated unit of the main control state 2 received from the main control board.
Processing outside the area used for medal count control CPU processing:-

[No.6]
Data type: Game machine error status Contents: Error code occurring in the game machine. Bit 0-5: Error code, 000000 (B) = No error, Bit 6: 0 = Medal number control, 1 = Main control, Bit 7: 0 = Notification only, 1 = Notification + Hall control output, Bit 0-7: 0 = No error occurred.
Processing within the use area of the main control CPU processing: The game machine error state detected by the main control CPU is transmitted to the medal count control board.
Out-of-area processing for main control CPU processing:-
Processing within the use area of the medal count control CPU processing: Notifies the dedicated unit of the gaming machine error state received from the main control board and the gaming machine error state detected by the medal count control CPU.
Processing outside the area used for medal count control CPU processing:-

[No.7]
Data type: Gaming machine fraud 1 (main control)
Contents: Bit 0: Setting change signal (*3), Bit 1: Setting confirmation signal, Bit 2: Fraud detection signal 1, Bit 3: Fraud detection signal 2, Bit 4: Fraud detection signal 3, Bit 5: Security signal (external signal CN2- 7), Bits 6-7: Not used.
Processing within the use area of the main control CPU processing: Send gaming machine fraud 1 detected by the main control CPU to the medal count control board.
Out-of-use area processing for main control CPU processing:-
Processing within the use area of the medal number control CPU processing: Notifies the dedicated unit of gaming machine fraud 1 received from the main control board.
Processing outside the area used for medal count control CPU processing:-

[No.8]
Data type: Game machine fraud 2 (main control or medal count control)
Contents: Bit 0: set door open signal, Bit 1: door open signal (external signal CN2-8), Bit 2: unused, Bit 3: game medal clear detection (*4), Bit 4-7: unused.
Processing within the use area of the main control CPU processing: Send gaming machine fraud 2 detected by the main control CPU to the medal number control board.
Out-of-area processing for main control CPU processing:-
Processing within the use area of the medal number control CPU processing: Notifies the gaming machine fraud 2 received from the main control board and the gaming machine fraud 2 detected by the medal number control CPU to the dedicated unit.
Processing outside the area used for medal count control CPU processing:-

[No.9]
Data type: Game machine fraud 3 (main control or medal count control)
Contents: Bits 0 to 7: Not used Processing within the area used by the main control CPU processing: -
Out-of-use area processing for main control CPU processing:-
Processing within the area used for medal count control CPU processing: 0x00 is notified to the dedicated unit.
Processing outside the area used for medal count control CPU processing:-

[No.10]
Data type: game information, specified number (IN)
Contents: 0x1101 to 0x1103: Specified number (1 to 3) (external signal CN2-1).
Processing within the use area of the main control CPU processing: When the start lever is accepted, the specified number (IN) of the game is transmitted to the medal number control board.
Out-of-area processing for main control CPU processing:-
Processing within the use area of the medal number control CPU processing: Notifies the dedicated unit of the specified number (IN) received from the main control board.
Processing outside the area used for medal count control CPU processing:-

[No.11]
Data type: game information, number of payouts (OUT) (*5)
Contents: 0x2100 to 0x210F: number of payouts (0 to 15) (external signal CN2-2).
Processing within the use area of the main control CPU processing: When all reels are stopped, the payout number (OUT) of the game is transmitted to the medal number control board.
Out-of-use area processing for main control CPU processing:-
Processing within the use area of the medal count control CPU processing: Notifies the dedicated unit of the payout number (OUT) received from the main control board.
Processing outside the area used for medal count control CPU processing:-

(*2) The number of inserted medals and the number of paid out medals in the medal number control CPU are calculated according to the input, settlement and payout signals received from the main control CPU.
(*3) The setting change signal is continuously output from the time the setting is being changed to the end of one game after the setting is changed.
(*4) The game medal count clear detection continues to output ON until the end of one game after the game medal count clear processing.
(*5) The number of medals to be paid out due to winning and the specified number at the time of replay operation will be notified as the number of payouts (OUT).

FIG. 569 is a diagram showing details of count notification.
Notification of count is sent in the order of medal number control board → dedicated unit.
[No.1]
Data type: Number of counted medals Contents: Number of counted medals. 0x00 to 0x32 (0 to 50 sheets).
Processing within the area used by the main control CPU processing:-
Out-of-area processing for main control CPU processing:-
Processing within the use area of medal number control CPU processing: Notifies the number of counted medals to the dedicated unit, and subtracts the number of counted medals from the game medal number display device.
Processing outside the area used for medal count control CPU processing:-

[No.2]
Data type: Cumulative number of medals Contents: Cumulative number of medals. 0x00 to 0xFFFF (0 to 65535 sheets). A storage example is 0xD007 when the number of accumulated medals counted is 2000.
Processing within the area used by the main control CPU processing:-
Out-of-use area processing for main control CPU processing:-
Processing within the use area of medal number control CPU processing: Add the number of counted medals to the number of accumulated medals and notify the dedicated unit.
Processing outside the area used for medal count control CPU processing:-

FIG. 570 is a diagram showing details of a rental notice.
Notification of lending is sent in the order of dedicated unit → medal count control board.
[No.1]
Data type: Number of loaned medals Contents: Number of loaned medals. 0x00 to 0x32 (0 to 50 sheets).
Processing within the area used by the main control CPU processing:-
Out-of-area processing for main control CPU processing:-
Processing within the use area of medal number control CPU processing: When the lending notification received from the dedicated unit is received normally, the number of lending medals is added to the game medal number display device.
Processing outside the area used for medal count control CPU processing:-

FIG. 571 is a diagram showing details of a loan receipt result response.
Notify the lending reception result response in the order of medal number control board → dedicated unit.
[No.1]
Data type: Result of receiving the number of loaned medals Contents: Result of receiving the number of loaned medals. 0x00: Normal, 0x01: Abnormal. If a value other than these is notified, it is regarded as abnormal.
Processing within the area used by the main control CPU processing:-
Out-of-use area processing for main control CPU processing:-
Processing within the use area of the medal number control CPU processing: 0x00 is responded with normal reception. Abnormal (0x01) responds when: When the serial numbers are not continuous, when the gaming machine is in a lending disabled state, or when the result of adding the number of game medals and the number of loaned medals exceeds 16383.
Processing outside the area used for medal count control CPU processing:-

[Regarding the signal between the "main control board" and the "dedicated unit" of the medalless game machine]
Signals between the main control board and dedicated unit are shown below.
Incidentally, the example shown below is described as a specific example of a gaming machine equipped with only the main control board and not equipped with the medal count control board.

572 and 573 are diagrams showing details of the gaming machine installation information.
The game machine installation information is notified in the order of main control board → dedicated unit.
[No.1]
Main control board - Data name of medal count control board: - (There is no data name because the medal count control board is not installed. Same hereafter.)
Main control board - Contents of the medal count control board: - (Since the medal count control board is not installed, the contents of the data name do not exist. Same hereafter.)
Processing within the area used for processing within the main control board: Notifies the dedicated unit of the game machine type.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the main control board: -
Main control board → Dedicated unit data name: Game machine type Main control board → Dedicated unit content: Indicates the type of game machine.

[No.2]
Main control board - Medal number control board data name: -
Main control board - Medal count control board contents:-
Processing within the area used for processing within the main control board: Notify the ID number of the main control chip to the dedicated unit.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the main control board: -
Data name of main control board→dedicated unit: ID number of main control chip Contents of main control board→dedicated unit: ID number of main control chip.

[No.3]
Main control board - Medal number control board data name: -
Main control board - Medal count control board contents:-
Processing within the area used for processing within the main control board: Notifies the dedicated unit of the manufacturer code described in the management area of the main control chip.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the main control board: -
Data name of main control board→dedicated unit: Main control chip manufacturer code Contents of main control board→dedicated unit: Indicates the manufacturer code written in the management area of the main control chip.

[No.4]
Main control board - Medal number control board data name: -
Main control board - Medal count control board contents:-
Processing within the area used for processing within the main control board: Notifies the dedicated unit of the product code described in the management area of the main control chip.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the main control board: -
Main control board→Dedicated unit data name: Main control chip product code Main control board→Dedicated unit content: Indicates the product code written in the main control chip management area.

[No.5]
Main control board - Medal number control board data name: -
Main control board - Medal count control board contents:-
Processing within the area used for processing within the main control board: 0 is notified to the dedicated unit because the medal count control chip is not mounted.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the main control board: -
Data name of main control board→dedicated unit: medal count control chip ID number Contents of main control board→dedicated unit: ID number of medal count control chip.

[No.6]
Main control board - Medal number control board data name: -
Main control board - Medal count control board contents:-
Processing within the area used for processing within the main control board: 0 is notified to the dedicated unit because the medal count control chip is not mounted.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the main control board: -
Main control board→Dedicated unit data name: Medal count control chip manufacturer code Main control board→Dedicated unit content: Shows the manufacturer code written in the management area of the medal count control chip.

[No.7]
Main control board - Medal number control board data name: -
Main control board - Medal count control board contents:-
Processing within the area used for processing within the main control board: 0 is notified to the dedicated unit because the medal count control chip is not mounted.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the main control board: -
Main control board→Dedicated unit data name: Medal count control chip product code Main control board→Dedicated unit content: Shows the product code described in the management area of the medal count control chip.

574 to 582 are diagrams showing details of gaming machine information (gaming machine performance information, hall control information, fraud monitoring information).
The game machine information (game machine performance information, hall control information, fraud monitoring information) is notified in the order of main control board → dedicated unit.
[No.1]
Main control board - Medal number control board data name: -
Main control board - Medal count control board contents:-
Processing within the use area of processing within the main control board: Notifying the dedicated unit of the number of game medals stored in the number of game medals storage area.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the main control board: -
Main control board→Dedicated unit data name: Number of game medals Main control board→Dedicated unit contents: The current number of game medals recorded in the number of game medals display device. 0x000000 to 0xFF3F00 (0 to 16383 sheets). A storage example is 0xD00700 when the number of game medals is 2000.

[No.2]
Main control board - Medal number control board data name: -
Main control board - Medal count control board contents:-
Processing within the use area of processing within the main control board: Notifying the dedicated unit of the number of game medals inserted between the previous notification and the current notification.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the main control board: -
Main control board → Dedicated unit data name: Number of inserted medals Main control board → Dedicated unit contents: Number of inserted medals. 0xFD to 0x03 (-3 to 3). The upper 1 bit is a sign (+/-) bit. If there are medals returned by the checkout button, subtract them.

[No.3]
Main control board - Medal number control board data name: -
Main control board - Medal count control board contents:-
Processing within the use area of processing within the main control board: Notifying the dedicated unit of the number of game medals paid out between the previous notification and the current notification.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the main control board: -
Main control board → Dedicated unit data name: Number of paid out medals Main control board → Dedicated unit contents: Number of paid out medals. 0x00 to 0x0F (0 to 15 sheets).

[No.4]
Main control board - Medal number control board data name: -
Main control board - Medal count control board contents:-
Processing within the area used for processing within the main control board: Notify the main control state 1 to the dedicated unit.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the main control board: -
Main control board→Dedicated unit data name: Main control status 1
Contents of main control board → dedicated unit: Bit0: RB (external signals CN2-3), Bit1: BB (external signals CN2-4), Bit2: AT (external signals CN2-5), Bit3: gaming machine status signal 1, Bit 4: gaming machine status signal 2, Bit 5: gaming machine status signal 3, Bit 6: gaming machine status signal 4, Bit 7: unused.

[No.5]
Main control board - Medal number control board data name: -
Main control board - Medal count control board contents:-
Processing within the area used for processing within the main control board: Notify the main control state 2 to the dedicated unit.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the main control board: -
Main control board → Data name of dedicated unit: Main control status 2
Contents of main control board → dedicated unit: Bit 0: gaming machine status signal 5, Bit 1: gaming machine status signal 6, Bit 2: gaming machine status signal 7, Bit 3: unused, Bit 4: unused, Bit 5: unused, Bit 6: Unused, Bit7: Unused.

[No.6]
Main control board - Medal number control board data name: -
Main control board - Medal count control board contents:-
Processing within the area used for processing within the main control board: Notifies the dedicated unit of the gaming machine error state.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the main control board: -
Main control board→Dedicated unit data name: Game machine error status Main control board→Dedicated unit content: Error code occurring in the game machine. Bits 0 to 5: error code, 000000 (B) = no error, Bit 6: 0 = medal number control, 1 = main control, Bit 7: 0 = alarm only, 1 = alarm + hall control output. Bit 0 to 7: 0 = No error occurred.

[No.7]
Main control board - Medal number control board data name: -
Main control board - Medal count control board contents:-
Processing within the area used for processing within the main control board: Notifying the game machine fraud 1 to the dedicated unit. However, the setting change signal is continuously output from the time the setting is being changed to the end of one game after the setting is changed.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the main control board: -
Main control board → Data name of dedicated unit: Game machine fraud 1 (main control)
Contents of main control board→dedicated unit: Bit 0: Setting change signal, Bit 1: Setting confirmation signal, Bit 2: Fraud detection signal 1, Bit 3: Fraud detection signal 2, Bit 4: Fraud detection signal 3, Bit 5: Security signal (external signal CN2-7), Bit6: unused, Bit7: unused.

[No.8]
Main control board - Medal number control board data name: -
Main control board - Medal count control board contents:-
Processing within the area used for processing within the main control board: Notifying the game information to the dedicated unit.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the main control board: -
Main control board→Dedicated unit data name: Game information (Note 1)
Contents of main control board → dedicated unit: Each game information is shown in (Note 1).

[No.9]
Main control board - Medal number control board data name: -
Main control board - Medal count control board contents:-
Processing within the area used for processing within the main control board: Notifying the game machine fraud 2 to the dedicated unit. However, the game medal count clear detection is continuously output until one game ends after the game medal count clear processing.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the main control board: -
Main control board → Data name of dedicated unit: Game machine fraud 2 (main control or medal count control)
Contents of main control board → dedicated unit: Bit 0: Set door open signal, Bit 1: Door open signal (external signal CN2-8), Bit 2: Not used, Bit 3: Game medal clear detection, Bit 4: Not used, Bit 5: Not used Used, Bit6: unused, Bit7: unused.

[No.10]
Main control board - Medal number control board data name: -
Main control board - Medal count control board contents:-
Processing within the area used for processing within the main control board: Fixed to 0 because there is no plan to use it at present in the medalless game machine.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the main control board: -
Main control board→Dedicated unit data name: Game machine fraud 3 (main control or medal count control)
Contents of main control board → dedicated unit: Bit0: unused, Bit1: unused, Bit2: unused, Bit3: unused, Bit4: unused, Bit5: unused, Bit6: unused, Bit7: unused.

[No.11]
Main control board - Medal number control board data name: -
Main control board - Medal count control board contents:-
Processing within the area used for processing within the main control board: Notifies the dedicated unit of the total number of input sheets.
Processing outside the use area of processing inside the main control board: Accumulate the total number of input sheets.
Main control board→Dedicated unit data name: Total number of input sheets Main control board→Dedicated unit content: Accumulated number of input sheets since power-on. 0x000000 to 0xFFFFFF (0 sheets to 16777215 sheets). A storage example is 0xD00700 for 2000 sheets.

[No.12]
Main control board - Medal number control board data name: -
Main control board - Medal count control board contents:-
Processing within the area used for processing within the main control board: Notifies the dedicated unit of the total number of payouts.
Processing outside the use area of processing inside the main control board: Accumulate the total number of payouts.
Main control board→Dedicated unit data name: Total number of payouts Main control board→Dedicated unit contents: Cumulative number of payouts since the power was turned on. 0x000000 to 0xFFFFFF (0 sheets to 16777215 sheets).

[No.13]
Main control board - Medal number control board data name: -
Main control board - Medal count control board contents:-
Processing within the area used for processing within the main control board: Notify the maximum MY to the dedicated unit.
Processing outside the use area of processing inside the main control board: Calculate the maximum MY.
Main control board → Data name of dedicated unit: MY
Contents of main control board→dedicated unit: Maximum MY calculated after power-on. 0x000000 to 0xFFFFFF (0 sheets to 16777215 sheets).

[No.14]
Main control board - Medal number control board data name: -
Main control board - Medal count control board contents:-
Processing within the use area of processing within the main control board: Notify the dedicated unit of the total payout number of accessories.
Processing outside the use area of processing inside the main control board: Accumulate the total payout number of accessories.
Main control board→Dedicated unit data name: Total number of payouts Main control board→Dedicated unit contents: Cumulative number of payouts due to actuation of accessories since the power was turned on. 0x000000 to 0xFFFFFF (0 sheets to 16777215 sheets).

[No.15]
Main control board - Medal number control board data name: -
Main control board - Medal count control board contents:-
Processing within the area used for processing within the main control board: Notifying the dedicated unit of the total number of continuous accessory payouts.
Processing outside the use area of processing inside the main control board: Accumulate the total payout number of consecutive accessories.
Main control board→Dedicated unit data name: Total number of continuous bonuses paid out Main control board→Dedicated unit contents: Cumulative number of first-class special bonuses paid out since the power was turned on. 0x000000 to 0xFFFFFF (0 sheets to 16777215 sheets).

[No.16]
Main control board - Medal number control board data name: -
Main control board - Medal count control board contents:-
Processing within the area used for processing within the main control board: Notification of the role item ratio to the dedicated unit.
Processing outside the use area of processing in the main control board: Calculate the character ratio.
Main control board→Dedicated unit data name: Role ratio Main control board→Dedicated unit contents: Role ratio monitor information. 0x00 to 0x64 (0% to 100%) (rounded down). 0xFF when the specified number of games has not been reached.

[No.17]
Main control board - Medal number control board data name: -
Main control board - Medal count control board contents:-
Processing within the area used for processing within the main control board: Notify the continuous accessory ratio to the dedicated unit.
Processing outside the use area of processing in the main control board: Calculate the continuous character ratio.
Main control board→Dedicated unit data name: Continuous role ratio Main control board→Dedicated unit content: Role ratio monitor information. 0x00 to 0x64 (0% to 100%) (rounded down). 0xFF when the specified number of games has not been reached.

[No.18]
Main control board - Medal number control board data name: -
Main control board - Medal count control board contents:-
Processing within the area used for processing within the main control board: Notify the advantageous section ratio to the dedicated unit.
The processing outside the use area of the processing in the main control board: the advantageous interval ratio is calculated.
Main control board → Dedicated unit data name: Advantageous section ratio Main control board → Dedicated unit contents: Role ratio monitor information. 0x00 to 0x64 (0% to 100%) (rounded down). 0xFF when non-applicable/regular number of games is not reached.

[No.19]
Main control board - Medal number control board data name: -
Main control board - Medal count control board contents:-
Processing within the use area of processing within the main control board: Notify the dedicated unit of the instructed accessory ratio.
Processing outside the use area of processing in the main control board: Calculate the instructed accessory ratio.
Main control board→Dedicated unit data name: Indicated role ratio Main control board→Dedicated unit contents: Role ratio monitor information. 0x00 to 0x64 (0% to 100%) (rounded down). 0xFF when non-applicable/regular number of games is not reached.

[No.20]
Main control board - Medal number control board data name: -
Main control board - Medal count control board contents:-
Processing within the area used for processing within the main control board: Notify the state ratio of accessories, etc. to the dedicated unit.
Processing outside the use area of processing in the main control board: Calculate the state ratio of accessories, etc.
Main control board→Dedicated unit data name: Role item status ratio Main control board→Dedicated unit contents: Role ratio monitor information. 0x00 to 0x64 (0% to 100%) (rounded down). 0xFF when the specified number of games has not been reached.

[No.21]
Main control board - Medal number control board data name: -
Main control board - Medal count control board contents:-
Processing within the area used for processing within the main control board: Notifying the number of games played to the dedicated unit.
Processing outside the use area of processing inside the main control board: Accumulate the number of games played.
Data name of main control board→dedicated unit: Number of games played Contents of main control board→dedicated unit: Number of games accumulated since power-on. 0x0000 to 0xFFFF (0 to 65535).

[No.22]
Main control board - Medal number control board data name: -
Main control board - Medal count control board contents:-
Processing within the area used for processing within the main control board: 0x00 is notified to the dedicated unit.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the main control board: -
Data name of main control board→dedicated unit: spare Main control board→dedicated unit contents: spare (fixed to 0x00 when not used).

[No.23]
Main control board - Medal number control board data name: -
Main control board - Medal count control board contents:-
Processing within the area used for processing within the main control board: 0x00 is notified to the dedicated unit.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the main control board: -
Main control board→Dedicated unit data name: Reserved Main control board→Dedicated unit contents: Used by dedicated unit (maximum MY and number of games calculated by dedicated unit).

FIG. 583 is a diagram showing details of (Note 1) game information.
The data types (Bits 4 to 7) of the type information are as follows.
[Bits 4 to 7 = 0]
Type name: unused Contents: -
Processing within the used area: -
Out-of-use area processing:-

[Bits 4 to 7 = 1]
Type name: stipulated number (IN)
Contents: Notify the prescribed number of games. Notify the specified number of the game when the start lever is accepted. It corresponds to the IN signal of the external signal CN2-1.
Processing within the used area: Notify the dedicated unit.
Out-of-use area processing:-

[Bits 4 to 7 = 2]
Type name: Number of payouts (OUT)
Details: Notify the number of payouts at the end of the game (after all reels are stopped). When the replay is activated, the specified number of the game is output. It corresponds to the OUT signal of the external signal CN2-2.
Processing within the used area: Notify the dedicated unit.
Out-of-use area processing:-

[Bits 4 to 7 = 3 to 15]
Type name: unused Contents: -
Processing within the used area: -
Out-of-use area processing:-

FIG. 584 is a diagram showing details of count notification.
The main control board notifies the counting information to the dedicated unit.
[No.1]
Main control board - Medal number control board data name: -
Main control board - Medal count control board contents:-
Processing within the area used for processing within the main control board: Each time notification is made, the serial number is updated (+1) and notified to the dedicated unit.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the main control board: -
Main control board→Dedicated unit data name: Count serial number Main control board→Dedicated unit content: Sequence number. 0x00-0xFF (0-255).

[No.2]
Main control board - Medal number control board data name: -
Main control board - Medal count control board contents:-
Processing within the area used for processing within the main control board: Notifying the number of counted medals and subtracting the number of counted medals from the game medal number storage area.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the main control board: -
Main control board→Dedicated unit data name: Number of medals Main control board→Dedicated unit Contents: Number of medals. 0x00 to 0x32 (0 to 50 sheets).

[No.3]
Main control board - Medal number control board data name: -
Main control board - Medal count control board contents:-
Processing within the area used for processing within the main control board: Add the number of medals counted to the number of accumulated medals counted and notify the dedicated unit.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the main control board: -
Main control board→Dedicated unit data name: Cumulative medal count Main control board→Dedicated unit content: Cumulative medal count. 0x00 to 0xFFFF (0 to 65535 sheets). A storage example is 0xD007 when the number of accumulated medals counted is 2000.

FIG. 585 is a diagram showing details of a rental notice.
The main control board notifies the rental information to the dedicated unit.
[No.1]
Main control board - Medal number control board data name: -
Main control board - Medal count control board contents:-
Processing within the area used for processing within the main control board: Check the continuity of serial numbers.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the main control board: -
Main control board ← Dedicated unit data name: Rental serial number Main control board ← Dedicated unit contents: Sequence number. 0x00-0xFF (0-255).

[No.2]
Main control board - Medal number control board data name: -
Main control board - Medal count control board contents:-
Processing within the area used in the processing within the main control board: Adds the number of loaned medals to the number of game medals storage area at the time of normal reception.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the main control board: -
Main control board ← Dedicated unit data name: Number of loaned medals Main control board ← Dedicated unit contents: Number of loaned medals. 0x00 to 0x32 (0 to 50 sheets).

FIG. 586 is a diagram showing details of the lending acceptance result response.
The main control board responds the rental information reception result to the dedicated unit.
[No.1]
Main control board - Medal number control board data name: -
Main control board - Medal count control board contents:-
Processing within the area used for processing within the main control board: When normal (0x00), the received rental serial number is responded. When there is an error (0x01), the lending serial number received when the lending receipt result is normal (0x00) is returned.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the main control board: -
Main control board → Dedicated unit data name: Rental serial number Main control board → Dedicated unit contents: Sequence number. 0x00-0xFF (0-255).

[No.2]
Main control board - Medal number control board data name: -
Main control board - Medal count control board contents:-
Processing within the area used for processing within the main control board: 0x00 is responded with normal reception. Abnormal (0x01) responds when: When the serial numbers are not continuous, when the gaming machine is in a lending disabled state, or when the result of adding the number of game medals and the number of loaned medals exceeds 16383.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the main control board: -
Main control board → Dedicated unit data name: Received number of loaned medals Main control board → Dedicated unit contents: Received number of loaned medals. 0x00=normal, 0x01=abnormal. If a value other than these is notified, it is regarded as abnormal.

[Regarding the signals between the "main control board", "medal number control board" and "dedicated unit" of the medalless game machine]
The signals between the main control board, medal count control board and dedicated unit are shown below.
Incidentally, the example shown below is described as a specific example of a game machine equipped with a main control board and a medal control board.

587 and 588 are diagrams showing details of the gaming machine installation information.
Notify game machine installation information in the order of main control board → medal number control board → dedicated unit.
[No.1]
Main control board → Data name of medal count control board: -
Contents of main control board → medal count control board:-
Processing within the area used for processing within the medal number control board: Notifies the dedicated unit of the game machine type.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the medal count control board:-
Medal count control board→Dedicated unit data name: Game machine information Medal count control board→Dedicated unit content: Indicates the type of game machine.

[No.2]
Main control board → Medal number control board data name: Main control chip ID number Main control board → Medal number control board content: Indicates the ID number of the main control chip.
Processing within the area used for processing within the medal count control board: Notifies the dedicated unit of the main control chip ID number received from the main control board.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the medal count control board:-
Medal number control board → data name of dedicated unit: same as left
Medal number control board → Contents of dedicated unit: Same as left (If the content is described as same as left, it means that it is the same as the content described on the left side of the same line. The same applies below.)

[No.3]
Data name of main control board → medal count control board: Main control chip manufacturer code Contents of main control board → medal count control board: Indicates the manufacturer code written in the management area of the main control chip.
Processing within the area used for processing within the medal count control board: Notifies the dedicated unit of the main control chip maker code received from the main control board.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the medal count control board:-
Medal number control board → Dedicated unit data name: Same as left Medal number control board → Dedicated unit contents: Same as left

[No.4]
Data name of main control board → medal count control board: Main control chip product code Contents of main control board → medal count control board: Indicates the product code described in the management area of the main control chip.
Processing within the area used for processing within the medal count control board: Notifies the dedicated unit of the main control chip product code received from the main control board.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the medal count control board:-
Medal number control board → Dedicated unit data name: Same as left Medal number control board → Dedicated unit contents: Same as left

[No.5]
Main control board → Data name of medal count control board: -
Contents of main control board → medal count control board:-
Processing within the area used for processing within the medal count control board: Notifies the ID number of the medal count control chip to the dedicated unit.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the medal count control board:-
Medal number control board→Dedicated unit data name: Medal number control chip ID number Medal number control board→Dedicated unit content: Indicates the ID number of the medal number control chip.

[No.6]
Main control board → Data name of medal count control board: -
Contents of main control board → medal count control board:-
Processing within the area used for processing within the medal count control board: Notifies the dedicated unit of the manufacturer code described in the management area of the medal count control chip.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the medal count control board:-
Medal count control board→Dedicated unit data name: Medal count control chip manufacturer code Medal count control board→Dedicated unit content: Shows the manufacturer code written in the management area of the medal count control chip.

[No.7]
Main control board → Data name of medal count control board: -
Contents of main control board → medal count control board:-
Processing within the area used for processing within the medal count control board: Notifies the dedicated unit of the product code described in the management area of the medal count control chip.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the medal count control board:-
Medal count control board → Dedicated unit data name: Medal count control chip product code Medal count control board → Dedicated unit content: Indicates the product code described in the management area of the medal count control chip.

FIG. 589 is a diagram showing a modification of game machine types.
No. 1: gaming machine type in the table of FIG. 587 can be modified as follows.
[No.1]
Main control board → Medal number control board data name: Game machine type Main control board → Medal number control board contents: Indicates the type of game machine.
Processing within the area used for processing within the medal count control board: Notifies the dedicated unit of the gaming machine type received from the main control board.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the medal count control board:-
Medal number control board → Dedicated unit data name: Same as left Medal number control board → Dedicated unit contents: Same as left

590 to 598 are diagrams showing details of gaming machine information (gaming machine performance information, hall control information, fraud monitoring information).
The game machine information (game machine performance information, hall control information, fraud monitoring information) is notified in the order of main control board → medal number control board → dedicated unit.
[No.1]
Main control board → Data name of medal count control board: -
Contents of main control board → medal count control board:-
Use area processing of medal count control board internal processing: Notifies the dedicated unit of the number of game medals stored in the game medal count storage area.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the medal count control board:-
Medal count control board→Dedicated unit data name: Number of game medals Medal count control board→Dedicated unit content: The current number of game medals recorded in the game medal count display device. 0x000000 to 0xFF3F00 (0 to 16383 sheets). A storage example is 0xD00700 when the number of game medals is 2000.

[No.2]
Main control board → Data name of medal count control board: -
Contents of main control board → medal count control board:-
Processing within the area used for processing within the medal count control board: Notifies the dedicated unit of the number of game medals inserted (*1) between the previous notification and the current notification.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the medal count control board:-
Medal count control board→Dedicated unit data name: Number of inserted medals Medal count control board→Dedicated unit contents: Number of inserted medals. 0xFD to 0x03 (-3 to 3). The upper 1 bit is a sign (+/-) bit. If there are medals returned by the checkout button, subtract them.

[No.3]
Main control board → Data name of medal count control board: -
Contents of main control board → medal count control board:-
Processing within the area used for processing within the medal number control board: Notifies the dedicated unit of the number of game medals paid out (*1) between the previous notification and the current notification.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the medal count control board:-
Medal Count Control Board → Dedicated Unit Data Name: Number of Dispensed Medals Medal Count Control Board → Dedicated Unit Contents: Number of Dispensed Medals. 0x00 to 0x0F (0 to 15 sheets).

[No.4]
Main control board → Medal number control board data name: Main control state 1
Contents of main control board → medal count control board: Bit0: RB (external signal CN2-3), Bit1: BB (external signal CN2-4), Bit2: AT (external signal CN2-5), Bit3: gaming machine status signal 1, Bit 4: Gaming machine status signal 2, Bit 5: Gaming machine status signal 3, Bit 6: Gaming machine status signal 4, Bit 7: Not used.
Processing within the area used for processing within the medal count control board: Notifies the dedicated unit of the main control state 1 received from the main control board.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the medal count control board:-
Medal number control board → Dedicated unit data name: Same as left Medal number control board → Dedicated unit contents: Same as left

[No.5]
Main control board → Medal count control board data name: Main control status 2
Contents of main control board → medal number control board: Bit 0: gaming machine status signal 5, Bit 1: gaming machine status signal 6, Bit 2: gaming machine status signal 7, Bit 3: unused, Bit 4: unused, Bit 5: unused, Bit6: unused, Bit7: unused.
Processing within the area used for processing within the medal count control board: Notifies the dedicated unit of the main control state 2 received from the main control board.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the medal count control board:-
Medal number control board → Dedicated unit data name: Same as left Medal number control board → Dedicated unit contents: Same as left

[No.6]
Main control board → Medal number control board data name: Game machine error status Main control board → Medal number control board contents: Error code occurring in the game machine. Bit 0-5: Error code, 000000 (B) = No error, Bit 6: 0 = Medal number control, 1 = Main control, Bit 7: 0 = Notification only, 1 = Notification + Hall control output, Bit 0-7: 0 = No error occurred.
Processing within the use area of processing inside the medal count control board: Notifies the gaming machine error state received from the main control board and the gaming machine error state detected by the medal count control board to the dedicated unit.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the medal count control board:-
Medal number control board → Dedicated unit data name: Same as left Medal number control board → Dedicated unit contents: Same as left

[No.7]
Main control board → Data name of medal number control board: Game machine fraud 1 (main control)
Contents of main control board → medal number control board: Bit 0: Setting change signal, Bit 1: Setting confirmation signal, Bit 2: Fraud detection signal 1, Bit 3: Fraud detection signal 2, Bit 4: Fraud detection signal 3, Bit 5: Security signal (external signals CN2-7), Bit6: unused, Bit7: unused.
Processing within the use area of processing within the medal count control board: Notifies the gaming machine fraud 1 (main control) received from the main control board to the dedicated unit. However, the setting change signal is continuously output from the time the setting is being changed to the end of one game after the setting is changed.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the medal count control board:-
Medal number control board → Dedicated unit data name: Same as left Medal number control board → Dedicated unit contents: Same as left

[No.8]
Main control board → Data name of medal number control board: Game information (Note 1)
Contents of main control board → medal number control board: Various information of the game machine.
Processing within the area used for processing within the medal number control board: Notifying the game information to the dedicated unit.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the medal count control board:-
Medal number control board → Dedicated unit data name: Same as left Medal number control board → Dedicated unit contents: Same as left

[No.9]
Main control board → Medal number control board data name: Game machine fraud 2 (main control or medal number control)
Contents of main control board → medal count control board: Bit 0: Set door open signal, Bit 1: Door open signal (external signal CN2-8), Bit 2: Not used, Bit 3: Game medal count clear detection, Bit 4: Not used, Bit 5 : unused, Bit6: unused, Bit7: unused.
Processing within the use area of processing inside the medal number control board: Notifies the gaming machine fraud 2 received from the main control board and the gaming machine fraud 2 detected by the medal number control board to the dedicated unit. However, the game medal count clear detection is continuously output until one game ends after the game medal count clear processing.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the medal count control board:-
Medal number control board → Dedicated unit data name: Same as left Medal number control board → Dedicated unit contents: Same as left

[No.10]
Main control board → Medal count control board data name: Game machine fraud 3 (main control or medal count control)
Contents of main control board → medal count control board: Bit0: unused, Bit1: unused, Bit2: unused, Bit3: unused, Bit4: unused, Bit5: unused, Bit6: unused, Bit7: unused .
Processing within the use area of the processing within the medal number control board: Fixed to 0 because there is no plan to use it at present in the medalless game machine.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the medal count control board:-
Medal number control board → Dedicated unit data name: Same as left Medal number control board → Dedicated unit contents: Same as left

[No.11]
Main control board → Data name of medal count control board: -
Contents of main control board → medal count control board:-
Processing within the area used for processing within the medal count control board: Accumulate the total number of inserted medals and notify the dedicated unit.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the medal count control board:-
Medal count control board→Dedicated unit data name: Total number of medals inserted Medal count control board→Dedicated unit contents: Cumulative number of inserted medals since the power was turned on. 0x000000 to 0xFFFFFF (0 sheets to 16777215 sheets). A storage example is 0xD00700 for 2000 sheets.

[No.12]
Main control board → Data name of medal count control board: -
Contents of main control board → medal count control board:-
Processing within the area used for processing within the medal count control board: Accumulate the total number of payouts and notify the dedicated unit.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the medal count control board:-
Medal count control board→Dedicated unit data name: Total number of medals paid out Medal count control board→Dedicated unit contents: Cumulative number of payouts since the power was turned on. 0x000000 to 0xFFFFFF (0 sheets to 16777215 sheets).

[No.13]
Main control board → Data name of medal count control board: -
Contents of main control board → medal count control board:-
Processing within the area used for processing within the medal count control board: Calculates the maximum MY and notifies it to the dedicated unit.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the medal count control board:-
Medal number control board → Data name of dedicated unit: MY
Medal count control board → Contents of dedicated unit: Maximum MY calculated after power ON. 0x000000 to 0xFFFFFF (0 sheets to 16777215 sheets).

[No.14]
Main control board → Data name of medal count control board: -
Contents of main control board → medal count control board:-
Processing within the area used for processing within the medal count control board: Accumulate the total number of payouts and notify the dedicated unit.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the medal count control board:-
Medal count control board→Dedicated unit data name: Total number of payouts Medal count control board→Dedicated unit contents: Cumulative number of payouts due to actuation of the payout since the power was turned on. 0x000000 to 0xFFFFFF (0 sheets to 16777215 sheets).

[No.15]
Main control board → Data name of medal count control board: -
Contents of main control board → medal count control board:-
Processing within the area used for processing within the medal count control board: Accumulate the total number of continuous accessory payouts and notify the dedicated unit.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the medal count control board:-
Medal number control board→Dedicated unit data name: Total payout number of consecutive accessories Medal number control board→Dedicated unit contents: The number of payouts due to the operation of the first class special role accumulated since the power was turned on. 0x000000 to 0xFFFFFF (0 sheets to 16777215 sheets).

[No.16]
Main control board → Data name of medal count control board: -
Contents of main control board → medal count control board:-
Processing within the area used for processing within the medal count control board: Calculates the role item ratio and notifies it to the dedicated unit.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the medal count control board:-
Medal number control board→Dedicated unit data name: Role ratio Medal number control board→Dedicated unit contents: Role ratio monitor information. 0x00 to 0x64 (0% to 100%) (rounded down). 0xFF when the specified number of games has not been reached.

[No.17]
Main control board → Data name of medal count control board: -
Contents of main control board → medal count control board:-
Processing within the area used for processing within the medal number control board: Calculates the ratio of continuous accessories and notifies it to the dedicated unit.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the medal count control board:-
Medal number control board→Dedicated unit data name: Consecutive character ratio Medal number control board→Dedicated unit contents: Role ratio monitor information. 0x00 to 0x64 (0% to 100%) (rounded down). 0xFF when the specified number of games has not been reached.

[No.18]
Main control board → Data name of medal count control board: -
Contents of main control board → medal count control board:-
Processing within the area used for processing within the medal count control board: Calculates the advantageous section ratio and notifies it to the dedicated unit.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the medal count control board:-
Medal number control board→Dedicated unit data name: Advantageous section ratio Medal number control board→Dedicated unit contents: Role ratio monitor information. 0x00 to 0x64 (0% to 100%) (rounded down). 0xFF when non-applicable/regular number of games is not reached.

[No.19]
Main control board → Data name of medal count control board: -
Contents of main control board → medal count control board:-
Processing within the area used for processing within the medal number control board: Calculates the ratio of instructed accessories and notifies it to the dedicated unit.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the medal count control board:-
Medal number control board→Dedicated unit data name: Indicated character ratio Medal number control board→Dedicated unit contents: Role ratio monitor information. 0x00 to 0x64 (0% to 100%) (rounded down). 0xFF when non-applicable/regular number of games is not reached.

[No.20]
Main control board → Data name of medal count control board: -
Contents of main control board → medal count control board:-
Processing within the area used for processing within the medal count control board: Calculates the state ratio of accessories, etc., and notifies it to the dedicated unit.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the medal count control board:-
Medal count control board → Dedicated unit data name: Role item status ratio Medal count control board → Dedicated unit contents: Role ratio monitor information. 0x00 to 0x64 (0% to 100%) (rounded down). 0xFF when the specified number of games has not been reached.

[No.21]
Main control board → Data name of medal count control board: -
Contents of main control board → medal count control board:-
Processing within the area used for processing within the medal count control board: Accumulate the number of games played and notify the dedicated unit.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the medal count control board:-
Medal count control board→Dedicated unit data name: Number of games played Medal count control board→Dedicated unit contents: Cumulative number of games since the power was turned on. 0x0000 to 0xFFFF (0 to 65535).

[No.22]
Main control board → Data name of medal count control board: -
Contents of main control board → medal count control board:-
Processing within the area used for processing within the medal number control board: 0x00 is notified to the dedicated unit.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the medal count control board:-
Medal count control board→Dedicated unit data name: Spare Medal count control board→Dedicated unit contents: Spare (fixed to 0x00 when not used).

[No.23]
Main control board → Data name of medal count control board: -
Contents of main control board → medal count control board:-
Processing within the area used for processing within the medal number control board: 0x00 is notified to the dedicated unit.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the medal count control board:-
Medal count control board→Dedicated unit data name: Reserved Medal count control board→Dedicated unit contents: Used by dedicated unit (maximum MY and number of games calculated by dedicated unit).
(*1) The number of tokens inserted and the number of tokens paid out in the processing inside the medal count control board are calculated by the input, settlement and payout signals received from the main control board.

599 to 602 are diagrams showing modified examples of each item.
Items No. 11 to No. 21 in the tables of FIGS. 594 to 597 can be modified as follows.
[No.11]
Main control board → Medal number control board data name: Total number of inserted medals Main control board → Medal number control board contents: Cumulative number of inserted medals since the power was turned on. 0x000000 to 0xFFFFFF (0 sheets to 16777215 sheets). A storage example is 0xD00700 for 2000 sheets.
Processing within the area used for processing within the medal number control board: Notifies the dedicated unit of the total number of inserted medals received from the main control board.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the medal count control board:-
Medal number control board → Dedicated unit data name: Same as left Medal number control board → Dedicated unit contents: Same as left

[No.12]
Main control board → Medal number control board data name: Total number of payouts Main control board → Medal number control board contents: Cumulative number of payouts since the power was turned on. 0x000000 to 0xFFFFFF (0 sheets to 16777215 sheets).
Processing within the area used for processing within the medal count control board: Notifies the dedicated unit of the total number of payouts received from the main control board.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the medal count control board:-
Medal number control board → Dedicated unit data name: Same as left Medal number control board → Dedicated unit contents: Same as left

[No.13]
Main control board → Medal count control board data name: MY
Contents of main control board → medal count control board: Maximum MY calculated after power ON. 0x000000 to 0xFFFFFF (0 sheets to 16777215 sheets).
Processing within the area used for processing within the medal number control board: Notifies the maximum MY received from the main control board to the dedicated unit.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the medal count control board:-
Medal number control board → Dedicated unit data name: Same as left Medal number control board → Dedicated unit contents: Same as left

[No.14]
Main control board → Medal number control board data name: Total number of payouts Main control board → Medal number control board contents: Number of payouts accumulated by the action of the role since the power was turned on. 0x000000 to 0xFFFFFF (0 sheets to 16777215 sheets).
Processing within the area used for processing within the medal number control board: Notifying the dedicated unit of the total payout number of accessories received from the main control board.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the medal count control board:-
Medal number control board → Dedicated unit data name: Same as left Medal number control board → Dedicated unit contents: Same as left

[No.15]
Main control board → Medal number control board data name: Total number of consecutive bonuses paid out Main control board → Medal number control board contents: Number of payouts accumulated by the operation of the first class special bonus since the power was turned on. 0x000000 to 0xFFFFFF (0 sheets to 16777215 sheets).
Processing within the area used for processing within the medal number control board: Notify the dedicated unit of the total number of continuous accessory payouts received from the main control board.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the medal count control board:-
Medal number control board → Dedicated unit data name: Same as left Medal number control board → Dedicated unit contents: Same as left

[No.16]
Main control board → Medal number control board data name: Role ratio Main control board → Medal number control board contents: Role ratio monitor information. 0x00 to 0x64 (0% to 100%) (rounded down). 0xFF when the specified number of games has not been reached.
Processing within the area used for processing within the medal count control board: Notifying the special unit of the character ratio received from the main control board.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the medal count control board:-
Medal number control board → Dedicated unit data name: Same as left Medal number control board → Dedicated unit contents: Same as left

[No.17]
Main control board → Medal number control board data name: Continuous role ratio Main control board → Medal number control board contents: Role ratio monitor information. 0x00 to 0x64 (0% to 100%) (rounded down). 0xFF when the specified number of games has not been reached.
Processing within the area used for processing within the medal number control board: Notifying the dedicated unit of the continuous character ratio received from the main control board.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the medal count control board:-
Medal number control board → Dedicated unit data name: Same as left Medal number control board → Dedicated unit contents: Same as left

[No.18]
Main control board → Medal number control board data name: Advantageous section ratio Main control board → Medal number control board contents: Role ratio monitor information. 0x00 to 0x64 (0% to 100%) (rounded down). 0xFF when non-applicable/regular number of games is not reached.
Processing within the area used for processing within the medal count control board: Notifies the dedicated unit of the advantageous section ratio received from the main control board.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the medal count control board:-
Medal number control board → Dedicated unit data name: Same as left Medal number control board → Dedicated unit contents: Same as left

[No.19]
Main control board → Medal number control board data name: Indicated role ratio Main control board → Medal number control board contents: Role ratio monitor information. 0x00 to 0x64 (0% to 100%) (rounded down). 0xFF when non-applicable/regular number of games is not reached.
Processing within the area used for processing within the medal number control board: Notifying the dedicated unit of the instructed accessory ratio received from the main control board.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the medal count control board:-
Medal number control board → Dedicated unit data name: Same as left Medal number control board → Dedicated unit contents: Same as left

[No.20]
Main control board → Medal number control board data name: Role item status ratio Main control board → Medal number control board contents: Role ratio monitor information. 0x00 to 0x64 (0% to 100%) (rounded down). 0xFF when the specified number of games has not been reached.
Processing within the use area of the processing within the medal number control board: Notifies the special unit of the state ratio of accessories, etc. received from the main control board.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the medal count control board:-
Medal number control board → Dedicated unit data name: Same as left Medal number control board → Dedicated unit contents: Same as left

[No.21]
Main control board → Medal number control board data name: Number of games played Contents of Main control board → Medal number control board: The number of games accumulated since the power was turned on. 0x0000 to 0xFFFF (0 to 65535).
Processing within the area used for processing within the medal count control board: Notifies the dedicated unit of the number of games received from the main control board.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the medal count control board:-
Medal number control board → Dedicated unit data name: Same as left Medal number control board → Dedicated unit contents: Same as left

FIG. 603 is a diagram showing details of (Note 1) game information.
The data types (Bits 4 to 7) of the type information are as follows.
[Bits 4 to 7 = 0]
Type name: unused Contents: -
Processing within the used area: -
Out-of-use area processing:-

[Bits 4 to 7 = 1]
Type name: stipulated number (IN)
Contents: Notify the prescribed number of games. Notify the specified number of the game when the start lever is accepted. It corresponds to the IN signal of the external signal CN2-1.
Processing within the used area: Notify the dedicated unit (*2).
Out-of-use area processing:-

[Bits 4 to 7 = 2]
Type name: Number of payouts (OUT)
Details: Notify the number of payouts at the end of the game (after all reels are stopped). When the replay is activated, the specified number of the game is output. It corresponds to the OUT signal of the external signal CN2-2.
Processing within the used area: Notify the dedicated unit (*2).
Out-of-use area processing:-

[Bits 4 to 7 = 3 to 15]
Type name: unused Contents: -
Processing within the used area: -
Out-of-use area processing:-
(*2) The specified number and the number of payouts notified to the dedicated unit by the game medal control board are the specified number and the number of payouts received from the main control board.

FIG. 604 is a diagram showing details of the count notification.
The medal number control board notifies the dedicated unit of the counting information.
[No.1]
Main control board - Medal number control board data name: -
Main control board - Medal count control board contents:-
Processing within the area used for processing within the medal number control board: Each time notification is made, the serial number is updated (+1) and notified to the dedicated unit.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the medal count control board:-
Medal count control board → Dedicated unit data name: Count serial number Medal count control board → Dedicated unit content: Sequence number. 0x00-0xFF (0-255).

[No.2]
Main control board - Medal number control board data name: -
Main control board - Medal count control board contents:-
Processing within the use area of processing within the medal number control board: Notifies the number of counted medals and subtracts the number of counted medals from the game medal number storage area.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the medal count control board:-
Medal count control board → Dedicated unit data name: Counted medal count Medal count control board → Dedicated unit content: Counted medal count. 0x00 to 0x32 (0 to 50 sheets).

[No.3]
Main control board - Medal number control board data name: -
Main control board - Medal count control board contents:-
Processing within the area used for processing within the medal number control board: Adds the number of counted medals to the number of accumulated medals and notifies the dedicated unit.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the medal count control board:-
Medal number control board→Dedicated unit data name: Cumulative number of medals Medal number control board→Dedicated unit contents: Cumulative number of medals. 0x00 to 0xFFFF (0 to 65535 sheets). A storage example is 0xD007 when the number of accumulated medals counted is 2000.

FIG. 605 is a diagram showing details of the rental notification.
The dedicated unit notifies the token count control board of the lending information.
[No.1]
Main control board - Medal number control board data name: -
Main control board - Medal count control board contents:-
Processing within the area used for processing within the medal count control board: Check the continuity of serial numbers.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the medal count control board:-
Medal count control board ← Dedicated unit data name: Loan serial number Medal count control board ← Dedicated unit contents: Sequence number. 0x00-0xFF (0-255).

[No.2]
Main control board - Medal number control board data name: -
Main control board - Medal count control board contents:-
Processing within the use area of processing in the medal number control board: Adds the number of loaned medals to the number of game medals storage area at the time of normal reception.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the medal count control board:-
Medal number control board ← Dedicated unit data name: Number of loaned medals Medal number control board ← Dedicated unit contents: Number of loaned medals. 0x00 to 0x32 (0 to 50 sheets).

FIG. 606 is a diagram showing details of the lending acceptance result response.
The medal count control board responds to the exclusive unit with the reception result of the lending information.
[No.1]
Main control board - Medal number control board data name: -
Main control board - Medal count control board contents:-
Processing within the area used for processing within the medal count control board: When normal (0x00), the received lending serial number is responded. When there is an error (0x01), the lending serial number received when the lending receipt result is normal (0x00) is returned.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the medal count control board:-
Medal count control board → Dedicated unit data name: Loan serial number Medal count control board → Dedicated unit contents: Sequence number. 0x00-0xFF (0-255).

[No.2]
Main control board - Medal number control board data name: -
Main control board - Medal count control board contents:-
Processing within the area used for the processing within the medal count control board: 0x00 is returned as a normal reception. Abnormal (0x01) responds when: When the serial numbers are not continuous, when the gaming machine is in a lending disabled state, or when the result of adding the number of game medals and the number of loaned medals exceeds 16383.
Processing outside the area used for processing inside the medal count control board:-
Medal count control board → Dedicated unit data name: Loaned medals received result Medal count control board → Dedicated unit contents: Loaned medals received result. 0x00=normal, 0x01=abnormal. If a value other than these is notified, it is regarded as abnormal.

[Counting timing in medalless game machines]
[Basic specifications for counting]
Counting in a medalless gaming machine means transmitting the number of game medals recorded in the gaming machine to a device (dedicated unit) outside the gaming machine.
The number of game medals is counted when either "short press" or "long press" is detected.
One game medal is counted for each "short press".
When the "long press" is detected, 50 game medals are counted. If the number of game medals is less than 50, all medals are counted.
The number of game medals is counted at count notification timings at intervals of 300 ms.

The medal count control CPU (medal count control board) determines that the count button has been pressed for a short time when the count button is released before 500 ms have passed since the count button was pressed.
The medal count control CPU determines that the count button has been pressed long when it continues to be pressed even after 500 ms have elapsed since the count button was pressed.

If the counting button continues to be pressed until just before the counting notification timing after 300 ms from counting the number of game medals by detecting the long pressing, it is determined that the counting button has been pressed long (continuous long pressing).
In the following description, the medal-less game machine is assumed to hold a sufficient number of game medals requested to be counted, in order to emphasize the counting timing.
The medal count control CPU basically monitors the signal at the OFF edge of the counting button.
OFF edges are always accepted. The count RWM (memory for counting counts) can temporarily exceed 50 without any problem. If the count RWM exceeds 50, it is reset to 50. One count notification shall not exceed 50 (information not exceeding 50 sheets).

FIG. 607 is a diagram showing (1) long press basic pattern.
The vertical lines (T1, T2, T3, T4, etc.) illustrated every 300 ms are count notification timings (same below).
Here, an example will be described in which the count button is pressed for 580 ms and then released.
The count button is turned on between the first count notification timing T1 and the second count notification timing T2, and the count button is turned on between the third count notification timing T3 and the fourth count notification timing T4. is OFF.

When the ON time of the count button reaches 500 ms, the medal number control CPU judges that the long-press counting condition is satisfied, and at the next count notification timing T4 when the long-press counting condition is satisfied, the long-press is started. A corresponding count notification (50 sheets) is sent to the dedicated unit.
According to this pattern, it is possible to correspond to the basic action of long press.

FIG. 608 is a diagram showing (2) short press basic pattern.
Here, an example in which the count button is pressed for 170 ms and then released will be described.
The count button is turned on between the first count notification timing T1 and the second count notification timing T2, and the count button is turned on between the second count notification timing T2 and the third count notification timing T3. is OFF.

If the counting button is turned OFF before the ON time of the counting button reaches 500 ms, the medal count control CPU judges that the short-press counting condition is met, and notifies the next count when the short-press counting condition is met. At timing T3, a count notification (one sheet) corresponding to the short press is transmitted to the dedicated unit.
According to this pattern, it is possible to correspond to the basic action of short pressing.

FIG. 609 is a diagram showing (3) continuous long-press pattern (part 1).
The long-press continuous pattern (No. 1) is an example in which the long-press is continued at the next counting notification timing, and 50 sheets are counted at the counting notification timing.
Here, an example in which the count button is pressed for 1200 ms and then released will be described.
The count button is turned on between the first count notification timing T1 and the second count notification timing T2, and the count button is turned on between the fifth count notification timing T5 and the sixth count notification timing T6. is OFF.

When the ON time of the count button reaches 500 ms, the medal number control CPU judges that the long-press counting condition is satisfied, and at the next count notification timing T4 when the long-press counting condition is satisfied, the long-press is started. A corresponding count notification (50 sheets) is sent to the dedicated unit.
Also, the long press continues at the count notification timing T5 next to the count notification timing T4 at which the count notification (50 sheets) corresponding to the long press is transmitted. Therefore, the medal number control CPU judges that the counting condition for continuous long presses is met, and at count notification timing T5, transmits a count notification (50 cards) corresponding to the continuous long presses to the dedicated unit.
According to this pattern, it is possible to cope with continuous long press operations.

FIG. 610 is a diagram showing (3) continuous long-press pattern (part 2).
The continuous long-press pattern (Part 2) is an example in which the long-press is continued at the count notification timing, and 50 sheets are counted at the next count notification timing.
Here, an example in which the count button is pressed for 1200 ms and then released will be described.
The count button is turned on between the first count notification timing T1 and the second count notification timing T2, and the count button is turned on between the fifth count notification timing T5 and the sixth count notification timing T6. is OFF.

When the ON time of the count button reaches 500 ms, the medal number control CPU judges that the long-press counting condition is satisfied, and at the next count notification timing T4 when the long-press counting condition is satisfied, the long-press is started. A corresponding count notification (50 sheets) is sent to the dedicated unit.

Further, the long press is continued even at the next count notification timing T4 when the long press counting condition is satisfied. Therefore, the medal count control CPU judges that the counting condition for continuous long presses is satisfied, and at the count notification timing T5 next to the count notification timing T4, count notifications (50) corresponding to the continuous long presses are issued. , to a dedicated unit.

Further, the long press is continued even at the count notification timing T5 next to the count notification timing T4 at which the count notification (50 sheets) corresponding to the long press is transmitted. Therefore, the medal count control CPU judges that the counting condition for continuous long presses is satisfied, and at the count notification timing T6 following the count notification timing T5, count notifications (50) corresponding to the continuous long presses are issued. , to a dedicated unit.
According to this pattern, when the counting condition for the first long press is satisfied, the counting condition for continuous long presses can always be satisfied at subsequent count notification timings.

FIG. 611 is a diagram showing (3) continuous long press pattern (part 3).
The continuous long-press pattern (No. 3) is an example in which the long-press is continued at the next counting notification timing, and 50 sheets are counted at the next counting notification timing.
Here, an example in which the count button is pressed for 1200 ms and then released will be described.
The count button is turned on between the first count notification timing T1 and the second count notification timing T2, and the count button is turned on between the fifth count notification timing T5 and the sixth count notification timing T6. is OFF.

When the ON time of the count button reaches 500 ms, the medal number control CPU judges that the long-press counting condition is satisfied, and at the next count notification timing T4 when the long-press counting condition is satisfied, the long-press is started. A corresponding count notification (50 sheets) is sent to the dedicated unit.
Also, the long press continues at the count notification timing T5 next to the count notification timing T4 at which the count notification (50 sheets) corresponding to the long press is transmitted. Therefore, the medal count control CPU judges that the counting condition for continuous long presses is satisfied, and at the count notification timing T6 following the count notification timing T5, count notifications (50) corresponding to the continuous long presses are issued. , to a dedicated unit.
According to this pattern, the count notification can be transmitted at the next count notification timing T4 when the long-press counting condition is satisfied, or at the next count notification timing T6 when the continuous long-press counting condition is satisfied. Moreover, at the count notification timing T4 when 50 sheets are counted, the count condition can be prevented from being satisfied.

FIG. 612 is a diagram showing (4) short-press continuation pattern (part 1).
The pattern of consecutive short presses (No. 1) is an example of counting at the same count notification timing.
Here, an example will be described in which the count button is pressed for 170 ms and then released, and after 50 ms, the count button is pressed for 180 ms and then released.
The count button is turned on between the first count notification timing T1 and the second count notification timing T2, and the count button is turned on between the second count notification timing T2 and the third count notification timing T3. is OFF.
In addition, the counting button is turned ON between the second counting notification timing T2 and the third counting notification timing T3, and between the second counting notification timing T2 and the third counting notification timing T3, The counting button is OFF.

If the counting button is turned OFF before the ON time of the counting button reaches 500 ms, the medal count control CPU determines that the counting condition for the first short press is satisfied. Also, in the same counting interval (T2-T3) in which the counting conditions for the first short press are satisfied, if the counting button is turned off again before the ON time of the counting button reaches 500 ms, medal number control is performed. The CPU determines that the condition for counting the second short press is met. Then, the medal number control CPU transmits a count notification (two sheets) corresponding to the two short presses to the dedicated unit at the next count notification timing T3 when the condition for counting the two short presses is met. .
According to this pattern, it is possible to cope with a plurality of short presses in the same counting section.

FIG. 613 is a diagram showing (4) short-press continuation pattern (part 2).
The short-press continuation pattern (part 2) is an example of counting at different count notification timings.
Here, an example will be described in which the count button is pressed for 170 ms and then released, and after 50 ms, the count button is pressed for 180 ms and then released.
The count button is turned on between the first count notification timing T1 and the second count notification timing T2, and the count button is turned on between the second count notification timing T2 and the third count notification timing T3. is OFF.
In addition, the counting button is turned ON between the second counting notification timing T2 and the third counting notification timing T3, and between the second counting notification timing T2 and the third counting notification timing T3, The count button is OFF.

If the counting button is turned OFF before the ON time of the counting button reaches 500 ms, the medal number control CPU judges that the counting condition for the first short press is satisfied, and the counting condition for the first short pressing is satisfied. At the next count notification timing T3, a count notification (one sheet) corresponding to the first short press is transmitted to the dedicated unit.
Also, in the same counting interval (T2-T3) in which the counting conditions for the first short press are satisfied, if the counting button is turned off again before the ON time of the counting button reaches 500 ms, medal number control is performed. The CPU determines that the counting condition for the second short press is satisfied, and at the counting notification timing T4 next to the counting notification timing T3 following the time when the counting condition for the first short press is satisfied, the second short pressing is performed. A count notification (one sheet) corresponding to the push is sent to the dedicated unit.
According to this pattern, when a plurality of short presses occur in the same counting section, the plurality of short presses can be counted at different counting timings.

FIG. 614 is a diagram showing (4) short press continuation pattern (part 3).
The pattern of consecutive short presses (No. 3) is an example of discarding count requests after the first time within the same count notification timing.
Here, an example will be described in which the count button is pressed for 170 ms and then released, and after 50 ms, the count button is pressed for 180 ms and then released.
The count button is turned on between the first count notification timing T1 and the second count notification timing T2, and the count button is turned on between the second count notification timing T2 and the third count notification timing T3. is OFF.
In addition, the counting button is turned ON between the second counting notification timing T2 and the third counting notification timing T3, and between the second counting notification timing T2 and the third counting notification timing T3, The counting button is OFF.

If the counting button is turned OFF before the ON time of the counting button reaches 500 ms, the medal number control CPU judges that the counting condition for the first short press is met, but the counting condition for the first short press is met. Even if the counting button is turned off before the ON time of the counting button reaches 500 ms in the same counting interval (T2 to T3) as the counting interval (T2 to T3), it is not judged that the counting condition for the second short press has been met. First, at the next count notification timing T3 when the counting condition for the first short press is satisfied, a count notification (one sheet) corresponding to one short press is transmitted to the dedicated unit.
According to this pattern, only one short press can be accepted in the same counting section.

FIG. 615 is a diagram showing (5) long press+short press pattern (part 1).
The long press+short press pattern (Part 1) is an example in which short presses are not counted.
Here, an example will be described in which the count button is pressed for 540 ms and then released, and after 50 ms, the count button is pressed for 120 ms and then released.
The count button is turned on between the first count notification timing T1 and the second count notification timing T2, and the count button is turned on between the third count notification timing T3 and the fourth count notification timing T4. is OFF.
In addition, the count button is turned on between the third count notification timing T3 and the fourth count notification timing T4, and between the third count notification timing T3 and the fourth count notification timing T4, The count button is OFF.

When the ON time of the count button reaches 500 ms, the medal number control CPU judges that the long-press counting condition is satisfied, and at the next count notification timing T4 when the long-press counting condition is satisfied, the long-press is started. A corresponding count notification (50 sheets) is sent to the dedicated unit.
Even if the counting button is turned OFF before the ON time of the counting button reaches 500 ms, the medal number control CPU cannot judge that the counting condition for short pressing is satisfied in the counting section in which the counting condition for long pressing is satisfied. not send the count notification corresponding to the short press to the dedicated unit.
According to this pattern, it is possible to disable the short press while giving priority to the long press.

FIG. 616 is a diagram showing (5) long press+short press pattern (part 2).
The long press + short press pattern (part 2) is an example of counting at the same count notification timing.
Here, an example will be described in which the count button is pressed for 540 ms and then released, and after 50 ms, the count button is pressed for 120 ms and then released.
The count button is turned on between the first count notification timing T1 and the second count notification timing T2, and the count button is turned on between the third count notification timing T3 and the fourth count notification timing T4. is OFF.
In addition, the count button is turned on between the third count notification timing T3 and the fourth count notification timing T4, and between the third count notification timing T3 and the fourth count notification timing T4, The counting button is OFF.

When the ON time of the count button reaches 500 ms, the medal count control CPU determines that the long-press count condition is satisfied. Further, when the counting button is turned OFF before the ON time of the counting button reaches 500 ms, the medal number control CPU judges that the short-press counting condition is satisfied. Then, at the next count notification timing T4 when the long-press counting condition and the short-press counting condition are satisfied, the medal number control CPU sends a count notification (51 cards) corresponding to the long press and short press to the dedicated unit. Send to
According to this pattern, both a long press and a short press can be effective. This pattern is effective when the count value has no upper limit.

FIG. 617 is a diagram showing (5) long press+short press pattern (part 3).
The long-press + short-press pattern (No. 3) is an example of counting at another count notification timing.
Here, an example will be described in which the count button is pressed for 540 ms and then released, and after 50 ms, the count button is pressed for 120 ms and then released.
The count button is turned on between the first count notification timing T1 and the second count notification timing T2, and the count button is turned on between the third count notification timing T3 and the fourth count notification timing T4. is OFF.
In addition, the count button is turned on between the third count notification timing T3 and the fourth count notification timing T4, and between the third count notification timing T3 and the fourth count notification timing T4, The counting button is OFF.

When the ON time of the count button reaches 500 ms, the medal count control CPU determines that the long-press count condition is met. Further, when the counting button is turned OFF before the ON time of the counting button reaches 500 ms, the medal number control CPU judges that the short-press counting condition is satisfied. Then, the medal count control CPU transmits a count notification (50) corresponding to the long press to the dedicated unit at the next count notification timing T4 when the long press count condition is met, and the long press count condition is satisfied. At the counting notification timing T5 next to the counting notification timing T4 next to the establishment, the counting notification (one sheet) corresponding to the short press is transmitted to the dedicated unit.
According to this pattern, when the count value has an upper limit (50 sheets), it is possible to count short presses while prioritizing long presses.

FIG. 618 is a diagram showing (6) short press+long press pattern (part 1).
The short press+long press pattern (Part 1) is an example in which short presses are counted before long presses.
Here, an example will be described in which the count button is pressed for 170 ms and then released, and after 80 ms, the count button is pressed for 580 ms and then released.
The count button is turned on between the first count notification timing T1 and the second count notification timing T2, and the count button is turned on between the second count notification timing T2 and the third count notification timing T3. is OFF.
In addition, the counting button is turned ON between the second counting notification timing T2 and the third counting notification timing T3, and between the fourth counting notification timing T4 and the fifth counting notification timing T5, The counting button is OFF.

If the counting button is turned OFF before the ON time of the counting button reaches 500 ms, the medal count control CPU judges that the short-press counting condition is met, and notifies the next count when the short-press counting condition is met. At timing T3, a count notification (one sheet) corresponding to the short press is transmitted to the dedicated unit.
When the ON time of the count button reaches 500 ms, the medal number control CPU judges that the long-press counting condition is satisfied, and at the next counting notification timing T5 when the long-press counting condition is satisfied, the long-press is started. A corresponding count notification (50 sheets) is sent to the dedicated unit.
According to this pattern, short presses can be counted during long presses.

FIG. 619 is a diagram showing (6) short press+long press pattern (part 2).
The short press+long press pattern (part 2) is an example in which short presses are counted after long presses.
Here, an example will be described in which the count button is pressed for 170 ms and then released, and after 80 ms, the count button is pressed for 580 ms and then released.
The count button is turned on between the first count notification timing T1 and the second count notification timing T2, and the count button is turned on between the second count notification timing T2 and the third count notification timing T3. is OFF.
In addition, the counting button is turned on between the second counting notification timing T2 and the third counting notification timing T3, and between the fourth counting notification timing T4 and the fifth counting notification timing T5, The counting button is OFF.

If the counting button is turned OFF before the ON time of the counting button reaches 500 ms, the medal count control CPU judges that the counting condition for short pressing is satisfied, but the next counting is performed when the counting condition for short pressing is satisfied. At the notification timing T3, if the counting button is ON (long pressing is executed), the counting notification (1 sheet) corresponding to the short pressing is temporarily suspended.
When the ON time of the count button reaches 500 ms, the medal number control CPU judges that the long-press counting condition is satisfied, and at the next counting notification timing T5 when the long-press counting condition is satisfied, the long-press is started. A corresponding count notification (50 sheets) is sent to the dedicated unit.
Then, at the count notification timing T6 next to the count notification timing T5 following the time when the long-press counting condition is met, the medal count control CPU issues a counting notification (1 sheet) corresponding to the pending short-press, Send to dedicated unit.
According to this pattern, short presses are not counted during long presses, and short presses are counted after the long presses have been counted.

FIG. 620 is a flow chart showing an example of the counting control process procedure.
The content of this flow chart is that the medal count control CPU (medal count control board), or if the medal count control CPU is not installed, the main control CPU (main control board) controls the interrupt cycle). This count control process is called and executed when a trigger for execution of the count control process occurs during execution of the main loop process by the medal count control CPU. This flowchart conceptually shows the flow of processing. For this reason, there is a possibility that all the patterns described above cannot be dealt with only with this flowchart. However, in this case, the medal number control CPU and the like can execute control processing corresponding to the above pattern.

Step S7100: The medal number control CPU confirms whether or not the counting button is ON.
As a result, when it is confirmed that the count button is ON (Yes), the medal count control CPU executes step S7102, and when it is not confirmed that the count button is ON, the medal count control CPU executes step S7108. do.

Step S7102: The medal count control CPU executes timer addition processing. This timer is incremented by 1 every 1 ms, for example.

Step S7104: The medal count control CPU confirms whether or not the count button pressing time has reached 500 ms. The medal count control CPU can determine that the pressing time of the counting button has reached 500 ms when the value of the timer being incremented in step S7102 reaches 500.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the pressing time of the count button has reached 500 ms (Yes), the medal count control CPU executes step S7106. The number control CPU executes step S7114.

Step S7106: The medal count control CPU judges that the initial 50 medal counting condition (the initial long-press counting condition) is satisfied, and generates a counting notification corresponding to the initial 50 medal counting request.

Step S7108: Medal Number Control The CPU executes a process of clearing the timer incremented in step S7102.

Step S7110: The medal number control CPU confirms whether or not the OFF edge of the counting button has been detected (whether or not the counting button has been switched from ON to OFF).

As a result, when it is confirmed that the OFF edge of the count button has been detected (Yes), the medal count control CPU executes step S7112. Step S7114 is executed.

Step S7112: The medal count control CPU judges that the condition for counting one medal (the condition for counting short presses) is met, and generates a counting notification corresponding to the request for counting one medal.

Step S7114: The medal count control CPU confirms whether or not it is the count notification timing.
As a result, when it is confirmed that it is the count notification timing (Yes), the medal count control CPU executes step S7116.

Step S7116: The medal number control CPU confirms whether or not the first long press has been counted (whether or not the count notification corresponding to the first long press has been transmitted).
As a result, when it is confirmed that the first long press has been counted (Yes), the medal count control CPU executes step S7118. Step S7122 is executed.

Step S7118: The medal number control CPU confirms whether or not there is continuous long pressing (continuous long pressing) (whether or not the counting button is continuously pressed).
As a result, when it is confirmed that it is a continuous long press (Yes), the medal count control CPU executes step S7120, and when it is not confirmed that it is a continuous long press, the medal count control CPU executes step S7122.

Step S7120: The medal number control CPU judges that the 50 medal counting condition (the second and subsequent long press counting condition, the long pressing counting condition) is met, and generates a counting notification corresponding to the 50 medal counting request.

Step S7122: The medal count control CPU executes count notification processing. Specifically, the medal number control CPU executes a process of transmitting a count notification including a count request generated in each process described above to the dedicated unit.
After completing the above processing, the medal count control CPU returns to the caller.

[Chapter S2]
[Calculation processing of gaming machine performance information (Part 1)]
FIG. 621 is a diagram showing details of gaming machine performance information.
The gaming machine performance information includes "special information" and "information on role ratio monitor" as information types.
The contents of "special information" are "total number of inserts", "total number of payouts", "total number of payouts during operation", "total number of payouts during continuous operation" and "MY (* 1)" is.
The contents of "Information on role ratio monitor" are "advantageous section ratio (* 2)", "instructed role ratio (* 3)", "character ratio", "continuous role ratio" and "accessories, etc. state ratio (*4)”.

(*1) MY refers to the number of increase in game medals (the number obtained by subtracting the total number of inserted game medals from the total number of acquired game medals) from the time when the game medals decreased the most when the result of the game was obtained. .
(*2) Advantageous section ratio refers to the ratio of the number of games played in the advantageous section (section having performance related to the instruction function) to the total number of games played.
(*3) Accessory status ratio refers to the percentage of all game medals obtained by adding the number of acquisitions when the accessory is activated and the number of acquisitions when the instruction function is activated.
(*4) Refers to the total ratio of the number of games played when the accessory continuous activation device is activated and the number of games played when the accessory continuous activation device is not activated to the total number of games played.

A reel-type game machine (medal-less game machine) equipped with a game medal number display device can be equipped with processing for monitoring special information (for example, information for contributing to countermeasures against addiction). The medalless gaming machine calculates special information within the gaming machine and transmits it to a dedicated unit (rental unit) via a game ball rental device connection terminal board.

[Calculation process execution location (calculation subject)]
FIG. 622 is a diagram showing a simple block diagram of a medalless gaming machine.
The medalless game machine includes a main control board 9830 and a medal count control board 9832 and is connected to a dedicated unit 9802 .
The main control board 9830 and the medal number control board 9832 can communicate, and the medal number control board 9832 and the dedicated unit 9802 can communicate.

The main control board 9830 can execute control processing related to games.
The medal number control board 9832 can communicate with the main control board 9830 and the dedicated unit 9802, and can execute an insertion control process regarding the insertion of game medals.

The main control board 9830 transmits information such as the number of inserted coins, the number of payouts, and game information to the number-of-medals control board 9832 .
The medal count control board 9832 calculates (generates, calculates) gaming machine performance information based on information transmitted from the main control board 9830 .
The medal number control board 9832 transmits the calculated gaming machine performance information to the dedicated unit 9802 .
Note that the “medal number control board” refers to the main board on which the medal number control ROM is installed.

Gaming machine performance information has no risk of affecting the results of games, and is exclusively related to payouts. Information calculation processing can be performed. Note that the calculation processing of the gaming machine performance information may be performed by the main control board 9830 .

[Technical standards]
It must not be able to transmit signals that may affect the results of games to machines or devices outside the gaming machine.

The interpretation of "signal that may affect the outcome of the game" is that "function" in "function that may affect the outcome of the game" should be read as "signal". However, the following (1) to (3) are excluded.
(1) A signal that transmits the result of winning a prize, replay, accessory, and activation of the accessory continuous operation device to the outside of the game machine through the game ball lending device connection terminal plate or external terminal plate (2) Game ball or A signal that transmits the result of lending game medals to the outside of the game machine through the game ball lending device connection end plate, and the result of throwing in, shooting and paying out, the game ball lending device connection end plate or external terminal Signal sent outside the game machine through the board (3) A signal sent outside the game machine through the terminal board for connecting the game ball lending device or the external terminal board to indicate that the symbol has been displayed.

The ROM and read/write memory mounted on the main board send out the game medals, etc. that have been lent or won by winning to the receiving tray, or send out a signal that indicates the number of game medals, etc. that have been lent or won by winning. It is preferable that the total number of items to be transmitted to the number-of-game-balls display device or the number-of-game-medals display device does not exceed one through all the main boards.

[Chapter S3]
[Calculation processing of gaming machine performance information (Part 2)]
If an abnormal value is found in the performance information of the game machine, it is assumed that the sales office (hall, etc.) where the game machine is installed will inspect and confirm it. It also helps prevent.
Among the gaming machine performance information, "Information about the role ratio monitor" is an area different from the usage area of the ROM (main control ROM) specified in the technical standards shown below (outside the usage area, Calculation processing can be performed in an area outside the area, an area other than the use area).

Since the "special information" to be transmitted to the dedicated unit (rental unit) as the gaming machine performance information is also an item related to fraud prevention, it can be calculated outside the use area of the main control ROM. In this case, it is preferable that at least one of the following conditions (1) to (9) be satisfied, and more preferable that all of them be satisfied.

(1) Programs placed outside the usage area shall be used for the purpose of calculating gaming machine performance information (anti-fraud) and shall not impair the fairness of games.
(2) The used area and the control area and data area outside the used area shall be placed in clearly separated areas.
(3) A program placed outside the usage area must be statically called from a program in the usage area before being executed. Also, in that case, the call destination address must be clearly described in the program list.
(4) The program should be modularized for each function, and all registers used in the usage area should be protected when called.
(5) Access to RWMs in each other's area from the used area or outside the used area is permitted only for reference, and update is prohibited.
(6) It is not possible to call a subroutine in the control area of the used area from the control area outside the used area.
(7) Do not provide common general-purpose subroutines outside the use area.
(8) Always call the module in the form of a subroutine, and after the subroutine ends, return to immediately after the call with the RET instruction.
(9) There should be one module for each purpose.

FIG. 623 is a diagram showing a list of processes performed outside the use area of the main control ROM.
The contents of the processing performed outside the use area of the main control ROM are as follows.
The processing performed outside the use area of the main control ROM preferably includes at least one of the following processings, and more preferably includes all of the following processings. Note that at least one of the following processes may be executed in the used area.
(1) Processing related to detection of a foreign object attacking the inside of the game machine (2) Door sensor processing (3) Random number abnormality confirmation processing (4) Set value abnormality confirmation processing (5) Main control RWM abnormality confirmation processing (6) Main control RWM backup abnormality confirmation process (7) Process related to test machine connection signal (8) Game machine performance information calculation process

FIG. 624 is a diagram showing a list of processes performed outside the use area of the medal count control ROM.
Each of the processes (1) to (6) shown in this figure can be implemented outside the ROM (medal number control) usage area defined in the technical standards shown below.
The processing performed outside the use area of the medal number control ROM preferably includes at least one of the following processings, and more preferably includes all of the following processings. Note that at least one of the following processes may be executed in the used area.
If the processing to be executed by the main control ROM and the medal number control ROM overlap, it can be executed by one of the ROMs. Also, the conditions for programming are the same as the above conditions.

(1) Processing related to detection of a foreign object attacking the inside of the game machine (2) Door sensor processing (3) Medal number control RWM abnormality confirmation processing (4) Medal number control RWM backup abnormality confirmation processing (5) Test machine connection signal Process related to (6) Gaming machine performance information calculation process

[Technical standards]
(1) Control area (used area (meaning the storage area of ROM or read/write memory where information other than information necessary to prevent unauthorized modification or other changes is stored or will be stored) Of these, the data area (meaning the storage area other than the used area where only information other than programs is stored or will be stored)) and the data area are separated. Preferably.

(2) ROMs related to reel-type game machines (excluding those in (3) below) shall not exceed 4.5 KB in control area capacity and 3 KB in data area capacity. It is preferable to be

(3) The ROM and read/write memory mounted on the main board send out the game medals, etc. that have been lent or won by winning to the receiving tray, or measure the number of game medals, etc. that have been lent or won by winning It is preferable that the total number of devices for transmitting the indicating signal to the number-of-game-balls display device or the number-of-game-medals display device does not exceed one for each of the main boards.

[Chapter S4]
[Regarding the processing method for disabling the count button]
FIG. 625 shows a block diagram containing a count button.
The game machine 9800 (medalless game machine) includes a medal number control board 9832, a game ball lending device connection terminal board 9834, a counting button 9836 (counting switch), and a game medal number display device 9838.
The medal count control board 9832 and the dedicated unit 9802 (rental unit, external unit) are connected by a VL power supply connection line. The connection line of the VL power supply may or may not pass through the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 9834 .

In the gaming machine 9800 equipped with the game medal number display device 9838, the special unit 9802 is designed to prevent troubles such as loss of game medals when the count button 9836 is operated while the dedicated unit 9802 is not properly connected. If it cannot be confirmed that it is connected to 9802, the count button can be disabled on the main board (medal count control board 9832 or main control board).

FIG. 626 is a flow chart showing the procedure for disabling the counting button.
The CPU of the medal number control board 9832 confirms whether or not the VL power supply is recognized (whether or not VL=ON) (S8000), and when the VL power supply is recognized (S8000; Yes) , it is confirmed whether or not the count button has been pressed (S8001), and if the count button has been pressed (S8001; Yes), a counting process (processing relating to the number of game medals) is executed (S8002).

[Related technical standards]
(1) It must have the ability to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of game medals recorded by the player.
(2) "Can be freely transmitted" means that the player can freely transmit a signal indicating the number of all or part of the number of game medals recorded, at any time and at the player's will. It must be something that can be sent.

[Chapter S5]
[Regarding a game machine equipped with a game medal count display device (medalless game machine)]
[Prerequisites]
A “dedicated unit” refers to a game ball number lending device capable of receiving the number of game medals transmitted from a medalless game machine.
"Counting process" means transmitting the number of game medals recorded in the game medal number display device to the dedicated unit.
"Main control board" refers to a board on which ROM and read/write memory are mounted.
"Medal number control board" refers to a board on which a ROM and a read/write memory are mounted for the purpose of managing the game medal number display device and performing counting processing.

FIG. 627 is a diagram showing a block diagram of a game machine (medalless game machine) equipped with a medal number control board.
The game machine (medalless game machine) includes a main control board 9830, a medal count control board 9832, and a game ball lending device connection terminal board 9834.
The medal count control board 9832 and the dedicated unit 9802 are connected by a VL power connection line. The connection line of the VL power source and other communication lines may or may not pass through the game ball rental device connection terminal board 9834 .

The main control board 9830 has a main control ROM 9831 (main control CPU).
The medal count control board 9832 includes a medal count control ROM 9833 (medal count control CPU).
The main control ROM 9831 and the medal number control ROM 9833 can communicate by "main control-medal number control communication".
The medal number control ROM 9833 and the dedicated unit 9802 can communicate with each other by "communication between medal number control-dedicated unit".

Information (signals) from the settlement button 9841 , the start lever 9842 , the stop button 9843 (three pieces), and the game medal insertion button 9844 (1 bet, MAX bet) are input to the main control ROM 9831 .
Information (signal) from the count button 9836 is input to the medal number control ROM 9833 .

The main control ROM 9831, based on the information from the game medal insertion button 9844 and the like, transmits information for controlling lighting and extinguishing of the game medal insertion display LED 9839 of the sub-board 9840 (effect control board, effect control device, etc.). .

The medal number control ROM 9833 transmits information for controlling the display contents of the game medal number display device 9838 of the sub board 9840 based on the information from the main control ROM 9831, the counting button 9836, the dedicated unit 9802, and the like.
"VL" is the power supplied from the dedicated unit.

[How to check the connection between the game machine and the dedicated unit]
A method for confirming that the game machine (medalless game machine) and the dedicated unit are not connected can be the case of detecting any of the following.
(a) When VL is OFF (b) When there is no command (for example, a rental notification command) sent from the dedicated unit for a certain period of time can be put into an error state.

[About inserting game medals when the dedicated unit is not connected]
If it cannot be confirmed that the game machine and the dedicated unit are connected, the main control board can perform processing to prohibit the insertion of game medals. Even if it cannot be confirmed that the game machine and the dedicated unit are connected, the main control board may perform a process of enabling the insertion of game medals.
In a gaming machine equipped with a medal count control board, the medal count control board sends a signal indicating that the dedicated unit is not connected to the main control board, and the main control board performs processing to disable the insertion of game medals. It can be carried out.
If it cannot be confirmed that the gaming machine and the dedicated unit are connected, the counting process cannot be performed. )can do.

[Other processing during counting]
When performing counting processing, the following processing can be performed by the main control board. In the game machine equipped with the medal count control board, the medal count control board sends a signal indicating that counting is in progress to the main control board, and the main control board performs the following processes (a) to (d). It can be performed. At least one of the following processes (a) to (d) may be performed, preferably a plurality of processes, and more preferably all of them.

(a) When counting processing is performed in the state where game medals can be inserted, game medals cannot be inserted.
(b) Disable the start lever when the counting process is performed while the reel rotation actuator is operable. It should be noted that the term "rotating drum" means "reel" throughout the specification. Further, the "rotating device for rotating the drum" means a "start lever". "The reel rotation actuator is operable" is a state in which a specified number of medals required for a game has been inserted.
(c) Disable the stop button when the counting process is performed while the drum is rotating.
Since there is no need for the player to play during the counting process, it is possible to prevent unexpected irregular processes from occurring by blocking unnecessary interrupt processes.
(d) Payout of game medals based on the winning of a winning combination with a payout such as a small winning combination, and insertion of the specified number of gaming medals required for the next game based on winning (display) of a winning combination such as a replay combination can be invalidated. .

[Regarding counting processing in a specific state]
Whether or not the main control board puts the counting process into a state (the counting button is enabled) may be arbitrary as long as it is determined in advance in the following states.
In a game machine equipped with a medal count control board, the main control board sends a signal to the medal count control board to disable the counting process, and the medal count control board performs processing to disable the counting process. can be done.

(a) Disable the counting process in a state where a specified number of game medals have been inserted into the game machine.
(b) Invalidating the counting process from the operation of the reel rotation actuator until the next game medal can be inserted.
(c) Disable the counting process while the game cannot be played due to an error state determined by the main board (including the main control board and the medal number control board).
As a result, it is possible to prevent unexpected irregular processing from occurring while the player is playing a game or in a state where the player cannot play.

[Related regulations, etc.]
(1) It must have the ability to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of game medals recorded by the player.
(2) "Can be freely transmitted" means that a signal indicating the number of all or part of the recorded number of game medals can be freely transmitted at any time at the player's will. be able to be sent to

[Regarding game medal insertion processing in the medal count control board]
FIG. 628 is a block diagram of a game machine (medalless game machine) equipped with a medal count control board capable of executing game medal insertion processing.
The difference from FIG. 627 is that the information (signal) from the game medal insertion button 9844 is input to the medal number control ROM 9833, and based on this information, the medal number control ROM 9833 controls the game medal insertion display LED 9838. It is a point to do. Since other configurations are the same, the description is omitted.
By adopting such a configuration, the following processing can be performed on the medal count control board (medal count control ROM).
(a) Performing control related to acceptance of the game medal insertion button (b) Subtracting the number of game medals recorded in the game medal number display device and performing control related to insertion of game medals In the medal number control board, Since it is possible to perform control related to the game medal number display device, it is also possible to perform processing for inserting game medals from the game medal number display device.

The game medal insertion button enables the insertion of game medals.
The game medal number display device can record the number of game medals, and can display the recorded number of game medals.
When the operation of the game medal insertion button is detected as an insertion control process, the medal number control board subtracts the number of game medals recorded in the game medal number display device, and inserts the game medals of the subtracted number. Make the process executable.

[Chapter S6]
FIG. 629 is a diagram showing a communication timing chart between the medalless gaming machine and the dedicated unit.
The medalless gaming machine notifies the next gaming machine information notification to the dedicated unit in the first time T1 (for example, within a range of 300 ms or more to 310 ms) from the start of gaming machine information notification.
The medalless gaming machine notifies the dedicated unit of the count notification at the second time T2 (for example, the range of 90 ms or more to 100 ms) from the start of the gaming machine information notification.
The dedicated unit notifies the medalless gaming machine of the lending notification within the third time T3 (for example, within 170 ms) after receiving the counting notification.
The medalless gaming machine notifies the exclusive unit of the lending receipt result response at the fourth time T4 (for example, within 10 ms) after completing the receipt of the lending notification.
Note that the time TB is the time to transmit one electronic message.

The embodiment of the medalless gaming machine described above includes at least the following seven technical features.
(T1) Insertion control by the medal number control board (T2) Sending the number of inserted and paid out numbers without replays and including replays to the dedicated unit (T3) The game medal number display device can display up to 16383 medals (T4) With the main control CPU Medal number control CPU role sharing and communication control (T5) Setting change status (T6) Processing timing when pressing the count button (T7) Positional relationship between the switch of the power supply unit and the clear switch of the medal number control board Below, each technology characteristics. It should be noted that the problems and effects described in the following technical features are only secondary, and the main problems and effects are "providing an innovative gaming machine". Moreover, the following technical features can be applied not only to medalless gaming machines but also to pachinko machines.

[(T1) Insertion control by medal count control board]
The task of this technical feature is to reduce the capacity used by the main control board in a medalless game machine.

The technical features of the present invention are as follows.
In addition to the main control board 9830, a medal number control board 9832 is provided, and the medal number control board 9832 controls insertion (see FIG. 628).
The contents of the input control are as follows.
(a) Perform control related to acceptance of the game medal insertion button 9844 .
(b) Subtract the number of game medals recorded in the game medal number display device 9840, and perform control related to the insertion of game medals (for example, processing for lighting the LED 9839 for indicating the insertion of game medals according to the number of bets).

According to this technical feature, it is possible to reduce the capacity used by the main control board in the medalless game machine.

[(T2) Transmitting the number of inserted cards and the number of paid cards without replays or including replays to the dedicated unit]
An object of the present technical feature is to enable appropriate monitoring of pitch information by the hall computer and the outside of the hall (various centers).

The technical features of the present invention are as follows.
As the gaming machine performance information in the gaming machine information, the number of insertions without replay (total number of insertions) and the number of payouts without replay (total number of payouts) are transmitted to the exclusive unit (sandwich) (see FIG. 503).
In addition, as hall control/fraud monitoring information ("gaming information" in the game machine information), the prescribed number (IN: number of inserted replays) and the number of payouts (OUT: number of payouts including replay) are set to a dedicated unit ( Sand) (handled as external signals CN2-1 (IN signal) and CN2-2 (OUT signal). See FIG. 521).
Further, the number of inserted medals and the number of paid-out medals are transmitted to the dedicated unit (SAND) as hall con/fraud monitoring information of the gaming machine information (see FIG. 511). However, the number of inserted medals and the number of paid out medals are not treated as external signals CN2-1 and CN2-2.

According to this technical feature, it is possible to appropriately monitor the information on the pitched balls in the hall computer and outside the hall (various centers).

[(T3) Game medal number display device can display up to 16383 medals]
The subject of this technical feature is to suppress damage in the unlikely event that the game is stolen while minimizing the loss of practicality in the medalless game machine.
In addition, since the game medal number display device (game ball number display device) has a set upper limit that can be stored and displayed, measures are taken to prevent the upper limit value from being exceeded, and to respond in the event that the upper limit value is exceeded. It is also required to take measures.

The technical features of the present invention are as follows.
[Premise]
The number of game medals is stored in a 2-byte memory (although it can take values from 0 to 65535), but the number of medals that can be stored (the number of medals that can be displayed) is up to 16383 (Fig. 481).
The reason for setting such numerical values is that, given the performance of current gaming machines, the maximum difference in the number of medals per business day will not exceed approximately 15,000, and the value of the game token number display device is considered to be This is because even if there is an attempt to increase and set the upper limit, the number of damaged sheets per time can be suppressed.
It should be noted that, as long as the game is played by the normal game method or the game is played by lending only the necessary amount, even if the difference number exceeds the design value to some extent, 16383 Even if the number of sheets is set as the upper limit, the number of times of counting is considered to be limited.
In addition, by suppressing the number of damages in one goto, it takes a long time for the cheater (fraudulent person) to obtain the desired number of gotos because it requires a plurality of goto actions. For this reason, the possibility of being found by a store clerk increases, and the goto master also dislikes it. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of damaged sheets by suppressing the number of occurrences.

[Additional features]
In addition to the above premise, at least one of the following characteristic portions can be added (see Fig. 482).
(1) When the number of game medals is 0 to 15999 Payout is possible and lending is possible. There is no special treatment for game machines.
(2) When the number of game medals is between 16,000 and 16,383 Payout is allowed, but lending is not allowed. As the processing of the gaming machine, the peripheral board notifies the player to count (the game can be continued), and the lending of the game medals is not accepted (the lending reception result response is notified as an error). at least one, preferably both.
(3) When the number of game medals exceeds 16383 Payout is disabled (renting is already disabled). As the processing of the game machine, it is made to stand by during the payout processing. The payout here refers to the case where a win (win of a minor winning combination) occurs as a result of the game and a payout is made. In addition, as soon as it becomes possible to pay out by counting, it will automatically return.
(4) Settlement (including returning the bet to the number of game medals) can be executed in the cases of (1) and (2) above, and in the situation of (3) above, it is possible to wait during the payout process. As a result, it becomes infeasible. In addition, since the game has ended under the above situation (3), the settlement cannot be performed at the timing, and as a result, it cannot be executed.

[Another example]
As another example, when the maximum number of medals that can be stored on the display device for the number of game medals (the display device for the number of game balls in the management gaming machine) is reached, or when the number of numbers is reached to a predetermined number less than that, at least one of the following processes is performed. It is also possible to perform a single process.
(1) Disabling lending in communication with the dedicated unit (Sand) (the game machine does not respond to the lending notification, the dedicated unit disables the lending, the gaming machine discards the lending notification, etc.) ).
(2) The game machine treats it as an error and makes it impossible to continue the game.
(3) As a gaming machine, although the fact that the maximum number of cards that can be stored is reached, the game can be continued without stopping the game. The player is in a situation of waiting for the clerk.
(4) If the number of game medals exceeds 16383 during the lending process from the dedicated unit, setting the response of "abnormality" to the dedicated unit results in To prevent game medals from being lent out. Although such a situation does not occur in the embodiment of the medalless gaming machine described above, it is effective to install such a control process (program) as a countermeasure against noise or the like.

〔effect〕
According to this technical feature, it is possible to suppress damage in the unlikely event that the game is stolen while minimizing the loss of practicality in the medalless game machine.
Further, according to this technical feature, even if the upper limit number is set on the game medal count display device (game ball count display device), it is possible to appropriately respond (normal game can be executed without problems).

[(T4) Division of roles between main control CPU and medal number control CPU and communication control]
The subject of this technical feature is to realize a medal-less game machine with fewer changes from existing game machines.

The technical features of the present invention are as follows.
The main control board executes a part of the control processing related to the game, and the medal number control board (game value control board) executes the remaining control processing of the control processing.
In this case, any one of configuration groups A to E shown below or a combination thereof can be adopted.

[Configuration group A (see Fig. 627)]
The game medal insertion button 9844 is connected to the main control CPU (main control ROM 9831), and when there is a bet operation of the game medal insertion button 9844, the main control CPU sets the betting state and the medal number control CPU (medal number control ROM 9833), and the medal count control CPU subtracts the game medal count. It should be noted that subtracting the number of game medals means subtracting the value in the data for the number of game medals (the same applies to addition). Further, the bet state is a state in which a predetermined number of game medals are inserted for executing a game by pressing the game medal insertion button.
When there is a payout, a signal is sent from the main control CPU to the medal number control CPU, and the medal number control CPU adds the number of game medals (the medal number control CPU adds the number of game medals to the game medal number display device 9838). send an order to do so).

[Configuration group B (see Fig. 627)]
As in configuration group A, the settlement button 9841 (cancel button) is also connected to the main control CPU, and when the settlement button 9841 is pressed in the bet state, the main control CPU cancels the bet state and switches to the medal number control CPU. A signal is transmitted, and the medal number control CPU adds the number of game medals (the medal number control CPU transmits a command to add the number of game medals to the game medal number display device 9838).

[Configuration group C (see FIGS. 627 and 628)]
In the medalless game machine, both a count button 9836 (connected to the medal number control CPU) and a checkout button 9841 (connected to the main control CPU) are provided to share roles. In conventional pachislot machines, the checkout button doubles as a bet checkout and a credit checkout. It reduces the processing load of the buttons.

[Configuration group D (see Fig. 478)]
"Error processing (error notification)" can be executed by both the main control CPU and the medal count control CPU. Moreover, this "error processing (error notification)" can be executed by a program arranged outside the use area.
On the other hand, "error processing (game stop)" can be executed by the main control CPU, but cannot be executed by the medal number control CPU. Also, this "error processing (game stoppage)" can be executed by a program arranged within the use area of the main control board.

[Construction group E (see Fig. 478)]
The medal count control CPU disables transmission of signals (information related to effects, game machine information, commands, data) to the peripheral boards (sub control board, effect control board) and has them transmitted to the main control CPU. CPUs that can send signals to peripheral boards are concentrated only in the main control CPU.

〔effect〕
According to this technical feature, it is possible to realize a medal-less game machine with less modification from the existing game machine, and it is possible to prevent the development cost and manufacturing cost from greatly increasing.

[(T5) Setting changing status]
An object of this technical feature is to prevent unauthorized setting changes from being overlooked in a medalless game machine.

This technical feature is as follows (see FIGS. 485, 512, and 516).
(1) When the power is turned on, the setting change mode is started (setting change mode starting means) when the setting change condition is satisfied (the setting key switch is turned on, the door is opened, and the predetermined start condition is satisfied), and the setting change status is set to ON. (running information control means).
(2) Update the setting value by pressing the setting switch.
(3) Confirm the set value by turning the start lever ON.
(4) When the setting key switch is turned OFF (predetermined termination condition is satisfied), the setting change mode is terminated (setting change mode termination means).
(5) After shifting to the normal mode, when n games are completed (for example, n=1), the setting changing status is set to OFF (executing information control means). As for n, it is preferable that n=1, but n=2 to 100 may also be used.
(6) Externally outputting a setting changing signal based on the setting changing status.
(7) If the power is turned off during the setting change mode and then turned on again, the setting change mode is restored (the setting change status is maintained or reset).

By executing such processing, the main control board (main control CPU, setting change mode starting means, setting change mode ending means, executing information control means) executes the setting change mode when the setting change mode starts. setting changing status (executing information) indicating that the game is in progress is set to ON, and the setting changing status is maintained ON until a game is executed a predetermined number of times even after the setting change mode ends; After a predetermined number of games have been played, the setting changing status can be set to OFF.

〔effect〕
According to this technical feature, even if the setting change mode ends, the setting change status is maintained (because it continues to be output externally) until the end of the n game, so even if there is an unauthorized setting change The chances of discovering the fraud can be improved.

[(T6) Timing of processing when the count button is pressed]
An object of this technical feature is to freely count the number of game medals by a player's operation in a medalless game machine.

The technical features of the present invention are as follows.
Counting in a medalless gaming machine means transmitting the number of game medals recorded in the gaming machine to a device (dedicated unit, etc.) outside the gaming machine.
The number of game medals is counted when either "short press" or "long press" is detected.
One game medal is counted for each "short press".
When the "long press" is detected, 50 game medals are counted. If the number of game medals is less than 50, all medals are counted.
The number of game medals is counted at count notification timings at intervals of 300 ms.

When the count button is released before 500 ms have passed since it was pressed, it is determined that the short press has been performed, and counting is performed at count notification timing T3 after the determination ((2) short press basic pattern: see FIG. 608).

When the count button is continuously pressed even after 500 ms have passed since the count button was pressed, it is determined that the long press has been performed, and counting is performed at count notification timing T4 after the determination ((1) long press basic pattern: see FIG. 607 ).

When a plurality of short presses are detected from after the count notification timing T2 to immediately before the next count notification timing T3, the number detected at the next count notification timing T3 is counted ((4) Continuous short presses Pattern (Part 1): See FIG. 612).

If the counting button continues to be pressed until immediately before count notification timing T5 after 300 ms from when the number of game medals is counted by long-press detection, it is determined that the count button has been pressed long (continuous long-press), Counting is performed at the counting notification timing T5 after the determination ((3) long-press continuous pattern (part 1): see FIG. 609).

After a long press is detected, if a short press is detected immediately before the count notification timing T4 at which counting is performed based on the long press detection, the short press is not counted at the count notification timing T4 ((5) Long press + short press pattern (part 1): see Fig. 615).

After the long press is detected, if a short press is detected until immediately before the count notification timing T4 at which counting is performed due to the long press detection, the long press is counted at the count notification timing T4, and the next count is notified. At timing T5, the number of short presses is counted ((5) long press + short press pattern (part 3): see FIG. 617).

Basically, the signal is monitored at the OFF edge. However, the signal may be monitored at the ON edge. OFF edges are always accepted. Even if the count RWM temporarily exceeds 50, there is no problem. If the count RWM exceeds 50, it is reset to 50. A single count notification shall not exceed 50. However, one count notification may exceed 50. Also, the upper limit value for one count notification is not limited to 50, and may be a value less than 50 or a value greater than or equal to 51.

By executing such processing, the medal count control CPU (determining means) determines that the count button has been pressed for a long time when the count button has been pressed for a predetermined period of time or more (500 ms or longer), and If pressed for (less than 500 ms), it can be determined to be a short press.

In addition, by executing such processing, the medal number control CPU (count notification transmission means) transmits count notification to the dedicated unit at a constant cycle count notification timing (count notification timing at intervals of 300 ms). In addition, if it is determined to be a long press, at the next count notification timing after the determination, a count notification (50 count notification) corresponding to the long press is sent, and if it is determined to be a short press, after the determination At the next count notification timing, a count notification (one count notification) corresponding to the short press can be transmitted.

Furthermore, by executing such processing, the medal count control board (medal count control CPU, determination means, count notification transmission means) responds to a long press at a specific count notification timing (for example, T4 in FIG. 609). If the count button continues to be pressed from a specific count notification timing to the next count notification timing (for example, T5 in FIG. 609), it is determined to be continuous long presses. If it is determined that it is a continuous long press, a count notification (50 count notifications) corresponding to the continuous long press can be sent at the next count notification timing after the specific count notification timing. .

Furthermore, by executing such a process, the medal count control board (medal count control CPU, determination means, count notification transmission means) can start the next count from a predetermined count notification timing (for example, T2 in FIG. 612). If the count button is pressed multiple times for less than a certain period of time (pressed twice) before the notification timing (for example, T3 in FIG. 612), it is a multiple short press (two short presses has been executed), and if it is determined that there are multiple short presses, at the next count notification timing after the predetermined count notification timing, the count notification corresponding to the multiple short presses (two counting notification) can be sent.

〔effect〕
According to this technical feature, the number of game medals can be freely counted according to the intention of the player.
It should be noted that the technical features of the present invention can be obtained by replacing "game medals" with "game balls", and replacing "medal number control board (medal number control CPU)" with "frame control board (frame control CPU)". It can also be applied to machines.

[(T7) Positional relationship between the switch on the power supply unit and the clear switch on the medal count control board]
The subject of this technical feature is to improve the operability when operating two switches (the power switch and the number-of-game-medals clear button) at the same time.

This technical feature is as follows (see FIGS. 471 and 472).
(1) A power supply unit 9870 and a medal count control board 9832 (a frame control board in a management game machine) are provided.
(2) The power supply unit 9870 is provided with a power switch 9875 .
(3) The medal number control board 9832 is provided with a game medal number clear button 9853 (clear switch, game ball clear switch in the management game machine).

(4) The power switch 9875 and the number-of-game-medals clear button 9853 are arranged near each other (at a position where they can be operated with one hand).
Specifically, it is as follows.
(a) The above two switches have the shortest distance between all switches.
For example, as shown in FIG. 472, the distance between the power switch 9875 and the number of game medals clear button 9853 is L, and as shown in FIG. When the distance from 9855 is L1 and the distance between the power switch 9875 and the RAM clear button 9856 on the performance control control board (performance control control board 9840) is L2, there are relationships of L<L1 and L<L2.

The setting button 9855 can also function as a RAM clear button. If the setting button 9855 does not have the function of the RAM clear button, the RAM clear button can be arranged near the setting button 9855 or at another location. Further, the distance L2 varies depending on the degree of opening of the front door 4, but the relationship of L<L2 is maintained whether the front door 4 is opened or closed.
It is preferable that the setting button 9855 of the main control board 9830 and the RAM clear button 9856 of the production control control board 9840 are arranged inside the cover or the door.

(b) The two switches are arranged in a position where they can be operated with one hand (for example, within a radius of 5 cm and a linear distance of 1 cm to 21 cm).

(5) Between the power switch 9875 and the number-of-games-medals clear button 9853, there is no structural member that can be touched by the staff of the game arcade when these buttons are simultaneously operated. No components other than the power supply unit and the medal number control board are interposed on the straight line connecting these buttons.

〔effect〕
According to this technical feature, it is possible to operate two switches (the power switch and the number-of-game-medals clear button) with one hand.
In pachislot machines in particular, the opening angle of the door is limited, making it difficult to operate the switch on the back box side (chassis side). On the other hand, it is difficult to operate the power switch and the number of game medals clear button simultaneously with both hands. .

This technical feature can be modified as follows.
A clear switch (game medal number clear switch) may be provided on a board other than the game value control board (other than the medal number control board), and the clear switch may have a function of clearing the number of game medals.
In this case, the distance between the power switch and the clear switch should be within a range that allows one-handed operation, and a board separate from the game value control board (for example, a board connected to the game value control board) should be prepared. A clear switch can be provided on a separate substrate, or a clear switch can be provided on the main control substrate.

[Deformed form]
The management game machine or medalless game machine can be modified as follows. The following content can be applied to the management gaming machine described above, and can also be applied to the medalless gaming machine.
Any of the following modifications can be applied to both a management game machine and a medalless game machine within a consistent range. In the description of the modification below, if the description is directed only to the management gaming machine, in principle, the modification is directed only to the management gaming machine. However, even if the description is only for managed gaming machines, the content of the modified form is established even if "game ball" is read as "game medal" and "frame control board" is read as "medal number control board". If so, it can also be applied to a medalless game machine.

[About the performance of the display device such as the number of game balls]
In a game machine equipped with a game ball count display device (management game machine or medalless game machine), under special circumstances such as when the dedicated unit is not connected or the power to the dedicated unit is not turned on, the player presses the counting button. is pressed to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of all or part of the number of game balls (game medals) recorded, the stored number of game balls may be lost. There is In order to avoid such a case, when the connection confirmation power supply (VL) is not supplied from the dedicated unit, or when the dedicated unit is not connected, etc., the player is prevented from pressing the counting button. Technical measures can be provided. For this reason, it is possible to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of all or part of the recorded number of game balls at any time according to the player's will. Interpretation is only a principle, and it is possible to interpret that it is not limited to this as an exception when the connection confirmation power supply (VL) is not supplied from the dedicated unit or when it is not connected to the dedicated unit. .

In a management game machine, a counting switch power supply to a board on which a counting switch is mounted can be turned ON or OFF as a result of monitoring a connection confirmation power supply (VL).
The player can visually confirm the recorded number of game balls on the game ball number display device. By pressing the counting switch, the recorded number of game balls is transmitted from the gaming machine to the dedicated unit. It is assumed that reception is not possible. If the dedicated unit cannot receive the number of game balls, the number of game balls displayed on the display device for the number of game balls, etc. and the number of game balls displayed in addition to the dedicated unit will not be consistent. Since it is conceivable that troubles may occur between players, the above technical means are means for avoiding such problems.

[Concerning the capacitor mounted on the connection terminal board of the equipment for renting game balls, etc.]
Horizontal mounting type capacitors, three-terminal regulators, etc. can be used for main boards, game machine terminal boards, or game boards as long as they satisfy the following technical standards.

[Technical standards, etc.]
A "game machine terminal board" refers to a board on which only electronic components for interconnecting wiring are mounted.
"Electronic components for interconnecting wiring" include electronic components that have functions necessary for interconnecting wiring such as eliminating noise (however, excluding those that have functions other than those functions. ).
"Electronic parts for interconnecting wiring" refers to connectors, fuses, photocouplers, relays, resistors, varistors, diodes, and filters that perform operations other than control of signal inflow and outflow due to the performance of the electronic parts. It is understood that it is not used for
“Game ball lending device connection terminal plate” means wiring between a machine or device that transmits a signal for lending game tokens or game balls outside the game machine and the game machine among the game machine terminal boards, It is for connecting with the wiring inside the game machine.

The management game machine or medalless game machine can be modified as follows.
(1) Common asynchronous serial transmission of a signal related to lending, a signal related to counting, and a signal related to game machine information to a machine or device outside the game machine from the frame control board via the game ball lending device connection terminal board Communication may be performed through a communication port.

(2) Distinguish game ball information and game machine information from the frame control board to a machine or device outside the game machine via the game ball lending device connection terminal board, and signal and count related to lending Signals can be separated into an asynchronous serial communication port separate from signals pertaining to gaming machine information.
A signal related to lending and a signal related to counting may be communicated through a common asynchronous serial communication port.

(3) Distinguishing two-way communication and one-way communication from the frame control board to a machine or device outside the gaming machine via the game ball lending device connection terminal board, the signal relating to lending is used for counting. Signals and signals related to gaming machine information can be separated into separate asynchronous serial communication ports.
Signals related to counting and signals related to gaming machine information may be communicated through a common asynchronous serial communication port.

(4) The following contents may be displayed on the 7-segment display used in the performance display monitor or role ratio monitor.
(i) Gaming machine performance information (ii) Number of game balls recorded and displayed on the game ball number display device (iii) Error code

(5) A switch for clearing the RWM area recording the "number of game balls" may be mounted on the frame control board. In addition, in order to make it clear that the number of game balls has been cleared using this switch, it is possible to output a fraudulent information signal to a machine or device outside the game machine, such as a voice notification, in the same way as when fraud is detected. can.

(6) In addition to the number of game balls (number of game medals) recorded on the 7-segment display used as the game ball number display device, an error code may be displayed. As for the display, the number of game balls is always displayed normally, but only when an error occurs, the number of game balls (the number of game medals) and the error code can be alternately displayed.

(7) When a machine or device that transmits a signal for lending game balls, game medals, etc. is not connected to the game ball lending device connection terminal plate (when the dedicated unit is not connected), the shooting device may be stopped, or the game may be rendered unexecutable.

(8) Communication methods between managed gaming machines and machines or devices outside gaming machines In managed gaming machines, the total number of game balls that a player can shoot from the frame control board (hereinafter referred to as “game ball count”) ) is recorded by an electromagnetic method, and the number of lent game balls, the count information of the number of game balls displayed on the "game ball number display device", and the gaming machine information such as performance information and game status are communicated with the dedicated unit. Therefore, the following configuration can be adopted.

[Types of signals sent and received by game machines]
(i) Signal related to lending The number of lending balls and the lending serial number for communication management are received, and in order to respond to the reception result, the lending ball reception result and the lending serial number are transmitted (two-way communication).
Dedicated unit → Frame control board Dedicated unit ← Frame control board

(ii) Signal related to counting Transmits the number of counting balls and the counting serial number for communication management.
A signal for confirming the transmission result is not received (one-way communication).
Dedicated unit ← Frame control board

(iii) Signal related to gaming machine information Sending gaming machine installation information, gaming machine performance information, external output signal output from the external terminal board of the dedicated unit, the number of game balls, and the game ball serial number for communication management do.
A signal for confirming the transmission result is not received (one-way communication).
Dedicated unit ← Frame control board

In management gaming machines, the amount of communication information is greater than that of conventional gaming machines, and communication security is enhanced. can be adopted.

FIG. 630 is a diagram showing types of signals.
(1) Signal for lending [No. 1]
Direction: Dedicated unit → Frame control board Signal name: Number of rental balls, rental serial number Contents: Number of game balls for rental, communication serial number for rental Purpose: A

[No.2]
Direction: Frame control board → Dedicated unit Signal name: Result of receiving the number of balls rented, serial number of the loan Contents: Result of receiving the number of balls rented, serial number of the communication related to the loan Purpose: A

(2) Signal related to counting [No. 1]
Direction: Frame control board → Dedicated unit Signal name: Number of counting balls, counting serial number Contents: Number of counting balls, serial number for communication related to counting Purpose: B

(3) Signal related to gaming machine information [No. 1]
Direction: Frame control board → Dedicated unit Signal name: Gaming machine installation information Contents: Main/frame control CPU manufacturer code, model code, chip ID number Purpose: C

[No.2]
Direction: Frame control board → Dedicated unit Signal name: Game machine performance information Contents: Number of game balls acquired per minute (low base), character ratio, continuous character ratio, etc. Purpose: D

[No.3]
Direction: Frame control board → Dedicated unit Signal name: Hall control information Contents: Big hit, probability change, time reduction, number of winning balls in each winning hole, etc. Purpose: E

[No.4]
Direction: Frame control board → Dedicated unit Signal name: Fraud monitoring information Contents: Number of game balls (current number of balls in possession), serial number of game balls Purpose: F

The purpose is A: Rental of game balls, B: Counting of game balls, C: Machine history management, D: Aggregation of performance information, E: Aggregation of hall control information, F: Fraud monitoring by dedicated unit. be.

FIG. 631 is a diagram showing the configuration of a communication port.
Any one of the configurations (A), (B), and (C) in the figure can be adopted as the configuration of the communication port. Note that (1) to (3) in the figure correspond to (1) to (3) in FIG.

As shown in (A) in the figure, the frame control board 550 sends a signal related to lending and counting to a dedicated unit 700 (a machine or device outside the game machine) via the game ball lending device connection terminal board. Signals and signals related to gaming machine information are communicated through a common asynchronous serial communication port.

Specifically, (1) [No. 2], (2) [No. 1], and (3) [No. 1] to [No. 4] are transmitted from the frame control board 550 to the dedicated unit 700 by asynchronous serial communication. do. (1) [No. 1] is transmitted from the dedicated unit 700 to the frame control board 550 by asynchronous serial communication.

As shown in (B) in the figure, from the frame control board 550 to the dedicated unit 700 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board, the game ball information and the game machine information are separated, and a signal related to lending is sent. and count signals are divided into asynchronous serial communication ports separate from the signals related to gaming machine information.
A signal related to lending and a signal related to counting are communicated through a common asynchronous serial communication port.

Specifically, (1) [No. 1] is transmitted from the dedicated unit 700 to the frame control board 550 by asynchronous serial communication. (1) [No. 2] and (2) [No. 1] are transmitted from the frame control board 550 to the dedicated unit 700 by asynchronous serial communication. In this case, a common port is used for (1) a signal related to lending and (2) a signal related to counting.
(3) [No. 1] to [No. 4] are transmitted from the frame control board 550 to the dedicated unit 700 by asynchronous serial communication. In this case, (3) a signal port related to gaming machine information is used.

As shown in (C) in the figure, from the frame control board 550 to the dedicated unit 700 via the game ball rental device connection terminal board, two-way communication and one-way communication are distinguished, and a signal related to rental is sent. It is divided into an asynchronous serial communication port separate from the signal related to game machine information.
Signals related to counting and signals related to gaming machine information are communicated through a common asynchronous serial communication port.

Specifically, (1) [No. 1] is transmitted from the dedicated unit 700 to the frame control board 550 by asynchronous serial communication. (1) [No. 2] is transmitted from the frame control board 550 to the dedicated unit 700 by asynchronous serial communication. In this case, (1) the signal port for lending is used.
(2) [No. 1] and (3) [No. 1] to [No. 4] are transmitted from the frame control board 550 to the dedicated unit 700 by asynchronous serial communication. In this case, a common port is used for (2) signals related to counting and (3) signals related to gaming machine information.

(9) In managed gaming machines, the total number of game balls that a player can shoot (hereinafter referred to as "the number of game balls") is recorded by an electromagnetic method on the frame control board. It is necessary to communicate the game ball count information displayed on the "game ball number display device", the game machine information such as the performance information and the game state with the dedicated unit.
However, when the counting information and the game machine information cannot be communicated (unconnected and no response), it is preferable to stop the launching device and restrict the game because the following effects occur.
With regard to counting information, if it takes time to restore communication while continuing to play after communication is lost, there will be a large difference between the number of game balls recorded by the gaming machine and the number of game balls recorded by the dedicated unit. As a result, it becomes impossible to judge whether the number of game balls is normal or not. Since there is a limit to the amount of game machine information that can be stored in the RWM of the frame control board, information that exceeds the upper limit may be lost.

Therefore, the shooting device may be stopped or the game may be stopped when the dedicated unit is not connected to the game ball rental device connection terminal plate.
The control for stopping the shooting device when the dedicated unit is not connected to the game ball rental device connection terminal plate is as follows.

[Control to stop the launcher]
The frame control board monitors the connection confirmation power supply (VL) supplied from the dedicated unit, and when VL is not supplied, it judges that the connection is disconnected and stops the launcher.

FIG. 632 is a diagram showing a communication timing chart when the dedicated unit is not connected to the game ball lending device connection terminal board.
(i) The dedicated unit 700 transmits a preparation signal for lending at a cycle of 300 ms when the lending of game balls becomes possible. Also, when the lending switch (lending button) is pressed within the 300ms cycle, the number of lending balls is set to 125 and a signal relating to lending is transmitted.

(ii) The frame control board 550 transmits a preparation signal for lending and a reception result response for the signal for lending within 10 ms.
(iii) The frame control board 550 transmits a counting signal after 100 ms have passed since the reception of the lending-related preparation signal and the lending-related signal. Also, when the counting switch is pressed within the 300ms period, the number of balls to be counted is set to 250 and a signal relating to counting is transmitted.

(iv) The frame control board 550 transmits a signal related to the game machine information after 200 ms have passed since the reception of the preparation signal related to lending and the signal related to lending.
(v) Thereafter, the same operation is repeated with a period of 300 ms.

(vi) Disconnection such as detachment of the dedicated cable occurs. In this case, since VL is no longer supplied, the frame control board 550 determines that disconnection has occurred and stops firing. In addition, the transmission of the reception result response of the preparation signal for lending, the signal for lending, the signal for counting, and the signal for gaming machine information is stopped.

Figures 633 to 636 are diagrams showing operations after error and fraud detection.
In the managed gaming machine (main control or frame control) or medalless gaming machine (main control or medal count control), the following processing can be executed.
The processes for [No. 1] to [No. 5] can be executed within the area, and the processes for [No. 6] to [No. 23] can be executed outside the area. Also, the error code may be set so that jump numbers do not occur (for example, H01, H02, H03, etc.).

"○" in the figure means "detection by frame control and notification or function stop is essential", and "□" means "notify main control after detection by frame control and notify or stop function". "◎" means "Must be detected by main control and notified or function stopped", and "△" means "Detected by main control and notified or function stopped." It means "recommend to stop". In the medalless gaming machine, "frame control" and "management gaming machine frame (game machine frame)" can be read as "main control or medal count control", and "ball" can be read as "medal".

[Fig. 633]
[No.1]
Error code: H04
Error name: Dedicated cable disconnection Error and fraud detection content: Detected disconnection between dedicated unit and management game machine frame

[Operation after error and fraud detection]
Audio output for notification of game machine frame:-
Display device such as the number of game balls for notification of the game machine frame: ○
Stop firing of game machine frame function stop: ○
Stop counting of functional stoppages of game machine frames: ○

Audio output of game board notifications:-
Liquid crystal effect (LCD) of the notification of the game board:-
Illumination (LED) for notification of game board:-
Stop firing of game machine frame function stop:-

VL of dedicated unit: L (Low)
Dedicated unit ball lending button disabled: ○
Dedicated unit card return button disabled:-
Hall controller error information output: ○
Illegal information output of hall controller:-

[No.2]
Error code: H05
Error name: Management game machine, dedicated unit communication no response Error and fraud detection content: Detected communication no response between dedicated unit and management game machine frame

[Operation after error and fraud detection]
Audio output of notification of game machine frame: ○
Display device such as the number of game balls for notification of the game machine frame: ○
Stop firing of game machine frame function stop: ○
Stop counting of functional stoppages of game machine frames: ○

Audio output of game board notifications:-
Liquid crystal presentation of game board notification:-
Illumination for notification on the game board:-
Stop firing of game machine frame function stop:-

VL of dedicated unit: H (High)
Dedicated unit ball lending button disabled: ○
Dedicated unit card return button disabled:-
Hall controller error information output: ○
Illegal information output of hall controller:-

[No.3]
Error code: H06
Error name: Communication error within managed gaming machine Error and fraud detection details: No response or no connection was detected between the game board of the managed gaming machine and the frame of the managed gaming machine

[Operation after error and fraud detection]
Audio output for notification of game machine frame:-
Display device such as the number of game balls for notification of the game machine frame: ○
Stop firing of game machine frame function stop:-
Stop counting of functional stoppages of game machine slots: -

Audio output of game board notifications: ◎
Liquid crystal production of game board notification: ◎
Illumination of the notification of the game board: ◎
Stop firing of game machine frame function stop:-

Dedicated unit VL:H
Dedicated unit's ball lending button disabled:-
Dedicated unit card return button disabled:-
Hall controller error information output: ○
Illegal information output of hall controller:-

[Fig. 634]
[No.4]
Error code: H14
Error name: Subtraction mechanism entrance sensor (subtraction sensor) abnormality Error and fraud detection content: When the subtraction mechanism entrance sensor detects ball clogging or failure of the subtraction mechanism entrance sensor is detected

[Operation after error and fraud detection]
Audio output of notification of game machine frame: ○
Display device such as the number of game balls for notification of the game machine frame: ○
Stop firing of game machine frame function stop: ○
Stop counting of functional stoppages of game machine slots: -

Audio output of game board notifications:-
Liquid crystal presentation of game board notification:-
Illumination for notification on the game board:-
Stop firing of game machine frame function stop:-

Dedicated unit VL:H
Dedicated unit's ball lending button disabled:-
Dedicated unit card return button disabled:-
Hall controller error information output: ○
Illegal information output of hall controller:-

[No.5]
Error code: H23
Error name: Number of game balls exceeded Error and fraud detection content: Game balls exceeded 40000 balls

[Operation after error and fraud detection]
Audio output for notification of game machine frame:-
Display device such as the number of game balls for notification of the game machine frame: ○
Stop firing of game machine frame function stop:-
Stop counting of functional stoppages of game machine slots: -

Audio output of game board notifications: □
Liquid crystal presentation of game board notification: □
Illumination for notification on the game board: □
Stop firing of game machine frame function stop:-

Dedicated unit VL:H
Dedicated unit's ball lending button disabled:-
Dedicated unit card return button disabled:-
Hall controller error information output: ○
Illegal information output of hall controller:-

[No.6]
Error code: H16
Error name: Abnormality of the ball polishing device Error and fraud detection content: Detected that the polishing motor does not rotate

[Operation after error and fraud detection]
Audio output of notification of game machine frame: ○
Display device such as the number of game balls for notification of the game machine frame: ○
Stop firing of game machine frame function stop:-
Stop counting of functional stoppages of game machine slots: -

Audio output of game board notifications:-
Liquid crystal presentation of game board notification:-
Illumination for notification on the game board:-
Stop firing of game machine frame function stop:-

Dedicated unit VL:H
Dedicated unit's ball lending button disabled:-
Dedicated unit card return button disabled:-
Hall controller error information output: ○
Illegal information output of hall controller:-

[No.7]
Error code: H17
Error name: Game ball circulation device error Error and fraud detection content: Detected that the lifting motor does not rotate

[Operation after error and fraud detection]
Audio output of notification of game machine frame: ○
Display device such as the number of game balls for notification of the game machine frame: ○
Stop firing of game machine frame function stop:-
Stop counting of functional stoppages of game machine slots: -

Audio output of game board notifications:-
Liquid crystal presentation of game board notification:-
Illumination for notification on the game board:-
Stop firing of game machine frame function stop:-

Dedicated unit VL:H
Dedicated unit's ball lending button disabled:-
Dedicated unit card return button disabled:-
Hall controller error information output: ○
Illegal information output of hall controller:-

[No.8]
Error code: H18
Error name: Ejection ball passage error Error and fraud detection content: Ball clogging detected between the ejection ball passage and the ball polishing device

[Operation after error and fraud detection]
Audio output of notification of game machine frame: ○
Display device such as the number of game balls for notification of the game machine frame: ○
Stop firing of game machine frame function stop:-
Stop counting of functional stoppages of game machine slots: -

Audio output of game board notifications:-
Liquid crystal presentation of game board notification:-
Illumination for notification on the game board:-
Stop firing of game machine frame function stop:-

Dedicated unit VL:H
Dedicated unit's ball lending button disabled:-
Dedicated unit card return button disabled:-
Hall controller error information output: ○
Illegal information output of hall controller:-

[No.9]
Error code: H19
Error name: Winning ball passage error Error and fraud detection details: Ball clogging was detected in the ball polishing device from the winning ball passage

[Operation after error and fraud detection]
Audio output of notification of game machine frame: ○
Display device such as the number of game balls for notification of the game machine frame: ○
Stop firing of game machine frame function stop:-
Stop counting of functional stoppages of game machine slots: -

Audio output of game board notifications:-
Liquid crystal presentation of game board notification:-
Illumination for notification on the game board:-
Stop firing of game machine frame function stop:-

Dedicated unit VL:H
Dedicated unit's ball lending button disabled:-
Dedicated unit card return button disabled:-
Hall controller error information output: ○
Illegal information output of hall controller:-

[No.10]
Error code: H20
Error name: Ball polishing device section passage error Error and fraud detection content: Detected ball clogging in the ball polishing device

[Operation after error and fraud detection]
Audio output of notification of game machine frame: ○
Display device such as the number of game balls for notification of the game machine frame: ○
Stop firing of game machine frame function stop:-
Stop counting of functional stoppages of game machine slots: -

Audio output of game board notifications:-
Liquid crystal presentation of game board notification:-
Illumination for notification on the game board:-
Stop firing of game machine frame function stop:-

Dedicated unit VL:H
Dedicated unit's ball lending button disabled:-
Dedicated unit card return button disabled:-
Hall controller error information output: ○
Illegal information output of hall controller:-

[No.11]
Error code: H21
Error name: Game ball circulation device passage error Error and fraud detection details: A ball jam was detected in the game ball circulation device

[Operation after error and fraud detection]
Audio output of notification of game machine frame: ○
Display device such as the number of game balls for notification of the game machine frame: ○
Stop firing of game machine frame function stop:-
Stop counting of functional stoppages of game machine slots: -

Audio output of game board notifications:-
Liquid crystal presentation of game board notification:-
Illumination for notification on the game board:-
Stop firing of game machine frame function stop:-

Dedicated unit VL:H
Dedicated unit's ball lending button disabled:-
Dedicated unit card return button disabled:-
Hall controller error information output: ○
Illegal information output of hall controller:-

[No.12]
Error code: H22
Error name: Cassette not installed

[Operation after error and fraud detection]
Audio output of notification of game machine frame: ○
Display device such as the number of game balls for notification of the game machine frame: ○
Stop firing of game machine frame function stop:-
Stop counting of functional stoppages of game machine slots: -

Audio output of game board notifications:-
Liquid crystal presentation of game board notification:-
Illumination for notification on the game board:-
Stop firing of game machine frame function stop:-

Dedicated unit VL:H
Dedicated unit's ball lending button disabled:-
Dedicated unit card return button disabled:-
Hall controller error information output: ○
Illegal information output of hall controller:-

[Fig. 635]
[No.13]
Error code: H24
Error name: Insufficient number of circulating balls

[Operation after error and fraud detection]
Audio output of notification of game machine frame: ○
Display device such as the number of game balls for notification of the game machine frame: ○
Stop firing of game machine frame function stop:-
Stop counting of functional stoppages of game machine slots: -

Audio output of game board notifications:-
Liquid crystal presentation of game board notification:-
Illumination for notification on the game board:-
Stop firing of game machine frame function stop:-

Dedicated unit VL:H
Dedicated unit's ball lending button disabled:-
Dedicated unit card return button disabled:-
Hall controller error information output: ○
Illegal information output of hall controller:-

[No.14]
Error code: H25
Error name: Too many circulating balls Error and fraud detection content: Detected too many circulating balls

[Operation after error and fraud detection]
Audio output of notification of game machine frame: ○
Display device such as the number of game balls for notification of the game machine frame: ○
Stop firing of game machine frame function stop:-
Stop counting of functional stoppages of game machine slots: -

Audio output of game board notifications:-
Liquid crystal presentation of game board notification:-
Illumination for notification on the game board:-
Stop firing of game machine frame function stop:-

Dedicated unit VL:H
Dedicated unit's ball lending button disabled:-
Dedicated unit card return button disabled:-
Hall controller error information output: ○
Illegal information output of hall controller:-

[No.15]
Error code: H26
Error name: Proximity sensor abnormality of managed gaming machine frame Error and fraud detection details: Winning passage counter sensor (winning sensor), non-winning passage counter sensor (non-winning sensor), ball clogging sensor, grinding entrance sensor or lifting entrance sensor anomaly detected

[Operation after error and fraud detection]
Audio output of notification of game machine frame: ○
Display device such as the number of game balls for notification of the game machine frame: ○
Stop firing of game machine frame function stop:-
Stop counting of functional stoppages of game machine slots: -

Audio output of game board notifications:-
Liquid crystal presentation of game board notification:-
Illumination for notification on the game board:-
Stop firing of game machine frame function stop:-

Dedicated unit VL:H
Dedicated unit's ball lending button disabled:-
Dedicated unit card return button disabled:-
Hall controller error information output: ○
Illegal information output of hall controller:-

[No.16]
Error code: H64
Error name: front decoration open error and fraud detection content: front decoration open detected

[Operation after error and fraud detection]
Audio output for notification of game machine frame:-
Display device such as the number of game balls for notification of the game machine frame: ○
Stop firing of game machine frame function stop:-
Stop counting of functional stoppages of game machine slots: -

Audio output of game board notifications: ◎
Liquid crystal production of game board notification: ◎
Illumination of the notification of the game board: ◎
Stop firing of game machine frame function stop: ◎

Dedicated unit VL:H
Dedicated unit's ball lending button disabled:-
Dedicated unit card return button disabled:-
Hall controller error information output:-
Illegal information output of hall controller: ○

[No.17]
Error code: H65
Error name: Back mechanism part open error and fraud detection content: Detected back mechanism part opening

[Operation after error and fraud detection]
Audio output for notification of game machine frame:-
Display device such as the number of game balls for notification of the game machine frame: ○
Stop firing of game machine frame function stop:-
Stop counting of functional stoppages of game machine slots: -

Audio output of game board notifications: ◎
Liquid crystal production of game board notification: ◎
Illumination of the notification of the game board: ◎
Stop firing of game machine frame function stop:-

Dedicated unit VL:H
Dedicated unit's ball lending button disabled:-
Dedicated unit card return button disabled:-
Hall controller error information output:-
Illegal information output of hall controller: ○

[No.18]
Error code: H66
Error name: Illegal radio wave detection Error and fraud detection details: Abnormal radio waves were detected in the management machine frame

[Operation after error and fraud detection]
Audio output of notification of game machine frame: ○
Display device such as the number of game balls for notification of the game machine frame: ○
Stop firing of game machine frame function stop:-
Stop counting of functional stoppages of game machine slots: -

Audio output of game board notifications:-
Liquid crystal presentation of game board notification:-
Illumination for notification on the game board:-
Stop firing of game machine frame function stop:-

Dedicated unit VL:H
Dedicated unit ball lending button disabled: ○
Dedicated unit card return button disabled: ○
Hall controller error information output:-
Illegal information output of hall controller: ○

[No.19]
Error code: H67
Error name: Number of game balls cleared Error and fraud detection content: Detected number of game balls cleared

[Operation after error and fraud detection]
Audio output of notification of game machine frame: ○
Display device such as the number of game balls for notification of the game machine frame: ○
Stop firing of game machine frame function stop:-
Stop counting of functional stoppages of game machine slots: -

Audio output of game board notifications:-
Liquid crystal presentation of game board notification:-
Illumination for notification on the game board:-
Stop firing of game machine frame function stop:-

Dedicated unit VL:H
Dedicated unit's ball lending button disabled:-
Dedicated unit card return button disabled:-
Hall controller error information output:-
Illegal information output of hall controller: ○

[No.20]
Error code: H68
Error name: Winning ball number error 1
Details of error and fraud detection: The difference between the number of winning balls detected by the main control board and the number of winning balls detected by the frame control board is 100 or more.

[Operation after error and fraud detection]
Audio output of notification of game machine frame: ○
Display device such as the number of game balls for notification of the game machine frame: ○
Stop firing of game machine frame function stop:-
Stop counting of functional stoppages of game machine slots: -

Audio output of game board notifications:-
Liquid crystal presentation of game board notification:-
Illumination for notification on the game board:-
Stop firing of game machine frame function stop:-

Dedicated unit VL:H
Dedicated unit ball lending button disabled: ○
Dedicated unit card return button disabled: ○
Hall controller error information output:-
Illegal information output of hall controller: ○

[Fig. 636]
[No.21]
Error code: H69
Error name: Winning ball number error 2
Error and fraud detection details: The difference between the number of launched balls and the total number of returned balls (winning passage count sensor + non-winning passage count sensor) is 100 or more.

[Operation after error and fraud detection]
Audio output of notification of game machine frame: ○
Display device such as the number of game balls for notification of the game machine frame: ○
Stop firing of game machine frame function stop:-
Stop counting of functional stoppages of game machine slots: -

Audio output of game board notifications:-
Liquid crystal presentation of game board notification:-
Illumination for notification on the game board:-
Stop firing of game machine frame function stop:-

Dedicated unit VL:H
Dedicated unit ball lending button disabled: ○
Dedicated unit card return button disabled: ○
Hall controller error information output:-
Illegal information output of hall controller: ○

[No.22]
Error code: H85
Error name: Small ball detection error and fraud detection content: Small ball detection Detected a ball of 10.7 mm or less

[Operation after error and fraud detection]
Audio output of notification of game machine frame: ○
Display device such as the number of game balls for notification of the game machine frame: ○
Stop firing of game machine frame function stop:-
Stop counting of functional stoppages of game machine slots: -

Audio output of game board notifications:-
Liquid crystal presentation of game board notification:-
Illumination for notification on the game board:-
Stop firing of game machine frame function stop:-

Dedicated unit VL:H
Dedicated unit ball lending button disabled: ○
Dedicated unit card return button disabled: ○
Hall controller error information output:-
Illegal information output of hall controller: ○

[No.23]
Error code: H86
Error name: Iron ball detection Error and fraud detection content: Iron ball detected

[Operation after error and fraud detection]
Audio output of notification of game machine frame: ○
Display device such as the number of game balls for notification of the game machine frame: ○
Stop firing of game machine frame function stop:-
Stop counting of functional stoppages of game machine slots: -

Audio output of game board notifications:-
Liquid crystal presentation of game board notification:-
Illumination for notification on the game board:-
Stop firing of game machine frame function stop:-

Dedicated unit VL:H
Dedicated unit ball lending button disabled: ○
Dedicated unit card return button disabled: ○
Hall controller error information output:-
Illegal information output of hall controller: ○

[Regarding tests on managed machines and medalless machines]
〔Required specifications〕
It is preferable that human intervention (rental, counting) is minimal during the test firing.
If a sufficient number of game balls (medals) can be displayed on the game ball (medal) number display device, manual operation may be unnecessary.

[Technical means]
[Management game machine]
In the management gaming machine, the upper limit of the number of game balls (hereinafter referred to as "the number of balls in possession") recorded in the game ball count display device by an electromagnetic method can be up to 990,000. In addition, when the number of balls in possession reaches 40,000, it is regarded as an error state of the game machine, and to notify the player to settle (count) the number of game balls recorded on the display device such as the number of game balls. The peripheral board notifies the user of the sound and outputs an error state signal to machines and devices outside the game machine, but does not stop the game. Therefore, when a game ball test-shooting test is conducted for 10 hours, the number of game balls fired for 10 hours (60,000) is recorded on the game ball number display device at the start of the test, and even if the test-shooting test is conducted, the upper limit value is never reach. In addition, the method of suppressing the error that occurs when the number of possessed balls reaches 40,000 is to confirm the signal of the number of possessed balls output from the game machine and to check the signal of the number of possessed balls output from the game machine and to "automatically lend out when it approaches 0". function" or "function to automatically count when approaching the upper limit (40,000)" is required.

[Medal-less machine]
Since the maximum number of medals that can be displayed on the game medal number display device is 16,383, even if the maximum number of medals is lent out at the start of the test, the number of medals will be insufficient for the test of 17,500 times (52,500 medals). there is a possibility. Therefore, in this case, manual operation is required.

〔Required specifications〕
In the game ball (medal) number display device, depending on the number that can be displayed, when it approaches 0 or the upper limit, "output of game machine error state signal (management game machine: input request lamp signal) stop output (medalless game machine) ” may be required. This allows manual manipulation.
Depending on the number of game balls (medals) that can be displayed, it is necessary to have a "function to automatically lend out when the number approaches 0" or a "function to automatically count when the number approaches the upper limit". may become.

[Technical means]
[Medal-less machine]
By creating a "test unit" that has "automatic lending function when approaching 0" and "automatic counting function when approaching the upper limit", human operation is unnecessary. can do.

[Clear processing of medalless game machines]
In a medalless game machine, when a plurality of RWMs (RAMs) are provided, the RWMs (RAMs) to be cleared may be changed according to the state at the time of power failure recovery.
In the medalless game machine, the number of game medals may not be cleared by changing the settings or clearing the RAM.
In the medalless gaming machine, the gaming machine performance information may be cleared when the number of game medals is cleared.
In the medalless game machine, when changing settings or clearing the RAM, the inserted medals may be cleared, but the number of game medals may not be cleared.
In the medal-less gaming machine, the number of game medals may be cleared, but the number of inserted medals may not be cleared in clearing the number of game medals.
In the medalless game machine, the game medal number clear status may be set to ON in the game medal number clear, and the ON state may be maintained until the end of one game.

[Backup power supply for main system control board]
The medal number control board may be equipped with its own backup power supply (battery) and a backup power supply for the main control board.
A power supply for backing up both the main control board and the medal number control board may be mounted on one board (the medal number control board or other board) that is not the main control board.
The medal number control board may be equipped with its own backup power supply (battery), and another board (for example, a board for controlling reels) may be equipped with a backup power supply for the main control board.

[Correspondence when the game machine starts up before the dedicated unit]
When the gaming machine starts up before the dedicated unit and until the VL turns ON, various "notifications" are periodically sent to the dedicated unit from the time the gaming machine completes activation. However, the control method may be changed so that the game machine monitors the VL and does not send various "notifications" until the VL is turned ON.
If the game machine and the dedicated unit are not two-way communication, there is no problem for the game machine to check the VL, but there is a problem if the signal from the dedicated unit triggers the game machine to perform some action. be. Therefore, the game machine cannot start sending various "notifications" by receiving the activation completion signal from the dedicated unit. For this reason, the gaming machine must operate independently without relying on signals from the dedicated unit. Note that if there is no two-way communication, the gaming machine will return a response result to the rental notification from the dedicated unit side, but there will be no response to the counting notification sent by the gaming machine side. Become.

[Response to simultaneous transmission of multiple gaming machine information notifications]
The following content can be used to deal with the case where three cycles overlap.
The three signals, the gaming machine installation information (60S) with priority 1, the gaming machine performance information (180S) with priority 2, and the hall controller/fraud monitoring information (300ms) with priority 3, are transmitted at the same timing. may arrive.

In this case, one of the following control methods (a) to (c) can be adopted.
(a) Only transmit according to priority. As a result, gaming machine installation information is transmitted, next, gaming machine performance information is transmitted after the elapse of 300 ms, and hole controller/fraud monitoring information is transmitted after the next 300 ms. That is, the hall control/fraud monitoring information is transmitted with a delay of two cycles. In this case, the whole controller/unauthorized monitoring information is not sent for a time period of nearly 900 ms, which occurs once every 600 times.

(b) Although the priority order is followed, the transmission cycles of priority order 1 and 2 are shifted from the middle. The gaming machine installation information is transmitted, and then the gaming machine performance information is transmitted after 300 ms has passed. As a result, the gaming machine installation information and the gaming machine performance information will not be transmitted at the same timing thereafter. As a result, the timing of pachinko/pachislot installation information and hall control/fraud monitoring information may occur, and the timing of pachinko/pachislot machine performance information and hall control/fraud monitoring information may occur. The maximum delay is only one cycle.

(c) In the first place, a control method of shifting the transmission periods of priority 1 and 2 by 300 ms from the beginning is also conceivable. However, there is a possibility that a process or a timer for shifting the initial transmission period is required. It should be noted that a method of shifting all the transmission cycles of priority 1, 2, and 3 is also conceivable.

[Regarding the display device for the number of game medals and the display device for the number of game balls]
(1) The error code may be displayed on the game medal number display device of the medalless game machine or the game ball number display device of the management game machine.
(2) When an error code is displayed on the game medal number display device or the game ball number display device, if the displayed error code differs depending on the model or manufacturer, it will cause confusion for hall operators and players. There is a risk. Therefore, in order to prevent confusion among hall operators and players, it is preferable that the error code displayed on the game medal count display device and the game ball count display device be a common error code regardless of the model or manufacturer.

[Overflow processing of game medal count display device]
The upper limit of the number of game medals that can be recorded on the game medal number display device is 16383 in consideration of the range of maximum MY in one business day. Therefore, at least one of the following processes can be executed as the process when the upper limit value in the program of the medalless gaming machine is reached.

(1) When the number of game medals reaches a predetermined value, which is a value smaller than the upper limit value, a process of notifying the player of "please count" is executed.
(2) The predetermined value in (1) above is 15,000 or 16,000, or an arbitrary value between 15,000 and 16,000.
(3) When the number of game medals reaches the upper limit, execute processing to put the gaming machine into an error state and/or execute processing to wait for payout while waiting for counting.
(4) In order to avoid overflow due to lending and settlement of game tokens, a process of shifting to a lending unacceptable state is executed.
It should be noted that such a process can also be applied to management gaming machines by converting into numerical values suitable for management gaming machines.

[Anti-fraud measures for main boards]
(1) In order to prevent tampering with the game ball lending device connection terminal plate, a structure may be employed in which the terminal plate is sealed in a transparent case similar to the main board case. In this case, it is preferable to have a structure in which both sides of the connection terminal plate can be visually recognized.

(2) In order to prevent unauthorized modification of the connection terminal board of the game ball rental device, the external terminal board is sealed in a transparent case similar to the main board case, and unauthorized contact with the connection harness with the medal count control board. In order to prevent this, a structure may be adopted in which a connector cover that cannot be easily removed is provided. In this case, it is preferable to have a structure in which both sides of the connection terminal plate can be visually recognized when removed from the cabinet (box, container, case). Moreover, it is preferable that the structure is such that it cannot be easily replaced by completely removing it from the game machine.

(3) The game ball rental device connection terminal plate may be enclosed in the medal count control board case (main board case) and sealed. In this case, it is preferable that the medal count control board case is detached from the cabinet so that both sides of the medal count control board and the external terminal plate can be viewed. Moreover, it is preferable that the structure is such that it cannot be easily replaced by completely removing it from the game machine.

FIG. 637 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of gaming machine performance information generation processing.
This gaming machine performance information generating process is called and executed when an opportunity to generate gaming machine performance information occurs during execution of the main loop process by the medal number control CPU.
The medal number control CPU can generate the gaming machine performance information according to the procedure example shown in this figure.
The procedure example shown below is merely an example, and the procedure for generating gaming machine performance information is not limited to such a procedure example.
In addition, the gaming machine performance information will be described with an example generated by the medal count control CPU, but may be generated by the main control CPU.

Step S7500: The number of medals control CPU confirms whether or not the number of games is FFFFh.
As a result, when it is confirmed that the number of games is FFFFh (Yes), the medal count control CPU returns to the caller. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the number of games is FFFFh (No), the medal number control CPU executes step S7501.

Step S7501: The medal count control CPU executes a process of adding 1 to the number of games played.

Step S7502: Medal Number Control The CPU checks whether or not the replay is in operation (whether or not the game medals required for the next game are automatically inserted).
As a result, when it is confirmed that the replay is operating (Yes), the medal count control CPU returns to the caller. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the replay is operating (No), the medal count control CPU executes step S7503.

Step S7503: The medal count control CPU executes processing for adding a prescribed number to the total number of inserted medals.
Step S7504: The number of medals control CPU executes a process of adding the number of payouts to the total number of payouts.

Step S7505: The medal count control CPU executes processing for confirming whether or not any accessory is operating.
As a result, when it is confirmed that any accessory is operating (Yes), the medal count control CPU executes step S7506. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that any accessory is operating (No), the medal count control CPU executes step S7509.

Step S7505: The medal count control CPU executes a process of adding the payout number to the total payout number of the accessory.

Step S7505: The medal count control CPU executes processing for confirming whether or not the first class special accessory is operating.
As a result, when it is confirmed that the first class special accessory is operating (Yes), the medal number control CPU executes step S7508. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the first class special accessory is operating (No), the medal number control CPU executes step S7509.

Step S7508: The medal count control CPU executes a process of adding the payout number to the continuous accessory total payout number.

Step S7509: The number of medals control The CPU executes a process of confirming whether or not "MY counter-specified number+payout number" is smaller than zero. The MY counter is a variable that holds the value of MY.
As a result, when it is confirmed that "MY counter-specified number+payout number" is smaller than 0 (Yes), the number-of-medals control CPU executes step S7511. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that "MY counter-specified number+payout number" is smaller than 0 (No), the medal number control CPU executes step S7510.

Step S7510: The medal count control CPU executes a process of storing the calculation result of "MY counter-specified number+payout number" in the MY counter.
Step S7511: The medal count control CPU executes a process of resetting (clearing to 0) the MY counter.

Step S7512: The medal count control CPU executes processing for confirming whether or not the maximum MY is smaller than the MY counter.
As a result, when it is confirmed that the maximum MY is smaller than the MY counter (Yes), the medal number control CPU executes step S7513. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the maximum MY is smaller than the MY counter (No), it returns to the caller.
Step S7513: The medal count control CPU executes processing for storing the value of the MY counter in the maximum MY.
After completing the above processing, the medal count control CPU returns to the caller.

[Improved form]
Next, an improved management game machine will be described. The improved management gaming machine includes the management gaming machine described above, and is a gaming machine obtained by partially improving the management gaming machine described above. Therefore, the description of the same contents as those of the management gaming machine described above will be omitted.

Figures 638 and 639 are diagrams showing the principle of operation of the improved management game machine. 638 shows a perspective view of the inner frame lower unit 810, and FIG. 639 shows a perspective view from the inner frame lower unit 810, showing a state in which the ball passage 819, the rectifier 820, etc. are removed. .
An inner frame lower unit 810 is arranged in the lower part of the management game machine.
An out passage 811 is arranged above the inner frame lower unit 810 . The out passage 811 is a passage that descends to the left, and an out switch 812 is arranged downstream of the out passage 811 (see FIG. 639). A game ball hit into the game area flows down the game area and enters the winning opening or the out opening. The game ball detected by the out switch 812 is discharged from the discharge port 813 to the ball tank 814 (see FIG. 639).

As shown in FIG. 639 , the ball tank 814 includes a path that descends to the left, and game balls stored in the ball tank 814 are guided to a lifting unit 815 arranged downstream of the ball tank 814 . The ball tank 814 is provided with an excess number sensor 828 and an insufficient number sensor 829, and these sensors manage the number of circulating balls. In the managed gaming machine, several tens of game balls (about 45 balls) are circulated. The game balls in the ball tank 814 can be removed by operating the ball extracting lever L1 so that a path for removing the game balls to the outside appears.

The lifting unit 815 includes a lifting motor 816 , a screw conveyor 817 and a cleaning unit 818 . When the lifting motor 816 operates, the screw conveyor 817 and the cleaning unit 818 rotate, and while polishing the game ball, the game ball can be lifted from the bottom to the top. A polishing cloth for cleaning is arranged on the outer circumference of the cleaning unit 818 . It is desirable to replace the polishing cloth periodically in the hall.

As shown in FIG. 638 , the game ball lifted upward by the lifting unit 815 enters the ball passage 819 . The ball passage 819 is a downward-sloping passage, and a rectifier 820 is arranged downstream of the ball passage 819 . A launcher 821 is arranged downstream (rear) of the rectifier 820, and the launcher 821 launches game balls. The launcher 821 may be a device that launches a game machine with a solenoid or a device that launches a game machine with a motor. The ball passage 819 can detect iron balls, and the rectifier 820 can perform subtraction processing of the number of game balls. It is preferable that the rectifier 820 has a structure in which the number of game balls does not increase or decrease due to a slamming goto or the like.

An iron ball detection sensor 823 is arranged upstream of the ball passage 819, a magnet 825 is arranged midstream of the ball passage 819, and a rectifier An inlet sensor 826 is located. A rectifier exit sensor 827 is arranged in the passageway connecting the rectifier 820 and the launcher 821 .

[Regarding supply of game balls]
Game balls are replenished from the out passage 811. - 特許庁When the glass door is opened, it is regarded as replenishment, and detection of the out switch 812 and detection of the foul ball sensor 822 are not performed. Arrow A in FIG. 639 indicates the path of a foul ball (foul path), and arrow B indicates the path of an out ball (out path). The foul ball sensor 822 is located at the most downstream position in the path of the foul ball. The various sensors and switches may detect passage of game balls, may be proximity sensors, or may be photosensors (the same shall apply hereinafter). Addition of foul balls can be performed using foul paths. It is preferable that the foul path is configured such that no game balls remain in the launcher 821 when the game is over.

[About the movement trigger of the lifting motor]
The lift motor 816 operates when the iron ball detection sensor 823 is off. The lift outlet sensor 824 monitors ball jams only. The operation trigger of the lifting motor 816 may be changed from the iron ball detection sensor 823 to the lifting outlet sensor 824 .

[About launch]
When the number of game balls is 1 or more, the rectifier entrance sensor 826 is on and the rectifier exit sensor 827 is off, the rectifier solenoid 828 is turned on in accordance with the operation timing of the discharge solenoid. The rectifier solenoid 828 can be software controlled. A game ball can be sent from the commutator 820 to the launcher 821 by turning on the commutator solenoid 828, and a game ball can be fired from the launcher 821 by turning on the firing solenoid.

[Regarding the subtraction of the number of game balls]
When the rectifier entrance sensor 826 is turned off and the rectifier exit sensor 827 is changed from on to off, 1 is subtracted from the number of game balls.

[About iron ball detection]
If iron balls are mixed, magnet 825 stops the circulation. If game balls continue to be shot while the circulation is stopped, the game balls are no longer detected by the rectifier entrance sensor 826 . If the state where the rectifier inlet sensor 826 is off and the iron ball detection sensor 823 is on continues for a certain period of time (for example, 10 seconds), an iron ball detection error occurs.

[Regarding the addition of the number of game balls]
When a foul ball occurs, the foul ball is detected by a foul ball sensor 822 arranged along the path of the foul ball. When the foul ball sensor 822 detects a foul ball (game ball), 1 is added to the number of game balls. Since the number of game balls is subtracted at the time of shooting, the number of game balls not shot is added. The number of game balls can be increased by communicating with the dedicated unit, and the number of game balls can be reduced by pressing the counting switch.

[Regarding the error of excessive number of balls]
When there are many game balls in the managed gaming machine, the excessive number of balls sensor 828 is turned on, and if it continues for a certain period of time, an excessive number of balls error occurs. The ball excess sensor 828 is located on the left side of the ball tank 814 and below the discharge port 813 .

[Regarding the ball count error]
When the number of game balls in the managed gaming machine is small, the ball number shortage sensor 829 is turned off, and if this continues for a certain period of time, a ball number shortage error occurs. The insufficient number of balls sensor 829 is arranged on the right side of the ball tank 814 and downstream of the foul ball sensor 822 .

[Regarding rotation detection error]
If the turning-on of the rotation detection sensor 830 is not detected even when the lifting motor 816 is rotated, a rotation detection error occurs. In this case, a retry operation may be performed to rotate the lift motor 816 again. When a rotation detection error occurs, the operation of the lift motor 816 is stopped. A rotation detection sensor 830 is arranged below the screw conveyor 817 .

[About other errors]
Out switch ball jam: An error that occurs when the out switch 812 has been on for a certain period of time. In this case, the lift motor 816 is stopped.
Foul ball sensor jam: An error that occurs when the foul ball sensor 822 is on for a period of time.
Rectifier Outlet Sensor Clog: An error that occurs when the rectifier outlet sensor 827 is on for a period of time.
Rectifier solenoid failure: This is an error that occurs when the rectifier outlet sensor 827 does not detect three consecutive times after the rectifier solenoid 828 is operated.

Errors that can be recovered by the error release switch include rotation detection errors, iron ball detection errors, and the like. However, these errors can be automatically reset when the rectifier entrance sensor 826 detects a game ball. Errors other than the above can be recovered after a certain period of time has elapsed.

FIG. 640 is a diagram showing a list of states of managed gaming machines in the improved mode.
The state of the managed gaming machine (frame control board) includes a "normal state" and a "ball-out state".
When the number of game balls is 1 or more, or when the power is turned on without pressing the ball removal button, the state shifts to the "normal state".
When the number of game balls is 0 and the power is turned on while pressing the ball removal button, the state shifts to the "ball removal state".

[About ball extraction state]
During the ball extraction state, the main control board is in the game stop state, and the winning of the starting port etc. is invalidated. As for firing, it can be fired even during various errors. However, ball removal has priority. The number of game balls is not increased or decreased during the ball extraction state.

When removing the managed game machine from the island facility in the game hall, it is necessary to remove the game ball from the managed game machine, but since the game ball near the launcher cannot be taken out by hand, it must be ejected into the board surface. There is At that time, in order to prevent the game ball from entering the starting hole and the pattern from starting to fluctuate, the game ball is taken out from the vicinity of the launcher after shifting to the ball extraction state.

Figures 641 and 642 are diagrams showing a list of errors managed by the improved management game machine.
"Game ball number display" indicates the content of the error code displayed on the game ball number display. When an error occurs, the number of game balls and an error code are alternately displayed on the game ball number display every two seconds.
“Stop lift motor,” “Stop rectifier solenoid,” and “Stop firing motor (*4)” mean that these devices are stopped when a circle (○) is indicated. "Firing motor" is used in place of "firing solenoid". A "fire motor" may be a "fire solenoid."
"Only after main control communication" indicates that the error occurs after the communication with the main control device is completed when the circle mark (O) is described.
"Valid when the ball is pulled out" indicates that the error occurs only when the ball is pulled out when a circle (○) is written.
"Release method (*6)" indicates the error release method.
"Priority" indicates the priority of errors. If multiple errors occur simultaneously, only the highest priority error can be reported.
"Sub-notification" indicates that it is an error notified by the effect control device when a circle (○) is described.
"Occurrence condition" indicates an error occurrence condition.
Details of each error will be described below.

[Insufficient number of balls error]
Game ball number display device: H01
Release method: Automatic recovery Priority: 17 (*8)
Sub notification: ○
Occurrence condition: 10s detection of ball count sensor off

[Too many balls error]
Game ball number display device: H02
Release method: Automatic recovery Priority: 16 (*8)
Sub notification: ○
Occurrence condition: 10 s detection of excessive ball number sensor ON

[Rectifier solenoid failure]
Game ball number display device: H03
Lifting motor stop: (*1)
Valid when the ball is pulled out: ○
Release method: Release button (error release switch)
Priority: 9
Sub notification: ○
Occurrence condition: The rectifier solenoid was operated, but the rectifier outlet sensor did not turn on three times in a row.

[Rotation detection error]
Game ball number display device: H04
Lifting motor stopped: 〇 Valid when the ball is pulled out: 〇
Release method: Release button Priority: 8
Sub notification: ○
Occurrence condition: When the lift motor is rotated, but the game ball is not detected by the rotation detection sensor

[Clogged rectifier outlet sensor]
Game ball number display device: H05
Lifting motor stop: (*1)
Rectifier solenoid stop: ○
Release method: Automatic recovery Priority: 12
Sub notification: ○
Occurrence condition: 100 ms detection of game ball stagnation at rectifier outlet sensor

[Foul ball sensor clogging]
Game ball number display device: H06
Lifting motor stop: (*2)
Release method: Automatic recovery Priority: 13
Sub notification: ○
Occurrence condition: 250 ms detection of game ball stagnation in the foul ball sensor

[Out switch ball clogging]
Game ball number display device: H07
Lifting motor stopped: ○
Release method: Automatic recovery Priority: 11
Sub notification: ○
Occurrence condition: 100 ms detection of game ball retention at out switch

[Proximity sensor error]
Game ball number display device: H08
Lifting motor stopped: ○
Release method: Automatic recovery Priority: 10
Sub notification: ○
Occurrence condition: Out switch disconnection detected for 100ms

[Main command enable signal error]
Game ball number display device: H09
Release method: Automatic recovery Priority: 14
Occurrence condition: Off of the command permission signal of the main control is detected for a predetermined time

[Dedicated unit communication error]
Game ball number display device: H10
Only after main control communication: Yes
Release method: Automatic recovery Priority: 3
Sub notification: ○
Occurrence condition: When an error occurs in communication with the dedicated unit

[Main control communication error]
Game ball number display device: H11
Only after main control communication: ○
Release method: Release button Priority: 4
Occurrence condition: When an error occurs in communication with the main control

[Manufacturer code mismatch error]
Game ball number display device: H12
Only after main control communication: Yes
Release method: Automatic recovery Priority: 2
Occurrence condition: When the main control manufacturer code and frame control manufacturer code do not match

[Dedicated unit VL signal error]
Game ball number display device: H13
Rectifier solenoid stop: ○
Launch motor stop: ○
Release method: Automatic recovery Priority: 15
Sub notification: ○
Occurrence condition: Predetermined condition (for example, when VL signal cannot be confirmed)

[Backup error]
Game ball number display device: H14
Lifting motor stopped: 〇 Rectifier solenoid stopped: 〇
Launch motor stop: ○
Releasing method: Power cycle Priority: 1
Sub notification: ○
Occurrence condition: Checksum error

[RWM (RAM) error]
Lifting motor stopped: 〇 Rectifier solenoid stopped: 〇
Launch motor stop: ○
Cancellation method: None (*5)
Occurrence condition: CPU abnormality (no notification and no display)

[Glass door open]
Game ball number display device: H64 (* 3)
Rectifier solenoid stop: ○
Release method: Automatic recovery Priority: 19
Sub notification: (*7)
Occurrence condition: 100 ms detection of glass frame signal on

[Body frame open]
Game ball number display device: H65 (* 3)
Release method: Automatic recovery Priority: 18
Sub notification: (*7)
Occurrence condition: 100 ms detection of body frame signal on

[Unauthorized radio wave detection error]
Game ball number display device: H66 (* 3)
Release method: Release button Priority: 5
Sub notification: ○
Occurrence condition: 100 ms detection of radio wave sensor ON

[Abnormal winning ball]
Game ball number display device: H69 (* 3)
Release method: Release button Priority: 7
Sub notification: ○
Occurrence condition: There is a difference of 100 balls or more between the number of shots and the number of detections of the out switch.

[Iron ball detection error]
Game ball number display device: H73 (*3)
Lifting motor stop: (*1)
Release method: Release button Priority: 6
Sub notification: ○
Occurrence condition: Rectifier inlet sensor turned off and iron ball detection sensor turned on for 10s

[During ball extraction]
Game ball number display device: 1 hyphen (-)
Releasing method: Re-apply power Sub-announcement: ○
Occurrence condition: When the number of game balls is 0 and the power is turned on while pressing the ball removal button

[Preparing to start]
Game ball number display device: all flashing, all lighting, or 6 hyphens (-)
Releasing method: Main control replacement Occurrence condition: Command not received from main control

(*1) Circulation is not stopped due to an error between the lift motor and the rectifier outlet (because the lift motor stops when the iron ball detection sensor turns on).
(*2) Replenishment of game balls from the foul passage will clog the foul ball sensor, so the circulation is not stopped.
(*3) The values from "01H" to "63H" can be freely changed.
(*4) The firing motor does not stop.
(*5) Cannot be canceled.
(*6) In the case of automatic recovery, cancel when the opposite condition occurs for the same amount of time as the occurrence condition.
(*7) Since the same signal is also input to the main control, it can be notified by the main control.
(*8) Errors with too many balls have a higher priority than errors with too few balls. When the insufficient number of balls sensor is disconnected, an insufficient number of balls error occurs, and when more game balls are replenished, an excessive number of balls error occurs and an error code of the excessive number of balls error is displayed.

The type of error and the time of the detection timer can be changed arbitrarily. In addition, there is no external terminal board in the management game machine. Therefore, the external signal is output from the dedicated unit to the hall computer.
For errors that do not have a "priority" description, the priority can be set as follows.
RWM anomalies can have a higher priority than backup anomalies.
During the ball extraction state, the priority can be lower than the backup failure and higher than the manufacturer code mismatch error.
During startup preparation, the priority can be lower than during ball removal preparation and higher than manufacturer code mismatch error.

The improved management gaming machine can be derived into the following seven improved forms. Hereinafter, the first improvement to the seventh improvement will be described in order. It should be noted that each improved mode can be used in combination with each improved mode, and a managed gaming machine can include at least one improved mode. It should be noted that the problems and effects described in the following improvements are only secondary, and the main problems and effects are "providing a novel gaming machine".

[First improved form: condition setting for enabling/disabling the foul ball sensor]
[Problem of the first improved form]
Basically, when the foul ball sensor 822 detects a game ball, the number of game balls is added, but if the same processing is performed in all situations, a problem occurs, so the signal of the foul ball sensor 822 is invalidated depending on the situation. and

[Overview of the first improved form]
"Circulation mechanism control processing" and "firing number measurement processing" are provided in the timer interrupt processing.
In the circulation mechanism control process, the switching of the signal of the rectifier entrance sensor 826 is checked, and the "notice counter" is incremented (+1) at the timing when the rectifier entrance sensor 826 is switched from on to off. That is, the advance notice counter is incremented (+1) when the game ball is shot.
In the firing number measurement process, switching of signals from the foul ball sensor 822 and the out switch 812 is checked.

[Foul ball sensor]
At the timing when the foul ball sensor 822 switches from off to on, the "notice counter" is decremented (-1). Also, the number of game balls is added (+1) at the timing when the foul ball sensor 822 is switched from off to on.

[out switch]
At the timing when the out switch 812 is switched from off to on, the "notice counter" is decremented (-1). However, when the ball is pulled out or when the notice counter is 0, the out switch 812 is not detected.

[Effect of the first improved form]
Accurately counting the game balls shot into the game area can prevent unnecessary addition of the number of game balls when the foul ball sensor 822 detects a game ball.
In addition, when the game balls shot into the game area are not accurately counted, there are the following concerns.
(1) Countermeasures against goto If the number of game balls is added (+1) each time the foul ball sensor 822 is detected, there is a possibility that the number of game balls can be infinitely increased due to the triggering of thuds and erroneous detection of the sensor. .
(2) Replenishment measures for game balls When replenishing circulating game balls, if they are replenished from the foul path, they will pass through the foul ball sensor 822, so the number of game balls will be added by the replenishment.
In this improved form, such concern can be eliminated.

[Specific configuration of the first improved mode]
FIG. 643 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of timer interrupt processing according to the first modification.
When a timer interrupt occurs, the frame control CPU of the frame control board executes timer interrupt processing. A timer interrupt occurs once in a timer interrupt cycle (for example, several ms) when the timer times out.

Step S510: The frame control CPU executes circulation mechanism control processing. In the circulation mechanism control process, the frame control CPU uses the rectifier entrance sensor 826, the rectifier exit sensor 827, and the like to control the circulation of game balls.
Step S511: The frame control CPU executes shot number counting processing. In the number-of-shots counting process, the frame control CPU uses the out switch 812, the foul ball sensor 822, and the like to control the shooting of game balls.
After completing the above processing, the frame control CPU returns to the calling source.
Although the timer interrupt process includes other processes, illustration and description of the other processes are omitted.

FIG. 644 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of circulation mechanism control processing according to the first modification.
Step S519: The frame control CPU executes processing to confirm whether or not the rectifier inlet sensor 826 has been switched from on to off.
As a result, when it is confirmed that the rectifier inlet sensor 826 has switched from ON to OFF (Yes), the frame control CPU executes step S520. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the rectifier entrance sensor 826 has been switched from ON to OFF (No), the frame control CPU returns to timer interrupt processing (FIG. 643).

Step S520: The frame control CPU executes a process of adding (+1) the notice counter.
Step S521: The frame control CPU executes a process of adding (+1) the subtraction notice counter.
After completing the above processing, the frame control CPU returns to the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 643).

FIG. 645 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure for counting the number of shots according to the first modification.
Step S522: The frame control CPU executes a process of confirming whether or not the game state is the ball-out state. Whether or not the ball is in the empty state can be confirmed by, for example, a ball empty state flag which is turned on when the state is changed to the ball empty state and turned off when the state is changed to the normal state.
As a result, when it is confirmed that the game state is the ball drawing state (Yes), the frame control CPU returns to the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 643). On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the game state is the state of drawing out the ball (No), the frame control CPU executes step S523.

Step S523: The frame control CPU executes processing to confirm whether or not the foul ball sensor 822 has been switched from off to on.
As a result, when it is confirmed that the foul ball sensor 822 has been switched from off to on (Yes), the frame control CPU executes step S524. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the foul ball sensor 822 has been switched from off to on (No), the frame control CPU executes step S527.

Step S524: The frame control CPU executes processing for confirming whether or not the advance notice counter is 1 or more.
As a result, when it is confirmed that the advance notice counter is 1 or more (Yes), the frame control CPU executes step S525. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the advance notice counter is 1 or more (No), the frame control CPU executes step S527.

Step S525: The frame control CPU executes a process of subtracting (-1) the notice counter.
Step S526: The frame control CPU executes a process of adding (+1) the number of game balls.
Step S526a: Perform a process of adding (+1) the 2-count number of shot ball signals.

Step S527: The frame control CPU executes processing to confirm whether or not the out switch 812 has been switched from off to on.
As a result, when it is confirmed that the out switch 812 has been switched from off to on (Yes), the frame control CPU executes step S528. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the out switch 812 has been switched from off to on (No), the frame control CPU returns to timer interrupt processing (FIG. 643).

Step S528: The frame control CPU executes processing for confirming whether or not the notice counter is 1 or more.
As a result, when it is confirmed that the advance notice counter is 1 or more (Yes), the frame control CPU executes step S529. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the advance notice counter is 1 or more (No), the frame control CPU returns to timer interrupt processing (FIG. 643).
Step S529: The frame control CPU executes a process of subtracting (-1) the notice counter.
After completing the above processing, the frame control CPU returns to the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 643).

The management gaming machine of the first improved form has the following configuration.
(1) It is an enclosed game machine in which game balls circulate within the game machine.
(2) A launcher 821 (shooting means, launching device) capable of shooting game balls into the game area is provided.
(3) A frame control board memory (storage means) for storing the number of game balls is provided.
(4) A foul ball sensor 822 (foul ball detection means) for detecting a foul ball (return ball), which is a game ball that has been fired by the launcher 821 but returned without reaching the game area. .
(5) When a foul ball is detected by the foul ball sensor 822 and the first condition is satisfied, the number of game balls is added, and when the foul ball is detected by the foul ball sensor 822 It has a frame control board CPU (control means) which does not add the number of game balls when the second condition is satisfied.

According to the first improved form, since the number of game balls can be added according to the situation, it is possible to realize flexible control compared to the method of always adding the number of game balls when a foul ball occurs. As a result, it is possible to provide a novel gaming machine.

The following configuration can be added to the management gaming machine of the first improved form.
(1) The first condition is a condition that is met when the advance notice counter updated by detection of a signal relating to the launch of the game ball is 1 or more (when the predetermined information is a specific value).
(2) The second condition is a condition that is met when the advance notice counter is not equal to or greater than 1 (when the predetermined information is not a specific value).

According to this configuration, whether or not to add the number of game balls can be easily determined by checking the notice counter, and the control process can be simplified.

[Second Improved Form: Processing During Pressing of Count Switch]
[Problem of the second improved form]
If the shooting of the game balls is stopped while the count switch is pressed, it takes a certain amount of time until the number of remaining balls (the number of remaining game balls) becomes 0, and the player feels bored during this time.

[Outline of the second improved form]
(1) It is possible to shoot while the count switch is being pressed.
(2) When the number of game balls becomes one ball, the number is not counted when the rectifier 820 (rectifier solenoid 828) is operated.
(3) When the remaining number of game balls is 250, the count is set to 249 when the rectifier 820 is operated.

[Effect of the second improved form]
A game player's feeling of boredom is alleviated by enabling the shooting operation to the last minute even while the counting switch is pressed.

[Specific configuration of the second improved form]
The configuration of the timer interrupt processing is the same as that of the first improvement, so the description is omitted (see FIG. 643).
FIG. 646 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the number-of-shots counting process of the second modification.
Step S530: The frame control CPU executes a process of confirming whether or not the game state is the ball-out state.
As a result, when it is confirmed that the game state is the ball drawing state (Yes), the frame control CPU returns to the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 643). On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the game state is the state of drawing out the ball (No), the frame control CPU executes step S531.

Step S531: The frame control CPU executes processing to confirm whether or not the rectifier inlet sensor 826 has been switched from ON to OFF and the subtraction notice counter is 1 or more.
As a result, when it is confirmed that the rectifier entrance sensor 826 is switched from ON to OFF and the subtraction notice counter is 1 or more (Yes), the frame control CPU executes step S531a. On the other hand, when the rectifier inlet sensor 826 is switched from ON to OFF and it cannot be confirmed that the subtraction notice counter is 1 or more (No), the frame control CPU returns to timer interrupt processing (FIG. 643).
Step S531a: The frame control CPU executes a process of subtracting (-1) the subtraction notice counter. The subtraction notice counter is a counter (for subtraction) with the condition that the number of game balls is made negative, and the notice counter is a counter (for addition) with the condition that the number of game balls is made positive in the event of a foul.
Step S532: The frame control CPU executes a process of subtracting (-1) the number of game balls.
Step S532a: The frame control CPU executes a process of adding (+1) the count number of one shot ball signal.

Step S533: The frame control CPU executes processing for confirming whether or not the counting advance notice counter is 1 or more.
As a result, when it is confirmed that the counting advance notice counter is 1 or more (Yes), the frame control CPU executes step S534. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the counting advance notice counter is equal to or greater than 1 (No), the frame control CPU returns to timer interrupt processing (FIG. 643).
Note that the determination process in step S533 may not be executed.

Step S534: The frame control CPU executes a process of clearing (setting 0) the advance notice counter.
After completing the above processing, the frame control CPU returns to the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 643).

The counting notice counter is raised or lowered each time a game ball is shot. On the software side, there is a time lag from the timing at which the rectifier 820 is operated until the rectifier inlet sensor 826 actually detects it. I try not to. A count advance notice counter is a counter that must not be counted because it is fired. The timing of clearing the counting advance notice counter is the timing when the game ball rides on the launch pad (that is, when the game ball is certainly launched). If the number of game balls is 251 or more, the maximum count value is 250, so there is no problem.

FIG. 647 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of circulation mechanism control processing according to the second modification.
Step S535: The frame control CPU executes processing to confirm whether or not the rectifier solenoid operation timer is zero.
As a result, when it is confirmed that the rectifier solenoid operation timer is 0 (Yes), the frame control CPU executes step S536. On the other hand, if it cannot confirm that the rectifier solenoid operation timer is 0 (No), the frame control CPU returns to timer interrupt processing (FIG. 643).
Step S536: The frame control CPU executes processing for turning off the rectifier solenoid signal (processing for not operating the rectifier solenoid).

Step S537: The frame control CPU executes processing to confirm whether or not the firing reference signal has been switched from off to on.
As a result, when it is confirmed that the firing reference signal has been switched from off to on (Yes), the frame control CPU executes step S538. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the firing reference signal has been switched from off to on (No), the frame control CPU returns to timer interrupt processing (FIG. 643).

Here, the firing reference signal is a signal transmitted from the firing device to the frame control board at the timing of firing when the player holds the handle (the firing device). In the current machine (game machine that is not a management game machine (enclosed type)), the rectifier solenoid and the launch solenoid are not entwined with software (not controlled by the software installed on the main control board), and the handle is If you twist it, both will operate automatically (by controlling the hardware such as the circuit that operates the rectifier solenoid and the firing solenoid), but in the management game machine, the rectifier solenoid is controlled by software. (controlled by the software installed on the frame control board). The signal to operate the rectifier solenoid in accordance with the launch solenoid is the launch reference signal, and by operating the rectifier solenoid in software according to it, the launch solenoid and the rectifier solenoid can be operated together at a timing similar to the current machine. You can shoot a game ball by operating it. Note that the firing reference signal can be from ON to OFF or OFF to ON, but when the signal switches, it activates the rectifier solenoid. It should be noted that, in the state of pulling out the ball, since it is a state for simply pulling out the game ball, the state of various sensors is not checked, and the ball is shot as it is.

Step S538: The frame control CPU executes processing for confirming whether or not the game state is the state of drawing out the ball.
As a result, when it is confirmed that the game state is the ball-out state (Yes), the frame control CPU executes step S543. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the game state is the state of drawing out the ball (No), the frame control CPU executes step S539.

Step S539: The frame control CPU executes processing to confirm whether or not the rectifier outlet sensor 827 is off. In this determination process, clogged balls are confirmed.
As a result, when it is confirmed that the rectifier outlet sensor 827 is off (Yes), the frame control CPU executes step S540. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the rectifier outlet sensor 827 is off (No), the frame control CPU returns to timer interrupt processing (FIG. 643).

Step S540: The frame control CPU executes processing to confirm whether or not the rectifier inlet sensor 826 is on. In this determination process, it is confirmed whether or not a game ball exists.
As a result, when it is confirmed that the rectifier entrance sensor 826 is on (Yes), the frame control CPU executes step S541. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the rectifier entrance sensor 826 is on (No), the frame control CPU returns to timer interrupt processing (FIG. 643).

Step S541: The frame control CPU executes processing for confirming whether or not the number of game balls is one or more. In this determination process, it is confirmed whether or not the number of game balls exists.
As a result, when it is confirmed that the number of game balls is 1 or more (Yes), the frame control CPU executes step S542. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the number of game balls is 1 or more (No), the frame control CPU returns to timer interrupt processing (FIG. 643).

Step S542: The frame control CPU executes a process of adding (+1) the counting advance notice counter.

Step S543: The frame control CPU executes processing for turning on the rectifier solenoid signal (processing for operating the rectifier solenoid).

Step S543: The frame control CPU executes processing for setting a predetermined time (42 ms) to the rectifier solenoid operation timer. Since the current machine operates the rectifier solenoid for 40 ms, for example, if the interrupt period is 3 ms, it is preferable to set the predetermined time to "42 ms" which is a multiple of 3 and close to "40 ms".
After completing the above processing, the frame control CPU returns to the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 643).

FIG. 648 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of the main loop processing of the second modification.
Note that the main loop processing includes other processing, but illustration and description of the other processing are omitted. Main loop processing can also be performed in other refinements.

Step S545: The frame control CPU executes counting processing. In the counting process, the frame control CPU executes control related to counting the number of game balls using a counting switch or the like.
After finishing the above process, the frame control CPU returns to the beginning of the main loop process and continues the process.

FIG. 649 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of counting processing according to the second modification.
Step S550: The frame control CPU executes a process of storing "250", "1" or "0" in the count. The frame control CPU determines long press, short press, or non-press according to the pressing time of the counting switch. Specifically, if it is determined that the counting switch has been pressed for a long time, "250" is stored in the count, and if it is determined that the counting switch has been pressed for a short time, "1" is stored in the count, and the counting switch is If it is determined that the button has not been pressed, "0" is stored in the count.

Step S551: The frame control CPU executes processing for confirming whether or not the VL signal is on. A VL signal is a signal output from the dedicated unit, and is a signal for confirming whether or not the dedicated unit and the frame control board are connected.
As a result, when it is confirmed that the VL signal is on (Yes), the frame control CPU executes step S553. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the VL signal is on (No), the frame control CPU executes step S552.

Step S552: The frame control CPU executes a process of storing "0" in the count.
Step S553: The frame control CPU executes a process of storing the "number of game balls" in "X (predetermined variable)".

Step S554: The frame control CPU executes processing for confirming whether or not the number of game balls is zero.
As a result, when it is confirmed that the number of game balls is 0 (Yes), the frame control CPU executes step S558. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the number of game balls is 0 (No), the frame control CPU executes step S555.
By this processing, when the number of game balls=0, the count=0 is set.

Step S555: The frame control CPU executes processing for confirming whether or not the number of game balls is 251 or more.
As a result, when it is confirmed that the number of game balls is 251 or more (Yes), the frame control CPU executes step S559. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the number of game balls is 251 or more (No), the frame control CPU executes step S556.
According to this processing, when the number of game balls>250, the count is used as it is.

Step S556: The frame control CPU executes a process of storing the value of "number of game balls-counting notice counter" in "X".

Step S557: The frame control CPU executes processing for confirming whether or not the number of game balls is equal to or greater than the count.
As a result, when it is confirmed that the number of game balls is equal to or greater than the count (Yes), the frame control CPU executes step S559. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the number of game balls is equal to or greater than the count (No), the frame control CPU executes step S558.

Step S558: The frame control CPU executes processing to store the value of "X" in "count".
Step S559: The frame control CPU executes a process of storing the value of "number of game balls-count" in "number of game balls". "Count" is a value between 250 and 0.
Step S560: The frame control CPU executes count transmission processing. Specifically, a process of transmitting the value of "count" to the dedicated unit is executed.
After completing the above processing, the frame control CPU returns to the main loop processing (FIG. 648).

The management gaming machine of the second improved form has the following configuration.
(1) It is an enclosed game machine in which game balls circulate within the game machine.
(2) A launcher 821 (shooting means) capable of shooting game balls into the game area is provided.
(3) A frame control board memory (storage means) for storing the number of game balls is provided.
(4) It has a counting switch for counting the number of game balls.
(5) A frame control board CPU (control means) is provided.
(6) The frame control board CPU enables the number of game balls to be subtracted by pressing the count switch, enables the launcher 821 to shoot game balls even while the count switch is being pressed, When the condition is established (for example, when the rectifier is operated with one remaining ball), the number of game balls is not subtracted even if the counting switch is pressed.

According to this improved form, it is possible to shoot game balls from the launcher 821 even while the counting switch is being pressed, so that the player's feeling of boredom can be alleviated while the counting switch is being pressed.
In addition, according to this improved form, since the number of game balls can be subtracted according to the situation, flexible control can be realized compared to the method of stopping firing when the counting switch is pressed. As a result, it is possible to provide a novel gaming machine.

[Third Improved Mode: Processing of Switches Mounted on Frame Control Board]
[Problem of the third improved form]
In the case of a structure in which game balls are circulated inside the game machine instead of throwing in game balls from the outside as in conventional machines, there is a risk of problems and frauds that are different from conventional machines. In the third improved mode, by implementing new errors and the like and appropriately using each of them, including conventional errors, it is possible to appropriately deal with defects and fraud.

[Outline of the third improved form]
Three switches (SW) are mounted on the frame control board. The three switches are as follows.
(1) Error release SW: When pressed while an error is occurring, the error is released. The error release SW can be pressed when the power is ON.
(2) Number of game balls clear SW: Clears the number of game balls if it is on when the power is turned on.
(3) Ball-out SW: If it is on when the power is turned on, and the number of game balls is 0, it shifts to the ball-out state.

[Specification of release SW related error]
(1) It has an error that can be canceled by the error cancellation SW. For example, rectifier solenoid abnormality, rotation detection error, unauthorized radio wave detection error, winning ball abnormality, iron ball detection error. Since these errors can be caused by malfunctions, call a store clerk to check and, if there is no problem, press the error cancellation switch. The errors that can be canceled by the error cancellation SW are not limited to these five types of errors, and may be four or less or six or more.

(2) Error determination processing of the frame control board is not affected by the state of the main control (processing is independent for each board and does not interfere with each other), so main control system errors with high priority (backup error, It is possible to notify frame control system errors (including the above five errors) even during the occurrence of an RWM error, setting change, etc.).
(3) With the exception of some errors (during setting changes, etc.), it is possible to shoot game balls even when an error occurs, and when a game ball wins at the starting hole, a variable display effect is performed using a liquid crystal display, etc. Is possible.

[Difference in behavior depending on the order of pressing the error release switch and error occurrence]
(4) When an error occurrence condition is satisfied while the error cancellation switch is pressed The error cancellation switch is judged to be pressed only at the timing when the pressed state is detected from the unpressed state, and the determination of the pressed state is not performed thereafter. Therefore, while the error cancellation switch is kept pressed, the behavior is the same as when it is not pressed.

(5) When the error cancellation SW is pressed while the error conditions are satisfied When the error cancellation SW is pressed, the error conditions (eg, flags, accumulated time (ms) from error detection, etc.) are cleared. However, in cases where the accumulated time of the radio wave sensor ON state, such as an illegal radio wave detection error, occurs as a condition, if the sensor is ON at the timing of recovery from power failure or pressing the error release switch, regardless of the accumulated time. always reset the error state.
For example, an illegal radio wave error requires detection for 100 ms, but if a radio wave is detected when the error is cleared, it can be regarded as an error immediately regardless of the accumulated time. In this case, the accumulated time can be cleared.

(6) Specifications when pressing the error release switch when multiple errors occur Each time the error release switch is pressed, only one error with the highest priority among the errors being generated is released. There is no long press function. The reason for clearing only one error is that only one error code is displayed on the game ball number display, so if you clear all the errors, you will not know what kind of error has occurred. is. It should be noted that a plurality of errors may be canceled simultaneously by pressing once, or at least one error may be canceled by pressing for a long time. Also, a short press may release one error, and a long press may release a plurality of errors.

[Timing when the error cancellation switch is valid]
(7) Since the frame control system error itself can occur at any time, the error cancellation SW is always effective.

[Behavior when power is turned on]
(8) When the power is turned on again without pressing the error release SW after an error occurs Since the error status is not subject to backup, the error status is released. The error condition is cleared because it is not subject to backup. The error is not signaled until the error condition is met again.
(9) When the power is turned off after an error occurs, and the power is turned on while the error reset switch is pressed during the power cut, as described in (4) above, it is not detected that the error reset switch is pressed. same behavior).

[Interference between SW]
(10) When the error release SW is pressed while the RAM clear SW is pressed, or when the RAM clear SW is pressed while the error release SW is pressed As described in (2) above, there is no interference with the main control system error.
(11) When the error release SW is pressed while another SW is pressed The error release SW is valid even when the game ball count clear SW is pressed. The error cancellation SW is effective even when the ball extraction SW is pressed.
The three buttons (RAM clear SW, game ball number clear SW, error release SW) may not be three buttons having different functions, and one button may have a plurality of functions. As for control, conditions such as pressing, long pressing, power-on, etc. may be changed as appropriate.

[Remarks] When the power is turned on while the number of game balls clear SW and the ball removal SW are pressed at the same time. It depends on the model specifications. In this improved form, since the game ball count clear SW process is performed first, the ball is pulled out. However, if the ball removal SW is determined first depending on the model specifications, the ball removal state does not occur unless the number of game balls is 0.

[Effect of the third improvement]
By implementing SW, etc., such as appropriate error processing, it becomes possible to appropriately and flexibly deal with and respond to defects and fraud.

[Specific configuration of the third improved mode]
The above error processing can be executed, for example, by the frame control CPU in timer interrupt processing (FIG. 643) or main loop processing (FIG. 648). In addition, the error processing shown in FIGS. 641 and 642 can be executed by, for example, the frame control CPU, the main control CPU, the effect control CPU, and the like.

The management gaming machine of the third improved form has the following configuration.
(1) A main control board (main control CPU) is provided.
(2) It has a frame control board (frame control CPU).
(3) The frame control board determines an error state (for example, rectifier solenoid abnormality, rotation detection error, unauthorized radio wave detection error, winning ball abnormality, iron ball detection error) when a predetermined error occurrence condition is satisfied. It is provided with means for judging whether the error is possible (frame control CPU) and a switch (error canceling switch) capable of canceling the error state.

According to this improvement, it is possible to complete the generation and cancellation of the error state only by the frame control board, and to appropriately deal with defects and frauds that occur in the frame control board. We can provide a game machine that

In this improved form, the determination means can determine that the main control board is in the error state without being affected by the state of the main control board (even if the main control board is in the error state). According to this improvement, even if the main control board is in an error state, it is possible to notify the error state regarding the frame control board.

In this improved mode, even if the determining means determines that the game is in an error state, the game ball can be shot, and when the shot game ball wins the starting hole, the variable display effect can be executed. According to this improved form, even if the frame control board is in an error state, the variable display effect can be executed by shooting the game ball, so the shooting of the game ball is uniformly prohibited in the error state of the frame control board. Flexible control can be performed compared to the method of

[Fourth Improved Form: Trial Fire Test Signal of Frame Control Board]
[Problem of the fourth improved form]
To realize a mechanism for counting the number of shot balls in a model having a structure in which game balls are circulated inside the game machine in the same manner as a conventional model having a structure in which game balls are thrown in from the outside.

[Overview of the fourth improved form]
(1) A shot ball signal 1 is a signal that is transmitted to an external device and indicates the number of shot balls.
A sensor is provided at a position where a game ball that has been hit can be detected, and processing is performed in the order of "sensor detection"→"shot ball count update (+1)"→"signal transmission".

(2) The shot ball signal 2 is a signal that is transmitted to an external device and indicates the number of foul balls.
A sensor is installed at a position where it can detect only foul balls (game balls that are launched but do not reach the play area and return within the launch rail), which are not detected when launched normally. → "Foul ball count update (+1)" → "Signal transmission" are processed in this order.
The number of balls hit on the board can be calculated by subtracting the number of foul balls from the number of balls fired on the receiving side (external device, test-firing test device) of the shot ball signals 1 and 2.

(3) While the ball is being pulled out (the power is turned on while the ball is being pulled down), it is detected that the ball has passed through the sensor, but the internal count is not updated at the time of detection, and the shot ball signals 1 and 2 is not sent.
The internal control is “○ sensor detection”, “× internal count update”, and “× signal transmission”.
A circle mark (O) indicates execution, and a cross mark (X) indicates non-execution (same below).

(4) During the setting change, game balls are not launched (launched invalid state), but updating of internal count and transmission of shot ball signals 1 and 2 by sensor passage are possible.
The internal control is "○ sensor detection", "○ internal count update", and "○ signal transmission".

(5) It is possible to update the internal counts by passing sensors and to transmit the ball launch signals 1 and 2, even during other errors.
The internal control is "○ sensor detection", "○ internal count update", and "○ signal transmission". However, this excludes the case where the sensor is clogged with game balls.

(6) The above control is performed even when the signal transmission connector is not installed on the board and the ball launch signals 1 and 2 cannot be transmitted and received. Although the above control processing is executed, nothing happens because the connector is not connected.
The internal control is "○ sensor detection", "○ internal count update", and "○ signal transmission".

[Effect of the fourth improved form]
Only game balls that have reached the game area can be counted. In addition, it is possible to control so as not to count during the ball extraction state, thereby suppressing inconsistency and unintended change of numerical information.

[Specific configuration of the fourth improved mode]
FIG. 650 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of timer interrupt processing according to the fourth modification.
When a timer interrupt occurs, the frame control CPU of the frame control board executes timer interrupt processing. A timer interrupt occurs once in a timer interrupt cycle (for example, several ms) when the timer times out.

Step S561: The frame control CPU executes shot number counting processing. In the number-of-shoots counting process, the frame control CPU uses the rectifier entrance sensor 826, the foul ball sensor 822, and the like to control the shooting of game balls.
Step S562: The frame control CPU executes a test-firing test signal management process. In the test-firing test signal management process, the frame control CPU executes control related to the output (transmission) of the shot ball signals 1 and 2 .
After completing the above processing, the frame control CPU returns to the calling source.
Although the timer interrupt process includes other processes, illustration and description of the other processes are omitted.

The firing count measurement process of the fourth improved form is the fired count measurement process of the first improved form (Fig. 645), the fired count measurement process of the second improved form (Fig. 646), or the fired count measurement process of the first improved form. (FIG. 645) and the firing number counting process (FIG. 646) of the second improved form can be adopted.

FIG. 651 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of the test-firing signal management process of the fourth improved form.
Step S568: The frame control CPU executes processing for confirming whether or not the shot ball signal 1 timer is zero.
As a result, when it is confirmed that the shot ball signal 1 timer is 0 (Yes), the frame control CPU executes step S569. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the shot ball signal 1 timer is 0 (No), the frame control CPU executes step S572.

Step S569: The frame control CPU executes a process of confirming whether or not the count number of one shot ball signal is zero.
As a result, when it is confirmed that the number of shot ball signal 1 counts is 0 (Yes), the frame control CPU executes step S575. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the number of counts per shot ball signal is 0 (No), the frame control CPU executes step S570.

Step S570: The frame control CPU executes a process of subtracting (-1) the one count number of the shot ball signal.
Step S571: The frame control CPU executes a process of setting a shot ball signal 1 timer (for example, a value corresponding to several milliseconds to several seconds).
Step S572: The frame control CPU executes a process of subtracting (-1) the shot ball signal 1 timer.

Step S573: The frame control CPU executes processing for confirming whether or not the shot ball signal 1 timer remains more than half.
As a result, when it is confirmed that half or more of the shot ball signal 1 timer remains (Yes), the frame control CPU executes step S574. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the shot ball signal 1 timer remains more than half (No), the frame control CPU executes step S575.
Step S574: The frame control CPU executes processing for outputting (transmitting) the shot ball signal 1 to the external device.

Step S575: The frame control CPU executes processing for confirming whether or not the shot ball signal 2 timer is zero.
As a result, when it is confirmed that the shot ball signal 2 timer is 0 (Yes), the frame control CPU executes step S576. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the shot ball signal 2 timer is 0 (No), the frame control CPU executes step S579.

Step S576: The frame control CPU executes processing for confirming whether or not the number of shot ball signal 2 counts is zero.
As a result, when it is confirmed that the number of shot ball signal 2 counts is 0 (Yes), the frame control CPU returns to the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 650). On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the number of shot ball signal 2 counts is 0 (No), the frame control CPU executes step S577.

Step S577: The frame control CPU executes a process of subtracting (-1) the 2-count number of shot ball signals.
Step S578: The frame control CPU executes processing for setting a shot ball signal 2 timer (for example, a value corresponding to several milliseconds to several seconds).
Step S579: The frame control CPU executes a process of subtracting (-1) the shot ball signal 2 timer.

Step S580: The frame control CPU executes processing for confirming whether or not the shot ball signal 2 timer remains more than half.
As a result, when it is confirmed that half or more of the shot ball signal 2 timer remains (Yes), the frame control CPU executes step S581. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the shot ball signal 1 timer remains more than half (No), the frame control CPU returns to timer interrupt processing (FIG. 650).
Step S581: The frame control CPU executes a process of outputting (transmitting) the shot ball signal 2 to the external device.
After completing the above processing, the frame control CPU returns to the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 650).

Launch ball signals 1 and 2 are output to an external device by a test signal transmission connector. However, since no test signal transmission connector is attached to the management game machine (frame control board) installed in the game arcade, the shot ball signals 1 and 2 are not output. It should be noted that, even in a managed game machine installed in a game arcade, when the test signal transmission connector is attached, processing related to the fired ball signals 1 and 2 is performed so that the fired ball signals 1 and 2 can be output. is running.

The management gaming machine of the fourth improved form has the following configuration.
(1) A launcher 821 (shooting means) capable of shooting game balls into the game area is provided.
(2) A rectifier entrance sensor 826 (fired ball detection means) for detecting a shot ball, which is a game ball shot by the launcher 821, is provided.
(3) Based on the detection of the rectifier entrance sensor 826, it is provided with a frame control CPU (fired ball number counting means) that counts the number of fired ball signals (the number of fired balls, which is the total number of fired balls).
(4) Frame control CPU (first signal generation means).

(5) A foul ball sensor 822 (foul ball detection means) is provided for detecting a foul ball which is a game ball that has been shot by the launcher 821 but returned without reaching the game area.
(6) A frame control CPU (foul ball number counting means) for counting the number of shot ball signals 2 (the number of foul balls, which is the total number of foul balls) based on the detection of the foul ball sensor 822 .
(7) A frame control CPU (second signal generation means).

According to this improved form, the external device can not only grasp the number of shot balls and the number of foul balls, but also can accurately grasp the number of game balls that have reached the game area. We can provide a game machine that

This refinement adds the following features:
(1) When a predetermined transition condition is satisfied (when the number of game balls is 0 and the power is turned on while pressing the ball removal button), shift to a ball removal state in which game balls can be removed from the gaming machine. It has a frame control CPU (ball drawing state transition means).
(2) The rectifier entrance sensor 826 and the foul ball sensor 822 detect the playing ball even in the ball-out state.
(3) The frame control CPU does not count the number of shot ball signal 1 counts and the number of shot ball signal 2 counts when the ball is pulled out.
(4) The frame control CPU does not generate (output) the shot ball signal 1 and the shot ball signal 2 when the ball is in the drawn state.

According to this improved form, in the ball-out state, the rectifier entrance sensor 826 and the foul ball sensor 822 are enabled to continue detecting the game ball, but the shot ball signal 1 and the shot ball signal 2 are not generated. can be done.

[Fifth improvement: iron ball detection method (illegal ball detection method)]
[Problem of the fifth improved form]
To detect early that an iron ball (illegal ball) is mixed in a game ball circulation mechanism and to prevent the iron ball from being shot into a game area.

[Outline of the fifth improved form]
The iron ball detection mechanism is provided at the bottom of the main body frame, and is composed of an iron ball detection sensor 823, a lever L2 provided with a magnet 825, a rectifier inlet sensor 826, etc. In the process of moving the game ball to the rectifier 820 (game ball rectification mechanism), the iron ball is attracted by the magnet 825 to make the game ball stay and stop the supply of the game ball to the rectifier 820 ( See Figure 638).

When the rectifier inlet sensor 826 is off and the iron ball detection sensor 823 provided in front of the magnet 825 is on for 10 seconds, an iron ball detection error occurs, and the lever L2 is released. When it is moved in the direction (pulled forward), the iron ball attracted to the magnet 825 is released from the ball passage 819, and the staying state of the game balls is released. The iron ball detection error can be canceled by operating the error cancellation button or turning on the power again.
When an iron ball detection error occurs, the ball feeding function of the rectifier 820 (rectifying mechanism) may be stopped, and the game ball shooting function may not be stopped.

[Effect of the fifth improved form]
It is possible to detect at an early stage that iron balls are mixed in the circulation mechanism.

[Specific configuration of the fifth improved mode]
FIG. 652 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of timer interrupt processing according to the fifth modification.
When a timer interrupt occurs, the frame control CPU of the frame control board executes timer interrupt processing. A timer interrupt occurs once in a timer interrupt cycle (for example, several ms) when the timer times out.

Step S582: The frame control CPU executes timer update processing. In the timer update process, the frame control CPU executes the process of updating the iron ball detection timer and the like.
Step S583: The frame control CPU executes state management processing. In the state management process, the frame control CPU executes processes for checking errors, judging errors, and canceling errors.
After completing the above processing, the frame control CPU returns to the calling source.
Although the timer interrupt process includes other processes, illustration and description of the other processes are omitted.

FIG. 653 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of timer update processing according to the fifth modification. Illustrations and descriptions of timers other than the iron ball detection timer are omitted.
Step S584: The frame control CPU executes processing for confirming whether or not the iron ball detection timer is 1 or more.
As a result, when it is confirmed that the iron ball detection timer is equal to or greater than 1 (Yes), the frame control CPU executes step S585. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the iron ball detection timer is equal to or greater than 1 (No), the frame control CPU returns to timer interrupt processing (FIG. 652).
Step S585: The frame control CPU executes a process of subtracting (-1) the iron ball detection timer.
After completing the above processing, the frame control CPU returns to the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 652).

FIG. 654 is a flow chart showing a procedure example of state management processing according to the fifth modification.
Step S586: The frame control CPU executes state confirmation processing. In the state confirmation process, the frame control CPU executes a process of confirming the states of various sensors.
Step S587: The frame control CPU executes error determination/cancellation processing. In the error determination/cancel processing, the frame control CPU executes processing for determining an error and canceling the error.
After completing the above processing, the frame control CPU returns to the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 652).

FIG. 655 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of state confirmation processing according to the fifth modification.
Step S588: The frame control CPU executes processing for confirming whether or not the iron ball detection sensor 823 is on.
As a result, when it is confirmed that the iron ball detection sensor 823 is on (Yes), the frame control CPU executes step S589. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the iron ball detection sensor 823 is on (No), the frame control CPU executes step S591.

Step S589: The frame control CPU executes processing to confirm whether or not the rectifier inlet sensor 826 is off.
As a result, when it is confirmed that the rectifier entrance sensor 826 is off (Yes), the frame control CPU executes step S590. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the rectifier entrance sensor 826 is off (No), the frame control CPU executes step S591.

Step S590: The frame control CPU executes a process of storing "1" in "X (predetermined variable)".
Step S591: The frame control CPU executes a process of storing "0" in "X".

Step S592: The frame control CPU executes processing to confirm whether or not the state of the signal is the same as the previous state (whether or not the value of X has changed since the previous processing was executed).
As a result, when it is confirmed that the state of the signal is the same as the previous state (Yes), the frame control CPU executes step S594. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the state of the signal is the same as the previous state (No), the frame control CPU executes step S593.
Step S593: The frame control CPU executes processing for setting a timer for iron ball detection (10-second timer, timer corresponding to 10 seconds). The iron ball detection timer is decremented in the timer update process (FIG. 653).

Step S594: The frame control CPU executes processing for confirming whether or not the iron ball detection timer is zero.
As a result, when it is confirmed that the iron ball detection timer is 0 (Yes), the frame control CPU executes step S595. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the iron ball detection timer is 0 (No), the frame control CPU returns to the state management process (FIG. 654).
Step S595: The frame control CPU executes processing to store the value of "X" in the "state flag". When X=1, an iron ball detection error occurs.

FIG. 656 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of error determination/cancellation processing according to the fifth modification.
Step S596: The frame control CPU executes processing for confirming whether the state flag is 0 or not.
As a result, when it is confirmed that the state flag is 0 (Yes), the frame control CPU executes step S598. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the state flag is 0 (No), the frame control CPU executes step S597.

Step S597: The frame control CPU executes the process of storing "1" in the "error flag (error flag of iron ball detection error)". When "1" is stored in the "error flag (error flag for iron ball detection error)", the frame control CPU and the like execute error processing for the iron ball detection error (see FIGS. 641 and 642).

Step S596: The frame control CPU executes processing for confirming whether or not the error release switch has been switched from off to on.
As a result, when it is confirmed that the error cancellation switch has been switched from off to on (Yes), the frame control CPU executes step S599. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the error release switch has been switched from off to on (No), the frame control CPU returns to the state management process (FIG. 654).

Step S599: The frame control CPU executes a process of storing "0" in the "error flag (iron ball detection error error flag)".
After completing the above processing, the frame control CPU returns to the state management processing (FIG. 654).

The state flag indicates the state of the sensor, and may become 1 or 0 after 10 seconds have passed. Therefore, if the state flag is used as an error flag as it is, it will be automatically canceled. Therefore, an error flag is separately provided for the iron ball detection error. Therefore, the error flag can be cleared only by the error reset switch.

When an iron ball detection error occurs, "H73" is displayed as an error code on the game ball number display device. In this case, when the body frame is opened, the body frame is opened, but the error code "H65" corresponding to the body frame opening has a lower priority than the iron ball detection error, so it is not displayed on the game ball number display device. (See Figures 641 and 642). Since the error release switch is pressed after the body frame is opened, if the iron ball detection error is canceled by pressing the error release switch after removing the iron ball, "H65" is displayed as the error code corresponding to the body frame opening. be done.

The management gaming machine of the fifth improved form has the following configuration.
(1) A lifting unit 815 (lifting mechanism) capable of lifting while polishing the game ball is provided.
(2) An iron ball detection sensor 823 (an iron ball detection mechanism, an illegal ball detection mechanism) is arranged downstream of the lifting unit 815 and capable of detecting an iron ball (illegal ball).
(3) A rectifier 820 (rectification mechanism) is provided downstream of the iron ball detection sensor 823 and capable of rectifying game balls before being shot.

According to this improved form, since the iron ball detection sensor 823 is arranged between the lifting unit 815 and the rectifier 820, it is possible to detect the iron ball at the place just before launch, and as a result, a novel game machine can be provided.
In addition, according to the present improved embodiment, since the iron ball is detected by targeting the game ball after polishing, the accuracy of the iron ball detection can be improved by the cleaned game ball.

This refinement adds the following features:
(1) Equipped with a ball clogging detection mechanism (rectifier outlet sensor, foul ball sensor, out switch) that can detect clogging of game balls.
(2) Iron ball detection error (illegal ball detection error) based on the iron ball detection mechanism (illegal ball detection mechanism) The priority of notification is higher than switch ball clogging error).

According to this improved form, since the priority of the iron ball detection error is set higher than the priority of the ball clogging error, it is possible to detect the presence of the iron balls at an early stage.

In this improved form, an iron ball detection error (illegal ball detection error) based on the iron ball detection mechanism (illegal ball detection mechanism) is an error that can be canceled by pressing an error cancellation switch (predetermined switch). According to this improved form, the iron ball detection error is an error that cannot be canceled unless the error cancellation switch is pressed, so it is regarded as an error with a higher degree of importance than the automatically canceled error. be able to.

[Sixth Improved Form: Fraud Countermeasures for Management Machines]
[Problems of the sixth improvement]
Strengthen anti-fraud measures related to the communication of managed gaming machines.

[Outline of the sixth improved form]
Fraud risk points in managed gaming machines are as follows.
(1) Between the main control board and the frame control board The main control board transmits the information on the pitched ball to the frame control board, and the frame control board transmits reception confirmation to the main control board. At this location, there is a possibility of falsification of communication commands and disguise of the main board due to the interception of the communication line.
(2) Between the frame control board and the game ball rental device connection terminal board The frame control board sends the error/ball information to the game ball rental device connection terminal board, and the game ball rental device connection terminal board Rental information is transmitted to the frame control board. At this point, there is a possibility of tampering with communication commands and disguising the gaming machine by having the communication line stolen.

FIG. 657 is a diagram showing the contents of the comparative example and the contents of the sixth improved form (this form). (A) in FIG. 657 shows the management game machine of the comparative example, and (B) in FIG. 657 shows the management game machine of the sixth improved form. It should be noted that the comparative example does not constitute prior art.
[Hardware (configuration related to hardware)]
As shown in (A) in FIG. 657 , the managed game machine 740 of the comparative example comprises a main control board 741 , a frame control board 742 , a game ball lending device connection terminal board 743 and a relay board 810 .
In the management game machine 740 of the comparative example, on the back side of the management game machine 740, three wirings 744 are connected from the main control board 741 to the relay board 810, and three wirings 745 are connected from the frame control board 742 to the relay board 810. , and as a result, the main control board 741 and the frame control board 742 are connected via the relay board 810 . The wiring includes harnesses and other communication lines.
In the management game machine 740 of the comparative example, the frame control board 742 and the game ball rental device connection terminal board 743 are connected by one wiring 746 .

As shown in FIG. 657B, the management game machine 750 of this embodiment comprises a main control board 741, a frame control board 742, a game ball lending device connection terminal board 743, and a relay board 810. FIG.
In the management game machine 750 of this embodiment, on the back side of the management game machine 740, three wirings 744 are connected from the main control board 741 to the relay board 810, and three wirings 745 are connected from the frame control board 742 to the relay board 810. , and the main control board 741 and the frame control board 742 are directly connected by the special wiring 747 without passing through the relay board 810. As a result, between the main control board 741 and the frame control board 742 , a configuration in which wiring is directly connected, and a configuration in which wiring is connected via a relay board 810 .
In the management game machine 750 of this embodiment, the frame control board 742 and the game ball lending device connection terminal board 743 are connected by one wiring 746 .

[Software (configuration related to software)]
The communication between the main control board and the frame control board in (1) of the management game machine 740 of the comparative example conforms to a predetermined specification (communication specification of the management game machine described above).
The communication between the main control board and the frame control board in (1) of the management game machine 750 of this embodiment is secured by a predetermined specification (communication specification of the management game machine described above) and unique communication using the special wiring 747. are improving.

FIG. 658 is a diagram showing specific contents of the security measures of the sixth modification.
[Countermeasure: (1) between main control board and frame control board]
(1) "Measures for communication signals" and "measures for appearance" are taken as "measures" between the main control board and the frame control board.
The “specific contents” of “communication signal countermeasures” are as follows.
The wiring used for communication is increased to two systems (the normal wiring by the wiring 744 and the wiring 745, and the special wiring 747), and the communication contents of the two systems are compared and confirmed. If there is a difference in communication contents, an error is notified.

For "adding two lines of wiring used for communication and comparing/confirming the communication contents of the two lines", for example, the following configuration can be used.
(Example 1) When sending information from the main control board 741 to the frame control board 742, whether or not the same information is sent by both wirings of two systems and the receiving side (frame control board) receives the same information or compare. If different contents are received, it can be judged as an error.
(Example 2) When information is sent from the main control board 741 to the frame control board 742, the main control board 741 sends a group of information to the special wiring 747 directly connected to the normal wiring 744 and 745 via the relay board 810. be sent separately to The frame control board 742 side adds up the information received from each wiring and recognizes the received contents. If the summation results in inconsistency, it can be determined that an error has occurred.

The “specific contents” of the “appearance measures” are as follows.
The wiring used for communication is increased to two systems, and one system is directly connected to the main control board 741 and the frame control board 742 (special wiring 747). The special wiring 747 is arranged in the foreground and has a conspicuous color (for example, a warm color such as red, orange, or yellow) so that the hanging board can be easily found. The special wiring 747 may be crimped by a connector as necessary (the connector may be deformed and fixed so as not to come off).

[Countermeasures: (2) Between the frame control board and the connection terminal board of the game ball rental device]
(2) "Appearance measures" are taken as "measures" between the frame control board and the game ball rental device connection terminal board.
The “specific contents” of the “appearance measures” are as follows.
The wire 746 is placed in the foreground and has a conspicuous color so that the hanging board can be easily found. The connector may be crimped if necessary.
As for the medalless game machine, the main control board and the frame control board (medal number control board) can be integrated to form a one-board, two-CPU configuration. This eliminates the need for a relay board and reduces wiring, thereby improving security.

[Effect of the sixth improved form]
It is possible to strengthen anti-fraud measures regarding the communication of the managed game machine.

[Seventh Improved Form: Blank Firing of Launcher]
[Problems of the seventh improvement]
To avoid leaving game balls in a shooting device (shooting means) at the end of a game.

[Outline of the seventh improvement]
In the management game machine of the seventh improved form, when the player releases the handle, it is designed to automatically perform blank beating a plurality of times (at least once, preferably twice, more preferably three times). there is

[Structure assumptions]
A game ball that passes the rectifier exit sensor is sent to the firing position (where the firing hammer hits the game ball). The shooting hammer is a member for striking and shooting a game ball placed at the shooting position, and operates by driving a shooting motor.
[Software premise (control method for the number of game balls)]
When the game ball passes through the rectifier outlet sensor, 1 is subtracted from the number of game balls being managed.

(1) When the firing conditions are no longer satisfied (when any of the following conditions (i) to (iii) are no longer satisfied), the firing operation of the firing hammer is automatically performed multiple times (for example, three times).
(i) A handle touch sensor is detected.
(ii) the handle is not in the initial position (the handle is in a twisted state);
(iii) the fire stop button on the handle has not been pressed;

(2) By the operation of (1) above, it is possible to solve the situation that "a game ball for which 1 has been subtracted from the number of game balls remains at the shooting position without being shot".

(3) The strength of the shot hammer that is automatically performed can be set to any one of the following (i) to (v).
(i) Strength of fixation to the extent that a game ball is sent (fired) to the game board surface (left area).
(ii) Strength of fixation to the extent that the game ball is sent to the game board surface (right area).
(iii) Strength of fixation to such an extent that a game ball does not reach the game board surface and returns as a foul ball.
(iv) The player's last hitting strength is stored, and the ball is hit with the same strength as the player's last hitting strength.
(v) Random Intensity.

(4) In addition, while the launching hammer is automatically launched multiple times (for example, three times), the number of winning balls is added to the number of game balls, and the ball returned as a foul ball is used as a game ball. Since there is a possibility that the processing to add to the number may occur, (a) a configuration that prevents the IC card from being returned may be adopted (e.g., the card return operation will not be effective for a predetermined period of time after the firing conditions are no longer met). (b) The notification that the shot is still being performed may be made by any of the display of the liquid crystal display, the lighting of the LED, or the sound of the speaker.

[Effect of the seventh improved form]
To avoid game balls remaining in a shooting device at the end of a game.

1 pachinko machine 8 game board unit 8a game area 20 starting gate 28 variable starting winning device 33 normal symbol display device 33a normal symbol working memory lamp 34 first special symbol display device 35 second special symbol display device 34a first special symbol working memory Lamp 35a Second special symbol operation memory lamp 38 Game state display device 42 Liquid crystal display 45 Effect switching button 70 Main control device 72 Main control CPU
74 ROMs
76 RAM
124 effect control device 126 effect control CPU
500 Management machine 9800 Medalless machine

Claims (1)

An enclosed type gaming machine in which game balls circulate within the gaming machine,
a launching means capable of shooting game balls into the game area;
storage means for storing the number of game balls;
a foul ball detection means for detecting a foul ball which is a game ball that has been shot by the shooting means but returned without reaching the game area;
When a foul ball is detected by the foul ball detection means and the first condition is satisfied, the number of game balls is added, and a foul ball is detected by the foul ball detection means. a control means that does not add the number of game balls when the second condition is satisfied ,
The first condition is
A condition that is established when predetermined information updated by detection of a signal related to the launch of a game ball is equal to or greater than a predetermined value,
The second condition is
A condition that is established when the predetermined information is not equal to or greater than the predetermined value,
The predetermined information is
A game machine characterized by information that is added before shooting a game ball and subtracted after it is determined that the first condition is satisfied.

Images